ALSPA MV3000e

Drive Range

Publication No. T1679EN Rev. 0005 (06/06)

Software Manual
 ALSPA MV3000e

Acknowledgements

MODBUS™ is a trademark of Groupe Schneider.

SKiiP® is a trademark of SEMIKRON INTERNATIONAL Dr Fritz Martin GMBH & Co. KG

CHANGES FROM PREVIOUS EDITION

Previous editions: Rev. 0002 (08/01) Internal issue only.
Rev. 0003 (06/06) Revisions and corrections with new data included and
parameters and menus for Version 6.00 Firmware added.
Rev. 0004 (10/03) Revisions and corrections with new data included and
parameters and menus for Versions 7.00, 8.00, 9.00
and10.00 Firmware added. Sections 10, 11, 12 and 13
added.
This Edition Rev. 0005 (03/06) Revisions and corrections with new data included and
parameters and menus for Versions 11.01, 11.60, 11.73,
11.86, 11.94 and 12.00 Firmware added; these additions
include Menus 47, 54, 55 and 56.
Sections 11 and 12 – ‘Commissioning’ removed.

Publication No. T1679EN Rev. 0005 (06/06)

ALSPA MV3000e Safety

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Care has been taken with the design of this product to ensure that it is safe. However, in common with all
products of this type, misuse can result in injury or death. Therefore, it is very important that the
instructions in this manual and on the product are observed during transportation, commissioning,
operation, maintenance and disposal.

This technical manual must be regarded as part of the product. It should be stored with the product and
must be passed on to any subsequent owner or user.

Local safety laws and regulations must always be observed.

Persons working on the product must be suitably skilled and should have been trained in that work for
these products.

The product is a component designed for incorporation in installations, apparatus and machines.

The product must not be used as a single item safety system. In applications where maloperation of the
product could cause danger, additional means must be used to prevent danger to persons.

Product approvals and certifications will be invalidated if the product is transported, used or stored outside
its ratings or if the instructions in this manual are not observed.

Third party approvals to safety standards UL 508C and CSA C22.2 No 14 are marked on the product.

In the European Union:

• Products within the scope of the Low Voltage Directive, 73/23/EEC as amended are CE marked.
• The product complies with the essential protection requirements of the EMC directive 89/336/EEC as
amended, when installed and used as described in this manual. The requirements of the EMC Directive
should be established before any installation, apparatus or machine that incorporates the product is
taken into service.
• A machine must not be taken into service until the machine has been declared in conformity with the
provisions of the Machinery (Safety) Directive, 98/37/EEC.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page i

Documentation Structure ALSPA MV3000e

THIS MANUAL DRIVE OPTIONAL

(T1679EN) STAGES OF USE MANUALS

PLANNING
&
DRIVE SELECTION

DELTA DRIVE?
OPTIONAL EXTRAS?
DELTA MANUAL
(T1689)

OPTION MANUALS

EVERY OPTION HAS

INDIVIDUAL
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

DELTA MANUAL
(T1689)
INSTALLATION OF
MODULAR DRIVES

COMMISSIONING
FLOW CHARTS

DETAILED
DESCRIPTION OF
DRIVE PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING
FOR FINAL
USEFUL APPLICATION APPLICATION
PROGRAMMING SOLUTIONS
EXAMPLES

DETAILED MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTIC AND
INFORMATION DIAGNOSTICS

SPARES
&
DISPOSAL

Page ii ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06

ALSPA MV3000e Overview

OVERVIEW
Section Page
1. Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 1-1
Introduces the Software Technical Manual and the ALSPA MV3000E drive unit.
2. Use of the Drive Data Manager™ ........................................................................................ 2-1
Describes the Drive Data Manager™, and explains how to use it to navigate menus and edit
parameters.
3. Parameter Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-1
Introduces menus and parameters, describes the menu structure and provides a listing of all
menus. Explains how to use passwords and how to access all menus. Shows how to return to
the factory default settings.
4. The Default Drive .................................................................................................................. 4-1
Describes the default drive, as configured by the manufacturer, including input/ output
connections and control functions. Explains the purpose of Menu 1, shows default values for
parameters and explains parameter attributes.
5. Parameter Listing .................................................................................................................. 5-1
For easy reference provides tables of all parameters, grouped in order of Menu. For each
parameter, the default value, range of values and attributes are shown. Tables of Control and
Status Flags are included. All parameters are cross-referred to the associated description at
Section 6.
6. Parameter Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 6-1
Gives a comprehensive description of all parameters, control and status flags, showing the
permitted range of values where appropriate.
Explains how to set up the drive for more advanced applications, using the Control Block
Diagrams supplied.
7. Control Block Diagrams........................................................................................................ 7-1
Provides diagrams that graphically represent the drive's parameters. Explains how to use
these diagrams to design customised applications.
8. Serial Communications........................................................................................................ 8-1
Explains methods of serial link communication with a drive, including input via the RS232C
and RS485 ports, and a description of several protocols. Provides a description of all drive
parameters required for configuration of a serial link.
9. Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................... 9-1
Shows what to do if the drive displays a WARNING or if it TRIPS. Shows how to display
Warning and Trip codes, and provides a complete code listing.
Provides diagnostic hints to help find possible faults, explains how to reset a drive and how to
view a history of any previous incidents which may help with diagnosis.
10. Application Notes ............................................................................................................... 10-1
11. Software History .................................................................................................................. 11-1
12 Abbreviations & Acronyms ................................................................................................ 12-1
Indexes ……………………………………………………………………………… ............................ Index 1

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page iii
Sectional Contents List ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page iv ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06

ALSPA MV3000e Sectional Contents List

SECTIONAL CONTENTS LIST

This Contents List includes all the sectional titles. Each section includes a
separate Contents List detailing headings within that section down to the
third level.

Section Page

1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................1-1
2 Use of the Data Drive Manager™ .........................................................................................2-1
3 Parameter Overview...............................................................................................................3-1
4 The Default Drive....................................................................................................................4-1
5 Parameter Listing...................................................................................................................5-1
6 Parameter Descriptions.........................................................................................................6-1
7 Control Block Diagrams ........................................................................................................7-1
8 Serial Communications .........................................................................................................8-1
9 Diagnostics.............................................................................................................................9-1
10 Application Notes……………………………… ...................... ………………………...………10-1
11 Software History...................................................................................................................11-1
12 Abbreviations & Acronyms .................................................................................................12-1
INDEXES ..........................................................................................................................................Index 1

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page v

Sectional Contents List ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page vi ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06

ALSPA MV3000e 1. Introduction.

1 Introduction.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Page

1.1 About this Manual .......................................................................................................................... 1-3

1.1.1 Finding Data in the Manual .................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 About the ALSPA MV3000e Drive Unit ......................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 About the ALSPA MV3000e Product in Sinusoidal Front End (SFE) Mode.................................. 1-4
1.3.1 The Range of MicroCubicles™ identified by Letter ‘J’ in their Product Code ........................ 1-4
1.3.2 The ALSPA MV DELTA product used as a Sinusoidal Front End (SFE)............................... 1-4
1.4 Control Interface ............................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.5 Customer Support and Training .................................................................................................... 1-5
1.6 Associated Publications................................................................................................................. 1-5

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 1-1
1. Introduction. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 1-2 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 1. Introduction.

1.1 About this Manual

This Software Technical Manual provides a competent user trained in the ALSPA MV3000e
drive system with a detailed description of the drive parameters available with Version 12.00
Firmware. These parameters enable a drive to be fully configured for any specific
application. The manual includes a full description of several serial communication
protocols that may be used to allow remote control of the drive.
This manual covers the complete range of ALSPA MV3000e drives, including Basic Drive
Modules (MicroCubicles™), air-cooled and liquid-cooled DELTA drives. The range of drives
includes all modes of operation as outlined at 1.1.1.
This T1679 manual should be regarded as part of the ALSPA MV3000e drive unit. It should be
retained for the life of the drive and passed on to any subsequent owner or user.
1.1.1 Finding Data in the Manual
Section 7 of the manual includes a set of Control Block Diagrams for all modes of operation
and these provide a starting point when defining parameters for a particular application. The
diagrams graphically represent a drive’s parameters. It is suggested that they are referred
to before any work is done to specify parameters. The modes of operation detailed at the
Control Block Diagrams are:
• Variable Voltage Variable Frequency (VVVF;
• Vector with Encoder;
• Vector without Encoder;
• Scalar;
• Active Energy Management (AEM)/Sinusoidal Front End (SFE).
Section 3 introduces menus and parameters and explains their structure and relationships.
Section 5 includes tables of all the parameters, grouped in order of menu, and includes
parameter:
• function;
• default value;
• range of values;
• attributes (indicating security level/type);
• useful comments.
Section 6 includes a comprehensive description of all the parameters. These are presented
in ascending order of Menu number. Refer to the sectional contents list and the subject and
parameter indexes for assistance in finding a particular parameter or any of its associated
data.
Section 4 describes the Default drives, as configured by Converteam, including input/output
connections and control functions. The purpose of Menu 1, which shows parameter default
values, control functions and attributes, is also explained.
Section 2 describes the Drive Data ManagerTM (Keypad) that enables communication with a
drive. Guidance is included to show how it can be used to navigate menus and enter, list
and edit parameters.
Section 8 explains methods of serial link communication with a drive, including that via
RS232C and RS485 ports, and includes a description of several communication protocols.
A description of all the drive parameters required for configuration of a serial link is included.
Section 9 includes diagnostic details for a drive including what to do if the drive displays a
WARNING or a TRIP. Fault indicators, warnings and trips are all discussed with helpful
hints and recommended procedures for remedial action.
Installation and commissioning instructions are provided in the Getting Started Manuals
T1676 and T2002 and the DELTA manual T1689 (see 1.6 for more details).
Three indexes are included at the back of the manual; a general subject index, an index of menu
and parameter titles and a numerical index of all the parameter numbers.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 1-3
1. Introduction. ALSPA MV3000e

1.2 About the ALSPA MV3000e Drive Unit

The ALSPA MV3000e range of variable speed AC
drives provides powerful features at an economical
price. At the standard level, ALSPA MV3000e is a
simple to use inverter for general-purpose
applications for ratings from 22 kW to 5.8 MW.
At a higher level, open up the parameter menus; add
Fieldbus communications, hardware expansion and
programming enhancement facilities, and the power
of ALSPA MV3000e comes alive. Add to this universal
control strategies such as frequency control, closed
loop flux vector control and encoderless flux vector
control, and ALSPA MV3000e easily manages a vast
spectrum of industrial applications. A typical ALSPA
MV3000e drive unit is shown at Figure 1-1 with the
optional Drive Data Manager™ fitted.
In Sinusoidal Front End (SFE) applications an ALSPA
MV3000e Bi-directional Converter is configured to
connect between mains and a DC Link – the DC Link
will typically be connected to one or more Machine
Bridges. The SFE is able to control current flow into
and out of the mains in order to maintain a constant
DC Link voltage, and as such, allows 4-quadrant
operation of the Machine Bridge.

Figure 1-1 General view of a

typical ALSPA MV3000e drive unit

1.3 About the ALSPA MV3000e Product in Sinusoidal Front End (SFE) Mode
There are two types of ALSPA MV3000e product that support operation in SFE mode,
namely:
(a) a range of MicroCubicles™ identified by the letter ‘J’ in their product code;
(b) the ALSPA DELTA product.
Note:
In both cases, additional auxiliary circuitry is required to achieve SFE functionality.
1.3.1 The Range of MicroCubicles™ identified by Letter ‘J’ in their Product Code
This range is fitted with internal hardware that allows them to monitor and synchronise to the
mains to which they are connected. When connected to further external auxiliary hardware,
they can operate in SFE mode. The ‘J’ code product does not include a power rectifier
circuit. The ‘J’ product is intended for use either as an SFE or a Machine Bridge. A typical
application would include two identical ‘J’ products connected at their DC terminals, one
used as an SFE, and the other as a Machine Bridge.
Note:
Standard ALSPA MV3000e MicroCubicles™ cannot be used in SFE mode, but can be used as a
Machine Bridge.
1.3.2 The ALSPA MV DELTA product used as a Sinusoidal Front End (SFE)
A dedicated mains monitoring unit can be plugged into a standard ALSPA MVDELTA
controller to provide the control function, whilst 1-6 standard ALSPA MVDELTA transistor
modules can be used to form a power circuit, along with other auxiliary components.

Page 1-4 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 1. Introduction.

1.4 Control Interface

The ALSPA MV3000e drive may be controlled by means of an optional Drive Data
Manager™ (which provides Keypad functionality), by local controls or via a serial link.

1.5 Customer Support and Training

Converteam provides comprehensive telephone technical support, application planning,
service and customer training.
Contact Converteam at the appropriate customer support telephone number shown at the
end of this manual.

1.6 Associated Publications

Converteam Publications associated with this Software Manual are now listed.

T1676 ALSPA MV3000e Getting Started Manual for AC-fed Drives

This Manual provides a competent user, trained in electrical installation practice,

with sufficient information to safely install, commission, operate, maintain and
dispose of a simple AC-fed drive installation.

T2002 ALSPA MV3000e Getting Started Manual for Active Energy Management
Drives

This manual provides a competent user, trained in electrical installation practice,

with sufficient information to safely install, commission, operate, maintain and
dispose of simple Active Energy Management (AEM) systems based on the
ALSPA MV3000e series of bi-directional converters.

T1689 ALSPA MV DELTA, Supplementary Technical Manual to T1641, for MV3000e

This manual includes specifications and instructions to allow a competent user

trained in drives to safely install the components of ALSPA MV3000e DELTA
systems to construct DELTA drive units.
DELTA drives are a unique system of modular based drive units, 150 kW to 2.2
MW in air-cooled versions, 600 kW to 5.8 MW in liquid cooled versions.

T1692 ALSPA Drive Coach MVS3004-4001 User’s Guide

This manual describes the Converteam ALSPA Drive Coach software for use
with Windows 3.1, 95/98 and for Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000 and XP. The
manual includes a CD-ROM that contains all the software for the product and
information for installation, configuration and maintenance of the software.

T2013 ALSPA MV3000e CANopen Fieldbus Facility Technical Manual for ALSPA
MV3000e Drives

This manual describes the use of CANopen* with ALSPA MV3000e Drives.
There are two methods of use namely to provide additional I/O for the drive –
both analogue and digital – and to provide communication between drives in a
production cell or functional group.
Note:
* CANopen is a networking system based on the CAN serial bus.

T1684 ALSPA MV3000e Dynamic Braking Units MV3DB Series Technical Manual

This manual provides a competent user, trained in electrical installation practice,

with sufficient information to safely install, commission, maintain and dispose of
an ALSPA MV3000e Dynamic Braking Unit.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 1-5
1. Introduction. ALSPA MV3000e

T1686 ALSPA Direct FIP MVS3002-4001 and MVS3002-4002

This manual provides a competent user, trained in electrical installation practice,

with sufficient information to safely install, commission, maintain and dispose of
ALSPA Direct FIP printed circuit boards.

T1694 ALSPA PROFIBUS Field Bus Couplers MVS3007-4001 & MVS3007-4002

This manual provides a competent user, trained in electrical installation practice,

with sufficient information to safely install, commission, maintain and dispose of
ALSPA PROFIBUS Field Bus Couplers.

T2017 ALSPA MV3000e DeviceNet Fieldbus Facility

This manual explains how to configure the drive in software to communicate with
other devices on a DeviceNet bus.

T2034 ALSPA MV3000e Ethernet Interface Technical Manual

This manual provides a competent user, trained in electrical installation practice,

with sufficient information to safely install, commission, maintain and dispose of
ALSPA MV3000e Ethernet Interface printed circuit boards.
T1968 ALSPA MV3000 2nd CANPort 'CANopen & DeviceNet' Fieldbus Facility
Technical Manual
This manual describes the use of CANopen and DeviceNet protocols with an
optional 2nd CANPort module that can be fitted to ALSPA MV3000e Drives.

Page 1-6 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 2. Use of the Drive Data Manager™.

2 Use of the Drive Data Manager™.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Page

2.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 2-3

2.2 Drive Data Manager™ Functions .................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.1 Navigation Key ....................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.2 Navigating Menus and Parameters ........................................................................................ 2-4
2.2.3 Editing Parameters................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.2.4 SHORTCUT Method of Entering a Parameter Number ......................................................... 2-6
2.2.5 Removal of the Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad)................................................................... 2-6
2.3 Recalling a Parameter Set from a Drive Data Manager™ ............................................................ 2-7

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 2-1
2. Use of the Drive Data Manager™. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 2-2 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue (06/06)
ALSPA MV3000e 2. Use of the Drive Data Manager™.

2.1 Introduction
The Drive Data Manager™ is a multi-purpose unit that provides Keypad functions and a 4-
line, 20-digit display to allow drive configuration. The Drive Data Manager™ includes four
LEDs that show the status of the drive, and it also incorporates four special keys that give
stop/start and speed control of a motor. A fifth special key can summon help about
parameters, warnings and trips.
This section shows how to use the Drive Data Manager™ to navigate menus and
parameters.

2.2 Drive Data Manager™ Functions

Figure 2-1 shows the Drive Data Manager™ and describes the functions of indicators and
keys.

KEYPAD FUN CTION S

4-line, 20-digit
RUNN IN G led
Display
(Green)

HEALTHY WARN IN G led

(STAN DBY) led (Yellow)
(Green)

TRIPPED led
RAISE and LOWER (Red)
keys, used to Raise
and Lower motor
speed, when Keypad * RUN key. Press to start
Reference is selected. the motor in Keypad
(P5.01 → P5.04) Control.

ESC key, used whilst

Editing andNavigating .
* STOP key. Press to stop
the motor in Keypad
Control.

N AVIGATION key, used

to Navigate around the
Drive Menus and EN TER key. Press to
Parameters. Also used Enter a menu or Enter
for Editing. (Load) an edit.

Alpha/ N umeric keys, HELP key. Press to get

used whilst Editing or Short Diagnostic Help in case
Cutting parameters. of a Trip or Warning, or
to get Help about any
drive parameter.
Keypad Control is selected via Digital Input 4, which See examples of Help
* in turn operates Control Flag 116 – see Control key use in Sect. 4.4 and
Block Diagrams. Diagnostic Help in
Sect. 7.

NAVIGATION EDITING

Go to Menu level Increment Value

Decrement Menu Increment Menu Move Cursor Left

Move Cursor Right
or Parameter no. or Parameter no. (Delete/Backspace)

Go to Parameter level Decrement Value

Figure 2-1 Drive Data Manager™ Indicators and Controls

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 2-3
2. Use of the Drive Data Manager™. ALSPA MV3000e

2.2.1 Navigation Key

The 4-way Navigation key is used to navigate menus and parameters, and to edit parameter
values. Operation of the Navigation key is shown at Figure 2-1.
2.2.2 Navigating Menus and Parameters
Figure 2-2 shows how to navigate the menus and parameters to find any parameter. Menu 1
and its parameters are illustrated as an example. Other menus are treated in exactly the
same way. To access menus other than Menu 1, edit parameter P1.31 as shown at 3.2.2.
The start-up screen displayed when the drive is first switched on is shown as shaded, this
shows the default value for P1.00.

Keypad Removal Screen

1. REMOVAL CHECK
(Parameter P35.01 can be
2. RETURN TO PARAMS.
editited to allow
removal)

ESC

ESC from any menu to Menu 1

MENU LEVEL

99 : Config. 1 : User Config.

Menus 2 to 99
(Last Menu) Edit P1.31 to access
other menus

ESC from
ANY MENU 1 PARAMETER
to the Menu 1 screen
PARAMETER LEVEL

P1.32 P1.00
Speed Reference Parameters
( Last Parameter in =0.00 % Top Speed P1.01 to P1.32
Menu 1)

START-UP
SCREEN

Figure 2-2 Navigating Menus and Parameters

2.2.3 Editing Parameters

Two types of parameter may be edited:
NUMERICAL parameters – to change the value
LIST parameters – to choose from a list
The factory default settings can be regained if desired - see 3.2.4.

Page 2-4 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue (06/06)
ALSPA MV3000e 2. Use of the Drive Data Manager™.

NUMERICAL Parameter
As an example of editing numerical parameters, Figure 2-3 shows how to edit the value of
the Motor Base Frequency parameter P2.00.

Original value New value

P2.00 P2.00
PARAMETER Motor Base Freq. Motor Base Freq.
LEVEL =50.0 Hz =100.0 Hz

EDIT Mode

P2.00
ESC Motor Base Freq.
=50.0
NEW=_

Use HELP
or Enter new data
ABC
1 + O + O

P2.00
ESC Motor Base Freq.
=50.0
NEW=100_

ESC (Accept new value)

?
from any
HELP screen

Previous Next Previous Next

P2.00 P2.00 P2.00
Motor Base Freq. Motor Base Freq. Motor Base Freq.
=50.0 Hz HELP =50.0 Hz HELP =50.0 Hz
screens screens
?MAX=200.0 MIN=5.0 ?Def 50.0 Hz ?Information Ends

(Shows Limits) (Shows Parameter Attributes)

Figure 2-3 Editing a Numerical Parameter

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 2-5
2. Use of the Drive Data Manager™. ALSPA MV3000e

LIST Parameter
This type of parameter contains a list of sources, items, etc. Figure 2-4 shows how to select
from a list parameter, using the Speed Reference 1 Source parameter P5.01 as an example.

Original source New source

P5.01 P5.01
PARAMETER Speed Ref. 1 Src Speed Ref. 1 Src
LEVEL =1 =3
Keypad Reference Analog Ref. 2

OR
ESC Go to
HELP
Enter new
+ GHI
3
*
value

If drive is tripped, P5.01

see Sect. 9 Speed Ref. 1 Src
=1
NEW=3

* Choose from lists in

Control Block Diagrams
ESC ? Accept new value (Sect. 7)
or use HELP
from any HELP screen

? ?
Previous Next Previous Next
P5.01 P5.01 P5.01
OR OR
Speed Ref. 1 Src Speed Ref. 1 Src Speed Ref. 1 Src
etc.
=1 =1 =1
?MAX=22 MIN=1 HELP ?1=Keypad Reference HELP ?2=Analog Ref. 1
screens screens

To selelect any option, simply press

Default
Attributes Information ends
source

Figure 2-4 Editing a "List" parameter

2.2.4 SHORTCUT Method of Entering a Parameter Number

If the parameter number is known, it can be entered directly using a shortcut method. Press
the relevant alphanumeric keys to enter the desired Parameter Number, including the letter
P and the decimal point. For example enter P5.01 to select the Speed Ref. 1 Source
parameter previously referred to.
2.2.5 Removal of the Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad)
To allow the drive to make the necessary safety checks, this removal procedure should
always be followed. A trip may result if this procedure is not followed. The drive checks if
Keypad removal is allowed as the Keypad may have Start/Stop control, or the Keypad
Speed Reference may be active.
To remove the Keypad, continue as shown at Table 2-1.

Page 2-6 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue (06/06)
ALSPA MV3000e 2. Use of the Drive Data Manager™.

Table 2-1 How to remove the Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad)

Do What? How?
1 Ensure the Keypad is neither in control of AT DEFAULT:
the Start/Stop nor the Keypad Speed Simply close DIGIN4 - this will select
Reference is active Remote.
ELSE:
Gain the necessary
authorisation before continuing.
a) Make P4.09 = 1, to set CF116 ON, this
removes the Start/Stop Control from the
Keypad.

b) The Keypad must not be either the active

reference source or the backup reference
source. The reference sources are held in
P5.01 to P5.05 and are made active by
CF4 to CF7 (P5.07 to P5.10) respectively.

2 Access the Keypad removal screen Press the “esc” key repeatedly.
1. REMOVAL CHECK
2. RETURN TO PARAMS.

3 Select “REMOVAL CHECK” Press the “1” key on the Keypad

The drive checks to see if the Keypad is allowed

to be removed. As well as the above control and
reference checks, P35.01 (Allow Keypad
Removal) is also checked.

4 Remove Keypad if the screen allows: A message may be flashed disallowing removal
because the Keypad is either still in control, still
****KEYPAD READY**** has active/backup reference (see step 1 above)
or if it is simply disallowed (see step 3 above).
****FOR REMOVAL****

2.3 Recalling a Parameter Set from a Drive Data Manager™

The ALSPA MV3000e MicroCubicle™ and the ALSPA MV3000e DELTA AC Drives
incorporate a feature to enable the transfer of parameters from one drive to another via the
ALSPA Drive Data Manager™ (where the Parameter Set can be saved). This feature is
invoked via Parameter P99.16 – Backup Parameter – see 6.57.11.
Recalling a Parameter Set from one drive to another is a very powerful and useful feature.
However, care must be taken to ensure that an incorrect Parameter Set in the target drive
does not result from copying the Parameter Set from an inappropriately configured drive,
particularly from a drive of different rating from the source drive. It is therefore
recommended that reference be made to the additional guidance at ‘Notes for Recalling a
Parameter Set from the Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad)’ at 6.57.11.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 2-7
2. Use of the Drive Data Manager™. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 2-8 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue (06/06)
ALSPA MV3000e 3. Parameter Overview.

3 Parameter Overview.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Page

3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 3-3

3.2 Menus and Parameters ................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Access to Other Menus (P1.31) ............................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.3 Security Passwords................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.4 Returning to Factory Default Settings .................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.5 Complete Menu Listing........................................................................................................... 3-4

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 3-1
3. Parameter Overview. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 3-2 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue (06/06)
ALSPA MV3000e 3. Parameter Overview.

3.1 Introduction
The ALSPA MV3000e is controlled by means of parameters that are conveniently grouped
into menus to form a Menu Structure.

3.2 Menus and Parameters

3.2.1 Parameters
The ALSPA MV3000e software uses system constants, scaling factors and other data
(collectively referred to as PARAMETERS) arranged into MENUS for ease of use. Menus
group parameters by like function e.g. Menu 6 is Ramp Settings. The complete menu listing
is shown at Table 3-1.
Every parameter has a unique Parameter Number comprising a designator (prefix) P,
followed by the menu number and the number of the parameter, separated by a decimal
point. For example the MOTOR FULL LOAD CURRENT parameter in Menu 2 has the
Parameter Number P2.02 - see below.

P2.02
Parameter Menu 2 Parameter 02
designator

3.2.2 Access to Other Menus (P1.31)

As shipped, only Menu 1 is accessible. Access to other menus is controlled by the value
entered into parameter P1.31 that determines the menus that can be displayed by the
Keypad. Three levels of access are provided:
P1.31 value Access level
0 Show Menu 1 only (by default, only Menu 1 is shown)
1 As specified by Menu 98 (user chooses the menus to be open)
2 All menus open
Access to P1.31 is controlled by passwords.
3.2.3 Security Passwords
To prevent inadvertent or unauthorised access to parameters, Converteam provides two
levels of security. They are known as Operator and Engineer levels, and each is accessed
by a password (4-digit code) that can be entered to allow an authorised operator or engineer
to change parameter values. These codes are numbers set in parameters P99.07 (operator
security code) and P99.08 (engineer security code).
When editing is completed entering a value, other than the operator or engineer codes, in
P99.06, locks the parameters.
At default, the operator and engineer passwords are both open.
The parameters concerned with the editing and use of security passwords are described at
6.57.7.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 3-3
3. Parameter Overview. ALSPA MV3000e

3.2.4 Returning to Factory Default Settings

CAUTION
When the product is reset to factory default, all customised parameter settings will be
lost. Record customised parameter settings before the drive is reset. They can be re-
entered when required.
Record the settings in "Edit Review Mode" i.e. set P35.03 = 1.
If incorrect data is entered during commissioning, the factory default settings can be
regained using the following procedure:
1. Set parameter P1.31 = 2.
2. Navigate to P35.03 and edit its value to 1, to set up a review of edits.
3. Press to scroll through the current user edits; note these values.
4. When P35.03 re-appears all user edits have been displayed. Change P35.03 back to
0.
5. Navigate to P99.06 (see 6.62.7) and enter the password for engineer access.
6. Set P99.17 = 1 and press
The drive will now be at default settings.
3.2.5 Complete Menu Listing
A complete list of menus is shown at Table 3-1.
Notes: For Table 3-1
1. *
These menus are described in associated product documentation – Menus 59, 60, 61 and 62 are
described in the CANopen product manual; Menus 58, 65, 66 and 67 are described in the 2nd CAN
Port Manual; Menu 63 is described in the DeviceNet manual; Menus 74 and 75 are described in
the PROFIBUS Manual; Menu 78 is described in the MicroPEC™ Instruction Sheet; Menus 80, 83,
84, 85 and 89 are described in documentation supplied with FIP Fieldbus cards.
2. Menus 50, 51, 52, 53 and 56 are specific to the SFE and are listed at Sections 4, 5 and 6.
3. In SFE Mode, only the shaded menus are visible.

Page 3-4 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue (06/06)
ALSPA MV3000e 3. Parameter Overview.

Table 3-1 Menu Listing

Menu Description Menu Description

1 User configured menu 41 Programmable status word settings
2 Basic motor settings 42 Pointer source settings
3 Frequency control settings 43 Load fault detection window settings
4 Start and stop control 44 Reference shaper settings
5 Speed reference settings 45 Temperature
6 Ramp settings 46 Ridethrough Menu
7 Plant I/O settings 47 Second Logic Menu
8 Torque limit settings 50 Basic SFE Setup
9 Basic drive monitoring 51 SFE Monitoring
10 Trips and warnings 52 Advanced SFE Setup
11 Advanced drive monitoring 53 SFE Reference Setup
12 Motor advanced settings (vector only) 54 Mains Monitor Menu
13 Speed feedback settings (vector only) 55 Machine Bridge Control Menu
14 Speed loop settings (vector only) 56 AC Voltage Control Menu
15 Torque reference settings (vector only) 58* CANopen Extended I/O settings Can Port 2
16 PID controller settings 59* CANopen Extended I/O settings CAN Port 1
17 Reference sequencer settings 60* CANopen Scaling Parameters
18 Motorised potentiometer settings 61* CDC CAN Port
19 Trim reference settings 62* CDC CANopen
20 High speed digital I/O settings 63* CDC DeviceNet
21 Fixed reference settings 65* CAN Port 2
22 Skip speed settings 66* CAN 2 CANopen
23 Dynamic brake control settings 67* CAN 2 DeviceNet
24 Speed trim settings 70-72 Application Code Developer
25 Inertia compensation settings 74 PROFIBUS Fieldbus Coupler
26 History log settings 75* PROFIBUS Fieldbus Coupler
27 History log playback settings 78* MicroPEC™
28 Auto-reset settings 76 Reserved
29 Speed and torque monitor settings 77 Reserved
30 Logic block settings 80* Fieldbus - Configuration and status data
31 Status Flag generator settings 83* Fieldbus - Fast produced VCOMs
32 Serial links settings 84* Fieldbus - Fast consumed VCOMs
33 Control Flag 0 to 99 source settings 85* Fieldbus - Slow VCOMs and FIP refs.
34 Control Flag 100 to 127 source settings 86 Ethernet interface Menu
35 Miscellaneous features 89* Fieldbus - Data spy module
36 Position controller settings (encoder only) 90 Manufacturer's Menu
37 Position reference settings (encoder only) 91 Fast Analog Output
38 Position controller monitor (encoder only) 98 Menu enable selection settings
39 Menu 1 Setup Menu 99 Configuration settings
40 Summing nodes settings

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 3-5
3. Parameter Overview. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 3-6 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue (06/06)
ALSPA MV3000e 4. The Default Drive.

4 The Default Drive.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Page

4.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 4-3

4.1.1 Default I/O Connections and Set-up for the Drive.................................................................. 4-3
4.2 Parameter Security Attributes........................................................................................................ 4-4
4.3 Menu 1 - Default Parameters for a Drive....................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.1 Menu 1 - Default Parameters for a Standard AC-fed or Machine Bridge Drive ..................... 4-4
4.3.2 Menu 1 - Default Parameters for a Basic Sinusoidal Front End (SFE) Application ............... 4-6

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 4-1
4. The Default Drive. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 4-2 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 4. The Default Drive.

4.1 Introduction
The drive may be operated as a simple frequency control drive using the default
configuration of Menu 1. In this configuration all other menus that give access to the
advanced features, including vector control are "invisible". To gain access to the other
menus P1.31 in Menu 1 must be set to 2.
A drive may also be used in Sinusoidal Front End (SFE) applications for which the default
configuration of Menu 1 is included.
4.1.1 Default I/O Connections and Set-up for the Drive
Control and Reference of the drive can be either from the Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad),
or via the I/O terminal blocks TB1 to TB6 at default (TB4 or TB4A and TB4B).
Refer to the Wiring Diagram in the appropriate ALSPA MV3000e Getting Started or
MVDELTA Manual (see 1.6). The default drive configuration defined in Menu 1 requires the
following I/O connections to be made:
Digital Input Functions.
Analogue Input Functions.
Digital Output Functions.
Analogue Output Functions and Modes.
Each of these connection requirements is now described for all operating modes.
Note:
The "default" values listed for "J" drives (AEM Machine Bridge or SFE Mains Bridge) are AFTER the
mode of operation has been selected. The operation mode is selected by P99.01 (see 6.57.2).
Digital Input Functions
The Digital Input Function connections to be made for the different operating modes are
described at Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Digital Input Functions

Termination Standard AEM SFE

and Function AC Fed Drives Machine Bridge Mains Bridge
DIGIN 1 Remote STOP (+24 V to allow RUN)
DIGIN 2 Remote RUN
DIGIN 3 Direction (+24 V = Reverse) RUN PERMIT
DIGIN 4 Control and Reference source (0 V for Keypad, 24 V for Remote)
DIGIN 5 Analogue Reference Select -
(0 V = Ref1; +24 V = Ref2)
DIGIN 6 Trip Reset (+24 V = Reset)
INTERLOCK Hardware drive inhibit (non programmable function).
(Must be connected to +24 V to run the drive)

Notes to Table 4-1:

1. The drive's default direction control mode is set by the polarity of the applied reference. The
direction can also be reversed if DIGIN 3 is set to +24 V.
2. Trips may also be reset using the Keypad.
Analogue Input Modes
The Analogue Input Mode connections to be made for the different operating modes are
described at Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Analogue Input Modes

Termination Standard AEM SFE

and Function AC Fed Drives Machine Bridge Mains Bridge
REF 1 ±0 - 10V ±0 - 10V ±0 - 10V
REF 2 ±4 - 20mA ±4 - 20mA Fast Load Power
Feedforward Input

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 4-3
4. The Default Drive. ALSPA MV3000e

Digital Output Functions

The Digital Output Function connections to be made for the different operating modes are
described at Table 4-3.
Table 4-3 Digital Output Functions

Termination Standard AEM SFE

and Function AC Fed Drives Machine Bridge Mains Bridge
Digital Output 1 HEALTHY/STANDBY HEALTHY HEALTHY
(Not Tripped)
Digital Output 2 OUTPUT RUNNING RUNNING SFE RUNNING
(Drive enabled)
Digital Output 3 AT SPEED AT SPEED AT VOLTS

Analogue Output Functions and Modes

The Analogue Output Function and Mode connections to be made for the different operating
modes are described at Table 4-4.
Table 4-4 Analogue Output Functions and Modes

Termination and Standard AEM SFE

Function AC Fed Drives Machine Bridge Mains Bridge
Analogue Output 1 0 - 10 V represents 0 - 10 V represents -
0 - 100 % Speed 0 – 100 % Speed
Analogue Output 2 0 - 10 V represents 0 - 10 V represents -
0 - 150% Full Load 0 - 150% Full Load
Current Current *

Note:
* During commissioning this value will be changed from its default to provide the Load Power
Feedforward signal shown at the relevant wiring diagram in the T2002 Getting Started Manual (for
AEM Drives).

4.2 Parameter Security Attributes

All parameters have attributes that specify how they may be accessed. Attributes are
determined by the parameter function, e.g. security level password requirement, or the type
of parameter, e.g. a List. The attributes are shown at Table 4-5 and now described.
Attribute Security Level/Type
C Confirm Edit – ‘Enter to confirm’, ‘Esc to abort’
E Engineer accessible - only accessible if the engineering password
(P99.08) has been entered in P99.06
L List parameter, value selected from a pre-defined list
N (eNter) has to be pressed to update
O Operator Accessible - only accessible if the operator password
(P99.07) has been entered in P99.06
R Read only (monitoring parameters)
S Stop to edit. The parameter cannot be edited unless the drive is stopped.

4.3 Menu 1 - Default Parameters for a Drive

4.3.1 Menu 1 - Default Parameters for a Standard AC-fed or Machine Bridge Drive
Menu 1 provides an operator with the drive controls required for day-to-day operation of the
drive. The default settings for this menu provide the controls for a simple frequency control
drive with local Stop/Start logic as shown at Table 4-5.
An operator can choose alternative parameters for Menu 1; this facility is configured by the
settings in Menu 39 (see 6.39).

Page 4-4 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 4. The Default Drive.

Table 4-5 lists the default contents of Menu 1. It also shows where these parameters are
duplicated in the advanced menus.

Table 4-5 Menu 1 – User Configured Menu

Parameter Source Function Default Range Attribute

No. Parameter
Configured by
Menu 39
P1.00 P9.00 Speed Reference 0.00 -100.00 % Top Speed to O
+100.00 % Top Speed
P1.01 P9.01 Speed Feedback 0.00 -300.00 % Top Speed to R
300.00 % Top Speed
P1.02 P9.05 Motor Current 0.0 0.0 A to 9999.0 A R
(for MicroCubicleTM Drives)
0 to 9999 A (for DELTAs)
P1.03 P9.09 Frequency Feedback 0.00 -200.00 Hz to +200.00 Hz R
P1.04 P9.07 Motor Volts 0 0 to 999 Vrms R
P1.05 P9.08 Motor Power 0.0 –999.0 to +999.9 kW R
(for MicroCubicleTM Drives)
–9999 to +9999 kW (for
DELTAs)
P1.06 P10.00 Warning No. 1 0 0, 100 to 149 R
P1.07 P10.10 Trip No. 1 0 0 to 99, 150 to 202 R
P1.08 P10.11 Trip No. 2 0 0 to 99, 150 to 202 R
P1.09 P99.10 User Text Language 1 1 = English O
2 = French
3 = Portuguese
4 = German
P1.10 P2.01 Motor Base Voltage Size 25 V to 1000 V(rms) S, E, N
Dependent
P1.11 P2.00 Motor Base Frequency 50.00 5.00 Hz to 200.00 Hz S, E
P1.12 P2.02 Motor Full Load Current As P99.05 0.125 x P99.05 to S, E, N
1.5 x P99.05 A (rms)
P1.13 P2.04 Motor Nominal Speed Size Dep. 100 rpm to 9999 rpm S, E, N
P1.14 P2.05 Motor Full Load Power Drive rating 0.1 to 0.99 S, E
Factor dependent
P1.15 P5.15 Maximum Speed Fwd 1500 10 rpm to 6000 rpm S, E
P1.16 P5.16 Maximum Speed Rev 1500 0 rpm to 6000 rpm S, E
P1.17 P5.17 Minimum Speed Fwd 0 0 rpm to P5.15 S, E
P1.18 P5.18 Minimum Speed Rev 0 0 rpm to P5.15 S, E
P1.19 P3.00 Fluxing Control 1 1 = Linear V to F S, E, N, L
2 = Square Law V to F
(Fan curve)
3 = Economy flux mode
P1.20 P3.01 Fixed Volts Boost 0 0 V to 50 V E
P1.21 P3.31 Economy Factor 0 0 % to 50 % Nominal Flux E
(Economy Flux Mode)
P1.22 P6.00 Accel. Rate Fwd. 10 0.1 %/s to 3000 %/s E
P1.23 P6.02 Decel. Rate Fwd. 10 0.1 %/s to 3000 %/s E
P1.24 P4.00 Start Mode 1 1 = Normal start S, E, L
2 = Synchrostart

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 4-5
4. The Default Drive. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameter Source Function Default Range Attribute

No. Parameter
Configured by
Menu 39
P1.25 P4.07 Normal Stop Mode 1 1 = Disable and Coast S, E, N, L
2 = Ramp to Stop
3 = Torque limit 1 Stop
4 = Torque limit 2 Stop
5 = DC Injection
P1.26 P3.05 Fixed Current Limit 150 % 10 % to 150 % when E
when P1.29 = 0
P1.29 = 0 10 % to 110 % when
110 % P1.29 = 1
when
P1.29 = 1
P1.27 P99.05 Drive Nominal Current As drive As drive size R
size
P1.28 P4.12 Motor Regenerative kW 0.5 -0.1 kW to 6000.0 kW E
Limit -0.1 means NO LIMIT,
energy to be absorbed by DB unit
P1.29 P99.02 Overload Duty 1 0 = 150% Overload S, E, N, L
1 = 110% overload
P1.30 P99.00 Number of DELTAs 0 0 = Not a DELTA system, R
possibly a MicroCubicleTM
1-6 Number of DELTAs in system
P1.31 None Advanced Menus 0 0 = None (Menu 1 only) E, N, L
Always a Menu (Controls which menus 1 = As Menu 98 choices
Parameter are open) 2 = All Menus Open
P1.32 None Security Code (P99.06) As P99.06 O
Always a Menu
Parameter

4.3.2 Menu 1 - Default Parameters for a Basic Sinusoidal Front End (SFE) Application
Menu 1 provides an operator with the controls required for day-to-day operation for a Basic
Sinusoidal Front End (SFE) Application. The default settings for this application of Menu 1
are different to those for the drive Menu 1. The controls for SFE are listed at Table 4-6.
An operator can choose alternative parameters for Menu 1; this facility is configured by the
settings in Menu 39 (see 6.39).
Table 4-6 lists the default contents of Menu 1. It also shows where these parameters are
duplicated in the advanced menus.
Table 4-6 Menu 1 - Default Parameters for Basic Sinusoidal Front End (SFE) Applications

Parameter Source Function Default Range Attribute

No. Parameter
Configured by
Menu 39
P1.00 P50.00 Vdc reference Drive Size 550 V to 850 V or E
700 V to 1100 V or
700 V to 1140 V
P1.01 P51.00 Vdc feedback 0 0 V to 30000 V R
P1.02 P51.01 Current Feedback 0 0.0 A to 9999.0 A R
P1.03 P51.03 Mains Frequency 0 +40.00 Hz to +70.00 Hz R
–40.00 Hz to –70.00 Hz
P1.04 P51.04 Mains Voltage 0 0 V to 1000 V rms R
P1.05 P51.06 Mains Power 0 -999.0 to 999.9 kW R
P1.06 P10.00 Warning No. 1 0 0, 100 to 149 R
P1.07 P10.10 Trip No. 1 0 0 to 99, 150 to 202 R

Page 4-6 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 4. The Default Drive.

Parameter Source Function Default Range Attribute

No. Parameter
Configured by
Menu 39
P1.08 P10.11 Trip No. 2 0 0 to 99, 150 to 202 R
P1.09 P99.10 User Language 1 1 = English O
2 = French
3 = Portuguese
4 = German
P1.10 P50.01 Choke Inductance Drive Size 30 μH to 10 000 μH E
P1.11 P50.02 % Rating of DC Fed 100 % 0 % to 10 000 % (SFE Rating) E
Drives
P1.12 P50.03 Active Current Positive 110 % 0.00 % to 150 % (SFE Nom E
Limit Current)
P1.13 P50.04 Active Current Negative 110 % 0.00 % to 150 % (SFE Nom E
Limit Current)
P1.14 P52.08 Mains Low Freq Trip 45.00 Hz 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz E
Threshold
P1.15 P52.09 Mains Low Freq 45.00 Hz 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz E
Warning Threshold
P1.16 P52.10 Mains High Freq 63.00 Hz 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz E
Warning Threshold
P1.17 P52.11 Mains High Freq Trip 63.00 Hz 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz E
Threshold
P1.18 P53.03 Load Power 4 0 = None E, N, L
Feedforward Source 1 = Current Sensor Ch 1
2 = Current Sensor Ch 2
3 = Fast Analogue Ch 1
4 = Fast Analogue Ch 2
P1.19 P51.10 Feedforward Current 0 -9999.0 A to 9999.0 A R
Demand
P1.20 P51.13 Active Current 0 -150 % to +150 % R
P1.21 P7.27 Digital Output 1 Source -2.005 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E, N
P1.22 P7.28 Digital Output 2 Source 2.008 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E, N
P1.23 P7.29 Digital Output 3 Source 2.012 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E, N
P1.24 P33.00 Stop Control See Control 0.000 = Cleared (Off) E, N
Flag List 1.000 = Set (On)

P1.25 P33.01 Start Control See Control 0.000 = Cleared (Off) E, N

Flag List 1.000 = Set (On)
P1.26 P34.16 Keypad/Remote See Control 0.000 to 5.215 E, N
Flag List
P1.27 P99.05 Drive Nominal Current As drive As drive size R
size
P1.28 P99.11 Drive Voltage Grade 0 0 = Standard Voltage Grade S, E, N. L
1 = Alternative Voltage Grade
P1.29 P99.02 Overload Duty 1 0 = 150 % Overload S, E, N. L
1 = 110 % Overload
P1.30 P99.00 Number of DELTAs 0 0 = Not a DELTA system, R
possibly a MicroCubicleTM
1-6 Number of DELTAs in system
P1.31 None Advanced Menus 0 0 = None (Menu 1 only) E, N, L
Always a Menu (Controls which menus 1 = As Menu 98 choices
Parameter are open) 2 = All Menus Open
P1.32 P99.06 Security Code (P99.06) As P99.06 O

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 4-7
4. The Default Drive. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 4-8 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

5 Parameter Listing.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Page

5.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 5-3

5.2 Attributes........................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.3 Mode Number ................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.4 Parameter Tables .......................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.4.1 Menu 2 - Basic Motor Settings ............................................................................................... 5-4
5.4.2 Menu 3 - Frequency Control Settings .................................................................................... 5-5
5.4.3 Menu 4 - Start and Stop Control............................................................................................. 5-7
5.4.4 Menu 5 - Speed Reference Settings ...................................................................................... 5-8
5.4.5 Menu 6 - Ramp Settings......................................................................................................... 5-9
5.4.6 Menu 7 - Plant I/O Settings .................................................................................................. 5-11
5.4.7 Menu 8 - Torque Limit Settings ............................................................................................ 5-12
5.4.8 Menu 9 - Basic Drive Monitoring .......................................................................................... 5-13
5.4.9 Menu 10 - Trips and Warnings ............................................................................................. 5-13
5.4.10 Menu 11 - Advanced Drive Monitoring .............................................................................. 5-15
5.4.11 Menu 12 - Motor Advanced Settings (Vector Only)........................................................... 5-18
5.4.12 Menu 13 - Speed Feedback Settings (Vector Only).......................................................... 5-20
5.4.13 Menu 14 - Speed Loop Settings (Vector Only) ................................................................. 5-21
5.4.14 Menu 15 - Torque Reference Settings (Vector Only)........................................................ 5-22
5.4.15 Menu 16 - PID Controller Settings..................................................................................... 5-23
5.4.16 Menu 17 - Reference Sequencer Settings ........................................................................ 5-24
5.4.17 Menu 18 - Motorised Potentiometer Settings.................................................................... 5-25
5.4.18 Menu 19 - Trim Reference Settings .................................................................................. 5-26
5.4.19 Menu 20 - High Speed Digital I/O Settings........................................................................ 5-26
5.4.20 Menu 21 - Fixed Reference Settings................................................................................. 5-26
5.4.21 Menu 22 - Skip Speed Settings......................................................................................... 5-27
5.4.22 Menu 23 - Dynamic Brake Control .................................................................................... 5-27
5.4.23 Menu 24 - Speed Trim Settings......................................................................................... 5-29
5.4.24 Menu 25 - Inertia Compensation Settings ......................................................................... 5-29
5.4.25 Menu 26 - History Log Settings ......................................................................................... 5-30
5.4.26 Menu 27 - History Log Playback Settings ......................................................................... 5-31
5.4.27 Menu 28 - Auto-reset Settings........................................................................................... 5-32
5.4.28 Menu 29 - Speed and Torque Monitor Settings ................................................................ 5-33
5.4.29 Menu 30 - Logic Block Settings......................................................................................... 5-33
5.4.30 Menu 31 - Status Flag Generator Settings........................................................................ 5-36
5.4.31 Menu 32 - Serial Link Settings .......................................................................................... 5-36
5.4.32 Menu 33 - Control Flags 0 to 99 Connection Settings ...................................................... 5-39
5.4.33 Menu 34 - Control Flags 100 to 127 Connection Settings ................................................ 5-39
5.4.34 Menu 35 - Miscellaneous Features Settings ..................................................................... 5-39
5.4.35 Menu 36 - Position Control Settings (Vector with Encoder Only) ..................................... 5-42
5.4.36 Menu 37 - Position Reference Settings............................................................................. 5-45
5.4.37 Menu 38 - Position Control Monitor................................................................................... 5-46
5.4.38 Menu 39 - User Configurable Menu (Menu 1) Settings..................................................... 5-47
5.4.39 Menu 40 - Summing Nodes Settings................................................................................. 5-48
5.4.40 Menu 41 - Programmable Status Word Settings............................................................... 5-51
5.4.41 Menu 42 - Reference Pointers – Source Settings............................................................. 5-52
5.4.42 Menu 43 - Load Fault Detection Window Settings ............................................................ 5-52
5.4.43 Menu 44 - Reference Shaper Settings .............................................................................. 5-53
5.4.44 Menu 45 - Temperature..................................................................................................... 5-53
5.4.45 Menu 46 - AC Loss Ridethrough (Vector Control Only) .................................................... 5-55
5.4.46 Menu 47 - Second Logic Menu ......................................................................................... 5-55
5.4.47 Menu 50 - Basic SFE Setup Menu .................................................................................... 5-60
5.4.48 Menu 51 - Basic SFE Monitoring Menu............................................................................. 5-61
5.4.49 Menu 52 - Advanced SFE Setup Menu............................................................................. 5-62

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-1
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

5.4.50 Menu 53 - SFE Reference Setup Menu............................................................................. 5-63

5.4.51 Menu 54 - Mains Monitor Menu ......................................................................................... 5-66
5.4.52 Menu 55 - Machine Bridge Control Menu .......................................................................... 5-67
5.4.53 Menu 56 - AC Voltage Control Menu................................................................................. 5-67
5.4.54 Menu 58 - Extended I/O CAN Port 2 ................................................................................. 5-67
5.4.55 Menu 59 - Extended I/O..................................................................................................... 5-68
5.4.56 Menu 60 - Scale................................................................................................................. 5-68
5.4.57 Menu 61 - CDC CAN Port.................................................................................................. 5-68
5.4.58 Menu 62 - CDC CANopen ................................................................................................. 5-68
5.4.59 Menu 63 - CDC DeviceNet ................................................................................................ 5-68
5.4.60 Menu 65 - CAN Port 2........................................................................................................ 5-68
5.4.61 Menu 66 - CAN 2 CANopen............................................................................................... 5-68
5.4.62 Menu 67 - CAN 2 DeviceNet.............................................................................................. 5-68
5.4.63 Menus 70 to 72 - Application Code Developer .................................................................. 5-68
5.4.64 Menu 74 - Fieldbus Coupler .............................................................................................. 5-68
5.4.65 Menu 75 - PROFIBUS ....................................................................................................... 5-68
5.4.66 Menu 78 - MicroPEC™ Module - Configuration and Diagnostics ..................................... 5-69
5.4.67 Menu 80 - FIP Configuration Menu 83 - FIP Produced VCOMS Menu 84 - FIP Consumed
VCOMS Menu 85 - FIP Slow VCOMS ............................................................................. 5-69
5.4.68 Menu 86 - Ethernet Interface Menu ................................................................................... 5-69
5.4.69 Menu 89 - Spy Setup ......................................................................................................... 5-69
5.4.70 Menu 90 - Manufacturer’s Service Menu........................................................................... 5-69
5.4.71 Menu 91 - Fast Analogue Menu ........................................................................................ 5-69
5.4.72 Menu 98 - Menu Enable Selection Settings....................................................................... 5-70
5.4.73 Menu 99 - Configuration Settings ...................................................................................... 5-73
5.5 Status Flag Listing........................................................................................................................ 5-75
5.6 Control Flag Listing ...................................................................................................................... 5-75

Page 5-2 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

5.1 Introduction
This section contains a listing of all drive parameters, grouped in menus for ease of
reference. Each parameter is cross-referred to the descriptions at Sections 6, 8 and 9, and
the lists include default values, range of values, attributes and a mode number for all
parameters. Control Block Diagrams at Section 7 show how these parameters affect drive
control.

5.2 Attributes
All parameters have attributes that specify how they may be accessed. Attributes are
determined by the parameter function, e.g. security level password requirement, or the type
of parameter, e.g. a List. The types of attribute are described below.
Attribute Security Level/Type
C Confirm Edit – ‘Enter to confirm’, ‘Esc to abort’
E Engineer accessible - only accessible if the engineering password
(P99.08) has been entered in P99.06
L List parameter, value selected from a pre-defined list
N (eNter) has to be pressed to update
O Operator Accessible - only accessible if the operator password
(P99.07) has been entered in P99.06
R Read only (monitoring parameters)
S Stop to edit. The parameter cannot be edited unless the drive is stopped.

5.3 Mode Number

The tables in this section of the manual also include a Mode Number (Mode No.) for each
parameter. This number indicates the relationship between a parameter and the mode of
operation for a drive as determined by the values for the Control Structure at P99.01.
However, the mode numbers used in the parameter tables are further extended from those
at P99.01, to include additional indicators for Vector Control (see P13.00). A summary of the
Mode Numbers used is:
0 = No motor
1 = VVVF (Variable Voltage Variable Frequency)
2 = Vector
2a = Vector with Encoder
2b = Vector with Tacho
2c = Encoderless Vector
3 = Scalar
4 = SFE (Sinusoidal Front End).
When Mode Number 2 is used in the tables it indicates that the specific parameter may be
used with all modes of Vector Control. When a parameter is applied to a particular form of
Vector Control it is represented by use of 2a, 2b or 2c.
When a range of numbers is included it indicates that the parameter may be used with all
modes of operation e.g. 1-2 indicates use with VVVF and all the Vector modes (2a, 2b and
2c).

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-3
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

5.4 Parameter Tables

5.4.1 Menu 2 - Basic Motor Settings
Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-9 to 6-11
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P2.00 Motor Base Frequency 50 Hz 5.00 Hz to 200.00 Hz S,E 1-3
P2.01 Motor Base Voltage Size Dep. 25 V to 1000 V (rms) S,E,N 1-3
P2.02 Motor Full Load Current As P99.05 0.125 x P99.05 to S,E,N 1-3
1.5 x P99.05 A (rms)
P2.03 Motor Nominal Power Size of Drive size dependent S,E,N 1-3
Drive
P2.04 Motor Nominal Speed Size Dep. Drive size dependent S,E,N 1-3
P2.05 Motor Full Load Power Drive 0.1 to 0.99 S,E 1
Factor rating
dependent
P2.06 Number of Motor Poles 0 0 to 28 (even numbers) S,E 1-3
(0 = Drive computes number of
poles)
P2.07 Motor 150% Overload 60 s 10 s to 3600 s E 1-3
Time
P2.08 Motor Cooling Fan Type 1 1 = Shaft driven E,N,L 1-3
2 = Separately excited fan
P2.09 Motor I²T Action 2 0 = No Action. E,N,L 1-3 Option 3 is only
1 = Warning at 75% limit. effective in Mode 1,
2 = Warning at 75% Trip at i.e. VVVF
100 % limit.
3 = Current limit at 75% I²T
limit
P2.10 Action on MTRIP 0 0 = No Action E,N,L 1-3
(Motor thermostat trip) 1 = Warning
2 = Trip
P2.11 CF113: MTRIP 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
CLEARED
P2.12 Motor Continuous Duty 100 75% to 125% E 1-3
P2.13 Motor PTC Trip 3.00 kΩ Max. = 10.00 kΩ E 1-3
Resistance Min. = 0.10 kΩ
P2.14 Measured PTC Max. = 10.00 kΩ R 1-3
Resistance Min. = 0.10 kΩ
P2.15 Motor PTC Action 0 0 = No action E,L 1-3
1 = Warning
2 = Trip
3 = Warning and current limit

Page 5-4 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

5.4.2 Menu 3 - Frequency Control Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-13 to 6-22
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P3.00 Fluxing Control 1 1 = Linear V to F S,E,N,L 1
2 = Square Law V to F
(Fan curve)
3 = Economy flux mode
P3.01 Fixed Volts Boost 0.0 0.0 V to 50.0 V E 1 Vrms @ 0 Hz
P3.02 Auto Volts Boost (load 0.0 0.0% Nominal to 200.0% E 1
dependent volts boost) Nominal
P3.03 Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 –200.0% Nominal to +200.0% E 1 Hz @ FLC and unity
Nominal PF
P3.04 Absolute Minimum 0.0 0.0 Hz to 50.0 Hz E 1,3
Frequency
P3.05 Fixed Current Limit 110 10% to 110% (Drive Nominal E 1 If P99.02 = 1
10% to 150% Current) (default)
If P99.02 = 0
P3.06 Current Limit Source 1 1 = Fixed 100 % E,N,L 1
2 = Analogue REF1
3 = Analogue REF2
4 = RS485 REF 1
5 = RS485 REF2
6 = RS232 REF1
7 = RS232 REF2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref. Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref. Menu
11 = Motorised Pot.
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
14 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
15 = Summing Node A
16 = Summing Node B
17 = Pointer 13
P3.07 Current Limit Response 20.0 0.0%/s to 500.0%/s E 1 150% FLC @ ILIM =
Speed 100 %
P3.08 CF114: Current Limit 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1 CF List *
Defeat CLEARED
P3.09 Torque Limit Response 2.0 0.0%/s to 500.0%/s E 1
Speed
P3.10 Torque Limit Cut-in 1.00 0.20 Hz to 50.00 Hz E 1
Frequency
P3.11 CF115: Torque Limit 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1 CF List *
Enable CLEARED
P3.12 Motor Parameterisation 1 1 = Explicit entry S,E,N,L 1,2
Method 2 = Estimate from Nameplate
3 = Perform Calibration Run
P3.13 VVVF Stator Resistance Drive Size 0.1 mΩ to 3000 mΩ E,N 1
P3.14 VVVF Stator Inductance Drive Size 0.1 mH to 30.0 mH E 1
P3.15 VVVF Magnetising Drive Size 1 Ω to 20,000 Ω E 1
Resistance
P3.16 Stability Gain 1.000 0.000 Hz/(%/scan) to E 1
4.000 Hz/(%/scan)
P3.17 Stability Time Constant 40 0 scans to 2000 scans E 1 1 scan = 5 ms

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-5
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-13 to 6-22

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P3.18 Magnetising Current 1 1 = Fixed 100 % E,N,L 3 Scalar Control only
Reference Source 2 = Analogue REF1
3 = Analogue REF2
4 = RS485 REF 1
5 = RS485 REF2
6 = RS232 REF1
7 = RS232 REF2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref. Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref. Menu
11 = Motorised Pot.
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
14 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
15 = Summing Node A
16 = Summing Node B
17 = Pointer 14
18 = Pointer 15
P3.19 Torque Current 1 1 to 18 (see P3.18) E,N,L 3 Scalar Control only
Reference Source
P3.20 Magnetising Current 100.00 0.00% to 150.00% E 3 Scalar Control only
Reference Scale
P3.21 Torque Current 100.00 0.00% to 150.00% E 3 Scalar Control only
Reference Scale
P3.22 Scalar Magnetising 0.00 -327.67% to 327.67% R 3
Current Reference
P3.23 Scalar Torque Current 0.00 -327.67% to 327.67% R 3
Reference
P3.24 Variable Volts Boost 0.0 0.0V to 100.0V E 1
P3.25 Variable Volts Boost 1 1 = Fixed 100 % E,N,L 1
Source 2 = Analogue REF 1
3 = Analogue REF 2
4 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
5 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
6 = RS485 REF 1
7 = RS485 REF2
8 = RS232 REF1
9 = RS232 REF2
10 = PID Controller
11 = Pointer 19
P3.26 CF126 : Enable 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1 CF List *
Variable Volts Boost CLEARED
P3.27 Rectification Mode 0 0 = Clamp E,N,L 1
1 = Rectify
2 = Allow Negative
P3.28 Variable Boost Output 0.0 –3276.7V to +3276.7V R 1
P3.29 Feedback 0 0 = Disabled E,N,L 1
Compensation 1 = Enabled
P3.30 Frequency Multiplier 0 0 = Disabled S,E,N,L 1
1 = Enabled
P3.31 Economy Flux Factor 0 0% to 50% E 1 Only for VVVF
Mode
P3.32 VVVF Modulation Limit Depends 82.00% to 107.00% E 1 See parameter
on description
Switching
Frequency

Page 5-6 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

5.4.3 Menu 4 - Start and Stop Control

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-24 to 6-29
and Control Flags at Page5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P4.00 Start Mode 1 1 = Immediate low Frequency S,E,L 1-3 Not applicable when
start speed feedback is
2 = Synchrostart available.
P4.01 Synchrostart Mode 1 1 = Reference direction only S,E,L 1,2c,3
2 = Both Directions
P4.02 Synchrostart 10 0% to 100 % E 1,2c,3
Current/Flux (% of drive rated current)
P4.03 Synchrostart Scan Rate 50 0%/s to 250%/s E 1,2c,3
P4.04 CF1: Start 1.002 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-3 CF List *
Dig I/P 2
P4.05 CF0: Normal Stop 1.001 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-3 CF List *
Dig I/P 1

P4.06 CF2: Rapid Stop 0.001 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-3 CF List *
SET
P4.07 Normal Stop Mode 1 1 = Disable and Coast S,E,N,L 1-3
2 = Ramp to Stop
3 = Torque limit 1 Stop
4 = Torque limit 2 Stop
5 = DC Injection
P4.08 Rapid Stop Mode 1 1 to 5 (see P4.07) S,E,N,L 1-3
P4.09 CF116: Keypad/Remote 1.004 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-3 CF List *
Dig. I/P 4
P4.10 Zero Speed Hold Time 0.0 0.0 s to 500.0 s S,E 1-3
P4.11 Stop Time Limit 0 0 s to 3600 s S,E 1-3
0 = No Stop Limit
P4.12 Regen. Power Limit Drive Size -0.1 kW to 6000.0 kW E 1-3
dependent -0.1 means NO LIMIT, energy to
be absorbed by DB unit
P4.13 DC Injection Speed 10.0 0.0% to 100.0% speed at which E 1
DC injection begins.
P4.14 DC Injection Current 100 0% to 150% E 1
P4.15 DC Injection Duration 5 1s to 120 s E 1
P4.16 DC Injection Delay 0.5 0.0 s to 20.0 s E 1
P4.17 CF25: Output Enable 0.001 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-3 CF List *
SET
P4.18 CF123: Backup 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-3 CF List *
Run/Stop Select CLEARED
P4.19 CF124: Backup Stop 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-3 CF List *
CLEARED
P4.20 CF125: Backup Start 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-3 CF List *
CLEARED
P4.21 Synchrostart Minimum 0.00% 0.00 to 100.00% S,E 1,2c,3
Speed
P4.22 VVVF – Sync PF 0.10 -1.00 to 1.00 E 1
Demand
P4.23 VVVF – Sync PF Kp 5 0 to 1000 E 1
P4.24 VVVF – Sync PF Ki 50 0 to 1000 E 1
P4.25 Synchrostart Maximum 0 0 = 100% E,L,N,S 1-3
Speed 1 = P9.00 Value
P4.26 Tr Period Monitor ms R 1-3

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-7
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-24 to 6-29

and Control Flags at Page5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P4.27 Re-enable Delay 3.0Tr 0.5 to 10Tr E,N 1-3
P4.28 Restart Time 4.0Tr 1.0 to 10.0Tr E,N 1-3

5.4.4 Menu 5 - Speed Reference Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-31 to 6-36
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P5.00 Speed Reference 0.00 –100.00 % Top Speed to O 1-3 0.01% of Top
+100.00 % Top Speed Speed (0.1% from
Push Buttons)
P5.01 Speed Reference 1 1 1 = Keypad Speed Ref E,N,L 1-3
Source 2 = Analogue REF1
3 = Analogue REF2
4 = RS485 REF 1
5 = RS485 REF2
6 = RS232 REF1
7 = RS232 REF2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref. Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref. Menu
11 = Motorised Pot.
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
14 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
15 = High Speed Digital I/P
16 = Position Control
17 = Summing Node A
18 = Summing Node B
19 = Summing Node C
20 = Summing Node D
21 = Pointer 1
22 = Pointer 2
P5.02 Speed Reference 2 2 1 to 22 (see P5.01) E,N,L 1-3
Source
P5.03 Speed Reference 3 3 1 to 22 (see P5.01) E,N,L 1-3
Source
P5.04 Speed Reference 4 1 1 to 22 (see P5.01) E,N,L 1-3
Source
P5.05 Backup Speed 0 0 = No Backup E,N,L 1-3
Reference 1 to 22 (see P5.01)
P5.06 Warning on Backup 0 0 = Yes E,L 1-3
1 = No
P5.07 CF4: Reference1 –1.004 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
Selector INV Digital
Input 4
P5.08 CF5: Reference 2 –1.005 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
Selector INV Digital
Input 5
P5.09 CF6: Reference 3 1.005 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
Selector Dig I/P 5
P5.10 CF7: Reference 4 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
Selector CLEARED

Page 5-8 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-31 to 6-36

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P5.11 Direction Control 1 1 = Polarity of Speed Ref. is XORed E,L 1-3
with the state of Control Flag 3
(flag 3 = 1 will invert the
reference)
2 = Positive references input only.
The sign of the reference is
ONLY defined by the state of
Flag 3.
P5.12 CF3: Direction 1.003 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
(1 = Rev) Dig I/P 3
P5.13 CF8: Jog Enable 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
CLEARED
P5.14 Jog Speed 1 0.0 –100.0% Top Speed to O 1-3 0.1% of Top Speed
+100.0% Top Speed
P5.15 Maximum Speed Fwd 1500 10 r/min to 6000 r/min S,E 1-3
P5.16 Maximum Speed Rev 1500 0 r/min to 6000 r/min S,E 1-3
P5.17 Minimum Speed Fwd 0 0 r/min to P5.15 S,E 1-3
P5.18 Minimum Speed Rev 0 0 r/min to P5.15 S,E 1-3
P5.19 CF11: Reverse Inhibit 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
CLEARED
P5.20 CF12: Forward Inhibit 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
CLEARED

P5.21 CF13: Clamp Zero Ref 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
CLEARED
P5.22 Process Top Speed 1000 –9999 Units to +9999 Units E 1-3 User defined units
P5.23 Speed Clamp Limit 1 100.00 –100.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
+100.00 % Top Speed
P5.24 Speed Clamp Limit 2 –100.00 –100.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
+100.00 % Top Speed
P5.25 CF117: Enable Speed 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
Demand Clamp CLEARED
P5.26 Speed Reference Time 0.00 0.00 s to 5.00 s E 1-3
Constant
P5.27 Jog Speed 2 0.0 –100.00 % Top Speed to O 1-3
+100.00 % Top Speed
P5.28 CF121: Jog Speed 1/ 2 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
Select CLEARED

5.4.5 Menu 6 - Ramp Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-37 to 6-40
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par No. Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No.
P6.00 Acceleration Rate Fwd 10.0 0.1%/s to 3000.0%/s E 1,2 % Top Speed per
second.
P6.01 Acceleration Rate Rev 0.0 0.0%/s to 3000.0%/s E 1,2 % Top Speed per
(0 = As Forward) second.
P6.02 Deceleration Rate Fwd 10.0 0.1%/s to 3000.0%/s E 1,2 % Top Speed per
second.
P6.03 Deceleration Rate Rev 0.0 0.0%/s to 3000.0%/s E 1,2 % Top Speed per
(0 = As Forward) second.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-9
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-37 to 6-40

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par No. Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No.
P6.04 Speed to reach Full 0.0 0.0% Top Speed to 50.0% Top E 1,2 % Top Speed per
Accel/Decel Rate Speed second.
P6.05 CF14: Ramp Freeze 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E, N 1,2 CF List *
Up Forward CLEARED
P6.06 CF15: Ramp Freeze 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E, N 1,2 CF List *
Up Reverse CLEARED
P6.07 CF16: Ramp Freeze 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E, N 1,2 CF List *
Down Forward CLEARED
P6.08 CF17: Ramp Freeze 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E, N 1,2 CF List *
Down Reverse CLEARED
P6.09 CF18: Ramp Bypass 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E, N 2 CF List *
CLEARED
P6.10 Maximum Ramp 5.00% 0.00 % Top Speed to 100.00 % E 2
Deviation Top Speed
P6.11 CF122: Limit Ramp 0.000 Enables P6.10 E, N 2 CF List *
Deviation CLEARED See Control Flag Menus 33/34
P6.12 Acceleration Rate Fwd 2 10.0 0.1%/s to 3000.0%/s E 1,2
P6.13 Deceleration Rate Fwd 10.0 0.1%/s to 3000.0%/s E 1,2
2
P6.14 Acceleration Rate Rev 2 0.0 0.0%/s to 3000.0%/s E 1,2
P6.15 Deceleration Rate Rev 0.0 0.0%/s to 3000.0%/s E 1,2
2
P6.16 CF127: Select Ramp 2 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E, N 1,2 CF List *
CLEARED
P6.17 Trip Avoidance Drive Size 685 to 1500 V E 1,2
Threshold dependent
P6.18 Not Used
to
P6.19
P6.20 Ramp Input 1.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
P6.21 Increase Rate +ve 10.0 0.1%/s to 3000.0%/s E 0-4
P6.22 Increase rate –ve 0.0 0.0%/s to 3000.0%/s E 0-4
0.0 = As Increase Rate +ve
P6.23 Decrease Rate +ve 10.0 0.1%/s to 3000.0%/s E 0-4
P6.24 Decrease Rate –ve 0.0 0.0%/s to 3000.0%/s E 0-4
0.0 = As Decrease Rate +ve
P6.25 S-Shape Range 0.0 0.0% to 50.0% E 0-4
P6.26 CF134: Ramp Freeze 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
Up +ve CLEARED
P6.27 CF135: Ramp Freeze 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
Up –ve CLEARED
P6.28 CF136: Ramp Freeze 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
Down +ve CLEARED
P6.29 CF137: Ramp Freeze 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
Down –ve CLEARED
P6.30 CF138: Ramp Bypass 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
CLEARED
P6.31 Increase Rate +ve 2 10.0 0.1%/s to 3000.0%/s E 0-4
P6.32 Decrease Rate +ve 2 10.0 0.1%/s to 3000.0%/s E 0-4
P6.33 Increase Rate –ve 2 10.0 0.1%/s to 3000.0%/s E 0-4
P6.34 Decrease Rate -ve 2 10.0 0.1%/s to 3000.0%/s E 0-4

Page 5-10 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-37 to 6-40

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par No. Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No.
P6.35 CF139: Select Ramp 2 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
CLEARED
P6.36 Ramp Output Monitor As Ramp Input R 0-4

5.4.6 Menu 7 - Plant I/O Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-41 to 6-43
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P7.00 Analogue Reference 1 1 1 = 0% to ±100 % (V mode) E,N,L 0-4
Input Mode 2 = ±(0% to 100 %) (V mode)
3 = –100 % to +100 %
(V mode)
4 = ±(0% to 100 %) (V mode)
5 = 0% to ±100 % (I mode)
6 = ±(0% to 100 %) (I mode)
7 = –100 % to +100 %
(I mode)
8 = ±(0% to 100 %) (I mode)
P7.01 Analogue Reference 1 0.0 –100.0% to +100.0% E 0-4 0.1% of Full Scale
Offset Adjust
P7.02 Analogue Reference 1 1.00 –2.00pu to +2.00pu E 0-4
Gain Adjust
P7.03 Analogue Reference 1 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % 0-4 0.1% of Full Scale
Value
P7.04 Analogue Reference 2 6 1 to 8 (see P7.00) E,N,L 0-4
Input Mode
P7.05 Analogue Reference 2 0.0 –100.0% to +100.0% E 0-4 0.1% of Full Scale
Offset Adjust
P7.06 Analogue Reference 2 1.00 –2.00pu to +2.00pu E 0-4
Gain Adjust
P7.07 Analogue Reference 2 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % 0-4 0.1% of Full Scale
Value
P7.08 Reserved
to
P7.15
P7.16 Analogue Reference 50 0 ms to 5000 ms E 0-4
Filter Time Constant
P7.17 Analogue O/P1 Signal 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Drive
Parameter
P7.18 Analogue O/P1 Mode 1 1 = 0 - 10V or 0 - 20mA E,N,L 0-4
2 = 2 - 10V or 4 - 20mA
3 = 10 - 0V or 20 - 0mA
4 = 10V - 2V or 20 - 4mA
5 = 0 – 20mA Fast Power
P7.19 Analogue O/P1 Polarity 1 0 = Monopolar E,N,L 0-4
1 = Bipolar
P7.20 Analogue O/P1 Scale 100.0 0 to ±Max of selected signal E 0-4
P7.21 Analogue O/P1 Value 0.0 –3276.7% to +3276.7% 0-4 0.1% of Full Scale
P7.22 Analogue O/P2 Signal 9.06 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Drive
Parameter
P7.23 Analogue O/P2 Mode 1 1 to 5 (see P7.18) E,N,L 0-4
P7.24 Analogue O/P2 Polarity 0 0 to 1 (see P7.19) E,N,L 0-4

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-11
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-41 to 6-43

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P7.25 Analogue O/P2 Scale 1500 0 to ±Max of selected signal E 0-4
P7.26 Analogue O/P2 Value 0.0 –3276.7% to +3276.7% 0-4 0.1% of Full Scale
P7.27 Digital O/P 1 Signal -2.005 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF list *
P7.28 Digital O/P 2 Signal 2.008 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF list *
P7.29 Digital O/P 3 Signal 2.012 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *

5.4.7 Menu 8 - Torque Limit Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-45 to 6-46
and Control Flags at Page 5-73 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P8.00 Torque Limit 100.0 0.0% to 300.0% E 1,2 0.1% of nominal
(Also positive torque torque.
limit 1) Note: This is also
positive torque limit
1.
P8.01 Negative Torque Limit 1 -0.1 -0.1% = As P8.00 E 1,2 0.1% of nominal
0.0% to 300.0% torque.
P8.02 Positive Torque Limit 2 -0.1 -0.1% = As P8.00 E 1,2 0.1% of nominal
0.0% to 300.0% torque.
P8.03 Negative Torque Limit 2 -0.1 -0.1% = As P8.00 E 1,2 0.1% of nominal
0.0% to 300.0% torque.
CF24: Disable Torque 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1,2 CF List *
OFF
P8.05 CF22: Inhibit Positive 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1,2 CF List *
Torque OFF
P8.06 CF23: Inhibit Negative 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1,2 CF List *
Torque OFF
P8.07 CF21: Torque Limit 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1,2 CF List *
Selection OFF
P8.08 Positive Torque Limit 1 1 = Fixed 100 % E,N,L 1,2
Scale Source 1 ON 2 = Analogue REF1
3 = Analogue REF2
4 = RS485 REF 1
5 = RS485 REF2
6 = RS232 REF1
7 = RS232 REF2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref. Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref. Menu
11 = Motorised Pot.
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
14 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
15 = Summing Node A
16 = Summing Node B
17 = Pointer 9
18 = Pointer 10
P8.09 Negative Torque Limit 1 1 to 18 (see P8.08) E,N,L 1,2
Scale Source 1
P8.10 Positive Torque Limit 1 1 to 18 (see P8.08) E,N,L 1,2
Scale Source 2
P8.11 Negative Torque 1 1 to 18 (see P8.08) E,N,L 1,2
Limit Scale Source 2

Page 5-12 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

5.4.8 Menu 9 - Basic Drive Monitoring

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-47 to 6-48
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P9.00 Speed Reference 0.00 –100.00 % Top Speed to O 1-3
+100.00 % Top Speed
P9.01 Speed Feedback 0.00 –300.00 % Top Speed to R 1-3
+300.00 % Top Speed
P9.02 Process Speed 0 0 to ±3 x P5.22 R 1-3 Scaling determined
by settings in P5.22
P9.03 Speed Feedback 0 0 to ±30,000 r/min R 1-3
P9.04 Torque Demand 0.0 –300.0% to +300.0% R 1-3 0.1% of nominal
torque
P9.05 Motor Current 0.0 0.0 A to 9999.0 A R 1-3
(for MicroCubicleTM Drives)
0 to 9999 A (for DELTAs)
P9.06 Drive Current 0.0 0.0% to 300.0% R 1-3 0.1% of Drive FLC
P9.07 Motor Volts 0 0 to 1000 Vrms R 1-3
P9.08 Motor Power 0.0 –999.0 to +999.9 kW R 1-3
(for MicroCubicleTM Drives)
–9999 to +9999 kW
(for DELTAs)
P9.09 Frequency Feedback 0 –200 to +200 Hz R 1-3
P9.10 Drive Overload 100% 100 to 0 % R 1-3 % of total overload
Remaining capacity remaining.
P9.11 Motor Overload 100% 100 to 0 % 1-3 % of total overload
Remaining capacity remaining.

5.4.9 Menu 10 - Trips and Warnings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-49 to 6-50,
Warning and Trip Codes at Pages 9-3 and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P10.00 Warning No. 1 0 100 to 199 R 0-4
to to
P10.09 Warning No. 10
P10.10 Trip No. 1 0 0 to 99, 200 to 299 R 0-4
to to
P10.19 Trip No. 10
P10.20 Trip History 1 0 0 to 999 R 0-4
to to
P10.29 Trip History 10
P10.30 Seconds Since Trip 0 0 to 3599 s R 0-4
P10.31 Hours Since Trip 0 0 to 672 h R 0-4
P10.32 CF10: User Trip1 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
CLEARED
P10.33 CF112: User Trip 2 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
CLEARED
P10.34 CF9: Trip Reset 1.006 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Dig I/P 6

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-13
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-49 to 6-50,

Warning and Trip Codes at Pages 9-3 and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P10.35 Action on “New Drive 0 0 = No Action C,N,E, 0-4
PCB” or “Unknown 1 = Use Drive ID information L,S
Drive Size” Trip stored in Control PCB
(SMPS was replaced)
2 = Use Drive ID information
stored in SMPS (Control
PCB was replaced)
P10.36 DELTA Identification 0 0 = DELTA Bridge S,L,N,E, 0-4 Applies to DELTAs
Source 1 = Local Copy C only
P10.37 Not Used
to
P20.39
P10.40 CF198: User Alert 1 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
OFF
P10.41 User Action 1 0 0 = No Action E,N,L 0-4 Trip/Warning Code
1 = Warning = 230
2 = Trip
P10.42 CF199: User Alert 2 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
OFF
P10.43 User Action 2 0 0 = No Action E,N,L 0-4 Trip/Warning Code
1 = Warning = 231
2 = Trip
P10.44 CF200: User Alert 3 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
OFF
P10.45 User Action 3 0 0 = No Action E,N,L 0-4 Trip/Warning Code
1 = Warning = 232
2 = Trip
P10.46 CF201: User Alert 4 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
OFF
P10.47 User Action 4 0 0 = No Action E,N,L 0-4 Trip/Warning Code
1 = Warning = 233
2 = Trip
P10.48 CF202: User Alert 5 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
OFF
P10.49 User Action 5 0 0 = No Action E,N,L 0-4 Trip/Warning Code
1 = Warning = 234
2 = Trip
P10.50 CF203: User Alert 6 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
OFF
P10.51 User Action 6 0 0 = No Action E,N,L 0-4 Trip/Warning Code
1 = Warning = 235
2 = Trip
P10.52 CF204: User Alert 7 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
OFF
P10.53 User Action 7 0 0 = No Action E,N,L 0-4 Trip/Warning Code
1 = Warning = 236
2 = Trip
P10.54 CF205: User Alert 8 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
OFF
P10.55 User Action 8 0 0 = No Action E,N,L 0-4 Trip/Warning Code
1 = Warning = 237
2 = Trip
P10.56 CF206: User Alert 9 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
OFF

Page 5-14 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-49 to 6-50,

Warning and Trip Codes at Pages 9-3 and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P10.57 User Action 9 0 0 = No Action E,N,L 0-4 Trip/Warning Code
1 = Warning = 238
2 = Trip
P10.58 CF207: User Alert 10 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4
OFF
P10.59 User Action 10 0 0 = No Action E,N,L 0-4 Trip/Warning Code
1 = Warning = 239
2 = Trip

5.4.10 Menu 11 - Advanced Drive Monitoring

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-52 to 6-59

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P11.00 Active Current 0.0 –150.0 to +150.0% R 1-3 % of drive FLC
P11.01 Magnetising Current 0.0 –150.0 to +150.0% R 1-3 % of drive FLC
P11.02 PID Controller Output 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 0-4 0.01% of full scale
P11.03 DC Link Voltage 0 0 to 30,000 V R 0-4
o o
P11.04 CDC Electronics 0 –40 C to +150 C R 0-4
Temperature
P11.05 Output Bridge 1 0 –40oC to +150oC R 0-4
Temperature
P11.06 Output Bridge 2 0 –40oC to +150oC R 0-4
Temperature
P11.07 Output Bridge 3 0 –40oC to +150oC R 0-4
Temperature
P11.08 Input Bridge 0 –40oC to +150oC R 0-4
Temperature
P11.09 Output Bridge 4 0 –40oC to +150oC R 0-4
Temperature
P11.10 Output Bridge 5 0 –40oC to +150oC R 0-4
Temperature
P11.11 Output Bridge 6 0 –40oC to +150oC R 0-4
Temperature
P11.12 DB Temperature 0 –40oC to +150oC R 0-4
P11.13 Maximum CDC 0 –40oC to +150oC R 0-4
Electronics Temperature
P11.14 Minimum CDC 0 –40oC to +150oC R 0-4
Electronics Temperature
P11.15 Hours Run 0 0 to 23 Hours R 0-4 Does not respond to
a factory default.
P11.16 Days Run 0 0 to 30,000 Days R 0-4 Does not respond to
a factory default.
P11.17 Hours Energised 0 0 to 23 Hours R 0-4
P11.18 Days Energised 0 0 to 30,000 Days R 0-4
P11.19 kW–Hours 0 0 kWh to 999.9 kWh R 0-4
P11.20 MW–Hours 0 0MWh to 9999MWh R 0-4
P11.21 Digital Input States 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.22 Digital Output States 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-15
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-52 to 6-59

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P11.23 Control Flags 0-15 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.24 Control Flags 16-31 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.25 Control Flags 32-47 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.26 Control Flags 48-63 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.27 Control Flags 64-79 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.28 Control Flags 112-127 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.29 Control Flags 96-111 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.30 Status Flags 0-15 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.31 Status Flags 16-31 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.32 Status Flags 32-47 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.33 Status Flags 48-63 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.34 Status Flags 64-79 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.35 Status Flags 96-111 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.36 Analogue Reference 1 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 0-4
Value
P11.37 Analogue Reference 2 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 0-4
Value
P11.38 Reserved
P11.39 Reserved
P11.40 Analogue O/P1 Value 0.0 –100.0% to +100.0% R 0-4
P11.41 Analogue O/P2 Value 0.0 –100.0% to +100.0% R 0-4
P11.42 Status Flags 64-79 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.43 Control Flags 128-143 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.44 Reserved
P11.45 Speed Demand 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 1-3 % of Top Speed
P11.46 Speed Error 0.00 –300.00 % to +300.00 % R 1-3 % of Top Speed
P11.47 Speed Loop Output 0.00 –300.00 % to +300.00 % R 1-3 % of Top Speed
P11.48 Inertia Compensation 0.00 –300.00 % to +300.00 % R 1-3
Output
P11.49 Maximum Torque 0.00 0.00 % to 300.00 % R 1-3 Calculated on line
Available by the drive.
P11.50 Torque Reference 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % O 2-3 % of nominal torque
(not available in
VVVF mode)
P11.51 Encoder Speed (VVVF) 0.00 –300.00 % to +300.00 % R 1
P11.52 Modulation Depth 0.00% 0.00 to 107% R 0-4

Page 5-16 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-52 to 6-59

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P11.53 Control Flags 144-159 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.54 Control Flags 160-175 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.55 Control Flags 176-191 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.56 Control Flags 192-207 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.57 Status Flags 112-127 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.58 Status Flags 128-143 0000 h 0000 h to FFFF h R 0-4 Hexadecimal and
(Also shown in Binary) binary
P11.59 CPU Usage 0.00 0 % to 100 % R 0-4
P11.60 Serial Number of Drive 1 R 0-4 Read from
(Low Part) MicroCubicleTM
Drive SMPS or
DELTA DIB
P11.61 Serial Number of Drive 0 R 0-4 Read from
(High Part) MicroCubicleTM
Drive SMPS or
DELTA DIB
P11.62 Serial Number of Power 1 R 0-4 Read from PIB
Interface Board (Lo
Part)
P11.63 Serial Number of Power 0 R 0-4 Read from PIB
Interface Board (Hi Part)
P11.64 Serial Number of SMPS 1 R 0-4 Read from SMPS
(Low Part)
P11.65 Serial Number of SMPS 0 R 0-4 Read from SMPS
(High Part)
P11.66 Serial Number of DELTA 1 R 0-4 Read from DELTA
Interface Board (Lo Part) DIB
P11.67 Serial Number of DELTA 0 R 0-4 Read from DELTA
Interface Board (Hi Part) DIB
P11.70 Bridge Linearisation Time 5.080µs 0.000µs to 20.000µs E 1-4
at 1.25kHz *
P11.71 Bridge Linearisation 1.1% 0.0 to 50.0% Drive FLC E 1-4
Constant at 1.25kHz * Drive FLC
P11.72 Bridge Linearisation Time 4.240µs 0.000µs to 20.000µs E 1-4
at 2.5kHz *
P11.73 Bridge Linearisation 1.1% As P11.71 E 1-4
Constant at 2.5kHz * Drive FLC
P11.74 Bridge Linearisation Time 3.880µs As P11.72 E 1-4
at 5.0 kHz *
P11.75 Bridge Linearisation 1.2% As P11.71 E 1-4
Constant at 5.0 kHz * Drive FLC
P11.76 Bridge Linearisation Time 3.760µs As P11.72 E 1-4
at 7.5 kHz *
P11.77 Bridge Linearisation 1.4% As P11.71 E 1-4
Constant at 7.5 kHz * Drive FLC

Note*
The ALSPA MV3000e measures parameters P11.70-P11.77 during a calibration procedure. The user
should not need to adjust these. They are included so that they can be transferred between drives.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-17
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

5.4.11 Menu 12 - Motor Advanced Settings (Vector Only)

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-60 to 6-70
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P12.00 No-load I at 100%V Size of 0.0 A to 9999 A S,E,N 1-3 From No-Load
(Magnetising Current) Drive VVVF Open Loop
Test
P12.01 Motor Peak Overload 150 100 % to 300 % S,E,N 2 Vdc/1.35 for AEM
P12.02 Nominal Mains Supply 400 300 V to 800 V S,E 1,2
Volts
P12.03 Motor Parameterisation 1 1 = Explicit entry S,E,N,L 1,2
Method 2 = Estimate from Nameplate
3 = Perform Calibration Run
P12.04 Motor Temperature 100 20% to 300 % E 2 % of nominal slip
Compensation
P12.05 CF77: Enable Manual 0.001 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 2 CF List *
Temperature SET
Compensation
P12.06 CF106: Enable Auto 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,L 2a See Section 6.12.5
Temperature CLEARED
Compensation
P12.07 Temp Compensation 2.00 0.0%/s/% to 3.0%/s/% E 2a % Nom Rr/s/s
Gain
P12.08 Temperature 1 1 = Fixed 100 % E,N,L 2
Compensation Scale 2 = Analogue REF1
Source 3 = Analogue REF2
4 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
5 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
6 = RS485 REF 1
7 = RS485 REF2
8 = RS232 REF1
9 = RS232 REF2
10 = PID Controller
11 = Summing Node C
12 = Summing Node D
13 = Pointer 11
P12.09 Temperature 0 50% to 150% R 2a
Compensation Estimate
P12.10 Measured Rotor 0 0 mΩ to 9999 mΩ S,E,N 2a 0.1 mΩ
Resistance (cold value)
P12.11 Stator Resistance Size of 1 mΩ to 9999 mΩ S,E,N 2
Drive
P12.12 Stator Inductance Size of 0.1 mH to 30 mH S,E 2
Drive
P12.13 Magnetising Resistance Size of 1 Ω to 9999 Ω S,E 2
Drive
P12.14 Magnetising Inductance Size of 0.5 mH to 999.9 mH S,E,N 2
Drive
P12.15 Rotor Resistance Size of 100 mΩ to 9999 mΩ S,E,N 2
Drive
P12.16 Rotor Inductance Size of 0.1 mH to 30 mH S,E 2
(Leakage inductance) Drive
P12.17 No-load I at 50% V 0.0 0.0 A to Drive FLC S,E,N 2
P12.18 No-load I at 60% V 0.0 0.0 A to Drive FLC S,E,N 2
P12.19 No-load I at 70% V 0.0 0.0 A to Drive FLC S,E,N 2
P12.20 No-load I at 80% V 0.0 0.0 A to Drive FLC S,E,N 2

Page 5-18 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-60 to 6-70

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P12.21 No-load I at 90% V 0.0 0.0 A to Drive FLC S,E,N 2
P12.22 Leakage Volts 0.0 0.0 V to 300.0 V E 2
0.0 = Calculated using motor
equivalent circuit parameters
(P12.11, P12.16)
P12.23 Fixed Flux Limit 100 20% to 100 % E 2 % of maximum flux
P12.24 Flux Limit Source 1 1 = P12.23-Fixed Flux Limit E,N,L. 2
2 = Analogue REF1
3 = Analogue REF2
4 = RS485 REF 1
5 = RS485 REF2
6 = RS232 REF1
7 = RS232 REF2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref. Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref. Menu
11 = Motorised Pot.
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
14 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
15 = Summing Node A
16 = Summing Node B
17 = Pointer 12
P12.25 CF68: Flux Limit Enable 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 2 CF List *
CLEARED
P12.26 Flux Demand 0.00 0.00 to 100.00 % R 2 % of no load Flux
P12.27 High Dynamic Mode. 750 10rad/sec to 2000rad/sec E 2 Applies to high
Current Control dynamic mode only
Bandwidth
P12.28 Rs Tracker 1 0 = Disabled E,L. 2c
1 = Enabled
P12.29 Motor Overload at 0% 99 99% to 300 % S,E,N 2
Speed
P12.30 Motor Overload at Top 99 99% to 300 % S,E,N 2
Speed
P12.31 Flux Controller Output 0.00% -15.00% to +15.00% R 2c
P12.32 Leakage Test Current 100 50 to 100% S,E 2
P12.33 dFlux/dt Mask Time 1.00 0.00 to 10.00Tr E 4 See Menu 55 in
Section 6 for
description
P12.35 Vector Fluxing Mode 1 0 = High Dynamic Mode L,N,E 2 Vector Control only
1 = Optimum Voltage Mode
P12.36 Optimum Voltage Mode Depends 95.00% to 107.00% E 2
Modulation Limit on Dependent on Switching
Switching Frequency
Frequency
P12.37 Optimum Voltage Mode 600 10rad/s to 2000rad/s E 2 Applies to optimum
Current Control voltage mode only
Bandwidth
P12.38 Vdc Feedforward Filter 3.0 0.0ms to 3000.0ms E 2
Time Constant
P12.39 Current Control Kp 100 0% to 500% E 2
Factor
P12.40 Current Control Ki 100 0% to 500% E 2c Applies to
Factor encoderless control
only

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-19
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-60 to 6-70

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P12.41 Orientation Controller 1750 -30 000 to +30 000 E 2c
Kp
P12.42 Orientation Controller Ki 4500 -30 000 to +30 000 E 2c Value is
recalculated by the
drive by the change
of P2.00, P2.04 or
P2.06
P12.43 Xcouple TC factor 100 0 to 1000% E 2c
P12.44 Xcouple Gain Factor 100 0 to 200% E 2c
P12.45 Rs Gain Factor 100 10 to 200% E 2
P12.46 Reserved
to
P12.49
P12.50 Enable Power Limit 0 0 = Disable E,L,N 0-4
1 = Enable
P12.51 Power Limit 0 0 to 65535kW E 0-4
P12.52 P-Limit Taper Band 25 -1 to 100V E 0-4
P12.53 Taper Limit 0 0 to 100 E 0-4
P12.54 Minimum Power Limit 0.1 0.1 to 200.0kW E 0-4

5.4.12 Menu 13 - Speed Feedback Settings (Vector Only)

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-71 to 6-75
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P13.00 Speed Feedback 1 1 = Encoder E,N,L 2
Source 2 = Tacho
3 = Encoderless
P13.01 Backup Speed 1 1 to 3 (see P13.00) E,N,L 2
Feedback Source
P13.02 Encoder Loss Action 1 0 = No Action (revert to E,L 2
backup and set SF59)
1 = Warning (As 0 but issue
warning)
2 = Trip
P13.03 CF118: Select Backup 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 2 CF List *
Feedback CLEARED
P13.04 Encoder Line Count 2500 32 Lines to 9999 Lines S,E 2a
P13.05 Encoder 10000 Lines 0 0 x10k Lines to 6 x10k Lines S,E 2a
P13.06 Encoder Power Supply 5.0 4.5 V to 6.5 V E 2a
Volts
P13.07 Number of Encoder 0 0 to 32767 /10ms R 2a
Reversals (see P13.19, P13.20)
P13.08 Maximum Speed 300 10 r/min/5 ms to E 2a
Change 1000 r/min/5 ms
P13.09 Reserved
P13.10 Motor Angle Feedback 0 0 to 360 degrees R 2
P13.11 Open Loop Test 0 0 = Disabled S,E,L 2
1 = Enabled
P13.12 Open Loop Frequency 0.0 –150.0 Hz to +150.0 Hz E 2
P13.13 Open Loop Ramp Rate 0.1 0.1 Hz/s to 10.0 Hz/s E 2

Page 5-20 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-71 to 6-75

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P13.14 Tacho Feedback Source 1 1 = Analogue REF1 S,E,N,L 2b
2 = Analogue REF2
3 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
4 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
5 = RS485 REF 1
6 = RS485 REF2
7 = RS232 REF1
8 = RS232 REF2
9 = High Speed digital I/P
10 = POINTER 18
P13.15 Tacho Feedback Scale 90.0 33.3% to 90.0% E 2b
P13.16 Tacho Feedback Time 0 0 Scans to 100 Scans E 2b 1 scan = 5 ms
Constant
P13.17 CF119: Force Encoder 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 2 CF List *
Loss CLEARED
P13.18 CF120: Reset Encoder 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 2 CF List *
Loss CLEARED
P13.19 Maximum Encoder 10 0/10 ms to 1000/10 ms E 2a
Reversals (see P13.07)
P13.20 Reversals Threshold 2.0 0.1% Top Speed to 100% Top E 2a
Speed (see P13.07)

5.4.13 Menu 14 - Speed Loop Settings (Vector Only)

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-76 to 6-78
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P14.00 Speed Loop 5.00 0.01pu to 125.00pu E 2 % Torque per %
Proportional Gain 1 speed error
P14.01 Speed Loop Integral 100.00 0.00pu/s to 3000.00pu/s E 2 % Torque per
Gain 1 second % speed
error
P14.02 Speed Loop Derivative 0.000 0.000pu.s to 10.000pu.s E 2 % Torque per %
Gain 1 speed error
P14.03 Speed Loop 5.00 0.01pu to 125.00pu E 2 % Torque per %
Proportional Gain 2 speed error
P14.04 Speed Loop Integral 100.00 0.00pu/s to 3000.00pu/s E 2 % Torque per
Gain 2 second % speed
error
P14.05 Speed Loop Derivative 0.000 0.000pu.s to 10.000pu.s E 2 % Torque per %
Gain 2 speed error
P14.06 CF76: Speed Loop Gain 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 2 CF List *
Select CLEARED
P14.07 CF19: Clamp Zero 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 2 CF List *
Speed CLEARED
P14.08 CF20: Disable Speed 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 2 CF List *
Loop CLEARED
P14.09 Speed Demand 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 2 % Top Speed.
Demanded speed
after ramp, trim and
droop terms are
imposed.
P14.10 Speed Demand Time 0 0 scans to 500 scans E 2 1 scan = 5 ms
Constant

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-21
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-76 to 6-78

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P14.11 Speed Feedback Time 0 0 scans to 500 scans E 2 1 scan = 5 ms
Constant
P14.12 Speed Error 0.00 –300.00 % to +300.00 % R 2 % of Top Speed.
P14.13 Speed Error Time 0 0 scans to 500 scans E 2 1 scan = 5 ms
Constant
P14.14 Speed Loop Error 0.00 0.00 % to 100.00 % E 2 0.01% of Top
Deadband Speed.
P14.15 Speed Loop Deadband 0.00 0.00 % to P14.14 E 2 % of Top Speed.
Offset
P14.16 CF73: Enable Speed 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 2 CF List *
Loop Deadband CLEARED
P14.17 Speed Droop 0.0 –100.0% Top Speed to E 2 % Top Speed for
+100.0% Top Speed 100 % nominal
torque.
P14.18 Speed Droop Time 5 0 scans to 9999 scans E 2 1 scan = 5 ms
Constant
P14.19 Deadband Bias 0.50% 0.00 % to 100.00 % E 2 0.01% of Top Speed
P14.20 CF107: Speed Loop 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 2 When set, freezes
Integral Freeze CLEARED the speed loop
integral term
P14.21 Speed Loop Integral 0 O = From torque injection L,N,E 2 Applicable when
Seed Method source changing from
1= Seed to 0 torque to speed
control.

5.4.14 Menu 15 - Torque Reference Settings (Vector Only)

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-80 to 6-81
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P15.00 Torque Reference 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 2 % Nominal Torque
P15.01 Torque Reference Scale 100.0% 0.0% to 300.0% 2
Factor
P15.02 CF72: Enable Torque 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 2 CF List *
Reference CLEARED
P15.03 Torque Demand Slew 0 0%/s to 5000 %/s E 2
Rate % nominal Torque/sec

Page 5-22 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-80 to 6-81

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P15.04 Torque Reference 1 1 = Keypad Torque Ref. E,N,L 2
Source 2 = Analogue REF1
3 = Analogue REF2
4 = RS485 REF 1
5 = RS485 REF2
6 = RS232 REF1
7 = RS232 REF2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref. Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref. Menu
11 = Motorised Pot.
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
14 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
15 = High Speed Digital input
16 = Position Control
17 = Summing Node A
18 = Summing Node B
19 = Summing Node C
20 = Summing Node D
21 = Pointer 8
P15.05 Backup Torque 0 0 = No Backup E,N,L 2
Reference 1 to 21 Same as P15.04

5.4.15 Menu 16 - PID Controller Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-82 to 6-84
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P16.00 PID Setpoint Selection 1 1 = Fixed Ref. 0 E,L 0-4
2 = Analogue REF1
3 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
4 = Fixed Ref. Menu
5 = Ref. Sequencer
6 = Motorised Pot.
7 = Trim Reference
8 = RS485 REF 1
9 = RS232 REF1
10 = Torque Demand
11 = Speed Demand
12 = Summing Node A
13 = Summing Node B
14 = POINTER 4
P16.01 PID Feedback Selection 1 1 = Analogue REF2 S,E,L 0-4
2 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
3 = RS485 REF 2
4 = RS232 REF2
5 = Torque Demand
6 = Speed Demand
7 = Speed Error
8 = Active Current
9 = Flux Demand
10 = Summing Node C
11 = Summing Node D
12 = POINTER 5
P16.02 PID FB Scale Factor 100.0 0.0% to 300.0% E 0-4
P16.03 PID Proportional Band 500.0 0.1% to 500.0% E 0-4
P16.04 PID Integral Time 0.0 0.0 s to 3000.0 s E 0-4

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-23
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-82 to 6-84

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P16.05 PID Differential Time 0.0 0.0 s to 3000.0 s E 0-4
P16.06 PID Error Time Constant 0.00 0.00 s to 5.00 s E 0-4
P16.07 PID Error Deadband 0.0 0.0% to 50.0% E 0-4
P16.08 PID Error Invert 0 0 = Do not invert error S,E,L 0-4
1 = Invert error
P16.09 PID Output Monitor 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 0-4
P16.10 CF26: PID Integral Gain 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Freeze CLEARED
P16.11 CF69: Suicide PID -2.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Controller INV SF0
Running

5.4.16 Menu 17 - Reference Sequencer Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-85 to 6-86
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P17.00 Reference Sequencer 0 0 = Stopped E,N,L 0-4
Mode 1 = Manual Trigger
2 = Auto Cycle
3 = Auto Single Sequence
P17.01 Number of Reference 1 1 to 5 E,N 0-4
Sequence Points
P17.02 Present Sequence Point 0 1 to 5 R 0-4
P17.03 Sequencer Reference 11 1 = Analogue REF1 E,N,L 0-4
Point 1 2 = Analogue REF2
3 = RS485 REF 1
4 = RS232 REF1
5 = PID Controller
6 = Fixed Ref. Menu
7 = Motorised Pot.
8 = Trim Reference
9 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
10 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
11 = Fixed Ref #0 (P21.00)
12 = Fixed Ref #1 (P21.01)
13 = Fixed Ref #2 (P21.02)
14 = Fixed Ref #3 (P21.03)
15 = Fixed Ref #4 (P21.04)
16 = Summing Node A
17 = Summing Node B
18 = Summing Node C
19 = Summing Node D
20 = Pointer 3
P17.04 Sequencer Reference 12 1 to 20 (see P17.03) E,N,L 0-4
Point 2
P17.05 Sequencer Reference 13 1 to 20 (see P17.03) E,N,L 0-4
Point 3
P17.06 Sequencer Reference 14 1 to 20 (see P17.03) E,N,L 0-4
Point 4
P17.07 Sequencer Reference 15 1 to 20 (see P17.03) E,N,L 0-4
Point 5
P17.08 Reference Sequencer 0.0 0.0 s to 59.9 s E,N 0-4
Time 1 (seconds)

Page 5-24 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-85 to 6-86

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P17.09 Reference Sequencer 0.0 0 min to 9999 min E,N 0-4
Time 1 (minutes)
P17.10 Reference Sequencer 0.0 0.0 s to 59.9 s E,N 0-4
Time 2 (seconds)
P17.11 Reference Sequencer 0 0 min to 9999 min E,N 0-4
Time 2 (minutes)
P17.12 Reference Sequencer 0.0 0.0 s to 59.9 s E,N 0-4
Time 3 (seconds)
P17.13 Reference Sequencer 0 0 min to 9999 min E,N 0-4
Time 3 (minutes)
P17.14 Reference Sequencer 0.0 0.0 s to 59.9 s E,N 0-4
Time 4 (seconds)
P17.15 Reference Sequencer 0 0 min to 9999 min E,N 0-4
Time 4 (minutes)
P17.16 Reference Sequencer 0.0 0.0s to 59.9s E, N 0-4
Time 5 (seconds)
P17.17 Reference Sequencer 0 0min to 9999min E, N 0-4
Time 5 (minutes)
P17.18 CF27: Reference 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E, N 0-4 CF List *
Sequencer Freeze CLEARED
P17.19 CF28: Reference 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E, N 0-4 CF List *
Sequencer Trigger CLEARED
P17.20 CF29: Reference 0.001 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E, N 0-4 CF List *
Sequencer Reset SET
P17.21 Reference Sequencer 0.00 –100.00% to +100.00% R 0-4
Output motor top speed

5.4.17 Menu 18 - Motorised Potentiometer Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-87 to 6-87
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P18.00 Motorised Potentiometer 10 0.1%/s to 3000 %/s E 0-4
Raise Rate
P18.01 Motorised Potentiometer 10 0.1%/s to 3000 %/s E 0-4
Lower Rate
P18.02 Motorised 1 1 = Forward only E,N,L 0-4
Potentiometer Mode 2 = Reverse only
3 = Forward and Reverse
4 to 6 As 1 to 3 but output reset
to zero when stopped
P18.03 Motorised 0.0 0.0% to 100.0% E 0-4 0.1% TOP SPEED
Potentiometer Preset
P18.04 CF34: Motorised 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Potentiometer Raise CLEARED
P18.05 CF35: Motorised 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Potentiometer Lower CLEARED
P18.06 CF71: Motorised 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Potentiometer Preset CLEARED
P18.07 Motorised 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 0-4
Potentiometer Output

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-25
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

5.4.18 Menu 19 - Trim Reference Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-88 to 6-88

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P19.00 Trim Reference Input A 1 1 = Analogue REF1 S,E,N,L 0-4
2 = Analogue REF2
3 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
4 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
5 = RS485 REF 1
6 = RS232 REF1
7 = PID Controller
8 = Fixed Ref. Menu
9 = Motorised Pot.
10 = Ref. Sequencer
11 = Fixed Ref #0 (P21.00)
12 = Fixed Ref #1 (P21.01)
13 = Position Control
14 = Summing Node A
15 = Summing Node B
16 = Pointer 6
P19.01 Trim Reference Input B 1 1 to 16 (see P19.00) S,E,N,L 0-4
P19.02 Trim Reference Scale A 100.0 –150.0% to +150.0% E 0-4
P19.03 Trim Reference Scale B 0.0 –150.0% to +150.0% E 0-4
P19.04 Trim Reference Output 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 0-4

5.4.19 Menu 20 - High Speed Digital I/O Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-89 to 6-93

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P20.00 HSIO Mode 1 -2 = Fast Trip Out E,N 0-4
-1 = 1 kHz Pulse
0 = Output at Drive Frequency
1 = Input
2 to 4096 = Output
P20.01 HSIO Input Frequency 0.0 0.0 kHz to 650.0 kHz E 0-4
for 0% Speed
P20.02 HSIO Input Frequency 100.0 0.0 kHz to 650.0 kHz E 0-4
for 100 % Speed
P20.03 HSIO Input Reference 0.00 –100.00 % Top Speed to R 0-4
Value +100.00 % Top Speed

5.4.20 Menu 21 - Fixed Reference Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-94 to 6-94
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P21.00 Fixed Reference #0 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4 0.1% of Top Speed
to to
P21.15 Fixed Reference #15
P21.16 CF30: Fixed Reference 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Select 0 CLEARED
P21.17 CF31: Fixed Reference 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Select 1 CLEARED
P21.18 CF32: Fixed Reference 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Select 2 CLEARED

Page 5-26 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-94 to 6-94

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P21.19 CF33: Fixed Reference 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Select 3 CLEARED
P21.20 Fixed Reference Output 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 0-4

5.4.21 Menu 22 - Skip Speed Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-95 to 6-95

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P22.00 Skip Band 1 Centre 0.00 –100.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
+100.00 % Top Speed
P22.01 Skip Band 1 Width 0.00 0.00.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
50.00 % Top Speed
P22.02 Skip Band 2 Centre 0.00 –100.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
+100.00 % Top Speed
P22.03 Skip Band 2 Width 0.00 0.00.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
50.00 % Top Speed
P22.04 Skip Band 3 Centre 0.00 –100.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
+100.00 % Top Speed
P22.05 Skip Band 3 Width 0.00 0.00.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
50.00 % Top Speed
P22.06 Skip Band 4 Centre 0.00 –100.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
+100.00 % Top Speed
P22.07 Skip Band 4 Width 0.00 0.00.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
50.00 % Top Speed

5.4.22 Menu 23 - Dynamic Brake Control

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-96 to 6-100

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P23.00 DB Resistor Value Drive size 0.1 Ω to 1000.0 Ω E 0-4 Per effective
dependent switched resistor
P23.01 DB Resistor Average Drive size 0.1 kW to 3000.0 kW E 0-4 Continuous
Power dependent capability
of each effective DB
resistor.
P23.02 DB Resistor Maximum Drive size Value in P23.01 to 3000.0 kW E 0-4 Overload capability
Power dependent of each effective DB
resistor.
P23.03 Duration of DB Resistor 18.0 s 0.1s to 1800.0s E 0-4 Combined with
Maximum Power P23.02 this gives
thermal
characteristic of the
resistor.
P23.04 DB Voltage Threshold Drive size Drive Size to 1500V E 0-4 Voltage for
dependent switching in the DB.
P23.05 Motor Regenerative Drive size –0.1kW to 3000.0kW E 0-4
Power Limit dependent

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-27
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-96 to 6-100

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P23.06 Action on DB Overload 2 0 = No Action E,N,L 0-4
1 = Warn at 25% Remaining
2 = Warn at 25% Remaining
Trip at 0% Remaining
3 = Reduce Regen Power Limit
to DB Average Power,
and Warn at 25%
Remaining Trip at 0%
Remaining
P23.07 Resistor I²T Remaining 100 % 0% to 100 % R 0-4
P23.08 CF110: DB Enable 2.008 –5.216 to +5.216 E,N 0-4
Flag SF8 See Control Flag Menus 33/34
P23.09 CF111: DB Resistor 0.000 –5.216 to +5.216 E,N 0-4
Thermostat CLEARED See Control Flag Menus 33/34
P23.10 DB Vdc Reference 1 1 = Drive Vdc E,N,L 0-4
Source 2 = Analogue Ref 1
3 = Analogue Ref 2
P23.11 DB Vdc Reference 0 -2000 to +2000 V/100% E 0-4 Volts for 100% input
Scale
P23.12 DB Vdc Reference 0 -2000 to +2000 V R 0-4 Volts
P23.13 DB Control Mode 0 0 = Threshold E,N,L 0-4
1 = Proportional*
P23.14 DB Ref Source 1 1= Keypad reference E,N
2= Analogue ref. 1
3= Analogue ref. 2
4= RS485 ref. 1
5= RS485 ref.2
6= RS232 ref.1
7= RS232 ref.2
8= PID Controller
9= Ref. Sequencer
10= Fixed Ref. Menu
11= Motorised potentiometer
12= Trim reference
13= Fixed 0% (not used)
14= Fixed 0% (not used)
15= High speed digital output
16= Position Control
17= Summing Node A
18= Summing Node B
19= Summing Node C
20= Summing Node D
21= Pointer 28
P23.15 Max. DB Ref 100% 0.00% to 100.00% E
P23.16 DB Ref. 0 0.00% to 100.00% R
P23.17 DB Ramp Time 50ms 0 to 100ms E 0% to 100%
modulation
P23.18 DB Demand 0 0.00% to 100.00% R Ref. After Ramp and
limit
P23.19 DB output Select 0 0= DB port S,E,N,L May need to edit
1= Motor Bridge P99.01 to zero
P23.20 Non-MV DB Unit Fitted 0 0 = Not fitted S,E,N,L 0-4
1 = Fitted
P23.21 DB Current 0 0.0 A to 2000.0 A R 0-4 DB Irms per resistor
P23.22 DB Power 0 0.0 kW to 3000.0 kW R 0-4 DB kW per resistor

Page 5-28 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-96 to 6-100

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P23.23 Internal DB Fitted 0 0 = Not fitted S,L,N,E 0-4 Applies to BDM
1 = Fitted Drives only. Does
not apply to DELTA
systems.

Note:
Used for DB Proportional Control Mode – refer to the Application Note in section 10.

5.4.23 Menu 24 - Speed Trim Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-101 to 6-101
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P24.00 Speed Trim Source 1 1 = Keypad Speed Ref. E,N,L 0-3
2 = Analogue REF1
3 = Analogue REF2
4 = RS485 REF 1
5 = RS485 REF2
6 = RS232 REF1
7 = RS232 REF2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref. Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref. Menu
11 = Motorised Pot.
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
14 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
15 = High Speed Digital input
16 = Position Control
17 = Summing Node A
18 = Summing Node B
19 = Summing Node C
20 = Summing Node D
21 = Pointer 7
P24.01 Speed Trim Scale 1 0.0 –100.0% to +100.0% E 0-3
P24.02 Speed Trim Scale 2 0.0 –100.0% to +100.0% E 0-3
P24.03 CF70: Enable Speed 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-3 CF List *
Trim CLEARED
P24.04 CF75: Speed Trim Scale 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-3 CF List **
Select CLEARED
P24.05 Speed Trim Slew Rate 0 0%/s to 5000 %/s E 0-3

5.4.24 Menu 25 - Inertia Compensation Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-102 to 6-102
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P25.00 Inertia Compensation 0.0 0.0 s to 300.0 s E 2
Acceleration Time
P25.01 Inertia Compensation 5 0 scans to 500 scans E 2 1 scan = 5 ms
Time Constant
P25.02 Inertia Compensation 1 1 = From Speed Demand E,N,L 2
Speed Source 2 = From Speed Feedback
P25.03 CF74: Enable Inertia 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 2 CF List *
Compensation CLEARED

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-29
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

P25.04 Inertia Compensation 0 0 scans to 500 scans E 2 1 scan = 5 ms

Output Time Constant

5.4.25 Menu 26 - History Log Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-103 to 6-105
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. Basic SFE No.
Drive
P26.00 Number of Scans/ 1 1 1 scan to 20000 E,N 0-4 1 scan = 5 ms
History Sample scans
P26.01 Channel 1 Data 9.02 51.04 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
(any Parameter)
P26.02 Channel 1 Mode 1 1 1 = Take Average E,N,L 0-4
2 = Take Maximum
3 = Take Minimum
P26.03 Channel 2 Data 9.06 51.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
(any Parameter)
P26.04 Channel 2 Mode 2 2 1 to 3 (see P26.02) E,N,L 0-4
P26.05 Channel 3 Data 9.08 51.06 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
(any Parameter)
P26.06 Channel 3 Mode 2 2 1 to 3 (see P26.02) E,N,L 0-4
P26.07 Channel 4 Data 9.09 51.03 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
(any Parameter)
P26.08 Channel 4 Mode 2 2 1 to 3 (see P26.02) E,N,L 0-4
P26.09 Channel 5 Data 9.10 9.10 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 9.10 not visible in
(any Parameter) SFE – see P51.19
P26.10 Channel 5 Mode 2 2 1 to 3 (see P26.02) E,N,L 0-4
P26.11 Channel 6 Data 11.05 11.05 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
(any Parameter)
P26.12 Channel 6 Mode 1 1 1 to 3 (see P26.02) E,N,L 0-4
P26.13 Channel 7 Data 11.03 51.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
(any Parameter)
P26.14 Channel 7 Mode 2 2 1 to 3 (see P26.02) E,N,L 0-4
P26.15 Channel 8 Data 9.01 50.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
(any Parameter)
P26.16 Channel 8 Mode 1 1 1 to 3 (see P26.02) E,N,L 0-4
P26.17 Channel 9 Data 9.00 51.10 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
(any Parameter)
P26.18 Channel 9 Mode 1 1 1 to 3 (see P26.02) E,N,L 0-4
P26.19 Channel 10 Data 10.10 10.10 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
(any Parameter)
P26.20 Channel 10 Mode 1 1 1 to 3 (see P26.02) E,N,L 0-4
P26.21 Trigger Parameter 0 0 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
(any Parameter,
0 = None)
P26.22 Lower Trigger Level –32767 –32767 –32767 to +32767 E,N 0-4
P26.23 Upper Trigger Level +32767 +32767 –32767 to +32767 E,N 0-4
P26.24 Samples after Trigger 5 5 0 to 99 E,N 0-4
P26.25 CF78: Run History 2.008 2.008 See Control Flag E,N 0-4 CF List *
SF8, O/P SF8, O/P Menus 33/34
Bridge Bridge
Enable Enable

Page 5-30 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-103 to 6-105

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. Basic SFE No.
Drive
P26.26 CF79: Stop History 2.005 2.005 See Control Flag E,N 0-4 CF List *
SF5, Drive SF5, Menus 33/34
Tripped Drive
Tripped
P26.27 History Command 0 0 0 = No Effect E,N,L 0-4
1 = Arm History
2 = Trigger History
P26.28 Single Element Ch1 26.30 26.30 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
Data
P26.29 Single Element Ch2 26.31 26.31 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
Data
P26.30 Global Time Var 1 0 0 –30000 to +30000 E 0-4
P26.31 Global Time Var 2 0 0 –30000 to +30000 E 0-4

5.4.26 Menu 27 - History Log Playback Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Page 9-19

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P27.00 History Sample Display 0 0 to 99 O 0-4
Number
P27.01 History Playback 0 Value recorded in the channel, as R 0-4
Channel 1 per parameter set in P26.01
P27.02 History Playback 0 Value recorded in the channel, as R 0-4
Channel 2 per parameter set in P26.03
P27.03 History Playback 0 Value recorded in the channel, as R 0-4
Channel 3 per parameter set in P26.05
P27.04 History Playback 0 Value recorded in the channel, as R 0-4
Channel 4 per parameter set in P26.07
P27.05 History Playback 0 Value recorded in the channel, as R 0-4
Channel 5 per parameter set in P26.09
P27.06 History Playback 0 Value recorded in the channel, as R 0-4
Channel 6 per parameter set in P26.11
P27.07 History Playback 0 Value recorded in the channel, as R 0-4
Channel 7 per parameter set in P26.13
P27.08 History Playback 0 Value recorded in the channel, as R 0-4
Channel 8 per parameter set in P26.15
P27.09 History Playback 0 Value recorded in the channel, as R 0-4
Channel 9 per parameter set in P26.17
P27.10 History Playback 0 Value recorded in the channel, as R 0-4
Channel 10 per parameter set in P26.19
P27.11 Single Element 0 Value recorded in the channel, as E 0-4
Playback Channel 1 per parameter set in P26.28
P27.12 Single Element 0 Value recorded in the channel, as E 0-4
Playback Channel 2 per parameter set in P26.29

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-31
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

5.4.27 Menu 28 - Auto-reset Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-107 to 6-1116-109

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P28.00 Number of Auto-reset 0 0 to 20 S,E,N 0-4
Attempts
P28.01 Auto-reset Delay 1 1 s to 30 s S,E,N 0-4
P28.02 Supply Loss Timeout 0 0 s to 3200 s E 0-4
P28.03 Auto-reset Healthy Time 30 10 s to 3600 s E,N 0-4
P28.04 Auto-resets Remaining 0 0 to value set in P28.00 R 0-4
P28.05 Force Synchro Start 0 0 = Disabled S,E,L 1-3 If = 1, then a synchro
1 = Enabled start is requested after
an auto restart, even if
not required as the
normal start mode.
P28.06 Instantaneous 0 0 = Disabled E,L 0-4
Overcurrent Auto-reset 1 = Enabled
Enable
P28.07 Timed Overcurrent 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 0-4
Auto-reset Enable
P28.08 Under voltage Auto- 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 0-4 Also resets Trip 29 for
reset Enable pre-charge failure
P28.09 Over voltage Auto-reset 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 0-4
Enable
P28.10 Motor Thermal Trips 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 1-3
Auto-reset Enable
P28.11 Interlock Auto-reset 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 0-4
Enable
P28.12 Control and Reference 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 0-4
Loss Auto-reset Enable
P28.13 Drive Temperature Trips 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 0-4
Auto-reset Enable
P28.14 Serial Link Loss Auto- 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 0-4
reset Enable
P28.15 User Trip Auto-reset 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 0-4
Enable
P28.16 Over speed Trip Auto- 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 0-3
reset Enable
P28.17 Load Fault Auto-reset 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 1-3
Enable
P28.18 DB Resistor Fault Auto- 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 0-4
reset Enable
P28.19 SFE Mains Auto-reset 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 4 Resets all trips 93-98,
Enable for SFE, automatically if
selected.
P28.20 Interlock terminal. Auto 0 0 to 1 (see P28.06) E,L 0-4 Resets interlock trip, if
preset enable the interlock terminal
has been remade.

Page 5-32 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

5.4.28 Menu 29 - Speed and Torque Monitor Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-110 to 6-110

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P29.00 Forward Over speed 120.0 10.0% Top Speed to 300.0% E 1-3
Level Top Speed
P29.01 Reverse Over speed 120.0 10.0% Top Speed to 300.0% E 1-3
Level Top Speed
P29.02 Over speed Action 3 1 = Suicide Torque E,N,L 1-3
2 = Suicide Torque + Warning
3 = Trip
P29.03 Speed Monitor Level 1 0.0 –300.0% Top Speed to E 1-3
+300.0% Top Speed
P29.04 Speed Monitor Level 2 0.0 –300.0% Top Speed to E 1-3
+300.0% Top Speed
P29.05 Speed Monitor 5.0 0.0% Top Speed to 50.0% E 1-3
Hysteresis Top Speed
P29.06 Torque Monitor Level 1 0.0 –300.0% Nominal Torque to E 1-3
+300.0% Nominal Torque
P29.07 Torque Monitor Level 2 0.0 –300.0% Nominal Torque to E 1-3
+300.0% Nominal Torque
P29.08 Torque Monitor 0.0 0.0% Nominal Torque to E 1-3
Hysteresis 100.0% Nominal Torque
P29.09 Zero Speed Tolerance 0.50 0.00 % to 10.00 % E 1-3

5.4.29 Menu 30 - Logic Block Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-112 to 6-116
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P30.00 Comparator A Input 9.01 1 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
P30.01 Comparator A Threshold 0 As Input Parameter E 0-4
P30.02 Comparator A 0 As Input Parameter E 0-4
Hysteresis
P30.03 Comparator A Mode 1 1 = Input = Threshold E,N,L 0-4
2 = Input <> Threshold
3 = Input > Threshold (signed)
4 = Input<= Threshold (signed)
5 = Input< Threshold (signed)
6 = Input>= Threshold (signed)
7 to 10, as 3 to 6, but Absolute
value.
P30.04 Delay A Input Source 1 1 = From Comparator A E,N,L 0-4
2 = From Control Flag
P30.05 Delay A Time 0 0 s to 600 s E 0-4
P30.06 Logic Block A Functions 1 1 = Three Input AND E,N,L 0-4 CF37 and CF38 are
2 = Three Input NAND inputs when Two
3 = Three Input OR Input
4 = Three Input NOR versions chosen for
5 = Three Input XOR Logic Block A
6 = Three Input XNOR
7 to 12 = Two input versions of
1 to 6
P30.07 Latch A Input Selection 1 1 = From Logic Block A E,N,L 0-4
2 = From Control Flag

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-33
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-112 to 6-116

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P30.08 CF36: Delay A Input 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
CLEARED
P30.09 CF37: Logic Block A 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Input 1 CLEARED
P30.10 CF38: Logic Block A 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED
P30.11 CF39: Latch A Set 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
CLEARED
P30.12 CF40: Latch A Reset 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
CLEARED

P30.13 General Purpose Logic As P30.00 E,N 0-4 CF42 and CF43 are
to Block B Parameters to P30.07 inputs when Two
P30.20 Input versions
chosen for Logic
Block B
P30.21 General Purpose Logic 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
to Block B Control Flags CLEARED
P30.25 CF41 to CF45
P30.26 General Purpose Logic As P30.00 E,N 0-4 CF47 and CF48 are
to Block C Parameters to P30.07 inputs when Two
P30.33 Input versions
chosen for Logic
Block C
P30.34 General Purpose Logic 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
to Block C Control Flags CLEARED
P30.38 CF46 to CF50
P30.39 General Purpose Logic As P30.00 E,N 0-4 CF52 and CF53 are
to Block D Parameters to P30.07 inputs when Two
P30.46 Input versions
chosen for Logic
Block D
P30.47 General Purpose Logic 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
to Block D Control Flags CLEARED
P30.51 CF51 to CF55
P30.52 Logic Block E Functions 1 1 = Three Input AND E,N,L 0-4 Three Input version
2 = Three Input NAND = CF56, CF57 and
3 = Three Input OR CF58 used.
4 = Three Input NOR Two Input version =
5 = Three Input XOR CF56 and CF57
6 = Three Input XNOR used.
7 to 12 = Two input versions of Four parameters
1 to 6 per logic block.
P30.53 CF56: Logic Block E 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Input 1 CLEARED Four parameters
per logic block.
P30.54 CF57: Logic Block E 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED Four parameters
per logic block.
P30.55 CF58: Logic Block E 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Input 3 CLEARED Four parameters
per logic block.

Page 5-34 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-112 to 6-116

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P30.56 Logic Block F Functions 1 1 to 12 (see P30.52) E,N,L 0-4 Three Input version
= CF59, CF60 and
CF61 used.
Two Input version =
CF59 and CF60
used.
Four parameters
per logic block.
P30.57 General Purpose Logic 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
to Block F Control Flags CLEARED Four parameters
P30.59 CF59 to CF61 per logic block.
P30.60 Logic Block G Functions 1 1 to 12 (see P30.52) E,N,L 0-4 Three Input version
= CF62, CF63 and
CF64 used.
Two Input version =
CF62 and CF63
used.
Four parameters
per logic block.
P30.61 CF62: Logic Block G 0 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Input 1 Four parameters
per logic block.
P30.62 CF63: Logic Block G 0 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Input 2 Four parameters
per logic block.
P30.63 CF64: Logic Block G 0 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Input 3 Four parameters
per logic block.

P30.64 Logic Block H Functions 1 1 to 12 (see P30.52) E,N,L 0-4 Three Input version
= CF65, CF66 and
CF67 used.
Two Input version =
CF65 and CF66
used.
Four parameters
per logic block.
P30.65 CF65: Logic Block H 0 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Input 1 Four parameters
per logic block.
P30.66 CF66: Logic Block H 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED Four parameters
per logic block.
P30.67 CF67: Logic Block H 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Input 3 CLEARED Four parameters
per logic block.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-35
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

5.4.30 Menu 31 - Status Flag Generator Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-117 to 6-118
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P31.00 Status Flag Generator 0 0 = Stopped E,N,L 0-4
Mode 1 = Manual Trigger Only
2 = Auto Cycle Up
3 = Auto Cycle Down
4 = Auto Cycle Single
Sequence Up
5 = Auto Cycle Single
Sequence Down
P31.01 Status Flag Generator 0 0 to 15 E,N 0-4 Point at which the flag
Start Point generator begins after
a CF100 Reset.
P31.02 Status Flag Generator 1 1 to 16 E,N 0-4 Number of states in the
Length sequence.
P31.03 Time at State 0 0.0 0.0 s to 3200.0 s E 0-4
to to
P31.18 Time at State 15
P31.19 CF97: Status Flag 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Generator Freeze CLEARED
P31.20 CF98: Status Flag 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Generator Up CLEARED
P31.21 CF99: Status Flag 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Generator Down CLEARED
P31.22 CF100: Status Flag 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 CF List *
Generator Reset CLEARED

5.4.31 Menu 32 - Serial Link Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 8-1 to 8-21

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P32.00 Serial Links Write 0 0 = Serial Link can Monitor E,N,L 0-4
Enable Only
1 = Serial Link can Monitor
and Write (edit)
P32.01 Global Response 0 0 = Disabled (reject E,N,L 0-4
(Reject/accept Broadcast messages)
Broadcast Messages) 1 = Enabled (accept
Broadcast
Messaged)
P32.02 Reserved
to
P32.09
P32.10 RS232 Baud Rate 6 4 = 9.6 kbits/s E,L 0-4
5 = 19.2 kbits/s
6 = 38.4 kbits/s
P32.11 RS232 Address 0 0 to 255 E,N 0-4
P32.12 RS232 Protocol 1 0 = No Protocol E,N,L 0-4
1 = GEM80 ESP
2 = MODBUS RTU
3 = MODBUS ASCII
4 = KEYPAD (ESP)
5 = Serial Printer

Page 5-36 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 8-1 to 8-21

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P32.13 RS232 Link Parity 1 1 = 8 bit data, no parity E,N,L 0-4
2 = 8 bit data, even parity
3 = 8 bit data, odd parity
4 = 7 bit data, even parity
5 = 7 bit data, odd parity
6 = 7 bit data, reset parity
7 = 7 bit data, set parity
P32.14 RS232 Timeout 10.0 0.0 s = No Timeout E,N 0-4
0.1 s to 99.9 s
P32.15 RS232 Loss Action 0 0 = No Warning E,L 0-4
(after timeout) 1 = Warning
2 = Trip
P32.16 RS232 CRC Failures 0 0 to 9999 R 0-4
Count
P32.17 RS232 Timeouts Count 0 0 to 9999 R 0-4
P32.18 RS232 Reference 1 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4 Can only be written to
by RS232 serial link.
P32.19 RS232 Reference 2 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4 Can only be written to
by RS232 serial link.
P32.20 RS232 Control Word 0 0000h 0000h to FFFFh E 0-4 Can only be written to
(Also shown in Binary) by RS232 serial link.
P32.21 RS232 Control Word 1 0000h 0000h to FFFFh E 0-4 Can only be written to
(Also shown in Binary) by RS232 serial link.
P32.22 RS232 Control Words at 0 0 = Remain at Previous State E,L 0-4
Loss 1 = Go to Default States (as
P32.23 and P32.24)
P32.23 RS232 Default for 0000h 0000h to FFFFh E,N 0-4 Bit Field
Control Word 0 (Also shown in Binary)
P32.24 RS232 Default for 0000h 0000h to FFFFh E,N 0-4 Bit Field
Control Word 1 (Also shown in Binary)
P32.25 User Page 1 Size 20 1 Parameters to 20 E,N 0-4
Parameters
P32.26 User Page 1 Parameter 9.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Drive Parameter
to 1 to User Page 1
P32.45 Parameter 20
P32.46 Reserved
to
P32.49
P32.50 RS485 Baud Rate 38.4 1 = 1.2 kbits/s E 0-4
2 = 2.4 kbits/s
3 = 4.8 kbits/s
4 = 9.6 kbits/s
5 = 19.2 kbits/s
6 = 38.4 kbits/s
P32.51 RS485 Address 0 0 to 255 E,N 0-4
P32.52 RS485 Protocol 1 0 = No Protocol E,N,L 0-4
1 = GEM80 ESP
2 = MODBUS™ RTU
3 = MODBUS™ ASCII
4 = Drive to Drive
5 = RSVP

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-37
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 8-1 to 8-21

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P32.53 RS485 Link Parity 1 1 = 8 bit data, no parity E,N,L 0-4
2 = 8 bit data, even parity
3 = 8 bit data, odd parity
4 = 7 bit data, even parity
5 = 7 bit data, odd parity
6 = 7 bit data, reset parity
7 = 7 bit data, set parity
P32.54 RS485 Timeout 10.0 0.0s = No Timeout E,N 0-4
0.1 s to 99.9 s
P32.55 RS485 Loss Action 0 0 = No Warning E,L 0-4
(after timeout) 1 = Warning
2 = Trip
P32.56 RS485 CRC Failures 0 0 to 9999 R 0-4
Count
P32.57 RS485 Timeouts Count 0 0 to 9999 R 0-4
P32.58 RS485 Reference 1 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4 Can only be written to
by RS485 serial link.
P32.59 RS485 Reference 2 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4 Can only be written to
by RS485 serial link.
P32.60 RS485 Control Word 0 0000h 0000h to FFFFh E 0-4 Can only be written to
(Also shown in Binary) by RS485 serial link.
P32.61 RS485 Control Word 1 0000h 0000h to FFFFh E 0-4 Can only be written to
(Also shown in Binary) by RS485 serial link.
P32.62 RS485 Control Words at 0 0 = Remain at Previous State. E,L 0-4
Loss 1 = Go to Default States (as
P32.63 and P32.64)
P32.63 RS485 Default for 0000h 0000h to FFFFh E,N 0-4 Bit Field
Control Word 0 (Also shown in Binary)
P32.64 RS485 Default for 0000h 0000h to FFFFh E,N 0-4 Bit Field
Control Word 1 (Also shown in Binary)
P32.65 User Page 2 Size 20 1 Parameters to E,N 0-4
20 Parameters
P32.66 User Page 2 Parameter 9.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
to 1 to
P32.85 User Page 2
Parameter 20
P32.86 Reserved
P32.87 Drive to Drive TX 0 0 = No Parameter sent E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
Reference 1 1.00 to 99.99
P32.88 Drive to Drive TX 0 0 = No Parameter sent E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
Reference 2 1.00 to 99.99
P32.89 Drive to Drive TX 0 0 = No Parameter sent E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
Control Word 0 1.00 to 99.99
P32.90 Drive to Drive TX 0 0 = No Parameter sent E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
Control Word 1 1.00 to 99.99
P32.91 Drive to Drive TX 1.00 –100.00 to +100.00 E 0-4 1.0 = Unity Scale
Reference 1 Scale
P32.92 Drive to Drive TX 1.00 –100.00 to +100.00 E 0-4 1.0 = Unity Scale
Reference 2 Scale
P32.93 Drive to Drive RX 1.00 –100.00 to +100.00 E 0-4 1.0 = Unity Scale
Reference 1 Scale
P32.94 Drive to Drive RX 1.00 –100.00 to +100.00 E 0-4 1.0 = Unity Scale
Reference 2 Scale

Page 5-38 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

5.4.32 Menu 33 - Control Flags 0 to 99 Connection Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-119 to 6-121
and Control Flags are described at Page5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P33.00 CF0 Source See See Table 6-15 E,N CF List *

As defined for the other CF instance

to to Control
P33.99 CF99 Source Flag list
for
defaults
and
meaning

5.4.33 Menu 34 - Control Flags 100 to 127 Connection Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-119 to 6-121
and Control Flags are described at Page5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P34.00 CF100 Source See See Table 6-15 E, N CF List *

As defined for the other CF instance

to to Control
P34.27 CF127 Source Flag list
for
defaults
and
meaning

5.4.34 Menu 35 - Miscellaneous Features Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-122 to 6-127

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P35.00 PWM Switching 1.25 kHz 1= 1.25 kHz S,E,L 0-4 1.25 kHz is not used
Frequency for all 2 = 2.5 kHz in SFE mode.
Motor 3 = 5.0 kHz
Control 4 = 7.5 kHz
Modes 7.5 kHz is not
2.5 kHz in available for DELTA
SFE. Systems

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-39
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-122 to 6-127

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P35.01 Keypad Removal OK 0 0 = Disabled (Trip on keypad E,L 0-4 MUST PRESS THE
removal) ESC KEY (2 or 3
times) AND FOLLOW
1 = Enabled (allow keypad THE PRESENTED
removal, see comments) REMOVAL
INSTRUCTIONS TO
REMOVE THE
KEYPAD
CORRECTLY,
otherwise the drive
will trip irrespective of
the state of P35.01.
P35.03 Setup Review Mode 0 0 = Disabled E,L 0-4
1 = Enabled (scroll through a
Review of the user Edits)
P35.04 Auto-Locking 0 0 = Auto-Locking OFF E,N,L 0-4
1 = Lock Engineer Parameters
2 = Lock All Parameters
P35.05 RS232 Serial Link Baud 9.6 9.6 kbits/s to 38.4 kbits/s E 0-4 See Page 6-121
Rate (for printing drive
parameters)
P35.06 RS232 Serial Link 4 0 = No Protocol E,N,L 0-4 See Page 6-121
Message Protocol 1 = GEM80 ESP (for printing drive
2 = MODBUS™ RTU parameters)
3 = MODBUS™ ASCII
4 = KEYPAD (ESP)
5 = Serial Printer
P35.07 Print Out Option 0 0 = Print Nothing E,N,L 0-4 See Page 6-121
1 = Print All Parameters (for printing drive
2 = Print non Default parameters)
Parameters (User Edits)
3 = Print User Page 1
4 = Print History Log
5 = Auto Print History ONLY
when Tripped.
6 = CANopen EDS Body
7 = DeviceNet EDS Body
8 = AB-DeviceNet EDS Body
P35.08 Print Lines/second 0.7 0.5 Lines/Second to E 0-4 See Page 6-121 (for
10.0 Lines/Second printing drive
parameters)
P35.09 Timed Overcurrent 0 0 = Disabled E,N,L 1
Avoidance Enable 1 = Enabled
P35.10 Over Temperature 0 0 = Disabled E,N,L 1
Avoidance Enable 1 = Enabled
P35.11 Expansion Bus Device 0 0 = Non fitted R 0-4 Various
1 = 1Mbit/s FIP Communication
2 = 2.5Mbit/s FIP Boards available from
3 = Fieldbus Coupler Converteam e.g.
5 = MicroPEC interface FIP. PROFIBUS.
These are detailed in
separate manuals.
Parameter P35.11
indicates which
Communication
Board is fitted.
P35.12 AC Loss Ride-through 0 0 = Disabled S,E,N,L 0-4 Mains Dip
1 = Enabled Ridethrough

Page 5-40 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-122 to 6-127

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P35.13 Nominal Mains Voltage 400 300V to 800V S,E 0-4
P35.14 Maximum Ambient 40°C 35°C to 50°C E,N 0-4
Temperature
P35.15 Fan Type 0 0 = Standard E,N,L 0-4 Only DELTA drives
1 = Large will allow other than
the standard fan type
to be selected.
P35.16 Drive Continuous Drive size To display the drive R 0-4
Current Rating dependent continuous current rating as a
function of:
P35.00 – PWM Switching
Frequency
P35.13 – Nominal Input
Voltage
P35.14 – Maximum Ambient
Temperature (35°C
to 50°C, default
40°C)
P35.15 – Fan Type (default 0
– standard)
P99.01 – Control Method
P99.02 – Overload Setting
P35.17 Advanced Temperature 0 0 = Disabled L,E,N 1-4 Not available in mode
Monitoring 1 = Enabled 0. Only available
when the MV3000
hardware permits.
P35.18 Action on Sharing Error 1 0 = No action L,N,E 0-4 Applies to multiple
Detection 1 = Warning DELTA systems only.
2 = Trip
P35.19 Disable Sharing 0 0 = Enabled L,N,E 0-4 Applies to multiple
1 = Disabled DELTA systems only.
P35.20 PWM Sharing Threshold 5 0 to 7 E 0-4 Applies to multiple
DELTA systems only.
P35.21 100ms Sharing 10 1 to 100 E 0-4 Applies to multiple
Threshold DELTA systems only.
P35.22 No.100ms Sharings 0 R 0-4 Applies to multiple
DELTA systems only.
P35.23 Sharing Event Time 4 1 = 0.4μs L,E 0-4
2 = 0.8μs
3 = 1.2μs
4 = 1.6μs
5 = 2.0μs
6 = 2.4μs
7 = 2.8μs
8 = 3.2μs
9 = 3.6μs
10 = 4.0μs
11 = 4.4μs
12 = 4.8μs
13 = 5.2μs
14 = 5.6μs
15 = 6.0μs
16 = 6.4μs
P35.24 Reserved
to
P35.29

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-41
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-122 to 6-127

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P35.30 PWM Synchronisation 0.0 0.0 to 100% PWM Period E 2, 4 Percentage of the
Offset PWM period by which
the PWM is advanced
from the received
synchronisation pulse
P35.31 PWM Synchronisation 0 0 to 400μs E 2, 4 Time by which the
Delay Compensation PWM of the slave
drive is advanced to
compensate for
synchronisation
signal delays and
PWM frequency
transmission delays
in the power cables

5.4.35 Menu 36 - Position Control Settings (Vector with Encoder Only)

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-128 to 6-137
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No. †
P36.00 Position Control Mode 1 1 = Finite Control S,E,N,L 1-3
2 = Turntable Mode, Bi-
directional
3 = Turntable Mode, Forward
only
P36.01 Position Pulses/Bit 1 1 to 32 E 1-3 Number of encoder
pulse/bit of position
feedback.
P36.02 Maximum Position Low 9999 –9999 Pulses to +9999 Pulses E 1-3 P36.02+P36.03
forms the value for
Max position.
P36.03 Maximum Position High 9999 –9999 x10k Pulses to E 1-3 P36.02+P36.03
+9999 x10k Pulses forms the value for
Max position.
P36.04 Minimum Position Low -9999 –9999 Pulses to +9999 Pulses E 1-3 P36.04+P36.05
forms the value for
Min position.
P36.05 Minimum Position High -9999 –9999 x10k Pulses to E 1-3 P36.04+P36.05
+9999 x10k Pulses forms the value for
Minimum position.

P36.06 0% Position Low 0 –9999 Pulses to +9999 Pulses E 1-3 P36.06+P36.07

forms the value for
0% position. This
value allows an
offset for “datum” to
be entered.
P36.07 0% Position High 0 –9999 x10k Pulses to E 1-3 P36.06+P36.07
+9999 x10k Pulses forms the value for
0% position.
P36.08 CF86: High Limit 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
Reached (limit switch) CLEARED
P36.09 CF87: Low Limit 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
Reached (limit switch) CLEARED

Page 5-42 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-128 to 6-137

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No. †
P36.10 Position Shaper Range 0 0 Pulses to 9999 Pulses E 1-3 P36.10+P36.11
Low forms the value for
position shaper
range.
P36.11 Position Shaper Range 10 0x10k Pulses to E 1-3 P36.10+P36.11
High 9999x10k Pulses forms the value for
position shaper
range.
P36.12 Position Shaper -X1 –20.00 –100.00 % to 0% position E 1-3
P36.13 Position Shaper -Y1 –44.72 –100.00% Top Speed to E 1-3
0.00% Top Speed
P36.14 Position Shaper -X2 –40.00 –100.00 % to 0% position E 1-3
P36.15 Position Shaper -Y2 –63.25 –100.00% Top Speed to E 1-3
0.00% Top Speed
P36.16 Position Shaper -X3 –60.00 –100.00% to 0% position E 1-3
P36.17 Position Shaper -Y3 –77.46 –100.00% Top Speed to E 1-3
0.00% Top Speed
P36.18 Position Shaper -X4 –80.00 –100.00% to 0% position E 1-3
P36.19 Position Shaper -Y4 –89.44 –100.00% Top Speed to E 1-3
0.00% Top Speed
P36.20 Position Shaper -X5 –100.00 –100.00 % to 0% position E 1-3
P36.21 Position Shaper -Y5 –100.00 –100.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
0.00% Top Speed
P36.22 Position Shaper X1 20.00 100.00 % to 0% position E 1-3
P36.23 Position Shaper Y1 44.72 100.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
0.00% Top Speed
P36.24 Position Shaper X2 40.00 100.00 % to 0% position E 1-3
P36.25 Position Shaper Y2 63.25 100.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
0.00% Top Speed
P36.26 Position Shaper X3 60.00 100.00 % to 0% position E 1-3
P36.27 Position Shaper Y3 77.46 100.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
0.00% Top Speed
P36.28 Position Shaper X4 80.00 100.00 % to 0% position E 1-3
P36.29 Position Shaper Y4 89.44 100.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
0.00% Top Speed
P36.30 Position Shaper X5 100.00 100.00 % to 0% position E 1-3
P36.31 Position Shaper Y5 100.00 100.00 % Top Speed to E 1-3
0.00% Top Speed
P36.32 Datum Position Low 0 –9999 Pulses to +9999 Pulses E 1-3 P36.32+P36.33
forms the value for
Datum position, an
offset value which
can be used e.g.
after a “next Z”
datum movement.
P36.33 Datum Position High 0 –9999x10k Pulses to E 1-3 P36.32+P36.33
9999x10k Pulses forms the value for
Datum position, an
offset value which
can be used e.g.
after a “next Z”
datum movement.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-43
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-128 to 6-137

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No. †
P36.34 Datum Sequence 1 1 = Low Limit, Z Pulse E, L 1-3
2 = High Limit, Z Pulse
3 = Low Limit, Rev, Z Pulse
4 = High Limit, Rev, Z Pulse
5 = Low Limit, No Z Pulse
6 = High Limit, No Z Pulse
7 = Low Limit, Rev, No Z
Pulse
8 = High Limit, Rev, No Z
Pulse
9 = No Limit, Fwd, Z Pulse
10 = No Limit, Rev, Z Pulse
11 = Datum Input Only
P36.35 Datum Speed 1 0.00 0.00 % Top Speed 1-3
to 100.00 % Top Speed
P36.36 Datum Speed 2 0.00 0.00% Top Speed to 00.00% 1-3
Top Speed
P36.37 Datum Speed 3 0.00 0.00 % Top Speed to 1-3
100.00% Top Speed
P36.38 CF80: Force Position 0.000 See Control Flag Menus E, N 1-3 CF List *
Valid CLEARED 33/34
P36.39 CF81: Force Position 0.000 See Control Flag Menus E, N 1-3 CF List *
Invalid CLEARED 33/34
P36.40 CF82: Datum Move 0.000 See Control Flag Menus E, N 1-3 CF List *
Permit CLEARED 33/34
P36.41 CF83: Perform Datum 0.000 See Control Flag Menus E, N 1-3 CF List *
Movement CLEARED 33/34
P36.42 CF84: Datum Approach 0.000 See Control Flag Menus E, N 1-3 CF List *
CLEARED 33/34
P36.43 CF85: Datum Input 0.000 See Control Flag Menus E, N 1-3 CF List *
CLEARED 33/34
P36.44 Approach Bias Low 0 –9999 Pulses to +9999 Pulses E 1-3 P36.44+P36.45
forms the value for
Datum bias.
P36.45 Approach Bias High 0 –9999 x10k Pulses to E 1-3 P36.44+P36.45
+9999 x10k Pulses forms the value for
Datum bias.
P36.46 CF90: Uni-directional 0.000 See Control Flag Menus E, N 1-3 CF List *
Approach Enable CLEARED 33/34
P36.47 Incher Step UP Low 0 –9999 Pulses to +9999 Pulses E 1-3 P36.47+P36.48
forms the value for
Incher Step UP.
P36.48 Incher Step UP High 0 –9999 x10k Pulses to E 1-3 P36.47+P36.48
+9999 x10k Pulses forms the value for
Incher Step UP.
P36.49 Incher Step DOWN Low 0 –9999 Pulses to +9999 Pulses E 1-3 P36.49+P36.50
forms the value for
Incher Step Down.
P36.50 Incher Step DOWN 0 –9999 x10k Pulses to E 1-3 P36.49+P36.50
High +9999 x10k Pulses forms the value for
Incher Step Down.
P36.51 CF89: Enable Inching 0.000 See Control Flag Menus E, N 1-3 CF List *
CLEARED 33/34
P36.52 CF95: Inching UP 0.000 See Control Flag Menus E, N 1-3 CF List *
CLEARED 33/34

Page 5-44 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-128 to 6-137

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No. †
P36.53 CF96: Inching DOWN 0.000 See Control Flag Menus E, N 1-3 CF List *
CLEARED 33/34
P36.54 Position Monitor 50 0 Pulses to 9999 Pulses E 1-3 P36.54+P36.55
Tolerance Low forms the value for
Position Monitor
Tolerance.
P36.55 Position Monitor 0 0x10k Pulses to 9999x10k E 1-3 P36.54+P36.55
Tolerance High Pulses forms the value for
Position Monitor
Tolerance.

Note:
†: For operation with any of these Mode Numbers an encoder is required.

5.4.36 Menu 37 - Position Reference Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-138 to 6-139
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No. †
P37.00 Position Reference 1 1 = Fixed Posn Ref Menu E,N,L 1-3
Source 1 2 = Analogue Input 1
3 = Analogue Input 2
4 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
5 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
6 = RS485 Double Word
7 = RS232 Double Word
8 = RS485 REF1 (0.01%)
9 = RS485 REF2 (0.01%)
10 = RS232 REF1 (0.01%)
11 = RS232 REF2 (0.01%)
12 = PID Controller (0.01%)
13 = Motorised Pot (0.01%)
14 = Pointer 16
15 = Double Pointer
(Pointer 16 = Lo,
Pointer 17 = Hi)
P37.01 Position Reference 4 1 to 15 (see P37.00) E,N,L 1-3
Source 2
P37.02 Backup Position 0 0 = No Backup E,N,L 1-3
Reference 1 to 15 (see P37.00)
P37.03 CF88: Position 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
Reference 1/2 Selection CLEARED
P37.04 Position to Learn 0 0 to 15 E,N 1-3
P37.05 CF101: Position Learn 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
NOW CLEARED
P37.06 Fixed Position 0 -9999 Pulses to 9999 Pulses E 1-3 P37.06+P37.07 forms
Reference #0 Low the value for Position
Reference #0.
P37.07 Fixed Position 0 –9999 x10k Pulses to E 1-3 P37.06+P37.07 forms
Reference #0 High +9999 x10k Pulses the value for Position
Reference #0.
P37.08 Fixed Position 0 –9999 Pulses to +9999 Pulses E 1-3
to Reference #1 to Fixed –9999 x10k Pulses to
P37.37 Position Reference #15, +9999 x10k Pulses
Low/ High

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-45
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-138 to 6-139

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No. †
P37.38 CF91: Position 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
Reference Select 0 CLEARED
P37.39 CF92: Position 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
Reference Select 1 CLEARED
P37.40 CF93: Position 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
Reference Select 2 CLEARED
P37.41 CF94: Position 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 1-3 CF List *
Reference Select 3 CLEARED

Note:
†: For operation with any of these Mode Numbers an encoder is required.

5.4.37 Menu 38 - Position Control Monitor

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-140 to 6-141

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No. †
P38.00 Position Reference Low 0 –9999 Pulses to +9999 Pulses R 1-3 P38.00+P38.01
forms the value for
Position Reference.
P38.01 Position Reference High 0 –9999 x10k Pulses to R 1-3 P38.00+P38.01
+9999 x10k Pulses forms the value for
Position Reference.
P38.02 Position Feedback Low 0 –9999 Pulses to +9999 Pulses R 1-3 P38.02+P38.03
forms the value for
Position Feedback.
P38.03 Position Feedback High 0 –9999 x10k Pulses to R 1-3 P38.02+P38.03
+9999 x10k Pulses forms the value for
Position Feedback.
P38.04 Position Error Low 0 –9999 Pulses to +9999 Pulses R 1-3 P38.04+P38.05
forms the value for
Position Error.
P38.05 Position Error High 0 –9999 x10k Pulses to R 1-3 P38.04+P38.05
+9999 x10k Pulses forms the value for
Position Error.
P38.06 Position Reference (%) 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 1-3
P38.07 Position Feedback (%) 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 1-3
P38.08 Position Error (%) 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 1-3
P38.09 Position Status Word 0 0000h 0000h to FFFFh R 1-3
(Also shown in Binary)
P38.10 Position Control Flags 0 0000h 0000h to FFFFh R 1-3
(Also shown in Binary)
P38.11 Position Control Flags 1 0000h 0000h to FFFFh R 1-3
(Also shown in Binary)
P38.12 Position Control Output 0.00 –100.00% to +100.00% R 1-3

Note:
†: For operation with any of these Mode Numbers an encoder is required.

Page 5-46 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

5.4.38 Menu 39 - User Configurable Menu (Menu 1) Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-142

Par No. Function Default Default Range Attrib Comments

Modes 0-3 Mode 4
P39.00 User Menu 9.00 50.00 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 0
P39.01 User Menu 9.01 51.00 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 1
P39.02 User Menu 9.05 51.01 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 2
P39.03 User Menu 9.09 51.03 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 3
P39.04 User Menu 9.07 51.04 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 4
P39.05 User Menu 9.08 51.06 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 5
P39.06 User Menu 10.00 10.00 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 6
P39.07 User Menu 10.10 10.10 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 7
P39.08 User Menu 10.11 10.11 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 8
P39.09 User Menu 99.10 99.10 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 9
P39.10 User Menu 2.01 50.01 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 10
P39.11 User Menu 2.00 50.02 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 11
P39.12 User Menu 2.02 50.03 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 12
P39.13 User Menu 2.04 50.04 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 13
P39.14 User Menu 2.05 52.08 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 14
P39.15 User Menu 5.15 52.09 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 15
P39.16 User Menu 5.16 52.10 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 16
P39.17 User Menu 5.17 52.11 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 17
P39.18 User Menu 5.18 53.03 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 18
P39.19 User Menu 3.00 51.10 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 19
P39.20 User Menu 3.01 51.13 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 20
P39.21 User Menu 3.31 7.27 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 21
P39.22 User Menu 6.00 7.28 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 22
P39.23 User Menu 6.02 7.29 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 23
P39.24 User Menu 4.00 33.00 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 24
P39.25 User Menu 4.07 33.01 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 25

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-47
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-142

Par No. Function Default Default Range Attrib Comments

Modes 0-3 Mode 4
P39.26 User Menu 3.05 34.16 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 26
P39.27 User Menu 99.05 99.05 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 27
P39.28 User Menu 4.12 99.11 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 28
P39.29 User Menu 99.02 99.02 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 29
P39.30 User Menu 99.00 99.00 1.00 to 99.99 (0 = No Parameter) E,N Any Parameter
Element 30

5.4.39 Menu 40 - Summing Nodes Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-143 to 6-147
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P40.00 Summing Node A Input 1 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.01 Summing Node A Input 2 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.02 Summing Node A Scale 1 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.03 Summing Node A Scale 2 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.04 Summing Node A Output 0.00 –100.00 to +100.00 R 0-4
P40.05 Summing Node B Input 1 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.06 Summing Node B Input 2 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.07 Summing Node B Scale 1 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.08 Summing Node B Scale 2 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.09 Summing Node B Output 0.00 –100.00 to +100.00 R 0-4
P40.10 Summing Node C Input 1 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.11 Summing Node C Input 2 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.12 Summing Node C Scale 1 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.13 Summing Node C Scale 2 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.14 Summing Node C Output 0.00 –100.00 to +100.00 R 0-4
P40.15 Summing Node D Input 1 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.16 Summing Node D Input 2 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.17 Summing Node D Scale 1 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.18 Summing Node D Scale 2 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.19 Summing Node D Output 0.00 –100.00 to +100.00 R 0-4
P40.20 Summing Node A Mode 1 1 = Add I/P 1 + I/P 2 E,N,L 0-4
2 = Sub I/P 1 - I/P 2
3 = Mult I/P 1 * I/P 2
4 = Div I/P 1 / I/P 2
P40.21 Summing Node B Mode 1 1 = Add I/P 1 + I/P 2 E,N,L 0-4
2 = Sub I/P 1 - I/P 2
3 = Mult I/P 1 * I/P 2
4 = Div I/P 1 / I/P 2
P40.22 Summing Node C Mode 1 1 = Add I/P 1 + I/P 2 E,N,L 0-4
2 = Sub I/P 1 - I/P 2
3 = Mult I/P 1 * I/P 2
4 = Div I/P 1 / I/P 2

Page 5-48 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-143 to 6-147

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P40.23 Summing Node D Mode 1 1 = Add I/P 1 + I/P 2 E,N,L 0-4
2 = Sub I/P 1 - I/P 2
3 = Mult I/P 1 * I/P 2
4 = Div I/P 1 / I/P 2
P40.24 Summing Node E Input 1 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.25 Summing Node E Input 2 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.26 Summing Node E Scale 1 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.27 Summing Node E Scale 2 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.28 Summing Node E Output 0.00 –100.00 to +100.00 R 0-4
P40.29 Summing Node F Input 1 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.30 Summing Node F Input 2 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.31 Summing Node F Scale 1 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.32 Summing Node F Scale 2 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.33 Summing Node F Output 0.00 –100.00 to +100.00 R 0-4
P40.34 Summing Node G Input 1 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.35 Summing Node G Input 2 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.36 Summing Node G Scale 1 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.37 Summing Node G Scale 2 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.38 Summing Node G Output 0.00 –100.00 to +100.00 R 0-4
P40.39 Summing Node H Input 1 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.40 Summing Node H Input 2 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.41 Summing Node H Scale 1 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.42 Summing Node H Scale 2 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
P40.43 Summing Node H Output 0.00 –100.00 to +100.00 R 0-4
P40.44 Summing Node E Mode 1 1 = Add I/P 1 + I/P 2 E,N,L 0-4
2 = Sub I/P 1 - I/P 2
3 = Mult I/P 1 * I/P 2
4 = Div I/P 1 / I/P 2
P40.45 Summing Node F Mode 1 1 = Add I/P 1 + I/P 2 E,N,L 0-4
2 = Sub I/P 1 - I/P 2
3 = Mult I/P 1 * I/P 2
4 = Div I/P 1 / I/P 2
P40.46 Summing Node G Mode 1 1 = Add I/P 1 + I/P 2 E,N,L 0-4
2 = Sub I/P 1 - I/P 2
3 = Mult I/P 1 * I/P 2
4 = Div I/P 1 / I/P 2
P40.47 Summing Node H Mode 1 1 = Add I/P 1 + I/P 2 E,N,L 0-4
2 = Sub I/P 1 -I/P 2
3 = Mult I/P 1 * I/P 2
4 = Div /P 1 / I/P 2
P40.48 Square Root A Input 1.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.49 Square Root of A Monitor As Input A parameter R 0-4
P40.50 Square Root B Input 1.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.51 Square Root of B Monitor As Input B parameter R 0-4
P40.52 Comparator U Input 1 1.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.53 Comparator U Input 2 40.54 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.54 Fixed Reference 0 As Comparator U Input 1 E 0-4
Comparator U Parameter

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-49
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-143 to 6-147

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P40.55 Comparator U Hysteresis 0 As Comparator U Input 1 E 0-4
Parameter
P40.56 Comparator U Mode 1 1 = ‘Input 1 = Input 2’ E,N,L 0-4
2 = ‘Input 1 <> Input 2’
3 = ‘Input 1 > Input 2’
4 = ‘Input 1 <= Input 2’
5 = ‘Input 1 < Input 2’
6 = ‘Input 1 > Input 2’
P40.57 Comparator U Output Monitor As Comparator U Input 1 R
Parameter
P40.58 Comparator V Input 1 1.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.59 Comparator V Input 2 40.60 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.60 Fixed Reference 0 As Comparator V Input 1 E 0-4
Comparator V Parameter
P40.61 Comparator V Hysteresis 0 As Comparator V Input 1 E 0-4
Parameter
P40.62 Comparator V Mode 1 1 = ‘Input 1 = Input 2’ E,N,L 0-4
2 = ‘Input 1 <> Input 2’
3 = ‘Input 1 > Input 2’
4 = ‘Input 1 <= Input 2’
5 = ‘Input 1 < Input 2’
6 = ‘Input 1 > Input 2’
P40.63 Comparator V Output Monitor As Comparator V Input 1 R
Parameter
P40.64 Comparator W Input 1 1.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.65 Comparator W Input 2 40.66 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.66 Fixed Reference 0 As Comparator W Input 1 E 0-4
Comparator W Parameter
P40.67 Comparator W Hysteresis 0 As Comparator W Input 1 E 0-4
Parameter
P40.68 Comparator W Mode 1 1 = ‘Input 1 = Input 2’ E,N,L 0-4
2 = ‘Input 1 <> Input 2’
3 = ‘Input 1 > Input 2’
4 = ‘Input 1 <= Input 2’
5 = ‘Input 1 < Input 2’
6 = ‘Input 1 > Input 2’
P40.69 Comparator W Output Monitor As Comparator W Input 1 R
Parameter
P40.70 Comparator X Input 1 1.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.71 Comparator X Input 2 40.72 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.72 Fixed Reference 0 As Comparator X Input 1 E 0-4
Comparator X Parameter
P40.73 Comparator X Hysteresis 0 As Comparator X Input 1 E 0-4
Parameter
P40.74 Comparator X Mode 1 1 = ‘Input 1 = Input 2’ E,N,L 0-4
2 = ‘Input 1 <> Input 2’
3 = ‘Input 1 > Input 2’
4 = ‘Input 1 <= Input 2’
5 = ‘Input 1 < Input 2’
6 = ‘Input 1 > Input 2’
P40.75 Comparator X Output Monitor As Comparator X Input 1 R
Parameter
P40.76 Switch A Input 1 40.78 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter

Page 5-50 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-143 to 6-147

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P40.77 Switch A Input 2 40.79 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.78 Fixed Value A1 0.00 -300.00 to 300.00 E 0-4
P40.79 Fixed Value A2 0.00 -300.00 to 300.00 E 0-4
P40.80 CF140: Switch A State 0 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 0 selects Input 1
1 selects Input 2
P40.81 Switch A Output Monitor As Switch A Input Parameter 1 R
P40.82 Switch B Input 1 40.84 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.83 Switch B Input 2 40.85 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.84 Fixed Value B1 0.00 -300.00 to 300.00 E 0-4
P40.85 Fixed Value B2 0.00 -300.00 to 300.00 E 0-4
P40.86 CF141: Switch B State 0 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 0 selects Input 1
1 selects Input 2
P40.87 Switch B Output Monitor As Switch B Input Parameter 1 R
P40.88 Switch C Input 1 40.90 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.89 Switch C Input 2 40.91 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.90 Fixed Value C1 0.00 -300.00 to 300.00 E 0-4
P40.91 Fixed Value C2 0.00 -300.00 to 300.00 E 0-4
P40.92 CF142: Switch C State 0 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 0 selects Input 1
1 selects Input 2
P40.93 Switch C Output Monitor As Switch C Input Parameter R
1
P40.94 Switch D Input 1 40.96 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.95 Switch D Input 2 40.97 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
P40.96 Fixed Value D1 0.00 -300.00 to 300.00 E 0-4
P40.97 Fixed Value D2 0.00 -300.00 to 300.00 E 0-4
P40.98 CF143: Switch D State 0 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N 0-4 0 selects Input 1
1 selects Input 2
P40.99 Switch D Output Monitor As Switch D Input Parameter R
1

5.4.40 Menu 41 - Programmable Status Word Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-148

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P41.00 Programmable Status 0.000 Allowed selections as per E,N 0-4
to Word 0 Bit 0 Source CLEARED Control Flag Menus 33/34
P41.15 to
Programmable Status
Word 0 Bit 15 Source
P41.16 Programmable Status 0.000 Allowed selections as per E,N 0-4
to Word 1 Bit 0 Source CLEARED Control Flag Menus 33/34
P41.31 to
Programmable Status
Word 1 Bit 15 Source
P41.32 Programmable Status 0000h 0000h to FFFFh R 0-4
Word 0 (Also shown in Binary)
P41.33 Programmable Status 0000h 0000h to FFFFh R 0-4
Word 1 (Also shown in Binary)

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-51
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

5.4.41 Menu 42 - Reference Pointers – Source Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-149 to 6-151

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P42.00 Pointer 1 Source 1.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Parameter
to to
P42.38 Pointer 20 Source
P42.01 Pointer 1 Scale 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4 Any Parameter
to to
P42.39 Pointer 20 Scale
P42.40 Pointer 21 Source 1.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 4 For SFE Mode
to to
P42.52 Pointer 27 Source
P42.41 Pointer 21 Scale 100.00 –300.00 to +300.00 E 4 For SFE Mode
to to
P42.53 Pointer 27 Scale
P42.54 Pointer 28 Source 1.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 For DB Mode
P42.55 Pointer 28 Scale 100.00 -300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4 For DB Mode
P42.56 Pointer 29 Source 1.00 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4
to to
P42.74 Pointe 38 Source
P42.57 Pointer 29 Scale 100.00 -300.00 to +300.00 E 0-4
to to
P42.75 Pointer 38 Scale

5.4.42 Menu 43 - Load Fault Detection Window Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-152 to 6-153

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P43.00 Load Fault Action 0 0 = No Action (Status Flags E,N,L 1-3
60 & 61 are still active)
1 = Warning
2 = Trip
P43.01 Load Fault Input 1 1 = Drive Current E,N,L 1-3
2 = Torque Demand
P43.02 Load Fault Time 10 1s to 100s E 1-3
P43.03 Forward Speed 1 10.00 1.00 % to 100.00 % E 1-3
P43.04 Forward Maximum Load 1 100.00 1.00 % to 300.00 % E 1-3
P43.05 Forward Minimum Load 1 1.00 1.00 % to 300.00 % E 1-3
P43.06 Forward Speed 2 10.00 1.00 % to 100.00 % E 1-3
P43.07 Forward Maximum Load 2 100.00 1.00 % to 300.00 % E 1-3
P43.08 Forward Minimum Load 2 1.00 1.00 % to 300.00 % E 1-3
P43.09 Forward Speed 3 10.00 1.00 % to 100.00 % E 1-3
P43.10 Forward Maximum Load 3 100.00 1.00 % to 300.00 % E 1-3
P43.11 Forward Minimum Load 3 1.00 1.00 % to 300.00 % E 1-3
P43.12 Reverse Speed 1 10.00 1.00 % to 100.00 % E 1-3
P43.13 Reverse Maximum Load 1 100.00 1.00 % to 300.00 % E 1-3
P43.14 Reverse Minimum Load 1 1.00 1.00 % to 300.00 % E 1-3
P43.15 Reverse Speed 2 10.00 1.00 % to 100.00 % E 1-3
P43.16 Reverse Maximum Load 2 100.00 1.00 % to 300.00 % E 1-3
P43.17 Reverse Minimum Load 2 1.00 1.00 % to 300.00 % E 1-3

Page 5-52 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-152 to 6-153

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P43.18 Reverse Speed 3 10.00 1.00 % to 100.00 % E 1-3
P43.19 Reverse Maximum Load 3 100.00 1.00 % to 300.00 % E 1-3
P43.20 Reverse Minimum Load 3 1.00 1.00 % to 300.00 % E 1-3

5.4.43 Menu 44 - Reference Shaper Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-154 to 6-155

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P44.00 Reference Shaper X1 –100.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.01 Reference Shaper Y1 –100.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.02 Reference Shaper X2 –80.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.03 Reference Shaper Y2 –80.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.04 Reference Shaper X3 –60.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.05 Reference Shaper Y3 –60.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.06 Reference Shaper X4 –40.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.07 Reference Shaper Y4 –40.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.08 Reference Shaper X5 –20.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.09 Reference Shaper Y5 –20.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.10 Reference Shaper X6 20.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.11 Reference Shaper Y6 20.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.12 Reference Shaper X7 40.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.13 Reference Shaper Y7 40.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.14 Reference Shaper X8 60.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.15 Reference Shaper Y8 60.00 –100.00 % to 100.00 % E 0-4
P44.16 Reference Shaper X9 80.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.17 Reference Shaper Y9 80.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.18 Reference Shaper X10 100.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.19 Reference Shaper Y10 100.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % E 0-4
P44.20 Reference Shaper O/P 0.00 –100.00 % to +100.00 % R 0-4

5.4.44 Menu 45 - Temperature

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-156 to 6-157

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P45.00 IGBT U1 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.01 IGBT V1 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.02 IGBT W1 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.03 Rectifier 1 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-3
P45.04 Rectifier 2 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-3
P45.05 DB 1 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.06 DB 2 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.07 IGBT U2 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-53
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-156 to 6-157

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P45.08 IGBT V2 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.09 IGBT W2 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.10 IGBT U3 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.11 IGBT V3 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.12 IGBT W3 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.13 IGBT U4 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.14 IGBT V4 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.15 IGBT W4 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.16 IGBT U5 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.17 IGBT V5 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.18 IGBT W5 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.19 IGBT U6 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.20 IGBT V6 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.21 IGBT W6 Temperature 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.22 Temperature Warn/Trip 0 0 to 4 States R 0-4
Type 0 = None
1 = Over Temperature
2 = Under Temperature
3 = Rate of Temp. Rise
4 = Junction Temperature
P45.23 Temperature Warn/Trip 0 0 to 23 R 0-4
Cause 0 = None
1 = I/P 1
2 = I/P2
3 = O/P U1
4 = O/P V1
5 = O/P W1
6 = DB 1
7 = O/P U2
8 = O/P V2
9 = O/P W2
10 = O/P U3
11 = O/P V3
12 = O/P W3
13 = DB 2
14 = O/P U4
15 = O/P V4
16 = O/P W4
17 = O/P U5
18 = O/P V5
19 = O/P W5
20 = O/P U6
21 = O/P V6
22 = O/P W6
23 = ELECTRONICS
P45.24 Temperature at Warn/Trip 0 -40 °C to 150 °C R 0-4
P45.25 IGBT Silicon Temperature 0 to 100% of Tj max R 1-4 Only active when
P35.17 is enabled
P45.26 Free Wheel Diode Silicon 0 to 100% of Tj max R 1-4 Only active when
Temperature P35.17 is enabled
P45.27 Maximum Silicon 0 to 100% of Tj max R 1-4 Only active when
Temperature P35.17 is enabled

Page 5-54 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

5.4.45 Menu 46 - AC Loss Ridethrough (Vector Control Only)

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-158 to 6-160

Par No Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comment

no.
P46.00 AC Loss Ridethrough 0 0 =disable E,N,L 2
Enable 1 = enable
P46.01 Nominal Mains Voltage Drive size 300 to 900V S,E 2
dependent
P46.02 Mains Voltage Scaling 100 10 to 1000% E 2
P46.03 Vrms mains Monitor 300 to 900V R 2 Only used in
Ridethrough if
MVM is fitted.
P46.04 Mains Amplitude Monitor 0.00 to 300.00% R 2 Only used in
Ridethrough if
MVM is fitted.
P46.05 Ridethrough Threshold 80.00 0.00 to 100.00% E 2 Only used in
Ridethrough if
MVM is fitted.
P46.06 Mains Filter Bandwidth 1 0 = 100Hz E,N,L 2 Only used in
1 = 200Hz Ridethrough if
2 = 400Hz MVM is fitted.
4 = 800Hz
P46.07 Ridethrough Active Monitor 0 = Not Active R 2
1 = Active
P46.08 Mains Loss Action 1 0 = Ignore S,E,L 2
1 = Warning
P46.09 Reserved
to
P46.19
P46.20 Vdc Controller 100 0 to 200rad/s E 2
Bandwidth
P46.21 Vdc Controller Gains, 0 0 = Automatic L,E 2
Auto-Manual 1 = Manual
P46.22 DC Link Control Kp Drive size 0 to 16000 E 2 Automatically
dependent calculated when
P46.21 = 0
P46.23 DC Link Control Ki Drive size 0 to 16000 E 2 Automatically
dependent calculated when
P46.21 = 0

5.4.46 Menu 47 - Second Logic Menu

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-161 to 6-174
and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P47.00 Comparator I Input 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Drive Parameter
P47.01 Comparator I Threshold 0 As Input Parameter E 0-4
P47.02 Comparator I Hysteresis 0 As Input Parameter E 0-4
P47.03 Comparator I Mode 1 1 = ‘Input = Threshold’ E,N,L 0-4
2 = ‘Input <> Threshold’
3 = ‘Input > Threshold’
(signed)
4 = ‘Input <= Threshold’
(signed)
5 = ‘Input < Threshold’
(signed)
6 = ‘input >= Threshold’
(signed)
7 to 10 as 3 to 6 but Absolute
Value

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-55
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-161 to 6-174

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P47.04 Delay I Input Source 1 1 = From Comparator I E,N,L 0-4
2 = From Control Flag
P47.05 Delay I Time 0 0 to 600s E
P47.06 Logic Block I Function 1 1 = Three Input AND E,N,L 0-4 CF145 and CF146 are
2 = Three Input NAND inputs when TWO Input
3 = Three Input OR versions are chosen for
4 = Three Input NOR Logic Block I
5 = Three Input XOR
6 = Three Input XNOR
7 to 12 = Two Input versions
of 1 to 6
P47.07 CF144: Delay I Input 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
CLEARED
P47.08 CF145: Logic Block I Input 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
1 CLEARED
P47.09 CF146: Logic Block I Input 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
2 CLEARED
P47.10 Comparator J Input 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Drive Parameter
P47.11 Comparator J Threshold 0 As Input Parameter E 0-4
P47.12 Comparator J Hysteresis 0 As Input Parameter E 0-4
P47.13 Comparator J Mode 1 1 = ‘Input = Threshold’ E,N,L 0-4
2 = ‘Input <> Threshold’
3 = ‘Input > Threshold’
(signed)
4 = ‘Input <= Threshold’
(signed)
5 = ‘Input < Threshold’
(signed)
6 = ‘input >= Threshold’
(signed)
7 to 10 as 3 to 6 but Absolute
Value
P47.14 Delay J Input Source 1 1 = From Comparator J E,N,L 0-4
2 = From Control Flag
P47.15 Delay J Time 0 0 to 600s E
P47.16 Logic Block J Function 1 1 = Three Input AND E,N,L 0-4 CF148 and CF149 are
2 = Three Input NAND inputs when TWO Input
3 = Three Input OR versions are chosen for
4 = Three Input NOR Logic Block I
5 = Three Input XOR
6 = Three Input XNOR
7 to 12 = Two Input versions
of 1 to 6
P47.17 CF147: Delay J Input 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
CLEARED
P47.18 CF148: Logic Block J 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 1 CLEARED
P47.19 CF149: Logic Block J 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED
P47.20 Comparator K Input 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Drive Parameter
P47.21 Comparator K Threshold 0 As Input Parameter E 0-4
P47.22 Comparator K Hysteresis 0 As Input Parameter E 0-4

Page 5-56 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-161 to 6-174

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P47.23 Comparator K Mode 1 1 = ‘Input = Threshold’ E,N,L 0-4
2 = ‘Input <> Threshold’
3 = ‘Input > Threshold’
(signed)
4 = ‘Input <= Threshold’
(signed)
5 = ‘Input < Threshold’
(signed)
6 = ‘input >= Threshold’
(signed)
7 to 10 as 3 to 6 but Absolute
Value
P47.24 Delay K Input Source 1 1 = From Comparator K E,N,L 0-4
2 = From Control Flag
P47.25 Delay K Time 0 0 to 600s E
P47.26 Logic Block K Function 1 1 = Three Input AND E,N,L 0-4 CF151 and CF152 are
2 = Three Input NAND inputs when TWO Input
3 = Three Input OR versions are chosen for
4 = Three Input NOR Logic Block I
5 = Three Input XOR
6 = Three Input XNOR
7 to 12 = Two Input versions
of 1 to 6
P47.27 CF150: Delay K Input 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
CLEARED
P47.28 CF151: Logic Block K 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 1 CLEARED
P47.29 CF152: Logic Block K 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED
P47.30 Comparator L Input 9.01 1.00 to 99.99 E,N 0-4 Any Drive Parameter
P47.31 Comparator L Threshold 0 As Input Parameter E 0-4
P47.32 Comparator L Hysteresis 0 As Input Parameter E 0-4
P47.33 Comparator L Mode 1 1 = ‘Input = Threshold’ E,N,L 0-4
2 = ‘Input <> Threshold’
3 = ‘Input > Threshold’
(signed)
4 = ‘Input <= Threshold’
(signed)
5 = ‘Input < Threshold’
(signed)
6 = ‘input >= Threshold’
(signed)
7 to 10 as 3 to 6 but Absolute
Value
P47.34 Delay L Input Source 1 1 = From Comparator L E,N,L 0-4
2 = From Control Flag
P47.35 Delay L Time 0 0 to 600s E
P47.36 Logic Block L Function 1 1 = Three Input AND E,N,L 0-4 CF154 and CF155 are
2 = Three Input NAND inputs when TWO Input
3 = Three Input OR versions are chosen for
4 = Three Input NOR Logic Block I
5 = Three Input XOR
6 = Three Input XNOR
7 to 12 = Two Input versions
of 1 to 6

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-57
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-161 to 6-174

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P47.37 CF153: Delay L Input 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
CLEARED
P47.38 CF154: Logic Block L 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 1 CLEARED
P47.39 CF155: Logic Block L 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED
P47.40 Logic Block M Function 1 1 = AND E,N,L
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
P47.41 CF156: Logic Block M 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 1 CLEARED
P47.42 CF157: Logic Block M 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED
P47.43 CF158: Logic Block M 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 3 CLEARED
P47.44 CF159: Logic Block M 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 4 CLEARED
P47.45 Logic Block N Function 1 1 = AND E,N,L
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
P47.46 CF160: Logic Block N 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 1 CLEARED
P47.47 CF161: Logic Block N 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED
P47.48 CF162: Logic Block N 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 3 CLEARED
P47.49 CF163: Logic Block N 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 4 CLEARED
P47.50 Logic Block O Function 1 1 = AND E,N,L
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
P47.51 CF164: Logic Block O 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 1 CLEARED
P47.52 CF165: Logic Block O 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED
P47.53 CF166: Logic Block O 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 3 CLEARED
P47.54 CF167: Logic Block O 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 4 CLEARED
P47.55 Logic Block P Function 1 1 = AND E,N,L
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR

Page 5-58 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-161 to 6-174

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P47.56 CF168: Logic Block P 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 1 CLEARED
P47.57 CF169: Logic Block P 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED
P47.58 CF170: Logic Block P 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 3 CLEARED
P47.59 CF171: Logic Block P 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 4 CLEARED
P47.60 Logic Block Q Function 1 1 = AND E,N,L
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
P47.61 CF172: Logic Block Q 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 1 CLEARED
P47.62 CF173: Logic Block Q 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED
P47.63 CF174: Logic Block Q 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 3 CLEARED
P47.64 CF175: Logic Block Q 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 4 CLEARED
P47.65 Logic Block R Function 1 1 = AND E,N,L
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
P47.66 CF176: Logic Block R 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 1 CLEARED
P47.67 CF177: Logic Block R 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED
P47.68 CF178: Logic Block R 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 3 CLEARED
P47.69 CF179: Logic Block R 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 4 CLEARED
P47.70 Logic Block S Function 1 1 = AND E,N,L
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
P47.71 CF180: Logic Block S 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 1 CLEARED
P47.72 CF181: Logic Block S 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED
P47.73 CF182: Logic Block S 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 3 CLEARED
P47.74 CF183: Logic Block S 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 4 CLEARED

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-59
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-161 to 6-174

and Control Flags at Page 5-75 where marked CF List *
Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments
No. No.
P47.75 Logic Block T Function 1 1 = AND E,N,L
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
P47.76 CF184: Logic Block T 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 1 CLEARED
P47.77 CF185: Logic Block T 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 2 CLEARED
P47.78 CF186: Logic Block T 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 3 CLEARED
P47.79 CF187: Logic Block T 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input 4 CLEARED
P47.80 Enable Brake Function 0 0 = Disable E,N This brake control is
1 = Enable for operational
purposes only and
must form part of the
functional safety of
the system. If
application of the
brakes is required for
the functional safety
of the system, then
there must be a
means of applying the
brakes (and keeping
them applied)
independently of the
MV3000e
P47.81 CF188: Run Request 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
CLEARED
P47.82 CF189: Brake Release 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E,N CF List *
Input CLEARED
P47.83 Torque Prove Threshold 10.0 As P11.00 E
P47.84 Zero Speed Threshold 10.0 As P9.01 E
P47.85 Torque Prove Time 5 0 to 600s E
P47.86 Release Reference Time 1 0 to 600s E
P47.87 Brake Hold Off Time 5 0 to 600s E
P47.88 Brake Release Time 1 0 to 600s E
P47.89 Start Reset Time 3 0 to 600s E
P47.90 Release Fail Time 1 0 to 600s E
P47.91 Preset Parameters 0 0 = Normal S,E,L,C
1 = Default

5.4.47 Menu 50 - Basic SFE Setup Menu

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-175

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P50.00 DC Link Voltage Drive Size 550 V to 850 V or E 4 The DC link voltage to
Reference 700 V to 1100 V or be controlled
700 V to 1140 V

Page 5-60 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

P50.01 Line Choke Inductance Drive Size 30 μH to 10 000 μH E,N 4 Line choke inductance,
per phase
P50.02 DC Fed Drives Rating 100 % 0 % to 10 000 % E 4 See below
(SFE rating)
P50.03 Active Current Pos Limit 110.00 % 0.00 % to 150.00 % E 4 See below
(SFE nom current)
P50.04 Active Current Neg Limit 110.00 % 0.00 % to 150.00 % E 4 See below
(SFE nom current)
P50.05 CF0: Normal Stop 1.001 As P33.00 E,N 4 Copy of P33.00
Dig In 1
P50.06 CF1: Start 1.002 As P33.01 E,N 4 Copy of P33.01
Dig In 2
P50.07 CF25: Output Enable 1.003 As P33.25 E,N 4 Copy of P33.25
Dig In 3
P50.08 CF116: Keypad/ Remote 1.004 As P34.16 E,N 4 Copy of P34.16
Dig In 4
P50.09 Nominal Mains Voltage 400 300 to 900V S,E 4

5.4.48 Menu 51 - Basic SFE Monitoring Menu

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-176 to 6-177

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P51.00 DC Link Voltage 0 0V to 30 000V R 4 Copy of P11.03
P51.01 Current Feedback (A) 0 0.0A to 9999.0A R 4
P51.02 Current Feedback (%) 0 0.0% to 300.0% R 4
(SFE nom current)
P51.03 Mains Frequency 0 +40.00Hz to +70.00Hz R 4 Measured ac supply
-40.00Hz to –70.00Hz frequency. See below.
P51.04 Measured Mains 0 0V to 1000V rms R 4 Measured ac supply
Voltage volts, line-line
P51.05 AC PWM Voltage 0 0V to 1000V rms R 4
P51.06 Power from Mains 0 -999.0 to 999.9kW R 4
P51.07 Feedforward Power 0 -999.0 to 999.9kW R 4 kW demanded from load
Demand power feedforward
P51.08 DC Link Current 0 0.0A to 9999.0A R 4 AC power / DC link volts
P51.09 Vdc controller Current 0 -9999.0A to 9999.0A R 4 Current demanded from
Demand DC link controller
P51.10 Feedforward Current 0 -9999.0A to 9999.0A R 4 Current demanded from
Demand load power feedforward
P51.11 Active Current 0 -150.00% to +150.00% R 4 Total active current
Demand (%) demand
P51.12 Active Current 0 -9999.0A to 9999.0A R 4 Total active current
Demand (A) demand
P51.13 Active Current (%) 0 -150.0% to +150.0% R 4 Current in phase with
mains volts
P51.14 Active Current (A) 0 -9999.0A to 9999.0A R 4 Current in phase with
mains volts
P51.15 Reactive Current 0 -150.00% to +150.00% R 4
Demand (%)
P51.16 Reactive Current 0 -9999.0A to 9999.0A R 4
Demand (A)
P51.17 Reactive Current (%) 0 -150.0% to +150.0% R 4 Current in quadrature
with mains volts

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-61
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-176 to 6-177

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P51.18 Reactive Current (A) 0 0.0A to 9999.0A R 4 Current in quadrature
with mains volts
P51.19 SFE Overload 100 % 100 to 0% R 4 % of total overload
Remaining capacity remaining.
P51.20 Measured PTC Max. = 10.00kΩ R 4
Resistance Min. = 0.10kΩ
P51.21 Vq Mains Monitor R 4
P51.22 Vd mains Monitor R 4
P51.23 Mains Amplitude Monitor R 4

5.4.49 Menu 52 - Advanced SFE Setup Menu

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-178 to 6-179

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P52.00 Vdc Cntrl Bandwidth 100 0 to 200rad/s E 4 See below.
P52.01 Vdc Cntrl Gain Adjust 0 0 = Automatic Adjust E,N,L 4 See below.
1 = Manual Adjust

P52.02 DC Link Cntrl Kp 4000 0 to 16 000 E/R 4 See below. Only

editable if P52.01=1
P52.03 DC Link Cntrl Ki 20 0 to 800 E/R 4 See below. Only
editable if P52.01=1
P52.04 Current Bandwidth 750 10 to 2000rad/s E 4 Copy of P12.27
See below.
P52.05 Reactive Current 0.00 -150.00% to 150.00% E 4 See below
Reference (SFE nom current)
P52.06 Reactive Current 0.00 0.00% to 150.00% E 4 See below
Positive Limit (SFE nom current)
P52.07 Reactive Current 0.00 0.00% to 150.00% E 4 See below
Negative Limit (SFE nom current)
P52.08 Mains Under- 45.00 40.00Hz to 70.00Hz E 4 Lower threshold for trip
frequency Trip 93, mains frequency trip
P52.09 Mains Under- 45.00 40.00Hz to 70.00Hz E 4 Lower threshold for warn
frequency Warning 133, mains frequency
warn
P52.10 Mains Over-frequency 63.00 40.00Hz to 70.00Hz E 4 Upper threshold for warn
Warning 133, mains frequency
warn
P52.11 Mains Over-frequency 63.00 40.00Hz to 70.00Hz E 4 Upper threshold for trip
Trip 93, mains frequency trip
P52.12 Mains Synch Offset 0.0 -360.0 to 360.0 degrees E 4 See below.
P52.13 Supply Inductance 0H 0 to 10 000μH E 4 See below.
Compensation
P52.14 Mains Volts Scaling 100.0 10.0% to 1000.0% E 4 See below.
P52.15 Current Sensor Turns 1000:1 1000:1 to 10000:1 E 4 See below.
P52.16 Current Sensor Burden 10.0 0.1Ω to 500.0Ω E 4 See below.
P52.17 DC Link Pre-charge Drive Size Drive Size E 4 See below.
Threshold
P52.18 Active Current Offset 0.00 -5.00% to 5.00% E 4 Adjusts the value of
P51.13

Page 5-62 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-178 to 6-179

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P52.19 Choke ptc Trip 3.00 0.10kΩ to 10.00kΩ E 4
Resistance
P52.20 Action on Choke ptc 1 0 = no action E,N,L 4
Loss 1 = warning
2 = trip
P52.21 Frequency Timer -1.00 -1.00 to 1.00s E,N 4 -1.00 = Infinite
P52.22 Minimum Amplitude 80 0 to 100% E,N 4 Of nominal mains volts
P52.23 Maximum Amplitude 115 100 to 120% E,N 4 Of nominal mains volts
P52.24 Amplitude Timer -1.00 -1.00 to 1.00s E,N 4 -1.00 = Infinite
P52.25 Reserved
to
P52.29
P52.30 Application Specific not
to described in this
P52.63 manual.

5.4.50 Menu 53 - SFE Reference Setup Menu

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-180 to 6-184

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P53.00 Vdc Reference Source 1 1 = P50.00 E,L,N 4 See below
2 = Analogue Ref 1
3 = Analogue Ref 2
4 = RS485 Ref 1
5 = RS485 Ref 2
6 = RS232 Ref 1
7 = RS232 Ref 2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref Menu
11 = Motorised Pot
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0 %
14 = Fixed 0 %
15 = Sum Node A
16 = Sum Node B
17 = Sum Node C
18 = Sum Node D
19 = Pointer 21
P53.01 Vdc Reference Scale 100.0 % -300.0 % to +300.0 % E,R 4 See below
P53.02 Vdc Feedback Source 0 0 = Standard F/B E,S,L 4 Only available on
1 = Alternative F/B MicroCubicle™ products
P53.03 Load Power 4 0 = None E,N,L,S 4 See below.
Feedforward Source 1 = Current sensor ch1
2 = Current sensor ch2
3 = Fast Analogue ch1
4 = Fast Analogue ch2

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-63
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-180 to 6-184

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P53.04 Active Current 1 1 = Vdc Controller E,L,N 4 See below
Reference Source 2 = Analogue Ref 1
3 = Analogue Ref 2
4 = RS485 Ref 1
5 = RS485 Ref 2
6 = RS232 Ref 1
7 = RS232 Ref 2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref Menu
11 = Motorised Pot
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0%
14 = Fixed 0%
15 = Sum Node A
16 = Sum Node B
17 = Pointer 22
P53.05 Active Current 100.0 -300.0% to +300.0% E,R 4 See below
Reference Scale
P53.06 Active Current 1 1 = P50.03 E,L,N 4 See below
Demand Positive Limit 2 = Analogue Ref 1
Source 3 = Analogue Ref 2
4 = RS485 Ref 1
5 = RS485 Ref 2
6 = RS232 Ref 1
7 = RS232 Ref 2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref Menu
11 = Motorised Pot
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0%
14 = Fixed 0%
15 = Sum Node A
16 = Sum Node B
17 = Pointer 24
P53.07 Scale Active Current 100.0 -300.0% to +300.0% E,R 4 See below
Demand Positive Limit
P53.08 Active Current 1 1 = P50.04 E,L,N 4 See below
Demand Negative 2 = Analogue Ref 1
Limit Source 3 = Analogue Ref 2
4 = RS485 Ref 1
5 = RS485 Ref 2
6 = RS232 Ref 1
7 = RS232 Ref 2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref Menu
11 = Motorised Pot
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0%
14 = Fixed 0%
15 = Sum Node A
16 = Sum Node B
17 = Pointer 23
18 = P52.54
P53.09 Scale Active Current 100.0 -300.0% to +300.0% E,R 4 See below
Demand Negative
Limit

Page 5-64 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-180 to 6-184

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P53.10 Reactive Current 1 1 = P52.05 E,L,N 4 See below
Reference Source 2 = Analogue Ref 1
3 = Analogue Ref 2
4 = RS485 Ref 1
5 = RS485 Ref 2
6 = RS232 Ref 1
7 = RS232 Ref 2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref Menu
11 = Motorised Pot
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0%
14 = Fixed 0%
15 = Sum Node A
16 = Sum Node B
17 = Pointer 25
18 = P52.46
P53.11 Scale Reactive Current 100.0 -300.0% to +300.0% E,R 4 See below
Reference
P53.12 Reactive Current 1 1 = P52.06 E,L,N 4 See below
Positive Limit Source 2 = Analogue Ref 1
3 = Analogue Ref 2
4 = RS485 Ref 1
5 = RS485 Ref 2
6 = RS232 Ref 1
7 = RS232 Ref 2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref Menu
11 = Motorised Pot
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0%
14 = Fixed 0%
15 = Sum Node A
16 = Sum Node B
17 = Pointer 26
P53.13 Scale Reactive Current 100.0 -300.0% to +300.0% E,R 4 See below
Demand Positive Limit
P53.14 Reactive Current 1 1 = P52.07 E,L,N 4 See below
Negative Limit Source 2 = Analogue Ref 1
3 = Analogue Ref 2
4 = RS485 Ref 1
5 = RS485 Ref 2
6 = RS232 Ref 1
7 = RS232 Ref 2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref Menu
11 = Motorised Pot
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0%
14 = Fixed 0%
15 = Sum Node A
16 = Sum Node B
17 = Pointer 27
P53.15 Scale Reactive Current 100.0 -300.0% to +300.0% E,R 4 See below
Demand Negative
Limit

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-65
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-180 to 6-184

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P53.16 Action on SFE 2 0 = no action E,L,N 4 Warning code 105;
Reference Loss 1 = warning Trip code 2
2 = trip
P53.17 Frequency Method 1 0 = PLL S,L,N,E 4
1 = ZCD
P53.18 Mains Filter Bandwidth 1 0 = 100Hz L,N,E 4 Copy of P54.01
1 = 200Hz
2 = 400Hz
3 = 800Hz
P53.19 Mains Loss Action 2 0 = Ignore L,N,E 4
1 = Warn Only
2 = warn and Trip
P53.20 Ride-Through 80.00 0.00 to 100.00% E 4
Threshold
P53.21 Regen Power Limit 1 1 = P52.54 E,L,N 4
Source 2 = Analog Ref. 1
3 = Analog Ref. 2
4 = RS485 Ref. 1
5 = RS485 Ref. 2
6 = RS232 Ref. 1
7 = RS232 Ref. 2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref. Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref. Menu
11 = Motorised Potentiometer
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0%
14 = Fixed 0%
15 = Summing Node A
16 = Summing Node B
P53.22 Regen Power Limit 100.0 -300.0 to 300.0% R,E 4
Scale

5.4.51 Menu 54 - Mains Monitor Menu

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-185 to 6-187

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P54.00 MVM Mode 0 in SFE 0 = SFE mode L,N,E 0-4
Mode 1 = Over voltage Trip
2 in Motor Avoidance
Mode 2 = Disabled
P54.01 Mains Filter Bandwidth 1 0 = 100Hz L,N,E 0-4
1 = 200Hz
2 = 400Hz
3 = 800Hz
P54.02 Auto Restart Factor 1.04 0.90 to 1.5 E 0-4
P54.03 Vq Mains Monitor V R 0-4
P54.04 Vd Mains Monitor V R 0-4
P54.05 Vrms Mains Monitor V R 0-4
P54.06 Mains Frequency Monitor Hz, resolution 0.1Hz R 0-4 Same as P51.03
P54.07 DC Link Voltage Monitor V R 0-4 Same as P11.03
P54.13 Frequency Method 1 0 = PLL E,L,S 0-4 Same as P33.17
1 = ZCD

Page 5-66 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-185 to 6-187

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P54.14 Mains Loss Action 2 in SFE 0 = Ignore E,L 0-4 Maximum depends on
Mode 1 = Warning Only Control Mode
1 in Motor 2 = Warn and Trip
Mode
P54.15 Ridethrough Threshold 80 0 to 100% E 0-4 Of nominal mains volts
P54.16 Mains Amplitude Monitor % R 0-4 Of P54.17
P54.17 Nominal Mains Supply Drive size Vrms E,S 0-4 Same as P12.02
dependent

5.4.52 Menu 55 - Machine Bridge Control Menu

Parameters in this table are for a specific application

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P55.00 Application Specific not
to described in this
P55.21 manual

5.4.53 Menu 56 - AC Voltage Control Menu

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-188 to 6-189

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P56.00 AC Voltage Reference 400 300 to 900V E 4
P56.01 Filtered AC Voltage 0.00 % Nominal R 4
P56.02 Droop Resistance 10.0 0.0 to 300.0mOhms E 4
P56.03 Drooped Reference 100.00 % Nominal R 4
P56.04 AC Voltage Kp 0.400 0.000 to 10.000%Id/%Vac E 4
nominal
P56.05 AC Voltage Ki 100 0 to 5000%Id/%Vac nominal/s E 4
P56.06 Unclamped Id Demand Monitor % R 4
P56.07 Modulation Limit 97.50 82 to 107% E 4
P56.08 Modulation Depth Monitor % R 4
P56.09 Modulation Controller 0.300 0.000 to 0.500%Id/% E 4
Kp modulation depth
P56.10 Modulation Controller 630 0 to 2000%Id/% modulation E 4
Ki depth/s
P56.11 Clamped Id Demand Monitor % R 4
P56.12 Unclamped Id Demand 56.00 1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter) E 4
Source

5.4.54 Menu 58 - Extended I/O CAN Port 2

Menu 58 is used with the 2nd CAN Port facility and all the parameters, P58.00 to P58.84, are
listed and described in the ALSPA MV3000e 2nd CAN Port CANopen and DeviceNet
Fieldbus Facility Technical Manual T1968. An Extended I/O parameter menu is provided to
process and hold inputs and prepare outputs.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-67
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

5.4.55 Menu 59 - Extended I/O

Menu 59 is used with the CANopen facility and all the parameters, P59.00 to P59.84, are
listed and described in the ALSPA MV3000e CANopen Fieldbus Facility Technical Manual
T2013. An Extended I/O parameter menu is provided to process and hold inputs and
prepare outputs.
5.4.56 Menu 60 - Scale
Menu 60 is used with the CANopen and DeviceNet facilities and all the parameters, P60.00
to P60.29, are listed and described in the ALSPA MV3000e CANopen Fieldbus Facility
Technical Manual T2013 and the ALSPA MV3000e DeviceNet Fieldbus Facility Technical
Manual T2017. This menu allows the scaling between drives and Fieldbus to be specified
for different data types.
5.4.57 Menu 61 - CDC CAN Port
Menu 61 is used with the CANopen and DeviceNet facilities and all the parameters, P61.00
to P61.45 and P61.50, are listed and described in the ALSPA MV3000e CANopen Fieldbus
Facility Technical Manual T2013 and the ALSPA MV3000e DeviceNet Fieldbus Facility
Technical Manual T2017. This menu enables the communication protocol to be configured.
5.4.58 Menu 62 - CDC CANopen
Menu 62 is used with the CANopen facility and all the parameters, P62.00 to P62.99, are
listed and described in the ALSPA MV3000e CANopen Fieldbus Facility Technical Manual
T2013. This menu enables the 10 CANopen PDO (Process Data Object) packets to be
configured.
5.4.59 Menu 63 - CDC DeviceNet
Menu 63 is used with the DeviceNet Facility and all the parameters, P63.00 to P63.99, are
listed and described in the ALSPA MV3000e DeviceNet Fieldbus Facility Technical Manual
T2017. This menu enables DeviceNet assembly object instances to be configured.
5.4.60 Menu 65 - CAN Port 2
nd
Menu 65 is used with the 2 CAN Port facility and all the parameters, P65.00 to P65.45 and
P65.50, are listed and described in the ALSPA MV3000e 2nd CAN Port CANopen and
DeviceNet Fieldbus Facility Technical Manual T1968. This menu enables the
communication protocol to be configured.
5.4.61 Menu 66 - CAN 2 CANopen
Menu 66 is used with the 2nd CAN Port facility and all the parameters, P66.00 to P66.99, are
listed and described in the ALSPA MV3000e 2nd CAN Port CANopen and DeviceNet
Fieldbus Facility Technical Manual T1968. This menu enables the 10 CANopen PDO
(Process Data Object) packets to be configured.
5.4.62 Menu 67 - CAN 2 DeviceNet
Menu 67 is used with the DeviceNet Facility and all the parameters, P67.00 to P67.99, are
listed and described in the ALSPA MV3000e 2nd CAN Port CANopen and DeviceNet
Fieldbus Facility Technical Manual T1968. This menu enables DeviceNet assembly object
instances to be configured.
5.4.63 Menus 70 to 72 - Application Code Developer
Menus 70 to 72 are used for Application Code Developer. The separate parameters are not
listed in this manual.
5.4.64 Menu 74 - Fieldbus Coupler
Menu 74 is used with the PROFIBUS facility, and all the parameters P74.00 to P74.89 are
listed and described in the ALSPA PROFIBUS Fieldbus Coupler MVS3007-4001 7
MVS3007-4002 Technical Manual T1694 Rev 0002 or later.
5.4.65 Menu 75 - PROFIBUS
Menu 75 is used with the PROFIBUS facility and all the parameters, P75.00 to P75.46, are
listed and described in the ALSPA MV3000 PROFIBUS Fieldbus Coupler Technical Manual
T1694. This menu enables the PROFIBUS board to be configured.

Page 5-68 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

5.4.66 Menu 78 - MicroPEC™ Module - Configuration and Diagnostics

Menu 78 is used with the MicroPEC™ Module and all the parameters, P78.00 to P78.34
(less P78.03, P78.04 and P78.09 that are reserved), are listed and described in the ALSPA
MV3000e MicroPEC™ Instruction Sheet T1933. This menu enables the MicroPEC™
Module to be configured.
5.4.67 Menu 80 - FIP Configuration
Menu 83 - FIP Produced VCOMS
Menu 84 - FIP Consumed VCOMS
Menu 85 - FIP Slow VCOMS
Parameters accessed by these menus are used to configure the optional FIP
Communication Boards. Full details are provided in the ALSPA Direct FIP MVS3002-4001
and MVS3002-4002 Technical Manual T1686 supplied with the option module.
5.4.68 Menu 86 - Ethernet Interface Menu
Menu 86 is used with the optional Ethernet Modules MVS3012-4001 and MVS3012-4002.
All the parameters are listed and described in the ALSPA MV3000e Ethernet Interface
Technical Manual T2034 supplied with the option module.
5.4.69 Menu 89 - Spy Setup
This menu is used with the FIP, PROFIBUS and Ethernet option modules as well as
CANopen and DeviceNet to view the raw data coming in to the drive via the appropriate
communications port. The meaning of the data changes with the protocol employed. Full
details of its usage is given in the various communications technical manuals
5.4.70 Menu 90 - Manufacturer’s Service Menu
Parameters P90.00 to P90.99 are for use by Converteam staff.
5.4.71 Menu 91 - Fast Analogue Menu
Parameters in this table are described at Page 6-190

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P91.00 Fast Analogue 1 Global 0 0 to 9999 E 0-4 Internal Global value to
be viewed
P91.01 Fast Analogue 1 Scale 0 -3276 to 3276 bits/V E 0-4 Scale of output
P91.02 Reserved
to
P91.04
P91.05 Fast Analogue 2 Global 0 0 to 9999 E 0-4 Internal Global value to
be viewed
P91.06 Fast Analogue 2 Scale 0 -3276 to 3276 bits/V E 0-4 Scale of output
P91.07 Reserved
to
P91.09
P91.10 Fast Analogue 3 Global 0 0 to 9999 E 0-4 Internal Global value to
be viewed
P91.11 Fast Analogue 3 Scale 0 -3276 to 3276 bits/V E 0-4 Scale of output
P91.12 Reserved
to
P91.14
P91.15 Fast Analogue 4 Global 0 0 to 9999 E 0-4 Internal Global value to
be viewed
P91.16 Fast Analogue 4 Scale 0 -3276 to 3276 bits/V E 0-4 Scale of output

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-69
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

5.4.72 Menu 98 - Menu Enable Selection Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-191 to 6-192

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P98.00 Reserved
P98.01 User Configuration 1 1 to 1 E, N, L 0-4
Menu Enable
P98.02 Basic Motor Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.03 Frequency Control 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.04 Start/Stop Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
1 = Visible
P98.05 Speed Reference 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.06 Ramp Setup Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.07 I/O Setup Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.08 Torque Limit Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.09 Basic Monitor Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.10 Trips/Warning Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.11 Advanced Monitor 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.12 Advanced Motor Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.13 Speed Feedback 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.14 Speed Loop Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.15 Torque Reference 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.16 PID Setup Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.17 Reference Sequencer 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.18 Motorised 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Potentiometer Menu 1 = Visible
Enable
P98.19 Trim Reference Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.20 HSIO Menu Enable 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
1 = Visible
P98.21 Fixed Reference 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.22 Skip Speeds Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.23 DB Control Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
1 = Visible
P98.24 Speed Trim Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Enable 1 = Visible

Page 5-70 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-191 to 6-192

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P98.25 Inertia Compensation 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.26 History Setup menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.27 History Read Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.28 Auto Reset Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.29 Speed/Torque Monitor 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.30 Logic Blocks Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.31 Status Flag Generator 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.32 Serial Link Setup 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.33 CF0-99 Source Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.34 CF100-127 Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.35 Miscellaneous Setup 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.36 Position Control Setup 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.37 Position Reference 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.38 Position Control 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Monitor Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.39 Menu 1 Setup Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.40 Summing Nodes 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Settings Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.41 Programmable Status 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Words Settings Menu 1 = Visible
Enable
P98.42 Pointer Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
1 = Visible
P98.43 Load Fault detection 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Window Settings 1 = Visible
Menu Enable
P98.44 Reference: Shaper 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.45 Temperatures Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.46 Ridethrough Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-3
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.47 Second Logic Blocks 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Menu Enable 1 = Visible
P98.48 Reserved
to
P98.49

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-71
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-191 to 6-192

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P98.50 SFE Basic Setup 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 4
Menu 1 = Visible
P98.51 SFE Monitor Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 4
1 = Visible
P98.52 SFE Adv Setup Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 4
1 = Visible
P98.53 SFE Ref Setup Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 4
1 = Visible
P98.54 Mains Monitor Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
1 = Visible
P98.55 Machine Bridge 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 1-3
Control Menu 1 = Visible
P98.56 AC Voltage Control 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 4
Menu 1 = Visible
P98.57 Reserved
P98.58 Menu 58 Extended I/O 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4 See 2nd CAN Port
Enable 1 = Visible Technical Manual
T1968
P98.59 Menu 59 Extended I/O 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4 See CANopen Fieldbus
Enable 1 = Visible Facility Technical
Manual T2013
P98.60 Menu 60 Scale Enable 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4 See CANopen Fieldbus
1 = Visible Facility Technical
Manual T2013 and
DeviceNet Fieldbus
Facility Technical
Manual T2017
P98.61 Menu 61 CDC CAN 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4 See CANopen Fieldbus
Port Enable 1 = Visible Facility Technical
Manual T2013 and
DeviceNet Fieldbus
Facility Technical
Manual T2017
P98.62 Menu 62 CDC 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4 See CANopen Fieldbus
CANopen Enable 1 = Visible Facility Technical
Manual T2013 and
DeviceNet Fieldbus
Facility Technical
Manual T2017
P98.63 Menu 63 CDC 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4 See DeviceNet
DeviceNet Enable 1 = Visible Fieldbus Facility
Technical Manual
T2017
P98.64 Reserved
P98.65 Menu 65 CAN Port 2 0 0 = Invisible E,N,L 0-4 See 2nd CAN Port
Enable 1 = Visible Technical Manual
T1968
P98.66 Menu 66 CAN 2 0 0 = Invisible E,N,L 0-4 See 2nd CAN Port
CANopen Enable 1 = Visible Technical Manual
T1968
P98.67 Menu 67 CAN 2 0 0 = Invisible E,N,L 0-4 See 2nd CAN Port
DeviceNet Menu 1 = Visible Technical Manual
Enable T1968

Page 5-72 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-191 to 6-192

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P98.68 Reserved
to
P98.69
P98.70 Menus 70, 71 and 72 0 0 = Invisible E 0-3
to – Application Code 1 = Visible
P98.72 Developer Enable
P98.73 Reserved
P98.74 Menu 74 Fieldbus 0 0 = Invisible E,N,L 0-4 See PROFIBUS
Coupler Enable 1= Visible Fieldbus Coupler
Technical Manual
T1694
P98.75 Menu 75 PROFIBUS 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4 See PROFIBUS
Enable 1 = Visible Fieldbus Coupler
Technical Manual
T1694
P98.76 Reserved
to
P98.77
P98.78 Menu 78 MicroPEC™ 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4 See MicroPEC™
Enable 1 = Visible Instruction Sheet T1933
P98.79 Reserved
P98.80 FIP Communications 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4 Dependent on which
to Modules Menus 1 = Visible options are fitted.
P98.85 Enable
P98.86 Ethernet Interface 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4 See Ethernet Interface
Menu Enable 1 = Visible Technical Manual
T2034
P98.87 Reserved
to
P98.88
P98.89 Spy Configure Menu 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.90 Menu 90 Manufacturer 0 0 = Invisible 0-4 Converteam use.
Service Use Enable 1 = Visible
P98.91 Fast Analogue Menu 0 0 = Invisible E, N, L 0-4
Enable 1 = Visible
P98.92 Reserved
to
P98.97
P98.98 Menu Control Menu 1 1 to 1 L 0-4
P98.99 Configuration Menu 1 1 to 1 L 0-4

5.4.73 Menu 99 - Configuration Settings

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-193 to 6-200

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P99.00 Number of DELTAs 0 0 to 6 R 0-4
P99.01 Control Structure 1 0 = No Motor Control S,E,L,C 0-4
1 = Frequency Control
2 = Vector Control
3 = Scalar Control
4 = SFE Mode

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-73
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-193 to 6-200

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P99.02 Overload Duty 1 0 = 150% Overload S,E,N,L 0-4 Causes drive to re-boot
1 = 110% overload ,C
P99.03 Firmware Type 6 6 = MV3000 series R 0-4
P99.04 Firmware Revision As Issue 0.00 to 99.99 R 0-4
Number
P99.05 Drive Nominal Current As drive Dependent on drive size R 0-4
size
P99.06 Security Code 0 0 to 9999 O 0-4 Enter code here, if it
matches the codes
stored in P99.07 or
P99.08, then the
relevant parameters will
be editable.
Also used for the
‘Master Password’
code.
P99.07 Operator Security 0 0 to 9999 E 0-4 Choose a code to
Code access parameters with
attribute “O”.
P99.08 Engineer Security 0 0 to 9999 E 0-4 Choose a code to
Code access parameters with
attribute “E” and “O”.
P99.09 Manufacturer Security 0 0 to 9999 0-4 Secret, no user access.
Code
P99.10 User Text Language 1 1 = English S,E,N,L 0-4
2 = French ,O
3 = Portuguese
4 = German
P99.11 Drive Voltage Code 0 0 = Standard Voltage Grade S,E,N,L 0-4 Some drives have two
1 = Alternative Voltage Grade ,C possible options.
Causes drive to re-boot
P99.12 Firmware Downloader 0 0 = Not Enabled S,E,N,L 0-4 Initiate a firmware
1 = Download upgrade download.
P99.13 Drive Security ID 1 0 0 to30000 E,N 0-4
P99.14 Drive Security ID 2 0 0 to 30000 E,N 0-4
P99.15 Upload Template As drive 1 to 999 E 0-4
size
P99.16 Backup Parameters 0 0 = No Action S,E,N,L 0-4
1 = Save (to drive)
2 = Recall (from drive)
3 = Erase (drive backup)
4 = Save (to) Keypad
5 = Recall (from) Keypad
6 = Check Keypad Data
P99.17 Restore Defaults 0 0 = Normal S,E,N,L 0-4 Causes drive to re-boot
1 = Default Current ,C
3 = Default All Parameter Sets
P99.20 Active Parameter Set Monitor R 0-4 Indicates Active
Parameter Set
P99.21 Parameter Set Select 0 = Parameter Set selected S,E,L 0-4
by control flags
1 = Parameter Set 1 Activated
2 = Parameter Set 2 Activated
3 = Parameter Set 3 Activated

Page 5-74 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Parameters in this table are described at Pages 6-193 to 6-200

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P99.22 CF190: P-Set Select 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E 0-4
CLEARED
P99.22 CF191: Alt. P-Set 0.000 See Control Flag Menus 33/34 E 0-4
Select CLEARED
P99.24 Copy Parameter Set 0 0= E,L 0-4
1 = Copy

5.5 Status Flag Listing

Status Flags (SF) are digital outputs from the drive control system. They are shown on the
Control Block Diagrams (A3 sheets) at Section 7 and their function is described at 6.33. The
Status Flags are listed in Table 5-1.
The Status Flags can be connected to a number of places to facilitate the creation of user
application specific code. Typically, they can be connected to Control Flags (see Control
Flag options in Menus 33/34) or to Digital Outputs (see options for P7.27 to P7.29 at Table
6-15).

5.6 Control Flag Listing

Controls Flags (CF) are digital inputs to the drive control system. They are shown on the
Control Block Diagrams (A3 sheets) at Section 7 and their function is described at Table
6-15.
To make programming easier, the drive parameters and all of the Control and Status Flags
are drawn on the Control Block Diagrams at Section 7. Refer to these diagrams to see,
pictorially, how the parameters and flags interact.
The Control Flags are listed in Table 5-2 in order of their parameter numbers in menus 33
and 34. Menus 33 and 34 show the allowed values that can be edited into the first 200 (0 to
199) parameters.
The CF can also be accessed from the drive Local menus, e.g. CF0: Normal Stop, is also
available in Menu 4, the Start and Stop Control menu. The Control Flags can be connected
to a number of places to facilitate the creation of user application specific code. The list
below shows the equivalent Local Menu parameter numbers and the default connection for
each CF.
For control flags 200 onwards Table 5-2 shows the Equivalent Local Parameter and default
connection only.
Table 5-1 Status Flag Listing

Status Value to be used as

Flag CF or DIGOUT Description
Number Source if Comments
connecting to a Or
CONTROL FLAG or A high output indicates
DIGITAL OUTPUT The state shown below. What might affect the Status Flag?
etc.
Note: -ve value =
INV of the flag
SF0 2.000 Drive Running (steady state or
accelerating)
SF1 2.001 Drive Stopped
SF2 2.002 Drive Starting (Pre-fluxing or Synchro-
starting)
SF3 2.003 Drive Stopping (Decelerating or DC
injecting) or zero speed holding.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-75
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Status Value to be used as

Flag CF or DIGOUT Description
Number Source if Comments
connecting to a Or
CONTROL FLAG or A high output indicates
DIGITAL OUTPUT The state shown below. What might affect the Status Flag?
etc.
Note: -ve value =
INV of the flag
SF4 2.004 Drive Healthy (no Warnings or Trips) HI for Healthy, LO if a warning or trip is
present.
SF5 2.005 Drive Tripped HI for Tripped - Latched
SF6 2.006 Drive Warning HI for Warning present – not latched if
warning goes.
SF7 2.007 Auto-resets Remaining are Non-zero Remains HI if P28.04 ≠0
(Menu 28)

SF8 2.008 Output Bridge is Enabled (IGBTs are CF25 and Run/Stop affect it.
Switching)
SF9 2.009 Reverse Speed (motor going in Reverse) Motor goes reverse if the reference is –
ve or if CF3 is activated.
SF10 2.010 Over speed detected (Menu 29)
SF11 2.011 Zero Speed Detected The speed feedback is monitored via
P9.01 in either Vector or Frequency
SF12 2.012 At Speed (speed feedback = Speed Ref)
Control.
(Menu 29)
The speed detection window sets the
SF13 2.013 In Speed Window (Menu 29)
relevant flag depending on the values
SF14 2.014 Outside Speed Window (Menu 29) programmed into the various trigger
SF15 2.015 Above Speed Window (Menu 29) levels set in P29.00 – P29.05.
SF16 2.016 Below Speed Window (Menu 29)
SF17 2.017 Comparator A Output (Menu 30) Mode set by P30.03.
Sets up Comparator Conditions.
SF18 2.018 Delay A Output (Menu 30) HI when delay expires.
SF19 2.019 Logic Block A Output (Menu 30) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P30.06 sets Logic Block Function.
SF20 2.020 Latch A Output (Menu 30) HI when the latch is set.
SF21 2.021 Comparator B Output (Menu 30) Mode set by P30.16
Sets Up Comparator Conditions.
SF22 2.022 Delay B Output (Menu 30) HI when delay expires.
SF23 2.023 Logic Block B Output (Menu 30) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P30.19 sets Logic Block Function.
SF24 2.024 Latch B Output (Menu 30) HI when the latch is set.
SF25 2.025 Drive Skipping a disallowed Reference
(Menu 22)
SF26 2.026 Analogue REF 1 4-20mA ON 4-20mA is healthy. Will go LO if
4-20mA ref is lost.
SF27 2.027 Analogue REF 2 4-20mA ON 4-20mA is healthy. Will go LO if
4-20mA ref is lost.
SF28 2.028 In Torque Limit (Menu 8, Menu 29)
SF29 2.029 Inside Torque Window (Menu 29) Torque flowing to the motor is being
monitored and these flags show the
SF30 2.030 Outside Torque Window (Menu 29)
status of the TQ monitor function in
SF31 2.031 Above Torque Window (Menu 29) Menu 29.
SF32 2.032 Below Torque Window (Menu 29)
SF33 2.033 Reference Sequencer Running (Menu 17) Sequencer runs if CF29 is LO and CF28
has been triggered.

Page 5-76 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Status Value to be used as

Flag CF or DIGOUT Description
Number Source if Comments
connecting to a Or
CONTROL FLAG or A high output indicates
DIGITAL OUTPUT The state shown below. What might affect the Status Flag?
etc.
Note: -ve value =
INV of the flag
SF34 2.034 Reference Sequencer Output not 0% Ref P17.21 is currently ≠0% ref.
(Menu 17)
SF35 2.035 Comparator C Output (Menu 30) Mode set by P30.29
Sets Up Comparator Conditions.
SF36 2.036 Delay C Output (Menu 30) HI when delay expires.
SF37 2.037 Logic Block C Output (Menu 30) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P30.32 sets Logic Block Function.
SF38 2.038 Latch C Output (Menu 30) HI when the latch is set.
SF39 2.039 Comparator D Output (Menu 30) Mode set by P30.42
Sets Up Comparator Conditions.
SF40 2.040 Delay D Output (Menu 30) HI when delay expires.
SF41 2.041 Logic Block D Output (Menu 30) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P30.45 sets Logic Block Function.
SF42 2.042 Latch D Output (Menu 30) HI when the latch is set.
SF43 2.043 Logic Block E Output (Menu 30) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P30.52 sets Logic Block Function.
SF44 2.044 Logic Block F Output (Menu 30) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P30.56 sets Logic Block Function.
SF45 2.045 Logic Block G Output (Menu 30) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P30.60 sets Logic Block Function.
SF46 2.046 Logic Block H Output (Menu 30) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P30.64 sets Logic Block Function.
SF47 2.047 Pre-charge Contactor 1N On MicroCubicle ™ drives this is set by
the CDC internally.
On DELTA drives Pre-charge
acknowledge PL12 16 sets this bit.
SF48 2.048 Motor Braking The Power flow to the motor is –ve, i.e.
motor is regenerating. There is an offset
to avoid “chatter” at changeover.
SF49 2.049 Motor Calibration Run in Progress
SF50 2.050 High Speed Digital I/O ON (Menu 20) HI when HSIO being used as a reference
input, LO when used as an output.
SF51 2.051 Drive is Pre-Fluxing the Motor If combined with SF2, could determine if
motor is synchro-starting or pre-fluxing.
SF52 2.052 Open Loop Test Enabled P13.11 has been set to enable an open
loop test.
SF53 2.053 In Speed Error Deadband Speed error is ≤± P14.14; can be used to
detect “strip break” condition when using
deadband as a speed catch.
SF54 2.054 DB Unit Connected (Menu 23) Only goes HI if a MVDB is fitted.
External DBs do not affect this flag.
SF55 2.055 DB Resistor Healthy (Menu 23) Only effective with MV DBs.
SF56 2.056 Fieldbus Communications Healthy
(Menus 75, 78, 80 etc.)
SF57 2.057 RS485 Link Healthy (Menu 32)
SF58 2.058 RS232 Link Healthy (Menu 32)

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-77
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Status Value to be used as

Flag CF or DIGOUT Description
Number Source if Comments
connecting to a Or
CONTROL FLAG or A high output indicates
DIGITAL OUTPUT The state shown below. What might affect the Status Flag?
etc.
Note: -ve value =
INV of the flag
SF59 2.059 Encoder Loss (Menu 13) The conditions set in P13.08, P13.19 &
P13.20 have been violated. Use the flag to
select alternative PID speed gains, via
CF76 if Encoderless ridethrough is
required.
SF60 2.060 Load Fault Detection Window – High
(Menu 43)
SF61 2.061 Load Fault Detection Window – Low
(Menu 43)
SF62 2.062 Ridethrough Active Drive is allowed to ridethrough a mains
power failure. Enabled using P35.12.
SF63 2.063 History Record Running (Menu 26, 27) History record is storing data.
SF64 2.064 Position Valid (Menus 36,37,38) Actual Position is within Max/Min limits)
SF65 2.065 Datum Movement in Progress The position controller is performing a
(Menus 36,37,38) datum movement, as defined by P36.34,
and triggered by CF82 & CF83.
SF66 2.066 Either limit (at either limit switch connected CF86, CF87 detect HI, LO Position Limit
to CF86 or CF87) (Menus 36,37,38) and should be connected to Limit
Switches.
SF67 2.067 At Position (Menus 36,37,38) Position Ref = Position Feedback.
SF68 2.068 Above Position (Menus 36,37,38) Position Feedback is > Position Ref
Value
SF69 2.069 Below Position (Menus 36,37,38) Position Feedback is < Position Ref
Value
SF70 2.070 Status Flag Generator Bit 0 (Menu 31) Status flag generator produces a binary
SF71 2.071 Status Flag Generator Bit 1 (Menu 31) sequence from 0000 – 1111 and can be
programmed with delays etc.
SF72 2.072 Status Flag Generator Bit 2 (Menu 31)
Very useful for automatically sequencing
SF73 2.073 Status Flag Generator Bit 3 (Menu 31) stored positions or sequencing through
the fixed speed menu automatically.
SF74 2.074 Status Flag Generator Running (Menu 31) This flag is HI, when CF100 is LO and
next (CF98) or previous (CF99) are
triggered.
SF75 2.075 VCOM 1 Healthy (FIP Menus 80 etc.) All 32 words within Communication
Variable (VCOM) 1 are healthy.
SF76 2.076 VCOM 3 Healthy (FIP Menus 80 etc.) All 32 words within Communication
Variable (VCOM) 3 are healthy.

SF77 2.077 VCOM 5 Healthy (FIP Menus 80 etc.) All 32 words within Communication
Variable (VCOM) 5 are healthy.
SF78 2.078 VCOM 7 Healthy (FIP Menus 80 etc.) All 32 words within Communication
Variable (VCOM) 7 are healthy.
SF79 2.079 SYNC. VCOM Healthy (FIP Menus 80 Data within synchronisation
etc.) communications variable (VCOM) is
healthy.
SF80 2.080 PWM in Sync. Indicates that the drive is ‘in
synchronisation’ with one or more other
drives
SF81 2.081 Not Yet Defined
to to
SF86 2.086

Page 5-78 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Status Value to be used as

Flag CF or DIGOUT Description
Number Source if Comments
connecting to a Or
CONTROL FLAG or A high output indicates
DIGITAL OUTPUT The state shown below. What might affect the Status Flag?
etc.
Note: -ve value =
INV of the flag
SF87 2.087 Ethernet Interface Channel 1 Healthy False when no protocol message has
been received for a time specified in
P86.33. Always True if P86.34 = 0
SF88 2.088 Ethernet Interface Channel 2 Healthy False when no protocol message has
been received for a time specified in
P86.83. Always True if P86.84 = 0
SF89 2.089 Ethernet Interface Channel 3 Healthy Future – Not used
SF90 2.089 Ethernet Interface Channel 4 Healthy Future – Not used
SF91 2.091 In Power Limit In an AEM Drive indicates that the
Machine Bridge has limited the torque
demand because of the power limit
constraint imposed by enabling P12.50
SF92 2.092 Dip Detected In an AEM Drive indicates that the
network supply is below the threshold
specified by P52.32, or has not risen
back above the dip Hysteresis level
specified by P52.33. Can be used to
indicate that the voltage-support reactive
current reference is in force.
SF93 2.093 Mains Voltage Monitor (MVM) Fitted
SF94 2.094 Pending PIB Trip Over voltage trip suppression is active, if
the condition lasts long enough then the
suppression is removed and a PIB over
voltage trip will occur.
SF95 2.095 P PID in Limit Indicates that Active Power PID has
limited, i.e. its output is in limit or that the
associated limit block is in limit.
SF96 2.096 Q PID in Limit Indicates that Reactive Power PID has
limited, i.e. its output is in limit or that the
associated limit block is in limit.
SF97 2.097 Field bus Controller 1 healthy FBC associated with Menu 74 is healthy
SF98 2.098 Reserved
SF99 2.099 Reserved
SF100 2.100 VDC at reference (SFE) DC link volts reference (P59.00)
DC link volts feedback (P53.02)
SF101 2.101 Active Current Positive Limit applied (SFE) The current limits for the SFE Bridge are
SF102 2.102 Active Current Negative Limit applied being applied, that is, current has risen
(SFE) to these limits and is being ‘clipped’ by
the controller.
SF103 2.103 Reactive Current Positive Limit applied
(SFE)
SF104 2.104 Reactive Current Negative Limit applied
(SFE)
SF105 2.105 Mains Synchronisation is valid (SFE) The SFE code monitors the mains
voltage via the mains voltage monitor
board. SF105 is set upon seeing
consistent mains zero crossings, and
reset upon seeing spurious zero
crossings, or no zero crossings.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-79
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Status Value to be used as

Flag CF or DIGOUT Description
Number Source if Comments
connecting to a Or
CONTROL FLAG or A high output indicates
DIGITAL OUTPUT The state shown below. What might affect the Status Flag?
etc.
Note: -ve value =
INV of the flag
SF106 2.106 SFE Ref. Loss One (or more) of SFE reference sources
configured via Menu 53 has been lost
(SFE)
SF107 2.107 Ramp Override Current limit is overriding the ramp
(VVVF only).
SF108 2.108 PWM in Limit Indicates that an AEM drive is unable to
deliver the active/reactive current
demand.
SF109 2.109 CAN2 Healthy True when all required CAN2 reference
signals have been received within time-
out period.
SF110 2.110 Backup Parameter Set in Use If main parameter set is corrupt at power
up, drive reverts to the backup
parameter set (if stored via P99.16).
SF110 is set HI to indicate Backup set
being used.
SF111 2.111 CAN1 Healthy True when all required CAN1 reference
signals have been received within time-
out period.
SF112 2.112 Comparator I Output (Menu 47) Mode set by P47.03
Sets Up Comparator Conditions.
SF113 2.113 Delay I Output (Menu 47) HI when delay expires.
SF114 2.114 Logic Block I Output (Menu 47) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P47.06 sets Logic Block Function.
SF115 2.115 Comparator J Output (Menu 47) Mode set by P47.13
Sets Up Comparator Conditions.
SF116 2.116 Delay J Output (Menu 47) HI when delay expires.
SF117 2.117 Logic Block J Output (Menu 47) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P47.16 sets Logic Block Function.
SF118 2.118 Comparator K Output (Menu 47) Mode set by P47.23
Sets Up Comparator Conditions.
SF119 2.119 Delay K Output (Menu 47) HI when delay expires.
SF120 2.120 Logic Block K Output (Menu 47) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P47.26 sets Logic Block Function.
SF121 2.121 Comparator L Output (Menu 47) Mode set by P47.33
Sets Up Comparator Conditions.
SF122 2.122 Delay L Output (Menu 47) HI when delay expires.
SF123 2.123 Logic Block L Output (Menu 47) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P47.36 sets Logic Block Function.
SF124 2.124 Logic Block M Output (Menu 47) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P47.40 sets Logic Block Function.
SF125 2.125 Logic Block N Output (Menu 47) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P47.45 sets Logic Block Function.
SF126 2.126 Logic Block O Output (Menu 47) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P47.50 sets Logic Block Function.
SF127 2.127 Logic Block P Output (Menu 47) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P47.55 sets Logic Block Function.
SF128 2.128 Logic Block Q Output (Menu 47) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P47.60 sets Logic Block Function.

Page 5-80 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Status Value to be used as

Flag CF or DIGOUT Description
Number Source if Comments
connecting to a Or
CONTROL FLAG or A high output indicates
DIGITAL OUTPUT The state shown below. What might affect the Status Flag?
etc.
Note: -ve value =
INV of the flag
SF129 2.129 Logic Block R Output (Menu 47) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P47.65 sets Logic Block Function.
SF130 2.130 Logic Block S Output (Menu 47) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P47.70 sets Logic Block Function.
SF131 2.131 Logic Block T Output (Menu 47) Obeys the Logical Function of the Block.
P47.75 sets Logic Block Function.
SF132 2.132 Comparator U Output (Menu 40) Mode set by P40.56
Sets Up Comparator Conditions.
SF133 2.133 Comparator V Output (Menu 40) Mode set by P40.62
Sets Up Comparator Conditions.
SF134 2.134 Comparator W Output (Menu 40) Mode set by P40.68
Sets Up Comparator Conditions.
SF135 2.135 Comparator X Output (Menu 40) Mode set by P40.74
Sets Up Comparator Conditions.
SF136 2.136 Holding Torque OK (Menu 47) Status Flag in Brake Logic Function
enabled by P47.80
SF137 2.137 Torque Prove OK (Menu 47) Status Flag in Brake Logic Function
enabled by P47.80
SF138 2.138 Latched Run (Menu 47) Status Flag in Brake Logic Function
enabled by P47.80
SF139 2.139 Release Reference (Menu 47) Status Flag in Brake Logic Function
enabled by P47.80
SF140 2.140 Brake Release Request (Menu 47) Status Flag in Brake Logic Function
enabled by P47.80
SF141 2.141 At Zero Speed (Menu 47) Status Flag in Brake Logic Function
enabled by P47.80

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-81
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 5-82 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Table 5-2 Control Flag Listing

Control Equivalent Control Flag Name Default Connection Comments

Flag Local Control Meaning
Parameter Menu Flag
Number Parameter Connection
Number
P33.00 P4.05 CF0: Normal Stop 1.001 Digital Input 1 Must be Hi to allow motor to run, when ‘remote’ control selected. Uses stop mode programmed in P4.07. Not active when Keypad control selected.
P33.01 P4.04 CF1: Start 1.002 Digital Input 2 Pulse Hi to generate a start (assuming CF0=1), not active when Keypad control selected – see Note (1) at the end of this table.
P33.02 P4.06 CF2: Rapid Stop 0.001 SET (on) Operates like normal stop, except uses stop mode programmed in P4.08; works in either Keypad or Remote modes.
P33.03 P5.12 CF3: Direction 1.003 Digital Input 3 The resulting motor direction will depend on the setting of P5.11.
P33.04 P5.07 CF4: Reference 1 Selector –1.004 INV Digital Input 4 These flags control and select the active speed reference. The actual speed reference choices are programmed into P5.01 to P5.04. CF4 selects the
P33.05 P5.08 CF5: Reference 2 Selector –1.005 INV Digital Input 5 reference programmed into P5.01 (Reference Source 1), and so on.
If two references are selected simultaneously, the flag with the lowest number takes priority.
P33.06 P5.09 CF6: Reference 3 Selector 1.005 Digital Input 5
P33.07 P5.10 CF7: Reference 4 Selector 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.08 P5.13 CF8: Jog Enable 0 CLEARED (off) Used in conjunction with P5.14 & P5.27 and CF121.
P33.09 P10.34 CF9: Trip Reset 1.006 Digital Input 6 Only requires a Pulse. All trips must be healthy before a reset can occur.
P33.10 P10.32 CF10: User Trip1 0 CLEARED (off) Connect, via digital I/O or Fieldbus, to create a user generated trip (See CF112 also) – see Note (5) at the bottom of this table.
P33.11 P5.19 CF11: Reverse Inhibit 0 CLEARED (off) These flags, when Hi, prevent the speed reference from requesting a FWD or REV speed, thus inhibiting movement in that direction.
P33.12 P5.20 CF12: Forward Inhibit 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.13 P5.21 CF13: Clamp Zero Ref 0 CLEARED (off) The speed reference is clamped to zero, before the speed ramps.
Speed
P33.14 P6.05 CF14: Ramp Freeze UP FWD 0 CLEARED (off)

P33.15 P6.06 CF15: Ramp Freeze UP REV 0 CLEARED (off) Fwd

Up Down
The ramps have 4 settable parameters, these flags, when applied, freeze ramping in the relevant
0
quadrant, and the resultant ramp output will remain at the ‘frozen’ value until the freeze is removed.
P33.16 P6.07 CF16: Ramp Freeze DOWN FWD 0 CLEARED (off) Up Down
Rev

P33.17 P6.08 CF17: Ramp Freeze DOWN REV 0 CLEARED (off)

P33.18 P6.09 CF18: Ramp Bypass 0 CLEARED (off) This ‘short circuits’ the ramp function, useful when tuning the speed loops.
P33.19 P14.07 CF19: Clamp Zero Speed 0 CLEARED (off) The speed reference is clamped to zero, after the ramps and the droop control.
P33.20 P14.08 CF20: Disable Speed Loop 0 CLEARED (off) The speed controller is disabled and it’s output prevented from influencing the Tq reference.
P33.21 P8.07 CF21: Torque Limit Select 0 CLEARED (off) Either one of two possible Tq limits can be selected (Lo=Limit1, Hi=Limit2) refer to Menu 8 for Tq Limit programming.
P33.22 P8.05 CF22: Inhibit Positive Torque 0 CLEARED (off)
These flags allow +ve and –ve Tq limits to be applied, or indeed remove the Tq request altogether. One of two limits can be applied (see CF21) thus making
P33.23 P8.06 CF23: Inhibit Negative Torque 0 CLEARED (off)
the control of Tq very flexible.
P8.04 CF24: Disable Torque 0 CLEARED (off)
The IGBT bridge is enabled or disabled with this flag ‘ANDED’ with Run signals. If disabled here no programmed stop modes are used, the bridge is simply
P33.25 P4.17 CF25: Output Enable 0.001 SET (on)
switched off.
P33.26 P16.10 CF26: PID Integral Gain Freeze 0 CLEARED (off) Can be applied to prevent the speed controller from integrating away. Requesting Hi Tq.
P33.27 P17.18 CF27: Reference Sequencer Freeze 0 CLEARED (off) Stops the reference sequencer (Menu 17) at its current position.
Start the reference sequencer (Menu 17). The sequencer will execute the desired sequence, assuming sequencer mode and sequencer reset allow the
P33.28 P17.19 CF28: Reference Sequencer Trigger 0 CLEARED (off)
sequencer to run.
P33.29 P17.20 CF29: Reference Sequencer Reset 0.001 SET (on) Resets the reference sequencer (Menu 17) to the beginning point. Hi = Reset. Note: must be Lo to allow sequencer to run.
P33.30 P21.16 CF30: Fixed Reference Select 0 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.31 P21.17 CF31: Fixed Reference Select 1 0 CLEARED (off)
These four flags generate a Binary sequence (0000 to 1111) that in turn selects fixed reference 0 to fixed reference 15 (these fixed references are
P33.32 P21.18 CF32: Fixed Reference Select 2 0 CLEARED (off) programmed into Menu 21). The Binary sequence can be generated internally if these flags are connected to the ‘Status Flag Generator’, (Menu 31).
P33.33 P21.19 CF33: Fixed Reference Select 3 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.34 P18.04 CF34: Motorised Potentiometer Raise 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.35 P18.05 CF35: Motorised Potentiometer Lower 0 CLEARED (off) Combined with CF71 and Menu 18, these flags allow a Motorised Potentiometer feature to be generated. Connect the flags to push buttons via Digital I/O.

P33.36 P30.08 CF36: Delay A Input 0 CLEARED (off) The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-83
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Control Equivalent Control Flag Name Default Connection Comments

Flag Local Control Meaning
Parameter Menu Flag
Number Parameter Connection
Number
P33.37 P30.09 CF37: Logic Block A Input 1 0 CLEARED (off) pictorially. The delay, set and reset, and logic inputs, are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block mode (And, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-input Gate is
selected, then CF43 is ignored.
P33.38 P30.10 CF38: Logic Block A Input 2 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.39 P30.11 CF39: Latch A Set 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.40 P30.12 CF40: Latch A Reset 0 CLEARED (off)
P30.21 CF41: Delay B Input 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.42 P30.22 CF42: Logic Block B Input 1 0 CLEARED (off) The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the
P33.43 P30.23 CF43: Logic Block B Input 2 0 CLEARED (off) functions pictorially. The delay, set and reset, and logic inputs, are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block mode (And, OR etc.) can all be
P33.44 P30.24 CF44: Latch B Set 0 CLEARED (off) chosen. If a 2-input Gate is selected, then CF43 is ignored.
P33.45 P30.25 CF45: Latch B Reset 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.46 P30.34 CF46: Delay C Input 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.47 P30.35 CF47: Logic Block C Input 1 0 CLEARED (off) The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions
P33.48 P30.36 CF48: Logic Block C Input 2 0 CLEARED (off) pictorially. The delay, set and reset, and logic inputs, are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block mode (And, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-input Gate is
P33.49 P30.37 CF49: Latch C Set 0 CLEARED (off) selected, then CF48 is ignored.

P33.50 P30.38 CF50: Latch C Reset 0 CLEARED (off)

P33.51 P30.47 CF51: Delay D Input 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.52 P30.48 CF52: Logic Block D Input 1 0 CLEARED (off) The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions
P33.53 P30.49 CF53: Logic Block D Input 2 0 CLEARED (off) pictorially. The delay, set and reset, and logic inputs, are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block mode (And, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-input Gate is
P33.54 P30.50 CF54: Latch D Set 0 CLEARED (off) selected, then CF53 is ignored.

P30.51 CF55: Latch D Reset 0 CLEARED (off)

P33.56 P30.53 CF56: Logic Block E Input 1 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.57 P30.54 CF57: Logic Block E Input 2 0 CLEARED (off) More General Purpose Logic to generate PLC functionality. The logic gate function is set by P30.52. If a 2-input gate is selected then CF58 is ignored.
P33.58 P30.55 CF58: Logic Block E Input 3 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.59 P30.57 CF59: Logic Block F Input 1 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.60 P30.58 CF60: Logic Block F Input 2 0 CLEARED (off) More General Purpose Logic to generate PLC functionality. The logic gate function is set by P30.56. If a 2-input gate is selected then CF61 is ignored.
P33.61 P30.59 CF61: Logic Block F Input 3 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.62 P30.61 CF62: Logic Block G Input 1 0
P33.63 P30.62 CF63: Logic Block G Input 2 0 More General Purpose Logic to generate PLC functionality. The logic gate function is set by P30.60. If a 2-input gate is selected then CF64 is ignored.
P33.64 P30.63 CF64: Logic Block G Input 3 0
P33.65 P30.65 CF65: Logic Block H Input 1 0
P33.66 P30.66 CF66: Logic Block H Input 2 0 CLEARED (off) More General Purpose Logic to generate PLC functionality. The logic gate function is set by P30.64. If a 2-input gate is selected then CF67 is ignored.
P33.67 P30.67 CF67: Logic Block H Input 3 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.68 P12.25 CF68: Flux Limit (Enable) 0 CLEARED (off) Enables Flux Limits programmed in Menu 12 to become active (Vector Control only). This allows CF68 to be programmed for operation at a pre-condition to
switch the flux limit in and out as an alternative to achieving that function by parameter editing.
P33.69 P16.11 CF69: Suicide PID Controller –2.000 INV Status Flag SF0 Speed Amp is “suicided” to prevent output integrating away. Default connected to ‘Not Running’
P33.70 P24.03 CF70: Enable Speed Trim 0 CLEARED (off) The Speed Reference can be trimmed after the ramps (useful for Draw Control on Paper Mills) set up in Menu 24. See also CF75.
P33.71 P18.06 CF71: Motorised Potentiometer 0 CLEARED (off) Applies the preset value programmed in P18.03 to the Motorised Potentiometer output. See also CF34 and CF35.
Preset
P33.72 P15.02 CF72: Enable Torque Reference 0 CLEARED (off) Applies the Torque reference, configured in Menu 15, to the speed loop output – see Note (2) at the end of this table.
P33.73 P14.16 CF73: Enable Speed Loop Deadband 0 CLEARED (off) The deadband, configured by Menu 14, will be enabled – see Note (2) at the end of this table for Application Example.
P33.74 P25.03 CF74: Enable Inertia Compensation 0 CLEARED (off) Inertial Compensation, configured by Menu 25, will be enabled.
P33.75 P24.04 CF75: Speed Trim Scale Select 0 CLEARED (off) The ‘Trim Applied’ can have 2 gain factors, set by P24.01, P24.02. This flag selects between them.
P33.76 P14.06 CF76: Speed Loop Gain Select 0 CLEARED (off) Select from two sets of P20 values for the Speed Loop. Useful if two quite different loads are being turned, or for storing speed loop gains in case encoder
loss ride-through is used – see Menu 20.
P33.77 P12.05 CF77: Enable Manual Temperature 0.001 SET (on) Rotor Temperature Compensation is only effective in Vector Control with Encoder. This flag allows an external measurement or calculation of rotor
Compensation temperature to be used – see P12.06.

Page 5-84 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue (06/06)
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Control Equivalent Control Flag Name Default Connection Comments

Flag Local Control Meaning
Parameter Menu Flag
Number Parameter Connection
Number
P33.78 P26.25 CF78: Run History 2.008 Status Flag SF8
Connect these flags to allow manual or automatic start/stop of History Record so that chosen events can be stored and recalled in the History Log.
P33.79 P26.26 CF79: Stop History 2.005 Status Flag SF5
P33.80 P36.38 CF80: Force Position Valid 0 CLEARED (off) Forces the current position to be a valid one, SF64 forced Hi.
P33.81 P36.39 CF81: Force Position Invalid 0 CLEARED (off) Forces the current position invalid, SF64 forced Lo.
P33.82 P36.40 CF82: Datum Move Permit 0 CLEARED (off) Must be Hi before datum movements can occur. Prevent accidental Datumizing.
P33.83 P36.41 CF83: Perform Datum Movement 0 CLEARED (off) If CF82 Hi, then a rising edge causes datum movement set in P36.34 to occur. t
P33.84 P36.42 CF84: Datum Approach 0 CLEARED (off) Used to signal ‘start datum position is approaching’, when carrying out a datum move.
P33.85 P36.43 CF85: Datum input 0 CLEARED (off) Used to signal ‘at datum position’ when carrying out a datum move.
P33.86 P36.08 CF86: High Limit Reached (limit switch) 0 CLEARED (off) A mechanical limit switch connected here, will generate a high limit for the Position Controller, stopping the item which is moving, from being damaged.
P33.87 P36.09 CF87: Low Limit Reached (limit switch) 0 CLEARED (off) A mechanical limit switch connected here, will generate a low limit for the Position Controller, stopping the item which is moving, from being damaged.
P33.88 P37.03 CF88: Position Reference 1 or 2 0 CLEARED (off) Allows the selection of either of two pre-programmed position references. The references are programmed in P37.00 and P37.01.
Selection
P33.89 P36.51 CF89: Enable Inching 0 CLEARED (off) An ‘Inch Mode’ can be enabled for the Position Controller. Position reference comes from the Position Incher (Menu 36).
P33.90 P36.46 CF90: Uni-directional Approach 0 CLEARED (off) Allows a particular position to always be approached from the same direction, thus removing backlash in gears. The position is “overshot” to allow approach
Enable from the same direction.
P33.91 P37.38 CF91: Position Reference Select 0 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.92 P37.39 CF92: Position Reference Select 1 0 CLEARED (off) Pre-set positions (stored in the Position Reference Teacher - Menu 37) can be individually selected by these four flags working together to produce a binary
sequence 0000 = position 0, 1111 = position 15. The positions can be chosen by selecting them individually, or cycled by connecting these flags to the
P33.93 P37.40 CF93: Position Reference Select 2 0 CLEARED (off)
Status Flag Generator (Menu 31).
P33.94 P37.41 CF94: Position Reference Select 3 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.95 P36.52 CF95: Inching Up 0 CLEARED (off) Connect the flags to pushbuttons, and the current position can be ‘inched’ up or down, assuming ‘inching’ is enabled (CF89) and inching has been
P33.96 P36.53 CF96: Inching Down 0 CLEARED (off) configured (Menu 36).
P33.97 P31.19 CF97: Status Flag Generator Freeze 0 CLEARED (off)
P33.98 P31.20 CF98: Status Flag Generator Up 0 CLEARED (off)
The Status Flag Generator produces a 0000 to 1111 binary sequence with individual times between each binary pattern (Menu 31). These flags control
P33.99 P31.21 CF99: Status Flag Generator Down 0 CLEARED (off)
which way the sequence ‘counts’ and whether it is frozen, running or reset.
P34.00 P31.22 CF100: Status Flag Generator Reset 0 CLEARED (off)
P34.01 P37.05 CF101: Position Learn NOW 0 CLEARED (off) The drive can be taught 16 positions using this flag and P37.04. These positions are played back using CF91 to CF94.
P34.02 Not Defined CF102 to CF105: Not Defined Not Defined Not Defined
to
P34.05
P34.06 P12.06 CF106: Auto Temperature 0 CLEARED (off) Set enables Automatic Temperature Compensation of changes in the motor’s rotor resistance. It is only valid in Vector Control with Encoder.
Compensation
P34.07 P14.20 CF107: Speed Loop Integral Freeze 0 CLEARED (off) Speed loop integral term is frozen when either this flag is set or if the speed loop is in limit
P34.08 None CF108: DC Link Off 0 CLEARED (off) When this flag is set, no DC Link is expected to be present, running it is prohibited. Trips that are expected, as a result of no DC link, are masked out by the
drive so that it is “healthy”.
P34.09 P72.00 CF109: Application Enable 0 CLEARED (off) This flag enables the Application Code Developer environment - see Menu 98 - if you set this flag Lo, all code written in Application Code Developer area
stops and so is a good debug feature.
P34.10 P23.08 CF110: DB Enable 2.008 Status Flag SF8 Enable/Disable a dynamic brake connected to the MV CDC. Its default is a connection to output running
Output Running
P34.11 P23.09 CF111: DB Resistor Thermostat 0 CLEARED (off) To protect the dynamic brake resistor, connect its thermostat here; invert the connection for a N/C thermostat – see Note (5) at the end of this table.
P34.12 P10.33 CF112: User Trip2 0 CLEARED (off) Connect via Digital I/O or Fieldbus, to create a user generated trip (See CF 10) - see Note (5) at the end of this table.
P34.13 P2.11 CF113: MTRIP (see P2.10) 0 CLEARED (off) Connect the motor thermostat, via a Digital Input, to protect the motor (configure P2.10) - see Note (5) at the end of this table.
P34.14 P3.08 CF114: Current Limit Defeat 0 CLEARED (off) Operate in frequency control only. See P3.08 and P3.11 to understand the risks and benefits of disabling or enabling current and Tq Controls in frequency
P34.15 P3.11 CF115: Torque limit enable 0 CLEARED (off) control – see Table 6-2.
P34.16 P4.09 CF116: Keypad/Remote 1.004 Digital Input 4 Allows selection between 1 Keypad start/stop or Remote start/stop - (Lo=Keypad) - see also CF0,1, 2,123,124,125 and Control Block Diagram Sheets SFE-1
and Sheet 1.
P34.17 P5.25 CF117: Enable Speed Demand Clamp 0 CLEARED (off) Speed reference clamps can be programmed by P5.23, P5.24. They are applied before the ramps when CF117 = Hi.

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-85
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Control Equivalent Control Flag Name Default Connection Comments

Flag Local Control Meaning
Parameter Menu Flag
Number Parameter Connection
Number
P34.18 P13.03 CF118: Select Backup Speed 0 CLEARED (off) Alternative speed feedbacks can be selected. This either happens automatically when the encoder fails, or manually when CF118 is driven HI. Be sure to
Feedback have tuned the speed amplifier using the backup feedback, and select the second set of PID gains using CF76 as backup is selected.
P34.19 P13.17 CF119: Force Encoder Loss 0 CLEARED (off) This flag is offered to allow external Encoder monitors to force an Encoder loss situation and either trip the drive or cause backup feedbacks to be chosen.
P34.20 P13.18 CF120: Reset Encoder Loss 0 CLEARED (off) After an Encoder loss (either internally or externally determined) has been cleared. This CF MUST be pulsed to cause the drive to return to Encoder
feedback.
P34.21 P5.28 CF121: Jog speed 1/2 select 0 CLEARED (off) Allows the selection between two jog speeds, programmed by P5.14 and P5.27 respectively.
P34.22 P6.11 CF122: Limit Ramp 0.001 SET (on) RTN
Enables the ‘max ramp deviation’ set by P6.10 – see 6.37 for an explanation.
(Vector Mode only)
P34.23 P4.18 CF123: Backup Run/Stop select 0 CLEARED (off)
A second set of remote Run/Stop flags are available, referred to as backup. CF123 allows selection between CF0/CF1 and CF124/CF125. Ensure CF116 is
P34.24 P4.19 CF124: Backup Stop 0 CLEARED (off)
=1 to select remote Run/Stop in the first place.
P34.25 P4.20 CF125: Backup Start 0 CLEARED (off)
P34.26 P3.26 CF126: Enable Variable Volts boost 0 CLEARED (off) VVVF mode only. Volts boost is used to enhance starting Tq. This flag enables volts boost from an external source (selected by P3.25). This feature
requires a certain level of drive expertise. The drive also offers two other methods of controlling volts boost (Fixed Boost via P3.01 and Autoboost via
P3.02), these methods should be tried first.
P34.27 P6.16 CF127: Select Ramp 2 0 CLEARED (off) The second set of speed ramps can be selected using this flag.
P34.28 P54.28 CF128: PPID Freeze 2.108 Status Flag SF108 Freezes the Active Power PID Controller in SFE Mode
P34.29 P54.29 CF129: P PID Zero -2.000 INV Status Flag Sets Active Power PID Controller to zero when SFE bridge is not running
SF2.000
P34.30 P54.32 CF130: P Limit Enable 1.000 SET (on) When set this control flag causes a limit to be applied to the output of the Active Power PID Controller plus the Feedforward.
P34.31 P54.48 CF131: QPID Freeze 2.108 Status Flag SF108 Freezes the Reactive Power PID Controller in SFE Mode
P34.32 P54.49 CF132: Q PID Zero -2.000 INV Status Flag Sets Reactive Power PID Controller to zero when SFE bridge is not running
SF2.000
P34.33 P54.52 CF133: Q Limit Enable 1.000 SET (on) When set this control flag causes a limit to be applied to the output of the Reactive Power PID Controller plus the Feedforward.
P34.34 P6.26 CF134: Ramp Freeze Up +ve 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.35 P6.27 CF135: Ramp Freeze Up –ve 0.000 CLEARED (off) The user ramp has 4 settable parameters, these flags, when applied, freeze ramping in the relevant quadrant, and the resultant ramp output will remain at
P34.36 P6.28 CF136: Ramp Freeze Down +ve 0.000 CLEARED (off) the ‘frozen’ value until the freeze is removed.
P34.37 P6.29 CF137: Ramp Freeze Down -ve 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.38 P6.30 CF138: Ramp Bypass 0.000 CLEARED (off) The User Ramp function is by-passed altogether if this control flag is set
P34.39 P6.35 CF139: Select Ramp Rate 2 0.000 CLEARED (off) An alternative set of User Ramp rates is provided by parameters P61.31 to P61.34. This set of rates is selected when this control flag is set.
P34.40 P40.80 CF140: Switch A State 0.000 CLEARED (off) Switch A Input 1 is selected when CF140 = 0, otherwise Switch A Input 2 is selected.
P34.41 P40.86 CF141: Switch B State 0.000 CLEARED (off) Switch B Input 1 is selected when CF141 = 0, otherwise Switch B Input 2 is selected.
P34.42 P40.92 CF142: Switch C State 0.000 CLEARED (off) Switch C Input 1 is selected when CF142 = 0, otherwise Switch C Input 2 is selected.
P34.43 P40.98 CF143: Switch D State 0.000 CLEARED (off) Switch D Input 1 is selected when CF143 = 0, otherwise Switch D Input 2 is selected.
P34.44 P47.07 CF144: Delay I Input 0.000 CLEARED (off)
The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions
P34.45 P47.08 CF145: Logic I Input 1 0.000 CLEARED (off) pictorially. The delay, set and reset, and logic inputs, are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block mode (And, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-input Gate is
selected, then CF146 is ignored.
P34.46 P47.09 CF146: Logic I Input 2 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.47 P47.17 CF147: Delay J Input 0.000 CLEARED (off)
The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions
P34.48 P47.18 CF148: Logic J Input 1 0.000 CLEARED (off) pictorially. The delay, set and reset, and logic inputs, are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block mode (And, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-input Gate is
selected, then CF149 is ignored.
P34.49 P47.19 CF149: Logic J Input 2 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.50 P47.27 CF150: Delay K Input 0.000 CLEARED (off)
The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions
P34.51 P47.28 CF151: Logic K Input 1 0.000 CLEARED (off) pictorially. The delay, set and reset, and logic inputs, are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block mode (And, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-input Gate is
selected, then CF152 is ignored.
P34.52 P47.29 CF152: Logic K Input 2 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.53 P47.37 CF153: Delay L Input 0.000 CLEARED (off)
The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions
P34.54 P47.38 CF154: Logic L Input 1 0.000 CLEARED (off) pictorially. The delay, set and reset, and logic inputs, are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block mode (And, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-input Gate is
selected, then CF155 is ignored.
P34.55 P47.39 CF155: Logic L Input 2 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.56 P47.41 CF156: Logic M Input 1 0.000 CLEARED (off) The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions

Page 5-86 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue (06/06)
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

Control Equivalent Control Flag Name Default Connection Comments

Flag Local Control Meaning
Parameter Menu Flag
Number Parameter Connection
Number
P34.57 P47.42 CF157: Logic M Input 2 0.000 CLEARED (off) pictorially. The logic inputs are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block modes (AND, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-or 3 input Gate is required then this
can be realised by setting the unused inputs high (1.000) or low (0.000) depending upon the function type.
P34.58 P47.43 CF158: Logic M Input 3 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.59 P47.44 CF159: Logic M Input 4 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.60 P47.46 CF160: Logic N Input 1 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.61 P47.47 CF161: Logic N Input 2 0.000 CLEARED (off) The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions
pictorially. The logic inputs are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block modes (AND, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-or 3 input Gate is required then this
P34.62 P47.48 CF162: Logic N Input 3 0.000 CLEARED (off) can be realised by setting the unused inputs high (1.000) or low (0.000) depending upon the function type.
P34.63 P47.49 CF163: Logic N Input 4 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.64 P47.51 CF164: Logic O Input 1 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.65 P47.52 CF165: Logic O Input 2 0.000 CLEARED (off) The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions
pictorially. The logic inputs are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block modes (AND, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-or 3 input Gate is required then this
P34.66 P47.53 CF166: Logic O Input 3 0.000 CLEARED (off) can be realised by setting the unused inputs high (1.000) or low (0.000) depending upon the function type.
P35.67 P47.54 CF167: Logic O Input 4 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.68 P47.56 CF168: Logic P Input 1 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.69 P47.57 CF169: Logic P Input 2 0.000 CLEARED (off) The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions
pictorially. The logic inputs are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block modes (AND, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-or 3 input Gate is required then this
P34.70 P47.58 CF170: Logic P Input 3 0.000 CLEARED (off) can be realised by setting the unused inputs high (1.000) or low (0.000) depending upon the function type.
P34.71 P47.59 CF171: Logic P Input 4 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.72 P47.61 CF172: Logic Q Input 1 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.73 P47.62 CF173: Logic Q Input 2 0.000 CLEARED (off) The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions
pictorially. The logic inputs are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block modes (AND, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-or 3 input Gate is required then this
P34.74 P47.63 CF174: Logic Q Input 3 0.000 CLEARED (off) can be realised by setting the unused inputs high (1.000) or low (0.000) depending upon the function type.
P34.75 P47.64 CF175: Logic Q Input 4 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.76 P47.66 CF176: Logic R Input 1 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.77 P47.67 CF177: Logic R Input 2 0.000 CLEARED (off) The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions
pictorially. The logic inputs are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block modes (AND, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-or 3 input Gate is required then this
P34.78 P47.68 CF178: Logic R Input 3 0.000 CLEARED (off) can be realised by setting the unused inputs high (1.000) or low (0.000) depending upon the function type.
P34.79 P47.69 CF179: Logic R Input 4 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.80 P47.71 CF180: Logic S Input 1 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.81 P47.72 CF181: Logic S Input 2 0.000 CLEARED (off) The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions
pictorially. The logic inputs are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block modes (AND, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-or 3 input Gate is required then this
P34.82 P47.73 CF182: Logic S Input 3 0.000 CLEARED (off) can be realised by setting the unused inputs high (1.000) or low (0.000) depending upon the function type.
P34.83 P47.74 CF183: Logic S Input 4 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.84 P47.76 CF184: Logic R Input 1 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34.85 P47.77 CF185: Logic R Input 2 0.000 CLEARED (off) The MV3000e contains an amount of freely connectable logic to emulate PLC functionality. Refer to the Control Block diagram to view the functions
pictorially. The logic inputs are all +ve edge triggered. The logic block modes (AND, OR etc.) can all be chosen. If a 2-or 3 input Gate is required then this
P34.86 P47.78 CF186: Logic R Input 3 0.000 CLEARED (off) can be realised by setting the unused inputs high (1.000) or low (0.000) depending upon the function type.
P34.87 P47.79 CF187: Logic R Input 4 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P34..88 P47.81 CF188: Run Request 0.000 CLEARED (off) Inputs to Brake Logic Function enabled by P47.80.
This brake control is for operational purposes only and must form part of the functional safety of the system. If application of the brakes is
P34.89 P47.82 CF189: Brake Release Input 0.000 CLEARED (off)
required for the functional safety of the system, then there must be a means of applying the brakes (and keeping them applied) independently of
the MV3000e
P34.90 P99.22 CF190: P Set Select 0.000 CLEARED (off) Used, in conjunction with CF190, to select the active parameter set in response to a change in a digital input, status bit or some other control flag source.
P34.91 P99.23 CF191: Alt P-Set Select 0.000 CLEARED (off) Used, in conjunction with CF191, to select the active parameter set in response to a change in a digital input, status bit or some other control flag source.
P34.92 Not Defined CF193 to CF197: Not Defined Not Defined Not Defined
to
P34.97
P34.98 P10.40 CF198: User Alert 1 0.000 CLEARED (off)
Unlike User Trips 1 and 2, User Alerts, although functionally similar, cannot be set for auto-reset in Menu 28
P34.99 P10.42 CF199: User Alert 1 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P10.44 CF200: User Alert 3 0.000 CLEARED (off) Unlike User Trips 1 and 2, User Alerts, although functionally similar, cannot be set for auto-reset in Menu 28
P10.46 CF201: User Alert 4 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P10.48 CF202: User Alert 5 0.000 CLEARED (off)

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-87
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

Control Equivalent Control Flag Name Default Connection Comments

Flag Local Control Meaning
Parameter Menu Flag
Number Parameter Connection
Number
P10.50 CF203: User Alert 6 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P10.52 CF204: User Alert 7 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P10.52 CF205: User Alert 8 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P10.54 CF206: User Alert 9 0.000 CLEARED (off)
P10.56 CF207: User Alert 10 0.000 CLEARED (off)

t = See 6.36.3 for an explanation of how these flags interact.

Notes:
(1) Using CF0 and CF1 to generate Start/Stop Commands:
Mode 1 – Preferred UK Method using Pushbuttons

24 V
Stop
Stop
DIGIN1 0

Run
Start
DIGIN2 1

Motor Motor
Runs Stops

Mode 2 – Preferred Method in Germany and France using a Switch

Stop
DIGIN1 0
Run/Stop Motor Motor
Runs Stops

Start
DIGIN2 1

(2) Configuring the Tq reference

When configuring the ALSPA MV3000e for Tq Control (Vector Mode only) there will be two major modes:
(a) Just Tq control – useful if noisy second drive as a Tq slave to another drive.
(b) Tq control with a speed catch.

Also note that P11.49 will show the absolute limit to the Tq that can be requested, based on current motor and mains voltage data.

Page 5-88 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue (06/06)
ALSPA MV3000e 5. Parameter Listing.

(3) Configuring Simple Tq Control

(a) Select Tq reference source using P15.05.
(b) Adjust Tq scale factor P15.01, so that the desired Tq reference is produced (% of motor Full Load Torque).
(c) Enable Tq reference with CF72 = 1.
(d) If the Tq reference needs to be “ramped” in set a slew rate in P15.03. A slew rate can help if in Tq helper configuration to prevent ‘fighting’ between master and slave drives.
(e) Disable the speed loop CF20 = 1.
(f) Run the drive, ensuring that there is a load on the motor, otherwise the Tq Controller will cause the speed to increase to ‘find’ the Tq.
(4) Setting up Tq Control with a Speed Catch
If the drive is to be used to ‘pull’ against material that could break, like strip steel, cables for ship etc. then a speed catch will prevent motor run-away in the event of a break.
(a) Set Tq Controller up as outlined above.
(b) Do not disable the speed loop – leave CF20 = 0.
(c) Enable speed deadband CF73 = 1.
(d) Configure the speed deadband using Menu 14.
(e) The drive MUST have been fully commissioned in speed control, gains, ramps etc. in place, before running like this.
(f) Run the drive, ensuring that there is a load on the motor, otherwise the Tq Controller will cause the speed to increase to ‘find’ the Tq.
(5) Connecting thermostats or N/C Push Buttons to control flags e.g. use trips, MTRIP & thermostats.
(a) Most control flags ‘activate’ the function they control, when they are driven Hi.
(b) Thermostats and normally closed Push buttons would therefore ‘activate’ the function when they were healthy, as they open when there is a problem. A simple –ve sign in the programming of the flag will solve this
problem.
The example shows DB resistor thermostat, but can be used for MTRIP, user trip 1 and 2.
Connect control flag 111 to the INV of the DIGIN thus:

24 V Hi = OK
Hi = Trip
DIGINx 111
N/C Thermostat
or P23.09 = -1.00x Connect diginx to the
N/C Pushbutton Control Flag with a -ve
sign, this inverts the
digital input

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 5-89
5. Parameter Listing. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 5-90 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue (06/06)
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6 Parameter Descriptions

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Page

6.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 6-7

6.1.1 Advanced Features and Parameters ..................................................................................... 6-8
6.2 Menu 2 - Basic Motor Settings ...................................................................................................... 6-9
6.2.1 Basic Motor Data .................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.2.2 Motor I²T Protection.............................................................................................................. 6-10
6.2.3 Motor Thermostat Protection................................................................................................ 6-10
6.2.4 Motor PTC Protection........................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3 Menu 3 - Frequency Control Settings.......................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.1 Fluxing Control ..................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.2 Economy Flux Mode............................................................................................................. 6-14
6.3.3 Volts Boost ........................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.3.4 Variable Volts Boost ............................................................................................................. 6-16
6.3.5 Slip Compensation Gain....................................................................................................... 6-17
6.3.6 Absolute Minimum Frequency.............................................................................................. 6-17
6.3.7 Current Limit (Frequency Control Mode).............................................................................. 6-17
6.3.8 Torque Limit (Frequency Control Mode Only)...................................................................... 6-19
6.3.9 Estimation of Torque ............................................................................................................ 6-20
6.3.10 Motor Stability (P3.16, P3.17) ........................................................................................... 6-21
6.3.11 Feedback Compensation .................................................................................................. 6-22
6.3.12 Scalar Control.................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.3.13 Frequency Multiplier .......................................................................................................... 6-22
6.3.14 VVVF Modulation Limit ...................................................................................................... 6-22
6.4 Menu 4 - Start and Stop Control.................................................................................................. 6-24
6.4.1 Start Mode ............................................................................................................................ 6-24
6.4.2 Selecting RUN/STOP Control by Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) or by Control Flags ..... 6-25
6.4.3 Starting and Stopping Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-26
6.4.4 Stop Modes .......................................................................................................................... 6-27
6.4.5 DC Injection Braking............................................................................................................. 6-27
6.4.6 Output Enable....................................................................................................................... 6-28
6.4.7 Backup Start/Stop ................................................................................................................ 6-29
6.4.8 Synchrostart Power Factor Control ...................................................................................... 6-29
6.5 Menu 5 - Speed Reference Settings ........................................................................................... 6-31
6.5.1 Speed References................................................................................................................ 6-31
6.5.2 Direction Control................................................................................................................... 6-32
6.5.3 Jog Speeds........................................................................................................................... 6-32
6.5.4 Speed Limits......................................................................................................................... 6-33
6.5.5 Speed Reference Time Constant ......................................................................................... 6-36
6.5.6 Top Speed ............................................................................................................................ 6-36
6.6 Menu 6 - Ramp Settings.............................................................................................................. 6-37
6.6.1 Ramp Rates.......................................................................................................................... 6-37
6.6.2 Alternative Set of Ramp Rates ............................................................................................. 6-38
6.6.3 Second User Ramp .............................................................................................................. 6-39
6.7 Menu 7 - Plant I/O Settings ......................................................................................................... 6-41
6.7.1 Analogue Input Offset and Gain ........................................................................................... 6-41
6.7.2 Analogue Reference Values................................................................................................. 6-42
6.7.3 Analogue Outputs................................................................................................................. 6-42
6.7.4 Analogue Output Scaling...................................................................................................... 6-43
6.7.5 Digital Outputs ...................................................................................................................... 6-43
6.7.6 Digital Inputs......................................................................................................................... 6-43
6.8 Menu 8 - Torque Limit Settings ................................................................................................... 6-45
6.9 Menu 9 - Basic Drive Monitoring ................................................................................................. 6-47
6.10 Menu 10 - Trips and Warnings .................................................................................................... 6-49
6.10.1 Warnings ........................................................................................................................... 6-49

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-1
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.10.2 Trips ................................................................................................................................... 6-49

6.10.3 Trip History......................................................................................................................... 6-49
6.10.4 Time Since Trip.................................................................................................................. 6-49
6.10.5 User Trips .......................................................................................................................... 6-49
6.10.6 Trip Reset .......................................................................................................................... 6-49
6.10.7 "New Drive PCB" or "Unknown Drive Size" Trip................................................................ 6-50
6.10.8 P10.36 - Delta Identification Source .................................................................................. 6-50
6.10.9 Extra User Trips and Warnings.......................................................................................... 6-50
6.11 Menu 11 - Advanced Drive Monitoring......................................................................................... 6-52
6.11.1 General Advanced Monitoring ........................................................................................... 6-52
6.11.2 Temperature Feedback...................................................................................................... 6-52
6.11.3 Run/Energised Monitor ...................................................................................................... 6-54
6.11.4 Digital Inputs and Outputs.................................................................................................. 6-54
6.11.5 Monitoring Control Flags.................................................................................................... 6-55
6.11.6 Monitoring Status Flags ..................................................................................................... 6-56
6.11.7 Monitoring Analogue Inputs ............................................................................................... 6-57
6.11.8 Monitoring Analogue Outputs ............................................................................................ 6-57
6.11.9 Monitoring Speed Loop...................................................................................................... 6-57
6.11.10 Inertia Compensation Output ........................................................................................... 6-57
6.11.11 Maximum Torque Available.............................................................................................. 6-57
6.11.12 Torque Reference ............................................................................................................ 6-58
6.11.13 Encoder Speed ................................................................................................................ 6-58
6.12 Menu 12 - Motor Advanced Settings (Vector Only) ..................................................................... 6-60
6.12.1 Advanced Motor Data ........................................................................................................ 6-60
6.12.2 Motor Equivalent Circuit..................................................................................................... 6-61
6.12.3 Motor Temperature Compensation (only valid for Vector mode with Encoder)................. 6-64
6.12.4 Manual Rotor Temperature Compensation (only valid for Vector mode with Encoder) .... 6-64
6.12.5 Automatic Rotor Temperature Compensation ................................................................... 6-65
6.12.6 Additional Parameters for Operation Above Base Speed ................................................. 6-65
6.12.7 Motor Magnetisation Curve................................................................................................ 6-65
6.12.8 Flux Limit............................................................................................................................ 6-65
6.12.9 Current Control Bandwidth................................................................................................. 6-66
6.12.10 Enable Rs Tracker (only valid in Vector mode without Encoder)..................................... 6-67
6.12.11 Flux Controller Output (only valid in Vector mode without Encoder) ............................... 6-67
6.12.12 Vector Control Fluxing Mode............................................................................................ 6-67
6.12.13 DC Link Voltage Feedforward Time-Constant ................................................................. 6-68
6.12.14 Current Control Gain Factors ........................................................................................... 6-68
6.12.15 Orientation Controller Gains............................................................................................. 6-69
6.12.16 Cross Coupler Gains........................................................................................................ 6-69
6.12.17 Rs Gain Factor (Vector Control Only) .............................................................................. 6-69
6.12.18 Power Limit....................................................................................................................... 6-70
6.13 Menu 13 - Speed Feedback Settings (Vector Only) .................................................................... 6-71
6.13.1 Speed Feedback Selection ................................................................................................ 6-71
6.13.2 Limitations of Tacho Speed Feedback .............................................................................. 6-71
6.13.3 Limitations of Encoderless Vector Control......................................................................... 6-71
6.13.4 Encoder Monitor................................................................................................................. 6-72
6.13.5 Open Loop Test Mode ....................................................................................................... 6-75
6.14 Menu 14 - Speed Loop Settings (Vector Only) ............................................................................ 6-76
6.14.1 Speed Controller ................................................................................................................ 6-76
6.14.2 Speed Loop Error Deadband ............................................................................................. 6-77
6.14.3 Speed Droop...................................................................................................................... 6-78
6.14.4 Speed Loop Integral Term ................................................................................................. 6-78
6.15 Menu 15 - Torque Reference Settings (Vector Only) .................................................................. 6-80
6.16 Menu 16 - PID Controller Settings ............................................................................................... 6-82
6.17 Menu 17 - Reference Sequencer Settings................................................................................... 6-85
6.18 Menu 18 - Motorised Potentiometer Settings .............................................................................. 6-87
6.18.1 Motorised Potentiometer Configuration ............................................................................. 6-87
6.19 Menu 19 - Trim Reference Settings ............................................................................................. 6-88
6.19.1 Trim Reference Control...................................................................................................... 6-88
6.20 Menu 20 - High Speed Digital I/O Settings .................................................................................. 6-89
6.20.1 PWM Synchronisation........................................................................................................ 6-92
6.20.1.1 Master Mode (P20.00 = 4098)....................................................................................6-92

Page 6-2 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.20.1.2 Slave Mode (P20.00 = 4097) ..................................................................................... 6-92

6.20.1.3 ‘In-Synchronisation’ Status Flag ................................................................................ 6-92
6.20.1.4 Parameters Associated with PWM Synchronisation.................................................. 6-92
6.21 Menu 21 - Fixed Reference Settings ........................................................................................... 6-94
6.21.1 To Configure the Drive for Fixed Reference operation ..................................................... 6-94
6.22 Menu 22 - Skip Speed Settings ................................................................................................... 6-95
6.23 Menu 23 - Dynamic Brake Control .............................................................................................. 6-96
6.23.1 Choice of DB Resistor ....................................................................................................... 6-96
6.24 Menu 24 - Speed Trim Settings................................................................................................. 6-101
6.25 Menu 25 - Inertia Compensation Settings ................................................................................. 6-102
6.26 Menu 26 - History Log Settings ................................................................................................. 6-103
6.26.1 History Logs..................................................................................................................... 6-103
6.26.2 Operation of the History Log ........................................................................................... 6-103
6.26.3 Configuring the History Log............................................................................................. 6-103
6.26.4 Starting the History Log ................................................................................................... 6-104
6.26.5 Trigger Settings and Limits for Stop Control of the History Log ...................................... 6-105
6.26.6 History Record Time Stamping ....................................................................................... 6-105
6.27 Menu 27 - History Log Playback Settings ................................................................................. 6-107
6.28 Menu 28 - Auto-reset Settings................................................................................................... 6-107
6.28.1 Configuring Trips to Auto-reset ....................................................................................... 6-107
6.29 Menu 29 - Speed and Torque Monitor Settings ........................................................................ 6-110
6.29.1 Speed Monitor ................................................................................................................. 6-110
6.29.2 Torque Monitor ................................................................................................................ 6-110
6.30 Menu 30 - Logic Block Settings ................................................................................................. 6-112
6.30.1 Logic Block A................................................................................................................... 6-112
6.30.2 Logic Block B................................................................................................................... 6-114
6.30.3 Logic Block C................................................................................................................... 6-114
6.30.4 Logic Block D................................................................................................................... 6-114
6.30.5 Logic Blocks E, F, G and H ............................................................................................. 6-114
6.30.6 Logic Block E................................................................................................................... 6-115
6.30.7 Logic Block F ................................................................................................................... 6-115
6.30.8 Logic Block G .................................................................................................................. 6-116
6.30.9 Logic Block H................................................................................................................... 6-116
6.31 Menu 31 - Status Flag Generator Settings................................................................................ 6-117
6.32 Menu 32 - Serial Link Settings................................................................................................... 6-119
6.33 Control Flags and Status Flags ................................................................................................. 6-119
6.34 Menu 33 - Control Flags 0 to 99 Connection Settings Menu 34 - Control Flags 100 to 127
Connection Settings ................................................................................................................................. 6-121
6.35 Menu 35 - Miscellaneous Features Settings ............................................................................. 6-122
6.35.1 PWM Switching Frequency ............................................................................................. 6-122
6.35.2 Allow Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) Removal ............................................................ 6-122
6.35.3 Set-up Review Mode ....................................................................................................... 6-122
6.35.4 Auto-lock Action............................................................................................................... 6-122
6.35.5 Printing ............................................................................................................................ 6-123
6.35.6 Trip Avoidance................................................................................................................. 6-124
6.35.7 Enhanced Active Sharing ................................................................................................ 6-126
6.35.8 PWM Synchronisation Parameters. ................................................................................ 6-127
6.36 Menu 36 - Position Control Settings (Vector with Encoder Only).............................................. 6-128
6.36.1 Configuring the Drive for Position Control ....................................................................... 6-128
6.36.2 Position Shaper, or Speed Profiler .................................................................................. 6-130
6.36.3 Datumizing....................................................................................................................... 6-132
6.36.4 Uni-directional Approach Bias ......................................................................................... 6-136
6.36.5 Position Incher................................................................................................................. 6-136
6.36.6 Position Monitor............................................................................................................... 6-137
6.36.7 Position Control Flags ..................................................................................................... 6-137
6.37 Menu 37 - Position Reference Settings..................................................................................... 6-138
6.38 Menu 38 - Position Control Monitor ........................................................................................... 6-140
6.38.1 Position Monitoring Parameters ...................................................................................... 6-140
6.38.2 Position Reference .......................................................................................................... 6-140
6.38.3 Position Feedback ........................................................................................................... 6-140
6.38.4 Position Error................................................................................................................... 6-140
6.38.5 Position Status Flags....................................................................................................... 6-140

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-3
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.38.6 Position Control Flags...................................................................................................... 6-141

6.38.7 Position Control Output.................................................................................................... 6-141
6.39 Menu 39 - User Configurable Menu (Menu 1) Settings ............................................................. 6-142
6.39.1 User Menu Configuration ................................................................................................. 6-142
6.40 Menu 40 - Summing Nodes Settings ......................................................................................... 6-143
6.40.1 Summing Nodes A to H ................................................................................................... 6-143
6.40.2 Summing Nodes A to H Modes ....................................................................................... 6-144
6.40.3 Square Roots ................................................................................................................... 6-144
6.40.4 Comparator Function Blocks U, V, W and X.................................................................... 6-145
6.40.5 Analogue Switches A, B, C and D ................................................................................... 6-146
6.41 Menu 41 - Programmable Status Word Settings ....................................................................... 6-148
6.41.1 Status Word Inputs .......................................................................................................... 6-148
6.41.2 Status Word Outputs........................................................................................................ 6-148
6.42 Menu 42 - Reference Pointers - Source Settings ...................................................................... 6-149
6.42.1 Pointers Source ............................................................................................................... 6-149
6.42.2 Pointers Scale.................................................................................................................. 6-149
6.43 Menu 43 - Load Fault Detection Window Settings..................................................................... 6-152
6.44 Menu 44 - Reference Shaper Settings....................................................................................... 6-154
6.45 Menu 45 - Temperature ............................................................................................................. 6-156
6.46 Menu 46 – AC Loss Ridethrough (Vector Control Only)............................................................ 6-158
6.46.1 Introduction to AC Loss Ridethrough............................................................................... 6-158
6.46.2 AC Loss Ridethrough Invocation Mode ........................................................................... 6-158
6.46.3 Mains Voltage Monitor Unit (MVM).................................................................................. 6-158
6.46.4 AC Loss Ridethrough Set Up........................................................................................... 6-159
6.46.5 DC Link Controller – Calculation of Gains ....................................................................... 6-160
6.47 Menu 47 – Second Logic Menu ................................................................................................. 6-161
6.47.1 Logic Block I..................................................................................................................... 6-161
6.47.2 Logic Block J.................................................................................................................... 6-162
6.47.3 Logic Block K ................................................................................................................... 6-162
6.47.4 Logic Block L.................................................................................................................... 6-163
6.47.5 Logic Blocks M, N, O, P, Q, R, S and T........................................................................... 6-163
6.47.6 Logic Block M................................................................................................................... 6-164
6.47.7 Logic Block N ................................................................................................................... 6-164
6.47.8 Logic Block O................................................................................................................... 6-165
6.47.9 Logic Block P ................................................................................................................... 6-165
6.47.10 Logic Block Q ................................................................................................................. 6-165
6.47.11 Logic Block R ................................................................................................................. 6-166
6.47.12 Logic Block S.................................................................................................................. 6-166
6.47.13 Logic Block T.................................................................................................................. 6-167
6.47.14 Special Brake Logic Function......................................................................................... 6-167
6.47.15 Brake Function Sequence of Operation......................................................................... 6-171
6.47.16 Brake Function Parameters ........................................................................................... 6-172
6.48 Menu 50 - Basic SFE Set-up Menu ........................................................................................... 6-175
6.49 Menu 51 - Basic SFE Monitoring Menu ..................................................................................... 6-176
6.50 Menu 52 - Advanced SFE Set-up Menu .................................................................................... 6-178
6.50.1 Application Specific Parameters ...................................................................................... 6-179
6.51 Menu 53 - SFE Reference Setup Menu..................................................................................... 6-180
6.52 Menu 54 – Mains Monitor Menu ................................................................................................ 6-185
6.53 Menu 55 - Machine Bridge Control Menu .................................................................................. 6-188
6.54 Menu 56 – AC Voltage Control Menu ........................................................................................ 6-188
6.54.1 Network Voltage Control .................................................................................................. 6-188
6.54.2 Avoiding Over Modulation................................................................................................ 6-188
6.55 Menu 91 – Fast Analogue Menu................................................................................................ 6-190
6.56 Menu 98 - Menu Enable Selection Settings............................................................................... 6-191
6.57 Menu 99 - Configuration Settings .............................................................................................. 6-193
6.57.1 DELTA Drives .................................................................................................................. 6-193
6.57.2 6.50.2 Control Structure................................................................................................... 6-193
6.57.3 Overload Duty .................................................................................................................. 6-193
6.57.4 Alternative Voltage Grades .............................................................................................. 6-193
6.57.5 Firmware Type ................................................................................................................. 6-194
6.57.6 Drive Nominal Current ..................................................................................................... 6-194
6.57.7 Drive Security Passwords and IDs .................................................................................. 6-194

Page 6-4 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.57.8 User Text Language ........................................................................................................ 6-196

6.57.9 6.50.9 Firmware Downloader .......................................................................................... 6-196
6.57.10 Upload Template ........................................................................................................... 6-196
6.57.11 Backup Parameters ....................................................................................................... 6-196
6.57.12 Restore Defaults ............................................................................................................ 6-199
6.57.13 Multiple Parameter Sets ................................................................................................ 6-199

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-5
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 6-6 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.1 Introduction
This section contains a full description of the parameters controlling the drive.
The drive parameters are grouped into menus, each containing the parameters and control
flags required to control and monitor a particular feature. The parameters are described in
order of menu as shown at Table 6-1. Each menu is cross-referred to the relevant sheet of
the Control Block Diagram at Section 7, which gives a graphic representation of the effect of
parameters on drive operation.
Table 6-1 Menu Listing

Menu Description Menu Description

1 User configured menu 41 Programmable status word settings
2 Basic motor settings 42 Pointer source settings
3 Frequency control settings 43 Load fault detection window settings
4 Start and stop control 44 Reference shaper settings
5 Speed reference settings 45 Temperature
6 Ramp settings 46 Ridethrough Menu
7 Plant I/O settings 47 Second Logic Menu
8 Torque limit settings 50 Basic SFE Setup
9 Basic drive monitoring 51 SFE Monitoring
10 Trips and warnings 52 Advanced SFE Setup
11 Advanced drive monitoring 53 SFE Reference Setup
12 Motor advanced settings (vector only) 54 Mains Monitor Menu
13 Speed feedback settings (vector only) 55 Machine Bridge Control Menu
14 Speed loop settings (vector only) 56 AC Voltage Control Menu
15 Torque reference settings (vector only) 58* CANopen Extended I/O settings Can Port 2
16 PID controller settings 59* CANopen Extended I/O settings CAN Port 1
17 Reference sequencer settings 60* CANopen Scaling Parameters
18 Motorised potentiometer settings 61* CDC CAN Port
19 Trim reference settings 62* CDC CANopen
20 High speed digital I/O settings 63* CDC DeviceNet
21 Fixed reference settings 65* CAN Port 2
22 Skip speed settings 66* CAN 2 CANopen
23 Dynamic brake control settings 67* CAN 2 DeviceNet
24 Speed trim settings 70-72 Application Code Developer
25 Inertia compensation settings 74 PROFIBUS Fieldbus Coupler
26 History log settings 75* PROFIBUS Fieldbus Coupler
27 History log playback settings 78* MicroPEC™
28 Auto-reset settings 76 Reserved
29 Speed and torque monitor settings 77 Reserved
30 Logic block settings 80* Fieldbus - Configuration and status data
31 Status Flag generator settings 83* Fieldbus - Fast produced VCOMs
32 Serial links settings 84* Fieldbus - Fast consumed VCOMs
33 Control Flag 0 to 99 source settings 85* Fieldbus - Slow VCOMs and FIP refs.
34 Control Flag 100 to 127 source settings 86 Ethernet interface Menu

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-7
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

Menu Description Menu Description

35 Miscellaneous features 89* Fieldbus - Data spy module
36 Position controller settings (encoder only) 90 Manufacturer's Menu
37 Position reference settings (encoder only) 91 Fast Analogue Output
38 Position controller monitor (encoder only) 98 Menu enable selection settings
39 Menu 1 Setup Menu 99 Configuration settings
40 Summing nodes settings

Note:*
These menus are described in associated product documentation: -
Menus 58, 65, 66 and 67 in the 2nd CAN Port product manual;
Menus 59, 60, 61 and 62 in the CANopen product manual;
Menus 60, 61 and 63 in the DeviceNet Manual,
Menus 74 and 75 in the PROFIBUS Manual;
Menu 78 in the MicroPEC™ Instruction Sheet;
Menus 80, 83, 84 and 85 in the FIP Manual and
Menu 89 is used for all documentation with Fieldbus applications.
6.1.1 Advanced Features and Parameters
An understanding of Control and Status Flags is fundamental to understanding how to
program the advanced features of the drive. Users who are not familiar with the ALSPA
MV3000e product should read Paragraph 6.33 before attempting to program advanced
features of the drive. A list of status flags is given in Table 5-1 and a list of control flags is
given in Table 5-2.

Page 6-8 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.2 Menu 2 - Basic Motor Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 8 for most settings)
Menu 2 gives access to the parameters required to configure the basic motor settings.
6.2.1 Basic Motor Data
P2.00 - Motor Base Frequency
Specifies the frequency at which the base voltage is achieved and is the normal operating
frequency for the motor.
- Set the value to that given on the motor nameplate.
Allowed values are: 5Hz to 200Hz
P2.01 - Motor Base Voltage
Specifies the voltage applied to the motor terminals when the motor is operating at base
frequency.
- Set the motor base voltage to the value given on the motor nameplate.
Allowed values are: 25V to 1000V (rms)
Notes:
1. The maximum output voltage of the drive cannot be greater than the input supply voltage.
2. Motors rated for a lower voltage than the input supply voltage to the drive can be used with
MV3000e. The drive controls the power of the motor by PWM switching of the output voltage. The
motor therefore can be subject to a voltage equal to the supply voltage. If there is a considerable
difference between motor base voltage and the input supply voltage to the drive, the motor
manufacturer should be consulted, to ensure the motor insulation is suitable for operation up to
the input supply voltage of the drive.
P2.02 - Motor Full Load Current
The motor full load current (FLC) setting is used by the drive to provide motor protection and
optimum motor control. The range of allowed values depends on the size of the drive,
obtained by reading P99.05, and on whether Frequency Control or Vector mode is used.
Allowed values are:
For Frequency Control mode: 0.125 x Drive FLC to 1.5 x Drive FLC
For Vector mode: 0.5 x Drive FLC to 1.5 x Drive FLC
Note:
The Full Load Current of the drive is given by P99.05.
P2.03 - Motor Nominal Full Load Power
The motor nominal full load power is used by the drive to calculate the motor nominal
torque, required by the internal control software. This value is usually given on the motor
nameplate.
Set the value to that given on the motor nameplate.
The allowed values depend on the size of the drive.
P2.04 - Motor Nominal Full Load Speed
The motor nominal full load speed is used by the drive to calculate the motor nominal
torque, required by the internal control software.
Allowed values are: 100r/minute to 9999r/minute
P2.05 - Motor Full Load Power Factor
This parameter is used to define the level of in-phase current corresponding to 100 %
torque. This value is usually given on the motor nameplate. The default value is set for a
typical 4-pole motor for the particular rating of drive.
Allowed values depend on the drive rating.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-9
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P2.06 - Number of Motor Poles

Normally the drive estimates the number of motor poles from the nominal speed. However if
the number of poles is high, the drive may make an erroneous estimate. In this case the
number of motor poles should be entered manually.
Allowed values (even numbers) are:
0 to 28 (0 shows drive has estimated the number)
6.2.2 Motor I²T Protection
P2.07 - Motor 150% Overload Duration
The motor can withstand 150% full load current overload at base frequency. This can be
obtained from the motor manufacturer's motor data sheets.
Allowed values are: 10s to 3600s
P2.08 - Cooling Fan Type
This is used in the I²T calculation to derate the motor according to the type of motor cooling.
Allowed values are
1 = Motor is cooled by a shaft driven fan. MV3000e uses the derate curve for motor full load
current shown at Figure 6-1.
2 = Motor is cooled by a separately powered fan, allowing the full motor rating to be used
down to zero speed.
CONTINUOUS CURRENT
RATING % FLC

100

90

80

70

60

50

40
30

20

10
SPEED
% BASE SPEED
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

Figure 6-1 Motor Derate Curve

P2.09 - Action on Motor I²T Fault

Defines the action to be taken by the drive when the percentage of I²T overload remaining
falls below the prescribed limits.
Allowed values are: 0 = No action
1 = Warning at 75% I²T limit
2 = Warning at 75% I²T limit, Trip at 100 % I²T limit
3 = Current Limit at 75% I²T limit
Note:
Total motor protection against sustained overloads requires direct measurement of motor temperature
using embedded thermostats or PTC (positive temperature co-efficient) devices
(see 6.2.3 and 6.2.4).
6.2.3 Motor Thermostat Protection
(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 9)
P2.11 - Control Flag 113 - Motor Thermostat Input

Page 6-10 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Motor Thermostat protection can be provided by connecting the motor thermostat to a digital
input (DIGIN 1 to 6) on terminal block TB3 on the I/O Panel. Connect this digital input to
MTRIP, Control Flag 113 (P2.11) by editing in the value 1.001 to 1.006 for DIGIN 1-6. The
motor thermostat input is normally held high (logic 1). In the event of the motor overheating
the thermostat becomes open circuit (logic 0).
The motor thermostat input is considered healthy when CF113 is set to 1.
P2.10 - Action on MTRIP (Over-temperature)
This parameter controls the action of the drive when the MTRIP digital
Input = (logic) 0. Options are:
0 = No Action
1 = Warning (No. 101)
2 = Trip (No. 21)
P2.12 - Motor Continuous Duty
This feature allows the motor to operate continuously at a different current than specified in
P2.02; in certain applications this allows continuous running at a higher load.
Allowed range: 75% to 125% (of value in P2.02)
Default value: 100%
6.2.4 Motor PTC Protection
Connecting the motor PTC device between TB5/1 and TB5/3 on the I/O Panel can provide
motor PTC protection. If an encoder is used the PTC wiring should share a common screen
with the encoder wiring, as shown at Figure 6-2.

TB5
ENCODER

E
11

3 ENC_0V

1 MOTOR_PTC
PTC

Figure 6-2 Motor PTC Connection

P2.13 - Motor PTC Trip Resistance

This is the value of motor PTC resistance to be determined as the trip level, i.e. above this
value the motor is too hot; there is ±0.1kΩ hysteresis on this value.
Allowed range: 0.10kΩ to 10.00kΩ
P2.14 - Measured PTC Resistance
This is the value of resistance that the drive has determined between TB5/1 and TB5/3.
Allowed range: 0.10kΩ to 10.00kΩ
P2.15 - Motor PTC Action
This parameter specifies the action to be taken by the drive when the measured PTC
resistance is above the Trip value, i.e. when P2.14 > P2.13.
Options are: 0 = No Action (default)
1 = Warning - drive issues a PTC Warning (No. 103)

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-11
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

2 = Trip - drive issues a PTC Trip (No. 66)

3 = Warning and Current Limit - drive issues a PTC Warning as Option 1
and additionally the current limit is reduced to the motor's capability at
this speed. This capability will depend upon the motor cooling type,
described at P2.08, and follows the same speed/current characteristic as
described for the motor I²T limit.
The motor PTC Trip is made auto-resettable by setting P28.10 (Motor Trips Auto-Reset
Enable).

Page 6-12 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.3 Menu 3 - Frequency Control Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 6)
Menu 3 gives access to the parameters required to configure the drive for Frequency
Control (VVVF) operation.
6.3.1 Fluxing Control
P3.00 - Fluxing Control
The output voltage/frequency characteristics of the drive can be changed to suit different
types of motor load. Three options are provided:
Option 1 - Linear V to F
Linear V to F, the voltage is directly proportional to the frequency (Hz).
See Figure 6-3.
Option 2 - Square Law V to F
Square law V to F, where the voltage is proportional to Hz2. This option is more suitable for
loads that obey a square law such as pumps and fans. See Figure 6-4.
Option 3 - Economy Flux Mode
Economy flux mode, where the magnetic flux level can vary according to the load (magnetic
flux is defined as motor volts divided by output frequency). This can reduce the losses in a
lightly loaded motor, giving an additional energy saving. P3.31 allows adjustment of the flux
reduction at no load.
MOTOR VOLTS

CONSTANT VOLTAGE REGION

BASE VOLTAGE

LINEAR VOLTAGE REGION

BOOST VOLTS

BOOST REGION

FREQUENCY

3/4 BASE FREQ. BASE FREQ.

Figure 6-3 Linear V to F (Option 1)

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-13
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

MOTOR VOLTS

CONSTANT VOLTAGE REGION

BASE VOLTAGE

SQUARE LAW
VOLTAGE CURVE

BOOST VOLTS

BOOST REGION

FREQUENCY

3/4 BASE FREQ. BASE FREQ.

Figure 6-4 Square Law V to F (Option 2)

6.3.2 Economy Flux Mode

The MV3000e has the possibility, in frequency control, to vary the magnetic flux level
according to the load (magnetic flux is defined as motor volts divided by output frequency).
This can reduce the losses in a lightly loaded motor, thus giving an additional energy saving.
Economy flux mode is selected as Option 3 of P3.00 - Fluxing Control (see 6.3.1).
The extent to which the flux is reduced at no load is defined by P3.31.
P3.31 - Economy Factor (Frequency Control Mode)
P3.31 defines, as a % of nominal flux, the reduction that is to occur at no load. The range of
P3.31 is 0% to 50%.
The actual magnetic flux level varies with load, as shown at Figure 6-5.

Motor
Flux
(% Nominal)

100

100 -
P3.31

Motor
Torque
100 (% Nominal)

Figure 6-5 Variation of Magnetic Flux with Load

As the load increases the motor flux is increased quickly to avoid stalling, as the load is
decreased the flux is reduced only slowly to prevent instability.
Applications suitable for economy mode flux control are where:
• Loading varies only slowly

Page 6-14 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

• Speed ramps are relatively slow

• The load is often below the nominal load for the motor
Figure 6-6 to Figure 6-8 show typical graphs illustrating use of the P3.31 Economy Factor
and showing a comparison of Economy Factors for varying conditions of motor volts, torque
and current, and drive output frequency. The vertical scale on the graphs is shown in Unit %
and the units vary in relation to each curve shown. The principle illustrated is the energy
saving with reduced motor voltage for a reduced load as set by the P3.31 Economy Factor.

100%

Motor
Unit %

Volts (V)
Motor
Current (A)

50%

Torque (Nm)

Output Frequency (Hz)

0
Time

Figure 6-6 Motor Volts with no Economy Factor

100%

Motor
Unit %

Volts (V)
Motor
Current (A)

50%
Output Frequency (Hz)

Torque (Nm)
0
Time

Figure 6-7 Motor Volts with a 50% Economy Factor

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-15
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

100%
Motor Volts (V) 25% Economy Factor

Unit %
Motor Volts (V)
50% Economy Factor

50%

Torque (Nm)

0
Time

Figure 6-8 Motor Volts with Economy Factors at 50% and 25%

6.3.3 Volts Boost

P3.01 - Fixed Volts Boost
Fixed Voltage Boost is used when high motor torque is required at low frequency. The value
set in this parameter specifies the number of volts added to the motor voltage at zero
frequency to overcome winding resistance effects in the motor. This voltage boost is
gradually reduced as the frequency increases as shown at Figure 6-3 and Figure 6-4.
Allowed values are: 0.0Vrms to 50.0Vrms @ 0 Hz
P3.02 - Auto Volts Boost
Auto Volts Boost (load dependent) may be used to compensate for unpredictable start
loads. The value entered represents the voltage boost to be applied at Start Frequency and
Full Load Current. The amount of voltage boost applied is proportional to load current and
reduces as the drive frequency increases.
Allowed values are in the range: 0.0% to 200% Nominal
6.3.4 Variable Volts Boost
(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 6)
Parameters P3.24 to P3.27 allow control of the adjustable voltage boost.
P3.24 - Variable Volts Boost
This is the maximum value of the variable volts boost. It has a range of 0 - 100.0V in 0.1V
steps.
P3.25 - Variable Volts Boost Source
The source can be chosen from:
1 = Fixed 100 % 7 = RS485 Ref. 2
2 = Analogue Ref. 1 8 = RS232 Ref. 1
3 = Analogue Ref. 2 9 = RS232 Ref. 2
4 = Fixed 0% (Not used) 10 = PID Controller
5 = Fixed 0% (Not used) 11 = Pointer 19
6 = RS485 Ref. 1
P3.26 - Control Flag 126 - Enable Variable Volts Boost
The Enable Variable Volts Boost function is active when CF126 is set to 1.
P3.27 - Rectification Mode
This parameter defines how negative boost references are to be handled:

Page 6-16 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

0 = Clamp : Negative boosts are clamped to zero

1 = Rectify : Negative boosts are treated as positive
2 = Allow Negative : Negative boosts (i.e. reduction in volts) are
allowed
P3.28 - Variable Boost Output
This parameter monitors the Variable Volts Boost output (read only).
Values are in the range: -3276.7V to +3276.7V
6.3.5 Slip Compensation Gain
P3.03 - Slip Compensation Gain
Slip compensation increases the output frequency of the drive with the load, to compensate
for the decrease in motor speed as the torque demand increases. The value entered is the
slip compensation to be applied by the drive, expressed as a percentage of that which the
drive calculates as necessary.
Allowed values are: -200% to +200% Hz @ FLC and unity PF
6.3.6 Absolute Minimum Frequency
P3.04 - Absolute Minimum Frequency
The absolute minimum frequency is the output frequency of the drive at the instant of start
up. This feature is useful for transformer fed motors, multi-motor applications or very high
starting torque applications.
The drive output frequency is not allowed to go below the value in P3.04. E.g. if P3.04 is set
to 2 Hz and the ramp is demanding a frequency of 1 Hz the output frequency will be 2 Hz
although the output voltage will be as for 1 Hz.
Allowed values are: 0.0Hz to 50.0Hz.
6.3.7 Current Limit (Frequency Control Mode)
P3.05 - Fixed Current Limit
A fixed current limit provides protection for the drive and the motor in the event of current
overload. For example, this could occur if a motor is used with a higher rated drive where
the overload current is set too high. If the current limit is reached, the drive takes measures
to prevent a trip due to instantaneous Overcurrent (Trip No. 7) by load shedding:
For an accelerating motor
Reducing the acceleration rate. In this case the current limit may determine the
maximum acceleration of high inertia loads and requested acceleration levels
may not be achieved.
For a motor at steady-state speed
Reducing the motor speed, by reducing the output frequency.
The rate at which load shedding is applied depends upon the amount of overload and is
controlled by the value set in P3.07. This is shown at Figure 6-9.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-17
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

I rms

Trip No.7 level

P3.07 too low

P3.05 setting P3.07 correct

P3.07 too high

time

Figure 6-9 Effect of Current Limit and Response Speed on Drive Nominal Current

The current limit value set in P3.05 is simply a percentage of the nominal drive current
indicated by P99.05 i.e.
P3.05 value = Desired peak current x 100 %
P99.05 value
Note:
P3.05 is independent of the motor current set in P2.02.
Example:
A motor has a nominal drive current of 150A and it is required to limit the current to 120A.
Then the value entered in P3.05 is 120 x 100 (%) = 80
150
Range of values
The range of values of current limit that may be used to obtain P3.05 depends on the
overload rating set in P99.02. This may be 110% (default) or 150%, so allowed values are in
the range:
For 110% rating -
10% x P99.05 to 110% x P99.05
For 150% rating -
10% x P99.05 to 150% x P99.05

Scaling
The current limit set in P3.05 may be scaled by any of 17 sources, selectable by P3.06, and
the scaled value becomes the Fixed Current Limit. The default source (Option 1) gives
100% scaling.
P3.06 - Current Limit Source
P3.06 is used to select the source of the current limit value.
Allowed options:
1 = Fixed Value (fixed 100 %) 10 = Fixed Speed
2 = REF1 11 = Motorised Pot.
3 = REF2 12 = Trim Reference
4 = RS485 REF 1 13 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
5 = RS485 REF 2 14 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
6 = RS232 REF 1 15 = Summing Node A

Page 6-18 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

7 = RS232 REF 2 16 = Summing Node B

8 = PID controller 17 = Pointer 13
9 = Ref. Sequencer
For all options the applied current limit is given by:
Current Limit (% of drive FLC) = P3.05 x [Selected Source]
100
P3.07 - Current Limit Response Speed (Frequency Control Mode Only)
The value set in P3.07 represents the rate at which the frequency is reduced when the
current limit is reached and the drive load sheds.
Allowed values are: 0.0%/s to 500.0%/s
The effect of P3.07 on drive nominal current is shown at Figure 6-9. If P3.07 is set too low
the current limit will be slow to respond, if set too high instability of the output current may
occur.
P3.08 - Control Flag 114 - Current Limit Defeat
This parameter allows the source for Control Flag 114 to be programmed.
When Control Flag 114 is set, the Current Limit function is disabled. The drive will accelerate
at the programmed rate to the set speed regardless of the current required. This flag also
disables the Torque Limit (even if it is enabled) and the limit on regeneration power.
This feature can be used to achieve high dynamic performance but must be used with care,
since it increases the possibility of trips.
Interaction between CF114 and CF115 is shown at Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 Interaction of CF114 and CF115

Current and Tq Tq Limit VVVF VVVF Remarks

Limit Disable Enable Current Limit Tq Limit
CF114 CF115 operational? operational?
0 0 9 X
0 1 9 9
1 0 or 1 X X See P3.08
and P3.11

6.3.8 Torque Limit (Frequency Control Mode Only)

Torque limit provides a method of limiting the torque produced by the motor to a maximum
level. When the torque limit is reached, the drive load sheds to prevent this level being
exceeded. This is done by:
— Reducing the acceleration rate
In this case the torque limit may determine the maximum acceleration rate of
high inertia loads.
— Reducing the speed of the motor
The rate at which the frequency is reduced depends upon the amount of torque-
overload and is controlled by the value set in P3.09.
The torque value used by the drive is an estimated value and can be monitored at P9.04;
this estimate is accurate at high speeds but becomes less accurate at lower speeds. The
torque limits are defined for +ve (clockwise) and -ve (anti-clockwise) directions using the
parameters in Menu 8, see 6.8 for details.
Figure 6-10 shows the effect of torque limiting and response speed on estimated torque.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-19
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

Estimated Torque
(P9.04)

P3.09 too low

Torque Limit
Setting P3.09 correct
(P8.00 to P8.11)

P3.09 too high

Time

Figure 6-10 Effect of Torque Limiting and Response Speed on Estimated Torque

P3.09 - Torque Limit Response Speed

This defines the rate at which the output speed is reduced in response to a torque overload.
If this parameter is set too high, instability in output current may be observed when in torque
limit. If this parameter is set too low then the torque limit will be slow to respond.
Allowed values: 0.0%/s to 500.0%/s
P3.10 - Torque Limit Cut-in Frequency
This defines the frequency above which the torque limit becomes active. Due to the
inaccuracy of torque limit at low speeds, this value should normally not be set below 5 Hz.
Allowed values are: 0.20Hz to 50.0Hz
P3.11 - Control Flag 115 - Torque Limit Enable
The torque limit function is active when CF115 is set to 1.
Interaction between CF114 and CF115 is shown at Table 6-2.
6.3.9 Estimation of Torque
When accurate torque estimation is required in frequency control mode, the drive uses a
mathematical model based on the equivalent circuit of the motor stator, as shown at Figure
6-11.
I ph Rs Ls

Rm

Figure 6-11 Stator Equivalent Circuit

Where: Rs = Motor Stator Resistance (P3.13)

Ls = Motor Stator Leakage Inductance (P3.14)
Rm = Motor Magnetising Resistance (P3.15)

Page 6-20 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

These parameters can be entered into the drive in any of three different ways, as selected
by P3.12. Ideally the parameters should be obtained from the motor manufacturer for the
exact motor in use. If this is not possible, the drive can estimate the values from other data,
and can provide a good estimation if a calibration run is performed with the motor
mechanically uncoupled.
The parameters should be entered for a "star" equivalent connected motor. If the parameters
are known for a "delta" equivalent, these should be divided by 3.
P3.12 - Motor Parameterisation Method
Options available:
Option 1 = Direct entry from motor manufacturers data
P3.13 to P3.15 must be specified from the motor manufacturers data. If data is not available,
choose Option 2 or 3.
Option 2 = Estimate from nameplate data
The drive will estimate the equivalent circuit data from the values placed in parameters
P2.00 and P2.04 and will write these values to P3.13 to P3.15. Existing data in P3.13 to
P3.15 will be overwritten and P3.12 will be reset to 1.
Option 3 = Calibration run
The drive measures various motor and drive parameters, then uses this data to calculate
values for the equivalent circuit. This option produces the most accurate estimation of
torque. When performing a calibration run it is important that the motor load must not be
connected, though the coupling may be left in place. As for Option 2, existing data in P3.13
to P3.15 will be overwritten and P3.12 will be reset to 1.
P3.13 - VVVF Stator Resistance
Enter the stator resistance (Rs) in mΩ.
Allowed values: 0.1mΩ to 3000mΩ
P3.14 - VVVF Stator Leakage Inductance
Enter the stator leakage inductance (Ls) in mH.
Allowed values: 0.1mH to 30.0mH
P3.15 - VVVF Magnetising Resistance
Enter the Magnetising resistance (Rm) in Ohms.
Allowed values: 1Ω to 20,000Ω
6.3.10 Motor Stability (P3.16, P3.17)
Under conditions of light load some induction motors may be prone to instability. This is
seen as uneven motor speed and current and may cause the drive to trip (probably on over-
volts).
Motor instability can be made worse by having incorrect flux (defined by the motor base
frequency and base voltage) on the motor. Firstly check that parameters P2.00 and P2.01
are set correctly. Additionally, motor instability is often worse at higher switching
frequencies. If it is possible, reduce the drive’s switching frequency by changing the setting
in parameter P35.00.
To avoid the occurrence of motor instability the drive continually executes a stabilising
function. In most cases the default settings of this function will be adequate to prevent an
occurrence of motor instability. If the motor is particularly prone to instability or the duty/load
is very light it may be necessary to increase the amount of stabilisation.
To change the motor stabilisation adjust parameters P3.16 and P3.17 as follows:
1. Increase the Stability Gain (P3.16) in small increments until the motor runs smoothly.
If the motor fails to stabilise and the gain becomes too high (which will introduce other
modes of instability) then set P3.16 back to the default value (1.000 Hz/(%/scan)).

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-21
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

2. Increase the stability time constant (P3.17) by 10% at a time and then adjust the
Stability Gain (P3.16) through its range until stability is achieved.
P3.16 - Stability Gain
Allowed values: 0.000Hz/(%/scan) to 4.000Hz/(%/scan)
P3.17 - Stability Time Constant
Allowed values: 0 scans to 2000 scans
P3.18 to P3.23 and P99.01
Parameters P3.18 to P3.23 and the configuration parameter P99.01 are concerned with
Scalar Control of the drive. This is a specialised motor control method, used on certain
process lines.
6.3.11 Feedback Compensation
P3.29 - Feedback Compensation
This parameter causes the drive's power bridge compensation algorithm to be based upon
current feedback, rather than current estimation, when operating in VVVF mode.
If severe motor stability problems are experienced, that cannot be resolved by changing the
values of P3.16 & P3.17, this parameter should be set to a value of 1.
Allowed values: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
6.3.12 Scalar Control
(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 16)
It is selected as Option 3 for P99.01 Control Structure.
In general, this control method should not be used, please refer to Converteam for more
information.
6.3.13 Frequency Multiplier
P3.30 - Frequency Multiplier
This parameter has been added for certain specialised applications. In general, this feature
should not be enabled without obtaining the appropriate application note from Converteam.
Allowed values: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
6.3.14 VVVF Modulation Limit
P3.32 - VVVF Modulation Limit
Restrictions are imposed on the minimum PWM pulse width produced by the drive. These
restrictions have consequences on the drive’s maximum output modulation depth, and,
consequently, output voltage.
Table 6-3, below, shows the reduction in linear output modulation depth resulting from the
minimum pulse width limitations.
Table 6-3 Consequences of Minimum Output PWM Pulses

PWM Period Switching Pulse Limit, Maximum

Frequency on Terminals of Modulation
Drive Depth
800µs 1.25kHz 5.0µs 98.75%
400µs 2.5kHz 5.0µs 97.50%
200µs 5kHz 5.0µs 95.00%
133µs 7.5kHz 5.0µs 92.49%

Page 6-22 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

The default value of modulation limit 1 is set from the table above.
To compensate for the above instantaneous modulation depth limit (or modulation clipping),
the modulation depth is boosted when the required modulation depth is greater than the
maximum instantaneous achievable, so as to restore the amplitude of the fundamental
component. This, unavoidably, increases the amplitude of the harmonic distortion
components.
Additionally, the quiescent operating modulation depth of the drive is reduced to the
Maximum Modulation Depth in the above table so that it does not sit at 100% modulation,
but at a lower value so that harmonic distortion is not the normal operating condition. Over
modulation is still possible for transient conditions.
If the application demands it, this value can be increased up to 107.00%. However, it should
be noted that values greater than those above necessarily result in output voltage distortion,
which in turn result in current distortion. In particular, 5th and 7th harmonic components of
current will result in increased motor heating, and torque ripple.

1
Early versions of firmware had modulation depths defaulting to 100%. Also V6.03 Firmware at 105% modulation depth (maximum
applied in VVVF) is equivalent to V8.00 to V11.73 firmware at 101% modulation depth.
An application note in Section 10 gives magnitude of harmonic voltages for a function of modulation depth.
With P3.32=101% the same harmonic voltage that will be applied to the machine is equivalent to 105% in firmware versions up to
V6.03

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-23
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.4 Menu 4 - Start and Stop Control

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 5)

WARNING
If the drive is configured to auto-restart, the motor can start rotating with no
operator command. Take precautions to prevent injury to personnel.
Menu 4 gives access to the parameters required to configure the stop and start controls for
the drive. The Start mode controls (see text) apply only to applications where speed
feedback is not available i.e. VVVF or Encoderless Vector Control. The DC injection controls
apply only to VVVF applications.
6.4.1 Start Mode
P4.00 - Start Mode
The action taken by the drive when RUN and STOP commands are received is controlled by
the settings in P4.00 and P4.07 respectively. However, in Vector Control with Encoder any
values entered in P4.00 will not affect the way the drive starts up.
Allowed values for P4.00 are:
1= Immediate low frequency start - the drive starts at the start up frequency
(set in P3.04), and increases the frequency at the acceleration rate (set in
P6.00 or P6.01) to the reference frequency. If the motor is spinning when
the drive is started, it is decelerated to a standstill, at current limit, and
then accelerated to the reference frequency.
2= Synchrostart - the drive synchronises the output frequency to the motor
speed, allowing the motor to be brought up to speed without stopping.
This mode, used in conjunction with the auto-reset trips, allows the motor
to recover from transient faults with minimum interruption. The
synchrostart options are defined in P4.01.
The synchrostart function (starting onto a spinning motor without speed measurement) is
available for both VVVF and Encoderless Vector modes. In both cases the feature is
enabled and set up by Menu 4. In general the parameters have the same meaning for either
VVVF or Encoderless Vector. The only exception to this is P4.02 - Synchrostart
Current/Flux, see P4.02.
P4.01 - Synchrostart Mode
Defines the method used by the drive to synchronise the drive output frequency with the
motor speed during a restart in synchrostart mode.
Allowed values are: 1 = Search in the reference direction only.
2 = Search, first in the reference direction, then in the opposite
direction.
If the motor speed is not found, i.e. if the motor is stationary at start up, then the drive
performs a normal low frequency start.
P4.02 - Synchrostart Current
Reduces the current output to the motor when the drive is searching for the motor speed.
This can be used to help reduce the disturbance to the motor while scanning.
In VVVF mode this parameter sets the current level, as a percentage of drive full load
current. Generally this should be set somewhere just above the motor no-load current.
In Encoderless Vector mode, this parameter sets the motor flux level, as a % of the nominal
flux level of the motor. Typically this should be set to 15%.
Allowed values are: 0% to 100% (of the drive rated current)

Page 6-24 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Notes:
1. The default value of 10% will suit most applications but may need to be increased when using
high efficiency motors or when there is a large difference between the maximum frequency and
the actual motor speed. If the value is set too low for the application, this may result in incorrect
synchronisation detection by the drive.
2. Premature Synchronisation: If the excitation level (current or flux) is set too low, the drive may
incorrectly detect synchronous speed immediately it is enabled. This can be seen as very high
current levels. If this problem occurs, the excitation level should be slowly increased.
P4.03 - Synchrostart Scan Rate
(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 6)
This parameter defines the rate at which the output frequency is scanned whilst the drive
searches for the motor speed during synchrostarting. For some combinations of motor and
load, it may be necessary to reduce this value to avoid over voltage trips during the
synchronisation period, for large motors the synchronisation point may be missed if
scanning is too fast.
Allowed values are: 0%/s to 250%/s
Notes:
1. Over voltage Trips. If synchronisation is detected late, and no DB unit is fitted, the drive may trip
on over voltage. If this problem occurs, the Synchrostart Scan Rate should be reduced.
2. Drive has a 'Re-enable' Delay, where it cannot be re-started until it is stopped for at least this time.
This is defaulted to 3.0 x Tr (Rotor Time Constant). To ensure Tr is the correct value determine
the motor parameters i.e. P12.03 = 2.
P4.21 - Synchrostart Minimum Speed (VVVF Control Mode Only)
When this parameter is set, it gives a threshold below which the synchronous start (fly
catching) function is disabled/terminated.
Allowed values are: 0% to 100% of Top Speed
P4.25 - VVVF Synchrostart Maximum Speed
This parameter is used to specify from where the synchrostart scan starts. The default is
100%, i.e. 100% of Top Speed. If the P9.00 – ‘Speed Reference’ value is used
synchronisation may be achieved more quickly.
However, by using the P9.00 value any shaft speeds greater than this value will not be
found. Thus only choose this option if there is no chance of the shaft speed increasing
above the P9.00 value.
P4.26 - Tr Period
This parameter displays the value of the motor’s rotor time constant.
P4.27 – Re-enable Delay
This parameter allows the user to vary the re-enable delay (after a stop or trip). The default
value of 3 times the motor’s rotor time constant is used to allow the motor flux to decay
before re-enabling. This is the normal setting and should not be reduced without fully
understanding the implications.
P4.28 – Restart Time
This value is the time allowed to restart following a PWM inhibit due to a supply derived over
voltage condition (i.e. one that has not caused a hard trip). If the drive has not restarted
within this time, the supply derived over voltage condition will be treated as a true trip and
the drive will trip.
6.4.2 Selecting RUN/STOP Control by Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) or by Control Flags
Selection between Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) and Control Flags is made by P4.09.
P4.09 - Control Flag 116 - Keypad/Remote
P4.09 (CF116) determines whether the drive is controlled by the Keypad or remotely via
Control Flags, and therefore selects the source of the normal STOP and RUN commands,
as follows:

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-25
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

CF116 = Cleared (0) Run/Stop source = Keypad

CF116 = Set (1) Run/Stop source = CF0 and CF1 (or Backups
CF123, CF124, CF125)
Note:
CF116 = 1 is also a requirement for removing the Keypad.
Using the Keypad for RUN/STOP Control
With P4.09 set to 0 (Keypad RUN/STOP selected), The drive will respond to commands
from the STOP and START buttons on the Keypad.
Using Control Flags for RUN/STOP Control
With P4.09 set to 1, three Control Flags control the RUN and STOP sequences:
P4.04 (CF 1) - Start
P4.05 (CF 0) - Normal Stop
P4.06 (CF 2) - Rapid Stop
These can be connected to many sources, see 6.33.
To configure the RUN/STOP commands:
1. Connect Control Flags 0, 1 and 2 to desired sources (e.g. digital inputs) as required.
2. Set the Normal and Rapid Stop Modes in P4.07 and P4.08 respectively.
3. Set the Zero Hold Speed Time in P4.10.
The drive will now respond to RUN and STOP demands from the configured external
sources.
6.4.3 Starting and Stopping Parameters
The starting and stopping status is shown at Figure 6-12.
P4.04 - Control Flag 1 - Start
Start is enabled when CF1 is set to 1, the drive will run if CF0 (Normal Stop) is set to 1.
P4.05 - Control Flag 0 - Normal Stop
Normal Stop is enabled when CF0 is set to 0, when the Stop circuit is opened. To start the
drive the Stop circuit must be closed.
P4.06 - Control Flag 2 - Rapid Stop
Rapid Stop is enabled when CF2 is set to 0. The drive will rapid stop when the Rapid Stop
circuit is opened.

Pre-fluxing or
Starting
2 Synchrostarting

Motor is Accelerating
Running or at Speed
0

Motor Decelerating or has

Stopped but the Zero Speed
Stopping Hold Time is being used
3

Motor has stopped;

Zero Speed Hold Time
Stopped expired, at Zero Speed?
1

Figure 6-12 Starting and Stopping Status

Page 6-26 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.4.4 Stop Modes

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 5)
The drive may be commanded to stop in either a Normal or Rapid mode (these are defined
by parameters P4.07 and P4.08 respectively). These stop modes are selected by Control
Flags 0 and 2 respectively.
P4.07 - Normal Stop Mode
P4.08 - Rapid Stop Mode
Each Stop Mode may be programmed to stop in a variety of ways.
Allowed values: 1 = Disable & Coast
2 = Ramp to Stop
3 = Torque Limit 1 Stop (Vector only)
4 = Torque Limit 2 Stop (Vector only)
5 = DC Injection (Frequency Control only)
Hint: Make a Torque Limit, in Frequency Control, by using Status Flag 3 and Control
Flag 115, Set P8.00 for the required Torque Limit. Then set Ramp Stop (Menu
6) with a reasonably quick value. Then the Torque Limit in VVVF is low
bandwidth.

3 115
P3.11 = 2.003

P4.10 - Zero Speed Hold Time

Several of the allowed stop modes include holding zero speed for this period of time before
disabling. This parameter has no action if "Disable & Coast" is the active stop mode being
used.
Allowed values: are: 0.0s to 500.0s
P4.11 - Stop Time Limit
Disables the drive if the motor has not been brought to rest within the specified time limit.
This parameter has no action if "Disable & Coast" is the active stop mode being used.
Allowed values: 0 = No stop time limit
1 s to 3600 s
P4.12 - Motor Regeneration Power Limit
This defines the maximum power that the drive will regenerate from the load. It is entered in
kW and is used in the case when the Dynamic Braking Unit connected to the drive has its
peak power dissipation less than the drive's peak regeneration power. (See Menu 23 for
Dynamic Brake operation.)
Allowed values: -0.1kW to 6000.0kW
Note:
-0.1 means NO LIMIT, the energy is to be absorbed by the DB unit.
6.4.5 DC Injection Braking
(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 6)
DC Injection Braking applies only to Frequency Control mode applications and is invoked by
setting the value of Stop Mode parameter P4.07 or P4.08 to 5. When a STOP command is
received, if the output frequency is below the DC injection frequency, a DC current is
injected into the motor for a short period (the DC injection duration) to produce a braking
torque, and a resulting zero speed torque. If the output frequency is above the DC injection
frequency the output decelerates to the DC injection frequency, before DC injection takes
place. The braking sequence is shown at Figure 6-13.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-27
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P4.13 - DC Injection Speed

Sets the speed at which DC injection braking is to be started.
Allowed values are: 0% to 100% (of rated speed)

Press STOP. Initially motor

Speed may deccelerate normally
until speed is less than DC
injection speed.
DC braking
starts

DC injection
speed

DC injection
delay begins

DC injection
delay

Time

DC injection
duration
(continues even
after motor stops)

Figure 6-13 DC Injection Braking Sequence

P4.14 - DC Injection Current

Sets the DC injection current.
Allowed values are: 0% to 150% (of drive rated current)
P4.15 - DC Injection Duration
Sets the duration of the DC injection, in seconds.
Allowed values are: 1s to 120s
P4.16 - DC Injection Delay
If a `Stop' command is asserted while the drive output frequency is already below the DC
injection frequency the drive may trip. This parameter defines an adjustable delay to allow
the motor to de-flux and so prevent the drive from tripping.
Allowed values are in the range: 0.0 s to 20.0 s
6.4.6 Output Enable
(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 6)
P4.17 - Control Flag 25 - Output Enable
When set to 1 (default) enables the output bridge.

Page 6-28 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.4.7 Backup Start/Stop

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 5)
The Control Flag Stop/Starts are only active if the Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) is NOT
being used i.e. when CF 116 = 1.
P4.18 - Control Flag 123 - Backup Run/Stop Select
When set to 0 (off) (default) disables selection of Backup Stop and Run inputs.
When set to 1 (on) enables selection of Backup Run/Stop.
P4.19 - Control Flag 124 - Backup Stop
Refer to the table for Backup Start/Stop details
1 = Allows Run
0 = Stop
P4.20 - Control Flag 125 - Backup Start
Refer to Table 6-4 for Backup Start/Stop details
1 = Run
0 = Remains Running
Table 6-4 Backup Start/Stop Details

Backup Start/ Normal Stop Normal Start Backup Stop Backup Start
Stop CF 123
CF 0 CF 1 CF 124 CF 125
1 = Run
1 = Allows Run (if Stop = 1)

0 * *
0 = Stop
0 = Remains
Running
1 = Run
1 = Allows Run (if Stop = 1)

1 * *
0 = Stop
0 = Remains
Running

Note:
*= Function not available.
6.4.8 Synchrostart Power Factor Control
During the final phase of the VVVF synchrostarting algorithm, the drive returns to its V/F
setpoint, whilst adjusting the output frequency, by controlling power factor. This is done so
that, as the voltage is re-established, regeneration should not take place, and prevent the
drive from tripping on over voltage. Under some circumstances it may be necessary to
adjust the parameters involved in this power factor control.
P4.22 - Synchrostart Power Factor Demand
Allowed values:
-1.00 to +1.00
The default value of 0.10 indicates a slightly motoring power factor condition.
P4.23 - Synchrostart Power Factor Kp
This is the proportional gain for the power factor controller.
Allowed values:
0 to 1000

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-29
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P4.24 - Synchrostart Power Factor Ki

This is the integral gain for the power factor controller.
Allowed values:
0 to 1000

Page 6-30 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.5 Menu 5 - Speed Reference Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 5)
Menu 5 gives access to the parameters required to configure speed references.
6.5.1 Speed References
P5.00 - Speed Reference
P5.00 toggles between a read-only or an editable speed value.
– When the Keypad reference is the active reference, then P5.00 can be edited by the
Keypad, or the and keys can control the speed.
– When the Keypad reference is not active, then P5.00 simply reports the current value
of the reference, like a monitor point.
P5.01 - Speed Reference 1 Source
P5.02 - Speed Reference 2 Source
P5.03 - Speed Reference 3 Source
P5.04 - Speed Reference 4 Source
Each of these parameters contains an identical list of options from which a choice of speed
reference can be made. The options are:
1 = Keypad Speed Reference 12 = Trim Reference
2 = REF1 Analogue input 13 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
3 = REF2 Analogue input 14 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
4 = RS485 Link Ref 1 15 = High Speed Digital Input
5 = RS485 Link Ref 2 16 = Position Control
6 = RS232 Link Ref 1 17 = Summing Node A
7 = RS232 Link Ref 2 18 = Summing Node B
8 = PID Controller 19 = Summing Node C
9 = Reference Sequencer 20 = Summing Node D
10 = Fixed Reference Menu 21 = Pointer 1
11 = Motorised Pot. 22 = Pointer 2
Note:
Option 15 is a frequency input. The speed reference is defined by the frequency of pulses on the High
Speed Digital Inputs (connections TB4/8 and TB4/9 on the I/O Panel).
A Speed Reference source is selected, or may be changed "on-line", by P5.07 - P5.10.
P5.05 - Backup Speed Reference
If the drive sees a selected Reference Source as "unhealthy" it issues a warning, subject to
P5.06 setting, and switches to the Backup Reference Source if this is enabled by P5.05. If
Backup is not enabled, or if Backup is also unhealthy, the drive will trip on REFERENCE
LOSS.
Allowed values: 0 = No Backup
1 to 22 = same meaning as P5.01.
P5.06 - Warning on Backup
Switching from principal control or reference sources to backup normally causes the drive to
issue a warning. If the drive is required to switch between principal and backup reference
sources as part of its normal operating cycle, this may not be required. This warning can be
suppressed by setting P5.06.
Allowed values are: 0 = Warning on loss of principal reference.
1 = No Warning on loss of principal reference.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-31
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P5.07 - Control Flag 4 - Reference 1 Select

P5.08 - Control Flag 5 - Reference 2 Select
P5.09 - Control Flag 6 - Reference 3 Select
P5.10 - Control Flag 7 - Reference 4 Select
The four Speed References, P5.01 to P5.04, are individually selected by using Control Flags
CF4 to CF7.
If more than one of these references is selected, the lowest number CF will take priority, this
allows references to be changed smoothly by external logic or computer control. To avoid
unwanted intermediate reference selections it is recommended that unused flags should be
set to 0.
Examples:
To change from Reference Source 2 to Reference Source 1, set CF4 to 1. This will change
the reference immediately.
To change from Reference Source 1 to Reference Source 2, first set CF5 to 1 then set CF4
to 0. The reference will only change when the higher priority flag is set to 0.
6.5.2 Direction Control
P5.11 - Direction Control
P5.12 - Control Flag 3 - Direction
Control Flag 3 may be combined with the reference polarity to determine the direction, or,
may determine the direction directly.
Allowed values: P5.11 = 1 = Polarity of Speed Reference is combined with CF3,
meaning CF3 = 1 will invert the sign of the reference.
P5.11 = 2 = Positive Speed References input only. The sign of
the actual speed reference is ONLY defined by the state of CF3,
1 = Reverse.
6.5.3 Jog Speeds
P5.13 - Control Flag 8 - Jog Enable
This Control Flag sets the drive to the jog speed entered in P5.14 or P5.27.
Allowed values: 0 = Disable jogging
1 = Enable jogging
P5.14 - Jog Speed 1
This parameter sets the drive jog speed when Jog Speed 1 is selected by P5.28. It is simply
another reference but the value is not fed back to the Keypad reference for bumpless
transfer. The jog speed is set in units of 0.1% Top Speed.
Allowed values: -100.0% to +100 % (of Top Speed)
(See also P5.13, P5.27 and P5.28)
P5.27 - Jog Speed 2
This parameter sets the drive jog speed when Jog Speed 2 is selected by P5.28. It is simply
another reference but the value is not fed back to the Keypad reference for bumpless
transfer.
Allowed values: -100.0% to +100.0% (of Top Speed)
P5.28 - Control Flag 121 - Jog Speed 1/2 Select
Selects between Jog Speeds 1 and 2.
0 = Jog Speed 1 (P5.14)
1 = Jog Speed 2 (P5.27)

Page 6-32 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.5.4 Speed Limits

Maximum Speeds
In Vector Mode the maximum speed values in P5.15 and P5.16 cannot be edited above
base speed until the de-magnetisation curve is known. This requires a Calibration Run
(P2.03 = 3) or an edit, manually, of P12.17 to P12.21.
Table 6-5 shows the limits on maximum speeds, these are determined by a combination of
the control mode and the PWM switching frequency. For any combination, the maximum
speed limit is the first occurring limit of either the maximum drive output frequency or the
number of times motor base speed or the motor r/minute limit.
Table 6-5 Maximum Speed Limit Criteria

Limit caused by first reached of:

Control PWM Maximum Number of Times
OR OR R/min Limit
Mode Frequency Output Base Speed
Frequency
1.25 kHz 100 Hz - 6,000
Frequency
≥ 2.5 kHz 200 Hz - 12,000
1.25 kHz 125 Hz 3X 15,000
Vector
≥ 2.5 kHz 250 Hz 3X 15,000

P5.15 - Maximum Speed Forward

Sets the maximum forward speed of the motor.
Allowed values: 10r/minute to See Table 6-5.
P5.16 - Maximum Speed Reverse
Sets the maximum reverse speed of the motor.
Allowed values: 0r/minute to See Table 6-5.
P5.17 - Minimum Speed Forward
Sets the minimum forward speed of the motor.
Allowed values: 0 to Value set in P5.15 (r/minute)
P5.18 - Minimum Speed Reverse
Sets the minimum reverse speed of the motor.
Allowed values: 0 to Value set in P5.16 (r/minute)
Maximum/Minimum Speed Examples
Example 1
P5.15 = 1500 r/minute maximum forward
P5.16 = 1000 r/minute maximum reverse
P5.17 = 0 r/minute minimum forward
P5.18 = 0 r/minute minimum reverse

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-33
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

Speed
(r/min)

+1500

-100% -66.6%
Ref
+100%

-1000

-1500

Figure 6-14 Speed References - Example 1

Referring to Figure 6-14,

Speed Reference is scaled to be 100 % = the largest of the maximum speeds.
Thus speed scaled ±100 % Ref = ±1500 r/minute (as 1500 r/minute > 1000 r/minute)
But - 1500 r/minute is not allowed, therefore a reverse reference of 66.6% will be active,
from -66.6% to -100 % which will have no effect.
Example 2
P5.15 = 1500 r/minute maximum forward
P5.16 = 1000 r/minute maximum reverse
P5.17 = 150 r/minute minimum forward
P5.18 = 300 r/minute minimum reverse

Page 6-34 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Speed
(r/min)

+1500
max. fwd

-100% -66.6% -20% +150

Ref
+10% +100%

-300

-1000

-1500

Figure 6-15 Speed References - Example 2

– If Speed Reference is between 0 and +10%, then motor will run at

+150 r/minute when the ramps have been exhausted.
– If Speed Reference is between 0 and -20%, then motor will run at
-300 r/minute when the ramps have been exhausted.
Note:
To scale Analogue Inputs to line up with the Minimum/Maximum speeds, see Menu 7.
P5.19 - Control Flag 11 - Reverse Inhibit
P5.20 - Control Flag 12 - Forward Inhibit
When set, CF11 and CF12 inhibit reverse and forward rotation of the motor, respectively.
P5.21 - Control Flag 13 - Clamp Zero Reference
CF13 sets the input to the ramp (Menu 6) to zero, over-riding the current speed reference.
P5.22 - Process Top Speed
The output speed of the drive can be monitored in terms of process speed rather than drive
frequency. This may be used to indicate, for example, the output of a pump or the speed of
a conveyor belt. The process speed output is obtained by reading P9.02. To use the process
speed facility it must be scaled. To scale, enter a value in P5.22.
The value set in P5.22 defines the Process Top Speed i.e. the calculated process speed
when the drive is operating at Motor Top Speed (see P5.15 and P5.16).
Allowed values: -9999 to +9999 (the units are not defined)
P5.23 - Speed Clamp Limit 1
P5.24 - Speed Clamp Limit 2
P5.25 - Control Flag 117 - Enable Speed Demand Clamp
Parameters P5.23 and P5.24 allow the setting of a permitted range of speed demands. Each
can be set to any value between -100 % and +100 % of top speed, the defaults being set to:
P5.23 = +100 % and P5.24 = -100 % top speed to give a full range.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-35
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

These parameters allow a wide choice of demand clamp settings. For example setting P5.23
to +80% and P5.24 to +20% top speed, clamps speed demands to a range of forward
speeds.
The clamp is activated by setting CF117 = 1, i.e. ON.
6.5.5 Speed Reference Time Constant
P5.26 - Speed Reference Time Constant
A low pass filter in the speed reference system is particularly useful when the speed
reference for the drive comes from the line speed feedback of a control process, allowing
smoothing of the reference.
Permitted range is: 0.00s to 5.00s
6.5.6 Top Speed
Defined as being the greater of Max Speed forward (P5.15) and Max Speed rev (P5.16).

Page 6-36 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.6 Menu 6 - Ramp Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 7)
Menu 6 gives access to the parameters required to configure the acceleration and
deceleration characteristics of the system.
Since the drive would have minimum and maximum speeds set, scaling a time can be
irrelevant, hence the ramp rates are given in terms of acceleration and deceleration.
A graphical representation is shown at Figure 6-16.
Speed

Rate = Target speed (%) - Present speed (%)

Time required (secs)
Max. Speed Fwd.
Decel.
Fwd.
Accel.
Fwd. Min. Speed Fwd.
+10%
Time
Min. Speed Rev.
+10%
Accel. Decel.
Rev. Rev.
Max. Speed Rev.

Figure 6-16 Acceleration/Deceleration Rates

If minimum and maximum speeds are set, then the ramps will apply the relevant rate
because the ramps are applied after the maximum and minimum speed clamps (shown at
Sheet 5 of the Control Block Diagram). If the reference is changed to reverse, the
deceleration forward ramp is followed to zero speed then the acceleration reverse ramp is
followed to reverse minimum speed or to the required reference.
6.6.1 Ramp Rates
P6.00 - Acceleration Rate Forward
Allowed values: 0.1% to 3000.0% of Top Speed per second
P6.01 - Acceleration Rate Reverse
Allowed values: 0.0% to 3000.0% of Top Speed per second (0 = As Forward)
P6.02 - Deceleration Rate Forward
Allowed values: 0.1% to 3000.0% of Top Speed per second
P6.03 - Deceleration Rate Reverse
Allowed values: 0.0% to 3000.0% of Top Speed per second (0 = As Forward)
P6.04 - Speed to Reach Full Acceleration/Deceleration Rate
This parameter determines the motor speed at which the full acceleration and deceleration
rates are achieved.
Allowed values: 0% to 50% of Top Speed
P6.05 - Control Flag 14 - Ramp Freeze Up Forward
P6.06 - Control Flag 15 - Ramp Freeze Up Reverse
P6.07 - Control Flag 16 - Ramp Freeze Down Forward
P6.08 - Control Flag 17 - Ramp Freeze Down Reverse
P6.09 - Control Flag 18 - Ramp Bypass

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-37
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

While the motor is accelerating or decelerating in either direction, Control Flags 14 to 17 can
freeze the ramp. Acceleration or deceleration is then stopped and the motor speed is held
constant.
The ramp may be bypassed altogether by setting Control Flag 18. This is useful when
running the drive in position control mode.
P6.10 - Maximum Ramp Deviation (Vector only)
P6.10 limits the deviation between the Ramp Output and the Speed Feedback, thereby
preventing the ramp from "ramping off" when the speed is unable to follow the speed
demand for any reason. The ramp output will also be increased in value (to keep the speed
feedback and ramp output within the deviation limit set by P6.10) as the load overhauls the
motor.
Ramp Deviation's Speed Error Deadband
From Version 4.0 Firmware Code onwards, the ramp deviation is automatically disabled if
speed error deadband is enabled (via CF73). Consider the following:
Error deadband in P14.14 = 10%
Ramp deviation in P6.10 = 5%
Normally if the motor was "running away" (e.g. a strip break etc.) the speed feedback would
rise and at 10% speed error the deadband would 'catch' the spinning motor and return to
speed control. If ramp deviation was enabled and set to 5% the speed error would be fixed
at 5% (ramp output rises) and the deadband would never trigger, thus damaging the motor,
hence the automatic disabling of the deviation feature.
Note:
For Code versions of Firmware <4.00 ensure this situation has not been programmed.
Allowed values: 0.00 % to 100.00 %
If P6.10 is set to < Deadband Value (P14.14) and the feature is enabled,
then the deadband will never operate.
If deadband is enabled, via CF73, the minimum value in P14.14 (deadband) will set the
minimum allowed limit of P6.10, thus preventing incorrect programming of these two
features i.e. to prevent mal-operation of the speed catch.
P6.11 - Control Flag 122 - Limit Ramp Deviation
Control Flag 122 enables P6.10 when set.
6.6.2 Alternative Set of Ramp Rates
Parameters P6.12 to P6.15 provide an alternative set of ramp rates, scaling and range is the
same as for the standard ramp rates. These rates are selected by CF127. The parameters
and control flag are described below.
P6.12 - Acceleration Rate Forward 2
Allowed values: 0.1% to 3000.0% of Top Speed per second
P6.13 - Deceleration Rate Forward 2
Allowed values: 0.1% to 3000.0% of Top Speed per second
P6.14 - Acceleration Rate Reverse 2
Allowed values: 0.0% to 3000.0% of Top Speed per second (0 = As Forward)
P6.15 - Deceleration Rate Reverse 2
Allowed values: 0.0% to 3000.0% of Top Speed per second
(0 = As Forward)
P6.16 - Control Flag 127 - Select Ramp 2
When set, CF127 enables the second set of ramp rates.

Page 6-38 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P6.17 - Trip Avoidance Threshold

The trip avoidance function, based on DC Link Voltage, reduces the need for Dynamic
Braking when a drive is connected to an overhauling load. The function is automatically
disabled when a Dynamic Brake is fitted. Parameter P6.17 is used with Status Flag 107,
viewable in Parameter P11.35 'Status Flags 96-111', and is specified as 2.107 when used
as a status flag source.
Status Flag 107 indicates when the VVVF ramp output is undergoing modification due to
one of the following:
1. Drive in Current Limit;
2. Drive in Regen Limit;
3. Trip Avoidance Threshold exceeded.
Allowed values: 685 to 1500 V
6.6.3 Second User Ramp
The following parameters are used to set a user ramp whose output can be pointed to any
other suitable drive parameter.
P6.30
(0.000)
Ramp Bypass 139

P6.35
(0.000)
Select Ramp 2 138

P6.29
(0.000)
Ramp Frz Dn -ve 137

P6.28
(0.000)
Ramp Frz Dn +ve 136

P6.27
(0.000)
Ramp Frz Up -ve 135

P6.26
(0.000)
Ramp Frz Up +ve 134

P6.36
P6.20 Ramp Input Ramp Output

P6.21 INCREASE RATE+VE

P6.22 Decrease RATE +VE

P6.23 INCREASE RATE -VE

P6.24 DECREASE RATE -VE

P6.25 S-Shaping

P6.31 INCREASE RATE 2 +VE

P6.32 DECREASE RATE 2 +VE

P6.33 INCREASE RATE 2 -VE

P6.34 DECREASE RATE 2 -VE

Figure 6-17 Second User ramp

P6.20 - Ramp Input

Allowed values: 1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter number)
P6.21 - Increase Rate Positive
Allowed values: 0.1% to 3000.0% per second

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-39
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P6.22 - Increase Rate Negative

Allowed values: 0.0% to 3000.0% per second
(0 = As Increase Rate Positive)
P6.23 - Decrease Rate Positive
Allowed values: 0.1% to 3000.0% per second
P6.24 - Decrease Rate Negative
Allowed values: 0.0% to 3000.0% per second
(0 = As Decrease Rate Positive)
P6.25 - S-Shape range
This parameter determines the input at which the full Increase and Decrease rates are
achieved.
Allowed values: 0% to 50%
P6.26 - Control Flag 134 - Ramp Freeze Up Positive
P6.27 - Control Flag 135 - Ramp Freeze Up Negative
P6.28 - Control Flag 136 - Ramp Freeze Down Positive
P6.29 - Control Flag 137 - Ramp Freeze Down Negative
P6.30 - Control Flag 138 - Ramp Bypass
While the output is ramping in either direction, Control Flags 134 to 137 freeze the ramp to
137. Ramping is then stopped and the output is constant.
The ramp may be bypassed altogether by setting Control Flag 138.
Alternative Set of Ramp Rates
Parameters P6.31 to P6.34 provide an alternative set of ramp rates, scaling and range is the
same as for the standard ramp rates. These rates are selected by CF139. The parameters
and control flag are described below.
P6.31 - Increase Rate Positive 2
Allowed values: 0.1% to 3000.0% per second
P6.32 - Decrease Rate Positive 2
Allowed values: 0.1% to 3000.0% per second
P6.33 - Increase Rate Negative 2
Allowed values: 0.0% to 3000.0% per second
(0 = As Increase Rate Positive)
P6.34 - Decrease Rate Negative 2
Allowed values: 0.0% to 3000.0% per second
(0 = As Decrease Rate Positive)
P6.35 - Control Flag 139 - Select Ramp 2
When set, CF139 enables the second set of ramp rates. (Default state: CLEARED).
P6.36 - Ramp Output
This is the output of the ramp function after imposing the various conditions imposed by the
ramp parameters.

Page 6-40 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.7 Menu 7 - Plant I/O Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 4)
Menu 7 gives access to the parameters required to configure and monitor the Digital and
Analogue I/O.
P7.00 - Analogue Reference 1 Input Mode
P7.04 - Analogue Reference 2 Input Mode
Parameters P7.00 and P7.04 set the input mode for Analogue Refs 1 and 2 respectively.
Four voltage modes and four current modes are available for each input, depending on I/O
DIP switch settings (see Wiring Diagram in relevant manual). The default mode is Option 1.
The various options and their meanings are shown at Table 6-6.
Table 6-6 Analogue Input Options

P7.00, P7.04 Meaning in DIP

Analogue Input Options Voltage/Current Settings
(% of Top Speed) Mode
1 = 0% to ±100 % 0 V to ±10 V
2 = ±(0% to 100 %) ±(2 V to 10 V) * Switches 3 and 4 to the 10 V
3 = -100 % to +100 % 0 V to 10 V Position
4 = ±(0% to 100 %) ±(10 V to 2 V) *
5 = 0% to ±100 % 0mA to ±20mA
6 = ±(0% to 100 %) ±(4mA to 20mA) ** Switches 3 and 4 to the 20mA
7 = -100 % to +100 % 0mA to ±20mA Position
8 = ±(0% to 100 %) ±(20mA to 4mA) **

Note:
* Drive will detect <2V
** Drive will detect <4mA
6.7.1 Analogue Input Offset and Gain
This section shows how to use the Analogue Input gain and offset parameters.
Usually these parameters only need to be considered if the drive has a minimum speed set
and the Analogue Input is expected to request Minimum speed to Maximum speed for the
whole input range, while not having a dead spot at the beginning of the travel.
P7.01 - Analogue Reference 1 Offset Adjust
P7.05 - Analogue Reference 2 Offset Adjust
Sets the input offset for the associated Analogue Reference.
See the worked example that follows.
Allowed values are in range: -100.0% to +100.0%
P7.02 - Analogue Reference 1 Gain Adjust
P7.06 - Analogue Reference 2 Gain Adjust
Sets the input gain for the associated Analogue Ref.
See the worked example that follows.
Allowed values are in range: -2.00 per unit to +2.00 per unit
(= -200% to +200%)
Worked Example of Analogue Offset and Gain Adjustment
The example shown here is for a motor required to have a maximum forward speed of 1500
r/minute and a minimum forward speed of 150 r/minute. Proceed as follows:
Set P5.15 = Maximum Speed Fwd = 1500 r/minute
Set P15.17 = Minimum Speed Fwd = 150 r/minute

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-41
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

Then set: P7.01 = 150 x 100 = 10% (of top speed)

(Offset) 1500
P7.02 = 1500 - 150 = 0.9 = remaining speed range
(Gain) 1500
This will set Analogue Input 1 such that minimum speed is requested with minimum
reference, maximum speed with maximum reference.
6.7.2 Analogue Reference Values
P7.03 - Analogue Reference 1 Value
P7.07 - Analogue Reference 2 Value
These parameters allow monitoring of the Analogue Reference values after the gains and
offsets have been set.
Monitoring range: -100.00% to +100.00% of full scale
Where full scale is 10V or 20mA
P7.16 - Analogue Reference Filter Time Constant
In environments liable to high frequency noise, P7.16 allows adjustment of low pass filters
on both Analogue References to reduce high frequency noise effects.
Allowed values: 0ms to 5000ms
6.7.3 Analogue Outputs
Two identical analogue output channels provide analogue indication, for meters etc. Each
channel can provide a signal in either voltage or current form, depending on I/O DIP switch
settings (see Wiring Diagram in relevant manual). Reading Parameters P11.40 and P11.41
respectively can monitor the outputs from Analogue Outputs 1 and 2.
P7.17 - Analogue Output 1 Signal
P7.22 - Analogue Output 2 Signal
Allowed values: Any Parameter number
Note:
While any parameter number may be specified, not all parameters contain suitable data.
P7.18 - Analogue Output 1 Mode
P7.23 - Analogue Output 2 Mode
Parameters P7.18 and P7.23 control the form of the output representing the zero to full-
scale values of the analogue output.
Five options are available as shown at Table 6-7; these can be in voltage or current mode
depending on I/O DIP switch settings (see Wiring Diagram in relevant manual).
Table 6-7 Analogue Output Options

P7.18, P7.23 Meaning in Meaning in

Analogue Output Options Voltage Mode Current Mode
1 = 0 - 10V or 0 - 20mA 0% to ±100% of signal gives 0% to ±100% of signal gives
0V to ±10V 0mA to ±20mA
2 = 2 - 10V or 4 - 20mA ±(0% to 100 %) of signal gives ±(0% to 100%) of signal gives
±(2V to 10V) ±(4mA to 20mA)
3 = 10 - 0V or 20 - 0mA ±100 % to 0% of signal gives ±100% to 0% of signal gives
0V to ±10V 0 to ±20mA
4 = 10 - 2V or 20 - 4mA ±(100 % to 20%) of signal gives ±(100% to 20%) of signal gives
±(2V to 10V) ±(4 to 20mA)
5 = 0 - 20mA Fast Power Not used in Voltage Mode See 6.7.4 and 6.51 (P53.03)

Page 6-42 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P7.19 - Analogue Output 1 Polarity

P7.24 - Analogue Output 2 Polarity
These parameters control the polarity of the output signals:
0 = Output is positive only
1 = Output is bipolar, e.g. when indicating speed,
positive = forward rotation
negative = reverse rotation
6.7.4 Analogue Output Scaling
The analogue outputs can be used to monitor any drive parameter. The scaling and offset
parameters "take on" the units etc. of the parameter being monitored; this means their use is
quite intuitive.
P7.20 - Analogue Output 1 Scaling
P7.25 - Analogue Output 2 Scaling
Scales the analogue output to match the external metering requirement. The value set
should correspond to the full-scale output of the analogue Signal set in P7.17 or P7.22.
Range of P7.20 depends upon value of P7.17
Range of P7.25 depends upon value of P7.22
Allowed values: 0 ± Maximum value of selected input
Worked Example of Analogue Output Scaling
To "send" DC link volts to an analogue output, then:
P7.17 = 11.03 (DC Link Volts)
Then simply edit the scaling parameter to a value that is required to represent 100% of
analogue output e.g.
P7.20 = 560
At 560VDC the Analogue Output will now read full scale.
P7.21 - Analogue Output 1 Value
P7.26 - Analogue Output 2 Value
These read only parameters give the instantaneous value of analogue outputs 1 and 2
respectively.
Monitored values: -100.0% to +100.0% of full scale, where full scale is 10V or 20mA
6.7.5 Digital Outputs
P7.27 to P7.29 - Digital Output Signal 1 to 3
The Digital outputs have parameters and are programmed like Control Flags, having access
to all of the same connections (see Table 6-15, on page 6-120). Sheet 4 of the Control
Block Diagram shows the digital I/O.

Example: How the "O/P Running" output is connected.

O/P RUNNING
8 SOFTWARE DIGOUT 2
LINK
P7.28 = 2.008
6.7.6 Digital Inputs
These six inputs do not have associated parameters. They are used as inputs to Control
Flags or Digital Outputs and are designated as shown at Table 6-8. A typical use could be
as shown at the example below.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-43
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

Table 6-8 Digital Inputs - Designation

Digital Input Designation

Digital Input 1 1.001
Digital Input 2 1.002
Digital Input 3 1.003
Digital Input 4 1.004
Digital Input 5 1.005
Digital Input 6 1.006

Example: How to connect Control and Status Flags together

At default the drive has the Start flag connected to Digital Input 2, this example shows the
software connections and the required edits, by way of a Control Flag programming
example:

START
DIGIN 2 SOFTWARE 1
LINK P33.01 = 1.002
(P4.04)

Page 6-44 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.8 Menu 8 - Torque Limit Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 7)
Menu 8 gives access to the parameters required to configure the Torque Limit feature.
P8.00 - Torque Limit
This parameter is the overall torque limit when P8.01 to P8.03 are set. Otherwise P8.00
becomes an autonomous value and can be regarded as Positive Torque Limit 1.
Allowed values: 0.0% to 300.0% of nominal torque
Notes:
1. There are limitations when using Torque Limit in VVVF e.g. the bandwidth is poor at low speed.
2. The actual value of Torque Limit is also limited by P11.49 which is the maximum torque vector
control can produce, and is speed dependent
P8.01 - Negative Torque Limit 1
P8.02 - Positive Torque Limit 2
P8.03 - Negative Torque Limit 2
Allowed values: 0.0% to 300.0% of nominal torque
-0.1 = Value set in P8.00
What happens when the torque limit is reached depends upon the load characteristic. The
motor may slow down or stay at the same speed. See also the Control Block Diagram.
P8.04 - Control Flag 24 - Disable Torque
When set, CF24 disables the Torque demand.
P8.05 - Control Flag 22 - Inhibit Positive Torque
When set, CF22 inhibits generation of positive torque, i.e. when motoring with forward
rotation or braking with reverse rotation (see Figure 6-18).

Torque

BRAKING MOTORING
REVERSE FWD
ROTATION ROTATION

Rotational
Speed

MOTORING BRAKING
REVERSE FWD
ROTATION ROTATION

Figure 6-18 Speed/Torque

P8.06 - Control Flag 23 - Inhibit Negative Torque

When set, CF23 inhibits generation of negative torque, i.e. when motoring with reverse
rotation or braking with forward rotation (see Figure 6-18).
P8.07 - Control Flag 21 - Torque Limit Selection
Control Flag 21 is used to switch between the Torque Limit 1 settings defined in P8.00 and
P8.01 and the Torque Limit 2 setting defined in P8.02 and P8.03 as follows:
0 = OFF = Torque Limit 1 (+ve and -ve)
1 = ON = Torque Limit 2 (+ve and -ve)
Each +ve and -ve Torque Limit has its own scale source, selectable by P8.08 to P8.11.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-45
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P8.08 - Positive Torque Limit Scale Source 1

P8.09 - Negative Torque Limit Scale Source 1
P8.10 - Positive Torque Limit Scale Source 2
P8.11 - Negative Torque Limit Scale Source 2
These parameters select the source for the torque limits scale. They allow adjustment of
torque limits "on-line" via the selections shown. Refer to Sheet 5 of the Control Block
Diagram for a pictorial representation.
Allowed values:
1 = Fixed 100 % 10 = Fixed Ref. Menu
2 = Analogue REF1 11 = Motorised Pot.
3 = Analogue REF2 12 = Trim Reference
4 = RS485 REF1 13 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
5 = RS485 REF2 14 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
6 = RS232 REF1 15 = Summing Node A
7 = RS232 REF2 16 = Summing Node B
8 = PID Controller 17 = Pointer 9
9 = Ref. Sequencer 18 = Pointer 10
Note:
Option 1 gives 100 % of the value set in the Torque Limit parameters P8.00 to P8.03.

Page 6-46 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.9 Menu 9 - Basic Drive Monitoring

Menu 9 gives access to read-only parameters required for monitoring basic drive functions
with the exception of P9.00, which is Operator accessible.
P9.00 - Speed Reference
Shows the value of the speed reference input.
Allowed range: -100.00% to +100.00% Top Speed
P9.01 - Speed Feedback
This parameter shows the drive output speed as a percentage of maximum speed.
Allowed range: -300.00% to +300.00% Top Speed
P9.02 - Process Speed
This parameter contains the calculated process speed, derived from the output frequency of
the drive and the scaling factor placed in P5.22.
Allowed range: -9999 Units to +9999 Units (not defined)
Note:
This calculated process speed might be inaccurate, particularly at low speeds.
P9.03 - Speed Feedback
This parameter shows the motor speed in r/minute.
Allowed range: 0 ±30,000r/minute
P9.04 - Torque Demand
The value in P9.04 is an estimate of the motor torque calculated by the drive.
Allowed range: -300.0% to +300.0% of nominal torque
P9.05 - Motor Current
The drive output current in amps rms
Values are in the range: 0.0A to 9999.9A(for MicroCubicle™ Drives)
0A to 9999A (for DELTAs)
P9.06 - Drive Current
The drive output current as a percentage of the drive full load current, where
100% = drive FLC as P99.05.
Values are in the range: 0.0% to 300.0%
P9.07 - Motor Volts
The output voltage applied to the motor, in volts rms
Values are in the range: 0 V to 1000V
P9.08 - Motor Power
The drive output power, in kW. This is the "real" power to the motor.
Power measurement is in the drive’s software via the following equation:

Power = (Vd × Id ) + (Vq × Iq )

Where
Vd and Vq are the two components of voltage, and
Id and Iq are the two components of current

In VVVF the voltage is defined as being on the q-axis. Iq is therefore the real current (active
current) and Id the imaginary component of current (reactive current).
Values are in the range:

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-47
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

-999.0kW to +999.9kW (for MicroCubicle™ Drives)

-9999kW to +9999kW (for DELTAs)
P9.09 - Frequency Feedback
This parameter shows the drive output frequency in Hz.
Range of values:
-200Hz to +200Hz
P9.10 - Drive Overload Remaining
Contains the amount of overload capability remaining to be monitored. Its units are % of
(1.5 x Drive FLC) for 60 seconds.
Range of values:
100% to 0% of total overload capacity
P9.11 - Motor Overload Remaining
This parameter indicates the percentage of the motor I²T overload remaining, set in P2.07.
When 25% is remaining, 75% has been used and the drive may trip avoid. See P2.09 for
action on I²T fault.
Values are in the range: 100% to 0% of the I²T overload capability of the motor

Page 6-48 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.10 Menu 10 - Trips and Warnings

Menu 10 gives access to read-only parameters showing the status of warnings and trips,
and also to control flags required for setting user trips. The description and handling of
warnings and trips is included at Section 9 (Diagnostics).
6.10.1 Warnings
P10.00 to P10.09 - Warning Nos. 1 to 10
These parameters show warning fault codes for Warning Nos. 1 through 10, Warning No. 1
being the most recent. For a description of Warning codes, refer to Table 9-2.
Allowed range: All available Warning Codes
6.10.2 Trips
P10.10 to P10.19 - Trip Nos. 1 to 10
These parameters show trip fault codes for the "present" ten trips, the first fault being Trip
No. 1. For a description of Trip codes, refer to Table 9-3. These parameters show trips when
the "Trip LED" is flashing; for a history of trips see P10.20.
Allowed range: All available Trip Codes (Default = 0)
The trip fault codes are cleared on a trip reset, and a record of what they were is stored in
P10.20 to P10.29.
6.10.3 Trip History
P10.20 to P10.29 - Trip History 1 to 10
These parameters show trip fault codes for the last ten trips, the most recent being for Trip
No. 1. Refer to Table 9-3. When trips are reset they move from "present" trips (P10.10 to
P10.19) to trip history (P10.20 to P10.29).
Allowed range: All available Trip Codes (Default = 0)
These trip fault codes are not cleared on a trip reset.
6.10.4 Time Since Trip
P10.30 - Seconds Since Trip
When the drive trips, this parameter starts to record the elapsed time in seconds since the
occurrence of the trip. The values are reset to zero when the trip is reset.
Values are in the range: 0 to 3599 seconds
P10.31 - Hours Since Trip
When the drive trips, this parameter starts to record the elapsed time in hours since the
occurrence of the trip. The values are reset to zero when the trip is reset.
Values are in the range: 0 to 672 hours
6.10.5 User Trips
P10.32 - Control Flag 10 - User Trip 1
P10.33 - Control Flag 112 - User Trip 2
When set, cause User Trip 1 or 2, as selected. They can therefore be "patched" and
connected to user-defined signals within plant, allowing the drive to become part of the
complete control system.
6.10.6 Trip Reset
P10.34 - Control Flag 9 - Trip Reset
Resets all resettable trips, see Section 9 for definitions.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-49
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.10.7 "New Drive PCB" or "Unknown Drive Size" Trip

P10.35 - Action on "New Drive PCB" or "Unknown Drive Size" Trip
Indicates action which can be taken when a drive has tripped after a "new drive pcb" has
been added or the drive ID does not recognise the drive size i.e. it is an "unknown drive
size". The actions available are listed in the values in the range. Selection of either value 1
or 2, depending on the reason for the trip, will enable the stored drive ID information to be
used and drive operation resumed.
Values in the range:
0 = No action
1 = Use Drive ID information stored in Control PCB (SMPS was replaced)
2 = Use Drive ID information stored in SMPS (Control PCB was replaced)
6.10.8 P10.36 - Delta Identification Source
0 = Delta Bridge
1 = Local Copy
This tells the drive firmware from where to read its power bridge identification.
Option 0 is as previous versions of firmware, i.e. directly from the power bridge itself.
If option 1 is set at power up, it enables the drive to be healthy, when powered from the
auxiliary 28V input, as the drive uses the delta bridge information stored previously.
If the drive is powered from auxiliary 28V input, with P10.36=0, then the drive will be tripped
with several trips relating to the non-identification of the power bridge. If subsequently,
P10.36 is changed to 1, then the drive will erase any previously stored local copy of the
bridge identification information. The drive will remain tripped on non-identification of Delta
trips, until the main DC link is powered up. At this point, the drive will restart, and will read
the Delta information. The Delta information is then stored in the local copy, for use at the
next power up.
If the drive is powered from the main DC link, with P10.36=0, and subsequently changed to
P10.36=1, the drive will store the Delta bridge information in a local control copy, at this
point. This is then available for use at subsequent power ups, when powered from either the
main DC link, or auxiliary 28V input.
WARNING
This mechanism opens the Delta systems up to abuse.
For example, if the drive is used in this mode, with P10.36=1. For some reason, it is
necessary to change a Delta Interface PCB (DIB - 20x4319). A DIB from a different size of
Delta is used. Because P10.36=1, and the drive takes no notice of the data contained in the
DIB, the system will operate. Subsequently, this entire Delta is placed in another drive
system, with P10.36=0. The controller then believes that the Delta is of a different rating
than it really is, as the DIB is incorrect. This may be some time after the original exchange,
when no error was apparent.
If P10.36=1, it is possible to put dissimilar Deltas, and DIBs, into a system The controller
ignores the Delta bridge information, and will allow the system to run. As the Deltas are of
different ratings, incorrect power bridge operation / sharing will result.
6.10.9 Extra User Trips and Warnings
P10.40 - CF198: User Alert 1
P10.42 - CF199: User Alert 2
P10.44 – CF200: User Alert 3
P10.46 – CF201: User Alert 4
P10.48 – CF202: User Alert 5
P10.50 – CF203: User Alert 6
P10.52 – CF204: User Alert 7
P10.54 – CF205: User Alert 8
P10.56 – CF206: User Alert 9
P10.58 – CF207: User Alert 10

Page 6-50 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

When set, cause User Alert Warning or Trip, as selected in the following associated User
Action Parameters. They can therefore be "patched" and connected to user-defined signals
within plant, allowing the drive to become part of the complete control system.
P10.41 - User Action 1
P10.43 - User Action 2
P10.45 - User Action 3
P10.47 - User Action 4
P10.49 - User Action 5
P10.51 - User Action 6
P10.53 - User Action 7
P10.55 - User Action 8
P10.57 - User Action 9
P10.59 - User Action 10
Allowed values:
0 = No action
1 = Warning
2 = Trip

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-51
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.11 Menu 11 - Advanced Drive Monitoring

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 9)
Menu 11 gives access to the parameters required to monitor the advanced features of the
drive including current feedbacks, DC link voltage, PID functions, analogue I/O, digital I/O,
status flags, temperature monitoring and running time. With the exception of P11.50 all
parameters are read-only.
6.11.1 General Advanced Monitoring
P11.00 - Active Current
Indicates the torque-producing component of the motor current, expressed as a percentage
of drive Full Load Current. Drive FLC can be found in P99.05.
Allowed range: -150.0% to +150.0% of drive Full Load Current
P11.01 - Magnetising Current
Contains the flux-producing component of the motor current, expressed as a percentage of
Drive Full Load Current.
Allowed range: -150.0% to +150.0% of drive Full Load Current
P11.02 - PID Controller Output
This parameter is the output of the PID function. The PID output appears in all reference
selection choices as shown at the Control Block Diagrams, and can be connected to
Analogue O/P's or pointers etc.
Allowed range: -100.00% to +100.00% of full scale
P11.03 - DC Link Voltage
This parameter indicates the voltage of the DC link.
Allowed range: 0V to 30,000V
6.11.2 Temperature Feedback
P11.04 to P11.14 are used to indicate the temperature of various parts of the drive. Table
6-9 indicates the trip and warning temperature thresholds of various parts of the drive and is
provided for reference purposes.
Table 6-9 provides an indication of the 'average' temperature values for the ALSPA
MV3000e MicroCubicle™ and DELTA bridges. Some MicroCubicle™ Drives will have
higher values and some lower values than those stated in the table. The values should only
be used as a guide.
The MicroCubicle™ values appear to have a larger tolerance than the other units. This
tolerance shows the extent of the possible range of values as the actual value is fixed by a
combination of drive frame size, SKiiP type and heatsink MicroCubicle™ Drive rating. The
value is programmed into the drive during its testing.

Page 6-52 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Table 6-9 Drive Temperatures

Under Over
Component/Parameter Temperature Temperature
Warning Trip Warning Trip
CDC Electronics P11.04 0 °C -10 °C 65 °C 80 °C
Temperature
Output Bridge 1: P11.05 5 °C 0 °C Trip - 5 101.5 °C,
MicroCubicle™ +9.5, -11.5
DELTA P11.05 5 °C 0 °C 107 °C 112 °C
Output Bridge 2, P11.06 5 °C 0 °C 107 °C 112 °C
DELTA
Output Bridge 3, P11.07 5 °C 0 °C 107 °C 112 °C
DELTA
Input Bridge: 103 °C,
MicroCubicle™ P11.08 5 °C 0 °C Trip - 5 +17, -10
DELTA P11.08 5 °C 0 °C 80 °C 85 °C
Output Bridge 4, P11.09 5 °C 0 °C 107 °C 112 °C
DELTA
Output Bridge 5, P11.10 5 °C 0 °C 107 °C 112 °C
DELTA
Output Bridge 6, P11.11 5 °C 0 °C 107 °C 112 °C
DELTA
MicroCubicle™ Internal P11.12 5 °C 0 °C Trip - 5 101.5 °C,
DB Temperature +9.5, -11.5 **

Notes:
1. Refer to Menu 45 for a complete list of temperature parameters.
2. Refer to Table 9-2 and Table 9-3 for lists of Warning and Trip Fault codes respectively.
3. ** The Dynamic Brake (DB) has two hardware levels, one set at 82 °C ± 2 °C and the other set at
115 °C.
P11.04 - CDC Electronics Temperature
This parameter indicates the temperature of the control electronics on all drive models.
Range of values: -40ºoC to +150ºC
P11.05 - Output Bridge 1 Temperature
P11.06 - Output Bridge 2 Temperature
P11.07 - Output Bridge 3 Temperature
These parameters give the temperatures of the heatsinks used on the Output Bridges 1, 2
and 3 of DELTA drives. For MicroCubicle™ Drives, P11.05 only is used.
Range of values: -40ºC to +150ºC
P11.08 - Input Bridge Temperature
This parameter gives the temperature of the Input Bridge heatsink; on DELTA drives this is
Input Bridge 1.
Range of values: -40ºC to +150ºC
P11.09 - Output Bridge 4 Temperature
P11.10 - Output Bridge 5 Temperature
P11.11 - Output Bridge 6 Temperature
These parameters give the temperatures of the heatsinks used on the Output Bridges 4, 5
and 6 of parallel DELTA drives.
Range of values: -40ºC to +150ºC

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-53
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P11.12 - DB Temperature
Shows the temperature of the DB Switch heatsink (when fitted).
Range of values: -40ºC to +150ºC
P11.13 - Maximum CDC Electronics Temperature
P11.14 - Minimum CDC Electronics Temperature
These two parameters record the maximum and minimum ever temperatures of the CDC
control electronics. The parameter values are not cleared when the drive is reset to factory
defaults.
Range of values: -40ºC to +150ºC
6.11.3 Run/Energised Monitor
P11.15 - Hours Run
P11.16 - Days Run
These two parameters record the total running time of the drive since installation. The
parameter values can only be reset to zero by the manufacturer.
Displayed values are in the range:
P11.15:- 0 to 23 Hours
P11.16:- 0 to 30,000 Days
P11.17 - Hours Energised
P11.18 - Days Energised
These parameters record the total time the drive has been energised since installation. The
parameter values can only be reset to zero by the manufacturer.
Displayed values are in the range: P11.17:- 0 to 23 Hours
P11.18:- 0 to 30,000 Days
P11.19 and P11.20 - Total Energy Consumed
These two parameters record the total energy consumed by the motor (not the total energy
consumed from the supply). Only 'Return to Default Settings' resets the values (see 3.2.4).
Displayed range: P11.19:- 0 to 999.9kWh
P11.20:- 0 to 9999MWh
6.11.4 Digital Inputs and Outputs
P11.21 - Digital Input States
This parameter monitors the state of the six digital inputs, plus the state of the interlock
terminal, as part of a 16-bit word, as shown at Figure 6-19
Values are given in Hex and Binary.
Hex values are in the range: 0000 to 803F

0-F 0-F 0-F 0-F

msb lsb

6 5 4 3 2 1
Digital Inputs
Interlock Terminal
Figure 6-19 Monitoring Digital Inputs

The Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) displays this parameter in hex and binary as at Figure
6-20, e.g. typical display showing DIGIN 1 and DIGIN 3 both ON, and DIGIN 2 OFF; and the
Interlock terminal = 1

Page 6-54 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P11.21
Digital I/P States D IG IN 3 O N
= 8005h
1000 0000 0000 0101b

DIG IN 1 O N

Interlock is ON
Figure 6-20 Keypad Display of P11.21

P11.22 - Digital Output States

This parameter monitors the state of the three digital outputs as part of a 16-bit word, shown
at Figure 6-21.
Values are in the range: 0000 to 0007 (Hex)

0-F 0-F 0-F 0-F

msb lsb

3 2 1

Digital Outputs

Figure 6-21 Monitoring Digital Outputs

P11.22
Digital O/P States DIGO UT 3
= 0006h
0000 0000 0000 0110b

DIGO UT 2

Figure 6-22 Typical Keypad Display of P11.22

The Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) displays this parameter in hex and binary.
Figure 6-22 shows a typical display where DIGOUT 2 and DIGOUT 3 are both ON, and
DIGOUT 1 is OFF.
6.11.5 Monitoring Control Flags
P11.23 - Control Flags 0 - 15
P11.24 - Control Flags 16 - 31
P11.25 - Control Flags 32 - 47
P11.26 - Control Flags 48 - 63
P11.27 - Control Flags 64 – 79
P11.28 - Control Flags 112 - 127
P11.29 - Control Flags 96 - 111
P11.43 - Control Flags 128 - 143
P11.53 - Control Flags 144 - 159
P11.54 - Control Flags 160 - 175
P11.55 - Control Flags 176 - 191
P11.56 - Control Flags 192 - 207
Each of these read only parameters contains a four digit hexadecimal number that reflects
the state of sixteen control flags.
Values can be in the range: 0000 to FFFF (hex)

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-55
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

The Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) shows this as a sixteen-bit binary number; each bit
gives the state of the corresponding control flag:
1 = ON
0 = OFF
P11.23 corresponds to Control Flags 0 to 15 as shown at Figure 6-23, similarly P11.24 to
P11.29 allow monitoring of Control Flags 16 to 111; P11.43 allows monitoring of Control
Flags 128 to 143; P11.53 to P11.56 allow monitoring of Control Flags 144 to 207.

0-F 0-F 0-F 0-F

MSB LSB

P11.23 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
P11.24 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
P11.25 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
P11.26 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
P11.27 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64
P11.28 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112
P11.29 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96
P11.43 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128
P11.53 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 144
P11.54 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160
P11.55 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176
P11.56 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192

Figure 6-23 Monitoring Control Flags

6.11.6 Monitoring Status Flags

The status flags are set by the control program and reflect the operating status of the drive.
Status Flags can be:
- Used to determine the state of the digital outputs.
- Copied to a control flag.
- Used for monitoring.
The following parameters allow monitoring of all the drive status flags.
P11.30 - Status Flags 0-15
P11.31 - Status Flags 16-31
P11.32 - Status Flags 32-47
P11.33 - Status Flags 48-63
P11.34 - Status Flags 64-79
P11.35 - Status Flags 96-111
P11.42 - Status Flags 80-95
P11.57 - Status Flags 112-127
P11.58 - Status Flags 128-143
Each of the read-only parameters P11.30 to P11.35, P11.42, P11.57 and P11.58 contains a
four digit hexadecimal number and a binary string that reflect the state of sixteen status
flags. Values can be in the range: 0000 to FFFF (hex)
The Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) displays a sixteen-bit binary number each bit gives the
state of the corresponding Status Flag:
1 = ON
0 = OFF
As shown at Figure 6-24, P11.30 corresponds to status flags 0 to 15, similarly parameters
P11.31 to P11.35 allow monitoring of Status Flags 16 to 111; P11.42 allows monitoring of
Status Flags 80 to 95; P11.57 and P11.58 allow monitoring of Status Flags 112 to 143.

Page 6-56 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

0-F 0-F 0-F 0–F

MSB LSB

P11.30 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
P11.31 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
P11.32 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
P11.33 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
P11.34 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64
P11.35 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96
P11.42 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80
P11.57 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112
P11.58 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128

Figure 6-24 Monitoring Status Flags

6.11.7 Monitoring Analogue Inputs

P11.36 - Analogue Reference 1 Value
P11.37 - Analogue Reference 2 Value
Read-only parameters P11.36 and P11.37 contain the current values of analogue inputs AN
I/P 1 and AN I/P 2 respectively.
6.11.8 Monitoring Analogue Outputs
P11.40 - Analogue Output 1 Value
P11.41 - Analogue Output 2 Value
These read-only parameters indicate the values at the analogue output terminals AN O/P 1
and AN O/P 2 as a percentage of the full-scale output.
Values are in the range: -100.0% to +100.0% (of full scale)
6.11.9 Monitoring Speed Loop
P11.45 - Speed Demand
This read only parameter contains the speed demand input into the controller as a
percentage of Top Speed, after the trim and droop terms have been imposed.
Values are in the range: -100.00 to +100.00%
P11.46 - Speed Error
This read only parameter contains the error signal input to the speed regulator expressed as
a percentage of Top Speed.
Values are in the range: -300.00 to +300.00%
P11.47 - Speed Loop Output
This read only parameter contains the speed loop output expressed as a percentage of Top
Speed.
Values are in the range: -300.00 to +300.00%
6.11.10 Inertia Compensation Output
P11.48 - Inertia Compensation Output
Values are in the range: -300.00% to +300.00% of nominal torque
6.11.11 Maximum Torque Available
P11.49 - Maximum Torque Available
This read only parameter contains the maximum percentage of motor nominal torque that is
attainable at the present operating point of voltage and frequency. If the value is greater
than the customer programmed torque limit (in P8.00, or P8.01 to P8.03), then it is not acted
upon. However, if the value is less than the programmed torque limit, then it effectively
becomes the active torque limit.
Values are in the range: 0.00% to +300.00%

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-57
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.11.12 Torque Reference

P11.50 - Torque Reference
This parameter contains the torque reference expressed as a percentage of Nominal
Torque. If Torque Reference is set to Keypad, then the Keypad can be used to directly edit
this value.
Allowed values: -100.00% to +100.00%
6.11.13 Encoder Speed
P11.51 - Encoder Speed (VVVF)
VVVF Mode of Operation
This read-only parameter is available in Frequency and Vector Control modes and contains
the encoder speed feedback expressed as a percentage of motor top speed. It is extremely
useful in determining if the encoder is healthy after an encoder loss ridethrough.
Values are in the range: -300.00% to +300.00%
The parameter operates in VVVF with all MV3000e DELTA Controller types, i.e. MVC3001-
4001, 4002, 4003 and 4013. It also applies to all MV3000e MicroCubicle™ Drives.
Vector Control Modes of Operation
The parameter reads encoder speed feed when operating in Vector Control with MV3000e
DELTA Controller type MVC3001-4002, 4003 and 4013 only and MV3000e MicroCubicle™
Drives fitted with controller type 20X4311 issue E or later.
P11.52 - Modulation Depth
This read only parameter shows the modulation depth at which the drive is running and is
useful for checking that the drive is operating correctly.
Vdc × ModulationDepth
Drive AC Output Voltage ≈
2
P11.59 - CPU Usage
This parameter gives an indication of current processor usage.
Values in the range: 0% to 100%
P11.60 - Serial Number of Drive (Low Part)
This number, which is Read Only, is read from MicroCubicle™ SMPS or the DELTA DIB
(DELTA Interface Board).
P11.61 - Serial Number of Drive (High Part)
This number, which is Read Only, is read from MicroCubicle™ SMPS or the DELTA DIB
(DELTA Interface Board).
P11.62 - Serial Number of Power Interface Board (Low Part)
This number, which is Read Only, is read from the PIB (Power Interface Board).
P11.63 - Serial Number of Power Interface Board (High Part)
This number, which is Read Only, is read from the PIB (Power Interface Board).
P11.64 - Serial Number of SMPS (Low Part)
This number, which is Read Only, is read from the SMPS.
P11.65 - Serial Number of SMPS (High Part)
This number, which is Read Only, is read from the SMPS.
P11.66 - Serial Number of DELTA Interface Board (Low Part)
This number, which is Read Only, is read from the DELTA DIB (DELTA Interface Board).

Page 6-58 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P11.67 - Serial Number of DELTA Interface Board (High Part)

This number, which is Read Only, is read from the DELTA DIB (DELTA Interface Board).
P11.70 - Bridge Linearisation Time at 1.25kHz
P11.71 - Bridge Linearisation Constant at 1.25kHz
P11.72 - Bridge Linearisation Time at 2.5kHz
P11.73 - Bridge Linearisation Constant at 2.5kHz
P11.74 - Bridge Linearisation Time at 5kHz
P11.75 - Bridge Linearisation Constant at 5kHz
P11.76 - Bridge Linearisation Time at 7.5kHz
P11.77 - Bridge Linearisation Constant at 7.5kHz
The drive enters the values contained in these parameters during a calibration run. They are
required for the correct operation of a multiple DELTA based drive and must not be altered
manually.
The values are kept as part of the drive’s parameter set so that, if for any reason, the drive is
‘returned to factory default’ it is not necessary to repeat the calibration run.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-59
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.12 Menu 12 - Motor Advanced Settings (Vector Only)

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 8)
Menu 12 gives access to the parameters required to configure the advanced motor settings.
These settings are required for vector control operation.
The drive can determine these values for itself by carrying out a Calibration Run (see
P12.03).
Following a series of enhancements made to the ALSPA MV3000e Vector Control, to
ensure maximum motor flux on systems with significant DC link voltage regulation, Vector
Control can now be run in one of two modes:
High Dynamic Mode. or
Optimum Voltage Mode.
The features of each mode are as follows:
High Dynamic Mode
High dynamic mode is the same vector control as present on ALSPA MV3000e up to and
including Firmware version 6.03 and is selected by setting P12.35 = 0. [This is not the
default setting.]
In this mode of operation 'true' vector performance is realised, with the motor flux being kept
constant across the load range. A proportion of the available PWM output voltage is kept in
hand, which results in good dynamic torque performance.
Optimum Voltage Mode [Default]
In optimal volt mode, selected by setting P12.35 = 1, the vector control is able to use the full
DC link voltage to flux the machine across the load range. In this mode the flux in the
machine is not constant across the load/speed range, but controlled to be a maximum
(defined by the flux limit of the machine) given the prevailing DC link voltage. In this mode
the torque loop bandwidth is typically 400 rads-1, 50% of the bandwidth whilst operating in
High Dynamic Mode
6.12.1 Advanced Motor Data
P12.00 - Motor Magnetising Current
This is the no-load motor current at base frequency and voltage (i.e. the magnetising
current). This can either be measured (see Getting Started Manual - Commissioning) or
obtained from the motor manufacturer.
Allowed values: 0.0A to 9999.0A
P12.01 - Motor Peak Current at Nominal Speed
P12.01 is set to the maximum current that will ever be taken by the motor at nominal speed.
It is expressed as a percentage of the motor nominal current. This value is used to select an
operating condition for the motor that allows the drive to maintain control of the motor
magnetisation even under extremes of load. Note that if this peak value exceeds the peak
rating of the drive, the drive will automatically calculate according to its own peak current.
Allowed values: 100% to 300% of Nominal Current
This is an advanced feature for fine tuning vector drives in certain applications. In general
the default value of 150% Nominal Current should be used, but reference can be made to
Converteam for an Application Note if required.
In many applications, the required overload varies with speed. The need to enter the
absolute maximum in P12.01 results in a reduction in motor voltage when operating at
higher speeds where this peak is never required. In the present version of firmware P12.01
is used in association with P12.29 and P12.30 to define a speed dependent overload
characteristic for the motor.

Page 6-60 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P12.29 - Motor Peak Current at 0% Speed

P12.30 - Motor Peak Current at Top Speed
These parameters, together with P12.01, allow a speed-dependent overload characteristic
to be entered for a specific application. For most applications the default setting of 99%
should be used - this sets these parameters to the same value as P12.01.
If the parameter values are set above 150%, the peak current will be limited to this by the
drive.
Allowed values: 99% to 300% Motor Nominal Current
Note:
When 99% is set for P12.29 and P12.30 these parameters are set to give the same value as that for
P12.01.
Figure 6-25 shows a typical overload/speed characteristic.
Peak Current

P12.29 P12.01
150%

P12.30
100%

Speed

Zero Nominal Top

Figure 6-25 Typical Overload/Speed Characteristic

P12.02 - Nominal Mains Supply Volts

This is used by the drive to calculate the maximum voltage available to control the motor.
This value should be set to the minimum value that the mains supply can dip to. If problems
arise with the performance, this value can be raised to nominal mains volts.
Allowed values: 300V to 900V rms
Note:
When running the Machine Bridge with an SFE bridge or boosted DC link the nominal mains supply
volts needs to be set at Vdc/1.35. This ensures that the machine bridge fully utilises the available DC
links voltage.
6.12.2 Motor Equivalent Circuit
The mathematical model used by the drive is expressed as an equivalent electrical circuit.
This is shown at Figure 6-26. See P12.03 to allow the drive to determine these values for
itself.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-61
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

Figure 6-26 Motor Equivalent Circuit

There are six parameters that define this circuit:

Motor Stator Resistance (P12.11)
Motor Stator Leakage Inductance (P12.12)
Motor Magnetising Resistance (P12.13)
Motor Magnetising Inductance (P12.14)
Motor Rotor Resistance (P12.15)
Motor Rotor Leakage Inductance (P12.16)
These parameters should be entered for a "star" equivalent connected motor. If the
parameters are known for a "delta" equivalent, these should be divided by 3.
Ideally these parameters should be obtained from the motor manufacturer for the exact
motor in use. If this is not possible, the drive can estimate the values from other data, and
can provide a good estimation if a no-load test is performed with the motor mechanically
uncoupled (see T1676 and T2002 Getting Started Manuals - Commissioning).
The following parameters, P12.03 to P12.28, are used for motor parameterisation.
P12.03 - Motor Parameterisation Method
Allowed options:
1 = Explicit entry (from motor manufacturers data).
2 = Nameplate guess (estimate from nameplate data).
3 = Calibration run.
Explicit Entry
If P12.03 is set to 1, then P12.11 to P12.16 must also be specified from the motor
manufacturer's data.
Nameplate Guess
If P12.03 is set to 2, then the drive will estimate the equivalent circuit data from the values
placed in parameters P2.00 to P2.04 and P12.00, and write these values to Parameters
P12.11 to P12.16. Existing data in P12.11 to P12.16 will be overwritten and P12.03 will be
reset to 1.
Calibration Run
If P12.03 is set to 3, the drive measures various motor and drive parameters, then uses this
data to calculate values for the equivalent circuit. This option produces the most accurate
estimation of motor characteristics. However, for this function ensure that P12.00 is set to
approximately 30% of the motor full load current (if a more accurate figure is required refer
to the formula in the relevant Getting Started Manual). When performing a calibration run it
is important that the motor load must not be connected, though the coupling may be left in
place. As for Option 2, existing data in P12.11 to P12.16 will be overwritten and P12.03 will
be reset to 1.
P12.32 - Leakage Test Current
This parameter is the percentage of motor full-load current at which the leakage test, as part
of the calibration run (P12.03 = 3), happens.

Page 6-62 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Allowed values:
50 to 100% Motor Full Load current
An outline of a Calibration Run (CAL Run) for Vector Control is now included.
Notes:
For parameters P12.11, P12.14 and P12.15:
1. On drive models MV3096 and below, the resolution of Rs and Rr is 0.1mΩ; that of Ls is 0.1mH.
2. On drive models MV3099 and above, the resolutions increase by a factor of 10, i.e. to 0.01unit.
Outline of a Vector Control CAL Run
The stages of a Vector Control CAL run are:
DC current injection, performed at two dc levels in each polarity (4 injections), to
measure stator resistance + cable resistance.
Very low value of voltage injection, to measure the current, to calibrate drive
output bridge errors - the Output Bridge errors are stored in parameters P11.70
to P11.77.
AC current injection, about 1 second, to measure motor leakage inductance
values - results stored in P12.22.
Drive disables for approximately one second to do some maths i.e. feed the
results above into the vector control - results are stored in P12.11 - P12.16.
Drive performs the motor magnetisation test - running at 90% speed, at varying
voltages, to record the currents - results are stored in P12.17 etc.
Drive then disables.
When an encoder is used, the drive measures rotor resistance (quite a long test,
minutes maybe, longer on larger motors, as Tr is longer) - results are stored in
P12.10.
All of the above results are in customer parameters and are therefore transferred by
transferring edits from one drive to another.
Note:
For best possible performance Output Bridge Linearisation should be repeated. However, for drives of
the same size the transferred parameters are expected to give satisfactory performance.
P12.11 - Stator Resistance
Enter the stator resistance (Rs) in mΩ.
Allowed values: 1mΩ to 9999mΩ
P12.12 - Stator Leakage Inductance
Enter the stator leakage inductance (Ls) in mH.
Allowed values: 0.100mH to 30.000mH
P12.13 - Magnetising Resistance
Enter the Magnetising resistance (Rm) in ohms.
Allowed values: 1Ω to 9999Ω
P12.14 - Magnetising Inductance
Enter the magnetising inductance (Lm) in mH.
Allowed values: 0.5mH to 99.9mH
P12.15 - Rotor Resistance
Enter the rotor resistance (Rr) in mΩ.
Allowed values: 100mΩ to 9999mΩ
Note:
Also refer to P12.10 for the Measured Cold Value of Rotor Resistance.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-63
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P12.16 - Rotor Leakage Inductance

Enter the rotor leakage inductance (Lr) in mH.
Allowed values: 0.100mH to 30.000mH
6.12.3 Motor Temperature Compensation (only valid for Vector mode with Encoder)
The rotor resistance value in the motor equivalent circuit is a critical parameter for motor
control. This resistance value varies considerably with motor temperature. The effect of this
is to impair the accuracy of torque control and in extreme cases can cause the drive to trip.
This effect can be compensated either manually or automatically; Control Flag 77 (P12.05)
controls the compensation method.
P12.05 - Control Flag 77 - Enable Manual Temperature Compensation
P12.06 must be cleared to enable manual temperature compensation.
P12.05 is used to enable manual rotor temperature compensation as follows:
P12.05 (CF77) = 1 - Manual Rotor Temperature is SET or ON.
P12.05 (CF77) = 0 - Manual Rotor Temperature Compensation is CLEARED or OFF.
See 6.33 for more information on Control Flag programming.
6.12.4 Manual Rotor Temperature Compensation (only valid for Vector mode with Encoder)
The user can modify the value of rotor according to several criteria (e.g. measured motor
temperature, or a plant variable that can be used to calculate torque inaccuracies).
P12.04 - Motor Temperature Compensation
(When Auto is disabled by P12.06)
This is the rotor resistance value, expressed as a percentage of the value in P12.15. The
actual rotor resistance used is given by the expression:
Rr = P12.15 - (P12.15 x (100 - P12.04) x (Temp. Comp. Scale))
100 100
Allowed values: 20% to 300% (of nominal slip)
To tune this parameter, the motor should be running at nominal speed and load and should
be temperature stabilised. The parameter is then adjusted until the motor voltage is
approximately nominal.
Care should be taken so that the required motor voltage never exceeds the supply voltage.
If this occurs (for example at high speeds and high load if the motor temperature exceeds
that for which tuning was carried out), the drive will be unable to maintain control of the
motor current and will trip.
P12.08 - Temperature Compensation Scale Source
The reduction, or increase, in rotor resistance from P12.15 to its compensated value can be
scaled by various user accessible control sources. The actual rotor resistance is given by
the above expression - see P12.04.
P12.08 selects the source for the temperature compensation scale value.
Allowed values are: 1 = Fixed value 100%
2 = Analogue Ref 1
3 = Analogue Ref 2
4 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
5 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
6 = RS485 Ref 1
7 = RS485 Ref 2
8 = RS232 Ref 1
9 = RS232 Ref 2
10 = PID Controller
11 = Summing Node C *
12 = Summing Node D *
13 = Pointer 11 **

Page 6-64 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Notes:
* Refer to Menu 40 for a description of Summing Nodes.
** Reference Pointers are described in Menu 41.
6.12.5 Automatic Rotor Temperature Compensation
The drive can be set up to automatically compensate for variations in rotor resistance. This
compensation is suitable in applications that operate with high torque and without
continuous rapid speed changes.
An application note describing the operation of the Rr tracker is included in Section 10.
P12.06 - Control Flag 106 - Enable Auto Temperature Compensation.
Set this Control Flag to enable the automatic compensation. With this set, the manual
compensation system is disabled.
See Section 6.33 for more information on Control Flag programming.
P12.07 - Temperature Compensation Gain
This parameter sets up the speed of operation of the automatic compensation. Typically
values of 2%/s/% can be used.
Allowed values: 0.0% to 3.0% (of nominal Rr per second per % of VARS error)
P12.09 - Temperature Compensation Estimate (Read Only)
This is the output of the automatic temperature compensation. It is expressed in the same
units as P12.04.
Values are in the range: 50% to 150%
P12.10 - Measured Cold Value of Rotor Resistance
The measured value for the rotor resistance when cold is used as a lower limit for the
Automatic Rotor Temperature compensation. This measured value is calculated during the
P12.03 = 3 Motor Calibration Run. The value should be between 50% and 80% of the hot
rotor resistance in P12.15. If this is not the case the value for P12.15 should be checked
with the motor manufacturer.
Allowed values for P12.15 are: 0mΩ to 9999mΩ
6.12.6 Additional Parameters for Operation Above Base Speed
These are covered at 6.12.7.
6.12.7 Motor Magnetisation Curve
When operating above the base speed of the motor, the magnetic flux level is reduced. This
causes the characteristics of the motor to change. The drive compensates for this change by
knowing the variation of the motor magnetising current with applied voltage.
P12.17 - Motor Magnetising Current at 50% Base Volts
P12.18 - Motor Magnetising Current at 60% Base Volts
P12.19 - Motor Magnetising Current at 70% Base Volts
P12.20 - Motor Magnetising Current at 80% Base Volts
P12.21 - Motor Magnetising Current at 90% Base Volts
If these parameters are left at their default values of zero, operation above base speed is not
allowed. These parameters may be obtained from the motor manufacturer, or they may be
measured separately, or the drive itself can perform the measurement automatically (see
Getting Started Manual - Commissioning, and P12.03 Option 3).
Allowed values: 0.0A to drive Full Load Current
6.12.8 Flux Limit
The magnetic flux level in the motor is normally controlled to the maximum value that can be
sustained at peak overload for the available voltage. This is calculated by the drive from its
motor model. At low speeds this is equivalent to the no load flux at base frequency and
voltage.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-65
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

In some cases it is desirable to reduce the flux level below this (e.g. for energy efficiency on
light loads). However, be aware that reducing the flux level reduces the available motor
torque.
Flux Limit is scaled such that 100% flux is equal to the no-load flux at base frequency and
voltage. To activate Flux Limit, set P12.25 (Control Flag 68 - Enable flux limit) to 1; in this
mode the drive controls the flux to the limit set by the flux limit source (P12.24). When
Control Flag 68 is set to 0 the drive controls the flux limit to the maximum allowed level.
P12.25 - Control Flag 68 - Flux Limit Enable
CF68 enables the flux limit source selected by P12.24.
Allowed values: 0 = Disabled (default)
1 = Enabled
P12.24 - Flux Limit Source
This parameter defines the source for the flux limit.
Allowed values: 1 = Pre-set flux limit (set in P12.23)
2 = Analogue Ref 1
3 = Analogue Ref 2
4 = RS485 Ref 1
5 = RS485 Ref 2
6 = RS232 Ref 1
7 = RS232 Ref 2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Reference Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref. Menu
11 = Motorised Pot.
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
14 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
15 = Summing Node A
16 = Summing Node B
17 = Pointer 12
Note:
The value of flux limit is clamped by the drive to the range 20% to 100%.
P12.22 - Leakage Volts
Allowed values: 0.0V to 300.0V
(0.0 = Calculated using the motor equivalent circuit parameters P12.11 to P12.16).
P12.23 - Fixed Flux Limit
This parameter contains the pre-set value for the flux limit.
Allowed values: 20% to 100% (of maximum flux)
P12.26 - Flux Demand
This read-only parameter is the flux level requested of the vector control. It is scaled such
that 100% is the no-load flux at base frequency and voltage.
Values are in the range: 0% to 100%
6.12.9 Current Control Bandwidth
P12.27 - Current Control Bandwidth - High Dynamic Mode
This parameter sets the target bandwidth for the closed loop current control used in vector
mode.
Allowed values: 10rads/s to 2000rads/s
The default values are 500rads/s for 1.25 kHz and 750rads/s for all other switching
frequencies.

Page 6-66 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Note:
When the switching frequency is changed, the value in P12.27 is returned to the default value. In most
applications the default value should be correct, but in unusual cases it may be necessary to reduce
the value.
6.12.10 Enable Rs Tracker (only valid in Vector mode without Encoder)
P12.28 - Enable Rs Tracker
When this parameter is set to 1, the drive will execute an automatic identification algorithm
to correct for errors in stator resistance.
An unwanted side effect of this compensation is that the drive may experience a transient
loss of torque during rapid reversal of the motor. This effect is more prevalent on small
motors.
Allowed values: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
The Rs Tracker feature is enabled by default.
6.12.11 Flux Controller Output (only valid in Vector mode without Encoder)
P12.31 - Flux Controller Output
This parameter shows the output of the flux controller. The output of the flux controller is
added to the magnetising current demand to ensure that the flux demand (as monitored in
parameter P12.26) is achieved.
P12.33 - Post Flycatch dFlux/dt Mask Time
This is an Application Specific parameter and its use is not described in this manual.
6.12.12 Vector Control Fluxing Mode
P12.35 - Vector Control Mode
This parameter allows the selection of High Dynamic mode or Optimal Volt mode vector
control. High Dynamic mode (default) maintains constant flux across the load range. Optimal
Volt mode maintains maximum possible flux across the load range.
It is recommended that on systems subject to DC Link voltage regulation or operation at
greater than twice base speed that Optimal Volt mode is selected.
P12.36 - Optimal Volt Mode Maximum Modulation Depth
Restrictions are imposed on the minimum PWM pulse width produced by the drive. These
restrictions have consequences on the drive’s maximum output modulation depth, and,
consequently, output voltage.
Table 6-10, below, shows the reduction in linear output modulation depth resulting from the
minimum pulse width limitations.
Table 6-10 Consequences of Minimum Output PWM Pulses

PWM Period Switching Pulse Limit, Maximum

Frequency on Terminals of Modulation
Drive Depth
800µs 1.25kHz 5.0µs 98.75%
400µs 2.5kHz 5.0µs 97.50%
200µs 5kHz 5.0µs 95.00%
133µs 7.5kHz 5.0µs 92.49%

The default value of modulation limit 2 is set from the table above.

2
Early versions of firmware had modulation depths defaulting to 100%. Also V6.03 Firmware at 105% modulation depth (maximum
applied in VVVF) is equivalent to V8.00 to V11.73 firmware at 101% modulation depth.
An application note in Section 10 gives magnitude of harmonic voltages for a function of modulation depth.
With P3.32=101% the same harmonic voltage that will be applied to the machine is equivalent to 105% in firmware versions up to
V6.03

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-67
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

To compensate for the above instantaneous modulation depth limit (or modulation clipping),
the modulation depth is boosted when the required modulation depth is greater than the
maximum instantaneous achievable, so as to restore the amplitude of the fundamental
component. This, unavoidably, increases the amplitude of the harmonic distortion
components.
Additionally, the quiescent operating modulation depth of the drive is reduced to the
Maximum Modulation Depth in the above table so that it does not sit at 100% modulation,
but at a lower value so that harmonic distortion is not the normal operating condition. Over
modulation is still possible for transient conditions.
If the application demands it, this value can be increased up to 107.00%. However, it should
be noted that values greater than those above necessarily result in output voltage distortion,
which in turn result in current distortion. In particular, 5th and 7th harmonic components of
current will result in increased motor heating, and torque ripple.
In optimal volt mode it is possible to allow the PWM modulator to operate in the over
modulation region.
This results in:
• A higher fundamental frequency motor voltage for a given DC Link voltage and,
• as previously stated, low order harmonic currents in the machine that will cause
torque ripple on the machine shaft.
It may be desirable to operate in this mode in certain applications where the torque loop
dynamic performance is not critical, the on-load DC Link voltage is low and motor voltages
comparable to ALSPA MV3000e VVVF mode are desirable.
Within Optimum Voltage Mode the maximum motor voltage that will be applied to the
machine can be selected using P12.36.
Vdc
Vmotor( l − l ) = P12.36 ×
2
Whilst running the inverter bridge in over modulation the voltage applied to the machine
contains low order harmonic components.
These low order harmonic voltages applied to the machine are a function of the modulation
depth and are detailed in an application note in section 10.9.
Values are in the range: 95% to107%
P12.37 - Optimum Voltage Mode Current Loop Bandwidth
This parameter sets the target bandwidth for the closed loop current control used in Optimal
Volt mode Vector Control.
Allowed values: 10rads/s to 2000rads/s
The default value of 600rads./s should be correct for most applications, in unusual cases it
may be necessary to reduce this value.
6.12.13 DC Link Voltage Feedforward Time-Constant
P12.38 - DC Link Voltage Feedforward Time Constant
This parameter is included for advanced system / personnel only. It is the time constant at
which the DC link voltage feedback is filtered, before being fed forward into the modulation
system. It has sometimes been found that, on high power systems with "soft" mains
supplies, then reducing this value can assist in reduction of instabilities.
It is recommended to leave this value at default, unless specific problems are encountered.
6.12.14 Current Control Gain Factors
P12.39 - Current Controller Kp Factor
P12.40 - Current Controller Ki Factor
These are included for advanced system / personnel only. It is recommended that these be
left at default, unless specific problems are encountered.

Page 6-68 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

The current control gains are calculated by the drive, from the appropriate input parameters.
P12.38 and P12.39 allow adjustment of the calculated values, for encoderless use, when
system instabilities are observed.
6.12.15 Orientation Controller Gains
P12.41 - Orientation Controller Kp
P12.42 - Orientation Controller Ki
These are included for advanced system only. It is recommended that these be left at
default, unless specific problems are encountered.
These parameters are the gains used by the drive, to control its estimation of motor speed,
in encoderless vector control. The values calculated by the drive are suitable for most
applications.

Note:
The value of P12.42 is re-calculated by the drive on change of P2.00, P2.04 or P2.06.
6.12.16 Cross Coupler Gains
P12.43 - Cross Coupler Time Constant
Included for advanced system personnel only. It is recommended that this parameter is left
unchanged at default unless specific problems are encountered.
The cross coupler time constant is calculated by the drive from appropriate input parameters
and calibration run data. It has been found that for a combination of long motor cables and
high efficiency motors that this time constant can become too low, resulting in the drive
tripping due to Current Control Failures (Trip Code 58). The parameter allows this time
constant to be adjusted and the drive stabilised. For details of how and under what
circumstances the adjustment may be required please contact Converteam.
P12.44 - Cross Coupler Gain Factor
Included for advanced system personnel only. It is recommended that this parameter is left
unchanged at default unless specific problems are encountered.
The cross coupler time constant is calculated by the drive from appropriate input parameters
and calibration run data, however on certain applications it may be necessary to adjust this
gain. For details of how and under what circumstances the adjustment may be required
please contact Converteam.
6.12.17 Rs Gain Factor (Vector Control Only)
P12.45 - Rs Gain Factor
Included for advanced system personnel only. It is recommended that this parameter is left
unchanged at default unless specific problems are encountered.
The use of this parameter is to scale the value of parameter P12.11 – ‘Stator Resistance’
within the encoderless vector control algorithm, however a change to the default value will
also be effective in vector control with encoder. Its effect is as follows:
Vector Control With Encoder
When P12.45 ≠ 100% the value of the stator resistance used by the drive is
Stator Resistance = P12.11 x P12.45
Vector Control Without Encoder
When P12.45 = 100% the Rs tracker can be enabled (see ‘Enable Rs Tracker (only valid in
Vector mode without Encoder)’ on page 6-67)
When P12.45 ≠ 100% the Rs Tracker cannot be enables and the value of the stator
resistance used by the drive is
Stator Resistance = P12.11 x P12.45
For details of how and under what circumstances to change the default value please contact
Converteam.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-69
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.12.18 Power Limit

P12.50 - Power Limit Enable
This enables the application of the power limit signal contained in parameter P12.51 and
associated parameters P12.52 and P12.53.
P12.51 - Power Limit
This is the power limit, in kW, to be applied to the power demanded from the drive. This
signal is to limit the amount of energy being put into the DC Link in order to prevent the DC
Link voltage from exceeding the over voltage trip threshold.
Power limit is converted into a torque limit by dividing by shaft speed.
Typically, the power limit value received via, say, CANopen will be placed directly into this
parameter.
This parameter is set zero on each power up.
P12.52 - Power Limit Taper Band
If this parameter is positive and P12.50 is enabled, the power limit in P12.51 is reduced in a
straight-line relationship starting at Vdc = Vdc nominal down to zero at Vdc = Vdc + P12.52.
This provides a proportional control to prevent a DC Link over voltage situation occurring
under re-generative conditions.
P12.53 - Taper Deadband
This parameter provides a deadband below which parameter P12.52, although positive, will
not have an effect.
DRIVE POWER
LIMIT

POWER LIMIT
VALUE IN
P12.51

Vdc
0

Vdc NOMINAL TAPER P LIMIT TAPER BAND

= DEADBAND P12.52
Vac NOMINAL (P12.02) x 1.35 P12.53

Figure 6-27 Power Limit Taper Band

P12.54 - Minimum Power Limit

If P12.50 is enabled, the value in this parameter is the minimum power limit (in 0.1kW units)
to be applied to the power demanded from the drive. Thus, if the value of P12.51 is less than
P12.53 then the value of P12.53 will be used as the power limit.
In wind turbine applications this parameter is particularly useful when the power limit signal
becomes zero (for example when the grid voltage collapses to zero). Setting this parameter
to a value that represents the bridge losses provides a mechanism for the machine bridge to
continue delivering power to the DC Link.

Page 6-70 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.13 Menu 13 - Speed Feedback Settings (Vector Only)

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 8)
Menu 13 gives access to the parameters required to configure the speed feedback settings
with and without an encoder, and to configure the encoder monitor. This menu is not
required for operation in Frequency Control mode.
6.13.1 Speed Feedback Selection
For operation with an encoder, the encoder line count and motor top speed parameters are
used to obtain the speed feedback as a percentage of motor top speed.
For encoderless operation the encoder is replaced either by a speed feedback signal (called
"Tacho" Mode, although the speed signal need not come from a tachogenerator), or by a
mathematical model of the motor within the drive (Encoderless Mode). The mathematical
model is calculated from motor parameters entered in Menu 12 (calibration run or manual
entry).
For all modes of Vector control, motor parameterisation is very important and the
commissioning procedure provided in the Getting Started Manual must be followed.
6.13.2 Limitations of Tacho Speed Feedback
Because the speed feedback is used in the torque and flux control loops of the vector
control, it must be accurate.
The speed feedback source will have a time lag imposed by the scan time of the source
(10ms for analogue inputs, RS485 link etc). Additional time lags may be caused by the
source generating the feedback.
This lag will limit the maximum rate of change of speed, if accurate torque control is to be
maintained. As a guide, it is suggested that the speed may not change by more than 10% of
the rated slip speed of the motor within one time lag period. This limits this mode of
feedback to relatively slowly varying applications.
Example
Speed feedback is via the Drive-Drive Serial link from another drive with an encoder. The
motor is 15 kW with a 35 r/minute nominal slip. Top Speed is 1500 r/minute.
Maximum Change of speed per lag period: 3.5 r/minute = 0.0233%
Maximum Lag time = 10ms + 10ms = 20ms
Therefore,
Minimum Ramp Time 0 - 100% = 8.6s
6.13.3 Limitations of Encoderless Vector Control
This method of Vector control is limited to the following frequency ranges:

0.5Hz to 150Hz Motoring

5Hz to 150Hz Regenerating, stator resistance compensation disabled
0.5Hz to 150Hz Regenerating, stator resistance compensation enabled
The speed range to which this corresponds is load dependent, due to the slip frequency of
an induction motor.
Parameters P13.00 and P13.01 define the main and backup speed feedback sources as
follows:

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-71
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P13.00 - Speed Feedback Source

P13.01 - Backup Speed Feedback Source
These parameters have the following options:
1 = Encoder
2 = Tacho
3 = Encoderless
Normally the feedback source defined by P13.00 is used. The backup source defined by
P13.01 is used if the following conditions occur:
Control Flag 118 - Select Backup Feedback = 1 OR
P13.00 = 1 AND Encoder loss is detected
P13.14 - Tacho Feedback Source
This parameter allows selection between various sources for tachometer feedback.
Allowed values are:
1 = Analogue REF 1 6 = RS485 REF 2
2 = Analogue REF 2 7 = RS232 REF1
3 = Fixed 0% (Not used) 8 = RS232 REF 2
4 = Fixed 0% (Not used) 9 = High Speed digital I/P
5 = RS485 REF 1 10 = Pointer 18
P13.15 - Tacho Feedback Scale
Sets the scale of the feedback selected by P13.14, where:

Tacho Feedback [% Full Scale]

SpeedFeedback [% Top Speed ] =
P1315
. [%]

i.e. P13.15 is the value of Tacho Feedback that corresponds to Top Speed.
The range of P13.15 is 33.3% to 90.0%, with a default of 90.0%. This allows at least 10% of
speed overshoot.
P13.16 - Tacho Feedback Time Constant
This parameter allows filtering of the Tacho Feedback signal.
Allowed range: 0 scans to 100 scans
Where one scan = 5ms
6.13.4 Encoder Monitor
The drive monitors the encoder signal, and may detect its loss. Upon detection of this loss
the drive can be programmed to trip, to issue a warning or, in some circumstances, return to
encoderless mode without stopping the drive.
Once encoder loss has been detected, the drive will revert to encoder operation only when
the user issues a specific instruction to the drive to do so.
Encoder loss is detected under the following conditions:
• The rate of change of measured speed is deemed to be impossible in reality. This is
attributed to encoder failure. The threshold for this is set by P13.08
• The drive detects direction change signals from the encoder when operation is at high
speed. This detection method is set up by P13.19 & P13.20
• The Force Encoder Loss Control Flag CF119 (P13.17) is set.
Note
The encoder loss detection methods used are not certain to work. Specifically, they will not work at low
speeds, and will not work in the event of a progressive, rather than sudden, failure (e.g. failure of a
mechanical coupling).

Page 6-72 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

For this reason, the Force Encoder Loss Control Flag (CF119) is provided. This allows the user to
define application specific criteria for the detection of encoder loss. A typical example of this would be
an application where there is no real possibility of the drive being in torque limit at low speed. The user
could configure the Logic Blocks to detect this condition, and to force encoder loss.
On encoder loss the drive takes the following actions:
Status Flag 59 (Encoder Loss) is set to 1.
Depending on the value of P13.02, the drive may trip or issue a warning. If a suitable speed feedback
backup source is configured, speed feedback reverts to this.
The drive will revert to encoder feedback if CF120, Reset Encoder Loss (P13.18), is set to a value of 1.
Note if this is left at a static value of 1, the drive will just reset any encoder loss detection. Care should
be taken when the criteria for this reset signal are defined, since the drive WILL reset to encoder, even
if the original fault is still present.
Setting up Encoder Loss Ridethrough
1. With P13.00 set to 1 (encoder), commission the speed loop with the application,
tuning P14.00, P14.01 and P14.03.
2. Set P13.00 to 3 (encoderless) and set P14.06 (gain select) to 1 to switch to the
second set of speed loop gains.
3. Re-commission the speed loop for encoderless mode editing P14.03, P14.04 and
P14.05.
4. Set P13.00 back to Encoder and set P13.01 to Encoderless. Set P13.02 to 1 - (Issue
Warning).
5. Connect Control Flag 76 to Status Flag 59:-
Encoder Loss Gain Select
59 76

P14.06 = 2.059

Now, when the encoder fails, a warning is issued and the correct speed loop gains will be
selected.
6. Monitor P13.07, P13.10 to determine if the encoder is serviceable.
7. Initiate an "Encoder Loss Reset" by toggling P13.18 (CF120) from 0 to1 to 0. The
drive will revert to encoder feedback.
Note:
This encoder reset can be patched to a digital input - see 6.7.6.
P13.02 - Action on Encoder Loss
This parameter determines the action taken by the drive when an error in the encoder signal
is detected.
Allowed values:
0 = No Action (Revert to Backup P13.01 if possible and set Status Flag 59)
1 = Warning (Same as Option 0 but issue Warning) – Default option
2 = Trip
P13.03 - Control Flag 118 - Select Backup Feedback
When set ON, manually selects the backup feedback source defined by P13.01.
P13.04 - Encoder Line Count
P13.05 - Encoder 10000 Lines
P13.04 and P13.05 determine the number of lines per signal per revolution of the motor
shaft.
Allowed values are: P13.04 = 32 to 9999 lines
P13.05 = 0 to 6 (x 104) lines.
The total line count is calculated as follows:
Line count = (P13.05 x 104)+ P13.04

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-73
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

The total range is from 32 to 64000 lines.

e.g. for a 2500 line encoder P13.04 = 2500
P13.05 = 0
for a 25,000 line encoder P13.04 = 5000
P13.05 = 2
P13.06 - Encoder Power Supply Volts
This parameter allows the output voltage of the 5V encoder supply on TB5 pin 4 to be
adjusted to compensate for voltage drops in the encoder cable.
Allowed values: 4.5V to 6.5V.
Notes:
1. If sense signals are wired (see Getting Started Manual T1676) adjustment is done automatically.
2. If the current flowing to the Encoder is too great then an encoder power supply failure results.
P13.07 - Number of Encoder Reversals
This read only parameter counts the number of occasions when the encoder signal detects
a change in direction. It is reset every 100ms. When the drive is operating away from zero
speed, the value should be at zero. Any non-zero value indicates a fault in the encoder, or
the presence of noise in the signal. This parameter is provided as a diagnostic aid. Also
refer to parameters P13.19 and P13.20 for Maximum Encoder Reversals and Reversals
Threshold respectively.
Range allowed: 0/10ms to 32767/10ms
P13.08 - Maximum Speed Change
This is used to set up the encoder lost sensitivity, see Encoder Monitor at 6.13.4.
Allowed values: 10r/minute to 1000r/minute (per 5ms)
P13.10 - Motor Angle Feedback
This read only parameter contains the value of the motor angle in degrees. It can be used to
determine if the encoder signal is healthy and to determine if P13.04/P13.05 have been
programmed correctly. See Commissioning in the Getting Started Manual T1676.
Range: 0 degrees to 360 degrees
Note:
This motor angle is measured relative to the rotor position when the drive is powered up. The Z pulse
of the encoder is not required for this function.
P13.17 - Control Flag 119 - Force Encoder Loss
When set ON, forces the drive to take action on encoder loss (P13.02).
P13.18 - Control Flag 120 - Reset Encoder Loss
When set, forces the drive to revert to encoder feedback source.
P13.19 - Maximum Encoder Reversals
Spurious apparent changes in encoder direction can occur due to noise effects. This
parameter sets the maximum number of apparent direction reversals in any 10 ms period,
above which encoder loss is assumed (see 6.13.4 Encoder Monitor).
Range of values: 0/10 ms to 1000/10 ms
P13.20 - Reversals Threshold
When the encoder speed is close to zero the accuracy of measuring encoder reversals is
questionable. This parameter sets a low speed threshold, as a percentage of top speed,
below which encoder reversal checks are not made.
Range of values: 0.1% top speed to 100% top speed

Page 6-74 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.13.5 Open Loop Test Mode

Open loop test mode allows a drive configured for vector control to be run in open loop
mode for test or commissioning purposes. See the Getting Started Manual T1676 for
commissioning flowcharts. P13.11, P13.12 and P13.13 are used to select open loop test
mode and control the motor as follows:
P13.11 - Open Loop Test
This parameter is used to select open loop test mode.
Allowed values: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P13.12 - Open Loop Frequency
P13.12 defines the output frequency of the drive in open loop test mode.
Allowed values: -150Hz to +150Hz
P13.13 - Open Loop Ramp Rate
P13.13 defines the acceleration rate used in the open loop test mode.
Allowed values: 0.1Hz/s to 10.0Hz/s

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-75
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.14 Menu 14 - Speed Loop Settings (Vector Only)

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 7)
Menu 14 contains the parameters required to configure the speed loop control in Vector
Control mode.
An outline of the procedure for setting drive speed control is:
(a) set top speeds - see Menu 5;
(b) select speed feedback source - see Menu 13;
(c) select speed references - see Menu 5;
(d) tune the speed amplifier - see Menu 14;
(e) program ramps - see Menu 6.
Refer to the Control Block Diagrams for other speed control functions.
6.14.1 Speed Controller
There are two sets of Proportional, Integral and Derivative Gains for the main speed loop
control, selected by P14.06 (Control Flag 76). This allows two separate tunings to be made
for the speed loop that can be changed on-line using P14.06.
P14.00 - Speed Loop Proportional Gain 1
P14.03 - Speed Loop Proportional Gain 2
Entered as a Per-Unit value, i.e. a value of 1 will result in a proportional torque demand of
100% of nominal torque for a speed error of 100% of top speed.
Allowed values: 0.01 to 125.00% torque per % speed error
P14.01 - Speed Loop Integral Gain 1
P14.04 - Speed Loop Integral Gain 2
Entered as a Per-Unit-Per-Second value. i.e. a value of 1 will result in an integral torque
demand of 100% in 1 second for a 100% speed error.
Allowed values: 0 to 3000% torque per second per % speed error
P14.02 - Speed Loop Derivative Gain 1
P14.05 - Speed Loop Derivative Gain 2
Entered as a Per-Unit value, i.e. a change in speed error of 100 %/s will produce a torque
demand of 100% for D gain = 1.000.
Allowed values: 0.000 to 10.000% torque per % speed error seconds
P14.06 - Control Flag 76 - Speed Loop Gain Select
Control Flag 76 is used to switch between PID settings 1 and 2 as follows:
(OFF) selects PID1 as defined by P14.00 to P14.02
(ON) selects PID2 as defined by P14.03 to P14.05
P14.07 - Control Flag 19 - Clamp Zero Speed
When set, inputs a zero speed demand to the speed loop.
When OFF (default state), allows normal speed demand.
P14.08 - Control Flag 20 - Disable Speed Loop
When set, disables the speed loop output, giving zero speed demand. This flag can be used
in conjunction with CF72 (Enable Torque Ref) and CF74 (Enable Inertia Comp.) to provide
the source for the overall torque demand.
When OFF, enables the speed loop output.

Page 6-76 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P14.09 - Speed Demand

Contains the speed demand to the speed controller after ramp, trim and droop terms have
been taken into account.
Range: -100.00 to +100.00% of Top Speed.
P14.10 - Speed Demand Time Constant
This parameter sets the time constant for speed demand before speed error is calculated.
Allowed values: 0 scans to 500 scans (1 scan = 5ms)
P14.11 - Speed Feedback Time Constant
This parameter sets the time constant for the speed feedback before the speed error is
calculated.
Allowed values: 0 scans to 500 scans (1 scan = 5ms)
P14.12 - Speed Error
P14.12 contains the value of the speed error signal to the PID speed regulator.
Range: -300.00% to +300.00% of Top Speed.
P14.13 - Speed Error Time Constant
P14.13 provides an optional low-pass filter on the speed error signal before the PID
controller. This is expressed in units of "speed loop scan times" (5ms).
Allowed values: 0 scans to 500 scans (1 scan = 5ms)
6.14.2 Speed Loop Error Deadband
P14.14 - Speed Loop Error Deadband
This parameter determines the width of the speed loop error deadband (see Figure 6-28).
Allowed values: 0.00% to 100.00% of Top Speed
The speed loop error deadband is enabled by setting P14.16 (Control Flag 73) = 1.
Note:
Ensure that the Ramp Deviation (P6.10), if used and enabled (P6.11), is set to a value greater than
P14.14 deadband i.e. P14.14 MUST BE < P6.10. In version 4.00 and above this is done automatically.
P14.15 - Speed Loop Deadband Offset
This parameter controls the offset of the speed loop error deadband (see Figure 6-28).
Allowed range, as a % of Top Speed: 0.00 to Value set in P14.14
P14.19 - Deadband Bias
In applications where the speed error deadband is used to create a "bumpless" changeover
between speed and torque control, it is desirable that the Integral term of the PID controller
be "discharged" to zero when the speed error enters the deadband. P14.19 provides a
deadband bias that ensures that the error applied to the PID is non-zero until the speed loop
is discharged.
Units: 0.01% of Top Speed
Allowed range: 0.00% to 00.00% of Top Speed
Outside Deadband
Error out = error in - deadband + offset
Inside Deadband
Set error to zero or to Bias Value (P14.19).
Speed amp output = 0 when inside but, if it comes in from outside, the speed Amp output =
internal freeze value.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-77
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P14.16 - Control Flag 73 - Enable Speed Loop Deadband

When set, enables the speed loop deadband.
When cleared (default state), the speed loop deadband is disabled.

Speed Error
Out of Function

Speed Error
Speed Error Deadband O ffset
Deadband P14.15
P14.14

Speed Error
Into Function

Figure 6-28 Deadband Offset

6.14.3 Speed Droop

P14.17 - Speed Droop
Used to give a "droop" characteristic to the speed as load torque is increased. This is
normally used to ensure load sharing in mechanically coupled drives.
The allowed value entered into P14.17 is the value of droop imposed when Torque demand
(P9.04) reaches 100%.
As load increases (P9.04 increases) the speed demand will be driven further down.
To invoke load sharing all drives that are required to load-share must have droop activated.
Allowed values: -100.0 to +100.0% Top Speed for 100 % nominal torque.
P14.18 - Speed Droop Time Constant
This is the time constant of the low-pass filter that is applied to the droop signal before it is
subtracted from the speed demand. This is expressed as speed loop scan times.
Allowed values: 0 scans to 9999 scans (1 scan = 5ms)
6.14.4 Speed Loop Integral Term
P14.20 - Control Flag 107 - Speed Loop Integral Freeze.
The speed loop integral term is internally frozen, i.e. not updated, if either:
The speed loop is in limit, or
Control flag 107 is set.
This allows the user to have more flexibility over the operation of the speed loop, by using
the ability to freeze the integral term, if desired.
P14.21 - Speed Loop Integral Seed Method
Option 0 = Speed Loop Integral Seeded from Torque Injection (Default Value)
Option 1 = Speed Loop Integral Seeded to 0

Page 6-78 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

When in vector control and the seed loop is disabled (CF20=1), then the integral term of the
speed loop may be seeded to one of two values, either 0 or the present value of the torque
injection signal, originating from menu 15.
Option 0 is selected.
When the drive is changed from torque control to speed control, i.e. CF72 is cleared
simultaneously with CF20 cleared, the speed loop is already at the present value of torque.
Thus, no torque transient occurs.
Option 1 is selected.
When the drive is changed from torque control to speed control, i.e. CF72 is cleared
simultaneously with CF20 cleared, the speed loop is pre-set to 0. A torque transient, on
P9.04, occurs, where the torque steps to 0, and recovers at the speed loop dynamics.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-79
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.15 Menu 15 - Torque Reference Settings (Vector Only)

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 7)
Menu 15 gives access to the parameters required to configure torque reference settings.
The Torque Reference is added to the output of the speed control loop. If the speed loop is
disabled, the drive will operate in torque control mode only. The torque reference may be
obtained from many of the sources that can define speed reference.
An outline of the procedure for setting drive torque control is:
(a) Set Scale and Enable Torque limits - see Menu 15;
(b) Disable speed controller:
(1) Disable speed controller by using CF20 - see Menu 14;
(2) Set up a "speed catch" (deadband) and remember to tune the speed
controller - see Menu 14;
(c) Set torque limits - see Menu 8.
Refer to the Control Block Diagrams for other torque control functions.
P15.00 - Torque Reference
P15.00 toggles between a read-only and an editable torque value.
- When the Keypad reference is the active reference, then P15.00 can be edited via the
Keypad, or the and keys can control the torque.
- When the Keypad reference is not active, then P15.00 simply reports the current value of
the reference, like a monitor point.
The torque demand can be inhibited or disabled by the following control flags:
Control Flag 22 - Inhibit Positive Torque (P8.05)
Control Flag 23 - Inhibit Negative Torque (P8.06)
Control Flag 24 - Disable Torque (P8.04).
P15.01 - Torque Reference Scale Factor
This parameter is a scale factor allowing torque references in excess of 100 % nominal
torque to be defined.
Allowed values: 0.0% to 300.0% gain.
P15.02 - Control Flag 72 - Enable Torque Reference
Control Flag 72 is used to enable/disable the torque reference.
When ON, torque reference is enabled.
For details of control flag programming see 6.33.
P15.03 - Torque Demand Slew Rate
This parameter is used to smooth out any change of torque reference, thereby reducing
pulsations delivered to the load.
Allowed values: 0 = No slew rate
1% to 5000% of nominal torque per second.
P15.04 - Torque Reference Source
Defines the source of the principal torque reference.
Allowed values:
1 = Keypad Torque Ref. 12 = Trim Reference
2 = Analogue REF1 13 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
3 = Analogue REF2 14 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
4 = RS485 Link Ref 1 15 = High Speed Digital Input
5 = RS485 Link Ref 2 16 = Position Control

Page 6-80 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6 = RS232 Link Ref 1 17 = Summing Node A

7 = RS232 Link Ref 2 18 = Summing Node B
8 = PID Controller 19 = Summing Node C
9 = Reference Sequencer 20 = Summing Node D
10 = Fixed Reference Menu 21 = Pointer 8
11 = Motorised Pot.
P15.05 - Backup Torque Reference
Allowed values: 0 = No backup
1 to 21 as P15.04
Except when Option 0 is selected, a failure of the principal torque reference will cause an
automatic changeover to the selected backup reference.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-81
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.16 Menu 16 - PID Controller Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 5)
Menu 16 gives access to the parameters required to configure and monitor the user PID
Controller. This can be used to allow the drive to control pressure, flow levels etc., in fact if a
transducer can be fitted then the drive will control it.
Firstly, the error term is calculated, from the setpoint, the feedback, and the feedback scale
factor:
PID _ feedback.PID _ FB _ scale _ factor
PID _ error = PID _ setpo int −
100%
Or
[ P16.01].P16.02
PID _ error = [ P16.00] −
100%
This error term is filtered by the error time constant, P16.06.
The error may be optionally inverted, by P16.08.
The deadband is then imposed, P16.07.
If the magnitude of the error is less than the deadband, then the error is set to zero, to
prevent "hunting" about the set point.
The PID Calculations are then done. The proportional band is the gain term which applies to
all of the individual terms, as can be seen below. The Integral time, and Differential time,
apply only to the I and D terms, respectively.
Proportional Term, P
error.100% error.100%
P= =
proportional _ band P16.03

The integral term is then calculated, based upon the integral of the error.
error.100% error.100%
I =∫ =∫
Integral _ time. proportional _ band P16.04.P16.03

Note that an integral time setting of 0.0s means no integral term, which actually equates to
an integral time of infinity (∞) in the above equation.
Finally, the derivative term, based upon the differential, or change (δ) of the error:

δerror.differential _ time.100% δerror.P16.05.100%

D= =
proportional _ band P16.03

The output of the PID function is the sum of these 3 terms

Output = P + I + D
The result is clamped so that it cannot exceed (100.00%

Page 6-82 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P16.00 - PID Set point Selection

This parameter selects the source to be used as the set point for the PID controller.
Allowed values:
1 = Fixed Ref 0 8 = RS485 Ref 1
2 = Analogue REF1 9 = RS232 Ref 1
3 = Fixed 0% (Not used) 10 = Torque Demand
4 = Fixed Ref Menu 11 = Speed Demand
5 = Reference Sequencer 12 = Summing Node A
6 = Motorised Pot 13 = Summing Node B
7 = Trim Reference 14 = Pointer 4
When Options 4 and 5 are used, the values returned from the Reference Sequencer and
Fixed Speed Menu functions represent 0.01% full scale (rather than 0.01 Hz) and are scaled
to represent maximum 100 % full scale before being passed to the PID controller.
Note:
It is possible to set up the PID controller in a manner that gives a meaningless result (e.g. Reference
Sequencer = PID Controller, PID Controller = Reference Sequencer). Care should be taken to avoid
setting up the PID Controller in this manner.
P16.01 - PID Feedback Selection
This parameter allows the feedback source to be specified.
Allowed values are:
1 = Analogue REF2 7 = Speed Error
2 = Fixed 0% (Not used) 8 = Active Current
3 = RS485 Ref 2 9 = Flux Demand
4 = RS232 Ref 2 10 = Summing Node C
5 = Torque Demand 11 = Summing Node D
6 = Speed Demand 12 = Pointer 5
P16.02 - PID Feedback Scale Factor
This parameter allows the PID feedback to be scaled. Default value is 100%. See customer
block diagram.
Allowed values: 0% to +300.0%
Note:
The PID error term is not clamped, before or after application of this scale factor.
The PID error (set point - feedback) is however clamped to 100%.
P16.03 - PID Proportional Band
This sets the proportional band, in %, of the controller.
Allowed values: 0.1% to 500.0%
P16.04 - PID Integral Time
This sets the integral action time of the controller, in seconds.
Allowed values: 0.1 seconds to 3000.0 seconds
0.0 = No Integral term
Hint: When tuning the PID controller, initially set P16.04 = 0, then set P16.03 to give
the desired response speed. Then add P16.04 to remove any steady state
errors, set P16.04 to be slightly faster than the expected time constant of the
system being controlled.
P16.05 - PID Differential Time
This sets the differential action time of the controller, in seconds.
Allowed values: 0.0 seconds to 3000.0 seconds
P16.06 - PID Error Time Constant
Allowed values: 0.00 seconds to 5.00 seconds

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-83
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P16.07 - PID Error Deadband

This sets a dead-band function that is imposed on the error signal (in % Full Scale). An error
dead-band should be used to prevent "hunting".
Allowed values: 0.0% to 50.0%
P16.08 - PID Error Invert
This parameter inverts the PID error signal, and is used to correct the signal from a negative
acting feedback transducer.
Allowed values are: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P16.09 - PID Output Monitor
This read-only parameter is the output of the PID block; it can be monitored as a diagnostic
tool.
Displayed range: -100% to +100% full scale
P16.10 - Control Flag 26 - PID Integral Freeze
When set, freezes the Integral part of the PID to prevent integral wind-up.
P16.11 - Control Flag 69 - Suicide PID Controller
This flag suicides the output of the PID to zero when set ON. At default this flag is set to the
INV of the Running status flag (-2.000) so that when the drive is running the PID is running.
The flag allows the user to decide when the PID loop is suicided.

Page 6-84 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.17 Menu 17 - Reference Sequencer Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 5)
Menu 17 gives access to the parameters required to configure and monitor the Reference
Sequencer function. MV3000e can be programmed to perform a sequence of speed (and
direction) changes automatically. The sequence can be timed, or it can be controlled by an
external input. The control sequence changes the speed of the drive by changing the
reference source and there can be up to five changes in a programmed sequence.
Note:
By default the sequencer is frozen by holding it in reset (CF29). To allow running set P17.20 to 0
(OFF).
P17.00 - Reference Sequencer Mode
Allowed values (modes): 0 = Stopped
1 = Manual Trigger - CF28 clocks the sequencer to the next
point.
2 = Auto Cycle - Sequence stops at one point for a specified
time, then automatically moves to the next point. On completing
the last point it returns to the first point in the sequence.
3 = Auto Single Sequence - As Option 2 except that on
reaching the last point it stops until reset by activating CF29.
When Options 1 to 3 above are selected the current point in the sequence is stored when
the drive is powered down. On power up the sequence continues from where it left off.
P17.01 - Number of Reference Sequence Points
Sets the number of points to be cycled
Allowed values: 1 to 5
P17.02 - Present Sequence Point
This read only parameter indicates the current position in the sequence of references
defined in Parameters P17.03 to P17.07.
Indicated values are in the range: 0 to 5
P17.03 - Sequencer Reference Point 1
Choose the source for reference point #1.
Allowed values:
1 = Analogue REF1 11 = Fixed Ref #0 (P21.00)
2 = Analogue REF2 12 = Fixed Ref #1 (P21.01)
3 = RS485 Link REF 1 13 = Fixed Ref #2 (P21.02)
4 = RS232 Link REF 1 14 = Fixed Ref #3 (P21.03)
5 = PID Controller 15 = Fixed Ref #4 (P21.04)
6 = Fixed Ref Menu 16 = Summing Node A
7 = Motorised Pot. 17 = Summing Node B
8 = Trim Reference 18 = Summing Node C
9 = Fixed 0% (Not used) 19 = Summing Node D
10 = Fixed 0% (Not used) 20 = Pointer 3
P17.08 - Reference Sequencer Time 1 (seconds)
P17.09 - Reference Sequencer Time 1 (minutes)
These two parameters define the duration of the first reference.
Allowed values: P17.08:- 0.0 seconds to 59.9 seconds.
P17.09:- 0.0 minutes to 9999 minutes
Similarly the reference source, duration (seconds) and duration (minutes) for sequence
points 2 to 5 are set in parameters P17.04 to P17.17 as follows:

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-85
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P17.04 - Sequencer Reference Point 2

P17.10 - Reference Sequencer Time 2 (seconds)
P17.11 - Reference Sequencer Time 2 (minutes)
P17.05 - Sequencer Reference Point 3
P17.12 - Reference Sequencer Time 3 (seconds)
P17.13 - Reference Sequencer Time 3 (minutes)
P17.06 - Sequencer Reference Point 4
P17.14 - Reference Sequencer Time 4 (seconds)
P17.15 - Reference Sequencer Time 4 (minutes)
P17.07 - Sequencer Reference Point 5
P17.16 - Reference Sequencer Time 5 (seconds)
P17.17 - Reference Sequencer Time 5 (minutes)
Note:
The manual and external triggers remain active when Auto (timed) sequence is selected. This allows
manual stepping through the sequence for test or commissioning purposes.
When the sequence of references and the mode have been defined the Reference
Sequencer is activated and controlled as follows:
1. Set the Speed Reference Source, P5.01 to P5.04 (P5.05 for Backup) or the torque
reference source, P15.04 (P15.05 for Backup) to `Reference Sequencer'.
2. Use Control Flags 27, 28 and 29 to, freeze, start or reset the sequence as required.
Note:
At default the sequencer is held in reset, P17.20 must be set to 0 (OFF) to allow running.
P17.18 - Control Flag 27 - Reference Sequencer Freeze
The sequencer is always frozen at the current position when CF27 is activated.
P17.19 - Control Flag 28 - Reference Sequencer Trigger
CF28 moves the sequencer to the next point in the sequence in modes 1, 2 and 3.
P17.20 - Control Flag 29 - Reference Sequencer Reset
CF29 moves the sequencer to the first point in the sequence.
P17.21 - Reference Sequencer Output
This is a Read-only parameter monitoring the Reference Sequencer output in units of 0.01%
motor top speed.
Allowed range: -100.00% to +100.00%

Page 6-86 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.18 Menu 18 - Motorised Potentiometer Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 5)
Menu 18 gives access to the parameters required to configure and monitor the motorised
potentiometer function.
6.18.1 Motorised Potentiometer Configuration
MV3000e can be configured for push-button raise/lower (Motorised Potentiometer) control
using Control Flags 34 (P18.04) and 35 (P18.05). To achieve this:
(a) Ensure that default wiring (see Wiring Diagram in relevant manual) to the digital inputs
is changed as follows:
(1) Connect two digital inputs to raise/lower pushbuttons, e.g.
RAISE pushbutton to DIGIN 4 (P18.04 = 1.004) and
LOWER pushbutton to DIGIN 5 (P18.05 = 1.005);
(2) Configure the sources for Control Flags 34 and 35 to the appropriate digital
inputs, (i.e. set P18.04 to 1.004 and P18.05 to 1.005 for this example);
(b) By default, direction is controlled by DIGIN 3;
(c) Set the raise and lower rates in P18.00 and P18.01;
(d) Set the Motorised Pot Mode in P18.02;
(e) Set the direction of rotation of the motor in P5.11;
(f) The motorised potentiometer can be used as a speed reference (P5.01 to P5.05), a
torque reference (P15.04) or as an input to many of the other drive functions. Use the
Control Block Diagrams to choose the motorised pot from the relevant reference list.
P18.04 - Control Flag 34 - Motorised Potentiometer Raise
P18.05 - Control Flag 35 - Motorised Potentiometer Lower
When set ON, CF34 raises/CF35 lowers the motorised pot respectively.
P18.06 - Control Flag 71 - Motorised Potentiometer Preset
When set ON, CF71 presets the motorised pot to the value entered in P18.03.
P18.00 - Motorised Potentiometer Raise Rate
P18.01 - Motorised Potentiometer Lower Rate
Allowed values: 0.1% to 3000.0% per second
P18.02 - Motorised Potentiometer Mode
Allowed values: 1 = Forward only
2 = Reverse only
3 = Forward and reverse
4 to 6 = As 1 to 3 but suicides to zero when drive output stopped.
P18.03 - Motorised Potentiometer Preset
This allows the output of the motorised pot to be pre-set to enable this parameter set Control
Flag 71 ON.
Allowed values: 0.0% to +100.0% of Top Speed
P18.07 - Motorised Potentiometer Output
This is a read-only parameter monitoring the Motorised Potentiometer output in units of
0.01% motor top speed.
Allowed range: -100.00% to +100.00%

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-87
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.19 Menu 19 - Trim Reference Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 5)
Menu 19 gives access to the parameters required to configure and monitor the Trim
References.
6.19.1 Trim Reference Control
Trim reference control allows the active speed reference to be scaled and fine trimmed.
Allows two references to be combined to provide advanced referencing features; for
example an Analogue Input can be used to scale the output of the PID controller.
The drive calculates the output speed using the following expression:
(( A × Re fA) + ( B × Re fB ))
Output _ Speed =
100
Where:
A = Trim reference A scale factor (set in P19.02)
Ref A = Trim reference A Input (set in P19.00)
B = Trim reference B scale factor (set in P19.03)
Ref B = Trim reference B Input (set in P19.01).
The purpose of the Trim Reference feature is to apply an offset and gain factor to the
reference source, to align the values with the required range.
To set up a trim reference control:
(a) Select Trim Reference Input A in P19.00.
(b) Set P19.02 to the scaling factor (A).
(c) Select Trim Reference Input B in P19.01.
(d) Set P19.03 to scaling factor (B).
(e) Trim Reference can be used as a speed reference (P5.01 to P5.05), as a
torque reference (P15.04) or as an input to many other drive functions. Use the
Control Block Diagrams to choose the Trim Reference from the relevant list.
P19.00 - Trim Reference Input A
P19.01 - Trim Reference Input B
Allowed values:
1 = Analogue REF1 9 = Motorised Pot.
2 = Analogue REF2 10 = Ref. Sequencer
3 = Fixed 0% (Not used) 11 = Fixed Ref #0 (P21.00)
4 = Fixed 0% (Not used) 12 = Fixed Ref #1 (P21.01)
5 = RS485 REF 1 13 = Position Control
6 = RS232 REF 1 14 = Summing Node A
7 = PID Controller 15 = Summing Node B
8 = Fixed Ref. Menu 16 = Pointer 6
P19.02 - Trim Reference Scale A
P19.03 - Trim Reference Scale B
Allowed values: -150.0% to +150.0%
P19.04 - Trim Reference Output
This read-only parameter monitors the Trim Reference output.
Allowed range: -100.00% to +100.00% of Top Speed

Page 6-88 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.20 Menu 20 - High Speed Digital I/O Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 4)
Menu 20 gives access to the parameters required to configure and monitor the High Speed
Digital I/O (HSIO).
Encoder line count × Speed [r / min ] ( Hz )
Pulse Train Freq. =
30 × P 20.00

The HSIO connections, TB7/8 and TB7/9 on the DELTA controller (TB4B/8 and TB4B/7 on
the MicroCubicle™ Controller), can be inputs or outputs but cannot be both simultaneously.
P20.00 defines the HSIO connections as either inputs or outputs - see Figure 6-29 and
Table 6-11.
Table 6-11 HSIO Mode and Function

HSIO Meaning HSIO Description

Mode Direction
P20.00
4098 PWM Output MV3000e produces a 1 second synchronisation
Synchronisation pulse.
Master Additionally, the PWM is synchronised to this ‘tick’
with a programmable offset
4097 PWM Input MV3000e synchronises its PWM to the 1 second
Synchronisation pulse received, with a programmable offset.
Slave
2 to 4096 Subdivision of the Output Output frequency is a subdivision of the encoder
Encoder Clock clock pulse train, see formula above.
1 Input Input Used for referencing the drive.
Input defined by P20.01 and P20.02*
0 Output at drive Output Useful for triggering an oscilloscope
frequency
-1 1kHz pulse train Output Specialised 1µs Pulse
-2 Fast Trip Output Output • Trips are routed to the HSIO
• Hardware trips from the power stack have a
delay of 0 to 1 PWM scan, before being
reported to the HSIO, due to asynchronicity
between the actual trip and the PWM scan.
These trips are: Instantaneous Overcurrent,
Over Voltage.
• (A PWM scan is 800µs @ 1,25kHz, or 400µs @
2.5kHz or 5kHz.)
• Sharing trips are also routed to the HSO with a
0 to 1 PWM scan delay between the Nth
sharing event and the HSO being operated.
Where N is the sharing trip threshold entered
into d2451.
• When action on sharing is set to ‘Warn’ or ‘No
Action’ (P35.18 = 1 or 0) the HSO is not
operated.
• The general ‘Status Trip’ (Status Flag SF5) is
also routed to the HSO but this has 10ms of
software delay depending on the source of the
trip.
• HSO is set low by the drive attempting a reset.
If the reset succeeds it will remain low. If the
reset fails it will return high.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-89
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

-3 Active Sharing Output • Whenever the number of consecutive PWM

Level 1 events events containing sharing reaches the value set
in P35.20 the HSO is activated.
• The mode is independent of Action Sharing
Action set in P35.18
-4 Active Sharing Output • Whenever the number of consecutive PWM
Level 1 events on events containing sharing reaches the value set
U phase only in P35.20, on the U phase, the HSO is
activated.
• The mode is independent of Action Sharing
Action set in P35.18
-5 Active Sharing Output • Whenever the number of consecutive PWM
Level 1 events on events containing sharing reaches the value set
V phase only in P35.20, on the V phase, the HSO is
activated.
The mode is independent of Action Sharing Action
set in P35.18
-6 Active Sharing Output • Whenever the number of consecutive PWM
Level 1 events on events containing sharing reaches the value set
W phase only in P35.20, on the W phase, the HSO is
activated.
The mode is independent of Action Sharing Action
set in P35.18

HSO being High (Tripped) is defined as:

HSIO+ = High (TB7 Pin 8) AND HSIO- = Low (TB7 Pin9).
HSO being Low (Not Tripped) is defined as:
HSIO+ = Low (TB7 Pin 8) AND HSIO- = High (TB7 Pin9).

5V

HSIO -

0V
5V
in
0V HSIO +
But Signal Generator enclosure
MUST be grounded to drive 0V

Figure 6-29 HSIO Connections when RS422 signal is not available

Note:
* Not applicable when no encoder is present i.e. no output when there is no encoder.
High Speed Digital Outputs (HSO)
When a value in the range 2 to 4096 is placed in P20.00 the HSIO operates as an output
(HSO) and is a pulse train in RS422 format. The pulse train output frequency is a
programmable division of the encoder clock frequency and it can be expressed as a function
of motor speed:
P20.00 should be configured to 1 for drives using Dynamic Braking Proportional Control.

Page 6-90 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

High Speed Digital Inputs (HSI)

When a value of 1 is entered in P20.00 the HSIO operates as an input (HSI). The HSI is
intended for use as a frequency based speed reference source and is controlled by three
parameters:
Speed
Ref

100%
P20.01 - HSI Frequency for zero speed
P20.02 - HSI Frequency for top speed
P20.03 - HSI Speed Reference

Freq.
0%
(kHz)

P20.01 P20.02

Figure 6-30 Speed/Frequency Relationship

P20.01 and P20.02 define the frequency range, in kHz, for speed reference from 0 to 100%
of top speed. P20.03 is a read-only parameter to allow the reference to be monitored.
Note:
The frequency measurement is achieved by counting the number of transitions on the input over a
period of 10 ms. As this 10 ms is not synchronised to the incoming frequency, there is a possible
inaccuracy in this measurement of up to one transition per 10 ms. This will be seen as a rapid
fluctuation in the input. To minimise this effect, the frequency used should be as high as possible (up
to a maximum of 650 kHz).
P20.00 - HSIO Mode
Allowed values: -6 Active Sharing Level 1 Events W Phase only
-5 Active Sharing Level 1 Events V Phase only
-4 Active Sharing Level 1 Events U Phase only
-3 Active Sharing Level 1 Events
-2: Fast Trip Out
-1: 1 kHz Output Pulse
0: Output, at drive output frequency
1: Input defined by P20.01 and P20.02
2 to 4096: Output is given by the expression at 6-4.
1. When a value of –2 is entered the HSIO can be used to facilitate the triggering of
oscilloscopes on a trip event. Trips are routed to the HSIO.
2. When a value of -1 is entered into P20.00 the HSIO will produce a 1 kHz square wave
output in RS 422 format. This can be used for triggering an external event in some
applications.
3. When a value of 0 is entered into P20.00 the HSIO will operate as an output and is a
pulse train in RS 422 format. The pulse train output frequency is at the drive power
output frequency as given in P9.09. This can be used for triggering an oscilloscope, or
to supply a reference to another drive.
P20.01 - HSIO Input Frequency for 0% Speed
P20.01 sets the input frequency to the HSI that is required to correspond to zero speed
reference.
Allowed values: 0.0kHz to 650.0 kHz

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-91
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P20.02 - HSIO Input Frequency for 100 % Speed

P20.02 sets the input frequency to the HSI that is required to correspond to 100% speed
reference.
Allowed values: 0.0kHz to 650.0kHz
P20.03 - HSIO Input Reference Value
This is a read only parameter gives the HSI speed reference value as a percentage of Top
Speed.
Range: 0.00% to 100.00% (of Top Speed)
6.20.1 PWM Synchronisation
PWM synchronisation is a feature added to facilitate minimisation of the PWM ripple when
multiple network bridges are employed. These multiple network bridges can have their PWM
waveforms phase-locked and phase displaced, with respect to each other, in order to reduce
the ripple content of the entire network.
The HSIO signal from the controller is used for PWM synchronisation. This is an RS422
signal that can be programmed as either an input or an output.
Two additional modes are provided for PWM synchronisation. These are listed in the table
above.
The MV3000e synchronises its PWM to the rising edge of the synchronisation pulse. It
applies the offsets described in the two parameters below.

6.20.1.1 Master Mode (P20.00 = 4098)

In this mode the MV3000e will produce an outgoing signal (1 second pulse) for other
MV3000e drives to synchronise to. In addition, the MV3000e will synchronise its own PWM
to this outgoing signal.
The mark/space ratio of this pulse is 50%

6.20.1.2 Slave Mode (P20.00 = 4097)

In this mode the MV3000e will synchronise its PWM to the incoming signal (1 second pulse).
The mark/space ratio requirement of this pulse is:
5% < M <95%

6.20.1.3 ‘In-Synchronisation’ Status Flag

Status flag SF80 indicates that the drive is ‘In Synchronisation’. It can be viewed in
parameter P11.42. The status flag can be used by the drive to perform and action on loss of
synchronisation, e.g. by patching it to the User Alert functions in parameters P10.40
onwards.

6.20.1.4 Parameters Associated with PWM Synchronisation.

Table 6-12 Parameters Associated with PWM Synchronisation

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P35.30 PWM Synchronisation 0.0 0.0 to 100% PWM Period E 2, 4 Percentage of the
Offset PWM period by
which the PWM is
advanced from the
received
synchronisation
pulse

Page 6-92 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Par Function Default Range Attrib Mode Comments

No. No.
P35.31 PWM Synchronisation 0 0 to 400μs E 2, 4 Time by which the
Delay Compensation PWM of the slave
drive is advanced to
compensate for
synchronisation
signal delays and
PWM frequency
transmission delays
in the power cables

P35.30 - PWM Synchronisation Offset

This parameter is used to program the required PWM phase displacement between
MV3000e drives.
For example:
A supervisory master will write to the PWM synchronisation offset from a serial link. In the
event of one of a cluster of MV3000e drives going off-line the supervisory master will re-
calculate the offsets required of the remaining MV3000e drives. The MV3000e should not
step change to the new synchronisation offset. Hundreds of milliseconds to phase lock are
desirable.
Say, the third MV3000e drive in a cluster of 5 might have its PWM synchronisation offset set
to 144 degrees of PWM (360 * (3-1)/5), i.e. P35.30 = 40%. In the event of one of the
MV3000e drives going off-line, this might be changed by the supervisory master to be 50%
(third in a cluster of 4).
The MV3000e will adjust its PWM such that the one-second tick will arrive at:
Tick _ arrival = P35.30 * PWM _ Period + P35.31 µs into the PWM period.

P35.31 - Synchronisation Delay Compensation

This parameter is set up to compensate for the hardware delays in the system. These are
primarily caused by the transmission time of the synchronisation pulse from the
synchronisation master and the return transmission time from the drive to the point of
common coupling for the PWM harmonics being minimised.
These delays are a significant portion of a PWM period for 10’s or 100’s of metres of
MV3000e separation.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-93
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.21 Menu 21 - Fixed Reference Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 5)
Menu 21 gives access to the parameters required to configure and monitor the Fixed (pre-
set) References.
The fixed references mode allows up to sixteen preset reference speeds, set in parameters
P21.00 to P21.15, to be selected by decoding the states of Control Flags 30, 31, 32 and 33
as a 4-bit binary word.
6.21.1 To Configure the Drive for Fixed Reference operation
Proceed as follows:
(a) Set the required reference speeds in parameters P21.00 to P21.15
(b) Fixed Reference can be used as a speed reference (P5.01 to P5.05), as a torque
reference (P15.04) or as an input to many other drive functions. Use the Control Block
Diagrams to choose the Fixed Reference from the relevant list.
(c) Use the Control Flags 30 to 33 to select the required fixed speed reference as shown at
Table 6-13.
(d) Auto cycling of these references can be achieved by connecting the flags to the status
flag generator in Menu 31.
See 6.33 for information on Control Flag programming.
P21.16 - Control Flag 30 - Fixed Reference Select 0
P21.17 - Control Flag 31 - Fixed Reference Select 1
P21.18 - Control Flag 32 - Fixed Reference Select 2
P21.19 - Control Flag 33 - Fixed Reference Select 3
The 4-bit word formed by these control flags is decoded to have values from 0 to 15,
selecting P21.00 to P21.15, as shown at Table 6-13.
P21.00 to P21.15 - Fixed References #0 to #15
These parameters set the reference speeds that are used when the "Fixed Reference Menu"
is selected as the reference source.
Fixed Reference can be used as a speed reference (P5.01 to P5.05), as a torque reference
(P15.04) or as an input to many other drive functions. Use the Control Block Diagrams to
choose the Fixed Reference from the relevant list.
P21.20 - Fixed Reference Output
This read-only parameter monitors the Fixed Reference output.
Allowed values: -100.00% to +100.00% of Top Speed.
Table 6-13 Fixed Speed Reference Selection
Control Flag Active Speed
33 32 31 30 Reference
0 0 0 0 P21.00
0 0 0 1 P21.01
0 0 1 0 P21.02
0 0 1 1 P21.03
0 1 0 0 P21.04
0 1 0 1 P21.05
0 1 1 0 P21.06
0 1 1 1 P21.07
1 0 0 0 P21.08
1 0 0 1 P21.09
1 0 1 0 P21.10
1 0 1 1 P21.11
1 1 0 0 P21.12
1 1 0 1 P21.13
1 1 1 0 P21.14
1 1 1 1 P21.15

Page 6-94 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.22 Menu 22 - Skip Speed Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 5)
Menu 22 gives access to the parameters required to configure the Speed Skipping function.
Speed Skipping Set-up
In some installations it is desirable that certain critical speeds are avoided, to prevent
mechanical vibrations at resonant frequencies. ALSPA MV3000e drives can be programmed
to disallow up to four critical speeds by setting up to four "skip bands". Only when the motor
speed is held at the critical speeds do resonances begin, thus ramping through a skip band
is acceptable.
As the speed reference enters a skip band the output speed is held constant and the Status
Flag 25 is set to 1 (skipping), until the speed reference emerges from the skip band. The
motor then accelerates or decelerates to the reference speed at the relevant rate (set in
parameters P6.00 to P6.03 inclusive). If the speed reference stops within a band, the motor
sped will be frozen at either the bottom or top of the band, depending on which direction the
reference was moving as it entered the band. The action of the speed skipping function is
shown at Figure 6-31.
Speed Speed Reference
Motor
Speed ramps
Speed Skipped
through band
disallowed
when Reference
speeds
leaves the band

Centre Skip band

width

Reference enters
band, Speed
ramps to edge of
band
Speed follows
Reference via If Reference passes straight through
ramps a band, the Speed ramps as usual Time

Figure 6-31 Effect of a Skip Band on Output Speed

To set any of the four skip bands, adjust the relevant centre and width parameters as shown
P22.00 - Skip Band 1 Centre
P22.02 - Skip Band 2 Centre
P22.04 - Skip Band 3 Centre
P22.06 - Skip Band 4 Centre
Set the value to the centre speed of the required skip band.
Allowed values: -100% to +100% of Top Speed.
P22.01 - Skip Band 1 Width
P22.03 - Skip Band 2 Width
P22.05 - Skip Band 3 Width
P22.07 - Skip Band 4 Width
Set the value to the full width of the required skip band.
Allowed values: 0% to 50% of Top Speed.
Notes:
1. It is not permissible for a skip band to straddle zero speed.
2. Status Flag 25 - Skipping - is set to 1 when `skipping'.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-95
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.23 Menu 23 - Dynamic Brake Control

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheets 2 and 9)
Menu 23 gives access to parameters required to configure the optional Dynamic Brake (DB)
function. The values to be entered for these parameters are associated with the DB resistor,
which is external to the drive. See manual T1684 for more data on P23.00 to P23.09 and
P23.20.
There are two methods of providing the dynamic braking function, one is referred to as
'Threshold Control' and the other is referred to as 'Proportional Control'. Use of the
'Proportional Control' method should only be undertaken for certain highly specialised drive
applications - refer to the Application Note in section 10.
Threshold Control is the normal method used for controlling DC link voltage by use of a DB
unit and braking resistor whereby the DC link voltage is maintained below a given threshold
value by switching the DB Unit fully on if the threshold is exceeded. This mode is selected
by setting P23.19 = 0 to enable the DB unit PWM circuits and setting P23.13 = 0 to select
Threshold Control.
6.23.1 Choice of DB Resistor
To avoid the DB resistor overheating, the drive will monitor the power being dissipated by
the resistor. Figure 6-32 shows a typical stop/start cycle; the DB resistor should be chosen
such that:
DB resistor average power (P23.01) ≥ Average regenerative power, and
DB resistor maximum power-time product (P23.02 x P23.03) (Peak regenerative power x t1)

Peak Regenerative Power Motor Regenerative Power

P23.02 P23.05 (P4.12). See Note at P23.05

Average Regenerative Repeat

Power
P23.01

t1 t2

Total Start/Stop cycle time (t3)

Figure 6-32 DB Resistor Power Dissipation

P23.00 - DB Resistor Value

Enter the value of the dynamic brake resistor. The DB Unit manual T1684, supplied with the
DB Unit, gives allowed maximum/minimum resistor values for all DB models.
Defaults for the DB Resistor value, which are drive size dependent, are for DB resistor
values for resistors supplied by Converteam.
Permitted values: 0.1Ω to 1000.0Ω
P23.01 - DB Resistor Average Power
Enter the average value of the power to be dissipated by the dynamic brake resistor, this
being a measure of its continuous capability. The default value is drive size dependent.
Calculate this from the application duty cycle.
Permitted values: 0.1kW to 3000.0kW

Page 6-96 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P23.02 - DB Resistor Maximum Power

Enter the maximum value of the power to be dissipated by the dynamic brake resistor. This
parameter, in conjunction with P23.03, is a measure of its overload capability. The default
value is drive size dependent, and can be obtained from application stopping requirements.
Permitted values: Value in P23.01 to 3000.0kW
P23.03 - Duration of DB Resistor Maximum Power
Enter a value for the maximum permitted duration of dissipating maximum power by the DB
resistor (P23.02). Consult the resistor manufacturer's specification sheets.
Permitted values: 0.1s to 1800s
P23.04 - DB Voltage Threshold
The DC Link voltage will increase due to regenerative braking. Enter the value of DC Link
voltage at which the DB unit will switch in.
In general, the default value for the given drive size is suitable. The drive determines this
value for itself when powering up.
Permitted values: Minimum: Drive dependent
Maximum: 1500 V
P23.05 - Motor Regenerative Power Limit
This is the peak power that the drive will regenerate from the motor.
If this value is greater than the instantaneous peak power which the DB unit can dissipate,
i.e. (P23.04)2/P23.00, then the drive may still trip on over voltage. P23.05 should be used to
limit the regenerative capability of the drive to match that of the DB unit. This parameter is a
repeat of P4.12 in the Start/Stop menu.
Permitted values: -0.1kW to 3000.0kW
(-0.1 means NO LIMIT, the energy is to be absorbed by the DB
unit.)
Note:
The same parameter function (P23.05 or P4.12) is offered in two menus for convenient set up.
P23.06 - Action on DB Overload
This parameter defines the action to be taken by the drive on DB overload, in terms of power
dissipation capability. If the DB resistor is healthy (i.e. no warning or trip), Status Flag SF55
is set.
Permitted values: 0 = No action
1. = Warning (104) at 25% remaining
2. = Warning at 25% remaining, Trip (67) at 0% remaining
3. =Reduce motor regenerative power limit to DB average
power, issue warning at 25% remaining, trip at 0% remaining
Note:
When proportional DB control is selected on the motor DB, Option 3 of P23.06 acts in the same way
as Option 2. Option 3 invokes a trip avoidance strategy on non-bridge DBs if the drive is causing the
regenerative situation i.e. by braking of a motor. If the drive is not controlling the regenerating motor,
then trip avoidance will not function.
P23.07 - Resistor I²T Remaining
This read-only parameter shows the overload capacity of the resistor remaining.
Permitted values: 0% to 100%
P23.08 - Control Flag 110 - DB Enable
P23.08 programs the connection to CF110. When set, CF110 enables the dynamic brake.
Default value = 2.008 (SF8) = Drive Output Enabled

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-97
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P23.09 - Control Flag 111 - DB Resistor Thermostat

For complete protection of DB resistors P23.09 allows the output from the DB resistor
thermostat to be patched (via a digital input) as the connection to CF111. Referring to Figure
6-33, when CF111 is set (ON), P23.07 is forced to 0% and disables the dynamic brake. If
the thermostat is normally closed, the signal must be inverted.

+ 24 V

R DB
Therm ostat

D B Resistor
Therm ostat
D IG IN x 111
P2 3 .0 9 = -1 .00 x

Figure 6-33 DB Thermostat Protection

Note:
For -1.00x, the negative sign inverts the signal.
P23.10 - DB Vdc Reference Source Selector
The DB control method, by default, uses the internally measured Vdc value as the input to
the comparator. The internal Vdc value is updated at PWM frequency and the comparator
also operates at the PWM rate. As the Vdc feedback value is derived from the drive's
switched mode power supply, there are some 'builds' of drive that may not be able to
generate the Vdc feedback signal. In these cases the Vdc feedback signal will have to be
derived externally and fed into one of the analogue inputs.
Allowed values: 1 = Drive Vdc
2 = Analogue Ref 1
3 = Analogue Ref 2
P23.11 - DB Vdc Reference Scale
This value is the percent to voltage scalar. Apart from the internally measured Vdc, all the
other Vdc sources are scaled in percent. This parameter is used to convert the percent
signals into voltage signals. The value is the voltage represented by 100%.
Allowed values: -2000 to +2000V/100%
P23.12 - DB Vdc Reference
The selected Vdc reference value is displayed.
Allowed values: -2000 to +2000V
P23.13 - DB Control Mode
This parameter defines how the DB control is implemented. It allows dynamic braking to be
set to either threshold or proportional operation.
Threshold is the existing control method. In this mode a decision to switch the DB in or out
is made once per PWM period.
Proportional control generates a mark-space ratio at the PWM frequency that is proportional
to the DB modulation demand. The modulation demand is derived from the reference
source specified by the next parameter.
For DB control to be active on the motor bridge, this parameter must be set to 1.
Allowed values are: 0 = Threshold
1 = Proportional

Page 6-98 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P23.14 - DB Ref. Source Selector

The possible references are similar to that of the speed reference selector. This source also
has its own unique pointer parameter (pointer 28) that is configured in the pointer set-up
menu (P42.54 and P42.55).
P23.15 - Max. Modulation
This value would normally be the default of 100%. This is the maximum modulation demand
applied to the resistors in proportional control mode, even if the Vdc feedback threshold
value is exceeded. This allows lower rated DB resistors to be used by limiting the power
dissipated in them to a value within their specification.
P23.16 - DB Reference
This read-only parameter shows the requested modulation level of the DB. It only has any
meaning in proportional control.
P23.17 - DB Ramp Time
A variable ramp rate to achieve 100% modulation change between 0 and 1s is achieved by
specifying the ramp rate as a time (in milliseconds) to change by 100%. A time of zero to
5ms (the ramp scan rate) will result in the ramp being bypassed, i.e. the ramp input will pass
through to the ramp output on the next scan cycle, giving a step change. A time of 1000ms
will result in a maximum of 0.5% change per 5ms scan, i.e. it will take 1 second to
implement a 100% step change.
P23.18 - DB Demand
This read-only parameter shows the modulation level of the DB after ramping and limiting. It
only has any meaning in proportional control. It resets to zero whenever the DB output is
disabled and thus allows the ramp time to operate when the DB output is subsequently
enabled.
P23.19 - DB Output Select
This selector routes the DB proportional control output to either the existing DB port or to the
output bridge. In order to action the output bridge selection, the motor control method
(P99.01) must be set to DB Mode and P23.13 must be 1. If the bridge is the selected
output, warning 138 will be active until P99.01 is set to zero. The purpose of the warning is
to inform that the DB is inactive.
When using the output bridge, the resulting ripple currents seen on the DC link will be one
third the amplitude of that generated by a single equivalent DB resistor. Secondly, the
frequency of the ripple current will be 3 times the PWM frequency. This has been done to
reduce the stress on the DC link capacitors.
P23.20 - Non-MV DB Unit Fitted
This parameter allows the user to use external DB (Dynamic Brake) units that are not part of
the integrated MV3000 range.
A Dynamic Brake may be connected to the drive that is a non-MV3000e DB Unit. When this
happens parameter P23.20 is user set to 1. This allows the drive to perform motor
regeneration as if a MV3000e DB Unit is fitted.
The amount of regenerated energy allowed back from the motor and, hence, to the DB Unit
is still controlled by parameter P4.12 - 'Regenerative Power Limit' (and parameter P23.05 -
'Motor Regenerative Power Limit'). This parameter is user set to equal the value of the peak
power that the DB resistor can absorb (read the Parameter Description for P23.05 for hints
on its use).
The ALSPA MV3000e Drive cannot monitor the state of non-MV3000e DB resistors; hence if
a non-MV3000e DB unit is fitted all parameters in Menu 23, other than P23.05, are not
applicable. For those applications where an ALSPA MV3000e DB Unit and a separate unit
are both connected then the whole of Menu 23 is again valid.
Allowed values: 0 = Not fitted i.e. non-MV3000e DB Unit not fitted
1 = Fitted i.e. non-MV3000e DB Unit fitted

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-99
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P23.21 - DB Current
This read-only parameter shows the instantaneous rms current through each DB resistor. It
is calculated, not measured, and is a function of the resistance, voltage feedback and duty
cycle (modulation) of the DB.
The value displayed is per resistor.
Allowed values: 0.0A to 2000.0A
P23.22 - DB Power
This read-only parameter shows the instantaneous power dissipated in each DB resistor. It
is calculated, not measured, and is a function of the resistance, voltage feedback and duty-
cycle (modulation) of the DB.
The value displayed is per resistor.
Allowed values: 0.0kW to 3000.0kW
P23.23 - Internal DB Unit Fitted
When a MicroCubicle™ drive is first powered from Auxiliary 28V then it doesn't recognise
the presence of an internal DB unit. Consequently DB operation does not take place after
the mains is powered unless the Auxiliary 28V is switched off first.
P23.23 gets around the above problem by telling the MicroCubicle™ drive that the DB unit is
fitted.
Applies to DB unit only.
The internal DB unit is "seen" by the drive if either:
(a) the drive is initially powered up by the mains
(b) P23.23 is set at power up.
i.e. if powered by Auxiliary 28V the P23.23 can be used to tell the MicroCubicle™ drive unit
that a DB unit is fitted.

Page 6-100 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.24 Menu 24 - Speed Trim Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 6)
Menu 24 gives access to the parameters required to configure the Speed Trim function. This
is an additional speed demand added after the ramp function. Setting Control Flag 70
enables Speed Trim.
P24.00 - Speed Trim Source
Allowed values:
1 = Keypad Speed Ref. 12 = Trim Reference
2 = Analogue REF1 13 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
3 = Analogue REF2 14 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
4 = RS485 REF1 15 = High Speed Digital Input
5 = RS485 REF2 16 = Position Control
6 = RS232 REF1 17 = Summing Node A
7 = RS232 REF2 18 = Summing Node B
8 = PID Controller 19 = Summing Node C
9 = Ref. Sequencer 20 = Summing Node D
10 = Fixed Ref. Menu 21 = Pointer 7
11 = Motorised Pot.
P24.01 - Speed Trim Scale 1
P24.02 - Speed Trim Scale 2
The Speed Trim Scale 1 is selected by setting Control Flag 75 to 0 (default).
Speed Trim Scale 2 is selected by setting Control Flag 75 to 1.
Allowed values: -100.0% to +100.0% of selected source input
P24.03 - Control Flag 70 - Enable Speed Trim
The Speed Trim function is enabled when CF70 is set.
P24.04 - Control Flag 75 - Speed Trim Scale Select
CF75 selects Speed Trim Scale 1 or 2.
When cleared (default state), selects Speed Trim Scale 1.
When set, selects Speed Trim Scale 2.
P24.05 - Speed Trim Slew Rate
This parameter defines the maximum rate of change of the speed trim signal.
Allowed values are: 0 = no limit
1%/s to 5000%/s

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-101
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.25 Menu 25 - Inertia Compensation Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 7)
Menu 25 gives access to the parameters required to configure the Inertia Compensation
function. This allows an additional torque to be added to the torque demand; the additional
torque is proportional to the rate of change of speed or speed demand.
P25.00 - Inertia Compensation Acceleration Time
This defines the time for the load inertia to accelerate to Top Speed with 100 % applied
torque. This is used by the drive to calculate the per-unit inertia of the load.
Note:
This is the time taken to accelerate the load, assuming that all the torque is available to accelerate the
load.
If the actual referred inertia of the load is known, the acceleration time can be calculated
from:
Accelerati onTime = 0.1047 × Top Speed (r / min ) × Re f erred inertia [kgm 2]
No mi n a l T orque [Nm]

Allowed values: 0.00s to 300.00s

P25.01 - Inertia Compensation Time Constant
This parameter defines the time constant of the low-pass filter applied to the speed signal
before its rate of change is calculated. This is in units of scans (1 scan = 5ms).
Allowed values: 0 scans to 500 scans
P25.02 - Inertia Compensation Speed Source
This parameter selects between two sources for the input to the inertia compensation circuit.
Allowed values: 1 = Inertia compensation calculated from speed demand
2 = Inertia compensation calculated from speed feedback
P25.03 - Control Flag 74 - Enable Inertia Compensation
The Inertia Compensation function is enabled when CF74 is set.
P25.04 - Inertia Compensation Output Time Constant
For very high inertia loads, being accelerated slowly, it is necessary to apply a filter to the
calculated inertia compensation. This parameter defines the time constant of the low pass
filter applied to the calculated inertia compensation.
Allowed values: 0 scans to 500 scans (1 scan = 5ms)

Page 6-102 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.26 Menu 26 - History Log Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 9)
Menu 26 gives access to the parameters required to configure the History Log.
6.26.1 History Logs
The History Log records the instantaneous value or state of 10 selected items of information
continuously in 10 separate channels. Each channel can hold 100 samples in chronological
order. The sequence of events can be played back later to help diagnose faults, using either
the Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) display or via the serial links.
6.26.2 Operation of the History Log
The History Log can be started via a control flag or the `History Command' parameter
(P26.27). The History Log can be stopped via a control flag, the History Command
parameter or via its trigger conditions.
Note:
The term "Trigger" means stopping the History Record.
The History Log is written to non-volatile memory so that it is not lost when power to the
drive is shut off. On power-up, the History Log contains the data from when the drive last
powered down. The data in the History Log remains in memory and can be played back until
the History Log is re-started.
The History Log is configured to suit an application or to help diagnose a particular problem
by specifying the following:
• sample period;
• parameters to be recorded;
• logging mode;
• trigger parameter and trigger conditions;
• number of samples to be taken after the History Log triggers.
Note:
Either the History Command Parameter or the start/stop History Flags can be used at any time to
control the History. The record can be started with P26.27 and stopped with the Stop Control Flag.
6.26.3 Configuring the History Log
To configure the History Log, set parameters as follows.
P26.00 - History Log Sample Period
Set the time interval (in scans) between each sample of the History Log.
Allowed values: 1 scan to 20000 scans (1 scan = 5ms)
P26.01 - Channel 1 Data
P26.03 - Channel 2 Data
P26.05 - Channel 3 Data
P26.07 - Channel 4 Data
P26.09 - Channel 5 Data
P26.11 - Channel 6 Data
P26.13 - Channel 7 Data
P26.15 - Channel 8 Data
P26.17 - Channel 9 Data
P26.19 - Channel 10 Data
For each channel the allowed values are:
1.00 to 99.99 (Any Parameter Number)

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-103
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

The following parameters specify the method of sampling the data to be recorded.
P26.02 - Channel 1 Mode
P26.04 - Channel 2 Mode
P26.06 - Channel 3 Mode
P26.08 - Channel 4 Mode
P26.10 - Channel 5 Mode
P26.12 - Channel 6 Mode
P26.14 - Channel 7 Mode
P26.16 - Channel 8 Mode
P26.18 - Channel 9 Mode
P26.20 - Channel 10 Mode
Allowed Values are: 1 = Take Average over sample period
2 = Take Maximum over sample period
3 = Take Minimum over sample period
Note:
A sample period is P26.00 scans of 5 ms

6.26.4 Starting the History Log

At default the History Log starts when the output is enabled, because CF78 (P26.25) is
connected to SF8 (Output Bridge Enabled). If this flag is SET, then the history recording will
start immediately. Any previous information in the History Log will be overwritten as
recording commences. The source for this control flag can be changed so that the History
Log can be started independently from the drive.
Setting the History Command parameter P26.27 can also start the History Log:
If P26.27 = 1 The history is armed and the trigger conditions must be satisfied before
recording will begin i.e. the trigger parameter must be within the upper
and lower limits.

ns

If P26.27 = 2 This operates on a one-shot system such that as soon as recording

stops, the History Command parameter is forced back to zero. Again, as
recording starts any previous information in the History Log will be
overwritten.
P26.25 - Control Flag 78 - Run History
P26.25 selects the source for Control Flag 78. The History Log runs when CF78 is
momentarily pulsed from 0 to 1 to 0 (any previous data will be overwritten). The default
source is Status Flag 8 `Output Bridge Enabled'.
See 6.33 for information on Control Flag programming.
The History Log can be stopped using Control Flag 79, by its trigger conditions, or by the
History Command parameter as described below.
P26.26 - Control Flag 79 - Stop History
Setting Control Flag 79, whose source is selected by P26.26, can stop the History Log. If
this flag is set, then the History recording will stop after the required number of `samples
after trigger’ (set in P24.24) has been taken. The default source for this flag is 2.005 (Status
Flag 5 - `drive tripped') so that the History Log will stop when the drive trips. The source for

Page 6-104 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

the control flag can be changed so that the History Log can be stopped independently from
the drive.
See 6.33 for information on Control Flag programming.
6.26.5 Trigger Settings and Limits for Stop Control of the History Log
The History Log will be stopped when the value in its `Trigger Channel' parameter is less
than its lower trigger limit (in P26.22) or greater than its upper trigger limit (in P26.23). Again,
the History Log will stop after the required number of `samples after trigger’ (set in P26.24)
has been taken. The trigger channel parameter is selected by placing the appropriate
parameter number in P26.21. If P26.21 is set to zero (which is the default case) then the
trigger limit parameters are ignored and the History Record can only be stopped by Control
Flag 79 or by the History Command (P26.27).
Note:
If the history record is armed, when the trigger parameter is NOT between the upper and lower limits,
then the history record will trigger (stop recording) immediately.
P26.21 - Trigger Parameter
Defines which parameter will be used as the "Trigger Channel" for the History Log.
Values: 0 = Not Used.
Trigger Limits ignored. History Log can only be triggered via CF78 or History
Command
0.01 - 99.99 (any Parameter Number) = Channel to be used as the trigger
channel.
For example, if this parameter is set to be the speed feedback P9.01 (i.e.
P26.21 = 9.01) then the History Log will stop when the speed feedback goes
outside the upper and lower trigger limits (see P26.22 and P26.23).
P26.22 - Lower Trigger Level
Defines the lower level for the trigger channel.
Allowed values: -327.67 to +327.67
If the value in the trigger channel goes below this value, the History Log will stop after the
required number of "samples after trigger".
P26.23 - Upper Trigger Level
Defines the upper level for the trigger channel.
Allowed values: -327.67 to +327.67
If the value in the trigger channel goes above this value, the History Log will stop after the
required number of "samples after trigger".
P26.24 - Samples After Trigger
Defines how many samples of data will be taken after triggering of the History Log.
Values: 0 to 99 (samples)
P26.27 - History Command
Setting the History Command parameter P26.27 to 2 can stop the History Log. This
operates on a one-shot system such that as soon as the History Log stops, the History
Command parameter is forced back to zero. Again, Recording stops after the required
number of “samples after trigger” (see later) has been taken.
Value: 0 = No Command or command executed.
1 = Arm History Log.
2 = Trigger History Log (after required number of "samples after trigger").
6.26.6 History Record Time Stamping
Parameters P26.28 to P26.31, and P27.11, P27.12 (playback) allow history records to be
time stamped.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-105
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P26.28 - Single Element Ch1 Data

P26.29 - Single Element Ch2 Data
These two parameters select which of the drive parameters are recorded in the Single
Element History Channels. Unlike the other channels that record 100 samples per channel,
these 2 elements record a single sample or instantaneous sample, like a rolling 'snapshot' at
the History Record Sample Point. These channels are continuously recorded whilst the
History Record is running, and are not recorded when the History Record is halted, taking a
'snapshot' of whatever they are connected to. Results may be read in P27.11/P27.12.
Values: 1.00 to 99.99 (Any Parameter Number)
P26.28 and P26.29 can therefore be configured to record the broadcast Global System Time
received by P26.30 and P26.31 (next).
P26.30 - Global Time Variable 1
P26.31 - Global Time Variable 2
These two parameters are to via a serial link, or similar source, broadcasting a global
system time. The drive does not write to these parameters at all.
Expected values: -30,000 to +30,000

Page 6-106 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.27 Menu 27 - History Log Playback Settings

Menu 27 gives access to the parameters required to view the History Log. See Section 9
(Diagnostics) for details.

6.28 Menu 28 - Auto-reset Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 9)
Menu 28 gives access to parameters required to configure the trip auto-reset feature.

WARNING
If the drive is configured to auto-restart, the motor can start rotating without an
operator command. Take precautions to prevent injury to personnel.
To minimise the nuisance caused by the drive tripping due to transient faults, ALSPA
MV3000e can be configured to automatically reset most trip conditions without operator
intervention.
The trip conditions are identified by fault codes and these are listed at Table 9-3. The fault
code attribute column in this table shows which trips can be reset automatically.
Parameters P28.06 to P28.20 are used to configure one or more of the trip conditions
(identified by its fault code) to reset automatically.
6.28.1 Configuring Trips to Auto-reset
To configure trips to reset automatically:
1. Set Parameters P28.06 to P28.20 to enable Auto-reset as required. Where indicated,
refer to Table 9-2 for details of which parameters enable the auto-reset of specific
trips, as identified by their fault codes.
Allowed values for P28.06 to P28.20 inclusive are:
0 = Auto-reset disabled (default)
1 = Auto-reset enabled
2. Set P28.00 to the required number of Auto-reset attempts.
3. Set the Auto-reset Delay (P28.01).
4. Set the Auto-reset Healthy Time (P28.03).
Notes:
1. If more than 1 trip occurs then all of these trips must be reset before the drive becomes healthy.
2. Sheet 7 of the Control Block Diagram shows this function pictorially.
P28.06 - Instantaneous Overcurrent Auto-reset Enable
Resets fault codes specified at Table 9-2.
P28.07 - Timed Overcurrent Auto-reset Enable
Resets fault code 5.
P28.08 – Under Voltage Auto-reset Enable
Resets fault code 4 and Trip Fault Code 29 (for Firmware Version 6 and onwards).
P28.09 – Over Voltage Auto-reset Enable
Resets fault codes specified at Table 9-3.
P28.10 - Motor Thermal Trips Auto-reset Enable
Resets fault codes 21, 22 and 66.
P28.11 - Interlock Auto-reset Enable
Resets fault code 1.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-107
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P28.12 - Control and Reference Loss Auto-reset Enable

Resets fault code 2.
P28.13 - Drive Temperature Trips Auto-reset Enable
Resets fault codes specified at Table 9-3.
P28.14 - Serial Link Loss Auto-reset Enable
Resets fault codes 23 and 24.
P28.15 - User Trip Auto-reset Enable
Resets fault codes 62 and 73.
P28.16 – Over Speed Trip Auto-reset Enable
Resets fault code 57.
P28.17 - Load Fault Auto-reset Enable
Resets fault codes 64 and 65.
P28.18 - DB Resistor Fault Auto-reset Enable
Resets fault code 67.
P28.19 - SFE Mains Auto-reset Enable
Resets all trips 93-98, for SFE.
P28.20 - Interlock Terminal Auto-Reset Enable
When the MV3000e is tripped on interlock, if this parameter is set, then auto-reset
commences immediately.
If P28.20 = 1 and provided all other active trips can be auto-reset (as defined by P28.06 to
P28.19) then when the drive trips on Interlock trip, the number of auto-resets remaining
(P28.04) will be reset to the value of P28.00. Auto resets will not be attempted whilst the
Interlock terminal (TB3/9) is unhealthy. When TB3/9 becomes healthy then auto-resets will
commence, decrementing P28.04 as they are attempted.
P28.00 - Number of Auto-reset Attempts
Controls the number of auto-reset attempts that will be made before the drive will require
manually resetting.
Allowed values are: 0 to 20 attempts
P28.01 - Auto-reset Delay
P28.01 specifies the number of seconds between the drive tripping and an auto-reset
attempt being made. This is also the time between subsequent auto-reset attempts.
Allowed values are: 1 second to 30 seconds.
P28.02 - Supply Loss Timeout
If the input supply voltage remains below the minimum allowed for longer than the supply
loss timeout period, the auto restart function is disabled. This may be limited by the power
supply to the control electronics in the event of an extended input power supply failure.
Allowed values are: 0.0 seconds to 3200.0 seconds
P28.03 - Auto-reset Healthy Time
Specifies the period of time, after an automatic reset, that the drive must remain healthy
before the number of reset attempts remaining returns to the value set in parameter P28.00.
Allowed values are: 10 seconds to 3600 seconds
P28.04 - Auto-resets Remaining
This read-only parameter indicates the number of auto-reset attempts remaining.
Values are: 0 to Value set in P28.00

Page 6-108 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P28.05 - Force Synchro Start

Specifies the start mode when automatically restarting.
Allowed values are: 0 = Disable - the start mode is specified by P4.00.
1 = Enable - a Synchro Start is requested after an auto restart,
even if not required as the normal start mode.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-109
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.29 Menu 29 - Speed and Torque Monitor Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 12)
Menu 29 gives access to the parameters required to configure the Speed and Torque
Monitoring facilities.
6.29.1 Speed Monitor
The Speed Monitor compares the speed to upper and lower limits set in parameters P29.03
and P29.04 levels. Depending on the result, the speed monitor sets the following status
flags:
Status Flag 10 – Over Speed
Status Flag 11 - Zero Speed
Status Flag 12 - At Speed
Status Flag 13 - Inside Speed Window
Status Flag 14 - Outside Speed Window
Status Flag 15 - Above Speed Window
Status Flag 16 - Below Speed Window
P29.00 - Forward Over Speed Level
P29.01 - Reverse Over Speed Level
These are the speeds at which the drive suicides its torque demand, and may be configured
to trip. This may be used as an over speed protection when used in torque control operation.
Allowed Values: 10.0% to 300.0% (of Top Speed)
P29.02 – Over Speed Action
Determines the action taken in the event of the over speed levels set in parameters P29.00
and P29.01 being exceeded.
Allowed values: 1 = Suicide Torque
2 = Suicide Torque + Warning
3 = Trip
Note:
Suicide torque means that the drive output will remain running but the drive will NOT be able to
develop torque. The load will react differently depending on its characteristic.
P29.03 - Speed Monitor Level 1
P29.04 - Speed Monitor Level 2
These two parameters define the upper and lower limits of the speed monitoring window.
Allowed values: -300.0% to +300.0% (of top speed)
P29.05 - Speed Monitor Hysteresis
A hysteresis value can be set here to stabilise the output to the status flags.
Allowed values: 0.0% to 50.0% (of top speed)
6.29.2 Torque Monitor
The torque monitor compares the torque to upper and lower limits set in parameters P29.06
and P29.07 levels. Depending on the result, the torque monitor sets the following status
flags:
Status Flag 28 - In Torque Limit
Status Flag 29 - Inside Torque Window
Status Flag 30 - Outside Torque Window
Status Flag 31 - Above Torque Window
Status Flag 32 - Below Torque Window

Page 6-110 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P29.06 - Torque Monitor Level 1

P29.07 - Torque Monitor Level 2
These two parameters define the upper and lower limits of the torque-monitoring window.
Allowed values: -300.0% to +300.0% (of nominal torque)
P29.08 - Torque Monitor Hysteresis
A hysteresis value can be set here to stabilise the output to the status flags.
Allowed values: 0.0% to 100.0% (of nominal torque)
P29.09 - Zero Speed Tolerance
Sets the tolerance for zero speed monitoring.
Allowed values: 0.00% to 10.00% (of Top Speed)

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-111
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.30 Menu 30 - Logic Block Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 13)
Menu 30 gives access to the parameters required to configure the eight General Purpose
Logic Blocks A to H.
Four identical logic blocks, A to D, each contain the following functions:
Comparator: This allows any variable to be compared to
a fixed threshold.
Delay: Allows the output of the comparator block to have its
rising edge delayed.
Selectable Boolean Function: Allows the delay output to be combined with two other
digital signals (Control Flags).
Latch: Allows the output of the logic block to be latched.
Each of the logic block functions outputs to a Status Flag, and the inputs come from the
previous function and Control Flags.
Each of the four logic blocks are identified by the letters A to D and the parameters, Control
Flags and Status Flags for each logic block are described in the following sections:
A second group of four identical logic blocks, E to H, are described at 6.30.5.
Note:
Each of the logic blocks is scanned once every 10 ms. If the blocks are interconnected (by patching
the output Status Flags of one logic block to the input Control Flags of another), this will take an
additional scan to take effect.
6.30.1 Logic Block A
P30.00 - Comparator A Input
This parameter can point the comparator input at any drive parameter.
Allowed values: 1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter number)
The output from Comparator A can be selected as an input to P30.04 and is echoed in
Status Flag 17.
P30.01 - Comparator A Threshold
A fixed value whose range changes to match that of the parameter that is chosen as the
comparator input.
P30.02 - Comparator A Hysteresis
A fixed value whose range changes depending on the parameter chosen as the comparator
input. The Hysteresis is a % value, producing a band of Hysteresis on either side of the
threshold e.g. for a 1% hysteresis you would get Comparator Output SF17 set when
Comparator Input = Threshold Setting ± 0.5%.

+0.5 %

Threshold

- 0.5 %

Figure 6-34 Comparator Threshold

Page 6-112 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P30.03 - Comparator A Mode

The comparator produces a high output under the following conditions, when selected by
P30.03
Allowed values:
1 = Input = Threshold
2 = Input ≠ Threshold
3 = Input > Threshold (signed)
4 = Input ≤ Threshold (signed)
5 = Input < Threshold (signed)
6 = Input ≥ Threshold (signed)
7 to 10 = As 3 to 6 but the absolute value is used.
P30.04 - Delay A Input Source
Selects the input to the Delay A module
Allowed values: 1 = Comparator A
2 = Control Flag 36 (P30.09)
P30.05 - Delay A Time
Allowed values: 0.0secs to 600.0secs
The output from Delay A is used as an input to the configurable Logic Block A (P30.06) and
is echoed in Status Flag 18.
P30.06 - Logic Block A Functions
The Boolean function of Logic Block A is selectable by the value entered into P30.06.
Permitted values:
1 = Three Input AND
2 = Three Input NAND
3 = Three Input OR
4 = Three Input NOR
5 = Three Input XOR
6 = Three Input XNOR
7 to 12 = Two Input versions of 1 to 6
3-input Boolean functions use the outputs from Delay A (P30.05), and Control Flags 37
(P30.09) and 38 (P30.10) as inputs.
2-input Boolean functions use Control Flags 37 and 38 as inputs. The output can be
selected as a SET input to Latch A, this is echoed in Status Flag 19.
P30.07 - Latch A Input Selection
Determines the source of the SET input to Latch A.
Allowed values: 1 = From Logic Block A
2 = Control Flag 39 (P30.11)
Control Flag 40 (P30.12) resets the latch and the output is written to Status Flag 20.
P30.08 - Control Flag 36 - Delay A Input
When selected by P30.04, applies a rising edge to the Delay A module input.
P30.09 - Control Flag 37 - Logic Block A Input 1
P30.10 - Control Flag 38 - Logic Block A Input 2
These flags provide inputs to Logic Block A.
P30.11 - Control Flag 39 - Latch A Set
When selected by P30.07, applies a rising edge SET input to Latch A.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-113
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P30.12 - Control Flag 40 - Latch A Reset

Applies a rising edge RESET input to Latch A.
6.30.2 Logic Block B
P30.13 to P30.20 - Logic Block B Functions
The description of these parameters is as for parameters P30.00 to P30.07 in Logic Block A.
Logic Block B is identical to Logic Block A except that Control Flags 41 to 45 are inputs and
Status Flags 21 to 24 are outputs.
P30.21 to P30.25 - Control Flags 41 to 45
These Control Flags operate on Logic Block B exactly as CF36 to CF40 operate on Logic
Block A:
Control Flag 41 - Delay B Input
Control Flag 42 - Logic Block B Input 1
Control Flag 43 - Logic Block B Input 2
Control Flag 44 - Latch B Set
Control Flag 45 - Latch B Reset
6.30.3 Logic Block C
P30.26 to P30.33 - Logic Block C Functions
The description of these parameters is as for parameters P30.00 to P30.07 in Logic Block A.
Logic Block C is identical to Logic Block A except that Control Flags 46 to 50 are inputs and
Status Flags 35 to 38 are outputs.
P30.34 to P30.38 - Control Flags 46 to 50
These Control Flags operate on Logic Block C exactly as CF36 to CF40 operate on Logic
Block A:
Control Flag 46 - Delay C Input
Control Flag 47 - Logic Block C Input 1
Control Flag 48 - Logic Block C Input 2
Control Flag 49 - Latch C Set
Control Flag 50 - Latch C Reset
6.30.4 Logic Block D
P30.39 to P30.46 - Logic Block D Functions
The description of these parameters is as for parameters P30.00 to P30.07 in Logic Block A.
Logic Block D is identical to Logic Block A except that Control Flags 51 to 55 are inputs and
Status Flags 39 to 42 are outputs.
P30.47 to P30.51 - Control Flags 51 to 55
These Control Flags operate on Logic Block D exactly as CF36 to CF40 operate on Logic
Block A:
Control Flag 51 - Delay D Input
Control Flag 52 - Logic Block D Input 1
Control Flag 53 - Logic Block D Input 2
Control Flag 54 - Latch D Set
Control Flag 55 - Latch D Reset
6.30.5 Logic Blocks E, F, G and H
There are four additional logic blocks, each of which comprises a selectable 3-input Boolean
function. The inputs to these Boolean functions are three Control Flags and the outputs are
to Status Flags. There are four parameters for each logic block.

Page 6-114 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Table 6-14 Logic Blocks E, F, G and H

Logic Function Control Flag Parameter Status Flag

Block
CF56 P30.53
E P30.52 CF57 P30.54 SF43
CF58 P30.55
CF59 P30.57
F P30.56 CF60 P30.58 SF44
CF61 P30.59
CF62 P30.61
G P30.60 CF63 P30.62 SF45
CF64 P30.63
CF65 P30.65
H P30.64 CF66 P30.66 SF46
CF67 P30.67

6.30.6 Logic Block E

P30.52 - Logic Block E Functions
The Boolean function of Logic Block E is selectable by means of the value entered into
parameter P30.52.
Permitted values:
1 = Three Input AND
2 = Three Input NAND
3 = Three Input OR
4 = Three Input NOR
5 = Three Input XOR
6 = Three Input XNOR
7 to 12 = Two-Input versions of 1 to 6
3-input Boolean functions use Control Flags 56, 57 and 58 as inputs.
2-input Boolean functions use Control Flags 56 and 57 as inputs. Status Flag 43 is the
output.
P30.53 - Control Flag 56 - Logic Block E Input 1
P30.54 - Control Flag 57 - Logic Block E Input 2
P30.55 - Control Flag 58 - Logic Block E Input 3
These flags provide inputs to Logic Block E.
6.30.7 Logic Block F
P30.56 - Logic Block F Functions
The description of this parameter is as for parameter P30.52 in Logic Block E.
Logic Block F is identical to Logic Block E except that Control Flags 59, 60 and 61 are used
as inputs and Status Flag 44 is the output.
P30.57 to P30.59 - Control Flags 59 to 61
These Control Flags operate on Logic Block F exactly as CF56 to CF58 operate on Logic
Block E:
Control Flag 59 - Logic Block F Input 1
Control Flag 60 - Logic Block F Input 2
Control Flag 61 - Logic Block F Input 3

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-115
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.30.8 Logic Block G

P30.60 - Logic Block G Functions
The description of this parameter is as for parameter P30.52 in Logic Block E.
Logic Block G is identical to Logic Block E except that Control Flags 62, 63 and 64 are used
as inputs and Status Flag 45 is the output.
P30.61 to P30.63 - Control Flags 62 to 64
These Control Flags operate on Logic Block G exactly as CF56 to CF58 operate on Logic
Block E:
Control Flag 62 - Logic Block G Input 1
Control Flag 63 - Logic Block G Input 2
Control Flag 64 - Logic Block G Input 3
6.30.9 Logic Block H
P30.64 - Logic Block H Functions
The description of this parameter is as for parameter P30.52 in Logic Block E.
Logic Block H is identical to Logic Block E except that Control Flags 65, 66 and 67 are used
as inputs and Status Flag 46 is the output.
P30.65 to P30.67 - Control Flags 65 to 67
These Control Flags operate on Logic Block H exactly as CF56 to CF58 operate on Logic
Block E:
Control Flag 65 - Logic Block H Input 1
Control Flag 66 - Logic Block H Input 2
Control Flag 67 - Logic Block H Input 3

Page 6-116 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.31 Menu 31 - Status Flag Generator Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 12)
Menu 31 gives access to the parameters required to configure the Status Flag Generator.
This generates 4 status flags (SF70 to SF73) in the form of a binary word. It may be
configured to count up or down, automatically or manually, continuous cycle or single
sequence. These status flags can be patched to the Fixed Position Menu, to achieve a
position sequencer function, if required, or can be used elsewhere around the entire drive
software.
The reset position for the sequencer is programmable, as are the number of points, 1 to 16.
The times at each point are in the range 0.0 to 3200.0 seconds, in steps of 0.1 second.
Control inputs comprise Control Flags 97 to 100.
P31.00 - Status Flag Generator Mode
Permitted values: 0 = Stopped.
The pattern issued is given by P31.01.
1 = Manual Trigger Only.
The states are incremented / decremented by the control flags
described above. The timing parameters are not applicable.
2 = Auto Cycle Up.
The generator remains at each state for a duration given by the
associated parameters (P31.03 to P31.18). The state is then
incremented to the next state higher in the sequence.
3 = Auto Cycle Down.
The generator remains at each state for a duration given by the
associated parameters (P31.03 to P31.18). The state is then
decremented to the next state lower in the sequence.
4 = Auto Cycle Single Sequence Up.
The generator remains at each state for a duration given by the
associated parameters (P31.03 to P31.18). The state is then
incremented to the next state higher in the sequence. The sequencer
will stop when it reaches the last state in the sequence.
5 = Auto Cycle Single Sequence Down.
The generator remains at each state for a duration given by the
associated parameters (P31.03 to P31.18). The state is then
decremented to the next state lower in the sequence. The sequencer
will stop when it reaches the last state in the sequence.
P31.01 - Sequence Start Point
This is the start and reset value of the sequencer.
Allowed values are: 0 to 15
P31.02 - Sequence Length
This defines the number of states the sequencer will pass through before returning to the
start state.
The sequence pattern runs from Sequence Start State to (Sequence Start State + Sequence
Length - 1). i.e. counting upwards from Sequence Start State, the number of states are
defined as the Sequence Length. This number is wrapped back into the range 0 to 15.
Example 1 If start state = 0, Mode = UP, and Sequence Length = 4, then the states
are 0, 1, 2, 3, 0, 1, 2, 3, 0, 1, etc.
Example 2 If start state = 2, Mode = DOWN, and Sequence Length = 6, then the
states are 2, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 7, 6, 5, etc.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-117
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P31.03 to P31.18 - Sequence Times

The sequencer will remain at each state for the duration given by the associated parameter.
P31.03 = Time at state 0
P31.04 = Time at state 1
etc. to
P31.18 = Time at State 15
Allowed range: 0.0 seconds to 3200.0 seconds
Status Flag Generator Outputs
Four outputs comprising:
Status Flag Generator Output 0 (Status Flag 70)
Status Flag Generator Output 1 (Status Flag 71)
Status Flag Generator Output 2 (Status Flag 72)
Status Flag Generator Output 3 (Status Flag 73)
These form a binary code (Output 0 is the least significant bit) that describes the state.
P31.19 - Control Flag 97 - Status Flag Generator Freeze
When set, CF97 halts the generator at the present state. The internal timer is halted.
P31.20 - Control Flag 98 - Status Flag Generator Up
When set, CF98 increments the sequencer to the next state.
P31.21 - Control Flag 99 - Status Flag Generator Down
When set, CF99 decrements the sequencer to the previous state.
P31.22 - Control Flag 100 - Status Flag Generator Reset
When set, CF100 resets the status flag generator to the start state, given by P31.01.

Page 6-118 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.32 Menu 32 - Serial Link Settings

See Section 8 for details.

6.33 Control Flags and Status Flags

The ALSPA MV3000e system employs two kinds of flags. These flags either allow the user
to CONTROL a function (Control Flag), e.g. Enable Jogging, or the drive can report the
STATUS of a function (Status Flag), e.g. Over Speed. In this manual these flags are shown
as below.

xx xx

Status Flag Control Flag

Figure 6-35 Status and Control Flag Representations

The flags can be combined together to form elegant application solutions or simply passed
to digital outputs or serial links to gain status information about the drive's condition. The
most used flags are connected up already by the factory default conditions. The Default
conditions are clearly marked on the Control Block Diagram, e.g. <0> = cleared, <1.002> =
DIGIN 2 etc. See "Rules for use" below for explanation.
The control flags have parameters that allow the user to "patch" them to other parts of the
drive system. The control flag parameters appear in two logical places:
1. In the menus local to the function associated with the flag, e.g. the START flag is
available in Menu 4 - Starting and Stopping, and is parameter P4.04. A complete
listing of control flags/parameter numbers is given at 5.6.
2. In the control flag Menus 33 and 34, where all the flags are grouped together for easy
location, e.g. the Start flag (CF1) is also P33.01, see 6.34.
The Status Flags have no parameters associated with them, as they are simply possible
connection sources for the control flags etc.
Rules for use
1. Refer to the Control Block Diagram to determine the control flag required. Each CF
symbol actually has the "Local" menu parameter number printed next to it.
2. Refer to Table 6-15 and edit a value into the control flag parameter, this value will
determine what the flag is connected to.
Note that the value has the form N.xxx where N is the type of source and xxx is the
source identifier.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-119
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

Table 6-15 Control Flag Source Selection

Source Parameter Value Selected Source

0.000 Fixed 0 (cleared)
0.001 or 1.000 Fixed 1(set)
1.001... 1.006 Digital Input 1 ... Digital 6
1.014 INTERLOCK
1.100 ... 1.163 Extended digital input 0 to 63 (CAN1)
1.200... 1.263 Extended digital inputs 0 to 63 (CAN2)
2.000... 2.111 Status Flag 0 ... Status Flag 111
3.000... 3.015 RS485 Control Word 0, bit 0...
RS485 Control Word 0, bit 15
3.100... 3.115 RS485 Control Word 1, bit 0...
RS485 Control Word 1, bit 15
4.000... 4.015 RS232 Control Word 0, bit 0...
RS232 Control Word 0, bit 15
4.100... 4.115 RS232 Control Word 1, bit 0...
RS232 Control Word 1, bit 15
5.000... 5.015 FBC Word 1, bit 0...
FBC Word 1, bit 15
5.016... 5.031 FBC1 Control Word 1, bit 0...
FBC1 Control Word 1, bit 15
5.100... 5.115 * Fieldbus Control Word 1, bit 0...
* Fieldbus Control Word 1, bit 15
5.200... 5.215 * Fieldbus Control Word 2, bit 0...
* Fieldbus Control Word 2, bit 15
5.300… 5.315 Ethernet Channel 1 Control Word 1, bit 0…
Ethernet Channel 1 Control Word 1, bit 15
5.316… 5.331 Ethernet Channel 1 Control Word 2, bit 0…
Ethernet Channel 1 Control Word 2, bit 15
5.332… 5.347 Ethernet Channel 2 Control Word 1, bit 0…
Ethernet Channel 2 Control Word 1, bit 15
5.348… 5.363 Ethernet Channel 2 Control Word 2, bit 0…
Ethernet Channel 2 Control Word 2, bit 15
6.000 ... 6.031 Application Flag 0...
Application Flag 31
7.000 ...7.031 CAN Control bit 0...
CAN Control bit 31
7.032...7.063 CAN2 Control bit 0...
CAN2 Control bit 31

Notes:
1. These flags are used for Fieldbus option boards, FIP, PROFIBUS and MicroPEC™, as
only one of the boards can be fitted at any time.
2. Any of the signals above can be inverted without the need to "waste" logic gates by simply
preceding the value with a "-" sign. Thus if:
P4.04 = 1.002, then Control Flag 1 will be connected to digital input 2
or if
P4.04 = -1.002, then Control Flag 1 will be connected to the INV of digital input 2.

Page 6-120 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.34 Menu 33 - Control Flags 0 to 99 Connection Settings

Menu 34 - Control Flags 100 to 127 Connection Settings
Menus 33 and 34 give an alternative way to access the parameters required to configure
and monitor the Control Flags.
For ease of access the control flags are grouped in Menus 33 and 34 so that Menu 33
contains CF1 to CF99 and Menu 34 contains CF100 to CF127. If the number of a control
flag is known, its source parameter can easily be accessed by typing P33.xx or P34.xx
where xx is the CF number, e.g. for:
CF1 parameter, enter P33.01
CF9 parameter, enter P33.09
CF116 parameter, enter P34.16 (subtract 100 from the CF number)
Examples of Connecting Flags
Two examples of the connection of control and status flags are shown below. The "local"
menu numbers are given in brackets i.e. (P4.04) is the START Control Flag.
Example 1: How the Start Flag is connected
At default the drive has the Start flag connected to digital input 2, this example shows the
software connections and the required edits, by way of a Control Flag programming
example:

START
DIGIN 2 SOFTWARE 1
LINK P33.01 = 1.002
(P4.04)

Example 2: How to connect Control and Status Flags together

This example shows a simple connection that might be made to the logic blocks:

HEALTHY LATCH A RESET INPUT

4 SOFTWARE 40
LINK P33.40 = 2.004
(P30.12)

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-121
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.35 Menu 35 - Miscellaneous Features Settings

Menu 35 gives access to the parameters required to configure the following miscellaneous
functions:
PWM Switching frequency
Keypad Removal and default Keypad display
Edits Review Enable
RS232 Serial Link Baud rate and protocol
Printer Settings
6.35.1 PWM Switching Frequency
P35.00 - PWM Switching Frequency
The pulse width modulation (PWM) frequency of the drive output can be changed to suit
local requirements. Increasing the PWM frequency will reduce the audible noise from the
motor and increase the pitch. Increasing the PWM frequency also increases the amount of
heat dissipated from the drive.
Allowed values (from Keypad): 1.25kHz
2.5kHz
5.0kHz
7.5kHz
The default setting for this parameter is 1.25kHz. This value should be satisfactory for most
installations except for the following conditions. The 1.25kHz value is the default for VVVF
control and 2.5kHz is the default for Vector control. When on a DELTA System 5kHz is the
maximum value.
Note:
At PWM switching frequencies higher than the default setting, it may be necessary to reduce the
current rating of the drive, particularly when operated in high ambient temperatures.
6.35.2 Allow Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) Removal
P35.01 - Allow Keypad Removal
Configures the drive to enable Keypad removal, if the drive is not in Keypad control.
Permitted values: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
6.35.3 Set-up Review Mode
P35.03 - Set-up Review Mode
A list of parameters that have been changed from the factory default settings is maintained
by the drive. Enabling the Set-up Review function causes the drive to display this list
(P35.03 remains displayed). The up and down arrow keys can then be used to step through
the complete list.
To revert to normal parameter display mode, use the up/down keys to display P35.03 again
and then change it's value to 0.
Allowed values: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
6.35.4 Auto-lock Action
P35.04 - Auto-lock Action
With auto-locking enabled, the parameters are locked automatically if no editing activity is
detected for a period of five minutes.
Allowed values: 0 = Auto-locking OFF.
1 = Auto-locking ON, Engineer parameters only.
2 = Auto-locking ON, all parameters.

Page 6-122 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.35.5 Printing
A printer can be connected to ALSPA MV3000e to print out the drive records. The drive can
be configured for printing either by using the Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) or by using a
suitable Personal Computer (PC) connected to the RS485 terminals on the I/O panel. The
printer is connected to the RS232 connector on the front panel of the unit, in place of the
Keypad.
Printer Specification
To work with ALSPA MV3000e drives a printer must conform to the following specification:
Carriage width 42 characters
Print rate in the range 0.5 to 10 lines per second
Communications RS232 serial port
Data format 8 bits, no parity
Buffer size 1 line
Baud rate 9600 to 38400 baud
The printer cable should be terminated in a 9-way D-type plug with connections as shown at
Figure 8-1.
Using the Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) to Configure the Drive for Printing
The Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad) is used to configure the drive (see Section 2). It is then
removed and the printer cable is connected to the Keypad port. The drive begins
transmitting printer data approximately 10 seconds after the Keypad has been removed.
1. Follow the procedure below to configure the drive for printing.
2. Power up the printer and then remove the Keypad as described at 2.2.5.
3. Connect the printer cable to the Keypad port.
Using a PC to configure the Drive for Printing
For this method the printer is connected to the Drive Data Manager™ (RS232) port and the
PC uses the RS485 serial link to configure the drive. To communicate with the drive, use a
software package such as ALSPA Drive Coach, available from Converteam.
A 4-way screened cable is required to connect between the PC RS485 connector and the
drive connector TB4B/1-4, as shown at the Wiring Diagram in relevant manual. Connect the
screen to TB4B/5.
1. Connect the printer to the Drive Data Manager™ port and power up the printer.
2. Connect the PC to the drive RS485 port.
3. Using the appropriate software package, configure the drive for printing as
described below.
Configuring the Drive for Printing
To configure the drive for printing:
– Set P35.06 - (RS232 Protocol) to `Printer' (Option 5).
– Set P35.08 - (Printer lines per second) to the required speed.
– Set P35.05 - (Serial link baud rate) to the baud rate setting of the printer.
– Set P35.07 to the required print option.
On completion of the printout P35.07 automatically reverts to Option 0 (Print nothing) if the
option selected was in the range 1 to 4. Print Option 5 remains valid until the operator
changes it.
To terminate a printout in progress: Set parameter P35.07 to 0 and press .
P35.05 - RS232 Serial Link Baud Rate
Sets the required value (in kBaud).
Allowed values: 9.6, 19.2 and 38.4 kBaud

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-123
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P35.06 - RS232 Serial Link Message Protocol

Values are: 0 = No Protocol
1 = GEM 80 ESP
2 = MODBUS™ RTU
3 = MODBUS™ ASCII
4 = Keypad ESP
5 = Printer
P35.07 - Printer Options
Determines which data is output to the printer.
Allowed values are: 0 = No Print Out.
1 = Print all parameters.
2 = Print all parameters which have been changed from the
factory default settings.
3 = Print the parameters defined in the ESP user page 1. See
Table 8-4 "Configuring the user-defined pages" for information
on how to configure the ESP user pages.
4 = Print the History log. This can only occur when the History
log is frozen (i.e. the drive must be tripped). The History log will
not start to run until the printout is completed. This allows the
drive to be restarted while the History log is being printed.
5 = Print the History log automatically when the drive trips. This
setting is intended for use with auto-reset trips, so that a log of
History logs for previous trips is maintained.
6 = Print CANopen EDS Body.
7 = Print DeviceNet EDS Body.
8 = Print Allen Bradley special DeviceNet EDS Body.
P35.08 - Printer Lines/second
This parameter controls the rate at which data is sent to a printer. The default value (Option
2) is suitable for a typical serial dot matrix printer. The print speed can be increased if a
different type of printer is in use or the print data is being sent direct to a computer terminal.
Allowed values: 1= 0.5 lines /second
2= 0.7 lines /second
3= 1.0 lines /second
4= 2.0 lines /second
5= 5.0 lines /second
6= 10.0 lines /second
6.35.6 Trip Avoidance
The timed Overcurrent function trips the drive if the accumulated product of overload current
(i.e. current above the drive Full Load Current indicated in P99.05) and time is equivalent to
overload current of the drive for a period of 60 seconds. When P99.02 set to 0 the overload
current is set at 1.5 x FLC and when P99.02 is set to 1 the overload current is set to 1.1 x
FLC. P9.10 monitors the remaining percentage overload.
For example (for a drive with P99.02 set to 0):
1.5 x FLC for 60 seconds, or, 1.25 x FLC for 120 seconds.
The possibility of a timed Overcurrent trip can be reduced by enabling timed Overcurrent
avoidance (P35.09). When the overload remaining value reaches 10% (e.g. [for a drive with
P99.02 set to 0] after 1.5 x FLC for 54 seconds), the acceleration or speed is reduced, to
allow the drive to recover from the accumulated overload.

Page 6-124 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P35.09 - Drive Overload Avoidance Enable

Allowed values: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P35.10 - Over Temperature Avoidance Enable
The internal temperature of the drive is measured continuously and if the normal limits are
exceeded the drive will generate a Warning and will ultimately trip. The drive can be
programmed to take action to avoid tripping due to excessive internal temperature, by
setting P35.10 to `enabled'.
When over temperature avoidance is enabled, the drive reduces the current limit setting
when the Warning temperature level is reached. This reduces the output current, allowing
the drive temperature to reduce. When the temperature is below the `Warning' level the
normal current limit setting is restored. The drive over temperature trip is not disabled by this
function, and the drive will still trip if the temperature limit is exceeded.
Allowed values: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P35.12 - AC Loss Ride-through
If this parameter is enabled, the drive can maintain the DC link volts during short dips in the
mains supply. Using kinetic energy in the load to re-generate the DC link voltage does this.
The motor may decelerate very quickly in these conditions and may override programmed
ramp rates. Refer also to P35.13.
Allowed values: 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P35.13 - Nominal Mains Voltage
This parameter must be set accurately if the AC Loss Ride-Through function
(P35.12/P46.00) is required.
Allowed range: 300 V to 800V
P35.11 - Expansion Bus Device
Various Communication Boards are available from Converteam e.g. FIP, PROFIBUS
Ethernet. These are detailed in separate manuals. This parameter P35.11 indicates which
Communication Board is fitted.
Allowed values: 0 = Non fitted
1 = 1Mbit/s FIP
2 = 2.5Mbit/s FIP
3 = Fieldbus Coupler
P35.14 - Maximum Ambient Temperature
This parameter displays the maximum ambient temperature.
Allowed values: 35˚C to 50˚C
P35.15 - Fan Type
This parameter displays the fan type fitted.
Allowed values: 0 - Standard
1 - Large
Only DELTA drives will allow other than the standard fan type to be selected.
P35.16 - Drive Continuous Current Rating
This parameter displays the drive continuous current rating as a function of:
P35.00 - PWM Switching Frequency
P35.13 - Nominal Input Voltage
P35.14 - Maximum Ambient Temperature (35˚C to 50˚C, default 40˚C)
P35.15 - Fan Type (default 0 - standard)

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-125
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P99.01 - Control Method

P99.02 - Overload Setting
When the drive's output bridge switching devices are below a 'hot' threshold, P35.16 will
display the rated nominal current in Amps. When above this threshold, the P35.16 value
may show a reduction depending upon the selection of the above influencing parameters.
The drive internally determines the threshold as a function of the output bridge design
parameters. The maximum current available is the value of P99.05 multiplied by the
overload factor. Thus for a cold output bridge, the drive rated current is available. When the
output bridge exceeds the 'hot' threshold, the maximum current is determined by the
particular set of operating conditions specified by the above parameters.
P35.17 - Advanced Temperature Monitoring
This feature is only available if the MV3000e hardware has been programmed with the
necessary data power bridge data. When enabled this feature allows a complex
mathematical algorithm to be run which computes the switching device temperatures, from
the prevailing power bride conditions, and the measured heatsink temperatures. The results
are displayed in P45.25 - P45.27.
P35.18 - Action on Sharing Error
All versions of ALSPA MV3000e AC Drives that are MVDELTA based have had the ability to
make the MVDELTA modules share their currents in proportion to the total drive current.
However this can only be achieved up to a point, for example if one of the phases of the
MVDELTA modules remains unconnected then the current in that phase remains at zero.
P35.18- 'Active Sharing Error Detection' has been included to improve this situation. If the
ALSPA MV3000e is unable to force multiple MVDELTAs to share in proportion, and the
current levels are high enough for this to present a potential problem for the remaining
MVDELTA modules then the drive will issue a warning or a trip, indicating the phase sharing
failure.
Table 6-16 Sharing Error Warning and Trip numbers

Warning Number Trip Number

U-Phase Sharing Error 139 207
V-Phase Sharing Error 140 208
W-Phase Sharing Error 141 209

Allowed values: 0 = No action

1 = Warning
2 = Trip (default)
It is recommended that this parameter be left at its default value 2 (trip). This parameter is
included as a debug aid. If an application suffers a Sharing Error Trip, then P35.18 can be
temporarily set to 1, so that the MV3000e can be run, and the source of the fault e.g. DELTA
wiring, can be identified. P35.18 should be returned to 2 upon correction of the fault. To
continuously run the MV3000e with P35.18 at a value other than 2 will potentially overstress
the other DELTA modules, if a mis-sharing situation exists.
6.35.7 Enhanced Active Sharing
P35.19 - Active Sharing Disable
This parameter allows Active Sharing to be disabled altogether. It does not disable Active
Sharing detection, which, in general, will need to be disabled separately via parameter
P35.18.
P35.20 - PWM Sharing Threshold
This parameter is used to specify the number of consecutive PWM periods containing
sharing required for a first level sharing error condition.
P35.21 - 100ms Sharing Threshold
This parameter is used to specify the number of 100ms periods that must have a level 1
sharing error before sharing error detection is triggered. This will filter out spurious noise

Page 6-126 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

events causing spurious sharing error detection. It will still retain the ability to detect a non-
functional DELTA module.
P35.22 - Number of 100ms Sharings
This parameter is used to view the degree of sharing taking place. If level 1 sharing errors
are not taking place this will remain at zero.
P35.23 - Sharing Event Duration
The sharing event duration can be adjusted using this parameter.
Allowed values: 0 = 0.4μs
1 = 0.8μs
2 = 1.2μs
3 = 1.6μs
4 = 2.0μs
5 = 2.4μs
6 = 2.8μs
7 = 3.2μs
8 = 3.6μs
9 = 4.0μs
10 = 4.4μs
11 = 4.8μs
12 = 5.2μs
13 = 5.6μs
14 = 6.0μs
15 = 6.4μs
6.35.8 PWM Synchronisation Parameters.
P35.30 - PWM Synchronisation Offset
P35.31 - Synchronisation
These parameters are fully described in section 6.20.1.4

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-127
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.36 Menu 36 - Position Control Settings (Vector with Encoder Only)

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 10)
Some applications require the controller to maintain an accurate indication of the position of
a turntable or other apparatus. The position control feature uses the speed feedback
encoder, to provide an accurate position feedback, which can be used as a reference source
to control the drive output.
Since the incremental encoder only provides a simple pulse count from which to derive the
position, the Z-pulse of the encoder is used to establish the zero position of the motor during
each full rotation, also it may be necessary in some applications to use limit switches to
indicate absolute start and finish positions. The process of establishing the reference
positions of the apparatus is known as ‘datumizing’.
The output of position control is an error signal determined by the difference between the
position reference and the actual position. This error signal can then be used as a reference
source for the speed control or torque control loops or as a speed trim or trim reference. A
`Speed profiler' is used to `shape' the reference signal, to give accurate control of the speed
at which a set position is approached.
Setting the reference source to `Position Control’ enables position control.
The drive's own internal position control variables are in units of encoder pulses. The
encoder emits 4 pulses per encoder line (one on each encoder line edge). Thus a 1024 line
encoder gives 4096 encoder pulses per revolution.
P36.01 - Encoder Line Count Divider
This parameter is used to scale the encoder output to a user defined range. It determines
the number of encoder pulses for each bit added to the position variable. A 1024 line
encoder has 4096 pulses per revolution. If P36.01 is set to 2 then the position variables
have a range of 4096 / 2 = 2048 bits per shaft revolution.
Allowed values: 1 to 32
6.36.1 Configuring the Drive for Position Control
The first stage in setting up the drive for Position Control is to set up the Speed Loop. Set up
the Maximum Speeds, P5.15 and P5.17, correctly for the application, i.e. calculate the
maximum motor speeds from the maximum position speeds required, and any gearbox
ratios etc. applicable. Then set up the Speed Loop PID gains, P14.00 to P14.02, and Ramp
Rates, P6.00 to P6.03. It is very useful to have the drive in Speed Control (P5.01 = 1) to do
this initial set up.
When Position Control is active, the Position Shaper will take care of the `slowing down' as
the drive approaches the set position. Therefore, P6.02 and P6.03 (the Deceleration Rates)
should be set to high values, so that they have no effect when Position Control is active.
However, the Acceleration Rates, P6.00 and P6.01 have to be set up at this stage to
achieve the required acceleration profile as the drive leaves one set position to go to
another. P6.00 and P6.01 will need to be set to suitable values.
– Set up the Position Control Range, Maximum / Minimum Position, Control Flags,
Position Shaper Range etc.
Next, start to commission the Position Control parameters:
– Set up the required Position Control Mode (P36.00).
– Set up the position limit switches (Control Flags 86 and 87) if applicable. See 6.34.
– Set up the Maximum Position (P36.02 and P36.03) to the required values.
– Set up the Minimum Position (P36.04 and P36.05) to the required values.
– Set up the Position Shaper Range (P36.10 and P36.11). This is the range (in encoder
pulses) over which the shaper is active. Also, set up the required Position Shaper
profile in Parameters P36.12 to P36.31, if the default profile is not suitable.
– Set the reference source (P5.01) to `Position Control' (Option16).

Page 6-128 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Note:
It is suggested that an encoder with 2500 lines per revolution be chosen, as this is taken as 4 x 2500 =
10,000 pulses per revolution for position control purposes, and it is easier to perform mathematics for
position control calculations e.g. 1/2 a revolution = 5000 pulses etc. The encoder should also have a
'Z' pulse.
P36.00 - Position Control Mode
P36.00 is used to select the position control mode as follows:
1 = Finite Mode
Only position values between minimum and maximum positions are allowed. When position
feedback reaches minimum or maximum, clamping occurs, and Position Valid (Status Flag
64) is cleared.
2 = Bi-directional Turntable Mode
Position values in the range 0 to maximum position are allowed. When position feedback
exceeds maximum position, it is `wrapped' back, by subtracting the position range
(maximum position). This may be used on a machine that has cyclic operation, i.e. a
turntable. Positioning will occur in either direction. The drive will take the shortest route to
the position reference.
3 = Uni-directional Turntable Mode
As mode 2, except that positioning will only occur in the forward direction of rotation. i.e. if a
position change of -10 degrees is requested, the drive will rotate by +350 degrees. Note that
the position monitor tolerance (P36.54 / P36.55 - see 6.34.12) is applicable in this mode.
Negative rotations of values less that the monitor tolerance are permitted, to prevent a small
position overshoot resulting in a complete rotation.
For the drive to act upon the output of the Position Controller, the drive must be configured
such that Position Control is the reference source to one of the following:
Main Speed Reference
Set the active speed reference control source, P5.01 to P5.04, to 16. The Position Controller
is now the main speed reference of the drive.
Trim Reference
Set the Trim Reference source, P19.00/P19.01 to 13. The total speed reference is then a
combination of the Position Controller output and another speed reference.
Speed Trim
Set the Speed Trim source P24.00 to 16. This allows the Position Controller output to be
added directly to the speed demand, after the ramps have been imposed on the main speed
reference.
Torque Reference
Set the Torque Reference source, P15.04 = 16. This makes motor torque a function of the
position error.
P36.02 - Maximum Position Low
P36.03 - Maximum Position High
These two parameters determine the maximum value of the position variable.
Allowed values: -9999 to +9999 (pulses)
The Maximum Position set by these parameters is determined as follows:
Maximum Position = (P36.03 x 10,000) + P36.02
P36.04 - Minimum Position Low
P36.05 - Minimum Position High
These two parameters determine the minimum value of the position variable.
Allowed values: -9999 to +9999 (pulses)
The Minimum Position set by these parameters is determined as follows:

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-129
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

Minimum Position = (P36.05 x 10,000) + P36.04

P36.06 - Zero Position Tolerance Low
P36.07 - Zero Position Tolerance High
These two parameters determine the 0% position of the position variable used by the
Position Reference Sources (P37.00, P37.01 and P37.02). The 100 % position is
determined to be either the Maximum Position (P36.02/P36.03) or the Minimum Position
(P36.04/P36.05) depending on which is furthest from the 0% position.
Allowed values: -9999 to +9999 (pulses)
The 0% Position Tolerance set by these parameters is determined as follows:
0% Position Tolerance = (P36.07 x 10,000) + P36.06
Many position control parameters are implemented as double parameters, split into a low
parameter and a high parameter. These parameters can be concatenated to give the full
position control variable. i.e.
(full parameter) = (high parameter) x 10000 + (low parameter).
Each can be in the range ±9999; hence the full parameter range can be ±99999999.
There are two ways of representing any value, i.e.
12345678 = (1234 x 10000) + 5678 = (1235 x 10000) - 4322
The drive will accept either format for inputs, but always produces its output such that the
high and low parts of a variable have the same sign.
The internal position control variables have an additional internal limit of ±230-1. Care should
be taken that this limit is not exceeded, e.g. by setting a position control parameter, such
that:
Parameter high = 9876
Parameter low = 5432
Pulses/bit = 32
Then: (internal format) = (9876 x 10000 + 5432) x 32 >> 230-1
If this occurs, the internal format is clamped. If position feedback exceeds this limit, Position
Valid (Status Flag 64) is cleared.
The mode of operation of position control is defined by P36.00.
6.36.2 Position Shaper, or Speed Profiler
It is very often necessary to have the drive approach its set position according to some
speed profile, where the speed is a function of the position error, so that as the drive
approaches position, the speed is reduced. The Speed Profiler provides this facility. This is
simply a look-up table, the index of which is Position Error, and the output of which is a
speed demand.
The X co-ordinates of the speed profile represent percentage (in 0.01% steps) of P36.10
(Position Shaper Range Low) and P36.11 (Position Shaper Range High), unless P36.10 =
P36.11 = 0, when (max - min) position is used for the position shaper range, i.e. of the total
position range.
This system allows the position profiler to be active only over a predefined position range,
which is not affected by the total position range.
The Y co-ordinates of the speed profile are speed demand (in 0.01% top speed) to the
speed controller. The drive performs linear interpolation between adjacent X co-ordinates to
obtain the required speed demand.
The drive will go at the speed associated with the maximum X co-ordinate, for position
errors outside the range specified by the range of the profiled table.
The drive sorts the X values into numerical order. Hence, the customer may enter them in
the drive in any order, except that the Xn and Yn values must correspond to each other.

Page 6-130 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

The parameters are different for positive and negative position errors as follows:
X1, Y1 to X5, Y5 for positive position error
-X1, -Y1 to -X5, -Y5 for negative position error
The default values are set to give a square root approach function (the Yn values) which
exists over 100 % (the Xn values) of 100,000 encoder pulses.
P36.10 - Position Shaper Range Low
P36.11 - Position Shaper Range High
These two parameters define the travel over which the position shaper is active.
Allowed values are: P36.10: 0 pulses to 9999 pulses
P36.11: 0x10k pulses to 9999x10k pulses
The position shaper range = P36.10 + P36.11
P36.12 - Position Shaper -X1
P36.13 - Position Shaper -Y1
These parameters define the first pair of position and speed co-ordinates of the shaper
speed profile for the reverse direction of movement.
Allowed values are: P36.12 = -100.00 (minimum) to 0.00 (maximum) (% of position
travel)
P36.13 = -100.00 (minimum) to 0.00 (maximum) (% top speed)
Similarly for co-ordinate pairs 2 to 5 (P36.14 to P36.21) as next.
P36.14 - Position Shaper -X2
P36.15 - Position Shaper -Y2
P36.16 - Position Shaper -X3
P36.17 - Position Shaper -Y3
P36.18 - Position Shaper -X4
P36.19 - Position Shaper -Y4
P36.20 - Position Shaper -X5
P36.21 - Position Shaper -Y5
These parameters define the positions and speeds for co-ordinate pairs 2 to 5 for the
reverse direction.
P36.22 - Position Shaper X1
P36.23 - Position Shaper Y1
These parameters define the first pair of position and speed co-ordinates of the shaper
speed profile for the forward direction of movement.
Allowed values are: P36.22 = 100.00 (maximum) to 0.00 (minimum) (% of position
travel)
P36.23 = 100.00 (maximum) to 0.00 (minimum) (% Top Speed)
Similarly for co-ordinate pairs 2 to 5 (P36.24 to P36.31) as next.
P36.24 - Position Shaper X2
P36.25 - Position Shaper Y2
P36.26 - Position Shaper X3
P36.27 - Position Shaper Y3
P36.28 - Position Shaper X4
P36.29 - Position Shaper Y4
P36.30 - Position Shaper X5
P36.31 - Position Shaper Y5
These parameters define the positions and speeds for co-ordinate pairs 2 to 5 for the
forward direction.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-131
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.36.3 Datumizing
Status Flag 64 (Position Valid) indicates to the drive that the internal position feedback and
the physical position of the drive are in agreement. Status Flag 64 must be Hi before
position control can be used as a reference source.
Status Flag 64 is set to 0 on power up, disabling position control as a reference source. This
can be over-ridden by a rising edge on Control Flag 80 (Force Position Valid) but this should
only be done if it is known that the machine has not moved since power-down.
To re-establish agreement between the position of the machinery and the internal position
indication of the drive, the drive will perform an automatic datumizing routine, this is invoked
by a rising edge on Control Flag 83 (Perform Datum Movement). A datumizing sequence (or
mode) to suit most applications can be selected from the eleven datumizing sequences
available in P36.34. Some of these sequences require limit switches to be installed and
connected to Control Flags 86 (P36.08 - Position High Limit) and 87 (P36.09 - Position Low
Limit).
When the datum movement sequencer is invoked, Status Flag 64 (Position Valid) is cleared
Lo, and Status Flag 65 (Datum Movement in Progress) is set Hi. The Speed Reference
issued to the rest of the drive then comes from the datum movement sequencer.
Upon reaching the correct datum position, the position feedback is set to the preset datum
position, given by P36.32 - Datum Position Low, and P36.33 - Datum Position High. The
Control Flag Datum Movement in Progress is cleared Lo, and Position Valid is set Hi - see
Figure 6-36.
P36.32 - Datum Position Offset Low
P36.33 - Datum Position Offset High
These two parameters together contain an offset value to which the internal position
feedback is set when the datumizing position is reached. This may be used, for example,
after a "next Z" datum movement, to offset the 'Z' pulse position to leave the mechanics
exactly where you want it, as opposed to where the 'Z' pulse is.
Allowed values: -9999 to +9999 (pulses)
The offset value set by these parameters is determined as follows:
Datum Position Offset = (P36.33 x 10,000) + P36.32

Page 6-132 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Datum Permit Set Lo to stop

CF82 accidental Datumizing

Perform Movement
CF83

Position Valid
SF64 Use Position Valid to tell
(or may already be Lo) other equipment

Datum Sequence Begins Add Datum Offset - set in

P36.32 and P36.33

Datum
Position
reached (in example below, the switch
connected to Datum Input has
been detected).

Datum Movement in Perform Datum Sequence as

Progress SF65 set in P36.34

Figure 6-36 Control Flags - Datum Movement

P36.35 - Datum Speed 1

P36.36 - Datum Speed 2
P36.37 - Datum Speed 3
These three parameters set the speed of datum movement during the datumization
sequences defined by P36.34.
Allowed values: 0.00 % to 100.00 % (of top speed)
P36.34 - Datum Sequence
The parameter datumizing sequences are as follows. In all cases, the datum offsets set in
P36.32 and P36.33 are executed at the end of the movements described below so that the
next datum positions can be met.
1. The drive goes at Minus Datum Speed 1 (P36.35) until Low Limit (Control Flag 87) is
high. It then goes at Plus Datum Speed 2 (P36.36) until Datum Approach (Control
Flag 84) is high. It then goes at Plus Datum Speed 3 (P36.37) until a falling edge on
Datum Input (Control Flag 85) is detected. Finally, it goes at Plus Datum Speed 3 until
the encoder Z pulse is detected - see Figure 6-37 and Figure 6-38.
2. The drive goes at Plus Datum Speed 1 (P36.35) until High Limit (Control Flag 86) is
high. It then goes at Minus Datum Speed 2 (P36.36) until Datum Approach (Control
Flag 84) is high. It then goes at Minus Datum Speed 3 (P36.37) until a falling edge on
Datum Input (Control Flag 85) is detected. Finally, it goes at Minus Datum Speed 3
until the encoder Z pulse is detected.
3. The drive goes at Minus Datum Speed 1 (P36.35) until Low Limit (Control Flag 87) is
high. It then goes at Plus Datum Speed 2 (P36.36) until Datum Approach (Control
Flag 84) is high. It then goes at Minus Datum Speed 3 (P36.37) until a falling edge on

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-133
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

Datum Input (Control Flag 85) is detected. Finally, it goes at Minus Datum Speed 3
until the encoder Z-pulse is detected.

- Datum Speed 1

1.
Low Limit Datum Datum High Limit
Approach Input

Hit Low Limit

+ Datum Speed 2

2.
Low Limit Datum Datum High Limit
Approach Input
Hit Datum Approach
+ Datum Speed 3

3.
Low Limit Datum Datum High Limit
Approach Input

Go Datum Speed 3 until hits Datum Input, then moves the motor to next 'Z' Pulse on Encoder
which will be <1 rev. An offset can be set in P36.32/33 to then cause the motor to further travel a
fraction of a rev until exact Datum Point is reached.

Hit Datum Input

Falling edge rotates at Speed 3,
to next 'Z', then rotates by Datum
Offset then finally stops.
4.
Low Limit Datum Datum High Limit
Approach Input

Figure 6-37 Example of Datum Movement Sequence

Page 6-134 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Datum Permit
CF82

Perform Datum
Movement CF83

Start
Datum
Sequence

Travel at - Datum Speed 1

Strike Low Limit Switch

At least 10 ms to
Low Limit CF87 guarantee activation

Strike Datum Approach Switch

Travel at
+ Datum At least 10 ms
Datum Approach CF84 Speed 2

Travel at
+ Datum
Datum Input CF85 Speed 3

Continue at + Datum
Speed 3

Next Z Pulse on
Encoder

Travel at + Datum Speed 3, and

move the datum offset pulses
programmed into P36.22/P36.23

SF104 Position Valid

(may be Hi or Lo)

SF65 Datum
Movement in Progress

Figure 6-38 Control Flag Logic Diagram for Datum Sequence

4. The drive goes at Plus Datum Speed 1 (P36.35) until High Limit (Control Flag 86) is
high. It then goes at Minus Datum Speed 2 (P36.36) until Datum Approach (Control
Flag 84) is high. It then goes at Plus Datum Speed 3 (P36.37) until a falling edge on
Datum Input (Control Flag 85) is detected. Finally, it goes at Plus Datum Speed 3 until
the encoder Z-pulse is detected.
5 - 8. These are identical to 1 to 4, except that datumizing occurs on the falling edge of
Datum Input (Control Flag 85) - no encoder Z pulse is required. This will be less
accurate than using a Z pulse.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-135
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

9. The drive goes at Plus Datum Speed 3 (P36.37) until the encoder Z-pulse is detected.
This is then the datum point. No limit switches are required.
10. The drive goes at Minus Datum Speed 3 (P36.37) until the encoder Z-pulse is
detected. This is then the datum point. No limit switches are required.
11. Provided that Datum Permit (Control Flag 82) is set, then a rising edge on Datum
Input (Control Flag 85) will force the current position to be regarded as the new datum
position.
Notes on datumizing
All limit switches must be active for at least 10 ms, in order to guarantee that the software
detects the switches.
The falling edge of the Datum Input (Control Flag 85) must occur at least 10 ms before the
encoder Z pulse, to guarantee correct datumizing.
There is a maximum datumizing speed, such that the maximum number of encoder pulses
received in 20 ms is limited to 30,000. If this speed is exceeded whilst datumizing, then the
drive will trip on Datumize Fail (trip code 70).
The value of Position Feedback contained in P38.02 and P38.03 is stored at power-down,
and recovered at power-up, to maintain internal storage of position feedback. This should
only be used if it is possible to guarantee that the machine being controlled is not moved
during power down.
6.36.4 Uni-directional Approach Bias
In some applications, it will be required to ensure that the drive approaches the set position
from a fixed direction, whether the position is greater or less than the preceding position set
point. This may be required to take out the effects of backlash in a system. The position
control function can be configured to provide `uni-directional approach'.
Control Flag 90 (P36.46 - Enable Uni-directional Approach) enables the function. The drive
will then go through the position set point + Approach Bias (set in P36.44/P36.45) before
going to the position set point. This means that approach from one direction will result in an
overshoot, before turning around to approach from the desired direction. This will ensure
approach from the direction defined by P36.44/P36.45 (Approach bias) only.
P36.44 - Approach Bias Low
P36.45 - Approach Bias High
Allowed values: -9999 to 9999 (pulses)
The Approach Bias set by these parameters is determined as follows:
Approach Bias = (P36.45 x 10,000) + P36.44
Note:
The tolerance defined in the position monitor below is active in the determination of approach bias
point. Therefore, if approach bias is positive, the drive will go through the position (approach bias -
tolerance), before going to set point. Therefore, tolerance should not be set greater than approach
bias, as it makes no sense to do so.
6.36.5 Position Incher
(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 10)
A `Position Jog', or `Position Incher' feature is added immediately after the position
reference arbitration (see Block Diagram). This is enabled by setting Control Flag 89
(P36.51 --‘Enable Inching’) high. Control Flags 95 (P36.52 - Inch Up) and 96 (P36.53 - Inch
Down) will then increment / decrement the position reference by the values given in the
appropriate parameters, (P36.47 / P36.48 - Inch Up Step, and P36.49 / P36.50 - Inch Down
Step). The position reference before inching is the last value of position feedback when
Status Flag 67 (At Position) was high.
P36.47 - Incher Step Up Low
P36.48 - Incher Step Up High
These two parameters determine the size of the Incher Step Up incremental step used by
the position incher.

Page 6-136 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Allowed values: -9999 to +9999 (pulses)

The incremental step set by these parameters is determined as follows:
Incremental Step = (P36.48 x 10,000) + P36.47
P36.49 - Incher Step Down Low
P36.50 - Incher Step Down High
These two parameters determine the size of the Incher Step Down decrement step used by
the position incher.
Allowed values: -9999 to +9999 (pulses)
The decrement step set by these parameters is determined as follows:
Decrement Step = (P36.50 x 10,000) + P36.49
6.36.6 Position Monitor
Four status flags are used to indicate information about position:
Status Flag 66 (Either Limit)
Status Flag 67 (At Position)
Status Flag 68 (Above Position)
Status Flag 69 (Below Position)
Status Flag 66 (Either Limit) is set if either the High Limit switch connected to CF86 or the
Low Limit switch connected to CF87 is set.
Status Flag 67 (At Position) is set if the magnitude of Position Error is less than the Position
Monitor Tolerance (set in P36.54 and P36.55), and the drive is at zero speed (Status Flag
11), and Position Valid (SF64) is set.
Status Flag 69 (Below Position) is set if the Position Error is greater than the tolerance band,
and Position Valid is set.
Status Flag 68 (Above Position) is set if the Position Error is less than the -(tolerance band),
and Position Valid is set.
P36.54 - Position Monitor Tolerance Low
P36.55 - Position Monitor Tolerance High
These two parameters determine the width of the tolerance band in which Status Flag 67 (At
Position) is set or the overshoot tolerance in uni-directional turntable mode.
Allowed values: 0 to 9999 (pulses)
The Position Monitor Tolerance set by these parameters is determined as follows:
Position Monitor Tolerance = (P36.55 x 10,000) + P36.54
6.36.7 Position Control Flags
P36.08 Control Flag 86 - Set High Limit
P36.09 Control Flag 87 - Set Low Limit
P36.38 Control Flag 80 - Force Position Valid
P36.39 Control Flag 81 - Force Position Invalid
P36.40 Control Flag 82 - Datum Move Permit
P36.41 Control Flag 83 - Perform Datum Movement
P36.42 Control Flag 84 - Datum Approach
P36.43 Control Flag 85 - Datum Input
P36.46 Control Flag 90 - Enable Uni-directional Approach
P36.51 Control Flag 89 - Enable Inching
P36.52 Control Flag 95 - Inching Up
P36.53 Control Flag 96 - Inching Down
See section 6.33 for information on Control Flag programming.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-137
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.37 Menu 37 - Position Reference Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 10)
Menu 37 gives access to the parameters required to configure the fixed position menu
function.
The fixed position menu allows up to 16 predefined positions to be selected using a 4-bit
control word contained in Control Flags 91 to 94. The 16 pre-defined positions are set in
parameter pairs P37.06 to P37.37. The 4-bit control word is decoded as shown at Table
6-17.
Table 6-17 Position Control Word

Fixed Position Ref Fixed Position Ref Fixed Position Fixed Position Ref Position
Select 3 Select 2 Ref Select 1 Select 0
(Control Flag 94) (Control Flag 93) (Control Flag 92) (Control Flag 91) Selected

0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
.. .. .. .. ..
1 1 1 0 14
1 1 1 1 15

Note:
Use the Status Flag generator (Menu 31) to automatically generate a binary sequence with
programmable times.
To enable Fixed Position Menu the Position Reference Source (P37.00 or P37.01) must be
set to 1.
P37.06 - Fixed Position Reference #0 Low
P37.07 - Fixed Position Reference #0 High
These two parameters contain the value of the pre-set Fixed Position Reference #0.
Allowed values: -9999 to +9999 (pulses)
The Fixed Position Reference set by these parameters is determined as follows:
Fixed Position Reference #0 = (P37.07 x 10,000) + P37.06
Similarly:
P37.08 to P37.37 - Fixed Position References #1 to #15 Low and High
These parameter pairs contain the high and low values of pre-set positions #1 to #15 (as
P37.06 and P37.07).
Position Reference Teacher
In order to ease the programming of these fixed positions, a Position Teacher is
incorporated. Using the position incher, for example, allows the required position to be
approached. The value of position feedback can then be copied to the required element of
the fixed position table, using the teacher.
P37.04 - Position to Learn
This parameter is set to the required target in the Fixed Position Table (0 to 15, as
previously described).
Allowed values: 0 to 15
A rising edge on Control Flag 101 (P37.05 - Learn Position Now) then copies the present
value of position feedback into the selected target, provided that Status Flag 64 (Position
Valid) is set.

Page 6-138 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Position Reference Sources

Two primary position reference sources and a Backup position control reference sources
can be defined, as described next. The primary reference is selected using Control Flag 88
(P37.03).
P37.00 - Position Reference Source 1
P37.01 - Position Reference Source 2
These parameters are used to select the source of the position control reference. Position
reference Source 1 is selected when Control Flag 88 is set to 0. Position reference 2 is
selected when Control Flag 88 is set to 1.
Allowed values are:
1 = The output from the Fixed Position Menu
2 = Analogue Reference 1 (Percent - see Note 1 below)
3 = Analogue Reference 2 (Percent - see Note 1 below)
4 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
5 = Fixed 0% (Not used)
6 = RS485 Double Word (See Note 2 below)
7 = RS232 Double Word (See Note 2 below)
8 = RS485 Ref 1 (0.01% - see Note 1 below)
9 = RS485 Ref 2 (0.01% - see Note 1 below)
10 = RS232 Ref 1 (0.01% - see Note 1 below)
11 = RS232 Ref 2 (0.01% - see Note 1 below)
12 = PID Controller (0.01% - see Note 1 below)
13 = Motorised Potentiometer (0.01% - see Note 1 below)
14 = Pointer 16
15 = Double Pointer (Pointer 16 = Low, Pointer 17 = High)
Notes:
1. Position Feedback & Reference in percent are defined as follows: P36.06 - 0% Position Low and
P36.07 - 0% Position High make up the position which is called 0% position. The 0% position, in
conjunction with the furthest away from it, (either P36.02 / P36.03 Maximum Position, or P36.04 /
P36.05 Minimum Position), define the 100% position range. It is this range that is used for the
percentage positions defined above.
For example:
P36.06 (0% Position low) = 5000
P36.07 (0% Position High) = 7 [0% position is at 75,000]
P36.02 (Maximum Position Low) = 0
P36.03 (Maximum Position High) = 10 [Max Position = 100,000]
P36.04 (Minimum Position Low) = 0
P36.05 (Minimum Position High) = 0[ Min Position = 0]
As Minimum position is further away from 0% than Maximum position (i.e. Min-0% is greater than
Max-0%), then minimum position is at -100%. This means that maximum position is at +33.33%.
2. Serial Link Double Word references are in the data format defined in P36.06/P36.07 (Page 6-130),
where Ref 1 = low part, and Ref 2 = high part.
P37.02 - Position Reference Backup
This source is active when the primary reference source (P37.00 or P37.01) is invalid, e.g.
serial link not present.
Allowed values: 0 = No backup
1 to 15 = As P37.00/P37.01
P37.03 - Control Flag 88 - Position Reference 1/2 Selection
P37.05 - Control Flag 101 - Position Learn Now
P37.38 to P37.41 - Control Flags 91 to 94 - Position Reference Select 0 to 3
See Section 6.33 for information on Control Flag programming.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-139
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.38 Menu 38 - Position Control Monitor

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 10)
A number of read only parameters are provided to allow the values of the position control
variables to be viewed. These are as follows:
6.38.1 Position Monitoring Parameters
P38.00 - Position Reference Low
P38.01 - Position Reference High
These read-only parameters together contain the value of the selected position reference.
Range: -9999 to +9999 (pulses)
Position Reference = (P38.01 x 10k) + P38.00
P38.02 - Position Feedback Low
P38.03 - Position Feedback High
These read-only parameters together contain the value of the position feedback.
Range: -9999 to +9999 (pulses)
Position Feedback = (P38.03 x 10k) + P38.02
P38.04 - Position Error Low
P38.05 - Position Error High
These read-only parameters together contain the value of the position error.
Range: -9999 to +9999 (pulses)
Position Error = (P38.05 x 10k) + P38.04
6.38.2 Position Reference
P38.06 - Position Reference
This parameter contains the position reference expressed as a percentage of the position
range defined in parameters P36.02/P36.03 and P36.04/P36.05.
Range: -100.00% to +100.00% (of position range)
6.38.3 Position Feedback
P38.07 - Position Feedback
This parameter contains the position feedback expressed as a percentage of the position
range defined in parameters P36.02/P36.03 and P36.04/P36.05.
Range: -100.00% to +100.00% (of position range)
6.38.4 Position Error
P38.08 - Position Error
This parameter contains the position error expressed as a percentage of the position range
defined in parameters P36.02/P36.03 and P36.04/P36.05.
Range: -100.00% to +100.00% (of position range)
6.38.5 Position Status Flags
P38.09 - Position Status Flags
P38.09 contains a 16-bit word corresponding to the state of Position Status Flags SF64 to
SF79, as shown at Figure 6-39.

Page 6-140 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

0-F 0-F 0-F 0-F

M SB LSB

P38.09 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64

Status Flags (Position Control)

Figure 6-39 Monitoring Status Flags (Position Control)

The word is displayed as a 4-digit hexadecimal number in the range:

0000h to FFFFh
The status is also displayed in binary, i.e. typically:
0000 0000 0000 0000b
6.38.6 Position Control Flags
P38.10 - Position Control Flags 0
P38.11 - Position Control Flags 1
Parameters P38.10 and P38.11 each contain a 16-bit word corresponding to the state of
Control Flags CF80 to CF95 (Word 0) and CF96 to CF111 (Word 1), as shown at Figure
6-40.

0-F 0-F 0-F 0-F

MSB LSB

P38.10 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80
P38.11 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96

Position Control Flags

Figure 6-40 Monitoring Position Control Flags

Each word is displayed as a 4-digit hexadecimal number in the range:

0000h to FFFFh
The status is also displayed in binary, i.e. typically:
0000 0000 0000 0000b

6.38.7 Position Control Output

P38.12 - Position Control Output
This read-only parameter monitors the position controller output as a percentage of top
speed.
Range of values: -100% to +100% of Top Speed)

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-141
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.39 Menu 39 - User Configurable Menu (Menu 1) Settings

Menu 39 is used to configure Menu 1, the user defined menu. Up to 31 parameters can be
configured in Menu 1 and these are defined in parameters P39.00 to P39.30.
Example:
To allocate P5.00 (speed reference) to Menu 1 parameter P1.00:
Set P39.00 = 5.00
6.39.1 User Menu Configuration
Parameters P39.00 to P39.30 - User Menu Configuration
Allowed values: 0.00 to 99.99 (Any valid parameter number).

Page 6-142 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.40 Menu 40 - Summing Nodes Settings

Menu 40 gives access to parameters required to configure four Summing Nodes A, B, C and
D. Each summing node can add two parameters, selected by the user and each having its
own scale, to produce Summing Node Outputs.
These Summing Node Outputs are available as parameters that can be used, for example,
in Comparator Blocks and are also available for use as inputs to various reference sources
as shown at the Control Block Diagram.
The parameters used for configuring Summing Nodes are shown at Table 6-18.
Table 6-18 Summing Node Configuration

Summing Nodes Input 1 Input 2 Scale 1 Scale 2 Output Mode

Summing Node A P40.00 P40.01 P40.02 P40.03 P40.04 P40.20
Summing Node B P40.05 P40.06 P40.07 P40.08 P40.09 P40.21
Summing Node C P40.10 P40.11 P40.12 P40.13 P40.14 P40.22
Summing Node D P40.15 P40.16 P40.17 P40.18 P40.19 P40.23
Summing Node E P40.24 P40.25 P40.26 P40.27 P40.28 P40.44
Summing Node F P40.29 P40.30 P40.31 P40.32 P40.33 P40.45
Summing Node G P40.34 P40.35 P40.36 P40.37 P40.38 P40.46
Summing Node H P40.39 P40.40 P40.41 P40.42 P40.43 P40.47
Defaults P9.01 P9.01 +100.00 +100.00 -- 1

Consider Summing Node A:

The value in P40.00 is the parameter number for input 1. Similarly, P40.01 is the parameter
number for input 2. Each of the parameters is then scaled, such that the value in P40.02 or
P40.03 represents +100.00 %. The two results are then added, and the final result placed in
P40.04. This is shown as follows:
[ P 40.00] *100.00 [ P 40.01] *100.00
P 40.04 = +
P 40.02 P 40.03
The output, P40.04, is clamped to the range ±100.00 %.
6.40.1 Summing Nodes A to H
Parameters P40.00 to P40.04 - Summing Node A
Parameters P40.05 to P40.09 - Summing Node B
Parameters P40.10 to P40.14 - Summing Node C
Parameters P40.15 to P40.19 - Summing Node D
Parameters P40.24 to P40.28 - Summing Node E
Parameters P40.29 to P40.33 - Summing Node F
Parameters P40.34 to P40.38 - Summing Node G
Parameters P40.39 to P40.43 - Summing Node H
For each of the eight summing nodes the equivalent parameters are identical.
Referring to Table 6-18:
Allowed values for the Input 1 and Input 2 parameters:
1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter number)
Allowed values for the Scale 1 and Scale 2 parameters:
-300.00 to +300.00
Range of values for the Output parameters:
-100.00 to +100.00

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-143
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.40.2 Summing Nodes A to H Modes

Parameters P40.20 - Sum Node A Mode
Parameters P40.21 - Sum Node B Mode
Parameters P40.22 - Sum Node C Mode
Parameters P40.23 - Sum Node D Mode
Parameters P40.44 - Sum Node E Mode
Parameters P40.45 - Sum Node F Mode
Parameters P40.46 - Sum Node G Mode
Parameters P40.47 - Sum Node H Mode
Each of the summing nodes of Menu 40, Parameters P40.20 to P40.23 and P40.44 to
P40.47, can now perform in one of four modes: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and
Division.
Allowed values: 1 to 4
The summing node modes are defined as follows:
Mode 1: Addition:

⎛ ⎛ Sum.node.I / P.1 ⎞ ⎛ Sum.node.I / P.2 ⎞ ⎞

Sum.node.output = ⎜⎜ ⎜ ⎟+⎜ ⎟ ⎟⎟ × 100.00%
⎝ ⎝ Sum.node.scale.1 ⎠ ⎝ Sum.node.scale.2 ⎠ ⎠
Mode 2: Subtraction

⎛ ⎛ Sum.node.I / P.1 ⎞ ⎛ Sum.node.I / P.2 ⎞ ⎞

Sum.node.output = ⎜⎜ ⎜ ⎟−⎜ ⎟ ⎟⎟ × 100.00%
⎝ ⎝ Sum.node.scale.1 ⎠ ⎝ Sum.node.scale.2 ⎠ ⎠
Mode 3: Multiplication

⎛ ⎛ Sum.node.I / P.1 ⎞ ⎛ Sum.node.I / P.2 ⎞ ⎞

Sum.node.output = ⎜⎜ ⎜ ⎟×⎜ ⎟ ⎟⎟ × 100.00%
⎝ ⎝ Sum.node.scale.1 ⎠ ⎝ Sum.node.scale.2 ⎠ ⎠
Mode 4: Division
⎛ Sum.node.I / P.1 ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎝ Sum.node.scale.1 ⎠
Sum.node.output = × 100.00%
⎛ Sum.node.I / P.2 ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎝ Sum.node.scale.2 ⎠
6.40.3 Square Roots
Two square root functions are provided to calculate the square root of the parameter pointed
to by the inputs.
P40.48 - Square Root A Input
Allowed values: 1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter number)
P40.49 – Square Root of Input A
This output is scaled such that an input value of 100.00% (represented internally as 10,000)
will produce a value of 100.00%. Thus an input value of 10.00% will generate an output
value of 31.62%. This is equivalent to taking the square root of 0.1 to produce a value of
0.3162.
If the input scaling is not 0.01%, taking 10,000 as being equivalent to unity will perform the
square root. For example, the square root of 100.0 will be 316.2
If the input is negative the result will be the negated value of the square root of the absolute
value of eh input. For example, an output value of -31.62% will result from an input value of -
10.00%.
P40.50 - Square Root B Input
Allowed values: 1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter number)

Page 6-144 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P40.51 - Square Root of Input B

The value in this parameter is calculated by the same method as for parameter P40.49.
6.40.4 Comparator Function Blocks U, V, W and X
Four comparator blocks are provided to allow the comparison of parameters against other
parameters or against fixed values.
Table 6-19 Comparator Function Block Configuration

Comparator Input 1 Input 2 Fixed Hysteresis Mode Output Status

Ref Flag
U P40.52 P40.53 P40.54 P40.55 P40.56 P40.57 SF132
V P40.58 P40.59 P40.60 P40.61 P40.62 P40.63 SF133
W P40.64 P40.65 P40.66 P40.67 P40.68 P40.69 SF134
X P40.70 P40.71 P40.72 P40.73 P40.74 P40.75 SF135

P40.52 - Comparator U Input 1

P40.58 - Comparator V Input 1
P40.64 - Comparator W Input 1
P40.70 - Comparator X Input 1
Allowed values: 1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter number)
P40.53 - Comparator U Input 2
P40.59 - Comparator V Input 2
P40.65 - Comparator W Input 2
P40.71 - Comparator X Input 2
The default of this parameter is to point to the Fixed Reference parameter for this
comparator,
Allowed values: 1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter number)
P40.54 - Comparator U Fixed Reference
P40.60 - Comparator V Fixed Reference
P40.66 - Comparator W Fixed Reference
P40.72 - Comparator X Fixed Reference
This parameter holds a fixed value that can be used as a comparator threshold. The scaling
and units of this parameter mimic the parameter pointed to by input 1.
Allowed values: same as the input parameter pointer set by Input 1.
P40.55 - Comparator U Hysteresis
P40.61 - Comparator V Hysteresis
P40.67 - Comparator W Hysteresis
P40.73 - Comparator X Hysteresis
This parameter holds a fixed value that is used as the comparator hysteresis. The scaling
and units of this parameter mimic the parameter pointed to by input 1.
Allowed values: same as the input parameter pointer set by Input 1.
P40.56 - Comparator U Mode
P40.62 - Comparator V Mode
P40.68 - Comparator W Mode
P40.74 - Comparator X Mode
The output from the comparator and the comparator state, as a status flag, are determined
by the setting of this parameter.
Allowed values: 1 = ‘Input 1 = Input 2’
2 = ‘Input 1 ≠ Input 2’
3 = ‘Input 1 > Input 2’
4 = ‘Input 1 ≤ Input 2’
5 = ‘Input 1 < Input 2’
6 = ‘Input 1 ≥ Input 2’

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-145
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P40.56 - Comparator U Output

P40.62 - Comparator V Output
P40.68 - Comparator W Output
P40.74 - Comparator X Output
The output is selected from either of the two input values according to the following table.
Comparison is performed using the internal binary representation of the inputs being
compared. The user is responsible for ensuring that the scaling of the two inputs are the
same.
Table 6-20 Comparator Output

Comparator Output Parameter Status Flag

Mode
Input 1 = Input 2 Input 1 when TRUE Else Input 2 ‘On’ when TRUE Else ‘Off’’
i.e. equivalent to Input 2
Input 1 ≠ Input 2 Input 1 when TRUE Else Input 2 ‘On’ when TRUE Else ‘Off’
i.e. equivalent to Input 1
Input 1 > Input 2 Input 1 when TRUE Else Input 2 ‘On’ when TRUE Else ‘Off’
Input 1 ≤ Input 2 Input 1 when TRUE Else Input 2 ‘On’ when TRUE Else ‘Off’
Input 1 < Input 2 Input 1 when TRUE Else Input 2 ‘On’ when TRUE Else ‘Off’
Input 1 ≥ Input 2 Input 1 when TRUE Else Input 2 ‘On’ when TRUE Else ‘Off’

6.40.5 Analogue Switches A, B, C and D

Four analogue switches are provided. Each switch is identical in operation.
Table 6-21 Analogue Switches Configuration

Analogue Input 1 Input 2 Fixed Ref. Fixed Ref Switch State Output
Switch 1 2
A P40.76 P40.77 P40.78 P40.79 P40.80: CF140 P40.81
B P40.82 P40.83 P40.84 P40.85 P40.86: CF141 P40.87
C P40.88 P40.89 P40.90 P40.91 P40.92: CF142 P40.93
D P40.94 P40.95 P40.96 P40.97 P40.98: CF143 P40.99

P40.76 - Switch A Input 1

P40.82 - Switch B Input 1
P40.88 - Switch C Input 1
P40.94 - Switch D Input 1
Allowed values: 1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter number)
The default value of this parameter is to point to the Fixed Reference 1
P40.77 - Switch A Input 2
P40.83 - Switch B Input 2
P40.89 - Switch C Input 2
P40.95 - Switch D Input 2
Allowed values: 1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter number)
The default value of this parameter is to point to the Fixed Reference 2
P40.78 - Fixed Reference A1
P40.84 - Fixed Reference B1
P40.90 - Fixed Reference C1
P40.96 - Fixed Reference D1
This parameter holds a fixed value that can be used to provide a fixed input. The scaling and
units of this parameter do not depend on any other parameter.

Page 6-146 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P40.79 - Fixed Reference A2

P40.85 - Fixed Reference B2
P40.91 - Fixed Reference C2
P40.97 - Fixed Reference D2
This parameter holds a fixed value that can be used to provide a fixed input. The scaling and
units of this parameter depends on the parameter pointed to by the Input 1 parameter.
If Input 1 points to the Fixed Reference 1 then the scaling and units of this parameter are as
for the Fixed Reference 1.
Thus, if it is required to switch between two fixed values and theses values are the Fixed
References 1 and 2 parameters the scaling and units are the same. If it is required to have
one variable input and one fixed input ensure that Input 1 pointer is set to select the variable
value. In this way the fixed input assumes the same scale and units as the variable value.
P40.80 - Control Flag 140 - Switch A State
P40.86 - Control Flag 141 - Switch B State
P40.92 - Control Flag 142 - Switch C State
P40.98 - Control Flag 143 - Switch D State
When the value of the Control Flag is zero, Input 1 is selected otherwise Input 2 is selected.
P40.81 - Switch A Output
P40.87 - Switch B Output
P40.93 - Switch C Output
P40.99 - Switch D Output
This parameter contains the values of the selected input.
The user is responsible for ensuring that the scaling of the two inputs are the same.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-147
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.41 Menu 41 - Programmable Status Word Settings

Menu 41 gives access to parameters required to configure the Programmable Status Words.
When a serial link (or Fieldbus or Ethernet Communications) is used, it is sometimes
desirable to select which of the drive's various Control and Status Flags are monitored via
the serial links. The Control and Status Flags are present in Menu 11, but these might not be
in a suitable form for use.
Selected flags may therefore be copied into two 16-bit Programmable Status Words. Each
bit position within each Status Word has a parameter associated with it. The sources of
these bits are as the drive Control Flag Sources, so that any Digital Input, Serial Link Input,
Status Flag etc. can be selected as a source for the Programmable Status Bit.
6.41.1 Status Word Inputs
P41.00 to P41.15 - Inputs to Status Word 0
P41.16 to P41.31 - Inputs to Status Word 1
These are formatted as follows:
P41.00: Programmable Status Word 0.0
P41.01: Programmable Status Word 0.1
:
P41.15: Programmable Status Word 0.15

P41.16: Programmable Status Word 1.0

P41.17: Programmable Status Word 1.1
:
P41.31: Programmable Status Word 1.15
Allowed values: As given in Table 6-15, page 6-120
6.41.2 Status Word Outputs
P41.32 - Status Word 0 Output
P41.33 - Status Word 1 Output
Each parameter contains a 16-bit Programmable Status Word.
This is displayed in hexadecimal format, with allowed values:
0000h to FFFFh
The output is also displayed in binary, with allowed values:
0000 0000 0000 0000b
To
1111 1111 1111 1111b

Page 6-148 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.42 Menu 42 - Reference Pointers - Source Settings

The pointers are set up by the parameters in Menu 42.
Reference Pointers are included in all of the drive reference tables. These Pointers allow a
reference source to come from any of the drive's internal parameters. Control Block
Diagram 11 indicates which pointers are available for the various reference sources.
Each pointer can generate a reference value, scaled by a Pointer Scale value:
Value of Parameter Po int ed at
Po int er Value = * 100 .00
Po int er Scale

This enables features such as a Fieldbus to be used to reference the drive as required.
The pointers defined are shown at Table 6-22.
6.42.1 Pointers Source
P42.00 to P42.38 - Pointers 1 to 20 Source
These parameters contain the user-selected source parameters pointed at by the reference
pointers.
Allowed values: 1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter number)
P42.40 to P42.52 - Pointers 21 to 27 Source
These parameters contain the user-selected source parameters, for SFE Mode, pointed at
by the reference pointers.
Allowed values: 1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter number)
P42.54 - Pointer 28 Source
This parameter contains the user-selected source parameter pointed at by the reference
pointer for drive Dynamic Braking.
Allowed values: 1.00 to 99.99
P42.56 to P42.74 - Pointers 29 to 38 Source
These parameters contain further user-selected source parameters, for SFE Mode, pointed
at by the reference pointers.
Allowed values: 1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter number)
6.42.2 Pointers Scale
P42.01 to P42.39 - Pointers 1 to 20 Scale
These parameters contain the user-defined scales for the relevant pointers.
Allowed values: -300.00 to +300.00
P42.41 to P42.53 - Pointers 21 to 27 Scale
These parameters contain the user-defined scales, for the SFE Mode, for the relevant
pointers.
Allowed values: -300.00 to +300.00
P42.55 - Pointer 28 Scale
This parameter contains the user-defined scale for Pointer 28 used for drive Dynamic
Braking.
Allowed values: -30 000 to +30 000
P42.57 to P42.75 - Pointers 29 to 38 Scale
These parameters contain further user-defined scales, for the SFE Mode, for the relevant
pointers.
Allowed values: -300.00 to +300.00

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-149
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

Table 6-22 Reference Pointers

Pointer Used For Option Number Pointer Setup

Number Parameters
1 Speed Reference Option 21 for P5.01 to P5.05 P42.00 - Source
P42.01 - Scale
2 Speed Reference Option 21 for P5.01 to P5.05 P42.02 - Source
P42.03 - Scale
3 Reference Sequencer Option 20 for P17.03 to P17.07 P42.04 - Source
P42.05 - Scale
4 PID Setpoint Option 14 for P16.00 P42.06 - Source
P42.07 - Scale
5 PID Feedback Option 12 for P16.01 P42.08 - Source
P42.09 - Scale
6 Trim Reference Option 16 for P19.00 & P19.01 P42.10 - Source
P42.11 - Scale
7 Speed Trim Option 21 for P24.00 P42.12 - Source
P42.13 - Scale
8 Torque Reference Option 21 for P15.04 P42.14 - Source
P42.15 - Scale
9 Torque Limits Option 17 for P8.08 & P8.09 P42.16 - Source
P42.17 - Scale
10 Torque Limits Option 18 for P8.08 & P8.09 P42.18 - Source
P42.19 - Scale
11 Temperature Compensation Option 13 for P12.08 P42.20 - Source
P42.21 - Scale
12 Flux Limit Option 17 for P12.24 P42.22 - Source
P42.23 - Scale
13 Current Limit Option 17 for P3.06 P42.24 - Source
P42.25 - Scale
14 Scalar Current Reference Option 17 for P3.18 & P3.19 P42.26 - Source
P42.27 - Scale
15 Scalar Current Reference Option 18 for P3.18 & P3.19 P42.28 - Source
P42.29 - Scale
16 Position Reference Options 14 & 15 for P37.00 to P42.30 - Source
P37.02 P42.31 - Scale
17 Position Reference Option 15 for P37.00 to P37.02 P42.32 - Source
P42.33 - Scale
18 Tacho Feedback Option 10 for P13.14 P42.34 - Source
P42.35 - Scale
19 Variable Volts Boost Option 11 for P3.25 P42.36 - Source
P42.37 - Scale
20 Reference Shaper Pointer 20 is the only input source P42.38 - Source
P42.39 - Scale
21 SFE Vdc Reference Option 19 for P53.00 P42.40 - Source
P42.41 - Scale
22 SFE Active Current Option 17 for P53.04 P42.42 - Source
Reference P42.43 - Scale
23 SFE Active Current Negative Option 17 for P53.08 P42.44 - Source
Limit P42.45 - Scale
24 SFE Active Current Positive Option 17 for P53.06 P42.46 - Source
Limit P42.47 - Scale
25 SFE Reactive Current Option 17 for P53.10 P42.48 - Source
Reference P42.49 - Scale
26 SFE Reactive Current Option 17 for P53.12 P42.50 - Source
Positive Limit P42.51 - Scale

Page 6-150 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Pointer Used For Option Number Pointer Setup

Number Parameters
27 SFE Reactive Current Option 17 for P53.14 P42.52 - Source
Negative Limit P42.53 - Scale
28 Dynamic Braking Reference Option 21 for P23.14 P42.54 - Source
P42.55 - Scale
29 PPID Set Point Option 19 for P54.20 P42.56 - Source
P42.57- Scale
30 PPID Feedback Option 2 for P54.21 P42.58 - Source
P42.59- Scale
31 Feedforward Option 19 for P54.31 P42.60 - Source
P42.61- Scale
32 Positive Limit Option 19 for P54.33 P42.62 - Source
P42.63- Scale
33 Negative Limit Option 19 for P54.34 P42.64 - Source
P42.65- Scale
34 QPID Set Point Option 19 for P54.40 P42.66 - Source
P42.67- Scale
35 QPID Feedback Option 2 for P54.41 P42.68 - Source
P42.69- Scale
36 Feedforward Option 19 for P54.51 P42.70 - Source
P42.71- Scale
37 Positive Limit Option 19 for P54.53 P42.72 - Source
P42.73- Scale
38 Negative Limit Option 19 for P54.54 P42.74 - Source
P42.75- Scale

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-151
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.43 Menu 43 - Load Fault Detection Window Settings

Menu 43 contains parameters required to configure the Load Fault Detection facility.
This facility detects a fault when the load (defined either as current or torque) falls outside
specified limits. To prevent spurious load fault detection during momentary overloads, the
motor is allowed to operate outside the limits for a specified time.
The envelope of operation is defined by specifying maximum and minimum loads at three
speeds in the forward direction and three in the reverse direction. This envelope is illustrated
at Figure 6-41.
LOAD

MAX. LOAD 3

HIGH LOAD
DISALLOWED
REGION

MIN. LOAD 3
MAX. LOAD 2

MAX. LOAD 1
MIN. LOAD 2
MIN. LOAD 1 LOW LOAD
DISALLOWED
REGION

SPEED

SPEED 1 SPEED 2 SPEED 3

Figure 6-41 Load Fault Limits

P43.00 - Load Fault Action

Defines the action to be taken by a drive when a load fault is detected.
Allowed values:
0 = No action, although Status Flags SF60 (High) or SF61 (Low) are active
1 = Warning (No. 128 Load Fault - High, No. 129 Load Fault - Low)
2 = Trip (No. 64 Load Fault - High, No. 65 Load Fault - Low)
P43.01 - Load Fault Input
Selects whether Drive Current (monitored in P9.06) or Torque Demand (P9.04) are to be
used as the load input.
Allowed Values: 1 = Current
2 = Torque
P43.02 - Load Fault Time
Defines the period of time, in seconds, during which the drive may operate outside the load
fault envelope before action is taken.
Allowed values: 1 to 100 seconds

Page 6-152 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P43.03 - Load Fault Forward Speed 1

P43.06 - Load Fault Forward Speed 2
P43.09 - Load Fault Forward Speed 3
Defines the three forward speeds, as a % of top speed, for specified maximum and
minimum loads.
Allowed values: 1.00% to 100.00%
P43.04 - Load Fault Forward Maximum Load 1
P43.07 - Load Fault Forward Maximum Load 2
P43.10 - Load Fault Forward Maximum Load 3
Defines values of forward maximum load for the three specified forward speeds.
Allowed values: 1.00% to 300.00%
P43.05 - Load Fault Forward Minimum Load 1
P43.08 - Load Fault Forward Minimum Load 2
P43.11 - Load Fault Forward Minimum Load 3
Defines values of forward minimum load for the three specified forward speeds.
Allowed values: 1.00% to 300.00%
P43.12 - Load Fault Reverse Speed 1
P43.15 - Load Fault Reverse Speed 2
P43.18 - Load Fault Reverse Speed 3
Defines the three reverse speeds, as a % of top speed, for specified maximum and
minimum loads.
Allowed values: 1.00% to 100.00%
P43.13 - Load Fault Reverse Maximum Load 1
P43.16 - Load Fault Reverse Maximum Load 2
P43.19 - Load Fault Reverse Maximum Load 3
Defines values of reverse maximum load for the three specified reverse speeds.
Allowed values: 1.00% to 300.00%
P43.14 - Load Fault Reverse Minimum Load 1
P43.17 - Load Fault Reverse Minimum Load 2
P43.20 - Load Fault Reverse Minimum Load 3
Defines values of reverse minimum load for the three specified reverse speeds.
Allowed values: 1.00% to 300.00%

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-153
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.44 Menu 44 - Reference Shaper Settings

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheet 12)
Menu 44 gives access to the parameters required to configure the Reference Shaper. The
Reference Shaper allows a programmable non-linear gain to be imposed on any of the
drive's signals. The output from this function can then be used (via the Pointer mechanism)
to provide any of the drive's references.
The Reference Shaper derives its input via Pointer 20.
The shape of the function is defined by entering ten X-Y points, typically as shown at Figure
6-42. Linear interpolation is then used to calculate the output for any given input. If the input
exceeds the region for which the shape is defined, the output is clamped at the maximum or
minimum defined value.
OUTPUT (Y)

100

90

80 (X10,Y10)
(X9,Y9)
70
(X8,Y8)

60

50

40

30
(X7,Y7)
20

10

INPUT (X)
-100 -90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
-10

-20

-30
(X5,Y5) (X6,Y6)
-40
(X4,Y4)
-50

(X3,Y3) -60

-70

(X1,Y1) -80

-90

-100
(X2,Y2)

Figure 6-42 Typical Gain Characteristic

Note:
If X1 to X10 are not in ascending order, the drive will first sort them. All X values MUST be different
from each other, if any two are the same, the Reference Shaper will give an unpredictable output.
The parameters associated with the Reference Shaper gain characteristic are:
For X co-ordinates For Y co-ordinates
P44.00 X1 P44.01 Y1
P44.02 X2 P44.03 Y2
P44.04 X3 P44.05 Y3
P44.06 X4 P44.07 Y4
P44.08 X5 P44.09 Y5
P44.10 X6 P44.11 Y6
P44.12 X7 P44.13 Y7
P44.14 X8 P44.15 Y8
P44.16 X9 P44.17 Y9
P44.18 X10 P44.19 Y10
P44.00 to P44.18 - Reference Shaper X1 to X10
P44.01 to P44.19 - Reference Shaper Y1 to Y10
These parameters set the co-ordinates of the required gain characteristic.
Allowed values: -100.00% to +100.00%

Page 6-154 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Reference Shaper Input

The shaper input uses the Pointer mechanism described at 6.42. The input source is set by
Pointer 20 (P42.38), which is scaled by P42.39.
P44.20 - Reference Shaper Output
This read-only parameter is the output of the Reference Shaper. It is used to provide the
reference for other features via the Pointer mechanism.
Allowed range: -100.00% to +100.00%

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-155
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.45 Menu 45 - Temperature

Menu 45 is used to individually show all the temperatures in a drive. Menu 11 shows the
temperatures in a 'compressed' form i.e. only the hottest one for each bridge, not all three
phases.
In addition to the 'standard' level of over and under temperature protection of the output
bridge switching devices provided in Menu 45 an extra level of over temperature protection
has been implemented. The standard over temperature protection is based on how hot the
output bridge heat sinks are. If they exceed a pre-defined temperature, the drive trips on
over temperature.
The extra level of over temperature protection, referred to as 'Advanced Temperature
Protection' is based upon a detailed thermal model of a drive's particular configuration of
output bridge heat sink and switching devices. The Advanced Temperature Protection
predicts how hot the actual silicon switching devices become for the load current being
delivered through the devices. If the silicon reaches the maximum allowed silicon
temperature, the drive trips on over temperature.
The Advanced Temperature Protection acts in addition to the standard over temperature
protection. However, for the advanced over temperature protection to work, the
characteristics of the particular drive's output bridge heat sink and switching devices must be
present in the product ID record held in EEPROM - see Menu 90.
Note:
In certain cases, (e.g. such as when upgrading earlier drive software versions, or after replacing drive
electronics), the data within the Product ID record may be incomplete. In these cases Advanced
Temperature Protection will be disabled.
P45.00, P45.01, P45.02 - Output U1, V1, W1 IGBT Temperatures
P45.07, P45.08, P45.09 - Output U2, V2, W2 IGBT Temperatures
P45.10, P45.11, P45.12 - Output U3, V3, W3 IGBT Temperatures
P45.13, P45.14, P45.15 - Output U4, V4, W4 IGBT Temperatures
P45.16, P45.17, P45.18 - Output U5, V5, W5 IGBT Temperatures
P45.19, P45.20, P45.21 - Output U6, V6, W6 IGBT Temperatures
Allowed range: -40˚C to 150˚C
P45.03 and P45.04 - Rectifier 1 and Rectifier 2 Temperatures
Allowed range: -40˚C to 150˚C
P45.05 and P45.06 - DB1 and DB2 Temperatures
Allowed range: -40˚C to 150˚C
P45.22 - Temperature Warn/Trip Type
There could be many causes of an Over-temperature trip which results in the single Over-
temperature trip code 6 (see Table 9-3). Examination of P45.22 and the following parameter
will show the type of trip, the device causing the trip and the temperature at the trip. This
information is latched until the trip cause is removed and a trip reset has been performed.
Because the separate under temperature trip (code 26 - see Table 9-3) can also result from
more than one cause, the under temperature trip is also latched into P45.22 to P45.24. The
first occurrence of either of the over or under temperature trip is latched.
Parameters P45.22 to P45.24 are also used to display the cause of an over or under
temperature warning. In the case where there is more than one warning cause, the last
detected warning is displayed. The details of the warning are not latched and P45.24 will
show the actual warning temperature. As soon as the warning condition clears, the
parameter display reverts to the default. Latched trip details over-ride any warning
information.
Allowed values for four temperature states are:
0 = None : No temperature trips or warnings active
1 = Over Temperature : A heat sink over temperature situation exists
2 = Under Temperature : A heat sink under temperature situation exists

Page 6-156 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

3 = Rate of Temperature Rise : A heat sink is rising too fast - check the fans
4 = Junction Temperature : A silicon device over temperature situation exists
P45.23 - Temperature Warn/Trip Cause
Values for the possible cause of temperature trip are:

0 = None : No temperature trips or warnings active

1 = Rect 1 : Input Rectifier Bridge Number 1
2 = Rect 2 : Input Rectifier Bridge Number 2
3 = O/P U1 : U Phase Output Bridge Number 1
4 = O/P V1 : V Phase Output Bridge Number 1
5 = O/P W1 : W Phase Output Bridge Number 1
6 = DB 1 : Dynamic Brake Number 1
7 = O/P U2 : U Phase Output Bridge Number 2 (DELTAs only)
8 = O/P V2 : V Phase Output Bridge Number 2 (DELTAs only)
9 = O/P W2 : W Phase Output Bridge Number 2 (DELTAs only)
10 = O/P U3 : U Phase Output Bridge Number 3 (DELTAs only)
11 = O/P V3 : V Phase Output Bridge Number 3 (DELTAs only)
12 = O/P W3 : W Phase Output Bridge Number 3 (DELTAs only)
13 = DB 2 : Dynamic Brake Number 2
14 = O/P U4 : U Phase Output Bridge Number 4 (DELTAs only)
15 = O/P V4 : V Phase Output Bridge Number 4 (DELTAs only)
16 = O/P W4 : W Phase Output Bridge Number 4 (DELTAs only)
17 = O/P U5 : U Phase Output Bridge Number 5 (DELTAs only)
18 = O/P V5 : V Phase Output Bridge Number 5 (DELTAs only)
19 = O/P W5 : W Phase Output Bridge Number 5 (DELTAs only)
20 = O/P U6 : U Phase Output Bridge Number 6 (DELTAs only)
21 = O/P V6 : V Phase Output Bridge Number 6 (DELTAs only)
22 = O/P W6 : W Phase Output Bridge Number 6 (DELTAs only)
23 = ELECTRONICS : Drive Electronics
P45.24 - Temperature at Warn/Trip
P45.24 displays the temperature of the warning or the temperature when the trip occurred.
It displays 'Uncollated' if no warning or trip situation exists or if the trip is due to incomplete
Product ID information.
Allowed range: -40˚C to 150˚C
P45.25-P45.27
P45.25 and P45.26 are the temperatures of the hottest IGBT, and the hottest free wheel
diode respectively. The temperature is displayed, as a percentage of the maximum
permissible in percent degree C. P45.27 is simply the greater of P45.25 and P45.26; it is
displayed for convenience so that it is easy identify which is the limiting device.
In general the free wheel diode will be the hotter when the transistor bridge is in
regeneration (power flow is into the DC link), and the IGBT will be the hotter when the
transistor bridge is in the motoring condition (power flow is out of the DC Link).

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-157
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.46 Menu 46 - AC Loss Ridethrough (Vector Control Only)

Early versions of MV3000e Firmware 3 supported AC Loss Ridethrough in VVVF mode.
This no longer applies; this feature can now only be used in Vector Control Modes.
6.46.1 Introduction to AC Loss Ridethrough
AC Loss Ridethrough is a feature, whereby, in the event of the ac mains loss, or dip, the
drive attempts to maintain its DC Link voltage via regeneration from the motor (and load)
inertia.
This means that the feature is only suitable for high inertia loads and if used in applications
where the load inertia is low it cannot be guaranteed to work.
6.46.2 AC Loss Ridethrough Invocation Mode
Setting either parameter P35.12 or parameter P46.00 - ‘AC Loss Ridethrough’ to ‘enabled’,
enables Ridethrough.
The drive monitors the DC link voltage and invokes ac loss ridethrough when either:
1. The DC link falls below a predefined ridethrough invocation level, and/or the rate of
fall of DC link is greater that a predefined amount.
2. Direct measurement of loss of the ac mains supply using a Mains Voltage Monitor
(MVM).
Either of these indicates that the mains supply has been lost, and the drive enters the
ridethrough mode. The drive will invoke ac loss ridethrough via a falling DC Link voltage
even if MVM mode is selected, if the DC Link condition occurs earlier. The drive will use the
MVM invocation if P46.00 (P35.12) = 2 and if the MVM unit is actually fitted.
The drive then attempts to control the DC Link voltage, by regenerating (a small amount)
from the load inertia. Involved in this DC Link voltage control is a PI loop.
P46.00 - AC Loss Ridethrough
Allowed values: 1 = Enabled from Vdc
2 = Enabled from MVM
Table 6-23 AC Loss Ridethrough Invocation

P46.00 MVM Unit Present MVM Unit Absent

1 = Enabled from Vdc Ridethrough invoked by falling DC Ridethrough invoked by falling DC
Link only Link only
2 = Enabled from MVM Ridethrough invoked by falling DC Ridethrough invoked by falling DC
Link, or falling mains voltage, Link only
whichever is earlier

6.46.3 Mains Voltage Monitor Unit (MVM) 4

The input circuit of the drive contains some capacitance. Due to this capacitance, when
ridethrough mode is tested, say, by opening an isolator on the drive input, the mains supply
signal may be slow in decaying. A small (approximately 10kW 3-phase load may need to be
applied on the drive side of the isolator to ensure that the MVM registers the ac loss quickly.
On an air-cooled drive the fans and fan transformers may be sufficient to provide this load.
In real site situations, where ridethrough is invoked by a mains dip, other common loads on
the mains supply will provide the load to ensure that the loss of mains is registered.

3
For firmware versions V11.83 and earlier, this feature had a particular firmware architecture and could not be guaranteed to work,
especially under conditions of high drive load prior to the loss of the mains supply.
For firmware versions V11.84 and later the MV3000e firmware has been modified to give improved ac loss ridethrough
performance.
From V11.84 and above (until further notice) ridethrough operation in VVVF mode is disallowed.
When upgrading to V11.84 the drive will force parameter edits to be lost due to the change in default values for ridethrough
operation. Customer edits may be retained by saving/storing edits to/from the keypad or Drive Coach. Edits should NOT be
saved/restored to the drive internal backup set.
4
On rectifier fed DELTA based MV3000e drives that are required to be in motor control mode, when an MVM unit is fitted then the
default control mode will be SFE mode, (i.e. P99.01 = 4) by default. This will need to be returned to option 2 (Vector Control).

Page 6-158 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.46.4 AC Loss Ridethrough Set Up

P46.01 - Nominal Mains Voltage
This parameter is used by the ac loss ridethrough to set various voltages to internally
configure the feature. It is a repeat of parameter P12.02, changing the value in P46.00 will
also change it in P12.02.
Allowed values: 300 to 900V
P46.02 - Mains Voltage Scaling
This parameter is used to allow for an instrumentation transformer to feed the Mains Voltage
Monitor unit. It can also be used for calibration of residual errors in the mains amplitude
measurement.
Allowed values: 10.0 to 1000.0%
P46.03 - Measured Mains Voltage
This parameter is only valid if an MVM unit is fitted. It displays the measured rms mains
voltage.
P46.04 - Measured Mains Amplitude
This parameter is only valid if an MVM unit is fitted. It displays the measured mains voltage
as a percentage of the value set in parameter P46.01.
P46.05 – Ridethrough Threshold
This parameter is used to set (as a percentage of the value in P46.01) the mains voltage at
which the loss of the mains is determined and ridethrough is invoked.
Setting this parameter’s value too high will result in erroneous invocation of ridethrough.
Allowed values: 0.00 to 100.00%
P46.06 – Mains Filter Bandwidth
The mains voltage is filtered at this bandwidth in the drive firmware. This parameter should
be set as high as possible unless a very corrupt mains supply results in erroneous
ridethrough invocation.
Setting this parameter too low will result in very slow detection of mains loss.
Allowed values: 0 = 100Hz
1 = 200Hz
2 = 400Hz
3 = 800Hz
P46.07 - Ridethrough Active
This is a read only parameter and can be viewed to identify when the drive is in ridethrough.
It can, if required, be put into the History Record to facilitate fault finding in ridethrough
mode.
P46.08 - Mains Loss Action
When ridethrough is invoked by loss of the mains supply, then the drive will issue a warning
indicating loss of mains. If the warning is not wanted, this parameter can be set to produce
no warning.
Allowed values: 0 = Ignore
1 = Warn only
P46.20 - Vdc Controller Bandwidth
This parameter is used to set the bandwidth of the DC Link controller when ridethrough is
invoked.
Allowed values: 0 to 200rads/s

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-159
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.46.5 DC Link Controller – Calculation of Gains

The drive will automatically calculate the correct P and I gains for the ridethrough DC Link
controller. The value of these gains depend on:
DC Link capacitance
Drive current and voltage ratings
Motor power rating
Number of DELTA modules fitted.
It is possible to manually adjust the P and I gain terms. For instance, if there is extra DC Link
capacitance present, of which the firmware is unaware, and unsatisfactory DC Link control
occurs then the P and I gain terms can be manually adjusted.
It is recommended that the automatic calculation be employed.
P46.21 - Vdc Controller Gains - Auto-manual
To manually adjust the DC Link controller gains this parameter must be set = 1.
Allowed values: 0 = Automatic Adjust
1 = Manual Adjust
P46.22 - DC Link Controller Kp
This parameter is the proportional gain of the DC Link controller when the drive is in
ridethrough.
Its value is automatically calculated when parameter P42.21 = 0
P46.23 - DC Link Controller Ki
This parameter is the integral gain of the DC Link controller when the drive is in ridethrough.
Its value is automatically calculated when parameter P42.21 = 0

Page 6-160 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.47 Menu 47 - Second Logic Menu

(Refer to Control Block Diagram Sheets 13 and 15)
Menu 47 gives access to the parameters required to configure the twelve General Purpose
Logic Blocks I to T and a special purpose Brake Logic Block.
Four identical logic blocks, I to L, each contain the following functions:
Comparator: This allows any variable to be compared to
a fixed threshold.
Delay: Allows the output of the comparator block to have its
rising edge delayed.
Selectable Boolean Function: Allows the delay output to be combined with two other
digital signals (Control Flags).
Each of the logic block functions outputs to a Status Flag, and the inputs come from the
previous function and Control Flags.
Each of the four logic blocks are identified by the letters I to L and the parameters, Control
Flags and Status Flags for each logic block are described in the following sections:
A second group of eight logic blocks, M to T, are described at 6.47.5.
Note:
Each of the logic blocks is scanned once every 10 ms. If the blocks are interconnected (by patching
the output Status Flags of one logic block to the input Control Flags of another), this will take an
additional scan to take effect.
6.47.1 Logic Block I
P47.00 - Comparator I Input
This parameter can point the comparator input at any drive parameter.
Allowed values: 1.00 to 99.99 (any parameter number)
The output from Comparator I can be selected as an input to P47.04 and is echoed in Status
Flag 112.
P47.01 - Comparator I Threshold
A fixed value whose range changes to match that of the parameter that is chosen as the
comparator input.
P47.02 - Comparator I Hysteresis
A fixed value whose range changes depending on the parameter chosen as the comparator
input. The Hysteresis is a % value, producing a band of Hysteresis on either side of the
threshold e.g. for a 1% hysteresis you would get Comparator Output SF17 set when
Comparator input = Threshold setting ± 0.5%.

+0.5 %

Threshold

- 0.5 %

P47.03 - Comparator I Mode

The comparator produces a high output under the following conditions, when selected by
P47.03
Allowed values:
1 = Input = Threshold
2 = Input ≠ Threshold

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-161
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

3 = Input > Threshold (signed)

4 = Input ≤ Threshold (signed)
5 = Input < Threshold (signed)
6 = Input ≥ Threshold (signed)
7 to 10 = As 3 to 6 but the absolute value is used.
P47.04 - Delay I Input Source
Selects the input to the Delay I module
Allowed values: 1 = Comparator
2 = Control Flag 144 (P47.07)
P47.05 - Delay I Time
The output from Delay I is used as an input to the configurable Logic Block I (P47.06) and is
echoed in Status Flag 113.
Allowed values: 0.0secs to 600.0secs
P47.06 - Logic Block I Functions
The Boolean function of Logic Block I is selectable by the value entered into P47.06.
Permitted values:
1 = Three Input AND
2 = Three Input NAND
3 = Three Input OR
4 = Three Input NOR
5 = Three Input XOR
6 = Three Input XNOR
7 to 12 = Two Input versions of 1 to 6
3-input Boolean functions use the outputs from Delay I (P47.05), and Control Flags 145
(P47.08) and 146 (P47.09) as inputs.
2-input Boolean functions use Control Flags 144 and 145 as inputs. The output is Status
Flag 114.
P47.07 - Control Flag 144 - Delay I Input
When selected by P47.04, applies a rising edge to the Delay I module input.
P47.08 - Control Flag 145 - Logic Block I Input 1
P47.09 - Control Flag 146 - Logic Block I Input 2
These control flags provide inputs to Logic Block I.
6.47.2 Logic Block J
P47.10 to P47.16 - Logic Block J Functions
The description of these parameters is as for parameters P47.00 to P47.06 in Logic Block I.
Logic Block J is identical to Logic Block I except that Control Flags 147 to 149 are inputs and
Status Flags 115 to 117 are outputs.
P47.17 to P47.19 - Control Flags 147 to 149
These Control Flags operate on Logic Block J exactly as CF144 to CF146 operate on Logic
Block I:
Control Flag 147 - Delay J Input
Control Flag 148 - Logic Block J Input 1
Control Flag 149 - Logic Block J Input 2
6.47.3 Logic Block K
P47.20 to P47.26 - Logic Block K Functions
The description of these parameters is as for parameters P47.00 to P47.06 in Logic Block I.
Logic Block K is identical to Logic Block I except that Control Flags 150 to 152 are inputs
and Status Flags 118 to 120 are outputs.

Page 6-162 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P47.27 to P47.29 - Control Flags 150 to 152

These Control Flags operate on Logic Block K exactly as CF144 to CF146 operate on Logic
Block I:
Control Flag 150 - Delay K Input
Control Flag 151 - Logic Block K Input 1
Control Flag 152 - Logic Block K Input 2
6.47.4 Logic Block L
P47.30 to P47.36 - Logic Block K Functions
The description of these parameters is as for parameters P47.00 to P47.06 in Logic Block I.
Logic Block L is identical to Logic Block I except that Control Flags 153 to 155 are inputs
and Status Flags 121 to 123 are outputs.
P47.37 to P47.39 - Control Flags 153 to 155
These Control Flags operate on Logic Block L exactly as CF144 to CF146 operate on Logic
Block I:
Control Flag 153 - Delay L Input
Control Flag 154 - Logic Block L Input 1
Control Flag 155 - Logic Block L Input 2
6.47.5 Logic Blocks M, N, O, P, Q, R, S and T
There are eight logic blocks, each of which comprises a selectable 4-input Boolean function.
The inputs to these Boolean functions are four Control Flags and the outputs are to Status
Flags. There are five parameters for each logic block.
Table 6-24 Logic Blocks M, N, O, P, Q, R, S and T

Logic Function Control Flag Parameter Status Flag

Block
CF156 P47.41
CF157 P47.42
M P47.40 SF124
CF158 P47.43
Cf159 P47.44
CF160 P47.46
CF161 P47.47
N P47.45 SF125
CF162 P47.48
CF163 P47.49
CF164 P47.51
CF165 P47.52
O P47.50 SF126
CF166 P47.53
CF167 P47.54
CF168 P47.56
CF169 P47.57
P P47.55 SF127
CF170 P47.58
CF171 P47.59
CF172 P47.61
CF173 P47.62
Q P47.60 SF128
CF174 P47.63
CF175 P47.64
CF176 P47.66
CF177 P47.67
R P47.65 SF129
CF178 P47.68
CF179 P47.69

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-163
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

Logic Function Control Flag Parameter Status Flag

Block
CF180 P47.71
CF181 P47.72
S P47.70 SF130
CF182 P47.73
CF183 P47.74
CF184 P47.76
CF185 P47.77
T P47.75 SF131
CF186 P47.78
CF187 P47.79

6.47.6 Logic Block M

P47.40 - Logic Block M Functions
The Boolean function of Logic Block M is selectable by means of the value entered into
parameter P47.40.
Allowed values:
1 = AND
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
Two and three input logic functions can be realised by setting the unused inputs to high
(1.000) or low (0.000) depending on the function type. For AND functions set the unused
inputs high. For OR and XOR functions set the unused inputs low.
Status Flag 124 is the output.
P47.41 - Control Flag 156 - Logic Block M Input 1
P47.42 - Control Flag 157 - Logic Block M Input 2
P47.43 - Control Flag 158 - Logic Block M Input 3
P47.44 - Control Flag 159 - Logic Block M Input 4
These flags provide inputs to Logic Block M.
6.47.7 Logic Block N
P47.45 - Logic Block N Functions
The Boolean function of Logic Block N is selectable by means of the value entered into
parameter P47.45.
Allowed values:
1 = AND
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
Two and three input logic functions can be realised by setting the unused inputs to high
(1.000) or low (0.000) depending on the function type. For AND functions set the unused
inputs high. For OR and XOR functions set the unused inputs low.
Status Flag 125 is the output.

Page 6-164 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P47.46 - Control Flag 160 - Logic Block N Input 1

P47.47 - Control Flag 161 - Logic Block N Input 2
P47.48 - Control Flag 162 - Logic Block N Input 3
P47.49 - Control Flag 163 - Logic Block N Input 4
These flags provide inputs to Logic Block N.
6.47.8 Logic Block O
P47.50 - Logic Block O Functions
The Boolean function of Logic Block O is selectable by means of the value entered into
parameter P47.50.
Allowed values:
1 = AND
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
Two and three input logic functions can be realised by setting the unused inputs to high
(1.000) or low (0.000) depending on the function type. For AND functions set the unused
inputs high. For OR and XOR functions set the unused inputs low.
Status Flag 126 is the output.
P47.51 - Control Flag 164 - Logic Block O Input 1
P47.52 - Control Flag 165 - Logic Block O Input 2
P47.53 - Control Flag 166 - Logic Block O Input 3
P47.54 - Control Flag 167 - Logic Block O Input 4
These flags provide inputs to Logic Block O.
6.47.9 Logic Block P
P47.55 - Logic Block P Functions
The Boolean function of Logic Block P is selectable by means of the value entered into
parameter P47.55.
Allowed values:
1 = AND
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
Two and three input logic functions can be realised by setting the unused inputs to high
(1.000) or low (0.000) depending on the function type. For AND functions set the unused
inputs high. For OR and XOR functions set the unused inputs low.
Status Flag 127 is the output.
P47.56 - Control Flag 168 - Logic Block P Input 1
P47.57 - Control Flag 169 - Logic Block P Input 2
P47.58 - Control Flag 170 - Logic Block P Input 3
P47.59 - Control Flag 171 - Logic Block P Input 4
These flags provide inputs to Logic Block P.
6.47.10 Logic Block Q
P47.60 - Logic Block Q Functions
The Boolean function of Logic Block Q is selectable by means of the value entered into
parameter P47.60.
Allowed values:

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-165
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

1 = AND
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
Two and three input logic functions can be realised by setting the unused inputs to high
(1.000) or low (0.000) depending on the function type. For AND functions set the unused
inputs high. For OR and XOR functions set the unused inputs low.
Status Flag 128 is the output.
P47.61 - Control Flag 172 - Logic Block Q Input 1
P47.62 - Control Flag 173 - Logic Block Q Input 2
P47.63 - Control Flag 174 - Logic Block Q Input 3
P47.64 - Control Flag 175 - Logic Block Q Input 4
These flags provide inputs to Logic Block Q.
6.47.11 Logic Block R
P47.65 - Logic Block R Functions
The Boolean function of Logic Block R is selectable by means of the value entered into
parameter P47.65.
Allowed values:
1 = AND
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
Two and three input logic functions can be realised by setting the unused inputs to high
(1.000) or low (0.000) depending on the function type. For AND functions set the unused
inputs high. For OR and XOR functions set the unused inputs low.
Status Flag 129 is the output.
P47.66 - Control Flag 176 - Logic Block R Input 1
P47.67 - Control Flag 177 - Logic Block R Input 2
P47.68 - Control Flag 178 - Logic Block R Input 3
P47.69 - Control Flag 179 - Logic Block R Input 4
These flags provide inputs to Logic Block R.
6.47.12 Logic Block S
P47.70 - Logic Block S Functions
The Boolean function of Logic Block S is selectable by means of the value entered into
parameter P47.70.
Allowed values:
1 = AND
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
Two and three input logic functions can be realised by setting the unused inputs to high
(1.000) or low (0.000) depending on the function type. For AND functions set the unused
inputs high. For OR and XOR functions set the unused inputs low.
Status Flag 130 is the output.

Page 6-166 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P47.71 - Control Flag 180 - Logic Block S Input 1

P47.72 - Control Flag 181 - Logic Block S Input 2
P47.73 - Control Flag 182 - Logic Block S Input 3
P47.74 - Control Flag 183 - Logic Block S Input 4
These flags provide inputs to Logic Block S.
6.47.13 Logic Block T
P47.75 - Logic Block T Functions
The Boolean function of Logic Block T is selectable by means of the value entered into
parameter P47.75.
Allowed values:
1 = AND
2 = NAND
3 = OR
4 = NOR
5 = XOR
6 = XNOR
Two and three input logic functions can be realised by setting the unused inputs to high
(1.000) or low (0.000) depending on the function type. For AND functions set the unused
inputs high. For OR and XOR functions set the unused inputs low.
Status Flag 131 is the output.
P47.76 - Control Flag 184 - Logic Block T Input 1
P47.77 - Control Flag 185 - Logic Block T Input 2
P47.78 - Control Flag 186 - Logic Block T Input 3
P47.79 - Control Flag 187 - Logic Block T Input 4
These flags provide inputs to Logic Block T.
6.47.14 Special Brake Logic Function
This brake control is for operational purposes only and must form part of the
functional safety of the system. If application of the brakes is required for the
functional safety of the system, then there must be a means of applying the brakes
(and keeping them applied) independently of the MV3000e

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-167
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 6-168 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P47.85 Trq Prove Time

Latched Run
P47.81 138
Run Request (0.000)
188 S
Latch A
R & Torque Prove Fail T222

A
Active Current A
A?B
& S
Latch
Torque Prove OK

B 137
B '>' R
Holding Torque OK
P47.83 Torque Prove Thresh 136

A Release Reference

B & 139

P47.82 C
(0.000)
Brake Release i/p 189

A
P47.86 Release Ref Timer
B OR Brake Release Req

C 140

P47.80 Enable Brake Function

A
& S
Latch
B
R

A
Drive Tripped B A
A OR &
&
Brake Release Fail T223
C B
B Drive Stopped D

Speed Feedback A At Zero Speed

A?B 141
P47.84 Zero Speed Threshold
B '<'

P47.87 Brake Holdoff Time

P47.89 Start Reset Time P47.90 Release Fail Time

P47.78 Brake Release Time

Figure 6-43 Brake Function Internal Logic

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-169
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 6-170 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.47.15 Brake Function Sequence of Operation

With reference to the above diagram, Figure 6-43, the following brake release sequence is
supported.
1. The drive is assumed to have completed its power up sequence and to have no trips
present.
2. The drive is stopped and the brake is on.
3. A run request is required at the Run Request Control Flag (CF188). Using general-
purpose logic this can be derived from raise/lower digital inputs, from throttle
contacts, or by analogue speed reference greater than a minimum value.
4. The run request is latched and the Latched Run status flag (SF138) may be
connected to the start/stop control flags to initiate a motor start.
5. Torque Prove OK (SF137) will be at 0 until the drive can prove it can generate
sufficient torque to support the load when the brake is released. The torque is
proved by selecting a torque proving speed, default of 10%, at a reduced torque
limit, default of 15%.
6. With the brake still on the drive is now running with 10% speed reference and 15%
torque limit. The Active Current is monitored; if it becomes greater than the Torque
Prove Threshold (default of 15%) before the Torque Prove Timeout timer (default of
5s) has elapsed, the latched Torque Prove OK status flag (SF137) becomes true 5.
7. If Torque Prove OK does not set before the Torque Prove Timeout has elapsed the
drive will trip on Torque Prove Fail (Trip Code 222).
8. When Torque Prove OK is true for the Brake Release Time (default of 1s) the
latched Brake Release Request status flag (SF140) becomes true. This flag is to be
connected to the digital output used to release/apply the brake.

Once the Torque Prove OK flag goes true, the drive should be commanded to apply
zero speed reference at the normal torque limit (default of 100%) until the brake is
released. This is achieved by connecting the negated value of the Release
Reference status flag (SF139) to parameter P5.10, i.e. P5.10 = -2.139.

Parameter P5.04 - ‘Speed Reference Source 4’ needs to be set to one of the fixed
zero references.

The torque limit will switch to the normal value contained in parameter P8.00 as a
consequence of the change of state of the Torque Prove OK status flag.
9. If the brake is not released before the Brake Release Timer has expired the Brake
Release Fail trip occurs and the drive trips.

For a monitored brake, the Brake Release Input control flag (CF189) is connected to
the digital input used to indicate status of the brake.

For an unmonitored brake the control flag is set = 2.140, the Brake Release
Request status flag.
10. If the brake stays released longer than the Release Reference Timer, and the Run
Request and Torque Prove OK are both still true, the Release Reference status flag
(SF139) goes true.

This status flag is used to select the normal speed reference by connection it
parameter P5.08 - ‘Reference 2 Selector’ and setting P5.02 - ‘Speed Reference 2
Source’ to be the normal reference source.

5
The Torque Prove OK Status Flag is used to select the torque proving limit value (P8.07). It is also intended that it be used to
select the Torque Prove Speed Reference (typically P5.09). In both cases the inverted state for the Torque Prove OK status flag is
required, i.e. specify a value of –2.137 for P5.09 and P8.07.
P5.03 - ‘Reference Source 3’ needs to be set to point at a fixed reference of 10%. P8.02 - ‘Positive Torque Limit 2’ will normally be
set to 15% assuming that its associated scale, P8.10, is at 100%.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-171
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

11. At this point the drive is running with full torque and the normal active speed
reference as chosen by the user.
12. Zero speed demand will cause the motor to decelerate towards zero speed. When
the speed feedback (P9.01) is less than the zero speed comparator threshold the At
Zero Speed status flag (SF141) goes true.

If the Run Request is derived from having a non-zero speed demand, the Run
Request will be false (zero).

if both of these conditions remain, (i.e. zero demand and at zero speed) for longer
than the Brake Holdoff Time, the brake will be applied.
13. When the Brake Holdoff Time expires and the Start Reset Timer has elapsed the
brake logic will be reset, i.e. requiring the Torque Prove and Brake Release
sequence to be repeated before allowing normal speed control.

if the Latched Run status flag is used to start/stop the drive, the drive will be
stopped.
If a drive trip occurs;
Or
The motor speed has been below the zero speed threshold for longer than the Brake Holdoff
Time AND Run Request is false
Or
The Brake Function is disabled
Then
1. The Brake Release Request status flag (SF140) is set to zero by holding the brake
release latch in reset.
2. The Torque Prove OK (SF137) and Latched Run (SF138) status flags are held at
zero by holding the run latch and torque prove latch in reset.
3. As a consequence of the change of state of the Torque Prove OK status flag the
Release Reference status flag (SF139) also goes to zero.
6.47.16 Brake Function Parameters
P47.80 - Enable Brake Function
The brake logic function is held in reset until enabled by this parameter. Status flags 138 to
141 are held at their logic zero state until the brake logic function is enabled.
P47.81 - Control Flag 188 - Run Request
This parameter is required to be connected to the appropriate run signal. This run signal
can, typically, be derived from asking for a speed greater than zero.
P47.82 - Control Flag 189 - Brake Release Input
This parameter is either connected to the digital input used to monitor the state of the brake,
or, it is connected to the Brake Release Request status flag if brake monitoring is not
available.
P47.83 - Torque Prove Threshold
This parameter is set to the value of the Active Current (% of motor full load current) at
which the Holding Torque OK status flag (SF137) goes true.
At this threshold the Torque Prove OK status flag is normally latched and the brake release
sequence continues.
P47.84 - Zero Speed Threshold
This parameter is set to the value of speed feedback (% of Top Speed) below which the At
Zero Speed status flag goes true.

Page 6-172 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P47.85 - Torque Prove Time

From the application of a Run Request the torque must achieve the Torque Prove Threshold
within the time set in this parameter, otherwise, the drive will trip on Torque Prove Fail.
Allowed values: 0.0 to 600.0s
P47.86 - Release Reference Time
This parameter is set to the time to wait after the Brake Release Input goes true before
allowing normal speed demand.
While this timer is active it is usual to apply a zero speed reference with a full torque limit.
P47.87 - Brake Holdoff Time
This parameter is set to the time to wait at zero speed before the brake is applied. In the
case of a crane this allows the operator to stop and then stop the hoist within this time
without the brake being applied.
Allowed values: 0.0 to 600.0s
P47.88 - Brake Release Time
This parameter is set to the time to wait after proving the torque capability before allowing
the normal speed reference to be applied. During this time zero speed reference is applied
while the brake is released. Thus at the moment the brake is released there should be a
smooth transition from zero speed to demanded speed.
Allowed values: 0.0 to 600.0s
P47.89 - Start Reset Time
This parameter is set to the time to wait after the Brake Holdoff time expires before the
Brake Logic Function block resets the Latched Run and Torque Prove OK status flags.
Allowed values: 0.0 to 600.0s
P47.90 - Release Fail Time
From the Brake Release Request going true, if the Brake release Input does not occur within
the time set in this parameter the drive will trip on Brake Release Fail (Trip Code 223)
Note:
If the Brake Release Input goes false after this time, and the Brake Release Request is still true the trip
occurs.
Allowed values: 0.0 to 600.0s
P47.91 - Preset Parameters
This parameter is used to pre-configure other drive parameters to values typical for brake
applications. Be aware that the previous values of these parameters will be overwritten.
The process is initiated by selecting a value of 1. It only possible to select 1 if the Brake
Function is enabled, i.e. P47.80 = 1. The action has to be confirmed before the command is
executed. After execution the parameter value returns to zero.
The following drive parameters are changed

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-173
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

Table 6-25 Brake Logic Preset Parameters

Par No. Description New Value

P47.81
to Brake Logic Parameters Default
P47.90
P5.01 Speed Reference 1 Source Default
P5.02 Speed Reference 2 Source Default
P5.03 Speed Reference 3 Source 22 = Pointer 2
P5.04 Speed Reference 4 Source 13 = Fixed Reference 0%
P5.07 CF4: Reference1 Selector 2.139 - Release Reference Status Flag
P5.08 CF5: Reference 2 Selector 2.139 - Release Reference Status Flag
P5.09 CF6: Reference 3 Selector -2.137 - NOT Torque Prove OK Status Flag
P5.10 CF7: Reference 4 Selector -2139 - NOT Release Reference Status Flag
P8.00 Torque Limit (Also positive torque limit 1) Default
P8.02 Positive Torque Limit 2 15.00%
P8.07 CF21: Torque Limit Selection -2.137 - NOT Torque Prove OK Status Flag
P8.08 Positive Torque Limit Scale Source 1 Default
P8.10 Positive Torque Limit Scale Source 2 Default
P21.15 Fixed Reference #15 10.00%
P42.02 Pointer 2 Source P21.15
P42.03 Pointer 2 scale 100.00%

Page 6-174 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.48 Menu 50 - Basic SFE Set-up Menu

Menu 50 is used for the Basic SFE Set-up facility. This mode is only visible when SFE
mode has been selected via P99.01.
P50.00 - DC Link Voltage Reference
This is the reference value for the DC link voltage controller. The SFE will attempt to
maintain this value of DC link voltage at all times, unless 'active current limits' are reached.
See parameters P50.03 and P50.04.
By default, P50.00 can be edited directly to change the DC link reference voltage. However,
P53.00 can be edited such that the DC link reference voltage can be adjusted indirectly. If
P53.00 is edited such that P50.00 is no longer the source of DC link voltage reference,
P50.00 becomes a monitoring point for DC link voltage reference. The limits of P50.00 are
applied to that indirect reference.
If the alternative DC link voltage feedback is selected via P53.02 and the SFE subsequently
undergoes a power-up reset, the minimum permissible DC link voltage reference will reduce
to 200V. Returning P53.02 to be a standard DC link feedback and performing a further
power-up reset will reset the minimum DC link voltage reference to the level given at 5.4.45.
P50.01 - Line Choke Inductance
This parameter is set to the inductance, per phase, of the line choke. Value is to be entered
in µH units. See also P52.13.
P50.02 - DC Fed Drives Rating
This parameter allows the SFE to calculate the correct DC link controller gains.

Value to enter is
∑ nominal current rating of all Machine Bridges ( A) × 100%
nominal current rating of SFE ( A)

P50.03 and P50.04 - Active Current Positive and Negative Limits

These parameters allow the active current sourced to, or drawn from the mains to be limited.
Note that if the ac current becomes clamped by either limit, the DC link voltage cannot be
maintained at its reference value. The values entered are a percentage of the nominal
current rating of the SFE, given in P99.05.
By default, P50.03 and P50.04 can be edited directly to change the active current limits.
However, P53.06 and P53.08 can be edited such that the active current limits can be
adjusted indirectly. When not configured as the source of the active current limits, P50.03
and P50.04 become monitoring points for the active current limits.
P50.05, P50.06, P50.07 and P50.08 - Control Flags
Control Flags are listed at Table 5-2. Four Control Flags, from the complete set, are used
with the SFE product as parameters P50.05 to P50.08, described as follows:
P50.05 CF0 Normal Stop
P50.06 CF1 Start
P50.07 CF25 Output Enable/Run
P50.08 CF116 Keypad/Remote.
P50.09 - Nominal Mains Supply
This parameter is the same as parameter P12.02 – Menu 12 is not available in SFE Mode.
The parameter is required to be set to the nominal mains supply voltage (Vrms) as various
thresholds are expressed as a percentage of this value.
Allowed values: 300 to 900V

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-175
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.49 Menu 51 - Basic SFE Monitoring Menu

Menu 51 is used for the SFE Monitoring facility. This mode is only visible when SFE mode
has been selected via P99.01.
P51.00 - DC Link Voltage
Parameter P51.00 indicates the DC link voltage.
P51.01 and P51.02 - Mains Current Feedback
These parameters indicate the ac rms line current drawn from the mains supply via the SFE:
P51.01 indicates the current in amps
P51.02 indicates the current as a percentage of the SFE nominal current
rating, as indicated in P99.05.
P51.03 - Mains Frequency
The SFE is phase insensitive and will operate with any phase rotation, provided that there is
consistency of phasing within the various elements of the SFE. However, the SFE does
indicate the rotation of phases that it has detected.
If the mains frequency displayed in P51.03 is positive, the SFE has detected a positive
phase sequence (A-B-C, or R-S-T sequence).
If the mains frequency displayed in P51.03 is negative, the SFE has detected a negative
phase sequence (C-B-A, or T-S-R sequence).
P51.04 - Measured Mains Voltage
Parameter P51.04 indicates the ac rms line-to-line voltage of the mains supply.
P51.05 - PWM Volts
Parameter P51.05 indicates the voltage, in volts rms, at the PWM terminals of the inverter.
P51.06 - Power from Mains
Parameter 51.06 indicates the power flow from the mains to the SFE.
P51.07 - Feedforward Power Demand
Parameter P51.07 indicates the kW demanded from load power feedforward.
P51.08 - DC Link Current
Parameter P51.08 indicates the approximate DC link current supplied by the SFE.
P51.09 - DC Link Controller Current Demand
Parameter P51.09 indicates the active current demanded from the DC link controller.
P51.10 - Feedforward Current Demand
Parameter P51.10 indicates the active current demanded from load power feedforward.
P51.11 and P51.12 - Active Current Demand
Parameters P51.11 and P51.12 indicate the total active current demanded from load power
feedforward in units of percentage and Amps respectively.
P51.13 and P51.14 - Active Current
Parameters P51.13 and P51.14 indicate the active current in phase with the mains voltage
in units of percentage and Amps respectively.
P51.15 and P51.16 - Reactive Current Demand
Parameters P51.15 and P51.16 indicate the total reactive current demanded from load
power feedforward in units of percentage and Amps respectively.

Page 6-176 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P51.17 and P51.18 - Reactive Current

Parameters P51.17 and P51.18 indicate the reactive current in quadrature with the mains
voltage in units of percentage and Amps respectively.
P51.19 - SFE Overload Remaining
Parameter P51.19 indicates the percentage of total overload capacity remaining to be
monitored. Its units are percentage of (1.5 x drive Full Load Current) for 60 seconds.
P51.20 - Measured PTC Resistance
Parameter P51.20 indicates the value of resistance that the drive has determined between
TB5/1 and TB5/3.
P51.21 - Vq Mains
This is the calculated Vq component of the mains network voltage
P51.22 - Vd Mains
This is the calculated Vd component of the mains network voltage
P51.23 - Mains Amplitude
This is the calculated Vrms mains network voltage

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-177
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.50 Menu 52 - Advanced SFE Set-up Menu

Menu 52 is used for the Advanced SFE Set-up facility. This mode is only visible when SFE
mode has been selected via P99.01.
P52.00, P52.01, P52.02 and P52.03 - DC Link Voltage Controller Gains
P52.01 allows the Kp and Ki terms of the DC link controller to be calculated automatically, or
entered manually.
The automatic calculation is dependent upon P52.00 (DC link controller bandwidth), P50.02
(DC Fed Drives rating) and P50.00 (DC link voltage reference) in addition to information
retrieved from serial EEPROMs contained within the SFE. When calculated automatically,
the Kp and Ki gains are displayed in P52.02 and P52.03. It is recommended that the
maximum value of DC link bandwidth is 1/4 the current loop bandwidth, as set via P52.04.
Alternatively, setting P52.01 to 1 allows manual adjustment to Kp and Ki by editing P52.02
and P52.03 respectively.
P52.04 - Current Bandwidth
The current loop PI controllers have their Kp and Ki gain terms automatically calculated
based on this parameter. Value to be entered in radians/second. It is recommended that this
value is always set to a minimum of 4 times the DC link controller bandwidth. See
parameters P52.00, P52.01, P52.02, P52.03 and P50.02.
P52.05, P52.06 and P52.07 - Reactive Current Reference and Limits
If required, a reactive current reference can be requested and limited via the values in these
three parameters. By default, these parameters are the sources of these references.
Alternatively, these values can be controlled indirectly by editing P53.10, P53.12 and
P53.14. When not configured as the source of the reactive current demand and limits, these
parameters become monitoring points for the reactive current demand and limits.
P52.08 and P52.11 - Mains Frequency Trip Limits
These parameters adjust the mains frequency trip limits. A trip code 93, mains frequency
trip, will be generated for a mains frequency detected outside of these limits.
P52.09 and P52.10 - Mains Frequency Warning Limits
These parameters adjust the mains frequency warning limits. A warning code 133, mains
frequency warning, will be generated for a mains frequency detected outside of these limits.
P52.13 - Supply Inductance Compensation
If there is significant inductance in the supply cabling between the incoming mains point of
common coupling and the SFE mains voltage monitor input terminals, the current drawn by
the SFE will have a load-dependent phasing error. This error can be compensated by
entering the value of the supply cable inductance, in µH, into P52.13.
P52.12 and P52.14 - Supply Transformer Compensation
It is possible to connect the input terminals to the Mains Voltage Monitor unit to a mains
supply that is separated from the SFE input terminals via a transformer. Any fixed phasing
errors introduced by the transformer may be removed by adjusting P52.12. Adjusting P52.14
will compensate for the turns ratio of the transformer. See also P52.13 for supply cable
inductance compensation.
P52.15 and P52.16 - DC Link Hall Effect Device
If P53.03, the DC link load power feedforward source, is set mode 1 or 2, the value of the
turns ratio of the DC link Hall effect device is to be entered into P52.15, and the value of the
burden resistor used is to be entered into P52.16.
P52.17 - DC Link Pre-charge Threshold
This parameter sets the DC link voltage above which the SFE will attempt to energise the
line contactor and de-energise the pre-charge circuit. By default it is set to its minimum value

Page 6-178 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

that is equal to the under voltage trip level of the SFE. It is possible to raise the pre-charge
threshold voltage above this value if the application requires it.
If the alternative DC Link feedback has been selected via P53.02, there are two effects on
P52.17. Firstly, P52.17 will simultaneously adjust both the pre-charge level and the under
voltage trip threshold. Secondly, if a power up reset is performed after P53.02 has been set,
the minimum allowable value of P52.17 will reduce to 100V.
P52.18 - Active Current Offset
This parameter allows the user to tune out any offsets in the active current feedback,
P51.13.
P52.19 - Choke PTC Trip Resistance
This parameter is the value of choke PTC resistance to be determined as the trip level, i.e.
above this value the choke is too hot; there is ±0.1kΩ hysteresis on this value.
Allowed range: 0.10kΩ to 10.00kΩ.
P52.20 - Action on Choke PTC Loss
This parameter specifies the action to be taken by the drive when the measured PTC
resistance is above the trip value, i.e. when P51.20 > P52.19.
Options are: 0 = No action (default)
1 = Warning - drive issues a PTC Warning (No. 137)
2 = Trip issues a PTC Trip (No. 98).
P52.21 - Frequency Timer
A trip is generated when the mains supply frequency is outside of the limits specified by
parameters P52.09 and P52.10 for longer than the time set in this parameter. Setting a
negative value disables the trip.
Allowed values: -1.00 to 1.00s
P52.22 - Minimum Amplitude
This parameter is used to set a minimum threshold for the mains amplitude under which the
drive, after the time set in parameter P52.24, will trip
Allowed values: -0.00 to 100.00% (of the nominal mains voltage)
P52.23 - Maximum Amplitude
This parameter is used to set a maximum threshold for the mains amplitude. Above this
threshold the drive, after the time set in parameter P52.24, will trip.
Allowed values: -100.00 to 120.00% (of the nominal mains voltage)
P52.24 - Amplitude Timer
A trip is generated when the mains supply amplitude is outside of the limits specified by
parameters P52.22 and P52.23 for longer than the time set in this parameter. Setting a
negative value disables the trip.
Allowed values: -1.00 to 10.00s
6.50.1 Application Specific Parameters
Parameters P52.30 to P52.63 are application specific parameters and their use is not
described in this manual.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-179
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.51 Menu 53 - SFE Reference Setup Menu

Menu 53 is used with the SFE Reference Setup facility. This mode is only visible when SFE
mode has been selected via P99.01.
P53.00, P53.04, P53.06, P53.08, P53.10, P53.12 and P53.14 -
DC Link Voltage and Current Control Reference Source Selection
These parameters allow the sources of the DC link voltage and current demand references
to be chosen. Reference Source 1 is the default for each. When an alternative reference
source is selected, the parameter listed as Reference Source 1 becomes a read-only
monitor and will display the (scaled) value passed from the chosen reference. Also, this
scaled reference will be clamped to the limits of the monitor parameter. Note that none of
these references are "keypad" references, and therefore keypad removal is not affected by
the selection of the reference. Selection details are at Table 6-26.
Table 6-26 DC Link Voltage and Current Control Reference Source Selection

Active Active Reactive Reactive

Active Reactive
DC Link Current Current Current Current
Current Current
Voltage Demand Demand Demand Demand
Ref Demand Demand
Reference Pos Limit Neg Limit Pos Limit Neg Limit
Src Reference Reference
Reference Reference Reference Reference
Selected by Selected by Selected by Selected by Selected by Selected by Selected by
P53.00 P53.04 P53.06 P53.08 P53.10 P53.12 P53.14
1 P50.00 DC Link P50.03 P50.04 P52.05 P52.06 P52.07
Control
2 Analogue Analogue Analogue Analogue Analogue Analogue Analogue
Ref 1 Ref 1 Ref 1 Ref 1 Ref 1 Ref 1 Ref 1
3 Analogue Analogue Analogue Analogue Analogue Analogue Analogue
Ref 2 Ref 2 Ref 2 Ref 2 Ref 2 Ref 2 Ref 2
4 RS485 ref 1 RS485 ref 1 RS485 ref 1 RS485 ref 1 RS485 ref 1 RS485 ref 1 RS485 ref 1
5 RS485 ref 2 RS485 ref 2 RS485 ref 2 RS485 ref 2 RS485 ref 2 RS485 ref 2 RS485 ref 2
6 RS232 ref 1 RS232 ref 1 RS232 ref 1 RS232 ref 1 RS232 ref 1 RS232 ref 1 RS232 ref 1
7 RS232 ref 2 RS232 ref 2 RS232 ref 2 RS232 ref 2 RS232 ref 2 RS232 ref 2 RS232 ref 2
8 PID PID PID PID PID PID PID
Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller
9 Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference
sequencer sequencer sequencer sequencer sequencer sequencer sequencer
10 Fixed ref Fixed ref Fixed ref Fixed ref Fixed ref Fixed ref Fixed ref
menu menu menu menu menu menu menu
11 Motorised Motorised Motorised Motorised Motorised Motorised Motorised
pot pot pot pot pot pot pot
12 Trim Trim Trim Trim Trim Trim Trim
reference reference reference reference reference reference reference
13 Fixed 0% Fixed 0% Fixed 0% Fixed 0% Fixed 0% Fixed 0% Fixed 0%
14 Fixed 0% Fixed 0% Fixed 0% Fixed 0% Fixed 0% Fixed 0% Fixed 0%
15 Summing Summing Summing Summing Summing Summing Summing
node A node A node A node A node A node A node A
16 Summing Summing Summing Summing Summing Summing Summing
node B node B node B node B node B node B node B
17 Summing Pointer 22 Pointer 24 Pointer 23 Pointer 25 Pointer 26 Pointer 27
node C
18 Summing N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
node D
19 Pointer 21 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Page 6-180 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P53.01, P53.05, P53.07, P53.09, P53.11, P53.13 and P53.15 -

DC Link Voltage and Current Control Reference Scaling
These parameters allow all non-default references to be scaled. When the default source is
selected, its scaling parameter becomes read-only and displays 100.0%.
Allowed range: -300.0% to +300.0%
P53.16 - Action on SFE Reference Loss
This parameter allows selection of action to be taken when there is an SFE reference loss.
Options are: 0 = no action
1 = warning (Warning Code 105)
2 = trip (Trip Code 2)
P53.02 - Alternative DC Link Feedback
The ALSPA MV3000e SFE MicroCubicles™ contain hardware that allows the DC link
feedback to come from two possible sources. If required, P53.02 can be set to use the
alternative DC link feedback signal. When the alternative DC link voltage feedback is
selected, the pre-charge level, the under voltage level and the DC Link voltage reference
have a wider range of adjustment. See parameters P50.00 and P52.17.
P53.03 - DC Link Load Power Feedforward Configuration
The primary function of the ALSPA MV3000e SFE is to maintain the voltage at its DC
terminals. To achieve this, it compares the voltage at its DC terminals with its reference and
produces a demand for ac mains current if there is any error. This DC Link voltage
correction is achieved with a 'built-in' PI Controller. The voltage controller has a
programmable, but finite, bandwidth and therefore any change in the power requirements of
the equipment connected to the DC terminals will cause a disturbance in the DC Link
voltage.
It is possible to reduce the disturbance at the DC terminals of the SFE by using a load power
feedforward technique. Such a technique provides the SFE with a signal, which represents
the instantaneous power requirements of the load, and the SFE will use this to pre-empt its
demand for ac mains current. This dramatically speeds up the dynamic response of the
system. Therefore, the DC link power dynamic limits of the SFE will be increased with the
use of a load power feedforward method. Refer to Converteam for more details about
dynamic limits for the ALSPA MV3000e SFE product used in a variety of applications, with
and without load power feedforward.
The ALSPA MV3000e Firmware supports four options for Load Power Feedforward or
alternatively the SFE can operate without Load Power Feedforward.
Load Power Feedforward Modes
The ALSPA MV3000e SFE supports two modes of load power feedforward signal. Both
modes use the analogue input channel hardware, but the source and scaling of the two
modes is very different. Table 6-27 lists the modes.
Table 6-27 Load Power Feedforward Modes

P53.03: Load Feedforward Analogue General Recommendation

Power Mode Input for application types
Feedforward Channel
Source
0 None None AEM systems with the sum of Machine
Bridge ratings >3 x SFE rating
1 DC link current 1 AEM systems with the sum of Machine
sensor Bridge ratings ≤3 x SFE rating, or where
2 2
non-ALSPA MV3000 DC fed equipment is
used
3* Fast load power 1 AEM drives, or other AEM systems with the
signal from DC fed sum of Machine Bridge ratings ≤ SFE rating
4* 2
ALSPA MV3000s

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-181
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

Note:
* The Fast Load power signals MUST be screened with each end of the cable connected to the drive
chassis as shown at Figure 1 in the T2002EN Getting Started Manual.
DC Link Current Sensor Mode
For values of P53.03 of 1 or 2, the DC link current sensor mode uses a Hall effect device
and burden resistor as shown at Figure 6-44. This is the preferred mode for systems where
non-ALSPA MV3000e equipment is connected to the SFE DC terminals, or systems where
the sum of the ratings of the ALSPA MV3000e products connected to the DC terminals of
the SFE is greater than the rating of the SFE itself. Refer to Converteam for additional
details about DC link stability when using this method.

Power
Supply

Machine
DC Link + Bridges
SFE

Current SFE Termination Panel

Sensor

TB6
9
8 AN I/P
Burden 7 AN I/P 1 -
Resistor 6 AN I/P 2
PSU 0V 5 AN I/P 2 -
4 -10V
3 AN GND
2 AN O/P
1 AN O/P

20 mA 10 V
4 AN I/P 1
C AN I/P 2
2 B AN O/P 1
1 AN O/P 2

Figure 6-44 DC Link Current Sensor Mode

SFE Software Configuration for DC Link Current Sensor Mode

Set P53.03 to 1 (analogue input channel 1) or 2 (analogue input channel 2).
Set P52.15 to the value of the turns ratio of the Hall effect sensor.
Set P52.16 to the value of the burden resistor, in ohms.
Set P50.02 to the value 0%.
Ensure that P52.00, DC link controller bandwidth, is less than the value at Table 6-28.
Set the dipswitch for the analogue input to its 10 V position.
Optionally configure the analogue input parameters P7.00 - P7.03 (analogue input channel
1) or P7.04 - P7.07 (analogue input channel 2) to derive further references from the
analogue input. The scaling of the analogue input is:

DC Link current from SFE (A)

Analogue input(V) = × Burden resistor (ohms)
Current sensor turns ratio

Table 6-28 DC Link Controller Bandwidth

True ratio of DC Fed P50.02, parameter Maximum value of P52.00, DC Link Controller
rating to AEM rating value to be entered Bandwidth
≤ 1 (100%) 0% 180 rad/s
≤ 2 (200%) 0% 100 rad/s
≤ 3 (300%) 0% 50 rad/s
> 3 (300%) not recommended not recommended

Page 6-182 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Fast Power Output

When the SFE has been configured to expect a load power feedforward signal, with P53.03
set to a value of 3 or 4, all Machine Bridges which are connected to the DC link should be
configured by the user to provide a fast power output signal. In this mode, an analogue
signal is passed from each ALSPA MV3000e Machine Bridge to the SFE. This signal is
proportional to the instantaneous power being consumed by the ALSPA MV3000e Machine
Bridge. This is the preferred mode for systems where the Machine Bridge equipment is
entirely ALSPA MV3000e, and where the Machine bridge rating is no greater than the SFE
rating.
For multiple machine bridges, parallel the load power feedforward signal at TB6 to each
machine bridge.
The SFE and Machine Bridge software configurations for a Fast Load Power Mode are now
described.
SFE Software Configuration for Fast Load Power Mode
Set P53.03 to 3 (analogue input channel 1) or 4 (analogue input channel 2).
Set the dipswitch for the analogue input to its 20mA position.
Optionally configure the analogue input parameters P7.00 - P7.03 (analogue input channel
1) or P7.04 - P7.07 (analogue input channel 2) to derive further references from the
analogue input. The scaling of the analogue input is:
0.6 × Load power required from SFE (W )
Analogue input (A) = × 20mA
Vdc(V) × SFE nominal current rating (A)

Machine Bridge Software Configuration for Fast Load Power Mode

Set P7.18 (analogue output channel 1) or P7.23 (analogue output channel 2) to the value 5,
fast load power output mode.
Set P7.20 (analogue output channel 1) or P7.25 (analogue output channel 2) to the current
rating, in amps, of the SFE.
Set the dipswitch for the analogue output channel to its 20mA position.
P53.17 - Frequency Method
This parameter allows the user to select between Zero Crossing Detection 6 (ZCD) and
Phase Locked Loop (PLL) methods of measuring mains network frequency.
The PLL method allows the Network Bridge to monitor mains network voltage at a much
higher update method than the ZCD method. This parameter must be set to 1, PLL method,
for the drive to be able to ride through a dip event.
Allowed values: 0 = ZCD, Zero Crossing Detection
1 = PLL, Phase Locked Loop
P53.18 - Mains Filter Bandwidth
A second order low-pass filter is applied to the measured mains network phase voltages
before the calculation of the active and reactive components of the mains network voltage.
The parameter selects the value of the filter cut-off frequency used. Increasing the cut-off
frequency reduces the time taken to detect changes in mains network amplitude at the cost
of reducing noise immunity. The default setting is 200Hz, but a setting of 800Hz is
recommended for Network Loss Ridethrough applications.
Allowed values: 0 = 100Hz
1 = 200Hz
2 = 400Hz
3 = 800Hz

6
ZCD is the only method used in early versions of firmware, V11.02 and earlier.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-183
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P53.19 - Mains Loss Action

The setting of this parameter determines the drive’s behaviour when mains loss is detected.
Allowed values: 0 = Ignore
1 = Warn Only
2 = Warn and Trip
P53.20 - Ridethrough Threshold
When the mains network voltage falls below this threshold the PPL mains network frequency
tracker cannot be guaranteed and is inhibited. The mains network frequency and phase are
then generated synthetically, based on the last measured value, until the mains network
amplitude is at or above the threshold again.
Allowed values: 0.00 to 100.00%
P53.21 - Regen Power Limit Source
This parameter can be used to set the source of parameter P52.54 ‘Regen Power Limit’.
The scale is set by P53.22.
The value of P52.54 is equal to the value of the parameter selected by P53.21 multiplied by
the scale P53.22.
Allowed values: 1 = P52.54
2 = Analogue Ref 1
3 = Analogue Ref 2
4 = RS485 Ref 1
5 = RS485 Ref 2
6 = RS232 Ref 1
7 = RS232 Ref 2
8 = PID Controller
9 = Ref Sequencer
10 = Fixed Ref Menu
11 = Motorised Pot
12 = Trim Reference
13 = Fixed 0 %
14 = Fixed 0 %
15 = Sum Node A
16 = Sum Node B
P53.22 - Regen Power Limit Scale
This parameter is used to scale the Regen Power Source selected by parameter P53.21.
Allowed values: -300.0 to 300.0%

Page 6-184 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.52 Menu 54 – Mains Monitor Menu

The drive firmware will detect the presence of a Mains Voltage Monitor (MVM) unit and
activate this menu. If an MVM is not fitted the menu is hidden and code associated with
menu will not execute.
P54.00 - Mains Voltage Monitor Mode
If parameter P99.01 - ‘Control Structure’ is set to 4 = SFE Mode then this parameter
automatically sets to SFE mode.
If P99.01 is set to any other value then this parameter automatically sets to Disabled and the
SFE mode selection is not available.
Over voltage trip avoidance may still be selected by setting this parameter = 1.
Allowed values: 0 = SFE Mode
1 = Over Voltage Trip Avoidance
2 = Disabled
SFE Mode
When in SFE Mode the Mains Voltage Monitor is used for mains synchronisation.
Over Voltage Trip Avoidance Mode
When in over voltage trip avoidance mode this parameter is used to indicate that the MVM is
being used for the purposes of discriminating between a DC Link over voltage condition
being caused by elevated mains supply voltage or by motor regeneration.
In this mode the calculation of active and reactive power is disabled.
As the supply amplitude measurement does not require synchronisation with the mains, the
Mains Sync Loss trip is suppressed in this mode. However, because the mains input may be
missing the mains synch loss warning is retained. This warning can be disabled by the
setting parameter P54.14 - Mains Loss Action.
Disabled
The option to disable the MVM is provided for those drives that are fitted with an MVM but
the MVM is not connected to the mains. This prevents trips from the absence of a mains
supply.
P54.01 - Mains Filter Bandwidth
A second order low-pass filter is applied to the measured mains network phase voltages
before the calculation of the active and reactive components of the mains network voltage.
The parameter selects the value of the filter cut-off frequency used. Increasing the cut-off
frequency reduces the time taken to detect changes in mains network amplitude at the cost
of reducing noise immunity. The default setting is 200Hz, but a setting of 800Hz is
recommended for Network Loss Ridethrough applications.
Allowed values: 0 = 100Hz
1 = 200Hz
2 = 400Hz
3 = 800Hz
P54.02 - Auto Restart Factor
By monitoring both the AC supply and the DC Link voltages, it is possible to distinguish
between a supply induced over voltage and a motor/load derived (e.g. regeneration of power
through the machine bridge beyond the braking capacity connected to the DC Link) over
voltage.
The auto-restart mechanisms and suppression of over voltage trips are invoked if,
Vdc < P 54.02 × Supply _ Amplitude .

Otherwise over voltage trips occur in the normal way.

Allowed values: 0.90 to 1.15

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-185
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

If this parameter is set = 0.9 the auto-restart process is not invoked.

If this parameter is set > 1.04 auto-restart is invoked.
The auto-recovery software will only function when both the AC supply and DC Link
transients exist simultaneously. Otherwise, a DC Link transient without an AC supply
transient will be assumed to be a motor/load derived over voltage and the drive will be
tripped in the normal way.
P54.03 - Vq Mains
This parameter displays the calculated Vq component of the mains supply voltage.
P54.04 - Vd Mains
This parameter displays the calculated Vd component of the mains supply voltage.
P54.05 - Vrms Mains
This parameter displays the calculated Vrms of the mains supply voltage.
P54.06 – Mains Frequency
This parameter displays the measured mains supply frequency.
P54.07 - DC Link Voltage
This parameter displays the DC Link voltage. It is a copy of parameter P11.03 and is I this
menu for convenience.
P54.13 - Frequency Method
This parameter allows the user to select between Zero Crossing Detection 7 (ZCD) and
Phase Locked Loop (PLL) methods of measuring mains network frequency.
The PLL method allows the Network Bridge to monitor mains network voltage at a much
higher update method than the ZCD method. This parameter must be set to 1, PLL method,
for the drive to be able to ride through a dip event.
Allowed values: 0 = ZCD, Zero Crossing Detection
1 = PLL, Phase Locked Loop
P54.14 - Mains Loss Action
This parameter automatically sets to the ‘Warn and Trip’ option if parameter P99.01 -
‘Control Structure’ is changed to SFE mode.
When P99.01 is changed from SFE Mode the parameter automatically sets to the ‘Warn
Only’ option and the ‘Warn and Trip’ option is no longer available.
Setting this parameter to the ‘Warn Only option suppresses the generation of the trip
associated with the fault event. Setting the parameter to the ‘ignore’ option suppresses the
generation of the trip or warning associated with the fault event.
P54.15 - Ridethrough Threshold
When the mains network voltage falls below this threshold the PPL mains network frequency
tracker cannot be guaranteed and is inhibited. The mains network frequency and phase are
then generated synthetically, based on the last measured value, until the mains network
amplitude is at or above the threshold again.
Allowed values: 0.00 to 100.00%
P54.16 - Mains Amplitude
This parameter displays the mains amplitude as a percentage of the nominal mains voltage
set in parameter P50.09.

7
ZCD is the only method used in early versions of firmware, V11.02 and earlier.

Page 6-186 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P54.17 - Nominal Mains Supply

This parameter is the same as parameter P12.02 – Menu 12 is not available in SFE Mode.
The parameter is required to be set to the nominal mains supply voltage (Vrms) as various
thresholds are expressed as a percentage of this value.
Allowed values: 300 to 900V

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-187
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.53 Menu 55 - Machine Bridge Control Menu

Menu 55 is an application specific menu and its use is not described in this manual.

6.54 Menu 56 – AC Voltage Control Menu

6.54.1 Network Voltage Control
It is possible to control the magnitude of the network voltage by adjusting the steady state
reactive current demand. The following parameters are those that should be configured to
achieve this function.
P56.00 - Network Voltage Reference
This parameter sets the network voltage reference level.
Allowed values: 300 to 900Vrms
P56.01 - Network Voltage Feedback - Filtered
This parameter displays the filtered and measured, network voltage as a percentage of the
nominal network voltage set in parameter P50.09.
P56.02 - Network Voltage Controller Droop Resistance
In order to add a droop characteristic, a droop resistance can be set. This is scaled as a line
impedance and adjusts the line to line network voltage reference in proportion to the active
current demand that the controller creates.
Allowed values: 0.0 to 300.0mΩ
P56.03 - Network Voltage Controller Drooped Reference
This is the controller reference, minus the droop adjustment, that the network voltage
controller uses as its input. It is expressed as a percentage of the nominal network voltage
set in P50.09.
P56.04 - Network Voltage Controller Proportional Gain Kp
The network voltage controller is a PI controller. This parameter is used to set the
proportional gain of the controller.
Allowed values: 0.000 to 10.000%Id/%Vac nominal
P56.05 - Network Voltage Controller Integral Gain Ki
The network voltage controller is a PI controller. This parameter is used to set the integral
gain of the controller.
Allowed values: 0 to 5000%Id/%Vac nominal/s
P56.06 - Network Voltage Controller Unclamped Id Demand
This is the current demand that is passed to the modulation depth controller/limiter.
Nominally, the ac voltage controller produces it, but it can alternatively be configured to
come from any source selected via parameter P56.12. If P56.12 is set to the value 56.00 the
ac voltage controller function is enabled.
6.54.2 Avoiding Over Modulation
A positive reactive current will increase the modulation depth of the network bridge, i.e. it will
increase the ac voltage produce at the PWM terminals of the inverter.
When this voltage is excessive, as a proportion of the prevailing DC Link voltage, the
inverter produces a non-sinusoidal voltage and the harmonics supplied to the network will
increase.
This can be avoided by using the PI controller that reduces the reactive current demand if
the modulation depth becomes too high.

Page 6-188 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P56.07 - Modulation Depth Limit

Below the modulation depth set in this parameter, the modulation depth controller is inactive.
Above this set modulation depth, the controller uses this value as a control reference and
limits the reactive current demand accordingly.
P56.08 - Modulation Depth
This parameter displays the instantaneous modulation depth that is used as feedback to the
modulation depth controller. It is a filtered version of the instantaneous modulation depth
seen by the network bridge.
P56.09 - Modulation Depth Controller Proportional Gain Kp
This parameter is used to set the proportional gain of the modulation depth controller.
Allowed values: 0.000 to 0.500%Id/% modulation depth
P56.10 - Modulation Depth Controller Integral Gain Ki
This parameter is used to set the integral gain of the modulation depth controller.
Allowed values: 0 to 2000%Id/% modulation depth/s
P56.11 - Modulation Depth Controller Clamped Id Demand
This is the limited reactive current demand. In order to activate the network voltage controller
the ‘alternative current reference’ P52.36 must point to this parameter bt setting P52.56 =
P56.11.
P56.12 - Unclamped Id Demand Source
This pointer allows the source of P56.06 to be selected. If the pointer is set to any value
between P56.00 and P56.99 (i.e. anywhere in Menu 56) then the source of P56.06 will be
the ac voltage controller. Alternatively P56.12 can be set to point to anywhere within the
parameter set.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-189
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.55 Menu 91 – Fast Analogue Menu

This menu is an advanced manufacturer’s commissioning/fault finding menu and, is
generally, not available to the user. If required a fast analogue module must be installed
after which this menu will be visible. The fast analogue module and an interface box are
designed for connection to a high performance oscilloscope.
The use of this feature also requires knowledge of the MV3000e internal variables and their
internal scales to be able to set up the parameters to be viewed. It can then be used as an
advanced fault finding aid on difficult applications.
P91.00 - Fast Analogue Output 1 Global
P91.05 - Fast Analogue Output 2 Global
P91.10 - Fast Analogue Output 3 Global
P91.15 - Fast Analogue Output 4 Global
These parameters are set to the MV3000e’s internal global variable reference that it is the
signal required to be displayed/recorded on an oscilloscope.
Allowed values: 0 to 9999
P91.01 - Fast Analogue Output 1 Scale
P91.06 - Fast Analogue Output 2 Scale
P91.11 - Fast Analogue Output 3 Scale
P91.16 - Fast Analogue Output 4 Scale
These parameters are the scaling factors for the output global variables above.
Allowed values: -3276 to 3276bits/V

Page 6-190 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.56 Menu 98 - Menu Enable Selection Settings

Menu 98 is used to activate Menus 1 to 89.
P98.01 to P98.46 - Menus 1 to 46 Enable
Allowed values: 0 = Menu invisible
1 = Menu visible
Example:
To make Menu 3 accessible to the operator, set P98.03 to 1.
P98.50 - Menu 50 (SFE Basic Set-up) Enable
P98.51 - Menu 51 (SFE Monitor) Enable
P98.52 - Menu 52 (SFE Adv Set-up) Enable
P98.53 - Menu 53 (SFE Ref Set-up) Enable
Allowed values: 0 = Menu invisible
1 = Menu visible
P98.58 - Menu 58 (Extended I/O 2) Enable
This parameter is only available if the 2nd CAN Port Module is fitted.
Allowed values: 0 = Menu invisible
1 = Menu visible
P98.59 to P98.63 - Menus 59 to 63 Enable
Allowed values: 0 = Menu invisible
1 = Menu visible
P98.65 - Menu 65 (CDC CAN 2 Port) Enable
This parameter is only available if a 2nd CAN Port Module is fitted.
Allowed values: 0 = Menu invisible
1 = Menu visible
P98.66 - Menu 66 (CAN 2 CANopen) Enable
This parameter is only available if a 2nd CAN Port Module is fitted.
Allowed values: 0 = Menu invisible
1 = Menu visible
P98.67 - Menu 67 (CAN 2 DeviceNet) Enable
This parameter is only available if a 2nd CAN Port Module is fitted.
Allowed values: 0 = Menu invisible
1 = Menu visible
P98.70, P98.71 and P98.72 - Menus 70, 71 and 72
(Application Code Developer) Enable
These parameters are only available for use with the Application Code Developer.
P98.74 - Menu 74 (PROFIBUS) Enable
This parameter is only available if a PROFIBUS Board type MVC3007-4002 is fitted.
Allowed values: 0 = Menu invisible
1 = Menu visible
P98.75 - Menu 75 (PROFIBUS) Enable
This parameter is only available if a PROFIBUS Board is fitted.
Allowed values: 0 = Menu invisible
1 = Menu visible

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-191
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

P98.78 - Menu 78 (MicroPEC™) Enable

This parameter is only available if a MicroPEC™ Module is used
Allowed values: 0 = Menu invisible
1 = Menu visible
P98.80 to P98.89 - Menus 80 to 89 Enable
These parameters are available only if an optional Communications Board (e.g. FIP,
Ethernet) is fitted.
Allowed values: 0 = Menu invisible
1 = Menu visible
P98.90 - Menu 90 (Converteam Service Use) Enable
This parameter is to enable Menu 90, which is the Converteam service menu for access
only by Converteam staff for service purposes.
P98.98 and P98.99 - Menus 98 and 99 Enable
These parameters are always set to 1 (Enable).

Page 6-192 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

6.57 Menu 99 - Configuration Settings

Menu 99 gives access to the parameters required to configure and monitor various basic
drive parameters as follows:
System Hardware Configuration
Control Structure
Drive Duty Type
Firmware version - read only
Controller Serial number
Security code
Text Language
Set-up, storage and retrieval
Software downloader
Template upload
6.57.1 DELTA Drives
P99.00 - Number of DELTAs
This read-only parameter indicates the number of DELTA modules (output bridges) fitted.
Range of values: 0 to 6
For all basic drive modules in MicroCubicle™ format, P99.00 has no meaning and is set at
0, from which it cannot be adjusted.
6.57.2 6.50.2 Control Structure
P99.01 - Control Structure
Allowed values: 0 = No Motor Control
1 = Frequency Control
2 = Vector Control
3 = Scalar Control
4 = SFE Mode
When switching from a non-SFE Mode to SFE Mode, various adjustments will be made to
the Parameter Set as follows:
• Menu 1 will change to a default Parameter Set suitable for SFE
• Digital output 3 will change to 'Vdc at reference', Status Flag 100
• The minimum permissible PWM frequency will be raised to 2.5 kHz
• The history channel settings will change.
6.57.3 Overload Duty
P99.02 - Overload Duty
ALSPA MV3000e drives are dual rated, i.e. they can operate with either 110% overload or
150% overload ratings. The value set in P99.02 selects the drive Full Load Current for the
chosen rating as follows:
0 = (Disabled) 150% overload - for industrial plant applications.
1 = (Enabled) 110% overload - typically for fans and pumps.
The duty type selected effects the continuous current rating, the current limit range and
other current-dependent parameters.
When this parameter is changed the CDC re-starts and the keypad will lose connection for a
short time.
6.57.4 Alternative Voltage Grades
P99.11 - Alternative Drive Voltage Grades
Some drives have two possible options. These drives have a different nominal current
rating for each of their voltage ratings. The voltage and current ratings are stated on the

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-193
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

drive label. Where applicable, this parameter switches the drive into its alternative grade
option. This will in turn adjust the value of P99.05 - Drive Nominal Current.
Allowed values: 0 = Standard Voltage Grade
1 = Alternative Voltage Grade
6.57.5 Firmware Type
P99.03 - Firmware Type
This read-only parameter contains a number indicating the Type of firmware in use.
E.g. 6 = MV3000e series drives
P99.04 - Firmware Revision Number
This read-only parameter indicates the revision status of the drive's firmware.
The number takes the form X.YY
6.57.6 Drive Nominal Current
P99.05 - Drive Nominal Current
This a read-only parameter, containing the manufacturer's rated current for the drive.
Values are as the drive current ratings:
58A to 6000A.
6.57.7 Drive Security Passwords and IDs
There are two passwords that can be entered to allow an authorised operator or engineer to
change parameter values - see Figure 6-45. The passwords are numbers set and stored in
P99.07 (Operator Security Code) and P99.08 (Engineer Security Code). P99.06 is the
"key". When a password is entered in P99.06 it is compared with P99.07 and P99.08 - if they
match, one relevant access level is achieved.
When editing is completed the parameters are locked by entering a value, other than the
operator or engineer codes (password), in P99.06. Also refer to Parameter P35.04 for an
Auto-locking feature.
Sometimes the passwords for Operator and Engineer Security Access levels may be
forgotten or mislaid and it is then not possible to edit parameters within a drive. Use of the
Master Password will allow users to open the Engineer Security level. When Engineer
access is available the original passwords can be re-acquired - see Note at Figure 6-45.
P99.06 - Security Code
This is where the "key" is entered into the "lock". The combination must match either P99.07
or P99.08 to "open" the relevant access level.
Allowed values: 0 to 9999
P99.07 - Operator Security Code
Contains the value that must be entered in P99.06 to allow access to the `operator'
parameters. This value cannot be read or adjusted unless the operator access is unlocked.

Page 6-194 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

Operator
Security Code
Parameter P99.07

Allows access to
Operator Level codes
Security Code
Compares
Parameter P99.06 P99.07
Allows access to either and
Operator Level Code or P99.08 Engineer
Engineer Level Code by Codes
comparison of those codes Security Code
with
with P99.06. P99.06 Parameter P99.08

Allows access to
Engineer Level codes

Note:
If Master Password Code 3511 is entered for P99.06 then Engineer Access
is available and parameters at P99.07 and P99.08 can either be viewed or
changed.

Figure 6-45 Drive Security Codes

P99.08 - Engineer Security Code

Contains the value that must be entered in P99.06 to allow access to `engineer' parameters.
This parameter cannot be read or adjusted unless the engineer access is unlocked.
P99.09 – Manufacturer Security Code
Contains the value that must be entered in P99.06 to allow access by the drive
manufacturer’s personnel. This parameter cannot be read or adjusted unless manufacturer’s
access is unlocked.
P99.13 - Drive Security ID 1
P99.14 - Drive Security ID 2
These parameters prevent the parameter-set intended for one drive from being loaded, via a
serial link, into an incorrect drive. This is achieved by requiring P99.13 and P99.14 to have
identical values before a parameter-set can be loaded.
P99.13 can only be edited via the Keypad, not via a serial link.
P99.14 can be edited via Keypad or serial link.
Allowed values: 0 to 30,000
Application Example for Achieving Drive File Security Using ALSPA Drive Coach
(1) Set P99.13 to a security number of your choice e.g. 3008.
(2) The drive will trip on "drive ID violation" - this is OK, it simply means that P99.13 does
not match P99.14.
(3) Set P99.14 to the same as P99.13.
(4) Reset the trip.
(5) Now do a parameter upload to ALSPA Drive Coach, the values of P99.13/14 will be
saved.
(6) When the file is sent to another drive ALSPA Drive Coach will notice that the security
IDs in the drive and the file do not match and will warn you.
(7) If the download is carried out anyway then the drive will trip out on "drive ID violation"
again.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-195
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

6.57.8 User Text Language

P99.10 - User Text Language
Allowed values: 1 = English
2 = French
3 = Portuguese
4 = German
6.57.9 6.50.9 Firmware Downloader
P99.12 - Firmware Downloader
This parameter is used when it is required to update the drive firmware. Instructions for
updating drive firmware are included with the firmware release documentation.
Allowed values: 0 = Not Enabled
1 = Enable Download
6.57.10 Upload Template
The ALSPA MV3000e pc programming package (ALSPA Drive Coach) uses "template files"
to allow fast data transfer to and from the drive. These template files are uploaded from a
drive when the programmer is first used.
The following parameter (P99.15) allows the generation of customised template files for
each drive application.
P99.15 - Upload Template
This is a three-digit number that is only used by ALSPA Drive Coach. It is used to determine
the filename for the template to be created.
The individual drive types and sizes have a pre-determined template number which ALSPA
Drive Coach looks at e.g. Template 21 is an MV3071A4A1.
The only advantage, as a user, to changing the number is that the templates that are stored
by the pc would be more easily identifiable, for example the template number for a 71 A
MV3000e is 21. However, as a user you could write P99.15 to 371, for example, and it
would have more sense on the PC. Re-numbering the template would still not prevent files
from being placed in the wrong drives.
See P99.13 and P99.14 for "protecting" firmware uploads.
Allowed values: 1 to 999
Note:
Values in the range 1 to 199 should not be used as they refer to the default template files for different
sizes of MV3000e drives.
6.57.11 Backup Parameters
P99.16 - Backup Parameters
This parameter allows the user to:
1. Save the current Parameter Set (excluding the history record and any read-only
parameters) as the Backup Parameter Set, or to the Keypad (perhaps to load into
another drive).
2. Restore the Backup Parameter Set to the main Parameter Set manually. This is
automatically done at power up if the parameters stored at power down are found to
be invalid.
If this occurs, a Status Flag (SF110 - Backup Parameter Set in use) will be set until the next
power up, to indicate that there is a system problem. No trip will be generated, and the
History Record will not be restored. Other read-only parameters (e.g. kWh) will also have
lost their stored value. However, the drive will operate correctly according to the stored
backup Parameter Set.
This feature can also be used to save a known working drive Set-up, before undertaking
experimental changes. The known working Set-up can then be restored with a single
parameter change.

Page 6-196 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

In addition to the primary non-volatile storage each drive has two other parameter storage
locations. The first location is a backup storage internal to the drive; the 'Internal Store'.
The second location is keypad storage for transferring parameters from one drive to another;
the 'Keypad Store'. P99.16 controls this parameter storage mechanism and Figure 6-46
shows an overview.
Allowed values: 0 = No Action.
The Backup Parameter Set remains as currently stored.
1 = Save.
The current drive Parameter Set becomes the Backup Parameter Set.
This excludes any read-only parameters. Once the parameters have
been saved, P99.16 returns to a value of 0.
2 = Recall.
The Backup Parameter Set (if valid) is copied to the current drive
Parameter Set. This excludes any read-only Parameters. Once the
parameters have been restored, P99.16 returns to a value of 0. If no
valid Backup Parameter Set exists, P99.16 will return to zero without
changing the current parameter settings.

User Edits

Main
Non-volatile
Store

Power down Power up

DC Link
or 24 V
Erase
P99.16 = 3

Save
P99.16 = 1
Drive
Internal
Defaults Backup
Active Area Store Set
Power up
Recall
P99.16 = 2
or Main
Non-volatile
Failure

Save to
Keypad
P99.16 = 4

Recall
Keypad
P99.16 = 5
Keypad
Store

Review
P99.16 = 6

Figure 6-46 Overview of Parameter Backup Storage

3 = Erase.
The Backup Parameter Set is erased and normal behaviour is restored
in the event of an invalid stored Parameter Set at power up.
4 = Save to Keypad.
The current drive Parameter Set is copied to the Keypad. This includes

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-197
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

the firmware revision number but excludes any read-only parameters.

Once the parameters have been saved, P99.16 returns to a value of 0.
5 = Recall Keypad.
The Parameter Set stored in the Keypad is copied to the current drive
Parameter Set, but only if the firmware revision status is compatible.
When recalling to a different drive size, parameters related to drive size
are not copied. Once the parameters have been recalled, P99.16 returns
to a value of 0. If no valid Keypad Parameter Set exists, P99.16 will
return to zero without changing the current parameter settings.
6 = Check Keypad Data.
Shows Parameter Set compatibility data, i.e. why a Parameter Set
stored in the Keypad may not recall.
Press the Navigation arrows to check the whole of the data.
Notes on Recalling a Parameter Set from the Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad)
1. Recalling a Parameter Set from one drive to another is a very powerful and useful
feature. However, care must be taken to ensure that an incorrect Parameter Set in
the target drive does not result from copying the Parameter Set from an
inappropriately configured drive, particularly from a drive of different rating from the
source drive.
2. If the firmware revision status of the saved Parameter Set is compatible with the target
drive, then the Parameter Set will be restored.
3. If the saved Parameter Set is from a drive of the same size (voltage and current
rating) as the target drive, then ALL of the customer parameters (except for read-only
parameters) will be copied from the Drive Data Manager™.
4. If the saved Parameter Set is from a drive of a different size (voltage or current rating)
from the target drive, then parameters dependent upon the size of drive will NOT be
copied from the Drive Data Manager™ to the target drive. Parameters that fall into
this category are listed at Table 6-17.
5. It is recommended that parameters are not transferred between drives of different
sizes fitted with ALSPA MV3000e MicroCubicle™ and DELTA AC Drives Firmware
Versions 1.00 and 2.00.
6. Refer to Section 9 for the consequences of changing pcbs and/or DELTAs and the
operation of P10.35 to ensure that the Product Identity Record is not lost during
service visits.

Table 6-29 Parameters which will NOT be copied from the Drive Data Manager™ when
attempting a transfer between drives of different sizes

Parameter Description Parameter Description

Number Number
P2.00 Motor Base Frequency P12.17 No Load Current @ 50% V
P2.01 Motor Base Voltage P12.18 No Load Current @ 60% V
P2.02 Motor Full Load Current P12.19 No Load Current @ 70% V
P2.03 Motor Nominal Power P12.20 No Load Current @ 80% V
P2.04 Motor Nominal Speed P12.21 No Load Current @ 90% V
P2.05 Motor Full Load Power Factor P12.22 Leakage Voltage
P2.06 Number of Motor Poles P23.00 DB Resistor Value
P3.13 Motor Stator Resistance - VVVF P23.01 DB Resistor Average Power
P3.14 Motor Stator Inductance - VVVF P23.02 DB Resistor Maximum Power
P3.15 Motor Magnetising Resistance - P23.04 DB Voltage Threshold
VVVF
P4.12 Motor Regeneration Power Limit P23.05 Motor Regenerative Power
Limit

Page 6-198 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 6. Parameter Descriptions

P6.17 Trip Avoidance Threshold P35.00 PWM Switching Frequency

P12.00 Motor No Load Current P50.00 DC Link Voltage Reference
P12.02 Nominal Mains Supply Volts P50.01 Line Choke Inductance
P12.10 Measured Rotor Resistance P50.03 Active Current Positive Limit
P12.11 Stator Resistance P50.04 Active Current Negative Limit
P12.12 Stator Inductance P52.17 DC Link Pre-Charge Threshold
P12.13 Magnetising Resistance P53.02 Alternative DC Link Feedback
P12.14 Magnetising Inductance P99.05 Drive Nominal Current
P12.15 Rotor Resistance P99.15 Upload Template
P12.16 Rotor Inductance P99.16 Backup Parameters

6.57.12 Restore Defaults

CAUTION
When the product is reset to factory default, all customised parameter settings will be
lost. Record customised parameter settings before the drive is reset.
They can be re-entered when required.
Record the settings in "Edit Review Mode", i.e. set P35.03 = 1.
P99.17 - Restore Defaults
This parameter allows the restoration of factory default settings to the active parameter set
or all of the parameter sets.
Allowed values: 0 = Normal
1 = Default Current
2 = Default All Parameter Sets
6.57.13 Multiple Parameter Sets
The MV3000e drive can store up to 3 parameter sets, allowing one drive to be used with 3
different motors.
P99.20 - Active Parameter Set
This parameter displays the current active parameter set being used by the drive.
P99.21 - Parameter Set Select
This parameter is used to select the active parameter set when under keypad or simple
Fieldbus control. When the drive is in the ‘stopped’ state this parameter determines how the
active parameter set is selected.
Table 6-30 P99.21 Parameter Set Select

Value Action
0 The parameter set is selected by examining the values of the P-Set select Control Flags.
Note: Control cannot be changed to this method until the drive is stopped.
1 Parameter Set 1 is activated
2 Parameter Set 2 is activated
3 Parameter Set 3 is activated

All three parameter sets are held within the drive at all times and are retained when the drive
is powered off.
When changing the active parameter set the data for the new parameter set is retrieved
from non-volatile memory into the drive’s active parameter set. The drive behaves as if the
parameters had been individually edited one after the other. As such, the drive may go
through a re-boot as a result of changes in some parameter values, for example P99.02 -
‘Overload Duty’.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 6-199
6. Parameter Descriptions ALSPA MV3000e

In order to prevent a potential oscillation between parameter sets the value of P99.21 is
copied to all three parameters sets’ non-volatile storage before changing to the new
parameter set.
The drive is inhibited from starting until the new parameter set has been fully copied and
made ready.
P99.22 – CF190: Parameter Set Select
P99.23 – CF191: Alternative Parameter Set Select
These control flags are used to select the active parameter set in response to a change in a
digital input, status bit or some other control flag source.
When the parameter select is by control flag source (P99.21 = 0), the active parameter set is
determined by reference to the following table.
Table 6-31 Control Flag State for Parameter Set Select

CF190 CF191 Action

0 Do not care Use Parameter Set 1
1 0 Use Parameter Set 2
1 1 Use Parameter Set 3

In order to prevent a potential oscillation between parameter sets the values of these
parameters are copied to all three parameters sets’ non-volatile storage rather than just the
active parameter set’s values.
P99.24 - Copy Parameter Set
This parameter is used to copy the active parameter set into the selected parameter set.
This is useful when creating a second parameter set that contains most of the edits in the
active parameter set.

Page 6-200 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 7. Control Block Diagrams.

7 Control Block Diagrams.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Page

7.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 7-3

Diagram Page

Sheet 1 Control System Overview ........................................................................................................ 7-5

Sheet 2 Proportional DB Control........................................................................................................... 7-6
Sheet 3 Machine Bridge Control System Overview.............................................................................. 7-7
Sheet 4 Plant I/O and Serial Links ........................................................................................................ 7-8
Sheet 5 Reference Arbitration and Starting/Stopping........................................................................... 7-9
Sheet 6 Motor Frequency Control....................................................................................................... 7-10
Sheet 7 Motor Vector Control, Part 1.................................................................................................. 7-11
Sheet 8 Motor Vector Control, Part 2.................................................................................................. 7-12
Sheet 9 Trips/Warnings and Diagnostic Monitoring............................................................................ 7-13
Sheet 10 Motor Position Controller ....................................................................................................... 7-14
Sheet 11 Pointers.................................................................................................................................. 7-15
Sheet 12 Special Monitoring Functions ................................................................................................ 7-16
Sheet 13 Application Logic - General Purpose Logic Blocks................................................................ 7-17
Sheet 14 Summing Nodes, Analogue Switches & Square roots .......................................................... 7-18
Sheet 15 Comparators, Ramp Function & Brake Logic........................................................................ 7-19
Sheet 16 Scalar Control ........................................................................................................................ 7-20
Sheet 17 SFE Control System Overview .............................................................................................. 7-21
Sheet 18 SFE Vector Control, Part 1 .................................................................................................... 7-22
Sheet 19 SFE Vector Control, Part 2 .................................................................................................... 7-23

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 7-1
7. Control Block Diagrams. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 7-2 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 7. Control Block Diagrams.

7.1 Introduction
The Control Block Diagrams for the ALSPA MV3000e drive are included in this section.
These diagrams graphically represent most of the drive’s parameters. They are designed to
show the inter-relationship of the drive functions and features and form a set of sheets that
will allow the user to completely design customised application solutions.
The Control Block Diagrams are arranged in three groups. One group shows the functional
relationship for the Machine Control Mode of operation. Another group shows the functional
relationship for the Sinusoidal Front End (SFE) Mains Control Mode of operation. A third
group shows the Proportional DB mode of operations. A Control System Overview, showing
the relationship between the modes of operation, is shown at Sheet 1 of the Control Block
Diagrams. Sheet 1 can be used as a reference sheet for the complete set of 19 sheets.
The diagrams are summarised at Table 7-1 with an indication of their use.
Functions within a drive either output a value, which can be the source for an analogue
output or for another function, or they output status information (Status Flags), e.g. Over
Speed. The functions also accept control inputs (Control Flags), e.g. Enable Jog, or freeze
ramps etc. The diagrams clearly show this information by easily recognised symbols. The
symbols are shown at a key that is featured on each of the diagram pages.

Table 7-1 Summary of Control Block Diagrams and their use

Machine
Sheet No. Description DB SFE
Bridge

1 Control System Overview 3 3 3

2 Proportional DB Control 3
3 Machine Bridge Control System Overview 3
4 Plant I/O and Serial Links 3 3 3
5 Reference Arbitration and Starting/Stopping 3 3
6 Motor Frequency Control 3
7 Motor Vector Control, Part 1 3
8 Motor Vector Control, Part 2 3
9 Trips/Warnings and Diagnostic Monitoring 3 3 3
10 Motor Position Controller 3 3 3
11 Pointers & Special Monitoring Functions 3 3 3
12 Special Monitoring Functions 3
Application Logic, General Purpose Logic
13 3 3 3
Blocks
Summing Nodes, Analogue Switches and
14 3 3 3
Square Roots
15 Comparators, Ramp Function and Brake Logic 3 3 3
16 Scalar Control 3
17 SFE Control System Overview 3
18 SFE Vector Control, Part 1 3
19 SFE Vector Control, Part 2 3

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 7-3
7. Control Block Diagrams. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 7-4 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 7. Control Block Diagrams.

Control System Overview

CONTROL MODE SELECTOR

ANALOGUE INPUTS
PROPORTIONAL DB CONTROL OVERVIEW P99.01
SHEET 2
REFERENCE SELECTOR 0. NO MOTOR CONTROL Note: Option 4 is displayed only if
DIGITAL INPUTS the bridge is a bi-directional
DB CONTROL MODE 1. VVVF CONTROL
ANALOGUE AND DIGITAL INPUTS converter, or a DELTA with a
2. VECTOR CONTROL
ANALOGUE AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS Mains Voltage Monitor unit DB Resistors
3. SCALAR CONTROL connected.
KEYPAD REFS KEYPAD REFERENCE 4. SFE MODE
& ON/OFF STARTING AND STOPPING U V W
TRIPS/WARNINGS
MONITORING
APPLICATION LOGIC 0 0
0. NO MOTOR CONTROL (DB MODE)

DB CONTROL MODE

MACHINE BRIDGE CONTROL SYSTEM OVERVIEW

SHEET 3
1 1

1. FREQUENCY CONTROL (VVVF) MODE

M
ANALOGUE INPUTS
REFERENCE SELECTOR
SPEED CONTROL U V W
DIRECTION CONTROL
DIGITAL INPUTS POSITION CONTROL
ANALOGUE AND DIGITAL INPUTS 2 2
ANALOGUE AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS 2. VECTOR CONTROL MODE
KEYPAD KEYPAD SPEED REFERENCE
SPEED REFS STARTING AND STOPPING
& START/STOP TRIPS/WARNINGS
MONITORING
APPLICATION LOGIC
3 3

3. SCALAR CONTROL MODE

MACHINE CONTROL MODES DC LINK

SFE MODE (MAINS CONTROL)

4 4

4. SFE MODE OR

R S T R S T
SFE CONTROL SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SHEET 17
REFERENCE SELECTOR
ANALOGUE INPUTS DC LINK VOLTAGE CONTROL
CURRENT CONTROL
MAINS MONITORING
DIGITAL INPUTS LOAD POWER FEEDFORWARD
ANALOGUE AND DIGITAL INPUTS Mains Mains
ANALOGUE AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS Network Network
KEYPAD REFERENCE
KEY
KEYPAD STARTING AND STOPPING
START/STOP TRIPS/WARNINGS CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT
DIGOUT xx (A)
MONITORING FLAG I/O SETTING

APPLICATION LOGIC
STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT
DIGIN xx POINT CONNECTION
FLAG

Sheet
1

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 7-5
7. Control Block Diagrams. ALSPA MV3000e

PROPORTIONAL DB CONTROL

DC Link +ve

OUTPUT
BRIDGE

DBR B

Motor Control B
C
1 to 4 A
0

Speed Motor 3 phase O/P

Reference Control PWM Bridge DBR A DBR C
Selection
Speed Ramp

P99.01
Control 1 to 4 = Motor control modes
0 = DB control mode
Mode DC Link -ve

Proportional Braking Control P23.21 Output Bridge Connections

DB
PWM DB Current For Proportional DB Control
P23.14 P23.16 P23.18
DB Power
DB Ref. Source DB Reference DB Demand P23.22

Reference
Selection DC Link +ve
P23.19
Limit DB Ramp DB O/P 1
21
Select 0
OUTPUT
P23.15 Ramp Time BRIDGE
Max DB P23.17
Modulation 1
DB Port DB Port
DB Threshold Control 0 PWM on CDC
A
B
P23.12 C
P23.10 Vref Source
V Reference
DB Mode P23.13
Vdc
Vdc Source DBR B DBR A DBR C
An1 X >
Selection
=
0%
An2 X < 100%
Comparator
= Monitoring
Scale P23.11 Point
DC Link -ve
DB
P23.04
Threshold
Output Bridge Connections
For Threshold DB Control

MENU 23

Sheet
2

Page 7-6 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 7. Control Block Diagrams.

Machine Bridge Control System Overview

AC-FED OR DC-FED
INTERLOCK PLANT INTERLOCK (IF THIS INPUT IS OPEN, THE DRIVE WILL TRIP)
R S T - +
SELECT 110% or 150% (DRIVE MODEL
OVERLOAD DUTY DEPENDENT)
FOR PLANT I/O SEE MENU 7, SHEET 5 P99.02 (P1.29) FREQUENCY CONTROL MODE SHEET 6

SYNCRO-STARTING - +
SPEED REFERENCE ARBITRATION SHEET 5 SELECT STANDARD OR DC INJECTION MODE SET-UP
BRAKING P11.03
DIGIN 3 REVERSE ALTERNATE REGEN POWER SET-UP MENU 4 DC LINK VOLTS
VOLTAGE GRADE LIMIT P4.12
MENU 4 CURRENT
MAX/MIN SPEEDS P5.15 to P5.18 P99.11 CONTROL
KEYPAD/ V SHEET 2 & 9
DIGIN 4
"OFF" = KEYPAD (P1.15 to P1.18)
REMOTE JOG SPEEDS P5.14 and P5.27
F OPTIONAL
SLIP
DIRECTION MODE P5.11
CHOOSE MOTOR CURRENT LIMIT COMPENSATION FLUXING
DYNAMIC
BRAKE
ANALOGUE CONTROL STRUCTURE AND AND
DIGIN 5 REF1/2
"OFF" = REF1
LOWEST
FLAG "ON" P99.01
TORQUE LIMIT
SELECTIONS
MOTOR
STABILITY
CONTROL
AND MENU 23
VOLTAGE
WINS BOOST
CLAMP MENU 3 MENU 3
SELECT SELECT SELECT DIRECTION ZERO MENU 3
3 2 1
REFERENCE MOTOR VOLTS
P9.07/P1.04
ANALOG 6 5 4 3 SPEED REF
REF 1 DIRECTION
TIME CONST. SPEED TRIM
SELECTIONS
BASIC MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA
MOTOR CURRENT
MENU 5 MENU 2
0 = FORWARD P9.05/P1.02
+/- 10V @ DEFAULT 1 = REVERSE MENU 24 - +
RAMPS SHEETS 4, 5
ANALOG SOURCE 1
? FWD CLAMP
HARDWARE
BRIDGE FREQUENCY
REF 2 SOURCE 2 JOG RAMPS
INTERLOCK
P9.09/P1.03
SOURCE 3 REV =1, FREQUENCY
4 - 20mA @ DEFAULT SOURCE 4
DIRECTION MAXIMUM SPEEDS
4 REFERENCE SOURCES CONTROL MINIMUM SPEEDS SKIP SPEEDS RAMP RATES 1/2
REFERENCE SELECTOR DEMAND CLAMPS SELECT RATES 1/2 MOTOR
=2, VECTOR
DIRECTION INHIBITS RAMP FREEZE
KEYPAD BACKUP REFERENCE JOG SPEEDS TC S - SHAPING VECTOR CONTROL MODE SHEETS 7 & 8
MAX RAMP DEVIATIONS
SPEED REF MENU 5 MENU 5 MENU 22
MENU 6 =3, SCALAR
REGEN POWER
LIMIT P4.12
MOTOR TEMP.
COMPENSATION +
IGBT's + PWM
8 SHEET 9
FLUX LIMIT DRIVE
SPEED CONTROL
O/P RUNNING MOTOR
SPEED REF MENU 12
AMPLIFIER AND
P9.00/P1.00 POSITION CONTROL SHEET 10 TORQUE LIMIT DRIVE
DROOP CONTROL CONTROL (1)
DETAILS OF ALL VECTOR
POSSIBLE SPEED FULL POSITION CONTROLLER, INCLUDING A ERROR DEADBAND AND CONTROL
25 PROTECTION
REFERENCE CHOICES FIXED POSITION MENU, A POSITION TEACHER, SELECTIONS
A UNI-DIRECTIONAL APPROACH AND A MENU 14 ADVANCED
COMPREHENSIVE DATUMMING CONTROLLER MENU 8 MOTOR
MODEL OUTPUT
DATA ENABLE/RUN

INERTIA MENU 12
COMPENSATION BASIC MOTOR DATA
STARTING AND STOPPING SHEET 5
MENU 25 MENU 2

KEYPAD START
SPEED TRIM
SELECTIONS
START/STOP REMOTE
START/STOP
START/STOP
SEQUENCING AND
STOP MENU 24 SELECT SPEED FEEDBACK SOURCE
ENC

FLAGS DRIVE P13.00

NORMAL
AND START MODE ENCODERLESS
STOP BACKUP SYNCROSTART MODE BUMPLESS SPEED
STOP START/STOP ENCODER LOSS
DIGIN 1 0 FLAGS NORMAL STOP MODE RIDETHROUGH
FEEDBACK

RAPID STOP MODES =3

STOP TIME LIMIT
START
START TACHO
DIGIN 2 1 MENU 4 ZERO SPEED
HOLD TIMES
SPEED FEEDBACK
SPEED FEEDBACK
=2
SELECTIONS
% = P9.01/P1.01 =1
MENU 4 rpm = P9.03
KEYPAD/REMOTE
KEYPAD/
DIGIN 4 REMOTE
116 MENU 13 SHEET 8

(DEFAULT START MODE P4.00 = LOW FREQUENCY START)

(DEFAULT NORMAL STOP MODE P4.07 = DISABLE AND COAST)
(DEFAULT RAPID STOP MODE P4.08 = DISABLE AND COAST)
SCALAR CONTROL MODE SHEET 16
THIS IS A SPECIAL CONTROL MODE, FOR VERY SPECIALISED APPLICATIONS.
REFER TO SUPPLIER FOR DETAILS.
TRIPS/WARNINGS/DIAGNOSTIC MONITORS SHEET 9
TRIP USING "NOT" TRIPPED ENSURES THAT WARNINGS DO NOT AFFECT THE HEALTHY OUTPUT HEALTHY
DIGIN 6 RESET
9 TRIP MONITORING SYSTEM 5
TRIPPED
(MENU 7) DIGOUT 1
TRIP 10 PRESENT TRIPS.
RESET 10 PRESENT WARNINGS.
10 TRIP HISTORY STORAGE. HISTORY RECORDING MONITORING
APPLICATION LOGIC, SPECIAL MONITORING FUNCTIONS SHEET 12 & 13
USER CONFIGURABLE TRIPS. 10 CHANNELS EXTENSIVE LOAD FAULT
LOGIC GATES PROGRAMMABLE TORQUE MONITOR OUTPUT RUNNING
MOTOR PROTECTION
MENU 10
MONITOR ANY
DRIVE PARAMETER
SYSTEM
MONITORS
TO AID
OTHER USEFUL MENUS COMPARATORS
DELAYS
REFERNCE
SHAPER
DETECTION
WINDOW
WINDOW
(MENU 7) DIGOUT 2
MENU 99 SECURITY CODES, ALLOWS THE MENU 29
TRIGGER SET-UP VIEWING PARAMETER BACKUP ALLOWS PLANT
MENU 30 & MENU 47 USER TO "SHAPE"
PRE AND POST TRIG AND AND SYSTEM CONDITION
MANUAL TRIGGER DIAGNOSTICS ANY OF THE
TRIP AVOIDANCE CONFIGURATIONS DRIVES SIGNALS. MONITORING SPEED MONITOR
STATUS FLAG AT SPEED
MENUS 26 and 27 MENU 9 & 11 MENU 35 KEYPAD REMOVAL,
PARAMETER PRINTING
BINARY GENERATOR
MENU 43
WINDOW 12
(MENU 7) DIGOUT 3
MENU 44 MENU 29 AT SPEED
AND PARAMETER "LOCKING" MENU 31
AUTO-RESETTING/STARTING

CONFIGURE THE DRIVE TO AUTO-RESET/RESTART AFTER A TRIP

CUSTOMER SELECTABLE RESET ENABLES
NUMBER OF RESETS AND TIMINGS OF RESETS MENU 28
ANALOG
SUMMING NODES, SWITCHES AND POINTERS SHEET 14 DRIVE MONITORING MENUS MENUS 9, 11 and 38 SPEED FEEDBACK O/P 1
KEY MENU 40 PROGRAMMABLE SUMMING NODES, ALLOWING SCALING AND
SUMMATION OF ANY DRIVE PARAMETER.
MENU 9 BASIC MONITORING OF THE MAIN DRIVE VARIABLES +/- 10V @ DEFAULT (MENU 7)

ANALOG DEFAULT
MENU 11 ADVANCED NONITORING OF DRIVE VARIABLES, INCLUDING
ANALOG
xx CONTROL (A) MENU 42 POINTERS. THESE POINTERS ARE ASSOCIATED WITH MOST VECTOR CURRENTS, TEMPERATURES, CONTROL AND STATUS FLAGS
DIGOUT SETTING
FLAG I/O OF THE DRIVE's REFERENCEC CHOICES, AND ALLOWS THE USER
TO CHOOSE ANY DRIVE PARAMETER FOR THE REQUIRED USE.
HOURS RUN, ENERGY CONSUMED, DIGITAL I/O STATES,
ANALOGUE INPUT AND OUTPUT VALUES AND OTHERS. CURRENT FEEDBACK O/P 2
MENU 38 EXCLUSIVELY MONITORS ALL THE VARIABLES IN THE POSITION +/- 10V @ DEFAULT (MENU 7) Sheet
STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT CONTROLLER
DIGIN xx FLAG POINT CONNECTION 3

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 7-7
7. Control Block Diagrams. ALSPA MV3000e

Plant I/O and Serial Links

RS232 SERIAL LINK
DEFAULT CONNECTIONS TO DIGITAL O/P SHOWN
P32.00 SERIAL WRITE ENABLE HEALTHY
RS232 CRC FAILURES P32.16
TRIPPED (-2.005) TB1/9,8,7
P32.01 SERIAL GLOBAL RESPONSE
RS232
RS232 TIME OUTS P32.17
5 DIGOUT 1
P32.10 SERIAL USING "NOT" TRIPPED ENSURES THAT DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 SIGNAL P7.27
RS232 BAUD RATE RS232 WARNINGS DO NOT AFFECT THE HEALTHY OUTPUT
LINK 58 HEALTHY
SET-UP
P32.11 RS232 TRIB. ADDRESS DRIVE O/P RUNNING
TB1/6,5,4
DRIVE O/P RUNNING (2.008)
P32.12 RS232 PROTOCOL +/-100%
3 2 1
8 DIGOUT 2
P32.13 RS232 PARITY RS232 Rx DATA FROM THE LINK DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 SIGNAL P7.28
DATA DIGITAL O/P STATES MONITOR P11.22
P32.14 CLAMP RS232 REFERENCE 1 P32.18
RS232 TIME OUT PERIOD AT SPEED (MOTOR CONTROL)
P99.01 = 1,2,3
AT SPEED V dc AT REF (SFE MODE)
12 TB1/3,2,1
P32.15 RS232 LOSS ACTION (2.012)
V dc AT REF
(2.100) DIGOUT 3
100
CLAMP RS232 REFERENCE 2 P32.19 P99.01 = 4 DIGITAL OUTPUT 3 SIGNAL P7.29

USE THE FOLLOWING VALUES USE THE FOLLOWING VALUES FOR CONTROL FLAGS AND DIGITAL O/P's
FOR CONTROL FLAGS AND DIGITAL I/P STATES MONITOR P11.21 TO ALLOW CONNECTION TO THE DIGITAL INPUTS
DIGITAL O/P's TO ALLOW
CONNECTION TO THE BITS OF TB3/8
THE CONTROL WORDS
6 5 4 3 2 1
DIGIN 1 1.001 for DIGIN 1, -1.001 for INV DIGIN 1
P32.22 RS232 CONTROL WORDS @ LOSS ACTION 15 14 13 ... 2 1 0
RS232 CONTROL WORD 0 P32.20
TB3/7
P32.23 RS232 DEFAULT FOR WORD 0 (after loss) RS232. WORD 0 BITS 0 to 15 = 4.015
-4.015
. . .to . . . 4.000
. . .to . . . -4.000
DIGIN 2 1.002 for DIGIN 2, -1.002 for INV DIGIN 2

P32.24 RS232 DEFAULT FOR WORD 1 (after loss)

INV = INTERLOCK
RS232 CONTROL WORD 1 P32.21
TB3/6
RS232. WORD 1 BITS 0 to 15 = 4.115 . . .to . . . 4.100 DIGIN 3 1.003 for DIGIN 3, -1.003 for INV DIGIN 3

P32.25 RS232 USER PAGE 1 SIZE RS232 INV = -4.115 . . .to . . . -4.100
TB3/5
P32.26
to RS232 USER PAGE ELEMENTS 1 to 20
USER
PAGE1
Tx and Rx

TO/FROM
DIGIN 4 1.004 for DIGIN 4, -1.004 for INV DIGIN 4
SET-UP
P32.45 USER PAGES TB3/4
DIGIN 5 1.005 for DIGIN 5, -1.005 for INV DIGIN 5

RS485 SERIAL LINK DIGIN 6

TB3/3
1.006 for DIGIN 6, -1.006 for INV DIGIN 6

P32.00 SERIAL WRITE ENABLE P32.56

RS485 CRC FAILURES
P32.01 SERIAL GLOBAL RESPONSE P20.01 HS I/P FREQ. FOR 0% SPEED
RS485 TIME OUTS P32.57
RS485
P32.50 RS485 BAUD RATE SERIAL P20.02 HS I/P FREQ. FOR 100% SPEED
RS485
LINK 57 HEALTHY
SET-UP
P32.51 RS485 TRIB. ADDRESS
HIGH SPEED DIGITAL HS I/P 50 HS REF ON
+/-100% INPUT/OUTPUT SCALING
P32.52 RS485 PROTOCOL
TB4/9,8 HS INPUT REF.
P32.53 RS485 PARITY RS485
DATA
Rx DATA FROM THE LINK HSIO +/- INPUT INPUT
HSIO REF. INPUT P20.03
OUTPUT
P32.54 CLAMP RS485 REFERENCE 1 P32.58
RS485 TIME OUT PERIOD 1 = INPUT
>1 = OUTPUT HS O/P SCALING ENCODER FEEDBACK MOTOR
P32.55 RS485 LOSS ACTION CONTROL
P20.00 HSIO MODE O/P FREQ = Encoder line count x Speed SPEED FEEDBACK ONLY
30 x P20.00
P32.62 RS485 CONTROL WORDS @ LOSS ACTION CLAMP RS485 REFERENCE 2 P32.59

P32.63 RS485 DEFAULT FOR WORD 0 (after loss)

USE THE FOLLOWING VALUES P7.16
P32.64 RS485 DEFAULT FOR WORD 1 (after loss) FOR CONTROL FLAGS AND REF 1 MODE P7.00
ANALOG REF TIME CONST.
DIGITAL O/P's TO ALLOW
TRANSMIT CONNECTION TO THE BITS OF REF 1 GAIN P7.02
P32.89 D-D Tx CONTROL 0/1 Tx THE CONTROL WORDS
P32.90 DATA TO ALL TB6/8,7 ANALOG
DATA OTHER
P32.87
P32.88
D-D Tx REF 1/2 X DRIVES ON RS485 CONTROL WORD 0 P32.60 15 14 13 ... 2 1 0
ANALOG I/P REF 1 DIGITAL
MODE X +
+
ANALOG REF1

DRIVE D-D LINK RS485. WORD 0 BITS 0 to 15 = 3.015 . . .to . . . 3.000

P32.91 REF 1 VALUE P7.03
Tx REF 1/2 SCALE to INV = -3.015 . . .to . . . -3.000
P32.92 DRIVE P7.01 REF 1 OFFSET
RS485 CONTROL WORD 1 P32.61
REF1
Rx CONTROL WORDS 26 4-20mA ON
RECEIVED RS485. WORD 1 BITS 0 to 15 = 3.115 . . .to . . . 3.100
DATA FROM Rx
DATA INV = -3.115 . . .to . . . -3.100
Rx REF's 1/2 P7.16
ONE OTHER X P7.04
ANALOG REF TIME CONST. REF 2 MODE
Tx DRIVE ON
D-D LINK P32.93 Rx REF 1/2 SCALE REF 2 GAIN P7.06
P32.94 MENUS 59, MENUS 60, 61, TB6/6,5 ANALOG
60, 61, 62, 89
P32.65 RS485 USER PAGE 2 SIZE RS485
Tx and Rx Rx
63, 89
ANALOG I/P REF 2 DIGITAL
MODE X +
+
ANALOG REF2
USER
P32.66 PAGE 2 REF 2 VALUE P7.07
to RS485 USER PAGE ELEMENTS 1 to 20 SET-UP TO/FROM FROM CAN CAN OPEN DEVICENET P7.05 REF 2 OFFSET
P32.85 USER PAGES PORT 1 SEE MANUAL T2017
SEE MANUAL T2013 REF2
Tx 27 4-20mA ON

Rx

FROM CAN SECOND CAN PORT WHEN USING THE O/P SCALERS, SIMPLY EDIT IN THE VALUE THAT IS
PORT 2
Tx
SEE MANUAL T1968
REQUIRED TO BE 100%. O/P 1 POLARITY P7.19

P7.20 O/P 1 SCALE FACTOR O/P 1 MODE P7.18

MENUS 60,
65, 67, 89
MENUS 58,60, DIGITAL TB6/2
65, 66, 89 P7.17 ANALOG O/P 1 SIGNAL
ANALOG
ANALOG O/P 1
KEY O/P 1 VALUE P7.21

O/P 2 POLARITY P7.24

CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT
DIGOUT xx (A) SETTING O/P 2 MODE P7.23
FLAG I/O P7.25 O/P 2 SCALE FACTOR

DIGITAL TB6/1

DIGIN xx
STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT P7.22 ANALOG O/P 2 SIGNAL
ANALOG
ANALOG O/P 2
FLAG POINT CONNECTION Sheet
O/P 2 VALUE P7.26
4

Page 7-8 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 7. Control Block Diagrams.

Reference Arbitration and Starting/Stopping

P16.03 PROPORTIONAL BAND

JOG SPEED
ONLY APPLICABLE FOR MOTOR CONTROL MODES, P99.01 = 1, 2, 3
1 FIXED REF #0 P5.14
P16.04 INTEGRAL TIME
2 ANALOG REF 1
3 FIXED VAL OF 0
P16.05 DIFFERENTIAL TIME KEY
4 FIXED REF MENU P5.27 JOG SPEED 2
5 REF. SEQUENCER
P16.06 ERROR TIME CONST.
MOTORISED POT CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT
6
7 TRIM REFERENCE
(0) DIGOUT xx
FLAG I/O (A) SETTING
P16.07 ERROR DEADBAND
8 RS485 REF 1
P16.10 121 SPEED 1/2
RS232 REF 1
9
P16.08 ERROR INVERT (0) INTEGRAL P5.28 SELECT STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT
10 TORQUE DEMAND 26 FREEZE DIGIN xx
FLAG POINT CONNECTION
11 SPEED DEMAND JOG
12 SUMMING NODE A PID P16.11
CONTROLLER (-2.000)
13 SUMMING NODE B (MENU 16) 69 SUICIDE
14 POINTER 4 REVERSE
PID OUTPUT MONITOR P16.09
P16.00 SETPOINT SELECT DIGIN 3
PID FB SCALE P16.02 TB3/6
1 ANALOG REF 2 FACTOR
2 FIXED VAL OF 0
3 RS485 REF 2
4 RS232 REF 2
1 ANALOG REF1 BACKUP CONTROL
5 TORQUE DEMAND
2 ANALOG REF2
6 SPEED DEMAND
3 RS485 REF 1 REFERENCE LOSS P22.01, P22.03
7 SPEED ERROR MONITOR SKIP BAND WIDTHS
4 RS232 REF 1 P22.05, P22.07
8 ACTIVE CURRENT P5.06 WARNING ON BACKUP ?
5 PID CONTROLLER SERIAL LINK
9 FLUX DEMAND P22.00, P22.02
6 FIXED REF MENU 4-20mA P5.12 SKIP BAND CENTRES P22.04, P22.06
10 SUMMING NODE C FIELDBUS
7 MOTORISED POT 3
11 SUMMING NODE D etc.
8 TRIM REFERENCE ENABLE
12 POINTER 5 (1.003)
9 FIXED VAL OF 0 KEYPAD SPEED 1 JOGGING 25 SKIPPING
CURRENT POINT P17.02 REFERENCE P5.23, P5.24
P16.01 FEEDBACK SELECT 10 FIXED VAL OF 0
11 FIXED REF #0 (P21.00) P5.11
P5.13 SPEED DEMAND CLAMPS
P5.05 = (0)
P17.18 12 FIXED REF #1 (P21.01) DIRECTION MODE 8
(0) BACKUP SRC.
13 FIXED REF #2 (P21.02) 2
SEQUENCE 27 SEQUENCER
33 ANALOG REF1
FREEZE RUNNING 14 FIXED REF #3 (P21.03) (0) P5.15, P5.16
P17.19 15 FIXED REF #4 (P21.04) P5.17, P5.18
REFERENCE MAX. SPEEDS
(0) SEQUENCER OUTPUT 16 SUMMING NODE A
SEQUENCE 28 34 3 MIN. SPEEDS
TRIGGER (MENU 17) NOT = 17 SUMMING NODE B
ANALOG REF2
0% REF 18 SUMMING NODE C P5.01 = (1)
P17.20
(1) 19 SUMMING NODE D REF. SRC. 1
SEQUENCE
29 20 POINTER 3 4
RESET P32.58 RS485 SERIAL P5.02 = (2) SKIP SPEEDS
LINK REF 1 SELECTED
REF. SRC. 2 CLAMP CLAMP DIRECTION SPEED
P17.00 SEQUENCER MODE DIRECTION INHIBITS REFERENCE
5 P5.03 = (3) CLAMP
P32.59 CONTROL
RS485 SERIAL
P17.01 NUMBER POINTS LINK REF 2 REF. SRC. 3
P17.21 REF.SEQUENCER OUTPUT P5.26
P17.03 TO P5.04 = (1) (0) (0) (0)
SEQUENCER SOURCES
P17.07 P32.18 REF. SRC. 4 P9.00 SPEED REF
RS232 SERIAL 6
SPEED REFERENCE P5.00 TIME CONST.
P17.08 TO SEQUENCER TIMES LINK REF 1 117 11 12
P17.17 P1.00
P5.25 P5.19 P5.20
SELECT
REF
P32.19 7
RS232 SERIAL SPEED DEMAND REVERSE FORWARD
FIXED REF #0 LINK REF 2 REF. SRC. LOWEST
CLAMP ENABLE INHIBIT INHIBIT
P21.00 FIXED REF. OUTPUT P21.20 SELECT FLAG "ON"
WINS DEFAULT CONNECTIONS SHOWN.
8
MENU 5
PID CONTROLLER DIGIN INVERTS ARE PERFORMED BY SIMPLY
APPLYING A -VE SIGN TO THE SELECTION ENTERED
INTO THE CONTROL FLAG PARAMETER.
48 BRAKING
FIXED REF #15 REFERENCE 9
P21.15 SEQUENCER
(-1.004) (-1.005) (1.005) (0)
P21.16
REF. #1 REF. #2 REF. #3 REF. #4 0 RUNNING
(0) FIXED REF 10
30 4 SELECT 5 SELECT 6 SELECT 7 SELECT
REF_SELECT.0 MENU
MOTOR. POT. OUTPUT P18.07 P5.07 P5.08 P5.09 P5.10
P21.17
(0) 11
31 MOTORISED POT 1 STOPPED
REF_SELECT.1 FIXED
REF
P21.18 MENU
(0) (MENU 21) 12 2
TRIM REFERENCE STARTING
REF_SELECT.2 32 TB3/4
P19.04 TRIM REF. OUTPUT
P21.19
(0) FIXED VAL OF 0
13 DIGIN 5 3 STOPPING
P4.09
REF_SELECT.3 33 ANALOGUE REF1/2 KEYPAD/REMOTE
116
(1.004)
14
FIXED VAL OF 0
KEYPAD
P18.04 START/STOP
(0) 15
RAISE HS DIG I/P TB3/5
34
1 ANALOG REF1 TRIM REF.
P18.05
(0)
2 ANALOG REF2 INPUT A SELECT
POSITION CONTROL
16 DIGIN 4 RAPID
P4.06

3 FIXED VAL OF 0 2
LOWER 35 P19.00 KEYPAD/REMOTE STOP
MOTORISED POT 4 FIXED VAL OF 0 (1)
(MENU 18) RS485 REF 1 17 STOP TB3/8 P4.05
5 SUMMING NODE A NORMAL
P18.06
STOP
PRESET 71
(0) 6
7
RS232 REF 1
PID CONTROLLER
18
DIGIN 1 0
(1.001)
START/STOP
CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTROL
8 FIXED REF MENU SUMMING NODE B FLAG
P4.19
9 MOTORISED POT OVERRIDES
19
BACKUP 124
P18.00 RAISE RATE 10 REF. SEQUENCER (0) REMOTE
STOP
SUMMING NODE C
11 FIXED REF #0 (P21.00) START TB3/7 START/
P4.04
P18.01 LOWER RATE 12 FIXED REF #1 (P21.01) 20 START STOP

P18.02 MODE
13
14
POSITION CONTROL
SUMMING NODE A
SUMMING NODE D DIGIN 2 1
(1.002)

21 P4.20
15 SUMMING NODE B
POINTER 1 BACKUP
P18.03 PRESET VALUE 16 POINTER 6 TRIM START 125
REFERENCE (0) START/STOP
(MENU 19) 22 SEQUENCER
P4.18
POINTER 2
START/ (0) (MENU 4)
STOP 123
P19.01 TRIM REF. INPUT B SELECT

P4.00 START MODE ZERO SPEED HOLD TIME P4.10

P19.02 TRIM REF. SCALE FACTOR A
P4.01 SYNCHROSTART MODE NORMAL STOP MODE P4.07
P19.03 TRIM REF. SCALE FACTOR B Sheet
P4.11 STOP TIME LIMIT RAPID STOP MODE P4.08
5

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 7-9
7. Control Block Diagrams. ALSPA MV3000e

Motor Frequency Control

P4.13 DC INJ. SPEED
P4.01 SYNC'START MODE
P4.14
ONLY APPLICABLE FOR MOTOR
DC INJ. CURRENT
P4.02 SCAN CURRENT FREQUENCY CONTROL, P99.01 = 1
P4.15
P4.03
DC INJ. DURATION KEY
SCAN RATE
P4.16 DC INJ. DELAY CURRENT MODE
CURRENT REFERENCE ARBITRATION CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT
FROM START/STOP SEQUENCER DIGOUT xx
FLAG I/O (A) SETTING
TRQ LIM
1/2 SYNCHRO- STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT
STARTING DC INJECTION DIGIN xx
FLAG POINT CONNECTION
+VE TORQUE LIMIT 1 P8.00 P8.07 BLOCK BLOCK

1 21
FIXED 100%
2 ANALOG REF1 X (0)
3 ANALOG REF2 CURRENT
+VE TORQUE LIMIT SCALE SOURCE 1 P8.08
4 RS485 REF 1 CONTROL VOLTAGE/ CURRENT
5 BLOCK CONTROL MODE SELECTION
RS485 REF 2
+VE TORQUE LIMIT 2 P8.02 FROM START/STOP
6 RS232 REF 1
SEQUENCER.
7 RS232 REF 2
8 PID CONTROLLER X P3.27 RECTIFICATION MODE

9 REF SEQUENCER TRQ LIM

+VE TORQUE LIMIT SCALE SOURCE 2 P8.10 1 FIXED 100%
10 FIXED REF MENU 1/2 P3.28 VARIABLE VOLTS BOOST O/P P9.07
2 ANALOG REF1
11 MOTORISED POT
-VE TORQUE LIMIT 1 P8.01 P8.07
3 ANALOG REF2 MOTOR VOLTAGE
12 TRIM REFERENCE
21 4 FIXED VAL OF 0
13 FIXED VAL OF 0
14 FIXED VAL OF 0 X 5 FIXED VAL OF 0

15 SUMMING NODE A
-VE TORQUE LIMIT SCALE SOURCE 1 P8.09
(0) 6 RS485 REF 1
RS485 REF 2
>= 0 X
7
16 SUMMING NODE B
8 RS232 REF 1
17 POINTER 9
-VE TORQUE LIMIT 2 P8.03 9 RS232 REF 2
18 POINTER 10
10 PID CONTROLLER
(0)
X 11 POINTER 19
P3.26
126

-VE TORQUE LIMIT SCALE SOURCE 2 P8.11 P3.25 VARIABLE V. BOOST SOURCE
ENABLE MODULATION LIMIT
VARIABLE
P3.32
P3.24 VARIABLE VOLTS BOOST V.BOOST
SELECT
2ND RAMP P6.16 TORQUE
RATES 127 LIMIT

(0)
ENABLE P3.02 AUTO BOOST
X
P3.09 RESPONSE SPEED
P6.04 S-SHAPING P3.11
ACTIVE CURRENT TAPER WITH
115
P3.10 CUT-IN FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
P6.12 P3.01 FIXED BOOST
- P6.15 2ND RAMP RATES (0)
PULSE
WIDTH MOTOR
P6.00 REGEN. POWER LIMIT P4.12 P3.00 FLUXING CONTROL MODULATION
BRIDGE
- P6.03 RAMP RATES
LINEARISATION
P2.00 BASE FREQUENCY P11.70-P11.77
P6.05 -
P6.08
P2.01 BASE VOLTAGE
RAMP
FREEZE
CLAMP 14- UP/DOWN P3.31 ECONOMY FACTOR
ZERO 17 FWD/REV
8
REFERENCE (no bypass)
(0)
% = P9.01 DRIVE
4 RPM = P9.03 FLUX
P5.21 O/P RUNNING
CONTROL
13 107 SPEED FEEDBACK

(0)

SELECTED CURRENT 49
RAMP TORQUE OVERVOLTAGE
SPEED LIMIT LIMIT CLAMP
REFERENCE (MENU 6) TRIP AVOIDANCE MOTOR
(MENU 3)
(MENUs 3 and 8) CALIBRATION
RUN IN
PROGRESS

P3.07 CURRENT LIMIT P6.17 TRIP AVOIDANCE THRESHOLD

RESPONSE SPEED
(0) P24.03
P35.00
CURRENT & (1)
TORQUE ENABLE (0) P3.04 ABS. MINIMUM FREQUENCY SWITCHING FREQ.
1 114 LIMIT SPEED 70 25
FIXED 100% P3.08
DISABLE TRIM P4.17

2 ANALOG REF1

3
OUTPUT
ANALOG REF2 ENABLE/RUN
4 RS485 REF 1

5 RS485 REF 2 P24.05 SPEED TRIM SLEW RATE

6 RS232 REF 1 FREQUENCY FEEDBACK P9.09

SCALE THE 1 KEYPAD SPEED REF
7 RS232 REF 2 FIXED LIMIT 2 ANALOG REF1
3 STABILITY GAIN P3.16
8 PID CONTROLLER ANALOG REF2
4 RS485 REF 1
9 REF SEQUENCER 5 SPEED TRIM P24.01 STABILITY T.CONST. P3.17
RS485 REF 2
SCALE 1
6 RS232 REF 1
10 FIXED REF MENU
7 RS232 REF 2
11 MOTORISED POT FIXED SPEED TRIM
8 PID CONTROLLER P24.02
P3.05 CURRENT LIMIT SCALE 2 MOTOR
9 REF SEQUENCER STABILITY
12 TRIM REFERENCE P24.04
10 FIXED REF MENU
13 FIXED VAL OF 0 11
SPEED TRIM
MOTORISED POT 75 SCALE SELECT
FIXED VAL OF 0 12 TRIM REFERENCE (0)
14
13 FIXED VAL OF 0
15 SUMMING NODE A 14 FIXED VAL OF 0
SUMMING NODE B 15 HS DIG I/P
16
SLIP TORQUE & SLIP
16 POSITION CONTROL
POINTER 13 P24.00 COMPENSATION DERIVATION
17 17 SUMMING NODE A
18
SPEED TRIM SOURCE
SUMMING NODE B
CURRENT 19 SUMMING NODE C
P3.06
LIMIT SOURCE 20 SUMMING NODE D P3.03
21 POINTER 7
SLIP COMP. GAIN Sheet
P3.05 = REQUIRED MOTOR PEAK I LIMIT x 100%
P99.04 6

Page 7-10 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 7. Control Block Diagrams.

Motor Vector Control, Part 1

KEY P15.00

TORQUE REFERENCE P15.04 ONLY APPLICABLE FOR MOTOR VECTOR CONTROL, P99.01 = 2
CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT 1 KEYPAD TORQUE REF TORQUE
DIGOUT xx
I/O
(A) SETTING ANALOG REF1 REFERENCE
FLAG KEYPAD REFERENCE
2
SOURCE
3 ANALOG REF2
WHEN CHOSEN
4 RS485 REF 1
STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT 5 RS485 REF 2
DIGIN xx
FLAG POINT CONNECTION 6 RS232 REF 1 MENU 15
7 RS232 REF 2
8 PID CONTROLLER
9 REF SEQUENCER P15.00 MONITOR POINT
10 FIXED REF MENU P15.05 FOR ANY TORQUE
11 TORQUE REFERENCE REFERENCE EXCEPT
MOTORISED POT BACKUP KEYPAD
12 TRIM REFERENCE TORQUE
13 FIXED VAL OF 0 REFERENCE
SOURCE P15.01
14 FIXED VAL OF 0

X
15 HS DIG I/P
TORQUE
SCALE
16 POSITION CONTROL FACTOR
17 SUMMING NODE A
18 SUMMING NODE B
19 SUMMING NODE C
20 SUMMING NODE D
P15.02
21 POINTER 8
ENABLE
72 TRQ REF
P14.00 SPEED LOOP P GAIN 1 (0)
SELECT 3
P6.16 P14.01 SPEED LOOP I GAIN 1
2ND
RAMP 127 SPEED DROOP SPEED LOOP D GAIN 1 P14.21
P14.17 P14.02 P15.03
SPEED
(0) INTEGRAL TORQUE DEMAND
P14.18 DROOP TIME CONST.
P6.05 -
RAMP P14.03 SPEED LOOP P GAIN 2 SEED SLEW RATE P4.12
P6.08
FREEZE 3 METHOD
UP/DOWN P14.04 SPEED LOOP I GAIN 2 REGEN. POWER LIMIT
14- FWD/REV
P14.05 SPEED LOOP D GAIN 2 0 ZERO
17
(0) 3 INHIBIT INHIBIT
P6.09 MENU 14 +VE -VE
P14.06 P14.20 DISABLE
RAMP (0) SPEED DISABLE TORQUE TORQUE TORQUE
CLAMP P14.10 GAIN 76
18 BYPASS INTEGRAL SPEED
ZERO SELECT
SPEED DEMAND FREEZE LOOP P8.05 P8.06 P8.04
REFERENCE
(0) TIME CONST. P14.13 22 23 24
4 P6.11
SPEED ERROR OVERSPEED ACTION
P5.21 LIMIT P14.12 (0) (0) (0)
122 TIME CONST. (SEE P29.02)
107 20
13 RAMP SPEED ERROR P9.04
MENU 14 (0)
(0) (1) TORQUE DEMAND

SELECTED RAMP SPEED

TORQUE
SPEED (MENU 6) LOOP
DEMAND
REFERENCE P.I.D

P11.47
P6.00 - FWD/REV
P6.03 RAMP RATES SPEED LOOP P11.49
(0) P14.09 BIAS P14.19 OUTPUT
P14.14 SPEED ERROR MAX. AVAILABLE TORQUE
P6.12 - SPEED DEMAND DEADBAND
P6.15 2nd RAMP RATES TORQUE
19 P14.16 P11.48
DEMAND ENABLE
P14.07 SPEED DEADBAND (0) INERTIA
P6.04 S-SHAPING P14.15 73 SPEED LOOP
OFFSET COMP OUTPUT
DEADBAND
CLAMP P25.03
P6.10 MAX. DEVIATION ZERO (0)
SPEED INERTIA 74
COMP.
SPEED FEEDBACK P14.11 ACCEL. P25.00
TIME CONST. TIME ENABLE
INERTIA
P24.03 COMP.
MENU 25
ENABLE (0)
SPEED 70
TRIM INERTIA
COMP.

MENU 24 P25.04
INERTIA COMP. INERTIA COMP.
P25.01
TIME CONST. O/P TIME CONST.
P24.05 SPEED TRIM SLEW RATE

INERTIA COMP. SPEED SRC P25.02

1 KEYPAD SPEED REF
2 ANALOG REF1 SPEED TRIM SCALE 1 P24.01
TRQ LIM
3 ANALOG REF2 1/2 SGN
4 RS485 REF 1
+VE TORQUE LIMIT SCALE SOURCE 1 P8.08
5 RS485 REF 2 SPEED TRIM SCALE 2 P24.02 1 FIXED 100% P8.07
6 RS232 REF 1 2 ANALOG REF1
P24.04 21
7 3 ANALOG REF2
RS232 REF 2 P8.00 +VE TORQUE LIMIT 1
8 PID CONTROLLER
(0)
75
SPEED TRIM
SCALE SELECT
4
5
RS485 REF 1 X (0)
9 REF SEQUENCER RS485 REF 2
10 FIXED REF MENU 6 RS232 REF 1 MENU 8
+VE TORQUE LIMIT SCALE SOURCE 2 P8.10
11 MOTORISED POT 7 RS232 REF 2
12 TRIM REFERENCE 8 PID CONTROLLER
13 FIXED VAL OF 0 9 REF SEQUENCER +VE TORQUE LIMIT 2
P8.02
14 FIXED VAL OF 0
P24.00
SPEED TRIM SOURCE SELECT
10
11
FIXED REF MENU X TRQ LIM
15 HS DIG I/P MOTORISED POT
12 TRIM REFERENCE 1/2
16 POSITION CONTROL
17 SUMMING NODE A 13 FIXED VAL OF 0 P8.07
-VE TORQUE LIMIT SCALE SOURCE 1 P8.09
18 SUMMING NODE B 14 FIXED VAL OF 0
21
19 SUMMING NODE C 15 SUMMING NODE A
20 SUMMING NODE D 16 SUMMING NODE B P8.01 -VE TORQUE LIMIT 1 (0)
21 POINTER 7 17 POINTER 9 X
18 POINTER 10
-VE TORQUE LIMIT SCALE SOURCE 2 P8.11

P8.03 -VE TORQUE LIMIT 2

% = P9.01/P1.01
RPM = P9.03
X
SPEED Sheet
SPEED FEEDBACK
FEEDBACK
7

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 7-11
7. Control Block Diagrams. ALSPA MV3000e

Motor Vector Control, part 2

KEY
ONLY APPLICABLE FOR MOTOR VECTOR
CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT CONTROL, P99.01 = 2
DIGOUT xx
I/O (A) SETTING FLUX LIMIT SRC. P12.24
FLAG
P12.23-FLUX LIMIT 1
STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT ANALOG REF1 2
DIGIN xx
FLAG POINT CONNECTION ANALOG REF2 3
BASIC MOTOR MOTOR BASE FREQ. P2.00
RS485 REF 1 4
NAMEPLATE
RS485 REF 2 5 DATA MOTOR BASE VOLTS P2.01
ENABLE RS232 REF 1 6
P12.04 MOTOR TEMP. COMPENSATION MANUAL MOTOR FULL LOAD I P2.02
TEMPERATURE
RS232 REF 2 7 MENU 2
COMPENSATION PID CONTROLLER 8 MOTOR NOM. POWER P2.03
P12.08 REF SEQUENCER 9
TEMP. COMP. SOURCE MOTOR NOM. SPEED P2.04
FIXED REF MENU 10
P12.05
MOTORISED POT 11 MOTOR POWER FACTOR P2.05
1 FIXED 100% 77
TRIM REFERENCE 12
2 ANALOG REF1
(1) FIXED VAL OF 0 13
3 ANALOG REF2
FIXED VAL OF 0 14
4 FIXED VAL OF 0 NOTE: SUMMING NODE A 15
5 FIXED VAL OF 0 CLAMPED TO MENU 12
RANGE 20%-100% SUMMING NODE B 16
6 RS485 REF 1 EFFECTIVE ROTOR RESISTANCE =
POINTER 12 17
7 RS485 REF 2 100%-P12.04 TEMP. COMP. SCALE
P12.15-P12.15 x x
8 RS232 REF 1 100% 100% MOTOR PEAK I @ NOM. P12.01
9 RS232 REF 2 SPEED
PID CONTROLLER P12.00 - MOTOR MAGNETISING CURRENT
10 MOTOR PEAK I @ 0% SPEED P12.29
P12.01 - MOTOR PEAK CURRENT @ NOMINAL SPEED
11 SUMMING NODE C
FLUX LIMIT P12.02 - NOMINAL MAINS SUPPLY VOLTS
12 SUMMING NODE D ENABLE MOTOR PEAK I @ 100% SPEED P12.30
MAX. POSSIBLE IF AEM THEN = Vdc/1.35
13 POINTER 11 MENU 12
MOTOR FLUX ELSE = nominal mains voltage
P12.25 CALCULATION P12.11 - STATOR RESISTANCE
P12.09 68 P12.12 - STATOR LEAKAGE INDUCTANCE
P12.07 OUTPUT FREQUENCY
AUTOMATIC Rr ESTIMATED TEMPERATURE P12.13 - MAGNETISING RESISTANCE
TEMPERATURE IDENTIFICATION COMPENSATION
(0) P12.14 - MAGNETISING INDUCTANCE
COMPENSATION GAIN Rr > 0.5xP12.15 DC LINK VOLTAGE
Rr < 1.5xP12.15 P12.15 - ROTOR RESISTANCE
P4.02 SYNCR-START
P12.16 - ROTOR LEAKAGE INDUCTANCE
FLUX MOTOR
P12.17 - MOTOR MAGNETISING CURRENT @ 50% BASE VOLTS
P4.00 START MODE MODEL
AUTO MANUAL
SYNCR-STARTING P12.18 - MOTOR MAGNETISING CURRENT @ 60% BASE VOLTS
P4.01 SYNCRO-START MODE
BLOCK
AUTO TEMP. COMP. P4.03 SYNCRO-START RATE P12.19 - MOTOR MAGNETISING CURRENT @ 70% BASE VOLTS
SYNCRO-STARTING P12.20 - MOTOR MAGNETISING CURRENT @ 80% BASE VOLTS
P12.06 0 = DISABLED (MANUAL)
1 = ENABLED (AUTO) P12.21 - MOTOR MAGNETISING CURRENT @ 90% BASE VOLTS
P12.22 - LEAKAGE VOLTS

P11.70- BRIDGE
P11.77 LINEARISATION

TORQUE VECTOR PULSE

M
DEMAND CONTROL WIDTH
MODULATION
8

DRIVE
P13.17 Vdc FEEDFORWARD FILTER TIME O/P RUNNING
(0) P12.27 HIGH DYNAMIC CURRENT BANDWIDTH CONSTANT P12.38
119 FORCE ENCODER LOSS
P12.35 VECTOR FLUXING MODE CURRENT CONTROLLER Kp FACTOR P12.39
49
P12.36 OPTIMUM VOLT MOD LIMIT CURRENT CONTROLLER Ki FACTOR P12.40
P13.18
ENCODER ORIENTATION CONTROLLER Kp P12.41 MOTOR
(0) OPTIMUM VOLT MODE CURRENT
LOSS 59 120 RESET ENCODER LOSS P12.37 CALIBRATION
CONTROL BANDWIDTH ORIENTATION CONTROLLER Ki P12.42 RUN IN
PROGRESS
ACTION ON LOSS 13.02 P35.00

13.08 ENCODER LINE COUNT P13.04/P13.05 SWITCHING FREQ. (1)

MAX. SPEED CHANGE 25
SELECT P4.17
MAX. REVERSALS 13.19
BACKUP MAX. SPEED FWD P5.15
FEEDBACK
REVERSALS THRESH. 13.20 OUTPUT
MAX. SPEED REV P5.16 ENABLE/RUN
P13.03

118 ENCODER
MENU 13 SPEED
ENCODER ENC
MONITOR FEEDBACK
(0)
& SCALING

ENC. ANGLE 13.10

P13.00 SPEED FB SOURCE
SPEED
FEEDBACK ANALOG REF1 1
# ENC. REVERSALS 13.07 ANALOG REF2 2
SELECT
P13.01 SPEED FB BACKUP SRC
FIXED VAL OF 0 3
FIXED VAL OF 0 4
TACHO RS485 REF 1 5
SPEED SPEED RS485 REF 2 6
FEEDBACK FEEDBACK RS232 REF 1 7
& SCALING
RS232 REF 2 8
HI SPEED INPUT 9
POINTER 18 10
SPEED FEEDBACK

% = P9.01,P1.01 TACHO FEEDBACK SRC. P13.14

RPM = P9.03 SGN
TACHO FEEDBACK SCALE P13.15
P11.51 (%) ENCODER SPEED
TACHO FEEDBACK T.CONST. P13.16
THIS PARAMETER IS ACTIVE ENCODERLESS
IN FREQUENCY CONTROL MATHEMATICAL
SPEED
MODE TO ALLOW SAFE 9 MOTOR
NOTE: Speed feedback, speed reference etc are in ESTIMATION
ENCODER CHECKING MODEL
% of TOP SPEED & SCALING
REVERSE
TOP SPEED = Max of P5.15
SPEED
P5.16
(motor going ENABLE Rs TRACKER P12.28
in reverse)

Sheet
8

Page 7-12 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 7. Control Block Diagrams.

Trips/Warnings and Diagnostic Monitoring

MOTOR MONITORING (MOTOR CONTROL MODES ONLY)
RECTIFIER BRIDGE
DC LINK VOLTS P11.03 IGBT
(IF FITTED)
BRIDGE
RECT+ DC+ MOTOR CURRENT (A) P9.05

M
DRIVE CURRENT (%) P9.06 HOURS/DAYS RUN P11.15/P11.16

RECT- DC- MOTOR VOLTS (V) P9.07 kW/MW HOURS P11.19/P11.20

PRECHARGE IGBT BRIDGE TEMPERATURE P11.05 - P11.11

MOTOR POWER (kW) P9.08
COMPLETE
47
ALL BRIDGE TEMPERATURES MENU 45
MOTOR PROTECTION/TRIP AVOIDANCE (MOTOR CONTROL MODES ONLY)
RECT BRIDGE TEMP. P11.08
P2.10 ACTION ON MTRIP
ELECTRONICS TEMP. P11.04 MOTOR TRIPS AND WARNINGS
CONTROL
PCB P2.11 THERMOSTAT
(CDC) (1) TRIP
MAX EVER ELECTRONICS TEMP. P11.13 MTRIP 113
P23.00 DB RESISTOR VALUE

MIN EVER ELECTRONICS TEMP. P11.14 TRIPS AND WARNINGS

P23.01 DB RESISTOR AVERAGE POWER P2.13 MOTOR PTC TRIP RESISTANCE
MOTOR
OPTIONAL PTC
DYNAMIC TRIP
P23.02 DB RESISTOR MAXIMUM POWER BRAKE P2.15 ACTION ON MOTOR PTC MEASURED PTC RESISTANCE P2.14
HOURS ENERGISED P11.17
UNIT

P23.03 DB RESISTOR MAX POWER TIME DAYS ENERGISED P11.18

(MENU 23) P9.05 MOTOR CURRENT

P23.04 DB VOLTAGE THRESHOLD TRIPS AND WARNINGS

MOTOR
P23.06 DB RES. OVERLOAD ACTION OVERLOAD
DB RES. OVERLOAD REMAINING P23.07 P2.07 MOTOR 150% OVERLOAD TIME
PROTECTION
ALGORITHMS
P23.20 NON-MV DB UNIT FITTED P2.08 MOTOR COOLING FAN TYPE MOTOR OVERLOAD REMAINING P9.11

P23.08
(2.008) P2.09 MOTOR I2T ACTION
DB ENABLE 110
TRIPS AND WARNINGS
P23.09 FROM THE DRIVE SYSTEM
DB RESISTOR (0)
THERMOSTAT 111
DRIVE TRIP AVOIDANCE (MOTOR CONTROL MODES ONLY) DRIVE
TRIP MONITORING
SYSTEM
RIDETHROUGH
P11.03 DC LINK VOLTS 62 ACTIVE HEALTHY
AC (MENU 10) (NO TRIPS
4
MORE MONITORING 16 BIT "WORDS" FOR
MONITORING
P35.12 AC SUPPLY LOSS RIDETHROUGH LOSS
CONTROL
OR WARNINGS)

MENU 9 AND MENU 11 CONTAIN MANY P35.13 NOMINAL MAINS VOLTS

CONTROL FLAGS 0 - 15 P11.23 5 TRIPPED
OTHER MONITORING PARMETERS.
INCLUDING.... ....to.... DRIVE
TRIP
CONTROL FLAGS 112 - 127 P11.28 P35.09 AVOID DRIVE TIMED OVERLOAD AVOIDANCE DRIVE OVERLOAD REMAINING P9.10
CONTROL
6 WARNING
CONTROL FLAGS 80 - 111 P38.10, P38.11 P35.10 AVOID DRIVE OVERTEMPERATURE
STATUS FLAG AND CONTROL FLAG
MONITORS INFLUENCE
DRIVE
MONITOR DRIVE TEMP. OUTPUT
MONITOR DRIVE OVERLOAD FREQUENCY
STATUS FLAGS 0 - 15 P11.30
....to....
STATUS FLAGS 96 - 111 P11.35
TRIP RESETTING and USER TRIPS (ALL CONTROL MODES) SECONDS SINCE TRIP P10.30
RESET P10.34
TB3/3 (1.006)
TRIP RESET
DIGIN 6 9 RESET TRIPS

AUTO RESETTING CONTROL and

"TIMES SINCE"
HOURS SINCE TRIP P10.31

P28.05 FORCE A MOTOR CONTROLSYNCROSTART

P10.32
SYNCROSTART OVERRIDE
START MODE TO (0)
USER 10
ONLY TRIP 1
START MODE AS P4.00 DURING STARTING/STOPPING
AUTO-RESET (MOTOR P10.33
CONTROL MODE (0)
USER
P28.00 No. of AUTO RESET ATTEMPTS ONLY) ? TRIP 2
112

Trip AUTO RESET

Reset Reset

P28.01 AUTO RESET DELAY Delay time Delay time RUN HISTORY
No. AUTO RESETS LEFT O/P RUNNING P26.25 (2.008)
7 8 78
AUTO RESET
IS NOT ZERO
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STOP HISTORY
Supply Loss CONTROL
HISTORY CHART RECORDER TRIPPED
5
P26.26
79
(2.005)
P28.02 SUPPLY LOSS TIME-OUT Time-out Disable
Auto-resets (MENU 28)
No. AUTO RESET LEFT P28.04 P26.00 SAMPLE PERIOD 1 SCAN
= 5ms
P26.01,
CHANNELS 1-10 SIGNALS
P26.03 .. P26.19
Drive Healthy
P26.02,
KEY P26.04 .. P26.20
CHANNELS 1-10 MODE
P28.03 AUTO RESET HEALTHY TIME Healthy time Award
P28.00 P26.21 TRIGGER SOURCE HISTORY
CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT RECORDING
DIGOUT xx
FLAG I/O
(A) SETTING P26.22 LOWER TRIGGER LIMIT SET UP
INST. OVERCURRENT (MENU 26)
TIMED OVERCURRENT P26.23 UPPER TRIGGER LIMIT
P28.06
DC LINK UNDERVOLTS STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT
.
. DC LINK OVERVOLTS DIGIN xx
FLAG POINT CONNECTION SAMPLES AFTER TRIGGER
.
.
ALL MOTOR TRIPS - MOTOR CONTROL MODES ONLY
INTERLOCK TRIP
AUTO RESETTING ENABLES P26.24

REFERENCE LOSS P26.27 HISTORY COMMAND

to
. ALL TEMPERATURE TRIPS
. SERIAL LINK LOSS
.
.
BOTH USER TRIPS
OVERSPEED - MOTOR CONTROL MODES ONLY WARNING HISTORY
LOAD FAULT DETECT - MOTOR CONTROL MODES ONLY P27.00 SAMPLE DISPLAY No. RECORDING
.
DB RESISTOR - MOTOR CONTROL MODES ONLY
If the drive is configured to auto-restart, the motor can start rotating without PLAYBACK
P28.19 SFE MAINS - SFE MODE ONLY an operator command. Take precautions to prevent injury to personnel. P27.01 HISTORY CHANNEL No. (MENU 27)
INTERLOCK TERMINAL (TB3/9) to
P27.10 Sheet
9

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 7-13
7. Control Block Diagrams. ALSPA MV3000e

Motor Position Controller

ONLY APPLICABLE FOR MOTOR CONTROL MODES, P99.01 = 1, 2, 3
POSITION CONTROL OVERVIEW
POSITION
INCHER
MENU 36
POSITION
REFERENCE POSITIONING KEY
SPEED
SHAPER
POSITION
REFERENCE CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT
SELECTIONS,
MENU 36
DIGOUT xx
FLAG I/O (A) SETTING
INCLUDING
15 FIXED DATUM SPEED
POSITIONS
DATUM STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT
MENU 37 CONTROL
DIGIN xx
FLAG POINT CONNECTION
DATUM
MODES MOVE
IN
POSITION MENU 36 PROGRESS
POSITION VALID 64
TEACHER
MENU 36 POSITION FEEDBACK
P36.52
FROM ENCODER [ANY MODE]
(0)
INCH UP 95 APPROACH BIAS P36.44
POSITION BIAS P36.45
POSITION CONTROL MONITOR,
INCHER FOR
ALL VALUES AND FLAGS
SINGLE
P36.53
DIRECTION
MENU 38 (0) P36.46
APPROACH (0) ENABLE
INCH DOWN 96
(MENU 36) 90 UNIDIRECTIONAL
APPROACH
POSN. CONTROL FLAGS 80 - 95 P38.10

CONTROL FLAGS
POSITION SHAPER AND POSN. CONTROL FLAGS 96 - 111 P38.11
P36.47
UP STEP
P36.48
-X1 P36.12 -Y1 P36.13
STATUS FLAGS
-X2 P36.14 -Y2 P36.15
P36.49 -X3 P36.16 -Y3 P36.17 POSN. STATUS FLAGS 64 - 79 P38.09
P36.50 DOWN STEP -X4 P36.18 -Y4 P36.19
FIXED POSITION REF. TABLE -X5 P36.20 -Y5 P36.21
P37.06 TO P37.37 X1 P36.22 Y1 P36.23
X2 P36.24 Y2 P36.25
BACKUP CONTROL X3 P36.26 Y3 P36.27
POSITION 0 ENABLE X4 P36.28 Y4 P36.29
REFERENCE LOSS X5 P36.30 Y5 P36.31
P38.02 INCHING
POSITION FEEDBACK MONITOR
P38.03
SERIAL LINK P36.51
4-20mA
89 SPEED REF.
FIELDBUS POSITION SHAPER RANGE P36.10
etc. P36.11
(0)
POSITION 1
POSITION VALID 64 REFERENCE OF
TEACHER FIXED MENU 1 POSITIONING POSITION SPEED REF. P38.12
16 POSITION POS.
P37.02 = (0) SPEED
ERROR ERROR
P37.05
2 BACKUP SRC.
(0) (MENU 37) ANALOG REF1
LEARN 101
POSN. NOW ANALOG REF2 3
SPEED REFERENCE
DATUMISING TO SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM
FIXED VAL OF 0 4
P37.04 SPEED
POSITION TO LEARN
P37.00 = (1) P38.00
FIXED VAL OF 0 5 P38.01
POSITION 15 P38.04
REF. SRC. 1 % = P38.06 P38.05
RS485 LINK % = P38.08
(DOUBLE PARA) 6 P37.01 = (4)
INHIBIT INHIBIT
P37.38 REF2 = high REF. SRC. 2 NEGATIVE POSITIVE
(0) REF1 = low
SEL.0 91
REF. SRC. P36.09
RS232 LINK SELECT (0)
P37.39 LOW EITHER LIMIT
(DOUBLE PARA) 7 LIMIT 87
(0) MENU 37
0000 = FIXED POSN 0 REF2 = high
SEL.1 92 66
REF1 = low P36.08 OR
...to... FIXED (0) HIGH (0)
P37.40 86
(0) POSITION LIMIT
MENU RS485 LINK 8 88
1111 = FIXED POSN 15 SEL.2 93 REF1 = % POSN
P37.03

P37.41
RS485 LINK 9
(0) REF. 1/2
REF2 = % POSN
SEL.3 94 SELECT
RS232 LINK 10
REF1 = % POSN DATUM MOVEMENT
65
IN PROGRESS
RS232 LINK 11
REF2 = % POSN POSITION
64
P36.40 VALID
12 DATUM (0)
PID 82
(% POSN) PERMIT
DATUM DATUM SEQUENCE P36.34
P36.41
MOTORISED PERFORM (0) MOVEMENT
13
POT (% POSN) DATUM 83 SEQUENCER DATUM SPEED 1 P36.35
MOVEMENT
& CAPTURE
14 P36.42
POINTER 16 (0) DATUM SPEED 2 P36.36
(% POSN) DATUM 84 (MENU 36)
APPROACH
DOUBLE POINTER P36.43
POINTER 17 = high 15 DATUM SPEED 3 P36.37
(0)
POINTER 16 = low DATUM INPUT 85
P36.54 P36.32
TOLERANCE DATUM POSITION
P36.55 P36.33
P36.38
(0) P36.01
FORCE POSITION VALID ENCODER LINE COUNT DIVIDER
80

POSITION VALID 64 P36.02

MAX. POSITION P36.03
P36.39
(0)
67 AT POSITION P36.04
POSITION FORCE POSITION INVALID 81 MIN. POSITION
ZERO SPEED 11 P36.05
MONITOR
68 ABOVE POSITION P38.02 A/B
P38.03 POSITION
% = P38.07
FEEDBACK
P38.00
P38.01
POSITION REFERENCE 69 BELOW POSITION POSITION FEEDBACK WRAPPED
TO 0/MAX POSITION WHEN
ENC
POSITION FEEDBACK
MODE = TURNTABLE Z

P38.02 POSITION FEEDBACK

P38.03 P36.00
Sheet
POSITION CONTROL MODE

10

Page 7-14 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 7. Control Block Diagrams.

Pointers

THE POINTERS BELOW CAN BE USED BY SIMPLY SELECTING THE RELEVANT POINTER
FROM THE LIST OFFERED IN THE RELEVANT REFERENCE CHOICE.

E.G. CHOOSE POINTER 1 FROM THE SPEED REFERENCE CHOICE SELECTION (SHEET 2)
THEN CONFIGURE POINTER 1 BELOW.
THE POINTER SOURCES CAN BE ANY DRIVE PARAMETER.

POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR

P42.00 POINTER 1 SOURCE P42.02 POINTER 2 SOURCE P42.56 POINTER 29 SOURCE
SPEED REFERENCE SPEED REFERENCE PPID SETPOINT

P42.01 POINTER 1 SCALE P42.03 POINTER 2 SCALE P42.57 POINTER 29 SCALE

POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR

P42.04 POINTER 3 SOURCE P42.06 POINTER 4 SOURCE P42.58 POINTER 30 SOURCE
REFERENCE SEQUENCER P17.21 PID SETPOINT PPID FEEDBACK

P42.05 POINTER 3 SCALE P42.07 POINTER 4 SCALE P42.59 POINTER 30 SCALE

POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR

P42.08 POINTER 5 SOURCE P42.10 POINTER 6 SOURCE P42.60 POINTER 31 SOURCE
PID FEEDBACK TRIM REFERENCE PPID FEEDFORWARD

P42.09 POINTER 5 SCALE P42.11 POINTER 6 SCALE P42.61 POINTER 31 SCALE

POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR

P42.12 POINTER 7 SOURCE P42.14 POINTER 8 SOURCE P42.62 POINTER 32 SOURCE
SPEED TRIM REFERENCE TORQUE REFERENCE P15.00 PPID POSITIVE LIMIT

P42.13 POINTER 7 SCALE P42.15 POINTER 8 SCALE P42.63 POINTER 32 SCALE

POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR

P42.16 POINTER 9 SOURCE P42.18 POINTER 10 SOURCE P42.64 POINTER 33 SOURCE
TORQUE LIMITS TORQUE LIMITS PPID NEGATIVE LIMIT

P42.17 POINTER 9 SCALE P42.19 POINTER 10 SCALE P42.65 POINTER 33 SCALE

POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR ONLY SOURCE FOR

P42.20 POINTER 11 SOURCE P42.22 POINTER 12 SOURCE P42.66 POINTER 34 SOURCE
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION FLUX LIMIT QPID SETPOINT
SCALE
P42.21 POINTER 11 SCALE P42.23 POINTER 12 SCALE P42.67 POINTER 34 SCALE

POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR

P42.24 POINTER 13 SOURCE P42.26 POINTER 14 SOURCE P42.68 POINTER 35 SOURCE
CURRENT LIMIT TORQUE / MAGNET. CURRENT QPID FEEBACK

P42.25 POINTER 13 SCALE P42.27 POINTER 14 SCALE P42.69 POINTER 35 SCALE

POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR

P42.28 POINTER 15 SOURCE P42.30 POINTER 16 SOURCE P42.70 POINTER 36 SOURCE
TORQUE / MAGNET. CURRENT POSITION REFERENCE QPID FEEDFORWARD

P42.29 POINTER 15 SCALE P42.31 POINTER 16 SCALE P42.71 POINTER 36 SCALE

POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR

P42.32 POINTER 17 SOURCE P42.34 POINTER 18 SOURCE P42.72 POINTER 37 SOURCE
POSITION REFERENCE TACHO FEEDBACK QPID POSITIVE LIMIT

P42.33 POINTER 17 SCALE P42.35 POINTER 18 SCALE P42.73 POINTER 37 SCALE

POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR

POINTER 19 SOURCE ONLY SOURCE FOR P42.74
P42.36 P42.38 POINTER 20 SOURCE POINTER 38 SOURCE QPID NEGATIVE LIMIT
VARIABLE VOLTS BOOST REFERENCE SHAPER

P42.37 POINTER 19 SCALE P42.75 POINTER 38 SCALE

P42.39 POINTER 20 SCALE

POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR

P42.40 POINTER 21 SOURCE P42.42 POINTER 22 SOURCE
AEM VDC REFERENCE AEM ACTIVE CURRENT REFERENCE

P42.41 POINTER 21 SCALE P42.43 POINTER 22 SCALE

POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR

P42.44 POINTER 23 SOURCE P42.46 POINTER 24 SOURCE
AEM ACTIVE CURRENT AEM ACTIVE CURRENT POSITIVE LIMIT
NEGATIVE LIMIT
P42.45 POINTER 23 SCALE P42.47 POINTER 24 SCALE

POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR

P42.48 POINTER 25 SOURCE P42.50 POINTER 26 SOURCE
AEM REACTIVE CURRENT AEM REACTIVE CURRENT POSITIVE LIMIT
REFERENCE
P42.49 POINTER 25 SCALE P42.51 POINTER 26 SCALE
KEY

CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT

P42.52 POINTER 27 SOURCE
POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR P42.54 POINTER 28 SOURCE
POSSIBLE SOURCE FOR
PROPORTIONAL DB REFERENCE
DIGOUT xx
FLAG I/O (A) SETTING
AEM REACTIVE CURRENT
NEGATIVE LIMIT
P42.53 POINTER 27 SCALE P42.55 POINTER 28 SCALE STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT
DIGIN xx
FLAG POINT CONNECTION

Sheet
11

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 7-15
7. Control Block Diagrams. ALSPA MV3000e

Special Monitoring Functions

APPLICATION MONITORS AND SPECIAL FUNCTIONS, MOTOR CONTROL MODES ONLY

TORQUE WINDOW LEVEL 1 P29.06 FWD OVERSPEED P29.00

TORQUE WINDOW LEVEL 2 P29.07 REV OVERSPEED P29.01

ACTION ON OVERSPEED P29.02

HYSTERESIS P29.08

SPEED WINDOW LEVEL 1 P29.03

TORQUE SPEED WINDOW LEVEL 2 P29.04

MONITOR P9.04
TORQUE
HYSTERESIS P29.05
(MENU 29)

28 AT TORQUE LIMIT SPEED MONITOR

(MENU 29) SPEED FEEDBACK P9.01
29 IN TORQUE WINDOW

30 OUTSIDE TORQUE WINDOW OVERSPEED

10

31 ABOVE TORQUE WINDOW

11 ZERO SPEED

32 BELOW TORQUE WINDOW 12 AT SPEED

48 MOTOR BRAKING
13 IN SPEED WINDOW

14 OUTSIDE SPEED WINDOW

15 ABOVE SPEED WINDOW

P43.00 LOAD FAULT ACTION 16 BELOW SPEED WINDOW

LOAD

LOAD FAULT
DRIVE CURRENT HIGH
P31.19
60 70 FLAG GEN 0
(0)
FREEZE 97
TORQUE DEMAND

LOAD FAULT P31.20 71 FLAG GEN 1

P43.01 LOAD FAULT INPUT LOW (0) STATUS FLAG
NEXT 98 GENERATOR
61 72 FLAG GEN 2
P31.21
P43.02 LOAD FAULT TIME (0) (MENU 31)
PREVIOUS 99
73 FLAG GEN 3
SPEED
P31.22
P43.03 FORWARD SPEED 1
(0) SEQUENCE
RESET 100 74 RUNNING
P43.04 FORWARD MAX LOAD 1
LOAD FAULT DETECTION
P43.05 FORWARD MIN LOAD 1 WINDOW
USED TO CONDITION MODE P31.00
...to....
MONITOR THE PLANT
P43.18 REVERSE SPEED 3 SEQUENCE START POINT P31.01
(MENU 43)
P43.19 REVERSE MAX LOAD 3 SEQUENCE LENGTH P31.02
P43.20 REVERSE MIN LOAD 3
SEQUENCE TIMES

(OUTPUT)

P42.38 INPUT Y (X10,Y10)

POINTER 20 SOURCE

(X8,Y8)
P42.39 POINTER 20 SCALE

P44.00 REFERENCE SHAPER X1 X

REF. SHAPER OUTPUT P44.20
(X5,Y5) (INPUT)
P44.01 REFERENCE SHAPER Y1
REFERENCE
....to.... SHAPER
P44.18 REFERENCE SHAPER X10 (MENU 44)
(X1,Y1)
P44.19 REFERENCE SHAPER Y10

KEY

CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT

DIGOUT xx
FLAG I/O (A) SETTING

STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT

DIGIN xx
FLAG POINT CONNECTION
Sheet
12

Page 7-16 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 7. Control Block Diagrams.

Application Logic - General Purpose Logic Blocks

COMPARATOR
17 A
18 DELAY A LOGIC COMPARATOR I
OUTPUT 112 DELAY I
OUTPUT 19 BLOCK A OUTPUT 113
P30.00 INPUT A OUTPUT OUTPUT
P47.00 INPUT I
COMPARATOR
A COMPARATOR
P30.01 THRESHOLD A DELAY A SOURCE P30.07 I
P30.09
P47.01 THRESHOLD I DELAY I
(0) LOGIC P47.08
37 BLOCK (0) LOGIC LOGIC
P30.02 HYSTERESIS DELAY TIME A 145 BLOCK 114 BLOCK I
P30.08
P30.11 P47.02 HYSTERESIS DELAY TIME I OUTPUT
P30.05 P30.10 (0) SET SET
(0) SOURCE (0) 39 RESET P47.07 P47.09
P30.03 MODE 36 38 LATCH 20 (0) SOURCE P47.05 (0)
P30.04 A P47.03 MODE 144 146
P30.12
LATCH P47.04
(0)
FUNCTION 40 OUTPUT A
P30.06 MENU 47
RESET P47.06 FUNCTION
MENU 30

COMPARATOR J
COMPARATOR B 115 DELAY J
21 LOGIC OUTPUT 116
OUTPUT 22 DELAY B 23 BLOCK B OUTPUT
OUTPUT OUTPUT P47.10 INPUT J
P30.13 INPUT B COMPARATOR
COMPARATOR J
B P47.11 THRESHOLD J DELAY J
P30.14 THRESHOLD B DELAY B SOURCE P30.20 P47.18
P30.22
(0) LOGIC LOGIC
(0) LOGIC 148 BLOCK 117 BLOCK J
42 BLOCK P47.12 HYSTERESIS DELAY TIME J OUTPUT
P30.15 HYSTERESIS DELAY TIME B P47.17
P30.24 P47.19
P30.21 P30.23 (0) (0) SOURCE P47.15 (0)
(0) P30.18 (0) SET SET P47.13 144 149
SOURCE 44 MODE
MODE 41 43 RESET
P30.16 P47.14
P30.17 LATCH 24 MENU 47
P30.25 B
(0) P47.16 FUNCTION
P30.19 FUNCTION 45 LATCH
RESET OUTPUT B
MENU 30
COMPARATOR K
118 DELAY K
OUTPUT 119
OUTPUT
P47.20 INPUT K
35 COMPARATOR C
OUTPUT DELAY C LOGIC COMPARATOR
36
OUTPUT 37 BLOCK C K
P30.26 INPUT C OUTPUT P47.21 THRESHOLD K DELAY K
COMPARATOR P47.28
C (0) LOGIC LOGIC
P30.27 THRESHOLD C DELAY C SOURCE 151 BLOCK 120 BLOCK K
P30.33 P47.22 HYSTERESIS DELAY TIME J OUTPUT
P30.35
LOGIC P47.27 P47.29
(0) P47.25 (0)
47 BLOCK (0) SOURCE
P30.28 HYSTERESIS DELAY TIME C P47.23 MODE 150 152
P30.37 P47.24
P30.34 P30.36 (0) SET
P30.31 SET RESET MENU 47
(0) SOURCE (0) 49
P30.29 MODE 46 48 LATCH 38 P47.26 FUNCTION
P30.30 C
P30.38
(0) LATCH
P30.32 FUNCTION 50 OUTPUT C COMPARATOR L
121 DELAY L
MENU 30 RESET OUTPUT 122
OUTPUT
P47.30 INPUT L
COMPARATOR
L
39 COMPARATOR D LOGIC P47.31 THRESHOLD L DELAY L
OUTPUT DELAY D BLOCK D
40 OUTPUT 41 P47.38
OUTPUT (0) LOGIC LOGIC
P30.39 INPUT D 154 BLOCK 123 BLOCK L
COMPARATOR P47.32 HYSTERESIS DELAY TIME L OUTPUT
D P47.37 P47.39
P30.40 THRESHOLD D DELAY D SOURCE P30.46 (0) P47.35 (0)
SOURCE
P47.33 MODE 153 155
P30.48
(0) LOGIC P47.34
52 BLOCK MENU 47
P30.41 HYSTERESIS DELAY TIME D
P30.50 P47.36 FUNCTION
P30.47 P30.49 (0) SET SET
(0) P30.44 (0) 54
SOURCE RESET
P30.42 MODE 51 53 LATCH
P30.43 42
P30.51 D
(0)
P30.45 FUNCTION 55 LATCH
RESET OUTPUT D

P47.61 P47.66 P47.71 P47.76

(0) (0) (0) (0)
172 176 180 184
P30.53 P30.61 P30.57 P30.65 LOGIC LOGIC LOGIC LOGIC
LOGIC (0) LOGIC (0) LOGIC (0) LOGIC BLOCK Q BLOCK S BLOCK T
(0) BLOCK G
P47.62 P47.67 BLOCK R P47.72 P47.77
56 BLOCK E 62 59 BLOCK F 65 BLOCK H OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
OUTPUT (0) (0) OUTPUT (0) (0)
OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT 173 LOGIC 177 181 LOGIC 185 LOGIC
P30.62 P30.58 LOGIC
P30.54 LOGIC LOGIC LOGIC P30.66 LOGIC BLOCK
(0) (0) (0) (0) BLOCK 128 BLOCK BLOCK 130 131
BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK 46 P47.63 P47.68 129 P47.73 P47.78
57 43 63 45 60 44 66 (0) Q R (0) S (0) T
E G F H (0)
174 178 182 186
P30.55 P30.63 P30.59 P30.67
(0) (0) (0) (0) P47.64 P47.74 P47.79
64 61 P47.69
58 67 (0) (0) (0) (0)
MENU 30 175 179 183 187

P30.52 FUNCTION P30.60 FUNCTION P30.56 FUNCTION P30.64 FUNCTION

P47.60 FUNCTION P47.65 FUNCTION P47.70 FUNCTION P47.75 FUNCTION

P47.41 P47.46 P47.51 P47.56

(0) (0) (0) (0)
156 160 164 168 MENU 47
LOGIC LOGIC LOGIC LOGIC
P47.42 BLOCK M P47.47 BLOCK N P47.52 BLOCK O P47.57 BLOCK P
(0) OUTPUT OUTPUT (0) OUTPUT (0) OUTPUT
157 (0) 165 169
LOGIC 161 LOGIC LOGIC LOGIC
BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK 127
P47.43 124 P47.48 125 P47.53 126 P47.58
(0) M (0) N (0) O (0) P
158 162 166 170

P47.44 P47.54 P47.59

(0)
P47.49
(0) (0) (0) KEY
159 163 167 171

CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT

P47.40 FUNCTION P47.45 FUNCTION P47.50 FUNCTION P47.55 FUNCTION DIGOUT xx
FLAG I/O (A) SETTING
Sheet
MENU 47 DEFAULT
STATUS MONITOR
DIGIN xx
FLAG POINT CONNECTION 13

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 7-17
7. Control Block Diagrams. ALSPA MV3000e

Summing Nodes, Analogue Switches and Square Roots

THE EQUATION BELOW SHOWS HOW SUMMING NODES A, B, C, D, E, F, G & H OPERATE. SQUARE ROOTS
THE EIGHT DIAGRAMS ARE A LOGICAL REPRESENTATION. P40.48 SQROOT A INPUT X 10000 SQROOT OF A P40.49

SUMMING NODE INPUT 1 SUMMING NODE INPUT 2

SUMMING NODE OUTPUT = ? X 100.00% P40.50 SQROOT B INPUT X 10000 SQROOT OF B P40.51
SUMMING NODE SCALE 1 SUMMING NODE SCALE 2

WHERE ? IS THE CHOSEN MODE (+, , x or ) MENU 40

P40.00 INPUT PARAMETER #1A P40.24 INPUT PARAMETER #1E ANALOGUE SWITCHES
SUMMING NODE A SUMMING NODE E P40.78 FIXED REF A1
P40.02 PARAMETER #1A SCALE P40.26 PARAMETER #1E SCALE

(+) (+) P40.76 SWITCH A INPUT 1

P40.20 SUMMING NODE A MODE SUMMING NODE A OUTPUT P40.04 P40.44 SUMMING NODE E MODE SUMMING NODE E OUTPUT P40.28
SWITCH A OUTPUT P40.81
P40.01 INPUT PARAMETER #2A P40.25 INPUT PARAMETER #2E
MENU P40.77 SWITCH A INPUT 2
MENU
40 40
P40.79 FIXED REF A2 MENU 40
P40.03 PARAMETER #2A SCALE P40.27 PARAMETER #2E SCALE P40.80

SWITCH A STATE 140

(0.000)

P40.05 INPUT PARAMETER #1B P40.29 INPUT PARAMETER #1F

SUMMING NODE B SUMMING NODE F P40.84 FIXED REF B1

P40.07 PARAMETER #1B SCALE P40.31 PARAMETER #1F SCALE

(+) (+)
P40.21 SUMMING NODE B MODE SUMMING NODE B OUTPUT P40.09 P40.45 P40.82 SWITCH B INPUT 1
SUMMING NODE F MODE SUMMING NODE F OUTPUT P40.33
SWITCH B OUTPUT P40.87
P40.06 INPUT PARAMETER #2B P40.30 INPUT PARAMETER #2F
P40.83 SWITCH B INPUT 2
MENU MENU
40 MENU 40
P40.08 40 P40.85 FIXED REF B2
PARAMETER #2B SCALE P40.32 PARAMETER #2F SCALE
P40.80

SWITCH B STATE 141

(0.000)

P40.10 INPUT PARAMETER #1C P40.34 INPUT PARAMETER #1G

SUMMING NODE C SUMMING NODE G FIXED REF C1

P40.12 P40.90
PARAMETER #1C SCALE P40.36 PARAMETER #1G SCALE

(+) (+)
P40.22 SUMMING NODE C MODE SUMMING NODE C OUTPUT P40.14 P40.46 P40.88 SWITCH C INPUT 1
SUMMING NODE G MODE SUMMING NODE G OUTPUT P40.38
SWITCH C OUTPUT P40.93
P40.11 INPUT PARAMETER #2C P40.35 INPUT PARAMETER #2G
P40.89 SWITCH C INPUT 2
MENU MENU
40 40
P40.91 FIXED REF C2 MENU 40
P40.13 PARAMETER #2C SCALE P40.37 PARAMETER #2G SCALE
P40.92

SWITCH C STATE 142

(0.000)

P40.15 INPUT PARAMETER #1D P40.39 INPUT PARAMETER #1H

SUMMING NODE D SUMMING NODE H P40.96 FIXED REF D1

P40.17 PARAMETER #1D SCALE P40.41 PARAMETER #1H SCALE

(+) (+)
P40.23 SUMMING NODE D MODE SUMMING NODE D OUTPUT P40.19 P40.47 SUMMING NODE H MODE P40.94 SWITCH D INPUT 1
SUMMING NODE H OUTPUT P40.43
SWITCH D OUTPUT P40.99
P40.16 INPUT PARAMETER #2D INPUT PARAMETER #2H
P40.40
P40.95 SWITCH D INPUT 2
MENU 40 MENU 40
P40.97 FIXED REF D2 MENU 40
P40.18 PARAMETER #2D SCALE P40.42 PARAMETER #2H SCALE
P40.98

SWITCH D STATE 143

(0.000)

KEY

CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT

DIGOUT xx
FLAG I/O (A) SETTING

STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT

DIGIN xx
FLAG POINT CONNECTION
Sheet
14

Page 7-18 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 7. Control Block Diagrams.

Comparators, Ramp Function & Brake Logic

COMPARATORS

P40.52 COMPARATOR U INPUT 1 132 COMPARATOR U OUTPUT P40.58 COMPARATOR V INPUT 1 133 COMPARATOR V OUTPUT
COMPARATOR COMPARATOR
U V
COMPARATOR U 0UTPUT P40.57 P40.59 COMPARATOR V INPUT 2 COMPARATOR V 0UTPUT P40.63
P40.53 COMPARATOR U INPUT 2

P40.54 FIXED REF U P40.60 FIXED REF V

P47.80 ENABLE BRAKE FUNCTION 138 LATCHED RUN
P40.55 COMPARATOR U HYSTERESIS MENU 40 P40.61 COMPARATOR V HYSTERESIS MENU 40
P47.81
COMPARATOR U MODE P40.62 COMPARATOR V MODE (0.000)
P40.56 RUN REQUEST 188

P47.82 137 TORQUE PROVE OK

COMPARATOR W INPUT 1 134 COMPARATOR W OUTPUT (0.000)
P40.64 P40.70 COMPARATOR X INPUT 1 135 COMPARATOR X OUTPUT BRAKE RELEASE INPUT 189
COMPARATOR COMPARATOR
W X
P40.65 COMPARATOR W INPUT 2 COMPARATOR W 0UTPUT P40.69 COMPARATOR X 0UTPUT P40.75 136 HOLDING TORQUE OK
P40.71 COMPARATOR X INPUT 2

ACTIVE CURRENT
P40.66 FIXED REF W P40.72 FIXED REF X TORQUE PROVE FAIL (T222)
P47.83 TORQUE PROVE THRESHOLD
P40.67 COMPARATOR W HYSTERESIS MENU 40 P40.73 COMPARATOR X HYSTERESIS MENU 40

P40.68 COMPARATOR W MODE COMPARATOR X MODE

P40.74 SPEED FEEDBACK

P47.84 ZERO SPEED THRESHOLD BRAKE LOGIC 141 AT ZERO SPEED

RAMP FUNCTION P47.85 TORQUE PROVE TIME 139 RELEASE REFERENCE

P47.86 RELEASE REF TIMER

P47.87 BRAKE HOLDOFF TIME

P6.30
(0.000)
RAMP BYPASS 139 P47.88 BRAKE RELEASE TIME
140 BRAKE RELEASE REQUEST
P6.35
(0.000) P47.89 START RESET TIME
SELECT RAMP 2 138 BRAKE RELEASE FAIL (T223)

P6.29 P47.90 RELEASE FAIL TIME

(0.000)
RAMP FREEZE DOWN -VE 137

P6.28
(0.000)
RAMP FREEZE DOWN +VE 136
MENU 47
P6.27
(0.000)
RAMP FREEZE UP -VE 135

P6.26
(0.000)
RAMP FREEZE UP +VE 134

P6.36
P6.20 RAMP INPUT RAMP OUTPUT

P6.21 INCREASE RATE+VE

P6.22 DECREASE RATE +VE

P6.23 INCREASE RATE -VE

P6.24 DECREASE RATE -VE

P6.25 S-SHAPING

P6.31 INCREASE RATE 2 +VE

KEY
P6.32 DECREASE RATE 2 +VE

P6.33 INCREASE RATE 2 -VE CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT

DIGOUT xx
FLAG I/O (A) SETTING
P6.34 DECREASE RATE 2 -VE
STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT
DIGIN xx
FLAG POINT CONNECTION

Sheet
15

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 7-19
7. Control Block Diagrams. ALSPA MV3000e

Scalar Control
ONLY APPLICABLE FOR SCALAR
MOTOR CONTROL, P99.01 = 3
MAGNET. CURRENT REF. P3.22
1 FIXED 100% P3.20 MAGNET. CURRENT SCALE
2 ANALOG REF1
3 ANALOG REF2
4
5
6
RS485 REF 1
RS485 REF 2
RS232 REF 1
X
7 RS232 REF 2 P3.18
MAGNET. CURRENT SOURCE P9.07
8 PID CONTROLLER
9 REF SEQUENCER 2 2 P+I MOTOR VOLTAGE
X= A + B
10 FIXED REF MENU P3.21 TORQUE CURRENT SCALE
11 MOTORISED POT
12 TRIM REFERENCE
13
14
FIXED VAL OF 0
FIXED VAL OF 0
X
15 SUMMING NODE A P3.19
16 SUMMING NODE B TORQUE CURRENT SOURCE
17 POINTER 14
TORQUE CURRENT REF. P3.23
18 POINTER 15

% = P9.01
RPM = P9.03

SPEED FEEDBACK

PULSE

M
WIDTH
MODULATION

SELECTED
SPEED CLAMP 8
REFERENCE
DRIVE
O/P RUNNING
FREQUENCY FEEDBACK P9.09

P35.00
P24.03
ENABLE (0) P3.04 MINIMUM FREQUENCY SWITCHING FREQ. (1)
SPEED 70 25
TRIM P4.17

OUTPUT
ENABLE/RUN

P24.05 SPEED TRIM SLEW RATE

1 KEYPAD SPEED REF

2 ANALOG REF1
3 ANALOG REF2
SPEED TRIM SCALE 1 P24.01
4

X
RS485 REF 1
5 RS485 REF 2
6 RS232 REF 1
7
SPEED TRIM SCALE 2 P24.02 KEY
RS232 REF 2
8 PID CONTROLLER P24.04
CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT
9 REF SEQUENCER
75 SPEED TRIM DIGOUT xx
FLAG I/O (A) SETTING
10 FIXED REF MENU (0) SCALE SELECT
11 MOTORISED POT
12 TRIM REFERENCE STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT
DIGIN xx
FLAG POINT CONNECTION
13 FIXED VAL OF 0
14 FIXED VAL OF 0
15 HS DIG I/P P24.00

16 POSITION CONTROL SPEED TRIM SELECT

17 SUMMING NODE A
18 SUMMING NODE B
19 SUMMING NODE C
20 SUMMING NODE D
21
Sheet
POINTER 7

16

Page 7-20 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 7. Control Block Diagrams.

SFE Control System Overview

PLANT INTERLOCK (IF THIS INPUT IS OPEN, THE SFE WILL TRIP)
INTERLOCK
SELECT 110% or 150%
OVERLOAD DUTY
FOR PLANT I/O SEE MENU 7, SHEET 4 P99.02 (P1.29)
SELECT STANDARD
OR ALTERNATE
THESE PARAMETERS MAY AC VOLTAGE GRADE
BE ENTERED BY KEYPAD. P99.11 (P1.28)
THIS DOES NOT MAKE THE SFE VECTOR CONTROL, PART 1 SHEET 18
KEYPAD A "REFERENCE
SOURCE", SO KEYPAD
REMOVAL WILL BE MAINS BRIDGE
ALLOWED. * DELTA SYSTEM USES SEPARATE
MAINS VOLTAGE MONITOR

AuxR
VECTOR CONTROL, PART 2 SHEET 19 AuxS
ANALOG REACTIVE PRECHARGE AuxT
CURRENT
REF 1 REFERENCE
CIRCUIT
PRECHARGE SHEET 2 & 9
+/- 10V @ DEFAULT MAINS COMPLETE
47

ANALOG MENU 52 CURRENT

VOLTAGE
MONITOR * OPTIONAL
DYNAMIC
CONTROL (BDM ONLY) BRAKE
REF 2 REFERENCE DC LINK
MENU 23
SOURCE VOLTAGE MENU 52
4 - 20mA @ DEFAULT SELECTION CONTROL
BI-DIRECTIONAL
EDIT PARAMETERS CONVERTER P11.03, P51.00
MENUS 50, 52
DC LINK VOLTS
LOAD TB7
HARDWARE
POWER MAINS BRIDGE
MENU 53
FEEDFORWARD MONITORING INTERLOCK
+

MENU 52 V dc AT REF
MENU 52
100 DC LINK

MAINS
LCN
STARTING AND STOPPING SHEET 5

KEYPAD START AND STOP SFE

R/U

START/STOP REMOTE
START/STOP
S/V
FLAGS T/W
NORMAL 25
STOP
STOP SFE RUNNING
DIGIN 1 0 OUTPUT
ENABLE/RUN 8

START
START
DIGIN 2 1 MENU 50
ANCILLARY COMPONENTS
KEYPAD/REMOTE
KEYPAD/
DIGIN 4 REMOTE
116

RUN

DIGIN 3 PERMIT

TRIPS/WARNINGS/DIAGNOSTIC MONITORS SHEET 9

TRIP USING "NOT" TRIPPED ENSURES THAT WARNINGS DO NOT AFFECT THE HEALTHY OUTPUT HEALTHY
DIGIN 6 RESET
9 TRIP MONITORING SYSTEM 5
TRIPPED
(MENU 7) DIGOUT 1
TRIP 10 PRESENT TRIPS.
RESET 10 PRESENT WARNINGS.
10 TRIP HISTORY STORAGE. HISTORY RECORDING MONITORING

USER CONFIGURABLE TRIPS. 10 CHANNELS EXTENSIVE OTHER USEFUL MENUS APPLICATION LOGIC, SPECIAL MONITORING FUNCTIONS SHEET 12 & 13 SFE RUNNING
MONITOR ANY
SFE PARAMETER
SYSTEM
MONITORS
MENU 99 SECURITY CODES,
PARAMETER BACKUP
(MENU 7) DIGOUT 2
TO AID
TRIGGER SET-UP VIEWING AND SYSTEM LOGIC GATES STATUS FLAG
PRE AND POST TRIG AND CONFIGURATIONS COMPARATORS BINARY GENERATOR
MANUAL TRIGGER DIAGNOSTICS DELAYS
MENU 35 KEYPAD REMOVAL,
MENU 10 V dc AT REF
MENUS 26 and 27 MENU 11 & 51 PARAMETER PRINTING
AND PARAMETER "LOCKING"
MENU 30 MENU 31
(MENU 7) DIGOUT 3
AUTO-RESETTING/STARTING

CONFIGURE THE SFE TO AUTO-RESET/RESTART AFTER A TRIP

CUSTOMER SELECTABLE RESET ENABLES
NUMBER OF RESETS AND TIMINGS OF RESETS MENU 28
SUMMING NODES, SWITCHES AND POINTERS SHEET 14 SFE MONITORING MENUS MENUS 11, 45 and 51 ANALOG
MENU 40 PROGRAMMABLE SUMMING NODES, ALLOWING SCALING AND
SUMMATION OF ANY SFE PARAMETER.
MENU 45 SFE TEMPERATURES O/P 1
KEY +/- 10V @ DEFAULT (MENU 7)
MENU 11 MONITORING OF SFE VARIABLES, INCLUDING
MENU 42 POINTERS. THESE POINTERS ARE ASSOCIATED WITH MOST TEMPERATURES, CONTROL AND STATUS FLAGS
ANALOG DEFAULT OF THE SFE's REFERENCEC CHOICES, AND ALLOWS THE USER HOURS RUN, DIGITAL I/O STATES, ANALOG
DIGOUT xx CONTROL (A) SETTING
TO CHOOSE ANY SFE PARAMETER FOR THE REQUIRED USE. ANALOGUE INPUT AND OUTPUT VALUES AND OTHERS.
FLAG I/O
MENU 51 SFE VOLTS, CURRENTS, POWER FEEDBACKS O/P 2
+/- 10V @ DEFAULT (MENU 7)
STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT
DIGIN xx POINT CONNECTION
FLAG
Sheet
17

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 7-21
7. Control Block Diagrams. ALSPA MV3000e

SFE Vector Control, Part 1

1 P50.00
ONLY APPLICABLE FOR SFE MODE, P99.01 = 4
2 ANALOG REF1
3 ANALOG REF2
4 RS485 REF1 SFE REF LOSS
5 RS485 REF2 106
6 RS232 REF1
7 RS232 REF2
Vdc AT REF
8 PID CONTROLLER ACTIVE CURRENT DEMAND
100 IN POSITIVE LIMIT
9 REF SEQUENCER DC LINK
X CLAMP 101
10 FIXED REF MENU VOLTAGE
11 MOTORISED POT P51.00 PI CONTROL
Vdc 1 VDC CONTROLLER
12 TRIM REFERENCE P11.03 2 ANALOG REF1
13 FIXED VAL OF 0
Vdc REF 3 ANALOG REF2
14 FIXED VAL OF 0 SOURCE ACTIVE
4 RS485 REF1 P51.11
15 SUMMING NODE A CURRENT
Vdc REF Vdc REF P50.00 5 RS485 REF2 P51.12
16 SUMMING NODE B DEMAND
SCALE 6 RS232 REF 1
17 SUMMING NODE C P53.00
DC LINK 7 RS232 REF 2
18 SUMMING NODE D Vdc
Vdc Ki CONTROLLER 8 PID CONTROLLER
19 POINTER 21 P53.01 Kp
CURRENT 9 REF SEQUENCER ACTIVE CURRENT
X CLAMP
DEMAND
DEMAND 10 FIXED REF MENU
P52.02 P52.03 11 MOTORISED POT
DC LINK P51.09 12 TRIM REFERENCE TO SHEET SFE-4
P52.00 CONTROL DC LINK 13 FIXED VAL OF 0 ACTIVE
CONTROLLER CURRENT ACTIVE CURRENT DEMAND
BANDWIDTH 14 FIXED VAL OF 0
GAIN DEMAND IN NEGATIVE LIMIT
15 SUMMING NODE A ACTIVE
AUTO SOURCE CURRENT 102
CALCULATION 16 SUMMING NODE B
DEMAND
17 POINTER 22
P53.04 SCALE
LOAD
P50.02 CONVERTER P53.05
RATING

DISABLE AUTO
P52.01 CALCULATION
OF GAINS 1 P50.03
2 ANALOG REF1
TB6/8,7 3 ANALOG REF2
ANALOG I/P REF 1 4 RS485 REF1
5 RS485 REF2
FEEDFORWARD CURRENT 6 RS232 REF1
DEMAND
P51.10
DC LINK 7 RS232 REF2
LOAD POWER FEEDFORWARD
8 PID CONTROLLER
TB6/6,5 9 REF SEQUENCER
FEEDFORWARD POWER X
ANALOG I/P REF 2 P51.07 10 FIXED REF MENU
DEMAND
11 MOTORISED POT
REACTIVE 12 TRIM REFERENCE
ACTIVE ACTIVE
CURRENT 13 FIXED VAL OF 0 P50.03
P52.06 CURRENT CURRENT
POSITIVE 14 FIXED VAL OF 0 POSITIVE POSITIVE LIMIT
LIMIT
15 SUMMING NODE A LIMIT ACTIVE
16 SUMMING NODE B SOURCE CURRENT
POSITIVE
LOAD POWER SIGNAL 17 POINTER 24
P53.06 LIMIT SCALE
P53.03 SOURCE AND MODE
P53.07 -1 X
1 P52.06
CURRENT SENSOR 2 ANALOG REF1
P52.15 TURNS RATIO 3 ANALOG REF2
4 RS485 REF1
5 RS485 REF2
CURRENT SENSOR 6 RS232 REF 1
P52.16 BURDEN RESISTOR 7 RS232 REF2
8 PID CONTROLLER 1 P50.04
9 REF SEQUENCER 2 ANALOG REF1
X
10 FIXED REF MENU 3 ANALOG REF2
11 MOTORISED POT 4 RS485 REF1
12 TRIM REFERENCE 5 RS485 REF2
13 FIXED VALUE OF 0 REACTIVE 6 RS232 REF1
CURRENT 7 RS232 REF2
14 FIXED VALUE OF 0
POSITIVE 8 PID CONTROLLER
15 SUMMING NODE A LIMIT REACTIVE
16 SUMMING NODE B 9 REF SEQUENCER
SOURCE CURRENT X
17 POINTER 26 POSITIVE 10 FIXED REF MENU
18 P52.54 P53.12 LIMIT SCALE 11 MOTORISED POT
1 P52.05 12 TRIM REFERENCE ACTIVE
ACTIVE
2 ANALOG REF 1 P53.13 13 FIXED VAL OF 0 CURRENT
CURRENT P50.04
3 ANALOG REF 2 14 FIXED VAL OF 0 NEGATIVE
NEGATIVE
LIMIT
4 RS485 REF 1 15 SUMMING NODE A LIMIT ACTIVE
5 RS485 REF 2 16 SUMMING NODE B SOURCE CURRENT
REACTIVE CURRENT
103 NEGATIVE
6 RS232 REF 1 REF. IN POSITIVE LIMIT 17 POINTER 23
P53.08 LIMIT SCALE
7 RS232 REF 2
8 PID CONTROLLER
P53.09
9 REF SEQUENCER
X CLAMP
10 FIXED REF MENU
11 MOTORISED POT TO SHEET SFE-4
12 TRIM REFERENCE
13 FIXED VAL OF 0 REACTIVE REACTIVE
P52.05 REACTIVE CURRENT REF. REACTIVE CURRENT
CURRENT CURRENT 104 IN NEGATIVE LIMIT DEMAND
14 FIXED VAL OF 0
REFERENCE REFERENCE
15 SUMMING NODE A REACTIVE
SOURCE CURRENT
16 SUMMING NODE B
REFERENCE REACTIVE
17 POINTER 25
P53.10 P51.15
SCALE CURRENT
18 P52.46 DEMAND P51.16
P53.11 -1
1 P52.07
2 ANALOG REF1
3 ANALOG REF2
4 RS485 REF1
5 RS485 REF2
6 RS232 REF1 X X
7 RS232 REF2
8 PID CONTROLLER
9 REF SEQUENCER
REACTIVE
KEY 10 FIXED REF MENU
CURRENT
11 MOTORISED POT
NEGATIVE
12 TRIM REFERENCE LIMIT REACTIVE REACTIVE
CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT
DIGOUT 12 <A> 13 FIXED VALUE OF 0 SOURCE CURRENT CURRENT P52.07
FLAG I/O SETTING NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
14 FIXED VALUE OF 0
15 SUMMING NODE A P53.14 LIMIT SCALE LIMIT Sheet
STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT
DIGIN 23
FLAG POINT CONNECTION
16
17
SUMMING NODE B
POINTER 27 P53.15 18

Page 7-22 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 7. Control Block Diagrams.

SFE Vector Control, Part 2

ACTIVE CURRENT P51.13, P51.14
ONLY APPLICABLE FOR SFE MODE, P99.01 = 4

REACTIVE CURRENT P51.17, P51.18

ESTIMATED DC LINK CURRENT P51.08

MAINS CURRENT P51.01, P51.02 PWM VOLTAGE P51.05

MAINS POWER P51.06 8 RUNNING

P35.00 PWM FREQUENCY

LINE REACTOR
FROM SHEET SFE-3
MAINS
ACTIVE CURRENT
DEMAND

SFE CURRENT CONTROLLER PULSE WIDTH

FROM SHEET SFE-3 MAINS ANGLE
MODULATION
REACTIVE CURRENT
DEMAND

P52.04 CURRENT CONTROLLER BANDWIDTH

P50.09
NOMINAL MAINS SUPPLY VOLTAGE
P54.17

P54.01 MAINS FILTER BANDWIDTH

P50.01 CHOKE INDUCTANCE

P54.13 FREQUENCY METHOD

MAINS ANGLE
P52.13 SUPPLY INDUCTANCE X 105 MAINS SYNC VALID

MAINS VOLTAGE
P52.12 MAINS SYNC OFFSET MONITORING TRIP 94
WARNING 134
Note: Negative frequency P51.03
indicates negative phase MAINS FREQUENCY
P54.06 P53.19
rotation detected. ACTION ON MAINS LOSS
P54.14

P52.09 MAINS UNDERFREQ WARNING

WARNING 133 X MAINS VOLTS SCALING P52.14

P52.10 MAINS OVERFREQ WARNING

KEY Vq MAINS P54.03

CONTROL ANALOG DEFAULT Vd MAINS P54.04

DIGOUT xx
FLAG I/O (A) SETTING
P52.08 MAINS UNDERFREQ TRIP
P54.05
Vrms MAINS

STATUS MONITOR DEFAULT

TRIP 93 P51.04
DIGIN xx
FLAG POINT CONNECTION P54.16
P52.11 MAINS OVERFREQ TRIP MAINS AMPLITUDE
P51.23

P52.08 MAINS UNDERFREQ TRIP

WARNING 142 Sheet

P52.08 MAINS UNDERFREQ TRIP
TRIP 210 19
P52.08 MAINS UNDERFREQ TRIP

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 7-23
7. Control Block Diagrams. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 7-24 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 8. Serial Communications.

8 Serial Communications.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Page

8.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 8-3

8.1.1 RS232 Port and the Keypad................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.2 Access Authority..................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.3 Parameter Numbers ............................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 RS232 Serial Link .......................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.2.2 RS232 Outline Protocol Specification .................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.3 RS232 Connection Details ..................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.4 RS232 Serial Port Configuration ............................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.5 Loss of RS232 Serial Link ...................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3 RS485 Serial Link .......................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.3.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................. 8-6
8.3.2 RS485 Outline Protocol Specification .................................................................................... 8-6
8.3.3 RS485 Connection Details ..................................................................................................... 8-7
8.3.4 RS485 Serial Port Configuration ............................................................................................ 8-7
8.3.5 Loss of RS485 Serial Link ...................................................................................................... 8-8
8.3.6 RS485 Link Parity................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.7 Accept Broadcast Messages.................................................................................................. 8-9
8.4 Using Serial Links to Control and Monitor the Drive...................................................................... 8-9
8.4.1 Speed and Torque References .............................................................................................. 8-9
8.4.2 Control Words....................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.4.3 Monitoring the Drive Using the Serial Links ......................................................................... 8-10
8.4.4 History Logs.......................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.5 Drive to Drive Protocol (RS485 Only).......................................................................................... 8-11
8.5.1 Application Example - Torque Slave Helper Drives ............................................................. 8-12
8.6 GEM 80 ESP Protocol ................................................................................................................. 8-12
8.6.1 Writing Data to the ALSPA MV3000e .................................................................................. 8-15
8.6.2 Reading Data from the ALSPA MV3000e ............................................................................ 8-16
8.7 User-Defined ESP Pages ............................................................................................................ 8-16
8.7.1 ESP User-Defined Page 1.................................................................................................... 8-16
8.7.2 User Page 1 Size ................................................................................................................. 8-16
8.7.3 User Page 1, Parameters 1 to 20......................................................................................... 8-16
8.7.4 ESP User-Defined Page 2.................................................................................................... 8-16
8.7.5 User Page 2 Size ................................................................................................................. 8-16
8.7.6 User Page 2, Parameters 1 to 20......................................................................................... 8-16
8.7.7 Configuring User-Defined Pages from the Drive Data ManagerTM (Keypad)....................... 8-17
8.7.8 Configuring a User Defined Page from GEM 80 .................................................................. 8-17
8.7.9 GEM80 ESP Error Messages............................................................................................... 8-18
8.7.10 Error Handling ................................................................................................................... 8-18
8.8 RSVP Protocol............................................................................................................................. 8-18
8.9 MODBUS™ RTU ......................................................................................................................... 8-18
8.9.1 MODBUS™ RTU Error Messages ....................................................................................... 8-20
8.10 MODBUS™ ASCII ....................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.11 GEM 80-16 and GEM 80-10 N-Bus Protocol .............................................................................. 8-21

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 8-1
8. Serial Communications. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 8-2 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 8. Serial Communications.

8.1 Introduction

WARNING
Wait at least 5 minutes after isolating supplies and check that voltage between DC+
and DC- has reduced to a safe level before working on this equipment.

The ALSPA MV3000e has two serial communications ports, a RS232 port that is shared
with the Drive Data Manager™ (Keypad), and a RS485 port. Each port can receive and
transmit messages either in GEM 80 ESP, MODBUS™ RTU or MODBUS™ ASCII message
protocols.
The two ports are controlled independently of each other, with each port being configured
using its own set of drive parameters. Both serial ports may be used to read from or write to
the drive parameters. The RS232 port can be used to update/read parameters every 100ms.
The RS485 port can be used to update/read parameters every 10ms.
8.1.1 RS232 Port and the Keypad
If the RS232 port is re-configured to communicate to another device, removing the Keypad
allows it to change to that mode. The Keypad is automatically detected when re-connected.
8.1.2 Access Authority
Updating any of the user parameters is only allowed if the communications device
attempting to read or write to the parameter has access authority. Both serial links have an
engineer status with regard to updating/accessing drive parameters. All drive attributes
apply down the serial link, i.e. a “Stop to Edit” parameter can only be edited when the drive
is stopped.
8.1.3 Parameter Numbers
The Serial Links are configured and programmed using parameter Menu 32.

8.2 RS232 Serial Link

8.2.1 Introduction
See 8.4 for worked examples.
The RS232 Serial Link is connected through the 9-way D-type Keypad socket SK5 on the
front panel of the ALSPA MV3000e drive unit. This connector is not available for RS232
communications if the Keypad is fitted. The RS232 port can operate at up to 38,400 Baud.
Table 8-1 RS232 Connections

Terminal Signal Name Signal on PC com port Comments

1 NC DCD Not connected
2 RS232 TX RX
3 RS232 RX TX
4 NC DTR Not connected
5 0V GND
6 8V DSR 8 V output from drive
7 and 8 RTS/CTS Connected together
9 PWM ON Indicates drive is active
Body EARTH CHASSIS Screen connection

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 8-3
8. Serial Communications. ALSPA MV3000e

8.2.2 RS232 Outline Protocol Specification

Baud Rates : 9.6, 19.2 & 38.4 kBaud
Protocols : MODBUS™ RTU – 8 bit data format
: MODBUS™ ASCII – 7 and 8 bit data format
: GEM80 ESP – 8 bit data format
Update period : 100ms
8.2.3 RS232 Connection Details
Error! Reference source not found. shows details of connections to the Keypad socket
SK5 when it is configured as the RS232 port.
Figure 8-1 shows the method of connecting a RS232 serial link.

2 SK5, 9-
RX RS232 TX D-type
5
0V 0V
3
TX RS232 RX
Screen Body

ALSPA MV3000
Controller
(Tributary)

Figure 8-1 RS232 Connections

Note:
The RS232 serial link connections are not isolated. The cable shield must be connected to the back
shell of the D-type connector. This back shell is connected to safety ground internally. For shield
connections at the controller, see controller manual. The cable length is 3 m (10 ft) maximum.
8.2.4 RS232 Serial Port Configuration
To configure ALSPA MV3000e for GEM 80 ESP communications using the RS232 port, the
following parameters must be configured using the Keypad. When the Keypad is removed,
socket SK5 functions as the RS232 port. When RS232 communication is no longer required
and the Keypad is plugged into SK5, the port automatically re-configures as the Keypad
port.
P32.00 - Serial Links Write Enable
The value set determines whether the drive parameters can be written to via the serial links,
this affects both the RS232 and the RS485 serial links.
Allowed values are: 0 = Disable – Serial links can monitor only.
1 = Enable – Allows Read and Write access, so serial links can
both monitor and edit parameters.
P32.01 - Global Response
This parameter affects both RS232 and RS485 links.
Allowed values: 0 = Disabled (reject broadcast messages)
1 = Enabled (accept broadcast messages)
Notes:
1. Broadcast messages not specifically intended for ALSPA MV3000e will produce unpredictable
effects.
2. This parameter should be set to 0 (default state) unless it can be guaranteed that ALL broadcast
messages produced by the system are intended for ALSPA MV3000e drives.

Page 8-4 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 8. Serial Communications.

P32.10 - RS232 Baud Rate

Sets the required value (in kBaud).
Allowed values are: 4= 9.6 kBaud
5= 19.2 kBaud
6= 38.4 kBaud
P32.11 - RS232 Address
Set the required tributary number.
Allowed values are: 0 to 255
Notes:
1. For GEM 80 ESP systems the address must be in the range 0 to 14 inclusive (15 is used for
broadcast messages).
2. For MODBUS™ ASCII and MODBUS™ RTU the address must be in the range 1 to 255 inclusive
(0 is used for broadcast messages). The PLC system may have address number limitations.
P32.12 - RS232 Protocol
Allowed values:
0 = No protocol
1 = GEM80 ESP (Note that 7 bit data format is not supported by
2 = MODBUS™ RTU MODBUS RTU or GEM80 ESP)
3 = MODBUS™ ASCII
4 = Keypad ESP
5 = Printer (see 6.35.5 for further information on printing).
P32.13 - RS232 Link Parity
Set the value to match the controlling device.
Allowed values are:
1 = 8 bit data, no parity
2 = 8 bit data, even parity
3 = 8 bit data, odd parity
4 = 7 bit data, even parity
(Note that 7 bit data format is not supported by
5 = 7 bit data, odd parity
MODBUS RTU or GEM80 ESP)
6 = 7 bit data, parity reset
7 = 7 bit data, parity set
8.2.5 Loss of RS232 Serial Link
P32.14 - RS232 Timeout
When used with a programmable controller operating in free running mode the timeout period
should be set to a value greater than the scan time of the programmable controller. If a timeout
occurs, the RS232 link becomes unhealthy as a control or reference source. The link is
restored to healthy when the next valid message is received.
If communications are non-repetitive set the value to 0. This sets the timeout detection
period to infinity and disables the serial link as a control or reference source.
Allowed values, in seconds, are: 0.0s = No timeout detection
0.1s to 99.9s
P32.15 - Action on RS232 Timeout
This parameter determines the action taken by the drive in the event of a RS232 serial link
timeout.
Allowed values: 0 = No action
1 = Issue Warning
2 = Trip
P32.22 - RS232 Control Words at Loss
This parameter determines the state of the RS232 control word on detection of a timeout.
The control word could be controlling start/stop, for example.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 8-5
8. Serial Communications. ALSPA MV3000e

Allowed values are: 0 = Remain at previous state

1 = Go to default states. The default states for the RS232 control words
are set in P32.23 and P32.24.
P32.23 - RS232 Default for Control Word 0
P32.24 - RS232 Default for Control Word 1
Allowed values (hex): 0000h to FFFFh
The Keypad also displays these values in binary, i.e.
0000 0000 0000 0000b
to
1111 1111 1111 1111b
See 8.4.2 for more information on control words.
P32.16 - RS232 CRC Failures Count
This read only parameter indicates the number errors detected by the cyclic redundancy
check on messages received.
Permitted range: 0 to 9999
P32.17 - RS232 Timeouts Count
This read-only parameter indicates the number of serial link timeouts that have occurred.
P32.14 must be set to a value greater than 0 for timeouts to occur.
Permitted range: 0 to 9999

8.3 RS485 Serial Link

8.3.1 Introduction
See 8.4 for worked examples.
The RS485 serial link is connected to terminal block TB4 on the I/O panel, behind the front
door of the drive unit. Cable entry is via the control cable entry point at the bottom of the
unit.
The RS485 port can operate up to 38.4kB using half-duplex communications, i.e. reception
is ignored while transmitting. This allows 2-wire RS485 links to be used if required.
Table 8-2 shows the function and connection details of RS485 signals.

Table 8-2 RS485 Connections at TB4

Terminal Name Function Remarks

1 TX+ RS485 +ve Transmit Line
2 TX– RS485 –ve Transmit Line Must be shielded
3 RX+ RS485 +ve Receive Line
4 RX– RS485 –ve Receive Line
5 GND Screen Ground Connected to safety ground internally

8.3.2 RS485 Outline Protocol Specification

Baud Rates : 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2 & 38.4 kBaud
Protocols : MODBUS™ RTU – 8 bit data format
: MODBUS™ ASCII – 7 and 8 bit data format
: GEM80 ESP – 8 bit data format
Update period : 10ms

Page 8-6 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 8. Serial Communications.

8.3.3 RS485 Connection Details

TB4 TB4
RX+ 3 RX+
TX+ 3
RX- 4 RX-
TX- 4
TX+ 1 TX+
RX+ 1
TX- 2 TX-
RX- 2
GND 5 GND
GND 5

ALSPA M V3000 ALSPA M V3000

C o n tro lle r
(T rib u ta ry) (T rib u ta ry)

Figure 8-2 RS485 2-wire Multi-drop Connections

TB4 TB4
RX+ 3 RX+
TX+ 3
RX- 4 RX-
TX- 4
TX+ 1 TX+
RX+ 1
TX- 2 TX-
RX- 2
GND 5 GND
GND 5

Controller ALSPA MV3000 ALSPA MV3000

(Tributary) (Tributary)

Figure 8-3 RS485 4-wire Multi-drop Connections

Figure 8-2 shows the method of connecting a RS485 2-wire multi-drop serial link and Figure
8-3 shows the method of connecting a RS485 4-wire multi-drop serial link.
Note:
The serial link connections are not isolated. The cable screens must be connected to TB4 pin 5, which
is connected to safety ground internally. For screen connections at the controller, see the controller
manual.
8.3.4 RS485 Serial Port Configuration
To configure the drive for ESP communications using the RS485 port, P32.00 must be
edited to enable read and write access, then the following parameters must be set:
P32.00 - Serial Links Write Enable
The value set determines whether the drive parameters can be written to via the serial links,
this affects both the RS232 and the RS485 serial links.
Allowed values are: 0 = Disable – Serial links can monitor only.
1 = Enable – Allows Read and Write access, so serial links can both monitor and edit
parameters.
P32.01 - Global Response
This parameter affects both RS232 and RS485 links.
Allowed values: 0 = Disabled (reject broadcast messages)
1 = Enabled (accept broadcast messages)

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 8-7
8. Serial Communications. ALSPA MV3000e

Notes:
1. Broadcast messages not specifically intended for ALSPA MV3000e will produce unpredictable
effects.
2. This parameter should be set to 0 (default state) unless it can be guaranteed that ALL broadcast
messages produced by the system are intended for ALSPA MV3000e drives.
P32.50 - RS485 Baud Rate
Set the required value (in kBaud).
Allowed values are: 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2 and 38.4
P32.51 - RS485 Address
Set the required tributary number.
Allowed values are: 0 to 255
Notes:
1. For GEM 80 ESP systems the address must be in the range 0 to 14 inclusive (15 is used for
broadcast messages).
2. For MODBUS™ ASCII and MODBUS™ RTU the address must be in the range 1 to 255 inclusive.
(0 is used for broadcast messages). There may be other limitations due to characteristics of the
external master PLC.
P32.52 - RS485 Protocol
Sets the protocol for RS485 serial link messages.
Allowed values:
0 = No Protocol
1 = GEM 80 ESP (Note that 7 bit data format is not supported by
2 = MODBUS™ RTU MODBUS RTU or GEM80 ESP)
3 = MODBUS™ ASCII
4 = Drive to Drive1
5 = RSVP2
Notes:
1. When Drive-to-Drive Link (Option 4) is selected, the drive automatically sets the RS485 Baud
Rate (P32.50) to 19.2 kBaud. The Timeout Period (P32.54), Timeout Action (P32.55) and Control
Words Upon Timeout (P32.62) parameters all operate as for any other protocol.
2. Option 5 allows communication with FIP via an ALSPA DI100 unit.
8.3.5 Loss of RS485 Serial Link
P32.54 - RS485 Timeout
When used with a programmable controller operating in free running mode the timeout period
should be set to a value greater than the scan time of the Programmable Controller. If a timeout
occurs, the RS485 link becomes unhealthy as a control or reference source. The link is restored
to healthy when the next valid message is received.
Set the value to 0 if communications are non-repetitive. This sets the timeout detection
period to infinity and disables the serial link as a control or reference source.
Allowed values are: 0 = No timeout detection.
0.1 to 99.9 seconds
P32.55 - RS485 Loss Action
This parameter determines the action taken by the drive in the event of a RS485 serial link
timeout.
Allowed values: 0 = No action
1 = Warning
2 = Trip
P32.62 - RS485 Control Words at Loss
This parameter determines the state of the RS485 control words on detection of a timeout.
The control words could be controlling start/stop, for example.

Page 8-8 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 8. Serial Communications.

Allowed values are: 0 = Remain at previous states

1 = Go to RS485 Default states. The Default states for the RS485
control words are set in P32.63 and P32.64.
P32.63 - RS485 Default for Control Word 0
P32.64 - RS485 Default for Control Word 1
Allowed values (hex): 0000h to FFFFh
The values are also displayed by the Keypad in binary.
See 8.4.2 for more information on Control Words.
P32.56 - RS485 CRC Failures Count
This read only parameter indicates the number of errors detected by the cyclic redundancy
check on messages received by the RS485 serial link.
Allowed values: 0 to 9999 Failures
P32.57 - RS485 Timeouts Count
This read only parameter indicates the number of RS485 serial link timeouts that have
occurred. P32.54 must be set to a value greater than 0 for timeouts to occur.
Allowed values: 0 to 9999 Timeouts
8.3.6 RS485 Link Parity
P32.53 - RS485 Link Parity
Set the value to match the controlling device.
Allowed values are:
1 = 8 bit data, no parity
2 = 8 bit data, even parity
3 = 8 bit data, odd parity
4 = 7 bit data, even parity (Note that 7 bit data format is not supported by
5 = 7 bit data, odd parity MODBUS RTU or GEM80 ESP)
6 = 7 bit data, reset parity
7 = 7 bit data, set parity
8.3.7 Accept Broadcast Messages
P32.01 - Accept Broadcast Messages
Allowed values: 0 = Disabled (reject broadcast messages)
1 = Enabled (accept broadcast messages).
Note:
Broadcast messages not specifically intended for ALSPA MV3000e drives will produce unpredictable
effects. This parameter should therefore be set to 0 unless it can be guaranteed that ALL broadcast
messages produced by the system are intended for ALSPA MV3000e drives.

8.4 Using Serial Links to Control and Monitor the Drive

The RS232 and RS485 serial ports may be used to provide the principal or the Backup
speed/torque reference and control reference for the drive.
8.4.1 Speed and Torque References
To select a serial link as the principal speed or torque reference source, edit one or more of
the P5.01 to P5.04 described at 6.5.1 (speed), and P15.04 described at 6.15 (torque). Note
that torque reference is for vector control only.
For example:
1. To select RS485 Link Ref 2 as the source for Principal Speed Reference 3, edit P5.03
= Option 5.

2. To select Principal Speed Reference 3 as the drive speed reference set Control Flag
6 = 1.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 8-9
8. Serial Communications. ALSPA MV3000e

In the event of a serial link failure, P5.05 - Backup Reference Source - will determine the
source for backup speed reference and P15.05 for the backup torque reference.
P32.18 - RS232 Speed Reference 1
P32.19 - RS232 Speed Reference 2
P32.58 - RS485 Speed Reference 1
P32.59 - RS485 Speed Reference 2
These parameters may only be written to by the appropriate serial link. When selected, the
current value becomes the speed reference for the drive.
Allowed values: –100% to +100% of Top Speed
8.4.2 Control Words
Each serial link has two parameters for Control Flag entry. The 16 bits of each parameter
can be written to control flags. These parameters are:
P32.20 - RS232 Control Word 0
P32.21 - RS232 Control Word 1
P32.60 - RS485 Control Word 0
P32.61 - RS485 Control Word 1
The control word is treated as 16-bit binary data and each bit of the control word can be
allocated to a control flag by setting the control flag sources, P33.00 to P33.99 or P34.00 to
P34.99. See 6.34.
Allowed values (hex): 0000h to FFFFh
The allowed values are also displayed in binary by the Keypad:
0000 0000 0000 0000b
to
1111 1111 1111 1111b
8.4.3 Monitoring the Drive Using the Serial Links
The drive can be monitored using the serial links to access the various read only monitoring
parameters described at 4.14 and by reading the drive status flags.
The drive status flags can be viewed, via the serial links, by reading the parameters P11.30
to P11.33.
The resulting bit fields are allocated to status flags as shown next.
P11.30 - Drive Status Word 0 - Status Flags 0 to 15
P11.31 - Drive Status Word 1 - Status Flags 16 to 31
P11.32 - Drive Status Word 2 - Status Flags 32 to 47
P11.33 - Drive Status Word 3 - Status Flags 48 to 63
Each parameter contains a 16-bit Drive Status Word, displayed in hexadecimal format.
Allowed range: 0000h to FFFFh
The words are also displayed in binary, in the range:
0000 0000 0000 0000b
to
1111 1111 1111 1111b
Status Flags SF0, SF16, SF32 and SF48 are assigned to the least significant bit of their
respective words.
Further information on status flags is given at 6.33.
8.4.4 History Logs
The History Log can be configured using either the serial links or the Keypad. The method of
configuring the history log is described at 4.30.
To play back the history log:
1. Request which sample is to be read, by setting 0 to 99 at P27.00.

Page 8-10 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 8. Serial Communications.

2. Read P26.00 to identify the sample period.

3. Read P27.01 to P27.10, the history data, as required.
To read the entire history log, repeat the above procedure, changing the value in P27.00 at
each repetition.
Note:
If P27.00 is changed by the RS485 serial link it will not change the sample set that is read by the
RS232 serial link, or displayed by the Keypad, i.e. the values written to P27.00 by one device do not
affect the values written to P27.00 by other devices.

8.5 Drive to Drive Protocol (RS485 Only)

This additional protocol allows the automatic transfer of parameters from one drive to
another (or several others) for the purpose of slave operation without the need for a PLC
master. This is shown graphically at Figure 8-4.

MASTER
P32.87 (TX REF1) x P32.91
P32.88 (TX REF2) x P32.92
P32.89 (TX CONT LO)

P32.90 (TX CONT HI )

xP32.93

xP32.93
xP32.94

xP32.94
4 TABLES TRANSMITTED
TO MULTIPLE SLAVES
P32.58

P32.59

P32.60

P32.61

P32.58

P32.59

P32.60

P32.61
SLAVE SLAVE

SLAVE SLAVE
P32.87

P32.88

P32.89

P32.90

P32.87

P32.88

P32.89

P32.90
MASTER
xP32.91

xP32.92

4 TABLES RECEIVED
FROM JUST 1 SLAVE

P32.58 (RS485 REF1) x P32.93

P32.59 (RS485 REF2)

x P32.94
P32.60 (RS485 LO)

P32.61 (RS485 HI)

Figure 8-4 Drive to Drive Link

P32.87 - Drive to Drive TX Reference 1

P32.88 - Drive to Drive TX Reference 2
P32.89 - Drive to Drive TX Control Word 0
P32.90 - Drive to Drive TX Control Word 1
These parameters control which of the drive parameters are transmitted to the slave
drive(s). Each of these points to any of the drive parameters.
Allowed values: 0 to 99.99 (parameter number)
P32.91 - Drive to Drive TX Reference 1 Scale
P32.92 - Drive to Drive TX Reference 2 Scale
These parameters define the scale factors that are applied to the Reference 1 and
Reference 2 values before they are transmitted to the slave(s).
Allowed values: –100.00 to +100.00

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 8-11
8. Serial Communications. ALSPA MV3000e

P32.93 - Drive to Drive RX Reference 1 Scale

P32.94 - Drive to Drive RX Reference 2 Scale
These parameters define the scale factors that are applied to the REF1 and REF2 values
after reception, before they are written to the drive parameter table (P32.87 and P32.88).
The selection of the TX & RX scale factors should be made with care, bearing in mind that
the maximum range of the REF1 & REF2 values (P32.87, 32.88) is ±10,000 (100.00 %).
Allowed values: –100.00 to +100.00
8.5.1 Application Example - Torque Slave Helper Drives
The master drive, DRIVE 1, is the main speed control drive on a conveyor system. In addition
to this drive, there are two helper drives, DRIVE 2 & DRIVE 3, whose torque is required to
track that of DRIVE 1 with scaling factors of 75% & 90% respectively. Also, to confirm that
there is no slipping, the speed of DRIVE 3 is to be fed back to DRIVE 1 for monitoring by a PC
Based SCADA package connected to the RS232 Link of DRIVE 1.
Connections:
The TX+/- terminals of DRIVE 1 should be connected to RX+/- terminals of DRIVE 2 &
DRIVE 3.
The TX+/- terminals of DRIVE 3 should be connected to RX +/- terminals of DRIVE 1.
The TX +/- terminals of DRIVE 2 are not connected.

DRIVE 1 Parameters:

P32.52 : RS485 Protocol = 4, Drive to Drive Link

P32.87 : Drive to Drive TX Reference 1 = P9.04, Torque Demand
P32.88 : Drive to Drive TX Reference 2, Control Word 0, Control
to Word 1 = 0, No Parameter (Zero will be transmitted)
P32.90
P32.91 : Drive to Drive TX Reference 1 Scale = 1.00

DRIVE 2 Parameters:

P32.52 : RS485 Protocol = 4, Drive to Drive Link

P32.93 : Drive to Drive RX Reference 1 Scale = 0.75, i.e. 75%
P33.20 : Control Flag 20 (Disable Speed Loop) = 1, i.e. disabled
P15.04 : Torque Reference Source = 4 (RS485 Link Ref 1)
P15.01 : Torque Reference Scale Factor = 100.0%
P32.87 : Drive to Drive TX Reference 1 = P9.01, Speed
Feedback
With this Set-up, DRIVEs 2 & 3 will track the torque of DRIVE 1. Also, the speed of DRIVE 3
may be monitored in P32.58 of DRIVE 1. Note that RUN/STOP commands may also have
been passed via the Control Word 0 and Control Word 1 parameters.

8.6 GEM 80 ESP Protocol

The ALSPA MV3000e is addressed as a tributary port when processing ESP messages.
The drive may have a system address number between 0 and 14 inclusive. Global
messages (messages with address = 15) will only be processed if P32.01 is set to 1.
A full description of the ESP protocol message structure, CRC generation and inclusion can
be found in the GEM 80 Serial Communications Manual available from Converteam.
The drive parameters are accessed in pre-defined groups (referred to as pages), each page
containing a group of related parameters. A complete list of the pre-defined parameter
pages is shown at Table 8-3. Page 1 is the user-defined parameter page; the method of
accessing this page is described at 8.7.

Page 8-12 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 8. Serial Communications.

Table 8-3 ESP Parameter Pages

Page Parameter Numbers

Number
1 ESP User-defined Page 1
2 2.00 2.01 2.02 2.03 2.04 2.05 2.06 2.07 2.08 2.09 2.10 2.11
2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15
3 3.00 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 3.06 3.07 3.08 3.09 3.10 3.11
3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 3.23
3.24 3.25 3.26 3.27 3.28 3.29
4 4.00 4.01 4.02 4.03 4.04 4.05 4.06 4.07 4.08 4.09 4.10 4.11
4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18 4.19 4.20 3.30 3.31
5 5.00 5.01 5.02 5.03 5.04 5.05 5.06 5.07 5.08 5.09 5.10 5.11
5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 5.17 5.18 5.19 5.20 5.21 5.22 5.23
5.24 5.25 5.26 5.27 5.28
6 6.00 6.01 6.02 6.03 6.04 6.05 6.06 6.07 6.08 6.09 6.10 6.11
6.12 6.13 6.14 6.15 6.16
7 7.00 7.01 7.02 7.03 7.04 7.05 7.06 7.07 7.16
8 7.17 7.18 7.19 7.20 7.21 7.22 7.23 7.24 7.25 7.26 7.27 7.28
7.29
9 8.00 8.01 8.02 8.03 8.04 8.05 8.06 8.07 8.08 8.09 8.10 8.11
10 9.00 9.01 9.02 9.03 9.04 9.05 9.06 9.07 9.08 9.09 9.10 9.11
11 10.00 10.01 10.02 10.03 10.04 10.05 10.06 10.07 10.08 10.09 10.10 10.11
10.12 10.13 10.14 10.15 10.16 10.17 10.18 10.19 10.20 10.21 10.22 10.23
10.24 10.25 10.26 10.27 10.28 10.29
12 10.30 10.31 10.32 10.33 10.34 41.32 41.33
13 11.00 11.01 11.02 11.03 11.04 11.05 11.06 11.07 11.08 11.09 11.10 11.11
11.12 11.13 11.14 11.15 11.16 11.17 11.18 11.19 11.20
14 11.21 11.22 11.23 11.24 11.25 11.26 11.27 11.28 11.29 11.30 11.31 11.32
11.33 11.34 11.35 11.36 11.37 11.40 11.41 11.45 11.46 11.47 11.48 11.49
11.50 11.51
15 12.00 12.01 12.02 12.03 12.04 12.05 12.06 12.07 12.08 12.09 12.10 12.11
12.12 12.13 12.14 12.15 12.16 12.17 12.18 12.19 12.20 12.21 12.22 12.23
12.24 12.25 12.26 12.27 12.28
16 13.00 13.01 13.02 13.03 13.04 13.05 13.06 13.07 13.08 13.09 13.10 13.11
13.12 13.13 13.14 13.15 13.16 13.17 13.18 13.19 13.20
17 14.00 14.01 14.02 14.03 14.04 14.05 14.06 14.07 14.08 14.09 14.10 14.11
14.12 14.13 14.14 14.15 14.16 14.17 14.18 14.19
18 15.00 15.01 15.02 15.03 15.04 15.05
19 16.00 16.01 16.02 16.03 16.04 16.05 16.06 16.07 16.08 16.09 16.10 16.11
20 17.00 17.01 17.02 17.03 17.04 17.05 17.06 17.07 17.08 17.09 17.10 17.11
17.12 17.13 17.14 17.15 17.16 17.17 17.18 17.19 17.20 17.21
21 18.00 18.01 18.02 18.03 18.04 18.05 18.06 1807 19.00 19.01 19.02 19.03
19.04 20.00 20.01 20.02 20.03
22 21.00 21.01 21.02 21.03 21.04 21.05 21.06 21.07 21.08 21.09 21.10 21.11
21.12 21.13 21.14 21.15 21.16 21.17 21.18 21.19 21.20
23 22.00 22.01 22.02 22.03 22.04 22.05 22.06 22.07
24 23.00 23.01 23.02 23.03 23.04 23.05 23.06 23.07 23.08 23.09
25 24.00 24.01 24.02 24.03 24.04 24.05 25.00 25.01 25.02 25.03 25.04
26 26.00 26.01 26.02 26.03 26.04 26.05 26.06 26.07 26.08 26.09 26.10 26.11
26.12 26.13 26.14 26.15 26.16 26.17 26.18 26.19 26.20 26.21 26.22 26.23
26.24 26.25 26.26 26.27 26.28 26.29

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 8-13
8. Serial Communications. ALSPA MV3000e

Page Parameter Numbers

Number
27 27.00 27.01 27.02 27.03 27.04 27.05 27.06 27.07 27.08 27.09 27.10 27.11
27.12
28 28.00 28.01 28.02 28.03 28.04 28.05 28.06 28.07 28.08 28.09 28.10 28.11
28.12 28.13 28.14 28.15 28.16 28.17 28.18 28.19
29 29.00 29.01 29.02 29.03 29.04 29.05 29.06 29.07 29.08 29.09
30 30.00 30.01 30.02 30.03 30.04 30.05 30.06 30.07 30.08 30.09 30.10 30.11
30.12 30.13 30.14 30.15 30.16 30.17 30.18 30.19 30.20 30.21 30.22 30.23
30.24 30.25
31 30.26 30.27 30.28 30.29 30.30 30.31 30.32 30.33 30.34 30.35 30.36 30.37
30.38 30.39 30.40 30.41 30.42 30.43 30.44 30.45 30.46 30.47 30.48 30.49
30.50 30.51
32 30.52 30.53 30.54 30.55 30.56 30.57 30.58 30.59 30.60 30.61 30.62 30.63
30.64 30.65 30.66 30.67
33 31.00 31.01 31.02 31.03 31.04 31.05 31.06 31.07 31.08 31.09 31.10 31.11
31.12 31.13 31.14 31.15 31.16 31.17 31.18 31.19 31.20 31.21 31.22
34 32.00 32.01 32.10 32.11 32.12 32.13 32.14 32.15 32.16 32.17 32.18 32.19
32.20 32.21 32.22 32.23 32.24
35 32.25 32.26 32.27 32.28 32.29 32.30 32.31 32.32 32.33 32.34 32.35 32.36
32.37 32.38 32.39 32.40 32.41 32.42 32.43 32.44 32.45
36 32.50 32.51 32.52 32.53 32.54 32.55 32.56 32.57 32.58 32.59 32.60 32.61
32.62 32.63 32.64
37 32.65 32.66 32.67 32.68 32.69 32.70 32.71 32.72 32.73 32.74 32.75 32.76
32.77 32.78 32.79 32.80 32.81 32.82 32.83 32.84 32.85
38 32.87 32.88 32.89 32.90 32.91 32.92 32.93 32.94
39 33.00 33.01 33.02 33.03 33.04 33.05 33.06 33.07 33.08 33.09 33.10 33.11
33.12 33.13 33.14 33.15 33.16 33.17 33.18 33.19 33.20 33.21 33.22 33.23
33.24 33.25 33.26 33.27
40 33.28 33.29 33.30 33.31 33.32 33.33 33.34 33.35 33.36 33.37 33.38 33.39
33.40 33.41 33.42 33.43 33.44 33.45 33.46 33.47 33.48 33.49 33.50 33.51
33.52 33.53 33.54
41 33.55 33.56 33.57 33.58 33.59 33.60 33.61 33.62 33.63 33.64 33.65 33.66
33.67 33.68 33.69 33.70 33.71 33.72 33.73 33.74 33.75 33.76 33.77 33.78
33.79

42 33.80 33.81 33.82 33.83 33.84 33.85 33.86 33.87 33.88 33.89 33.90 33.91
33.92 33.93 33.94 33.95 33.96 33.97 33.98 33.99
43 34.00 34.01 34.02 34.03 34.04 34.05 34.06 34.07 34.08 34.09 34.10 34.11
34.12 34.13 34.14 34.15 34.16 34.17 34.18 34.19 34.20 34.21 34.22 34.23
34.24 34.25 34.26 34.27
44 35.00 35.01 35.02 35.03 35.04 35.05 35.06 35.07 35.08 35.09 35.10 35.11
35.12 35.13 26.30 26.31
45 36.00 36.01 36.02 36.03 36.04 36.05 36.06 36.07 36.08 36.09
46 36.10 36.11 36.12 36.13 36.14 36.15 36.16 36.17 36.18 36.19 36.20 36.21
36.22 36.23 36.24 36.25 36.26 36.27 36.28 36.29 36.30 36.31
47 36.32 36.33 36.34 36.35 36.36 36.37 36.38 36.39 36.40 36.41 36.42 36.43
36.44 36.45 36.46 36.47 36.48 36.49 36.50 36.51 36.52 36.53 36.54 36.55
48 37.00 37.01 37.02 37.03 37.04 37.05 37.38 37.39 37.40 37.41
49 37.06 37.07 37.08 37.09 37.10 37.11 37.12 37.13 37.14 37.15 37.26 37.17
37.18 37.19 37.20 37.21
50 37.22 37.23 37.24 37.25 37.26 37.27 37.28 37.29 37.30 37.31 37.32 37.33
37.34 37.35 37.36 37.37

Page 8-14 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 8. Serial Communications.

Page Parameter Numbers

Number
51 38.00 38.01 38.02 38.03 38.04 38.05 38.06 38.07 38.08 38.09 38.10 38.11
38.12
52 39.00 39.01 39.02 39.03 39.04 39.05 39.06 39.07 39.08 39.09 39.10 39.11
39.12 39.13 39.14 39.15 39.16 39.17 39.18 39.19
53 39.20 39.21 39.22 39.23 39.24 39.25 39.26 39.27 39.28 39.29 39.30
54 98.01 98.02 98.03 98.04 98.05 98.06 98.07 98.08 98.09 98.10 98.11 98.12
98.13 98.14 98.15 98.16 98.17 98.18 98.19 98.20 98.21 98.22 98.23 98.24
98.25 98.26 98.27 98.28 98.29
55 98.30 98.31 98.32 98.33 98.34 98.35 98.36 98.37 98.38 98.39 98.40 98.41
98.42 98.43 98.44 98.50 98.51 98.52 98.53 98.80 98.83 98.84 98.85 98.89
56 99.00 99.01 99.02 99.03 99.04 99.05 99.06 99.07 99.08 99.09 99.10 99.12
99.13 99.14 99.16 99.17
57 40.00 40.01 40.02 40.03 40.04 40.05 40.06 40.07 40.08 40.09 40.10 40.11
40.12 40.13 40.14 40.15 40.16 40.17 40.18 40.19 40.20 40.21 40.22 40.23
58 41.00 41.01 41.02 41.03 41.04 41.05 41.06 41.07 41.08 41.09 41.10 41.11
41.12 41.13 41.14 41.15
59 41.16 41.17 41.18 41.19 41.20 41.21 41.22 41.23 41.24 41.25 41.26 41.27
41.28 41.29 41.30 41.31
60 42.00 42.01 42.02 42.03 42.04 42.05 42.06 42.07 42.08 42.09 42.10 42.11
42.12 42.13 42.14 42.15 42.16 42.17
61 42.18 42.19 42.20 42.21 42.22 42.23 42.24 42.25 42.26 42.27 42.28 42.29
42.30 42.31 42.32 42.33 42.34 42.35 42.36 42.37 42.38 42.39
62 ESP User-defined Page 2
63 43.00 43.01 43.02 43.03 43.04 43.05 43.06 43.07 43.08 43.09 43.10 43.11
43.12 43.13 43.14 43.15 43.16 43.17 43.18 43.19 43.20
64 44.00 44.01 44.02 44.03 44.04 44.05 44.06 44.07 44.08 44.09 44.10 44.11
44.12 44.13 44.14 44.15 44.16 44.17 44.18 44.19 44.20
65 42.40 42.41 42.42 42.43 42.44 42.45 42.46 42.47 42.48 42.49 42.50 42.51
42.52 42.53
66 50.00 50.01 50.02 50.03 50.04 50.05 50.06 50.07 50.08 51.00 51.01 51.02
51.03 51.04 51.05 51.06 51.07 51.08 51.09 51.10 51.11 51.12 51.13 51.14
51.15 51.16 51.17 51.18
67 52.00 52.01 52.02 52.03 52.04 52.05 52.06 52.07 52.08 52.09 52.10 52.11
52.12 52.13 52.14 52.15 52.16 52.17 52.18
68 53.00 53.01 53.02 53.03 53.04 53.05 53.06 53.07 53.08 53.09 53.10 53.11
53.12 53.13 53.14 53.15 53.16

8.6.1 Writing Data to the ALSPA MV3000e

GEM 80 programmable controllers use the K tables to store data to be transmitted over the
serial links. The addresses of the K tables used depend on the serial port used and the type
of controller. The GEM 80 controller technical manual should therefore be consulted for
detailed information on how to configure a GEM 80 controller.
When used with ALSPA MV3000e the data passed to the K tables for transmission must be
set as follows:
1st K table Drive parameter page number to write to.
2nd K table Drive parameter page to read from. See 8.6.2.
3rd K table Value to be written to first item of ALSPA MV3000e parameter
page.
4th K table Value to be written to second item of parameter page.
5th K table etc.....
Notes:

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 8-15
8. Serial Communications. ALSPA MV3000e

1. Do not transfer data to the ALSPA MV3000e until all the data relating to the page is correct, since
all the parameters in the specified page will be overwritten by the data in the K-tables.
2. If there is a valid page number in the 2nd K table, the parameter values in that page will be
transferred to the GEM 80 J tables. To prevent a transfer to J tables a zero should be placed in the
2nd K table.
8.6.2 Reading Data from the ALSPA MV3000e
To read data from the ALSPA MV3000e, place the required page number in the 2nd K table
and transfer the K tables to the ALSPA MV3000e. The ALSPA MV3000e then copies the
values of the parameters listed in the specified page to the GEM 80 J tables. On receipt, the
contents of the J tables will be as follows:
1st J table Error word associated with the last message
transaction,
see 8.7.9.
2nd J table Page number being read, confirmed here.
3rd J table Value contained in first item on parameter page.
4th J table Value contained in second item on parameter page.
5th J table etc.....
Note:
If a read operation is required without changing any ALSPA MV3000e parameters, a zero must be
placed in the 1st K table.

8.7 User-Defined ESP Pages

Generally the ESP parameter pages have fixed contents. To increase flexibility, the user can
define the contents of two pages and these two pages can be accessed from either the
RS232 or the RS485 serial links. The user-defined pages are referred to as User Pages 1
and 2.
8.7.1 ESP User-Defined Page 1
The number of parameters that are accessed on user-defined page 1 is specified by the
contents of parameter P32.25, and the contents of the page are defined by parameters
P32.26 to P32.45.
8.7.2 User Page 1 Size
P32.25 - User Page 1 Size
Defines the number of parameters contained in user-defined page 1.
Allowed values: 1 to 20
8.7.3 User Page 1, Parameters 1 to 20
P32.26 to P32.45 - User Page 1, Parameters 1 to 20
These parameters specify the contents of the user-defined page 1.
Allowed values: Any valid parameter number in the range 1.00 to 99.99, simply
drop the “P” suffix.
8.7.4 ESP User-Defined Page 2
The number of parameters that are accessed on user-defined page 2 is specified by the
contents of parameter P32.65, and the contents of the page are defined by P32.66 to
P32.85.
8.7.5 User Page 2 Size
P32.65 - User Page 2 Size
Defines the number of Parameters contained in the user-defined page 2.
Allowed values: 1 to 20
8.7.6 User Page 2, Parameters 1 to 20
P32.66 to P32.85 - User Page 2, Parameters 1 to 20
These parameters specify the contents of the user-defined page 2.

Page 8-16 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 8. Serial Communications.

Allowed values: Any valid parameter number in the range 1.00 to 99.99, simply
drop the “P” suffix.
8.7.7 Configuring User-Defined Pages from the Drive Data ManagerTM (Keypad)
To configure user-defined pages:
Navigate to Menu 32. Set the user-defined page 1 and page 2 parameters as shown at
Table 8-4.

Table 8-4 Configuring the User-defined Pages

Parameter Contents
User Page 1 User Page 2
P32.25 P32.65 Number of items to be included in user page (20 maximum)
P32.26 P32.66 First Page 1 or Page 2 parameter number
P32.27 P32.67 Second Page 1 or Page 2 parameter number
etc.... etc.... etc....

Note:
If read and write parameters are mixed within the same page and the page is written to the ALSPA
MV3000e, the read-only parameters are not overwritten and bit 10 of the error word ("Access Error") is
set (see 8.7.9). The drive continues to function correctly.
8.7.8 Configuring a User Defined Page from GEM 80
For example, Table 8-5 shows configuring the User Page 1:
Table 8-5 Configuring User Page 1

K table To value Why

st
1 35 Write to ESP page 35
nd
2 – Don’t care what is read
3rd 1 to 20 To set P32.25
To set P32.26 with which drive
4th 1.00 to 99.99
parameters to place in the user page
etc. etc.

Note:
The message length set in the P-tables of the GEM 80 specifies the amount of data sent to the drive.
The expected length of a reply message is also specified in the P-tables. When communicating with
the ALSPA MV3000e using a fixed message length, the ALSPA MV3000e will accept the amount of
data required by the intended page. Any further message data is ignored.
If the message length contains less data than is required by the page, the number of data
words received gives the number of parameters updated.
The reply sent back by the ALSPA MV3000e is `n' data words where `n' is the number of
parameters listed in the specified reply page. The GEM 80 ignores the whole message If this
is greater than the expected reply length. If the reply message is shorter than the expected
length of reply the GEM 80 updates only those J-table locations that have received an
associated data word.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 8-17
8. Serial Communications. ALSPA MV3000e

8.7.9 GEM80 ESP Error Messages

The 1st data word of the reply is an error word generated during the parameter read/write
cycle of the message and is placed in the 1st J table. Particular errors are indicated by
individual bits within the word, as shown at Table 8-6.
Table 8-6 Error Messages

Bit Error
0 "Write" page number too large
1 "Read" page number too large
2 Data sent, page length too short
3 Attempting to alter "Stop to Edit" parameter with drive
running
4 CRC failure occurred
5 Message structure incorrect
6 Data sent, page length too long
7 Attempt to write out-of-range data to parameter
8 Serial link "Read" access not enabled (P32.00 = 0)
9 Trying to access non-existent parameter
10 Access error
11 to 15 Not defined

8.7.10 Error Handling

If the GEM 80 receives a message that is corrupted or no message arrives before the GEM
80 timeout period occurs it asks for re-transmission of the last reply by sending an ENQ
ADDR message to the source of the message failure.
The first time the ALSPA MV3000e receives a valid ENQ ADDR message it re-transmits the
last reply message. If the next message received is ENQ ADDR the ALSPA MV3000e
responds with an NAK, a negative acknowledgement message. From then on each
successive ENQ ADDR is responded to by a NAK reply until a valid data transfer message
is received by the ALSPA MV3000e.
If the ALSPA MV3000e receives a correctly addressed message that has an incorrect CRC
word attached, processing of that message is reset and the CRC count associated with the
serial port is incremented.

8.8 RSVP Protocol

The RSVP protocol is used for communication with D100 (WorldFIP to Serial Link Gateway)
and is available only on the RS485 serial link. This protocol is similar to GEM80 ESP but
allows faster communications to the drive from the D100. The RSVP protocol is selected by
setting P32.52 to Option 5.

8.9 MODBUS™ RTU

The ALSPA MV3000e can communicate using MODBUS™ RTU message protocol via the
system link and/or the slow serial link. The ALSPA MV3000e is configured to operate as a
slave address, with an address range of 1-255. Broadcast messages i.e. functions intended
for address 0 are ignored, this allows the ALSPA MV3000e to be included in existing
communications systems where broadcast messages may already be in use.
The MODBUS™ functions supported by the ALSPA MV3000e allow reading of
n-parameters, writing of n-parameters, writing a single parameter and a loop-back
communications test. These correspond to the function numbers as shown at Table 8-7 to
Table 8-16.

Page 8-18 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 8. Serial Communications.

Table 8-7 MODBUS Functions

MODBUS™ Function MODBUS™ Function Name ALSPA MV3000 Application

Number (decimal)
03 Read Multiple Holding Registers Read from Multiple Drive Parameters
04 Read Multiple Input Registers Read from Multiple Drive Parameters
06 Preset Single Holding Register Write to Single Drive Parameter
16 Preset Multiple Holding Registers Write to Multiple Drive Parameters
08 Sub-function 00 Loop-back Diagnostic Test Loop-back Diagnostic Test

Note:
For Modicon PLCs the Input Registers are from 30 000. The drive treats all parameters, subject to
their attributes, as Holding Registers, for example P0.00 ≡ 40 000, P1.00 ≡ 40 100.
Table 8-8 Read Multiple Drive Parameters

Drive Function Number of 1st drive Total number of CRC word

MODBUS Code parameter to read parameters to read
Address
03 or 04 High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

Table 8-9 Drive Response

Drive Function Data Register : Register Word CRC word

MODBUS Code Length Word 1 N
Address (2 bytes) Data Data
03 or 04 High Low : High Low High Low
byte byte byte byte byte byte

Table 8-10 Write to a Single Drive Parameter

Drive Function Drive parameter to Value to write CRC word

Address Code write
06 High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

Table 8-11 Drive Response

Drive Function Drive parameter Value written CRC word

Address Code written to
06 High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

Table 8-12 Request to Write Multiple Parameters

Number of Number of No. Value to Value to

Drive Function 1st drive parameters of write to write to CRC word
Address Code parameter to write bytes 1st Nth
to write parameter parameter
16 H L H L H L H L H L
(Dec) byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte

Table 8-13 Response to Multiple Parameter Write

Drive Function Number of 1st Number of parameters CRC word

Address Code parameter written to written
16 High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 8-19
8. Serial Communications. ALSPA MV3000e

Table 8-14 Diagnostic Loopback Request

Drive Function Sub-function number Data CRC word

Address No. 0000
08 High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

Table 8-15 Loop-back Test Response

Drive Function Sub-function number Data CRC word

Address Code 0000
08 High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

Table 8-16 Exception Message

Drive Function Error Code CRC word

Address Code
01 High byte Low byte

The MODBUS™ protocol is designed and described around data exchange between PLCs.
When used on a ALSPA MV3000e the term "word" becomes synonymous with drive
parameter. Hence, a MODBUS™ message intending to access word 110 is interpreted by
the ALSPA MV3000e as a requirement to access drive parameter P1.10. The start of an
RTU frame is assumed to be the first character received after a gap in communications of at
least 3.5 character intervals, i.e. the time taken for 3.5 characters to be transmitted, taking
into account baud rate, data word length, stop bits and parity selection.
For transfers of 8 bit data, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit and no parity, a character is transferred
approximately every 1 ms. Hence a 3.5 character gap equates to no characters being sent
for approximately 3.5 ms.
The end of a message frame is also indicated by a 3.5 character gap. That is, the last
character received before the communications gap occurred is assumed to be the last
character of the message.
8.9.1 MODBUS™ RTU Error Messages
If the ALSPA MV3000e receives messages requiring an unsupported function or an attempt
to read/write more than 32 drive parameters, an exception message of error code 01, is sent
back by the drive. If a correctly addressed message is received with an incorrect CRC word,
the ALSPA MV3000e flushes the message frame and increments the CRC count.

8.10 MODBUS™ ASCII

The difference between MODBUS™ ASCII and MODBUS™ RTU lies only in the way the
message is framed, how the error checksum is generated and then how the message
content is represented. The start and end of the message are not time framed as with RTU,
but marked by specific start and end characters. The error word included at the end of the
message is generated using a Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC) rather than a CRC
error word. Two ASCII characters represent each byte of the message frame.
These differences are shown at the following example:-
Example - Read Multiple Drive Parameters in MODBUS™ ASCII
See Table 8-17 to read contents of P3.00 from Address 1 request.
Table 8-17 Read Contents of P3.00 from Address 1 Request

: Drive Functio Number of 1st drive Total number of LRC CR LF

address n parameters to read parameters to read word
number
3A 30 31 30 33 30 31 32 43 30 30 30 31 43 45 OD OA

Page 8-20 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 8. Serial Communications.

Note:
P3.00 is read as 300 ( = 012Ch ).

8.11 GEM 80-16 and GEM 80-10 N-Bus Protocol

The N-bus protocol used by GEM 80-16 and GEM 80-10 can be used to communicate with
ALSPA MV3000e MODBUS™, provided the ALSPA MV3000e is addressed as a non C50,
C100 subscriber.
Although N-bus is generally compatible with the MODBUS™ protocol used by ALSPA
MV3000e there is a difference in the way N-Bus processes address information (ALSPA
MV3000e parameter numbers) in messages. MODBUS™ changes addressing mode with
the message function (e.g. bit addressing for bit data word addressing for word data),
whereas N-bus starts all word addresses on a 16-bit boundary. This means that ALSPA
MV3000e parameter numbers originating from GEM 80-16 will have a four bit offset when
included in the message frame.
Therefore, when using ALSPA MV3000e within a GEM 80-16 network a ALSPA MV3000e
parameter number should not be specified as a `word' data type (i.e. it should not have the
`W' prefix when programmed from the GEM 80-16 system programmer).

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 8-21
8. Serial Communications. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 8-22 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

9 Diagnostics.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Page

9.1 Introduction to Diagnostics ............................................................................................................ 9-3

9.2 LED Fault Indicators ...................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3 Warnings........................................................................................................................................ 9-3
9.4 Trips 9-3
9.5 Viewing Warnings and Trips.......................................................................................................... 9-3
9.5.1 Action in the Event of a Warning ............................................................................................ 9-4
9.5.2 Action in the Event of a Trip ................................................................................................... 9-4
9.5.3 Resetting Trips ....................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.5.4 Trip Fault Codes ..................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.6 Using the HELP Key .................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.7 History Log................................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.7.1 Playing Back the History Log ............................................................................................... 9-19
9.8 Diagnostic Hints........................................................................................................................... 9-20
9.8.1 Failure of Drive Firmware ..................................................................................................... 9-22
9.8.2 Uploading the Failed Firmware to a PC ............................................................................... 9-23
9.9 Expected Trip Codes when CDC is Powered from Auxiliary 28 V Input ..................................... 9-24
9.9.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.9.2 Trip Fault Codes Specific to Internal Dynamic Brakes......................................................... 9-24
9.9.3 DELTA CDC ......................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.10 Product Identity Record ............................................................................................................... 9-26
9.10.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................ 9-26
9.10.2 Product Identity.................................................................................................................. 9-26
9.10.3 Where the Drive Identity is Stored..................................................................................... 9-26
9.10.4 Why is the identity copied to the CDC?............................................................................. 9-27
9.10.5 How is the Drive Identity used and kept safe? .................................................................. 9-27

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-1
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 9-2 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

9.1 Introduction to Diagnostics

This section includes details of the different diagnostic methods provided within the software
for a drive.

9.2 LED Fault Indicators

Illumination of the WARNING or flashing TRIPPED indicator and extinguishing of the
HEALTHY/STANDBY indicator indicate a fault condition.
The four LED indicators on the Keypad are repeated on the Keypad Harbour and give a first
indication of drive status. The Drive and Keypad indicators are shown at Section 2.

9.3 Warnings
If the WARNING indicator is lit a problem has occurred which is not sufficiently serious to trip
the drive. A warning code is stored in one of 10 locations in the Warning Record, parameters
P10.00 to P10.09, the code stored in P10.00 being for the most recent warning. It is most
important that all Warning codes are viewed to get a complete picture.
A full list of codes for WARNINGS is shown at Table 9-2.
Note:
Warnings are not latched and if the warning condition ceases, the WARNING indicator will extinguish.
(At default configuration, Warning 1 is located at P1.06).

9.4 Trips
If the TRIPPED indicator is flashing, a serious fault has occurred which has caused the drive
to shut down. The drive may be faulty, but usually the drive has tripped in response to a
problem on the plant, and the drive has protected the installation. Each time a trip occurs a
Fault is stored in one of ten locations in the Active Trip record, parameters P10.10 to
P10.19, the fault stored in P10.10 being for the most recent trip. It is most important that all
Trip codes are viewed to get a complete picture.
A full list of codes for TRIPS is shown at Table 9-3.

Note:
Trips are latched and must be reset before the drive can be operated again.

9.5 Viewing Warnings and Trips

Parameters in the drive report the trip or warning currently present, and other parameters
hold a history of the last 10 trips. These parameters display codes and text that describe
particular warnings or trips; the Keypad automatically displays these text messages.
Menu 10 is dedicated to trips and warnings, but at default Menu 1 also has some of these
parameters collected together for easy access.
Table 9-1 Viewing Warnings and Trips

Available parameters in Menu 1 Available parameters in Menu 10

P1.06 = FIRST WARNING P10.00 - P10.09 = WARNINGS 1 to 10
P1.07 - P1.09 = FIRST 3 TRIPS P10.10 - P10.19 = CURRENT TRIPS 1 to 10
P10.20 - P10.29 = TRIP HISTORY 1 to 10

Viewing using navigation keys

Navigate to one of the above parameters, either a Trip or a Warning and note the trip code
and the trip text message – remember to view all, not just the first one.
Viewing using "help" key
1. When the drive is showing either a Trip or Warning, press ? .
2. The Keypad will display a diagnostic menu. Choose the relevant option.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-3
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

3. See 9.5.1 and 9.5.2 for what to do if a Trip or Warning occurs.

9.5.1 Action in the Event of a Warning
1. Press ? and select "2" – Display Warnings.
2. P10.00 will be displayed – note the first Warning! This is the problem that is causing
the warning indication.
3. In turn, Display P10.01 to P10.09 and note any additional warnings. Any warnings in
these locations will be for secondary problems and will help with diagnosis.
4. Refer to Table 9-2 and check the meaning of each warning. Take corrective action as
necessary.
9.5.2 Action in the Event of a Trip
1. Press ? and select "2" – Display Trips.
2. P10.10 will be displayed – note the most recent Trip. This is the problem that has
caused the trip indication. (For the default configuration, Trips 1/2 are located at
P1.07/P1.08).
3. In turn, Display P10.11 to P10.19 and record any additional trips that may be present.
4. Refer to Table 9-3 and check the meaning of each fault code. Take corrective action
as necessary.
5. See 9.5.3 for resetting trips.
9.5.3 Resetting Trips
From the Digital Inputs
From Default, press and release the button wired to DIGIN 6.
Note:
CF9 (the Reset flag) may have been re-programmed, but at Default it is connected to DIGIN 6.
From the Drive Data ManagerTM (Keypad)
Press ? and select Option 3 (Attempt Trip Reset).

Table 9-2 Warning Fault Codes

Fault Warning Description Possible reason why

Code
100 Excess output current Drive output current > drive continuous rating
101 Motor thermostat MTRIP input is low (P2.10 = 1)
(MTRIP)
102 Motor I²T Accumulated I²T product of motor overload has reached
Warning level (P2.09 = 2 or 3)
103 Motor PTC PTC resistance increasing and approaching trip level
104 DB resistor Resistor has 25% remaining power dissipation capability
105 Reference loss Failure of selected drive reference
106 FBC1 loss Cable fallen out.
Not configured correctly, either on drive, or network master.
107 High temperature - A temperature high warning has occurred – see P45.22 for
see P45.22 more details ∗
108 Low temperature - A temperature low warning has occurred – see P45.22 for
see P45.22 more details ∗
110 Backup reference loss Failure of backup reference source
111 CAN2 Warnings Refer to ALSPA MV3000 Second CAN Port technical
manual, T1968
112 RS232 loss RS232 serial link has timed out (P32.15 = 1)

Page 9-4 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

Table 9-2 Warning Fault Codes

Fault Warning Description Possible reason why

Code
113 RS485 loss RS485 serial link has timed out (P32.55 = 1)
114 Over speed Motor operating above over speed level (P29.00/P29.01)
115 Encoder loss Signal from encoder suggests fault
116 Fieldbus Loss The Fieldbus communication link has failed
117 to 119 CAN2 Warnings Refer to ALSPA MV3000 second CAN Port technical
manual, T1968
120 to 125 Internal software fault Fault detected in operating software
127 Back-up parameter set If main parameter set is corrupt at power up, the drive
in use reverts to the back-up parameter set (if stored via P99.16).
SF11 is set High, and warning 127 is active, to indicate
Back-up set is being used.
128 Load fault – High Fault due to excessive load
129 Load fault – Low Fault due to inadequate load
130 to 132 CAN Warnings Refer to ALSPA MV3000 CANopen Fieldbus Facility
& 135 Technical Manual T2013 – see 1.6.
133 SFE: Mains frequency Set by P52.09 and P52.10
outside limits
134 SFE: Synch Loss It has not been possible to synchronise the mains e.g.
(P99.01?) because of an auxiliary supply fault. If attempt made to run
with this Warning displayed the SFE will trip on Trip Code
94.
136 SFE: LCN feedback The unit will therefore not respond to a run request.
missing/CF25 not been
enabled
137 SFE: Choke ptc Resistance is greater than the threshold set in P52.19 and
Warning P52.20 is set to the value 1.
138 DB inactive (P99.01?) P23.01 set to 1 (Proportional) P99.01 not set to 0 (No Motor
Control)
139 U-phase sharing failure The U-phases between all of the connected DELTA units
are not sharing current equally.
Faulty wiring.
Unequal wiring impedances/lengths.
Loose wiring terminals
Faulty DELTA unit.
140 V phase sharing failure As for 139 except for V phase
141 W phase sharing failure As for 139, except for W phase.
142 Mains Amplitude SFE Mode:
Warning The measured mains voltage amplitude is outside of the
limits set in P52.22 and P52.23
Motor Control Mode:
The measured mains voltage amplitude is such that AC
Loss Ridethrough has been invoked.
143 Ethernet Channel 1 Ethernet Channel 1 has not received the appropriate
Loss protocol message within the time-out specified, see
MV3000e Ethernet Interface Technical Manual T2034 for full
details
144 Ethernet Channel 2 As for 143 except for Ethernet Channel 2.
Loss
145 & 146 Reserved - Future Use
147 Download in Progress A parameter set is being downloaded to the drive

Note:
Refer to Page 6-48 for details of the drive hardware.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-5
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

9.5.4 Trip Fault Codes

These are shown at Table 9-3. There are four classes of trip:
A = Auto-resettable trip (see Menu 28)
R = Manually resettable trip (see 9.5.3)
S = System trip
N = Non-resettable trip

Page 9-6 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

Table 9-3 Trip Fault Codes

Fault Name Class Description Parameter No. What can cause a trip Remarks
Code to enable
Auto-reset
1 Interlock A,R Interlock Input at TB3/9 is low or open P28.11 24 V not present on TB3/9. This is usually due to a plant E-stop or Check for open E-stops or interlocks outside the
interlock being open drive cubicle. Check that TB3 is not loose.
2 Reference Loss A,R No reference source can be found (either primary or P28.12 The drive receives references from analogue inputs, 4-20mA etc or Check more trip codes on Menu 10 by scrolling
backup) Fieldbus link and the active reference has gone through. Extra trip codes will give clues to which
reference has been lost.
3 DC Overvolts A,R DC Link Voltage exceeds the over voltage level: P28.09 The DC Link volts monitored on P11.03 has risen; usually caused by If the decelerating ramp rate that stops the drive
780 V on a 380V-480VAC system the motor decelerating quickly and regenerating back into the drive. from tripping is too long, fit a DB. This is not a
875V on a 525VAC system Check decelerating ramp rates are not too high or that any dynamic drive fault but an application error.
1165V on a 690VAC system brake fitted is operating Refer to Over/Under volts trip table in the
appropriate product technical manual.
4 DC Undervolts A,R DC Link Voltage is less than the under voltage level: P28.08 When a MicroCubicleTM CDC or a DELTA CDC is
400V on a 380V-480VAC system operating from 24 V auxiliaries the mains power is
450V on a 525VAC system off and so the DC Link is not established.
560V on a 690VAC system
5 Timed Over-current A,R Total I.T limit of the drive overload has been exceeded P28.07
6 Over-temperature -see P45.22 A,R An Over-temperature trip has occurred – see P45.22 for P28.13 Over temperature trips are generated by software in the CDC, by Refer to over temperature trips at Table 6-11.
(pointed at by P10.10) more details comparing temperature feedback to trip levels, or in the SKiiP® circuits
in hardware, in case the software fails: Menu 45 is dedicated to temperature feedback -
- the temperature feedback is high - check Menu 45; some of the temperatures are also included at
- the drive ventilation is inhibited - check temperature, check air Menu 11.
throughput against table in specification section of the appropriate
product manual; When a MicroCubicle is operating from 28V
- for liquid cooled products check that the coolant flow rates and auxiliaries the SKiiP circuits are not powered up,
volumes meet the specification in the product manual. which is where the trip originates, and the drive
will show this trip.
7 Instantaneous Over-current A,R The drive output current has exceeded its maximum safe P28.06 The current feedback has exceeded the trip levels within the product: Refer to diagram under ‘Description’ for the
level – see diagram below for an indication of various trip - motor faulty; various trip levels.
levels. - motor cable damage;
- shock loads to system - however, the drive's internal current clipping When operating from 28V the drive will trip
Note: ride-through function should stop this; because the SKiiP circuits, within the product, are
When a Fault Code 7 occurs it is also likely that there will - possible faulty transistors: - remove the motor cables, if the drive still not powered. The exact list of trips will depend on
be a fault on any 8 to 13 U, V, W trip codes. trips then it is at fault internally; the size of the drive powered by 28V.
- for a DELTA system try exchanging the ribbons in the CDC and see if
the trip 'moves'. If it does, the DELTA now reporting the trip is faulty. If it
doesn't the CDC is faulty.
-
SKiiP® Hardware Trip Level/Instantaneous When operating from 24 V the drive will trip
Overload Trip Level is Drive Size Dependent
because the SKiiP® circuits, within the product,
Absolute
Current Clip Level (1.76 x FLC for 1.1 O/L; are not powered. The exact list of trips will
2.55 x FLC for 1.5 O/L)
maximum depend on the size of the drive powered by 24 V.
(assuming Drive Peak I (1.1 or 1.5 x Drive FLC)
drive in
control) Drive FLC (e.g. MV3071= 71 A at 1.1 O/L;
MV3058 = 58 A at 1.1 O/L)

Motor Peak I (1.1 or 1.5 x FLC)

Motor FLC (P2.02)

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-7
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

Table 9-3 Trip Fault Codes

Fault Name Class Description Parameter No. What can cause a trip Remarks
Code to enable
Auto-reset
8 Instantaneous Over-current on U- A,R U-phase transistor turned off by self protection* P28.06
phase
9 Hardware Over-temperature on A,R Over-temperature detected by U-phase output* P28.13
U-phase
10 Instantaneous Over-current on V- A,R V-phase transistor turned off by self protection* P28.06
phase
11 Hardware Over-temperature on V- A,R Over-temperature detected by V-phase output* P28.13
phase
12 Instantaneous Over-current on W- A,R W-phase transistor turned off by self protection* P28.06
phase
13 Hardware Over-temperature on A,R Over-temperature detected by W-phase output* P28.13 The Over temperature Trips in Code 6 should react first. However, if When operating from 24 V the drive will trip
W-phase the CDC is not functioning then the temperature may keep rising. The because the SKiiP® circuits, within the product, are
SKiiP® circuits have a hardwire temperature monitor for safety and not powered. The exact list of trips will depend on
these may trigger:- is the drive really hot - check Menus 11 and 45.- if the size of the drive powered by 24 V.
YES check fans and ventilation requirements;- if NO then the drive may
be at fault - e.g. change ribbon cables on DELTAs.
14 Encoder Power Supply Fail R Encoder supply is internally supplied at 8 V then regulated - Check encoder cabling for damage – remove encoder connection at
down to the value set in P13.06 and ‘I’ limited, then if TB5 and try a reset to see if drive or cable is at fault – is encoder
current flowing to the encoder is too high, trip here. correct type? Refer to ‘Encoder Selection’ in appropriate product
manual.
15 Controller 15 V Fail R Internal supply voltage on the Control Board has failed. - Faulty CDC
Failure of 15 V supply could result in:
(a) no +15V for SKiiP which will result in any number of trips
on the SKiiP module e.g. over temperature, over current.
16 24 V Output Fail R The User +24 V output from the Control Electronics has - Disconnect User I/O terminals from the drive. See if 24 V recovers –
failed, or been overloaded. check wiring if it does.
17 Unidentified Power Interface N.S The drive cannot recognise the Power Interface (PIB) PCB, - E2PROM failure on a MicroCubicle™ - the PIB is part of the CDC;
Board and therefore cannot run. It looks for an E2PROM on the On a DELTA system the PIB is within the controller's metal case.
PIB.
18 History Restore Fail S The Non-volatile History record cannot be recovered at - Can happen after a firmware upgrade and is OK.
power-up. Is not critical if history record is not needed and therefore it can be
ignored.
19 New PCB S One of the printed circuit boards (pcb) in the drive has - Exchanging pcbs between drives;
changed from when the drive was last switched off. Refer to Changing DELTA1;
Spares Manual supplied with new pcb. Changing DELTA pcbs.
It is important that the correct spares procedures are followed.
20 Parameter Edits Lost S The Non-volatile Parameter Edits cannot be recovered at - This trip is rare and is a warning. The DC Link on the drive may have
power-up. All parameters have returned to their factory been dragged down very quickly, preventing enough time for parameter
default values. storage on Power Off. Check for excessive DC Link Loads e.g. faulty
DBs or DC Link schemes faulty.
21 Motor Thermostat (MTRIP) A,R Motor thermostat has tripped. This trip can only occur if the P28.10 CF113 is healthy when High, so n/c thermostats need to be inverted by Check motor fans and thermostat functionality.
thermostat is connected via a digital input to CF113 and placing a –ve sign in the edit.
P2.10 = 2. See Control Block Diagram Sheet 7
22 Motor I²T A,R The motor I²T limit has been exceeded. This trip can only P28.10 Is the motor free to rotate?
occur if P2.09 = 2. Is the motor sized correctly for the load?
Is P2.07 set correctly?
Is P2.08 set correctly?
23 RS232 Loss A,R RS232 serial link has timed out. This trip can only occur if P28.14 Check RS232 connections and wiring.
P32.15 = 2. Is the serial link manager plc OK?
Check that the time-out period is set correctly.
24 RS485 Loss A,R RS485 serial link has timed out. This trip can only occur if P28.14 Check RS485 connections and wiring.
P32.55 = 2. Is the serial link manager plc OK?
Check that the time-out period is set correctly.
Is P2.08 set correctly?

Page 9-8 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

Table 9-3 Trip Fault Codes

Fault Name Class Description Parameter No. What can cause a trip Remarks
Code to enable
Auto-reset
25 Internal Reference Fail R Internal reference voltage has failed, CDC faulty - The CDC is faulty – replace.
26 Under-temperature - see P45.22 A,R An under-temperature trip has occurred – see P45.22 for P28.13 Is the temperature actually low? See Menu 11 and 45 . If it is the drive
more details cannot operate <0 °C. Temperature feedback comes from the SKiiP®
Module. Check connections to the CDC.
27 Keypad Loss/Removed R Keypad Communications have illegally halted. See Keypad - The Keypad has been removed when it was either in control (start/stop)
removal at 2.2.5. or had reference control (Keypad ref).
28 Current Imbalance R The 3 output phases are imbalanced in current. This trip - If the current is different by 20% in any 1 phase the drive trips.
can only occur in VVVF mode (P99.01 = 1). Disconnect motor cables and see if the trip remains Check fans and ventilation.
29 Precharge failure A,R The Power Interface Board received no pre-charge P28.08 - if YES then = drive;
contactor close signal. On a DELTA, check the rectifier - if NO then = motor; Check motor loads and cables - can disconnect
wiring. Check motor. motor cables and run drives to see if trip goes
Check motor cables. away - if it does the drive is not at fault.
-
24 V Precharge Acknowledge on PL12/6 has not been detected –
30 Drive ID Violation R P99.13 is not equal to P99.14 - wiring error or relay on DELTA Rectifier faulty or 24 V is down.
31 DELTA 1 Over-current on U- A,R U-phase transistor on DELTA 1 turned off by self protection. P28.06 Simple editing error. FIP or Fieldbus parameter set sent to wrong drive.
phase
The Over current and Over temperature trips are operated by the
32 DELTA 1 Over-temp on U-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 1 U-phase.* P28.13 SKiiP® Modules. Either the temperature or current is high (check
Menus 11 and 45) or the SKiiP® Modules are faulty (move CDC ribbons
for the DELTAs to see if the Trips move) or the controller is faulty. If the
trips do not move with the DELTA ribbons and not the motor then it
must be the controller.

Checking if drive is faulty:

1. Remove motor cables from drive end;
2. 'Run’ the drive in VVVF Mode and see if trips occur - if not drive is
OK - if it does it may be controller or DELTA at fault.

Checking if DELTA is faulty:

1. With the power OFF, move DELTA ribbons in the DELTA CDC;
2. Power ON and run the drive;
3. If the drive trips again and the trip has moved with the DELTA then
the DELTA is at fault;

If the drive trips on the same trip then the DELTA is OK but the CDC is
at fault.
See Fault Code 31 above.
33 DELTA 1 Over-current on V- A,R V-phase transistor on DELTA 1 turned off by self-protection. P28.06 See Fault Code 31 above.
phase
34 DELTA 1 Over-temp on V-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 1 V-phase.* P28.13 See Fault Code 31 above.
35 DELTA 1 Over-current on W- A,R W-phase transistor on DELTA 1 turned off by self-protection P28.06 See Fault Code 31 above.
phase
36 DELTA 1 Over-temp on W-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 1 W-phase.* P28.13 See Fault Code 31 above.
37 DELTA 1 External trip R External trip detected on DELTA 1, TB1. - Only possible on Liquid Cooled DELTA (LCD) – this TB is used to
detect fan failure on the LCD. See DC Link Overvoltage Trip 3.
Could be faulty SMPS - exchange with another.
38 DELTA 1 Over-voltage A,R DC Link over voltage detected on DELTA 1 – signal from P28.09
the SMPS
39 DELTA 1 Enhanced DIB Trip A,R Reported if an enhanced trip from new Delta Interface P28.06 Controllers made after September 2005 show trip codes 240 to 249
Board (20X4381) is detected by an older controller. instead.
40 DELTA 2 Over-current on U- A,R U-phase transistor on DELTA 2 turned off by self- P28.06 Checks for Overcurrent on DELTA 2 are the same as those for DELTA
phase protection. 1 – refer to details at Fault Code 31.
41 DELTA 2 Over-temp on U-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 2 U-phase.* P28.13 Checks for Overtemperature on DELTA 2 are the same as those for
DELTA 1 – refer to details at Fault Code 31.

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-9
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

Table 9-3 Trip Fault Codes

Fault Name Class Description Parameter No. What can cause a trip Remarks
Code to enable
Auto-reset
42 DELTA 2 Over-current on V- A,R V-phase transistor on DELTA 2 turned off by self-protection. P28.06 See Fault Code 40 above.
phase
43 DELTA 2 Over-temp on V-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 2 V-phase.* P28.13 See Fault Code 40 above.
44 DELTA 2 Over-current on W- A,R W-phase transistor on DELTA 2 turned off by self-protection P28.06 see Fault Code 40 above.
phase
45 DELTA 2 Over-temp on W-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 2 W-phase.* P28.13 see Fault Code 40 above.
46 DELTA 2 External trip R External trip detected on DELTA 2, TB1. - See details for Fault Code 37.
47 DELTA 2 Over-voltage A,R DC Link over voltage detected on DELTA 2. P28.09
48 DELTA 2 Over-current A,R Reported if an enhanced trip from new Delta Interface P28.06 Controllers made after September 2005 show trip codes 250 to 259
Board (20X4381) is detected by an older controller. instead.
49 DELTA 3 Over-current on U A,R U-phase transistor on DELTA 3 turned off by self-protection P28.06 Checks for Overcurrent on DELTA 3 are the same as those for DELTA
phase 1 - refer to details at Fault Code 31.
50 DELTA 3 Over-temp on U-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 3 U-phase.* P28.13 Checks for Over temperature on DELTA 3 are the same as those for
DELTA 1 - refer to details at Fault Code 31.
51 DELTA 3 Over-current on V- A,R V-phase transistor on DELTA 3 turned off by self-protection. P28.06 See Fault Code 49 above.
phase
52 DELTA 3 Over-temp on V-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 3 V-phase.* P28.13 See Fault Code 49 above.
53 DELTA 3 Over-current on W- A,R W-phase transistor on DELTA 3 turned off by self-protection P28.06 See Fault Code 49 above.
phase
54 DELTA 3 Over-temp on W-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 3 W-phase.* P28.13 See Fault Code 49 above.
55 DELTA 3 External trip R External trip detected on DELTA 3, TB1. - See details for Fault Code 37.
56 DELTA 3 Over-voltage A,R DC Link over voltage detected on DELTA 3. P28.09
57 Overspeed A,R The motor is operating above its set over speed level. This P28.16 Speed feedback level in P9.01 is > over speed level in P29.00, P29.01. Are the PID settings for Speed Amplifier OK? It
trip can only occur if P29.02 = 3. Is the encoder OK? may be unstable.
Is the motor being overhauled?
If in torque control, the motor may be running off due to mechanical
failure of the load.
58 Current Control Fault R Drive cannot control the motor current as required. Check - Value set in P12.02 is too high, or mains supply voltage is lower than
the motor model, mains voltage, encoder connections and thought. Motor must be off load.
check for earth faults. Poor motor model - do a CAL run.
Encoder connections - mechanical and electrical are poor.
Ensure the motor is off-load - the drive checks this at the beginning of
the test.
Motor parameters have been entered manually and are incorrect - do a
CAL run.
59 Motor Calibration Failure R Motor Calibration Test (P3.12 or 12.03 = 3) failed. Check -
the motor and encoder connections.
60 Unsuitable Motor R The Motor Parameters entered do not describe a motor - The drive checks for three conditions to flag encoder loss:
within the control capabilities of the drive. Maximum speed change (set in P13.02);
Maximum reversals (set in P13.19);
61 Encoder Loss R Encoder Signal has been lost, or cannot be relied upon. -
Reversible threshold (set in P13.20).
This trip can only occur if P13.02 = 3. See Control Block
Diagram, Sheet 6.
Check encoder electrical and mechanical connections - ensure encoder
cable has a continuous screen and is earthed at both ends.
62 User Trip 1 A,R Control Flag 10 = 1 P28.15 CF10 has been connected to something by the user – ensure that
whatever it is connected to is healthy (i.e. producing a LO on CF10).
63 Fieldbus Loss R The Fieldbus communication link has failed. - FIP, PROFIBUS, are Fieldbus communication links – the one in use has
failed.
64 Load Fault - High A,R The drive has detected a load fault due to excessive load. P28.17 Menu 43 allows the drive to monitor the load – check mechanics for
bearing failure or coupling breakages etc.
65 Load Fault - Low A,R The drive has detected a load fault due to inadequate load. P28.17

Page 9-10 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

Table 9-3 Trip Fault Codes

Fault Name Class Description Parameter No. What can cause a trip Remarks
Code to enable
Auto-reset
66 Motor PTC trip R Excessive temperature detected by PTC on TB5, pin 1. See P28.10 Is the motor stalled?
Menu 2. Is the motor fan faulty?
Is the motor PTC faulty?
Is the PTC wiring and connectors OK?
67 DB resistor trip A,R Drive estimates the DB resistor is too hot. P28.18 Only possible for a MV DB. Drive bases estimation on information
typed into P23.01 to P23.03.
68 Unknown Drive Size N.S The software was unable to read the E2 PROM on one, or - E2 PROMs exist on the SMPS, the DELTA PIBs and the DELTA DIBs.
more, of the pcbs.
69 Configuration Trip N.S The drive is not correctly configured to operate in a DELTA - The DELTAs must be plugged in from DELTA 1 slot to DELTA 6 with no
system. DELTAs are not connected to the DELTA gaps;
Controller correctly. The DELTAs must all be the same type;
The SMPS units on the DELTAs must all be the same type.
70 Datumize Error R Datumizing (Position Control Only) encountered limit - Ensure that the HI and LO position limit switches are wired and
switches in the wrong order. See Position Control. programmed correctly to CF87 and CF86. Datumizing speeds set in
P36.35 to P36.37 are too high – see Datumizing 6.36.3.
71 Speed Feedback Loss R Only applies to Speed Feedback Vector Control Mode - The selected speed feedback is no longer present, or backup has been
(P99.01 = 2, and P13.00 = 1 & 2). selected, and it has not been programmed or connected.
72 Over Frequency R Allowed output frequency has been exceeded. - Absolute limit to prevent IGBTs from being damaged.
250Hz at switching frequencies >= 2.5kHz
125Hz at switching frequency = 1.25kHz
73 User Trip 2 A,R Control Flag 112 = 1 P28.15 See User Trip 1 to Trip Code 62.
74 DELTA 3 Over-current A,R Reported if an enhanced trip from new Delta Interface P28.06 Controllers made after September 2005 show trip codes 260 to 269
Board (20X4381) is detected by an older controller. instead.
75 DELTA 4 Over-current on U- A,R U-phase transistor on DELTA 4 turned off by self-protection P28.06 Checks for Overcurrent on DELTA 4 are the same as those for DELTA
phase 1 - refer to details at Fault Code 31.
76 DELTA 4 Over-temp on U-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 4 U-phase.* P28.13 Checks for over temperature on DELTA 4 are the same as those for
DELTA 1 - refer to details at Fault Code 31.
77 DELTA 4 Over-current on V- A,R V-phase transistor on DELTA 4 turned off by self-protection. P28.06 See Fault Code 75 above.
phase
78 DELTA 4 Over-temp on V-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 4 V-phase.* P28.13 See Fault Code 76 above.
79 DELTA 4 Over-current on W- A,R W-phase transistor on DELTA 4 turned off by self-protection P28.06 See Fault Code 75 above.
phase
80 DELTA 4 Over-temp on W-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 4 W-phase.* P28.13 see Fault Code 76 above.
81 DELTA 4 External trip R External trip detected on DELTA 4, TB1. - See details for Fault Code 37.
82 DELTA 4 Over-voltage A,R DC Link over voltage detected on DELTA 4. P28.09
83 DELTA 4 Over-current A,R Reported if an enhanced trip from new Delta Interface P28.06 Controllers made after September 2005 show trip codes 270 to 279
Board (20X4381) is detected by an older controller. instead.
84 DELTA 5 Over-current on U- A,R U-phase transistor on DELTA 5 turned off by self-protection P28.06 Checks for Overcurrent on DELTA 5 are the same as those for DELTA
phase 1 - refer to details at Fault Code 31.
85 DELTA 5 Over-temp on U-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 5 U-phase.* P28.13 Checks for over temperature on DELTA 5 are the same as those for
DELTA 1 - refer to details at Fault Code 31.
86 DELTA 5 Over-current on V- A,R V-phase transistor on DELTA 5 turned off by self-protection. P28.06 See Fault Code 84 above.
phase
87 DELTA 5 Over-temp on V-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 5 V-phase.* P28.13 See Fault Code 85 above.
88 DELTA 5 Over-current on W- A,R W-phase transistor on DELTA 5 turned off by self-protection P28.06 See Fault Code 84 above.
phase
89 DELTA 5 Over-temp on W-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 5 W-phase* P28.13 See Fault Code 85 above.
90 DELTA 5 External trip R External trip detected on DELTA 5, TB1. P25.19 See details for Fault Code 37.
91 DELTA 5 Over-voltage A,R DC Link over voltage detected on DELTA 5. P28.09
92 DELTA 5 Over-current A,R Reported if an enhanced trip from new Delta Interface P28.06 Controllers made after September 2005 show trip codes 280 to 289
Board (20X4381) is detected by an older controller. instead.

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-11
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

Table 9-3 Trip Fault Codes

Fault Name Class Description Parameter No. What can cause a trip Remarks
Code to enable
Auto-reset
93 SFE: Mains frequency detected A,R Mains frequency has been detected outside of the limits set P28.19 The Mains Monitor Unit may not be connected correctly. The mains
outside of limits by P52.08 and P52.11 frequency may be varying.
94 SFE: Synchronisation to mains A,R Synchronisation to the mains has failed due to: P28.19 The Mains Monitor Unit may not be connected at all, or connected
has failed a) permanent loss of mains signal, or correctly.
b) temporary interruption of mains signal, or
c) mains frequency has changed at a rate greater than
2%/s.
95 SFE: Mains Voltage Monitor Loss A,R Mains Voltage Monitor Loss P28.19 A ribbon cable may have become disconnected
96 SFE: Auxiliary Phase Detection A,R Auxiliary Phase Detection Loss P28.19 There may be a missing phase on an Input Monitor or a mismatch of
Loss amplitude and phasing on the incoming phases.
97 Pre-release Expiry R Pre-release Software time limit expired - A pre-release version of firmware has been left in the drive – update to
latest version.
98 SFE: Choke ptc trip A,R Choke PTC resistance is greater than the threshold set in P28.19 The SFE Choke is either very hot;
P52.19 and P52.20 is set to the value 2. Or its detector (PTC) has failed;
Or its detector (PTC) is not wired correctly.
99 Unknown trip -
100- Reserved for Warning Codes -
149 See Warning Codes - The controller has detected an error in the PWM Pattern. CDC is at
Error detected in Drive's PWM. Report to Converteam fault.
150 PWM error N.S -
Check DB resistor wiring, or DB resistor, maybe DB Family.
151 DB Trip A,R Over-current from DB unit – detected by the SKiiP® P28.06
Modules. Check DB resistor wiring and resistor. The DB may be hot due to short
® circuit of cables or DB may be faulty.
152 DB hardware Over-temp trip A,R Over-temperature from DB unit – detected by the SKiiP P28.13
Modules. Checks for Overcurrent on DELTA 6 are the same as those for DELTA
1 - refer to details at Fault Code 31.
153 DELTA 6 Over-current on U- A,R U-phase transistor on DELTA 6 turned off by self-protection P28.06
phase
154 DELTA 6 Over-temp on U-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 6 U-phase.* P28.13 Checks for over temperature on DELTA 6 are the same as those for
DELTA 1 - refer to details at Fault Code 31.
155 DELTA 6 Over-current on V- A,R V-phase transistor on DELTA 6 turned off by self-protection. P28.06 See Fault Code 153 above.
phase
156 DELTA 6 Over-temp on V-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 6 V-phase.* P28.13 See Fault Code 154 above.
157 DELTA 6 Over-current on W- A,R W-phase transistor on DELTA 6 turned off by self-protection P28.06 See Fault Code 153 above.
phase
158 DELTA 6 Over-temp on W-phase A,R Over-temperature detected on DELTA 6 W-phase.* P28.13 See Fault Code 154 above.
159 DELTA 6 External trip R External trip detected on DELTA 6, TB1. - See details for Fault Code 37.
160 DELTA 6 Over-voltage A,R DC Link over voltage detected on DELTA 6. P28.09
161 DELTA 6 Over-current A,R Reported if an enhanced trip from new Delta Interface P28.06 Controllers made after September 2005 show trip codes 290 to 299
Board (20X4381) is detected by an older controller. instead.
162 DB 1 Over-current U A,R U-phase transistor on DB 1 turned off by self-protection. P28.06 DELTA Bridges can be used as DBs by connecting them into the
relevant connections or the CDC Controller; the trips are therefore
generated in the same way as a normal DELTA, so refer to DELTA 1
Codes. However, over currents can be caused by faulty resistors, or
resistor wiring, as there is no motor here – check wiring and resistors
for damage.
Move the ribbons from DB1 to DB2.
See if the trip moves with the DB or the Controller.
163 DB 1 Over-temp U A,R Over-temperature detected on DB 1 U-phase. P28.13
164 DB 1 Over-current V A,R V-phase transistor on DB 1 turned off by self-protection. P28.06
165 DB 1 Over-temp V A,R Over-temperature detected on DB 1 V-phase. P28.13
166 DB 1 Over-current W A,R W-phase transistor on DB 1 turned off by self-protection. P28.06
167 DB 1 Over-temp W A,R Over-temperature detected on DB 1 W-phase. P28.13

Page 9-12 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

Table 9-3 Trip Fault Codes

Fault Name Class Description Parameter No. What can cause a trip Remarks
Code to enable
Auto-reset
168 DB 1 External trip R External trip detected on DB 1, TB1. -
169 DB 1 Over-voltage A,R DC Link over voltage detected on DB 1. P28.09
170 DB 1 Over-current A,R Over-current detected on DB 1. P28.06
171 DB 2 Over-current U A,R U-phase transistor on DB 2 turned off by self-protection. P28.06
172 DB 2 Over-temp U A,R Over-temperature detected on DB 2 U-phase. P28.13
173 DB 2 Over-current V A,R V-phase transistor on DB 2 turned off by self-protection. P28.06
174 DB 2 Over-temp V A,R Over-temperature detected on DB 2 V-phase. P28.13
175 DB 2 Over-current W A,R W-phase transistor on DB 2 turned off by self-protection. P28.06
176 DB 2 Over-temp W A,R Over-temperature detected on DB 2 W-phase. P28.13
177 DB 2 External trip R External trip detected on DB 2, TB1. -
178 DB 2 Over-voltage A,R DC Link over voltage detected on DB 2. P28.09
179 DB 2 Over-current A,R Over-current detected on DB 2. P28.06
180 PIB FPGA config. Failure N.S Internal failure. Report to Converteam - Identity in E2PROM on MicroCubicle™ SMPS is unrecognisable – faulty
SMPS or corrupt E2PROM or maybe loose ribbon connections between
CDC and SMPS.
181 Unidentified SMPS N.S System error as described. Check wiring. -
182 Unidentified DELTA 1 N.S Identity information in DIB is unrecognisable. - When a DELTA CDC is operating from 24 V
auxiliaries the CDC is unable to read the E2PROM
on the DELTA DIB (DELTA Interface Board) so
this trip will occur. The trip can be masked by
CF108.
183 Unidentified SMPS 1 N.S Identity information in DELTA SMPS is unrecognisable. - When a DELTA CDC is operating from 24 V
auxiliaries the CDC is unable to read the E2PROM
on the DELTA SMPS (Switched Mode Power
Supply) so this trip will occur. The trip can be
masked by CF108.
184 Incorrect DELTA 1 N.S The complete DELTA is incorrect type - This means that the SMPS and the DELTA are not compatible. There When a DELTA CDC is operating from 24 V
may be a high voltage SMPS with a low voltage DELTA or vice versa – auxiliaries the CDC is unable to read the E2PROM
check correct SMPS type for DELTA. on the DELTA DIB (DELTA Interface Board) so
this trip will occur.
185 Unidentified DELTA 2 N.S See 182. - See 182 When a DELTA CDC is operating from 24 V
auxiliaries the CDC is unable to read the E2PROM
on the DELTA SMPS (Switched Mode Power
Supply).
186 Unidentified SMPS 2 N.S See 183. -
187 Incorrect DELTA 2 N.S See 184. -
188 Unidentified DELTA 3 N.S See 182. -
189 Unidentified SMPS 3 N.S See 183. -
190 Incorrect DELTA 3 N.S See 184. -
191 Unidentified DELTA 4 N.S See 182. -
192 Unidentified SMPS 4 N.S See 183. -
193 Incorrect DELTA 4 N.S See 184. -
194 Unidentified DELTA 5 N.S See 182. -
195 Unidentified SMPS 5 N.S See 183. -
196 Incorrect DELTA 5 N.S See 184. -
197 Unidentified DELTA 6 N.S See 182. -
198 Unidentified SMPS 6 N.S See 183. -
199 Incorrect DELTA 6 N.S See 184. -

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-13
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

Table 9-3 Trip Fault Codes

Fault Name Class Description Parameter No. What can cause a trip Remarks
Code to enable
Auto-reset
200 CAN 1 Loss, see P61.43 R CAN is not communicating correctly - Some possible causes of a trip are:CAN cable disconnected;No other
active nodes on the CAN Network.Refer to T2013 CANopen Fieldbus
Facility Technical Manual for more details.
201 Unsuitable DB Load N.R Load too high (resistor value too low) on DB mode, on IGBT - When using a Power Bridge as a DB (P23.19 = 1) incorrect value of DB
Bridge resistors will trigger this trip.
Check resistor values;
Check DB resistor wiring.
202 DELTA Rectifier Thermostat Trip A,R Thermostat connections (PL12/3 and PL12/4) on DELTA P28.13 Missing or damaged wiring between DELTA Controller (PL12/3/4) and
Controller are open circuit. DELTA Rectifier (TB1/3/4).
203 CAN 2 LOSS See P65.43 R As Trip 200 - As Trip 200
204 Fieldbus Coupler 1 Loss R The Fieldbus communication associated with Menu 74 has - Cable fallen out
failed Not configured correctly - either on drive or network master.
205 Reserved -
206 Reserved -
207 U-Phase Sharing Failure R Imbalance between DELTA U-Phase Currents - The U- Phases between all of the connected DELTA units are not
sharing current equally:
Unequal wiring impedances/lengths
Loose wiring terminals
Faulty DELTA unit
208 V-Phase Sharing Failure R Imbalance between DELTA V-Phase Currents - As Trip 207, except for V-Phase
209 W-Phase Sharing Failure R Imbalance between DELTA W-Phase Currents - As Trip 207, except for W-Phase
210 Mains Amplitude Trip R The mains supply amplitude has been outside the limits set -
by P52.22 and P52.23 for longer than the time set by
P52.24
211 Not 40MHz CDC N.S The firmware fitted is only compatible with a 40MHZ CDC -
and the CDC in use is an older 25MHz version
212 Undiagnosed Trip DELTA 1 R Controller has detected a trip from DELTA 1 but is unable to - High amounts of electrical noise. Poor earthing. Incorrect screening of Later Delta Interface Boards (20X4381 or
diagnose details of the trip. ribbon cables. 20X4384) should fix this problem.
213 Undiagnosed Trip DELTA 2 R See 212 -
214 Undiagnosed Trip DELTA 3 R See 212 -
215 Undiagnosed Trip DELTA 4 R See 212 -
216 Undiagnosed Trip DELTA 5 R See 212 -
217 Undiagnosed Trip DELTA 6 R See 212 -
218 Undiagnosed Trip DB1 R See 212 -
219 Undiagnosed Trip DB2 R See 212 -
220 Ethernet 1 Loss R Ethernet Channel 1 has not received the appropriate -
protocol message (see P86.34) within the timeout specified
by P86.33
221 Ethernet 2 Loss R Ethernet Channel 2 has not received the appropriate -
protocol message (see P86.84) within the timeout specified
by P86.83
222 Torque Prove Fail R Torque has not been proved before the Torque Prove -
timeout has elapsed
223 Brake Release Fail R Brake has not been released before the Brake Release -
timer has expired
224 Download in Progress R Running is prohibited as Drive Coach PC package has not - Incorrect termination of parameter download from Drive Coach
terminated a parameter download
225 - Reserved -
228
229 DSP Comms Failure R Communications between CDC and DSP have failed. -

Page 9-14 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

Table 9-3 Trip Fault Codes

Fault Name Class Description Parameter No. What can cause a trip Remarks
Code to enable
Auto-reset
230 User Alert 1 R Control Flag 198 = 1 - CF198 has been connected to something by the user – ensure that
whatever it is connected to is healthy (i.e. producing a LO on CF198).
231 User Alert 2 R Control Flag 199 = 1 - CF199 has been connected to something by the user – ensure that
whatever it is connected to is healthy (i.e. producing a LO on CF199).
232 User Alert 3 R Control Flag 200 = 1 - CF200 has been connected to something by the user – ensure that
whatever it is connected to is healthy (i.e. producing a LO on CF200).
233 User Alert 4 R Control Flag 201 = 1 - CF201 has been connected to something by the user – ensure that
whatever it is connected to is healthy (i.e. producing a LO on CF201).
234 User Alert 5 R Control Flag 202 = 1 - CF202 has been connected to something by the user – ensure that
whatever it is connected to is healthy (i.e. producing a LO on CF202).
235 User Alert 6 R Control Flag 203 = 1 - CF203 has been connected to something by the user – ensure that
whatever it is connected to is healthy (i.e. producing a LO on CF203).
236 User Alert 7 R Control Flag 204 = 1 - CF204 has been connected to something by the user – ensure that
whatever it is connected to is healthy (i.e. producing a LO on CF204).
237 User Alert 8 R Control Flag 205 = 1 - CF205 has been connected to something by the user – ensure that
whatever it is connected to is healthy (i.e. producing a LO on CF205).
238 User Alert 9 R Control Flag 206 = 1 - CF206 has been connected to something by the user – ensure that
whatever it is connected to is healthy (i.e. producing a LO on CF206).
239 User Alert 10 R Control Flag 207 = 1 - CF207 has been connected to something by the user – ensure that
whatever it is connected to is healthy (i.e. producing a LO on CF207).
240 Delta 1 DIB 5v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
241 Delta 1 DIB +15v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
242 Delta 1 DIB -15v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
243 Delta 1 DIB Fan Fail R Speed feedback failure from capacitor fan for this Delta. - Faulty, blocked or jammed capacitor fan. If no fan is present or
required, is the jumper link, TP14, on the Delta DIB in the correct
position to disable the fan trip detection?
244 Delta 1 DIB Over Freq. U R Erroneous PWM pulses have been detected by the DIB, on - Incorrect screening of ribbons between controller and DIB. Screen is
this phase, resulting in PWM frequency too high. not connected to metalwork.
245 Delta 1 DIB Over Freq. V R As Trip 244. - As Trip 244.
246 Delta 1 DIB Over Freq. W R As Trip 244. - As Trip 244.
247 Delta 1 DIB Td Error U R Erroneous PWM pulses have been detected by the DIB, on - Incorrect screening of ribbons between controller and DIB. Screen is
this phase, resulting upper/lower dead-time violation not connected to metalwork.
commands.
248 Delta 1 DIB Td Error V R As Trip 247. - As Trip 247.
249 Delta 1 DIB Td Error W R As Trip 247. - As Trip 247.
250 Delta 2 DIB 5v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
251 Delta 2 DIB +15v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
252 Delta 2 DIB -15v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
253 Delta 2 DIB Fan Fail R Speed feedback failure from capacitor fan for this Delta. - Faulty, blocked or jammed capacitor fan. If no fan is present or
required, is the jumper link, TP14, on the Delta DIB in the correct
position to disable the fan trip detection?
254 Delta 2 DIB Over Freq. U R Erroneous PWM pulses have been detected by the DIB, on - Incorrect screening of ribbons between controller and DIB. Screen is
this phase, resulting in PWM frequency too high. not connected to metalwork.
255 Delta 2 DIB Over Freq. V R As Trip 244. - As Trip 244.
256 Delta 2 DIB Over Freq. W R As Trip 244. - As Trip 244.
257 Delta 2 DIB Td Error U R Erroneous PWM pulses have been detected by the DIB, on - Incorrect screening of ribbons between controller and DIB. Screen is
this phase, resulting upper/lower dead-time violation not connected to metalwork.
commands.
258 Delta 2 DIB Td Error V R As Trip 247. - As Trip 247.
259 Delta 2 DIB Td Error W R As Trip 247. - As Trip 247.

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-15
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

Table 9-3 Trip Fault Codes

Fault Name Class Description Parameter No. What can cause a trip Remarks
Code to enable
Auto-reset
260 Delta 3 DIB 5v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
261 Delta 3 DIB +15v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
262 Delta 3 DIB -15v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
263 Delta 3 DIB Fan Fail R Speed feedback failure from capacitor fan for this Delta. - Faulty, blocked or jammed capacitor fan. If no fan is present or
required, is the jumper link, TP14, on the Delta DIB in the correct
position to disable the fan trip detection?
264 Delta 3 DIB Over Freq. U R Erroneous PWM pulses have been detected by the DIB, on - Incorrect screening of ribbons between controller and DIB. Screen is
this phase, resulting in PWM frequency too high. not connected to metalwork.
265 Delta 3 DIB Over Freq. V R As Trip 244. - As Trip 244.
266 Delta 3 DIB Over Freq. W R As Trip 244. - As Trip 244.
267 Delta 3 DIB Td Error U R Erroneous PWM pulses have been detected by the DIB, on - Incorrect screening of ribbons between controller and DIB. Screen is
this phase, resulting upper/lower dead-time violation not connected to metalwork.
commands.
268 Delta 3 DIB Td Error V R As Trip 247. - As Trip 247.
269 Delta 3 DIB Td Error W R As Trip 247. - As Trip 247.
270 Delta 4 DIB 5v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
271 Delta 4 DIB +15v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
272 Delta 4 DIB -15v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
273 Delta 4 DIB Fan Fail R Speed feedback failure from capacitor fan for this Delta. - Faulty, blocked or jammed capacitor fan. If no fan is present or
required, is the jumper link, TP14, on the Delta DIB in the correct
position to disable the fan trip detection?
274 Delta 4 DIB Over Freq. U R Erroneous PWM pulses have been detected by the DIB, on - Incorrect screening of ribbons between controller and DIB. Screen is
this phase, resulting in PWM frequency too high. not connected to metalwork.
275 Delta 4 DIB Over Freq. V R As Trip 244. - As Trip 244.
276 Delta 4 DIB Over Freq. W R As Trip 244. - As Trip 244.
277 Delta 4 DIB Td Error U R Erroneous PWM pulses have been detected by the DIB, on - Incorrect screening of ribbons between controller and DIB. Screen is
this phase, resulting upper/lower dead-time violation not connected to metalwork.
commands.
278 Delta 4 DIB Td Error V R As Trip 247. - As Trip 247.
279 Delta 4 DIB Td Error W R As Trip 247. - As Trip 247.
280 Delta 5 DIB 5v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
281 Delta 5 DIB +15v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
282 Delta 5 DIB -15v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
283 Delta 5 DIB Fan Fail R Speed feedback failure from capacitor fan for this Delta. - Faulty, blocked or jammed capacitor fan. If no fan is present or
required, is the jumper link, TP14, on the Delta DIB in the correct
position to disable the fan trip detection?
284 Delta 5 DIB Over Freq. U R Erroneous PWM pulses have been detected by the DIB, on - Incorrect screening of ribbons between controller and DIB. Screen is
this phase, resulting in PWM frequency too high. not connected to metalwork.
285 Delta 5 DIB Over Freq. V R As Trip 244. - As Trip 244.
286 Delta 5 DIB Over Freq. W R As Trip 244. - As Trip 244.
287 Delta 5 DIB Td Error U R Erroneous PWM pulses have been detected by the DIB, on - Incorrect screening of ribbons between controller and DIB. Screen is
this phase, resulting upper/lower dead-time violation not connected to metalwork.
commands.
288 Delta 5 DIB Td Error V R As Trip 247. - As Trip 247.
289 Delta 5 DIB Td Error W R As Trip 247. - As Trip 247.
290 Delta 6 DIB 5v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
291 Delta 6 DIB +15v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.
292 Delta 6 DIB -15v Fail R Internal power supply failure on Delta DIB. - Faulty SMPS. Fault DIB.

Page 9-16 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

Table 9-3 Trip Fault Codes

Fault Name Class Description Parameter No. What can cause a trip Remarks
Code to enable
Auto-reset
293 Delta 6 DIB Fan Fail R Speed feedback failure from capacitor fan for this Delta. - Faulty, blocked or jammed capacitor fan. If no fan is present or
required, is the jumper link, TP14, on the Delta DIB in the correct
position to disable the fan trip detection?
294 Delta 6 DIB Over Freq. U R Erroneous PWM pulses have been detected by the DIB, on - Incorrect screening of ribbons between controller and DIB. Screen is
this phase, resulting in PWM frequency too high. not connected to metalwork.
295 Delta 6 DIB Over Freq. V R As Trip 244. - As Trip 244.
296 Delta 6 DIB Over Freq. W R As Trip 244. - As Trip 244.
297 Delta 6 DIB Td Error U R Erroneous PWM pulses have been detected by the DIB, on - Incorrect screening of ribbons between controller and DIB. Screen is
this phase, resulting upper/lower dead-time violation not connected to metalwork.
commands.
298 Delta 6 DIB Td Error V R As Trip 247. - As Trip 247.
299 Delta 6 DIB Td Error W R As Trip 247. - As Trip 247.

Notes:
1. Also refer to 6.11.2. Temperature Feedback – Parameters P11.04 to P11.14.
2. A SkiiP® is an integrated assembly of IGBTs.
3. ∗ These faults are hardware generated in the SkiiP® Transistor Module.
4. For any DELTA SkiiP® Trip Fault Code, when the DELTA CDC is operating from 24 V auxiliaries, all DELTA SkiiP® s will report faulty because they are without mains power.

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-17
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 9-18 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

9.6 Using the HELP Key

If the drive trips, get information on the trip by pressing ? .
A screen appears, giving four choices as shown at Figure 9-1.

PX.XX
Continue with help on
selected parameter.
See Section 4.4.3 for
1. PARAMETER HELP examples.

2. DISPLAY TRIPS P10.10

(Information about the
3. ATTEMPT RESET most recent trip.)
4. BACK TO PARAMETER

RETURN WITH NO
FURTHER HELP.
PX.XX
RESET ATTEMPT FAIL xxxxxx xx xxxx x
(Trip still present) =xx xxx

Figure 9-1 Help Screen for Trips

PRESS
1 Allows the user to view parameter help when a trip is present.
2 Displays parameter P10.10 – gives information about the trip.
3 Attempts to reset the trip. If the attempt fails, this screen re-appears.
4 Returns the parameter being viewed before ? was pressed, with no further help.
If the drive shows a Warning, get information on the warning by pressing ? .
The HELP system works as described for trips, except that P10.00 displays the most recent
Warning, as at Figure 9-2.

P10.00
(INFORMATION ABOUT
THE MOST RECENT
1. PARAMETER WARNING)
2. DISPLAY WARNS
3. BACK TO PARAMETER

Figure 9-2 Display of the Most Recent warning

9.7 History Log

The History Log is a user-defined record of the performance of the drive over a period of time.
The method of setting up a History Log is described at 6.26 (Menu 26).
9.7.1 Playing Back the History Log
To read a sample from the History Log:
1. Set the sample number required in P27.00. (The sample number applies to all ten history
channels.)

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-19
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

2. Select the required history channel and read the value. (The meaning of this value will
depend on how the History Log is configured.)
To read other samples in the selected history channel record, press , then press
or on the Navigation key to scroll through all the values in the record.
To exit this mode, press ESC .
Relevant Parameters are:
P27.00 - History Display Sample Number
Contains the sample that is displayed when the History Log (P27.01 to P27.10) is interrogated.
Allowed values are: 0 to 99 (sample number)
This sample number can be set by selecting and writing to P27.00 in the usual way or it can
be incremented and decremented by pressing and on the Navigation key while a
history record is displayed. This provides a convenient method of scrolling through all the
samples in a record.
P27.01 - History Channel 1 Playback Data
P27.02 - History Channel 2 Playback Data
P27.03 - History Channel 3 Playback Data
P27.04 - History Channel 4 Playback Data
P27.05 - History Channel 5 Playback Data
P27.06 - History Channel 6 Playback Data
P27.07 - History Channel 7 Playback Data
P27.08 - History Channel 8 Playback Data
P27.09 - History Channel 9 Playback Data
P27.10 - History Channel 10 Playback Data
P27.11 - Single Element Playback Channel 1 Data
P27.12 - Single Element Playback Channel 2 Data
These parameters each contain up to 100 samples of history data. When a history channel is
interrogated, the sample number displayed is determined by the value in P27.00 (for P27.01 to
P27.10) and in P26.28, P26.29 for single element channels.
The meaning of the data display for each sample is determined by the configuration defined in
P26.01 to P26.20, or in P26.28 and P26.29 for the single element channels.

9.8 Diagnostic Hints

Refer to Table 9-4 for helpful hints on fault diagnosis. These hints do vary for each mode of
drive operation and so each separate product manual includes a table of diagnostic hints
specific to the particular product. However, Table 9-4 includes a composite list of the hints for
all product operating modes. The mode is highlighted in the ‘Problem’ column of the table.
The diagnostic hints are aimed mainly at the DEFAULT drive, to help with problems which
may be experienced while working with this manual.
Table 9-4 Diagnostic Hints

Problem Possible solution

All: Healthy LED is not lit Is the plant "INTERLOCK" connected? Refer to 9.4 in this manual and the
and Tripped LED is lit. Wiring Diagram (for Inputs/Outputs) shown in the relevant manual.
All: Drive/SFE failure after The drive/SFE has correctly carried out self-protection procedures after frequent
frequent switching on & off. switching on and off in short period of time – specification is no more than 3 times in
any 10 minutes and not more than 10 times in one hour. Replace pre-charge fuses;
see ‘Spare Parts’ in relevant manual.
All except SFE: The The drive/SFE must be in "Keypad control" (i.e. Local control). Check that
drive/SFE will not run DIGIN 4 is open. Use a DVM or view P11.21. DIGIN 4 is connected to CF116
from Keypad. that selects local/remote.
All: The drive/SFE will not The drive/SFE must be in "Remote control". Check that DIGIN 4 is closed, use
run from the terminals. a DVM or view P11.21. DIGIN 4 is connected to CF116 that selects
local/remote (or Keypad/remote for SFE).
Also for AEM Machine Bridge check that the “SFE Running” output is not
inhibiting the “STOP” input on DIGIN 1.

Page 9-20 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

Table 9-4 Diagnostic Hints

Problem Possible solution

SFE: The SFE will not run LCN feedback signal LCN AUX missing:
from either Keypad or
• Check line contactor feedback wiring to TB3/6.
terminals, and displays
Warning 136 (CF25/LCN • Check that LCN has closed.
feedback loss) If the LCN has not closed:
• Check LCN coil supply voltage.
• Check wiring to TB7.
• Check that DC link volts (P51.00) is greater than pre-charge threshold (P52.17).
SFE: Trip code 96 (Aux SFE is not detecting the correct phase displacement on its auxiliary terminals:
phase loss) is displayed
• Check wiring to AUX R, AUX S, AUX T Terminals.
and cannot be reset.
• Check pre-charge fuses; see “Spare Parts” in the AEM Getting Started
Manual (T2002).
All: All LEDs flashing This indicates a major software or hardware fault with the controller. Normal
software operation cannot continue. Refer to Diagnostics – Failure of Firmware.
All except SFE: The The default drive has 3 speed references programmed:
speed reference is not (a) Local (Keypad) reference value entered in P1.00
working. (b) Remote ANIN1, programmed to be 0 - 10V, view value in P11.36
(c) Remote ANIN2, programmed to be 4 - 20mA, view value in P11.37
• Monitor P9.00 whilst operating the required reference.
• To achieve Keypad reference, ensure DIGIN 4 is open.
• To achieve any Remote reference, ensure DIGIN 4 is closed.
• To select between Remote references ANIN1 and ANIN2, toggle DIGIN 5.
All: The analogue input The default setting for ANIN1 is 0 - 10 V (0 - 100 %) and the default for ANIN2
references are not is 4 - 20mA (20% - 100 %). The dipswitches (SW1) on the drive I/O board
functioning as expected. configure the inputs for current or voltage.
• Check the dipswitches against those shown at the Wiring Diagram (for
Inputs/Outputs) shown in the relevant manual.
• Ensure link TB6/3 to TB6/7 is connected when using the drive's 10.5 V
supply (TB6/9).
• Check the analogue input settings in P7.00 to P7.07 against default
settings.
• Check the values entering the analogue inputs in P7.03, P7.07 respectively.
All: The analogue outputs The default settings for ANOP1 & ANOP2 are 0 - 10 V, 0 - 100 %. The
are not functioning as dipswitches (SW1) on the I/O board should both be set for volts (see Wiring
expected. Diagram in relevant manual).
• Check dipswitches against those shown at Wiring Diagram in relevant manual.
• Check the analogue output settings in P7.17 to P7.26 against default settings.
• Check the values coming from the analogue outputs in P7.21, P7.26
respectively.
SFE: SFE trips on over • Check that the Auxiliary terminals (AUX R, AUX S, AUX T) are consistent
current or over volts when with the power terminals R/U, S/V and T/W, i.e. AUX R is wired to the same
‘run’ is attempted. phase of the supply as R/U etc.
• Check the wiring of ancillary components against the interconnection
diagram.
SFE: Trip Code 93 (Mains • Check wiring of ancillary components against the interconnection diagram.
Sync Fault) is displayed
• Is there excessive impedance in the mains supply to the SFE? (i.e. is the
when run is attempted.
mains supply fault level too small?). See performance data in the AEM
Getting Started Manual (T2002).
All except SFE: The drive is programmed at the factory to prevent itself tripping on over voltage
Deceleration ramps not trips. When an AC motor is decelerated, the motor generates voltage back to
being followed, seems to the drive DC Link; the amount of voltage depends on the speed of the
take longer than set. deceleration and the load inertia. If the time taken to stop the load is too long:
• Check the deceleration rates set in P1.23 or P6.02, P6.03 (repeated).
• A dynamic brake unit may need to be fitted to achieve the required time.

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-21
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

Table 9-4 Diagnostic Hints

Problem Possible solution

• Check the value set in P4.12 (P23.05) and ensure that it is sufficient (note
that –0.1 kW limit means “unlimited”). If not sufficient adjust it to the
dynamic brake resistor surge rating in kW.
• A small amount of Watts (an amount the drive alone can absorb) set in
P4.12 may be enough to solve the problem.
All except SFE: Motor This is known as “Wrongly Phased”. Check the motor phasing and check the
turns slowly and draws encoder connections. Refer to the Commissioning flowchart, in the relevant
excess current when in manual, which suggests tests that can be made to verify the encoder integrity.
Vector control with
encoder.
All except SFE: Drive will Although the CAL run should be done off load, for small motors with low inertia
not complete a it may help to keep the coupling on the motor shaft. Also check the accuracy of
CALIBRATION run. the basic motor data entered, especially Mag current, it needs to be in the right
order of magnitude.
All except SFE: Not • Check P21.11, this is the measured COLD value of Rr determined by the
enough torque available CAL run. Check P12.15, this is the calculated HOT value of Rr. The value of
after a calibration run. P12.15 ≅ 1.4 x P12.11. If this is not true simply edit P12.15 = 1.4 x P12.11.
VECTOR MODES ONLY.
• Check P12.02, the value of mains voltage, then check the value of P11.49,
this is maximum torque the drive has calculated to be available at the motor.
• Check P8.00 to P8.03. Values greater than P11.49 will be unattainable.
• Try enabling Auto Temperature Compensation. Set P12.06 = 1. Increase
P12.07 to increase the rate of auto-compensation to achieve required
torque.
AEM Machine Bridge Follow the machine bridge Guided Commissioning procedure in the AEM
Warnings 134 and 136 Getting Started Manual (T2002) Section 5B.4 to choose the correct control
displayed, trips on code 94 mode.
when “RUN” is pressed.

9.8.1 Failure of Drive Firmware

Should a fault develop in the drive firmware, normal software operation will stop. If a Keypad is
plugged in it will display as Figure 9-3.

FIRMWARE INTEGRITY
FAILURE
(E000)
SEE USER MANUAL

Figure 9-3 Firmware Integrity Failure

When the ‘Firmware Integrity Failure’ statement is displayed all four LEDs on the drive will
flash together. The drive is equipped with a special firmware ‘net’ that captures the exact state
of the drive memory and processor execution state. This data is extremely useful to support
and diagnose the reason why the drive firmware crashed.
The memory contents must be uploaded to a file while the drive is displaying a firmware
integrity failure, otherwise the captured data will be lost. It will take about 10 minutes to
complete the file. The file may be compressed with PkZip/WinZip if required.
To assist Converteam personnel in diagnosing the cause of the software malfunction the memory
contents of the drive can be uploaded to a pc, as detailed at 9.8.2, and sent to Converteam at the
address shown at the end of this manual.

Page 9-22 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

9.8.2 Uploading the Failed Firmware to a PC

The memory contents can be uploaded to a pc running either Windows 3.1 or 3.11 terminal
emulation or Windows 95, NT4, 2000 or XP terminal emulation. Use of a pc with any of these
terminal emulations is now described.
The hardware required to carry out the file upload is:
(a) A pc running any of Windows 3.1, 3.11, 95 or NT4 terminal emulation;
(b) Terminal emulation program (3.1 or 3.11) or Hyper terminal (Windows ’95, NT4,
2000 or XP) accessories;
(c) RS 232 lead e.g. a GDS1009-4001.
Using a PC with Windows 3.1 or 3.11 Terminal Emulation
• Start Windows Terminal.
• From Settings, choose Communications.
• In the dialogue, change the baud rate to 9600; change the flow control to Xon/Xoff. All the
other items can be left at default (8 data, 1 stop, No parity), choose a communications port
at this point.
• Check that in Settings - Emulation, it is at its default = VT-100 [ANSI].
• From Transfers, choose Receive text file.
• Name the file.
• Ensure the ALSPA MV3000e RS232 port is connected to the PC, via the RS232 lead.
• A capital "G", will start the E000 memory contents upload.
• The upload takes about 10 minutes.
• Press Stop to terminate the text transfer when complete, this saves the file.
• After the upload, pressing the "." key will re-start the MV3000e firmware.
• Return the file to Converteam as described at 9.8.1.
• The Terminal connection can be saved as "MV3000e" for next time.

Using a PC with Windows 95, NT4, 2000 or XP Terminal Emulation

• Start Windows Hyper Terminal.
• Follow the "wizard" as presented.
• Name the new connection MV3000e, and choose an icon.
• Choose a comm. port.
• Set communications parameters to 9600 Baud, no parity, 1 stop, Xon/Xoff control.
• Select File - Properties, and from the dialogue, choose the settings tab. Set the
emulation to VT100.
• Ensure the MV3000e RS232 port is connected to the pc, via the RS232 lead.
• From Transfer, choose Capture Text.
• Name the file.
• A capital "G”, will start the E000 memory contents upload.
• The upload takes about 10 minutes.
• Press Stop to terminate the text capture when complete, this saves the file.
• After the upload, pressing the "." key will re-start the MV3000e firmware.
• Return the file to Converteam as described at 9.8.1.

Note:

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-23
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

If any problems occur when setting the communication with the “Wizard” it may be worthwhile cancelling
the “Wizard” and setting the VT100 emulation before the Baud rate etc. produced a working system

9.9 Expected Trip Codes when CDC is Powered from Auxiliary 28 V Input
9.9.1 Introduction
The MicroCubicleTM CDC is a self contained Printed Circuit Board (PCB), which contains
circuits for the controller, the I/O, the power interfaces; connection to Fieldbus boards and an
Auxiliary 28V power supply. When powering the MicroCubicleTM CDC from 28V, it is able to
determine the size of the drive it is mounted in, by reading vital personality information from an
E2PROM mounted on a Switched Mode Power Supply (SMPS) PCB. When the auxiliary 28V
is applied, a small part of the SMPS board is also powered up which allows this to happen.
The MicroCubicleTM CDC, therefore, knows what type and size of drive it is in, and that affects
the trips that it will display as shown at Table 9-5.
Table 9-5 Expected Trip Codes when Operating a MicroCubicleTM CDC from 28 V Auxiliaries

Trip code Meaning Reason

4 Under voltage The mains power is off, so the DC link is not
established
6 Over-temperature
9, 11, 13 Hardware Over-temperature U,V,W The SkiiP® circuits are not powered up.
Some or all trips may show, depending on the
7, 8, 10, 12 Instantaneous Overcurrent, or
size of the MicroCubicleTM Drive.
Instantaneous Overcurrent U,V,W

9.9.2 Trip Fault Codes Specific to Internal Dynamic Brakes

Assuming that the Dynamic Brake has been identified and the MicroCubicleTM drive then
reverts to 28 V operation after the main AC has been removed, the following trip codes can be
expected, depending on the type of internal DB:
• For Frame Sizes 3 and 4 DBs the internal DB will be tripped on trip 151 DB TRIP 26
under temperature.
• For Frame Sizes 6 and 7 DBs the codes at Table 9-6 apply.
Table 9-6 Expected Trip Codes for Internal (to a MicroCubicleTM) Dynamic Brakes for Frame
Size 6 and Frame Size 7 Drives

Trip code Meaning Reason

®
151 DB trip The SKiiP circuits are not powered up.
152 DB Hardware Over-temperature Some or all trips may show, depending on the
size of the MicroCubicleTM Drive.

9.9.3 DELTA CDC

The DELTA CDC is a different construction to the MicroCubicleTM CDC. The different functions
have been separated to allow the DELTA CDC to be connected to different interfaces for
future product enhancements. The CDC and a Power Interface Board (PIB) – common for the
whole DELTA range – is housed in a metal container. Any optional Fieldbus boards will also be
contained within this container. The I/O has been separated. To run a DELTA CDC on 28 V,
apply the 28 V to TB2 on the External I/O. The DELTA CDC determines drive size and type
from vital personality information, which is distributed around the DELTA System on different
PCBs. (The DELTA CDC can only read the drive size information when powered via the main
SMPS). In summary:
(1) The DELTA Power Interface Board (DELTA PIB) informs the DELTA CDC that the drive
is a DELTA drive. The number of DELTAs is determined by the number of connections
made to the ribbon headers on the PIB (a maximum of 6), this information is placed into
P99.00.
(2) The DELTA Interface board (DELTA DIB) is mounted on the DELTA transistor bridge
and connects to the IGBT SKiiP® s. This PCB informs the CDC about the current rating
of the DELTA, connected to the PIB. The drive nominal current is then reported in
P99.05.

Page 9-24 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

(3) The DELTA Switched Mode Power Supply (DELTA SMPS) informs the DELTA CDC of
the voltage rating of the DELTA, and is used to set the Dynamic Brake voltage threshold
in P23.04.
When all the information is collected the DELTA CDC has a complete picture of the DELTA
system, automatically.
When powered from 28 V, the DELTA CDC can only power up the PIB board, thus it only
knows how many DELTAs there are, so P99.00 is correct. The nominal current will report
1000 A, a mid value (not the actual rating of the DELTA). If the DELTA CDC is not connected
to any DELTAs, it will still report that 1 DELTA is connected. When programming is completed
and the mains power is applied, then the full system configuration can be determined and it
will be different from the “assumed” configuration whilst powered from 28 V. Figure 9-4 shows
the DELTA Configuration and the state of the User Edits at each stage. Table 9-7 shows the
expected Trip Fault Codes when operating the DELTA CDC from 28 V auxiliaries.
In conclusion, any time the controller is powered from 28 V, then re-connected to the mains
power, the user edits will be retained, even if the actual DELTA configuration has changed in
the meantime.
See 10.6 for further information on powering a DELTA Controller from an auxiliary 28V.

Operate from 28V DELTA CDC assumes a

DELTA Configuration

24 V removed USER edits saved at power off

Mains power applied

DELTA CDC now determines USER edits retained

the full Configuration

Mains power removed USER edits saved at power off

Add or remove a DELTA

Mains power re-applied

DELTA CDC now determines USER edits retained,

the New Configuration

Mains power removed USER edits saved at power off

Add or remove a DELTA

Operate from 28V

DELTA CDC assumes a

DELTA Configuration

28 V removed USER edits saved at power off

Mains power re-applied DELTA CDC now determines USER edits retained
the New Configuration

Figure 9-4 DELTA Configuration showing the state of User Edits

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-25
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

Table 9-7 Expected Trip Fault Codes when operating a DELTA CDC from 28 V Auxiliaries

Trip code Meaning Reason

4 Under voltage The mains power is off, so the DC link is not
established.
183, 185 ...etc Unidentified SMPS 1, 2, ... The DELTA CDC is unable to read the
2
E PROM on the DELTA SMPS when powered
from 28 V.
182, 184 Unidentified DELTA 1, 2.… The DELTA CDC is unable to read the
2
E PROM on the DELTA DIB when powered
from 28 V.
Any DELTA All DELTA SKiiP®s will report in Without mains power the DELTA SKiiP®s will
SKiiP® Trip faulty all report in as faulty
code

9.10 Product Identity Record

9.10.1 Introduction
The ALSPA MV3000e product has been designed to minimise the number of parts required to
be held for spares. All support staff should be made aware of the following:
(a) Drive identity is not held in the drive controller, but distributed around the drive;
(b) A serial EEPROM on a printed circuit board contains data relating to the current and
voltage rating of the respective MicroCubicleTM or DELTA Module;
(c) The EEPROM data is referred to as the ‘Product Identity Record’;
(d) Because of the distribution of the drive identity the CDC and the SMPS must never be
removed from the drive together or the Product Identity Record will be lost and will have
to be re-entered manually.
9.10.2 Product Identity
The EEPROM includes all the details about the drive in which it is located. It is a collection of
43 items of information stored in the EEPROM during drive/DELTA test when manufactured.
The details are unique to the drive or DELTA product and are used by the CDC to set internal
drive size dependent parameters, set up feedback scaling and protect the power bridges.
9.10.3 Where the Drive Identity is Stored

In a MicroCubicleTM product
In a MicroCubicleTM product the whole of the Product Identity Record is stored on the SMPS
board. The EEPROM circuit is powered from the CDC power supply, so when the 28 V
auxiliaries are applied to the CDC, the EEPROM data can be read, so a faulty SMPS is
unlikely to prevent the identity from being recovered.

In a DELTA System
A DELTA System has to behave as a complete drive, but DELTA is made up of a number of
separate components, and so the identity has to be spread between these components. The
DELTA SMPS stores voltage grade information about itself and the DELTA Interface Board
(DIB) stores voltage grade information about the DELTA Module and DELTA rating
information. All of the DELTAs have SMPS and DIB boards. The 24 V supply cannot power the
EEPROMS on the DELTA modules, so mains power has to be applied to a DELTA drive before
automatic configuration can take place. The EEPROM data stored in the product is summarised
at Table 9-8.
If the Identity of a drive is lost, or invalid, or from a unit of a different type, then the CDC will
set itself up incorrectly and the drive will not operate correctly, this data is therefore vital and
must not be corrupted or lost at any time.

Page 9-26 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 9. Diagnostics.

Table 9-8 Summary of EEPROM Data Stored in MV3000e Products

Location of EEPROM Contents of PCB Specific Product Identity Record

Record

SMPS • Calibration data about In a MicroCubicleTM Drive

that specific PCB which
SMPS also contains the
removes the need for
TM product identity record, put
In MicroCubicle or DELTA mechanical
in during manufacture.
drives potentiometers to scale
feedback circuits. In a DELTA
• PCB serial number and This part of the EEPROM is
combination number. left empty during test.
• Voltage grade
information.
DELTA Interface Board DIB) • Calibration data about In a MicroCubicleTM Drive
that specific PCB which
DELTA drives only There is no DIB fitted in a
removes the need for
MicroCubicleTM drive.
mechanical
potentiometers to scale In a DELTA
feedback circuits.
The DIB contains the
• PCB serial number and product identity record, put
combination number. in during manufacture.

9.10.4 Why is the identity copied to the CDC?

There are two major reasons why the data need to be copied into the CDC:
(a) So that changes to the drive hardware can be identified;
(b) So that it can be put back into the SMPS or the DIB if the board is replaced with a ‘blank’
spare from the factory, or if it is replaced by one removed from another drive.
9.10.5 How is the Drive Identity used and kept safe?
When the drive powers up, this information is read by the CDC and is generally used as
follows:
(a) The calibration data is read and used to scale feedback signals;
(b) The voltage grade data sets the Under voltage trip level and Dynamic Brake threshold
voltage (P23.04);
(c) The Product Identity Record Information allows protection of the drives silicon and allows
parameters like P99.05 “Drive Nominal Current” to be set.

Issue 06/06 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 9-27
9. Diagnostics. ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 9-28 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 10. Application Notes

10 Application Notes

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page

10.1 Application Note for Proportional Dynamic Braking .................................................................... 10-3

10.1.1 What is it and why do we want it? ..................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.2 System Features ............................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.3 How it Works ..................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.4 Operating Modes ............................................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.5 Proportional DB Control using the Output Bridge ............................................................. 10-6
10.1.6 Application Note for P20.00 when used with Dynamic Braking Proportional Control ....... 10-7
10.1.7 Application Notes for Commissioning................................................................................ 10-7
10.2 Application Note for MODBUS RTU ............................................................................................ 10-8
10.3 Application Note for Current Control Failure (Trip Fault Code 56) – Vector Control Mode......... 10-8
10.4 Application Note for Current Imbalance (Trip Fault Code 28) – Frequency Control Only........... 10-8
10.5 Application Note for Operation of the Temperature Trips............................................................ 10-9
10.5.1 Trip Fault Code 6 – Over-temperature (Software) ............................................................ 10-9
10.5.2 Trip Fault Codes 9, 11, 13 – Hardware Over-temperatures in MicroCubicle™ Drives .... 10-9
10.5.3 Trip Fault Code 26 – Under-temperature .......................................................................... 10-9
10.5.4 Trip Fault Codes 32, 34, 36 … 154, 156, 158 etc. – DELTA 1 to 6 Over-temperature on U,
V, W Phases .................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.5.5 Trip Fault Codes 151 & 152 – DB Trip and DB Hardware Over-temperature Trip............ 10-9
10.6 Application Note for Additional Auxiliary 28v DC Powering features for ALSPA MV3000 DELTA
systems and MicroCubicle™ Drives- Version 8.00 and subsequent Firmware issues. .......................... 10-10
10.6.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.6.2 Versions of Firmware before Version 8.00 ...................................................................... 10-10
10.6.3 Versions of Firmware Version 8.00 and later .................................................................. 10-10
10.7 Application Notes for Position Reference.................................................................................. 10-12
10.8 Application Note for Rr Tracker ................................................................................................. 10-12
10.8.1 What the Rr Tracker Does............................................................................................... 10-12
10.8.2 Using the Rr Tracker ....................................................................................................... 10-13
10.9 Application Note for Over Modulation........................................................................................ 10-14
10.9.1 Calculation of the 5th harmonic current in the machine. .................................................. 10-15
10.10 Application Note for Active Current Sharing Error Diagnosis.................................................... 10-15
10.10.1 What can cause Active Sharing Errors?........................................................................ 10-15
10.10.2 Recommendations......................................................................................................... 10-15
10.10.3 Procedure for diagnosing active sharing error cause.................................................... 10-15
10.10.4 Two Delta Systems........................................................................................................ 10-17
10.10.5 What to do if impedance mismatch diagnosed.............................................................. 10-18
10.10.6 V10.00 issues. ............................................................................................................... 10-18
10.10.7 Use of HEME clamp on current probes ......................................................................... 10-19
10.10.8 How to Disable Active Sharing ...................................................................................... 10-19

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 10-1
10. Application Notes ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 10-2 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 10. Application Notes

10.1 Application Note for Proportional Dynamic Braking

The Proportional Dynamic Braking feature provided in MV3000e firmware version 6.00
onwards provides a means of dissipating power from the DC link in a smooth and precisely
controlled manner.
This Application Note explains Proportional Dynamic Braking and provides information on
using the feature in several types of drive system. A revised list of dynamic braking (DB)
parameters is included and a procedure for defining braking resistor requirements is
provided.
10.1.1 What is it and why do we want it?
The normal method of controlling the DC link voltage by use of a DB unit and braking
resistor maintains the DC link voltage below a given threshold by switching the DB unit fully
on if the threshold is exceeded. This is referred to as Threshold Control. Proportional
Dynamic Braking provides controlled application of a dynamic brake below the threshold,
proportional to a user defined input, yet retains the basic requirement to switch fully on if the
voltage threshold is exceeded. This system is therefore ideal for:
• Precisely controlled braking of machinery.
• The damping of DC link oscillations, which may occur in a small number of common
DC link schemes where load fluctuations could cause instability of the DC link voltage.
Before implementing this feature the user is recommended to consult Converteam.
10.1.2 System Features
Proportional dynamic braking can be used with MicroCubicle™ drives with internal DB units
fitted, and with DELTA systems where one or more DELTA modules can be configured as a
dynamic brake.
Features of the system are:
• Proportional control of the power being taken from the DC link
• Simple, open loop reference of modulation, 100% reference = 100% modulation
• Reference source includes DDM™ (keypad), analogue inputs, Fieldbus (FIP,
PROFIBUS), RS232/RS485, CAN, parameter pointer
• Scaling for analogue input sources
10.1.3 How it Works
Proportional dynamic braking continuously controls the power dissipated from the DC link by
using pulse width modulation (PWM) techniques to drive the braking resistor in response to
a user-defined modulation demand signal. This results in the braking resistor being gated on
for a period proportional to the product of the PWM period and the modulation demand.
The modulation signal may be generated externally by an analogue input or it may be
derived internally from, for example, the DC link voltage. Parameters in Menu 23 allow
braking to be ramped as required and enable limits to be set.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 10-3
10. Application Notes ALSPA MV3000e

Motor Control
1 to 4
0

Speed Motor 3 phase O/P

Reference Control PWM Bridge
Selection
Speed Ramp

P99.01
Control 1 to 4 = Motor control modes
0 = DB control mode
Mode

Proportional Braking Control DB P23.21

PWM DB Current
P23.14 P23.16 P23.18
DB Power
DB Ref. Source DB Reference DB Demand P23.22

Reference
Selection
P23.19
Limit DB Ramp DB O/P 1
21
Select 0
P23.15 Ramp Time
Max DB P23.17
Modulation 1
DB Port DB Port
DB Threshold Control 0 PWM on CDC

P23.12
P23.10 Vref Source
V Reference
DB Mode P23.13
Vdc
Vdc Source
An1 X >
Selection
=
An2 X 0%
< 100%
Comparator
= Monitoring
Scale P23.11 Point

DB
P23.04
Threshold

Figure 10-1 Proportional dynamic braking - control block diagram

The system is shown in a simple control block diagram at Figure 10-1 and Section 7 Control
Diagrams Sheet 2, where the motor control circuits are included to show that in DELTA
systems the output bridge can be driven either by motor control circuits or by dynamic
braking signals, as selected by the user.

10.1.3.1 Proportional Braking Control

The proportional braking demand (DB Demand) is generated from a reference source
selected by P23.14. A full listing of available sources is shown in Menu 23; pointer 28 is
included to allow selection of a user-defined reference input from any suitable parameter.
P23.15 applies limits to this signal, between 0 and 100%, and a DB ramp is then generated
with P23.17 setting the ramp duration between 0 and 1000 ms to achieve the limit set in
P23.15. The ramp setting is updated every 5 ms, so any duration setting between 0 and 5
ms is ignored.
Normally the resulting DB Demand output (P23.18) is routed to the PWM circuits for both the
output bridge and the DB unit, for use by either dynamic braking method as required.

10.1.3.2 Threshold Protection

A reference voltage selected from either the DC link voltage or a scaled analogue input is
compared with a user defined DB Threshold reference set in P23.04. If the selected
reference voltage exceeds the DB Threshold, the comparator selects the Max DB
Modulation input (P23.15) to generate a maximum DB Demand, overriding the proportional
braking demand.

Page 10-4 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 10. Application Notes

10.1.3.3 How it is Used

For MicroCubicle™ drives proportional braking uses an internal DB unit, connected via the
DB connector (port) PL9 on the CDC and driving an external braking resistor.
For DELTA systems proportional braking uses one or more dedicated DELTA modules
(output bridge) and a CDC configured for dynamic braking.

10.1.3.4 DB Control using the DB output connector on the CDC

This method is suitable for MicroCubicle™ drives having an internal DB unit fitted and
connected via the DB port PL9. It is not suitable for DELTA systems.
Referring to Figure 10-2, the drive is configured by P99.01 to run in one of the four "motor"
operating modes, as normal. Proportional braking is selected and set up using the relevant
parameters in Menu 23.
10.1.4 Operating Modes

10.1.4.1 Threshold Control

Threshold Control is the conventional method for a MicroCubicle™, controlling a DB unit and
braking resistor via the DB port (PL9) on the CDC. The DB on or off decision is taken every
400 µs and the DB is gated on or off for the complete 400µs period.
The switching rate of the braking resistor can be no greater than 1.25 kHz.
This mode is selected by setting P23.19 = 0 to enable the DB unit PWM circuits and setting
P23.13 = 0 to select Threshold Control.
See T1684 (ALSPA
MV3000 Dynamic
Braking Units) to select
braking resistor and cable

RESISTOR

For these modes, set parameters: MicroCubicleTM

P99.01 (Control Mode) = 1 through 4
(Motor Control)
P23.13 (DB Mode) = 1 (Proportional)
DB UNIT
= 0 (Threshold)
P23.19 (DB Output Select) = 0 (DB unit)
PL9
For ramps, limits, thresholds etc. see Table 1.

CDC

R U

S V
M
T W

Figure 10-2 Control of DB unit on MicroCubicle™ CDC connector PL9

10.1.4.2 Proportional DB Control using the DB connector PL9

This method uses the Proportional Control system previously described to gate the DB unit.
A modulation level is calculated for the DB gating signal; this results in the DB resistor being
gated on for a period that is proportional to the product of the PWM period and the
modulation demand.
The switching rate of the braking resistor is the same as the PWM frequency contained in
P35.00

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 10-5
10. Application Notes ALSPA MV3000e

This mode is selected by setting P23.19 = 0 to enable the DB unit PWM circuits and setting
P23.13 = 1 to select Proportional Control.
If the DB Threshold voltage (P23.04) is exceeded, the DB unit is driven by the Max DB
Modulation output (P23.15) from the DB Threshold Control circuit.
The drive HSO (High Speed Output) capability is not available in this mode because the
HSO timer is used in the DB control function. The value of P20.00 is forced to 1.
10.1.5 Proportional DB Control using the Output Bridge
This is the only method suitable for DELTA systems. One or more DELTA modules and a
second DELTA controller must be available to be used as a dynamic brake.
A DELTA module or Output Bridge can easily be used as a DB unit by connecting three
braking resistors of the same value and rating between the output terminals and the DC link.
Figure 10-3 shows a system with two DELTA modules and controllers, having output bridge
1/controller 1 configured to drive a motor and output bridge 2/controller 2 configured for
dynamic braking.
Output bridge 1 is configured to operate in a Motor Control mode by
setting P99.01 = 1, 2 3 or 4 as required.
Output bridge 2 is configured to operate in DB Control mode by setting P99.01 = 0, which
selects the DB PWM output to drive the output bridge. The DB PWM circuits are enabled by
setting P23.19 = 1.
A modulation level is calculated for the DB gating signal. This results in the DB gating being
enabled for a period that may be less than the PWM period.
The switching rate of the braking resistor is the same as the PWM frequency contained in
P35.00.
Motor Control Mode

set parameters:
P99.01 = 1 through 4
as required

CONTROLLER
1

DC+
R
OUTPUT
RECTIFIER
S BRIDGE DC BRIDGE
1
M
DC
T

DB Mode BRAKING
RESISTORS
set parameters:
P99.01 (Control Mode) = 0 (DB mode) DBR
P23.19 (DB Output Select) = 1 (Output bridge) A
OUTPUT
For ramps, limits, thresholds etc. see Table 1. BRIDGE DBR
C
2
CONTROLLER DBR B
2

Figure 10-3 Proportional Control using an Output Bridge

Page 10-6 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 10. Application Notes

Normal motor control modes are not available in this mode. If P99.01 is not set to 0 a
warning will be generated indicating that the DB is disabled.
Operation of the HSO facility is unaffected.
10.1.6 Application Note for P20.00 when used with Dynamic Braking Proportional Control
The High Speed Output (HSO) capability of Menu 20 is not available when the Dynamic
Brake Proportional Control mode of operation is used. Normally the HSO is used to transfer
the speed reference from one drive to another in the form of a clock frequency but this is not
available with Dynamic Braking Proportional Control because of the need to use the timer
normally used for HSO. Any attempt to configure P20.00 to a value other than 1 will be
prevented while a drive is in the Dynamic Braking Proportional Control mode of operation.
10.1.7 Application Notes for Commissioning
Read the Warnings and Cautions given at the beginning of Section 5 in Technical manual
T1684, before carrying out these commissioning instructions.

10.1.7.1 MicroCubicle™ Systems using the DB Output Connector PL9

This procedure assumes that the Drive and internal DB unit have been correctly configured
for Threshold dynamic braking as described in Section 5 of T1684.
Ensure that P99.01 (Mode Selector) is set to one of the four motor control modes, not to
Mode 0.
Carry out the procedure given in T1684 Section 5.2.3, configuring for Proportional braking
using the additional DB parameters P23.10 to P23.22 described in Section 6.23. Ensure that
the following parameters are set as shown:
P23.13 DB Control Mode = 1 (Proportional on DB port)
P23.19 DB Output Select = 0 (DB port)

10.1.7.2 DELTA Systems using an Output Bridge

DC Link +ve
DC+

OUTPUT
BRIDGE

DBR B

B
C
A

DBR A DBR C

DC
DC Link -ve

Figure 10-4 Output Bridge Connections

This procedure assumes that the DB output bridge(s) are connected to the DC link of a
serviceable DELTA system as shown in Figure 10-4, and are controlled by a separate
DELTA controller (controller 2) as shown in Figure 10-3.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 10-7
10. Application Notes ALSPA MV3000e

On controller 2 ensure that P99.01 (Mode Selector) is set to Mode 0 (DB Control), not to one
of the four motor control modes.
Carry out the procedure given in T1684 Section 5.2.3. Configure the parameters in Menu 23.
Ensure that the following parameters are set as shown:
P23.19 - DB Output Select = 1 (Output Bridge)

10.1.7.3 All Systems

When the relevant procedure (above) is complete, run the drive and check that on motor
deceleration, the rate of motor deceleration follows that requested.

10.2 Application Note for MODBUS RTU

The message structures show that the function required defines the length of message to be
sent by the master device. If the ALSPA MV3000e detects an end of frame gap before the
total expected message is received, message processing is reset and the ALSPA MV3000e
starts to look for the next message i.e. the received frame is flushed. The CRC word
included at the end of each message is generated in the same way as that generated for
ESP messages, i.e. the same algorithm is used.

10.3 Application Note for Current Control Failure (Trip Fault Code 56) – Vector
Control Mode
The current imbalance trip is not implemented when running the motor in vector control
(either with, or without, encoder). The equivalent trip to “current imbalance”, when running
in Vector Control is “Current Control Failure”. If the drive cannot control the ld and lq vector
currents to the desired values (as per the demands made from the output of the vector
control algorithms), then the drive issues a “Current Control Failure”. This inability to control
the currents could be caused by:
• A phase loss at the motor outputs;
• The main AC input voltage has dropped very low and the vector controller has not got
enough volts to generate the currents;
• The AC mains voltage has been programmed incorrectly (set too high) in P12.02;
• An encoder fault of some kind.

10.4 Application Note for Current Imbalance (Trip Fault Code 28) – Frequency
Control Only
In Frequency Control (VVVF), the drive employs a current imbalance trip. The drive
compares the magnitude of the three motor phases and if the magnitude of the current
imbalance is 20% of Drive Full Load Current (FLC) (P99.05) or more, then the drive will trip.
However, depending upon the circumstances, the drive may not always detect a phase
loss/imbalance. This Application Note provides more information about those conditions.
To prevent nuisance trips when starting large or possibly unstable motors, when the current
imbalance can actually be quite high legitimately, the current imbalance detection is disabled
below 5 Hz and this is generally invisible to the user. However, in certain conditions, the trip
may not detect properly. For example, if a phase is completely missing and the run button is
pressed, the current flowing to the motor could be high enough to reach current limit. In this
case, the drive will limit the output frequency, and this limit could be lower than 5 Hz, which
means the current imbalance trip would remain disabled. The drive may trip on Motor I²T or
Drive It, depending on the ratio of drive to motor sizes. If the drive has been told that the
motor has a separately excited fan, then the motor I²T may never operate and the drive
could continue to run the motor “single phasing” until the motor internal thermal protection
operates.
The larger the motor, the larger the “single phasing” current and the more likely that the
resultant current limit clamp would limit the output frequency below the 5 Hz point. The
factors which may cause the output frequency to limit below 5 Hz are many, but as soon as

Page 10-8 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 10. Application Notes

the output frequency rises above 5 Hz, then the trip will be enabled and the problem
successfully protected against.

10.5 Application Note for Operation of the Temperature Trips

There are two methods of temperature monitoring in the ALSPA MV3000e Drives, one for
the DELTA products and one for the MicroCubicleTM products. The drives use SKiiP®
technology for their power switching devices. These devices provide an analogue signal for
temperature feedback which is converted to °C by the software, and a signal which reports
that the SKiiP® is too hot (hardware temperature). The first signal is used by the drive
software to show temperature feedback from all of the main parts of the drive in Menu 11,
and in Menu 45. The other signal is used as a hardware protection for the SKiiP®
assemblies.
Application details for each of the temperature trips are now included.
10.5.1 Trip Fault Code 6 – Over-temperature (Software)
The drive software generates this trip when any of the items in the drive topology experience
a temperature in excess of the trip value associated with that item. Once this trip has
occurred the user should consult Menus 11 and 45 to determine which item is hot and hence
which item has caused the trip.
DELTA rectifier bridge thermostats would also be reported via this trip code, so if a rectifier
thermistor opened, the drive would trip with a Trip Fault Code 6, and consulting P11.08
would show that the rectifier had a high temperature.
10.5.2 Trip Fault Codes 9, 11, 13 – Hardware Over-temperatures in MicroCubicle™ Drives
These Trip Fault Codes are generated from the individual SKiiP® temperature monitoring
circuits. If a SKiiP® circuit reports a fault, then the relevant trip message is displayed. The
message is specific to the SKiiP® that is reporting the fault. For Frame Size 6 and Frame
Size 7, there is a SKiiP® per phase, for Frame Size 3 and Frame Size 4, there is one SKiiP®
for the whole of the power bridge, and in this case only the U Phase Trip Fault Code would
be reported.
The hardware temperature trips should be preceded by the Software trip (Trip Fault Code 6),
because the Software trip is set at a lower level.
10.5.3 Trip Fault Code 26 – Under-temperature
This is a Software generated trip; proceed as described for Trip Fault code 6.
10.5.4 Trip Fault Codes 32, 34, 36 … 154, 156, 158 etc. – DELTA 1 to 6 Over-temperature on U, V,
W Phases
These Trip Fault Codes are also generated from the internal temperature monitoring circuitry
on the SKiiP® modules, and in the DELTAs there is one SKiiP® per phase, so the trip codes
are quite specific. DELTAS 1 to DELTA 6 are plugged into PL2 to PL7 respectively on the
DELTA Controller.
The hardware temperature trips should be preceded by the Software trip (Trip Fault Code 6),
because the software trip is set at a lower level.
10.5.5 Trip Fault Codes 151 & 152 – DB Trip and DB Hardware Over-temperature Trip
Trip Fault Code 151 will be generated when the DB has experienced an Overcurrent or an
Over-temperature (the lower of the two hardware levels at Table 6-9).
Trip Fault Code 152 is generated from the internal temperature monitoring circuitry on the
DB modules (the higher of the two hardware levels at Table 6-9).
The hardware temperature trips should be preceded by the Software trip (Trip Fault Code 6).

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 10-9
10. Application Notes ALSPA MV3000e

10.6 Application Note for Additional Auxiliary 28v DC Powering features for
ALSPA MV3000 DELTA systems and MicroCubicle™ Drives- Version 8.00
and subsequent Firmware issues.
10.6.1 Introduction
The ALSPA MV3000e AC Drives are capable of having their controllers powered from an
Auxiliary 28V DC source. The purpose of this is to enable access to the control features and
set-up parameters, even when the DC link is not energised. Improvements have been made
to the firmware in Version 8.00 to make the use of the auxiliary 28V even easier.
10.6.2 Versions of Firmware before Version 8.00
In the case of MicroCubicle™ AC drives, when powered from the auxiliary 28V input source,
then the controller (CDC) can identify the power bridge to which it is connected.
In the case of DELTA based AC drives, when powered from an auxiliary 28V input source,
then the DELTA Controller CANNOT identify the power bridge to which it is connected.
The drive firmware attempts to read the power bridge information only at power-up.
The result of this is that, if a DELTA Controller is initially powered from an auxiliary 28V input
source, then trips relating to non-identification of the power bridge will result. If the mains
power is subsequently applied these trips cannot be reset because the firmware needs to go
through a power cycle to re-read the power bridge information.
The only way to obtain a non-tripped drive is therefore to power down the auxiliary 28V input
before applying the main DC Link, so that the controller goes through a power-up cycle with
the ability to read the power-bridge data i.e. with the power bridges also powered up.
10.6.3 Versions of Firmware Version 8.00 and later
Some enhancements have been introduced into the drive firmware to try and make the
auxiliary 28V input source, in the case of DELTA based AC drives easier to use.

10.6.3.1 DELTA Identification Source- P10.36

This parameter tells the drive firmware from where to read its power bridge identification.
Options are: 0 = DELTA Bridge
1 = Local Copy
Option 0 is as versions of firmware prior to V8.00, i.e. directly from the power bridge itself.
Option 1, if set at power up, enables the drive to be healthy when powered from the auxiliary
28V input as the drive uses the DELTA bridge information previously stored.
If the drive is powered from auxiliary 28V input with P10.36= 0 then the drive will be tripped
with several trips relating to the non-identification of the power bridge. If, subsequently,
P10.36 is changed to be = 1, then the drive will erase any previously stored local copy of the
bridge identification information.
The drive will remain tripped on non-identification of DELTA trips, until the main DC Link is
powered up. At this point the drive will restart and will read the DELTA information. The
DELTA information is then stored in the local copy for use at the next power up.
If the drive is powered from the main DC Link with P10.36=0 and subsequently changed to
P10.36=1 the drive will store the DELTA bridge information in a local copy at this point. This
is then available for use at subsequent power-ups when powered form either the main DC
Link or an auxiliary 28V input.
In summary:
• The drive attempts to read DELTA bridge information at power up. This will succeed if
powered form the main DC Link but fail if powered from an auxiliary 28V input.
• If P10.36=1 the drive will examine the local copy of some bridge information. If it
exists, it will use this copy.
• If P10.36 goes 0 to 1, and the drive is not tripped on non-identification trips, the drive
will store the current bridge information on a local copy.

Page 10-10 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 10. Application Notes

• If P10.36 goes 0 to 1 and the drive is tripped on non-identification trips, the drive will
erase any previously stored local copies of the current bridge information to prevent
their use later.
• If the drive is tripped on non-identification trips and the main DC Link is subsequently
applied then the drive will restart and apply the above sequence.
Example 1- to enable the drive to mask non-identification trips when powered from an
auxiliary 28V input. Initial power up from DC Link.
Power the drive initially from the main DC Link. Set P10.36= 1. The drive will store the power
bridge information and on subsequent power-ups from auxiliary 28V will use this information.
Caveat: If at power-up P10.36=1 then the local information, if it already exists will be used.
This could be out of date information, e.g. if the controller was moved from another drive
system. In this case, set P10.36=0 and power down. Re-power from the main DC Link. The
current DELTA bridge information will be read. Set P10.36= 1 to store this information.
Example 2 - to enable the drive to not be tripped on non-identification trips when powered
from an auxiliary 28V input, initial power-up from an auxiliary 28V input.
Power initially from the auxiliary 28V input with P10.6=0. Set P10.36=1. This erases any
previously stored local bridge information. The drive will restart when the main DC link is
applied and the power bridge information will be stored at that time.
WARNING
This mechanism opens DELTA based AC Drives up to abuse.
For example, if the drive is used in this mode, i.e. with P10.36=1 and for some reason it is
necessary to change a DELTA interface PCB (DIB – 20X4319) with a DIB from a different
size of DELTA being used.
Because P10.36 = 1 the drive takes no notice of the data contained in the DIB and the
system will operate. Subsequently if entire DELTA is placed in another drive system, with
P10.36=0 the controller will then believe that the DELTA is of a different rating than it really
is, as the DIB is incorrect. This may be some time after the original exchange when no error
was apparent.
If P10.36=1 it is possible to put dissimilar DELTAs and DIBs into a system. The controller
ignores the DELTA bridge information and will allow the system to run. As the DELTAs are
of different ratings, incorrect bridge operation/ sharing will result.

10.6.3.2 Control Flag 108

P34.08 – DC Link Off

When powered from an auxiliary 28V input source, many trips will result, e.g. DC Link under
voltage and trips associated with the power bridge being un-powered. Some systems may
wish this to be regarded as a healthy condition, although it is not possible to RUN.
As such a new control flag has been defined-CF108: DC Link Off
0 = Main DC Link is expected to be ON
1 = Main DC Link is expected to be OFF
If the DC link is expected to be OFF (CF108=1) then the trips which result from the power
bridge being un-powered are defeated and running the drive is prohibited.
If the DC Link is expected to be ON (CF108=0) then all trips are recorded if present, and
running is permitted.
It will be normal for the overall control system to tell the drive when the DC link is expected
to be ‘ON’ or when it is expected to be ‘OFF’.
However the system designer can program CF108 to be from one of many sources just like
any other control flag (see manual), for example P34.08=-2.047.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 10-11
10. Application Notes ALSPA MV3000e

10.7 Application Notes for Position Reference

1. Position Feedback & Reference in percent are defined as follows:
P36.06 - 0% Position Low and P36.07 - 0% Position High make up the position that is
called 0% position. The 0% position, in conjunction with the furthest away from it,
(either P36.02 / P36.03 Maximum Position, or P36.04 / P36.05 Minimum Position),
define the 100 % position range. It is this range that is used for the percentage
positions defined above.
For example:
P36.06 (0% Position low) = 5000
P36.07 (0% Position High) = 7 [0% position is at 75,000 ]
P36.02 (Maximum Position Low) =0
P36.03 (Maximum Position High) = 10 [ Max Position = 100,000 ]
P36.04 (Minimum Position Low) =0
P36.05 (Minimum Position High) = 0 [ Minimum Position = 0]
As Minimum position is further away from 0% than Maximum position (i.e. Min-0% is
greater than Max-0%), then minimum position is at -100 %. This means that maximum
position is at +33.33%.
2 Serial Link Double Word references are in the data format defined in P36.06/P36.07,
where:
Ref. 1 = low part
and
Ref 2 = high part.

10.8 Application Note for Rr Tracker

10.8.1 What the Rr Tracker Does
The Rotor Resistance tracker (Motor temperature compensation P12.05 to P12.09) only
works when using an encoder. When using an encoder the drive knows exactly the rotor
speed and therefore machine slip.

10.8.1.1 Case 1

Assume that for some reason the value or Rr in the drive is lower than the actual Rotor
Resistance in the machine
Iq * Rr
The slip applied to the machine is calculated from = ω slip
Lm
φ*
Lr
Where:
Iq * is the active current reference (torque producing current)
φ * is the flux reference
Lm is the magnetising inductance and Lr is the sum of the magnetising inductance and the
rotor inductance.
Since slip is directly proportional to Rr, if Rr is less than the machine Rr, the drive will force a
slip onto the machine, which is less than the machine slip would like to be. Consequently the
machine presents a higher impedance to the inverter. For a constant current into the motor a
higher impedance means a higher voltage which equals higher flux.
The combination of higher flux and the constant current generates more torque than
required. The motor accelerates and the speed control responds by reducing the torque
demand. The current is reduced as is the slip, but the motor is still running on a higher than
nominal flux curve. The current and slip are reduced until the higher than normal flux
torque/speed characteristic meets the load torque requirement and the reference speed is
achieved.

Page 10-12 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 10. Application Notes

Summary
In order to satisfy the load torque at a reduced slip the flux in the machine must increase. In
order to achieve this increased flux in the machine the motor voltage must rise.
From Figure 10-10 if we assume that the load torque remains constant at 10000Nm if we
compare the nominal flux and increased torque/slip curves, the machine must slip less at
higher flux to achieve the same torque.

10.8.1.2 Case 2

Assume that Rr in the drive is higher than the Rotor Resistance in the machine.
This is the inverse of Case 1.
In this case the drive will force a slip onto the machine that will be greater than the machine
would like to satisfy the load torque. Therefore in order to satisfy the load torque at
increased slip the machine flux must reduce. The motor voltage will reduce and the flux in
the machine will reduce.
With high slip the motor impedance is lower, for a constant current at lower impedance the
motor voltage must be lower, hence the flux will be reduced. With a low flux and constant
current the torque will be low, hence the speed controller will increase the Torque demand to
satisfy the speed reference.
Parameters P12.04 to P12.10 enable the Rr tracker

Torque v's Slip

40000.00

30000.00

20000.00
Torque (Nm)

Nominal Flux
10000.00 Reduced Flux
Increased Flux
0.00
20
18
17
16
15
14
12
11
10
9
8
6
5
4
3
2
0
-1

-10000.00

-20000.00
% slip

Figure 10-4. Torque v slip characteristic for a machine at three different flux levels.

10.8.2 Using the Rr Tracker

When automatic temperature compensation (of Rr) is enabled the drive will calculate the
value of Rr in the drive as P12.09 * P12.15. P12.09 is limited to the range 50% to 150% of
P12.15. If it is found during commissioning that the value of P12.09 is in either limit P12.15
should be adjusted so as to allow the drive to correctly calculate the Rotor Resistance as the
machine temperature changes. This will improve torque accuracy.
Parameters P12.04 to P12.10 enable the Rr tracker.
When automatic temperature compensation (of Rr) is enabled the drive will calculate the
value of Rr in the drive as P12.09 * P12.15. P12.09 is limited to the range 50% to 150% of
P12.15. If it is found during commissioning that the value of P12.09 is in either limit P12.15
should be adjusted so as to allow the drive to correctly calculate the Rotor Resistance as the
machine temperature changes. This will improve torque accuracy.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 10-13
10. Application Notes ALSPA MV3000e

If the motor is cold and the torque demand > 10% the tracked value in P12.09 should track
to the low end of the range.
If the motor is hot then the tracked value of Rr should track to the upper end of the range. If
the machine is cold and the tracked value of Rr is high then increase Rr by 50% in P12.15. If
the machine is hot and the tracked value of Rr is low then reduce P12.15 by 50%.

Note:
In order to verify motor voltages on unloaded machines a workaround in this situation is to decrease
the power rating of the motor as dialled into P2.03. With a sufficiently low value in P2.03 the windage
and friction loss should require >10% torque and the tracker will enable, thus applying correct slip and
voltage to the machine.
When running motors above base speed it has been found that even on no load the value of
Rr (P12.15) has a significant effect on the motor voltage. The effective value of Rr can be
adjusted manually by P12.04 when the motor is unloaded. The cold value of Rr will be
significantly lower than the rated hot value and hence to apply correct motor voltage on no-
load to a machine P12.04 should be reduced. The Rr tracker does not start tracking until the
torque demand is greater than approximately 10%. Although Rr is important on no-load the
actual value of Rr cannot be tracked automatically on no-load, since the windage and friction
losses do not usually account for more than 10% of rated torque.

10.9 Application Note for Over Modulation

When increasing either P12.36 (in Encoderless Vector Control) or P3.32 (in VVVF) above
100% modulation depth the output voltage of the inverter will contain low order harmonics.
The harmonic content of the PWM voltage for modulation depths 100% to 107% is shown in
tables 1 and 2. Using this together with the motor parameters it will be possible to calculate
the expected motor harmonic current, and hence the torque ripple.

1.25kHz Modulation Depth %

100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107
Harmonic
1 99.7 101.2 102.5 103.2 103.8 104.4 104.9 105.4
5 0.3 0.7 1.4 2.1 3.0 4.2 5.3 6.5
7 0.4 1.1 1.7 2.0 2.1 1.7 1.5 1.2
11 0.6 1.0 1.7 1.9 1.8 1.2 0.7 0.4
13 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.2
17 1.3 1.1 1.0 1.2 1.7 2.6 3.4 4.3
19 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.3
Table 1. Variation of the harmonic voltages (in percent) applied to the machine as a function of
the switching frequency and the modulation depth at 1.25kHz switching frequency.

2.5kHz Modulation Depth %

100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107
Harmonic
1 100 101.6 102.7 103.6 104.3 104.9 105.4 105.9
5 0.03 1.6 2.5 2.8 3.6 5.4 6.7 7.0
7 0.02 0.8 1.3 1.6 1.6 1.4 1.1 0.6
11 0.03 0.4 0.7 0.7 0.5 0.2 0.2 0.6
13 0.03 0.2 0.1 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.7 0.5
17 0.02 0.2 0.0 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.0 0.2
19 0.02 0.0 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.2
Table 2. Variation of the harmonic voltage (in percent) applied to the machine as a function of
modulation depth at 2.5kHz switching frequency.

Vdc
Note: 100% =
2

Page 10-14 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 10. Application Notes

10.9.1 Calculation of the 5th harmonic current in the machine.

The 5th harmonic current (the dominant harmonic current) in the motor can be calculated
from

V5
I5 ≈
5ω (l s + l r )
where
V fundamental
V5 = × % 5th (Table _ 1, 2)
3
The torque ripple (pk-pk Nm) can then be calculated:

3 2 ⋅ I 5 ⋅ Rr ⋅ Pp
2

Tripple( pk − pk ) =
π ⋅ freq ⋅ slip rated
where
Error! Objects cannot be created from editing field codes.is the number of
pole pairs
Error! Objects cannot be created from editing field codes.is the rated
frequency of the motor
Error! Objects cannot be created from editing field codes.is the rated (full
load) slip of the machine
Error! Objects cannot be created from editing field codes.is the rotor
resistance

10.10 Application Note for Active Current Sharing Error Diagnosis.

10.10.1 What can cause Active Sharing Errors?
(a) Delta current feedback incorrect.
(b) Failure to switch an upper and/or lower IGBT within the SKiiP.
(c) Significant impedance differences between the outputs of each Delta phase. (Which
results in a voltage difference that exceeds the maximum compensation value)
10.10.2 Recommendations
1. Make designs/installations as balanced as possible.
2. Leave P35.18 set as trip. This alerts any possible sharing problems.
3. Investigate what is causing the sharing error, and make an informed decision to correct
it or ignore it (by changing P35.18 to warning or no action).
4. The remaining risk is of a subsequent sharing problem developing and a set of
circumstances that turn that into a Delta failure.
5. The most likely cause of the initial sharing trip is cubiclisation and commissioning
mistakes. By investigating the cause of the sharing trip we therefore remove the major
cause of Delta failure.
6. So far ALL investigations into a sharing trip (other then with Version 10 code) have been
found to be due to a genuine fault that needed to be fixed, rather than over-sensitive
sharing trip software. V10.00 issues are discussed later in paragraph 10.10.6.
10.10.3 Procedure for diagnosing active sharing error cause.
The objective of these tests is to determine which of the possible causes detailed in
paragraph 1.1, is the reason for the active sharing warning.
1. If the drive is running V10.00 firmware go to paragraph 10.10.6
2. Set the drive so it gives a warning, (not trip) on sharing error, P35.18 = 1

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 10-15
10. Application Notes ALSPA MV3000e

3. Run the drive up such that warning messages are being generated and
note the phase responsible for the sharing error.
4. Use a two channel scope and 2 * 1000A current probes or LEM current
transducers. (Not Rogowski coils in that they are prone to dv/dt effects)
5. Start with current probes on the phase indicated by the sharing fault.
6. Clip CH1 current probe onto Delta 1. Use this as a “Reference Probe” with
which to compare currents on the other Deltas.
7. Connect CH2 current probe onto Delta 2 then, after measurement move, in
turn to Delta 3,4,5,6.
8. The objective is to see how the currents align throughout the sine-wave
cycle. However, because of the effect of aliasing, setting the time-base on
the scope so that a full cycle can be observed will give misleading
waveforms that show apparent discontinuities in current.

It is therefore necessary to zoom into about a 1 ms section of the sine

wave and “move around” as much as possible of the sine-wave using the
trigger levels and/or trigger position.

10.10.3.1 IGBT not switching

If the condition exists where the upper and lower IGBT both are not switching the phase
current will be virtually zero in this Delta. The healthy Delta(s) will contribute 100% of the
total phase current into the machine.
When the upper or lower IGBT only fails to switch the current will be near zero in one of the
½ cycles. In the opposing (healthy) Delta the AC current looks asymmetrical (one ½ cycle
will have a larger amplitude than the other) and will appear to have a DC offset.
If either of the above are detected this means that the appropriate IGBT is not switching.
The cause of this is the PWM signal generated by the controller is not getting through the
ribbon / Delta Interface Board (DIB) / SKiiP ribbon / Internal SKiiP gate to the IGBT.
Check the ribbon cables; look for bent pins on ribbon header. Change Delta ribbons to
determine if problem moves with the ribbon. If this is the case replace ribbon.
Connect D1 header on the controller to Delta 2 and vice-versa to determine whether
problem stays lies with the particular Delta channel on the controller. If this is found to be the
case, change controllers.
If the problem remains with the Delta module, check integrity of the ribbon cables between
the DIB and the SKiiP before replacing Delta.

10.10.3.2 Current feedback faults or impedance mismatch

If the system is a 2 parallel Delta system go to paragraph 10.10.4.

Is the current in one of the Deltas phases higher than the others in both +ve and –ve ½
cycles?
YES (This can be either a current feedback which is lower than the actual current
affecting both ½ cycles which is unlikely current feedback gain errors usually only affect one
½ cycle, or an impedance mismatch between Deltas)
Is the effect of disabling active sharing (paragraph 10.10.8) that the currents then balance?
YES Problem is current feedback error. Replace Delta with highest current.
NOProblem is impedance mismatch between Deltas. See paragraph 10.10.5.
Is the current in one of the Deltas phases lower than the others in both +ve and –ve ½
cycles?
YES (This can be either a current feedback which is higher than the actual current
affecting both ½ cycles which is very unlikely and has never been seen, or an impedance
mismatch between Deltas)

Page 10-16 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 10. Application Notes

Is the effect of disabling active sharing (paragraph 10.10.8) that the currents then balance?
YES Problem is current feedback error. Replace Delta
NOProblem is impedance mismatch between Deltas. See paragraph 10.10.5.
Is the current in one of the Deltas phases higher or lower than the others in one of either of
the +ve or –ve ½ cycles?
YES (This can be either a gain error in the current feedback which affects one of the
½ cycles or an impedance mismatch between Deltas)
Is the effect of disabling active sharing (paragraph 10.10.8) that the currents then balance?
YES Problem is current feedback error. Replace Delta
NOProblem is impedance mismatch between Deltas. See paragraph 10.10.5.

Symptoms Probable Cause Effect of disabling active Action

current sharing (paragraph
11)
Current in one of the Delta Current feedback Current in Delta/ phase that Change Delta
phases is higher than the others fault/gain error was higher, reduces
Current in one of the Delta Impedance Current remains the same Investigate cabling, sharing
phases is higher mismatch reactors
Current is asymmetrical or The cause of this is None Check ribbons, connectors
virtually zero (paragraph that the IGBT is not for bent pins swap CDC to
10.10.3.1) switching. This may Delta ribbons. Check DIB to
be due to the signal SKiiP ribbons.
generated on the
controller not getting
to the IGBT.
Table 10-1 Active sharing cause/effect summary table.

10.10.4 Two Delta Systems.

For a two Delta system a slightly different procedure is required in order to identify the faulty
components.

10.10.4.1 Procedure

With a 2 Delta system the following procedure must be adopted to determine whether the
problem is due to impedance mismatch or current feedback errors.
Measure the currents in the appropriate phase of the 2 deltas and compare.
Disable active sharing (paragraph 10.10.8). Does the phase current between the 2 Deltas
equalise?
YES Problem is current feedback error in one of the 2 Deltas
Go to paragraph 10.10.4.2
NOProblem is impedance mismatch between the Deltas.
Go to paragraph 10.10.4.3

10.10.4.2 Determining which Delta has current feedback fault.

Configure the drive as a single Delta system. By doing this for both Deltas in turn it should
be possible to determine which of the 2 Deltas has the current feedback error.
Remove the ribbon cable between the controller and Delta 2; disconnect the 3 phase cables
between Delta 2 and the sharing reactor. Remember these cables will become live when the
drive is energised and therefore need to be isolated from each other and from earth. It is not
necessary to disconnect the DC link from Delta 2.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 10-17
10. Application Notes ALSPA MV3000e

Run the drive up to under Full load current of a single Delta system and look and compare
the 3 phase currents from Delta 1 on the scope. There should be 3 balanced sine waves
displaced by 120°and of the same magnitude.
Are the 3 phase sine waves balanced?
YES
Then this Delta is working correctly.
NO
Then this Delta has a current feedback error. Repeat this procedure using Delta 2 and verify
that Delta 2 operates correctly giving a balanced set of 3 phase sine waves of equal
magnitude. Replace Delta 1.

10.10.4.3 Determination of which Delta has impedance mismatch

Configure the drive as a single Delta system. By doing this for both Deltas in turn it should
be possible to determine which of the 2 Deltas has the impedance mismatch.
Remove the ribbon cable between the controller and Delta 2; disconnect the 3 phase cables
between Delta 2 and the sharing reactor. Remember these cables will become live when the
drive is energised and therefore need to be isolated from each other and from earth. It is not
necessary to disconnect the DC link from Delta 2.
Run the drive up to under Full load current of a single Delta system and look and compare
the 3 phase currents from Delta 1 on the scope. There should be 3 balanced sine waves
displaced by 120°and of the same magnitude.
Are the 3 phase sine waves balanced?
YES
Then this Delta is working correctly and the 3 phase impedances are matched.
NO
Then the impedance between the 3 phases is not matched. Repeat this procedure using
Delta 2 and verify that operation with Delta 2 gives a balanced set of 3 phase sine waves of
equal magnitude. This will confirm that Delta 1 has the impedance mismatch. Go to
paragraph 10.10.5.
10.10.5 What to do if impedance mismatch diagnosed.
If an impedance mismatch is diagnosed using the above procedure the possible causes are:
Cable connections between Delta and sharing reactor, and between sharing reactors and
motor. Have all the connections been correctly tightened? With reference to T1689 Air
Cooled Delta Technical Manual and T1693 Liquid cooled Delta Technical Manual the M10
AC cable terminations should be tightened to a torque of 27 – 40Nm.
Are all cable lengths the same?
Are any of the cables damaged in any way?
Have the same value sharing reactors been fitted?
It may be necessary to change the sharing reactors to eliminate these as the source of
impedance mismatch.
It has also been found that if the cables between the DC output of the rectifier and the
individual Deltas are significantly different the on load DC link voltage will be different at
each Delta. This can lead to sharing pulses being required in order to ensure current
sharing. This condition is not normally a problem with standard cubicle layouts.
10.10.6 V10.00 issues.
With V10.00 firmware there are certain conditions that can lead to active sharing errors that
are not hardware related. If the firmware has been upgraded to V10.00 from V9.01, V9.02 or
V9.03 and a return to factory defaults has not been carried out with V10.00 installed, active
sharing will not operate correctly. Due to this and issues related to VVVF operation with

Page 10-18 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 10. Application Notes

V10.00 is recommended that upgrades to V10.00 are not carried out but to the latest version
of firmware, currently V11.94.
10.10.7 Use of HEME clamp on current probes
It has been found that the orientation of the clamp type current probes affects the rms
reading of current as displayed on the current clamp. The clamp should be clipped around
the cable such that the jaws close properly and then kept at right angles to the conductor.
Do not leave the clamp with its body lying close to other conductors. Whilst the orientation of
the clamp affects the rms reading displayed it does/does not affect the signal output to the
scope.
10.10.8 How to Disable Active Sharing
Set P35.18 = 0
Set P35.19 = 1

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 10-19
10. Application Notes ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 10-20 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 11. Software History

11 Software History

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page

11.1 Version 7.00 ................................................................................................................................. 11-3

11.1.1 New Features and Enhancements .................................................................................... 11-3
11.2 Version 8.00 ................................................................................................................................. 11-4
11.2.1 New Features and Enhancements .................................................................................... 11-4
11.2.2 Minor Enhancements ......................................................................................................... 11-4
11.3 Version 9.00 ................................................................................................................................. 11-5
11.3.1 New Features and Enhancements .................................................................................... 11-5
11.3.2 Minor Enhancements ......................................................................................................... 11-6
11.4 Version 10.00 ............................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.4.1 New Features and Enhancements .................................................................................... 11-6
11.4.2 Minor Enhancements ......................................................................................................... 11-7
11.5 Version 11.01 ............................................................................................................................... 11-8
11.5.1 New Features and Enhancements .................................................................................... 11-8
11.5.2 Minor Enhancements ......................................................................................................... 11-8
11.6 Version 11.60 ............................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.6.1 New Features and Enhancements .................................................................................... 11-9
11.7 Version 11.73 ............................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.7.1 New Features and Enhancements .................................................................................... 11-9
11.7.2 Minor Enhancements ....................................................................................................... 11-11
11.8 Version 11.86 ............................................................................................................................. 11-11
11.8.1 New Features and Enhancements .................................................................................. 11-11
11.8.2 Minor Enhancements ....................................................................................................... 11-11
11.9 Version 11.94 ............................................................................................................................. 11-12
11.9.1 New Features and Enhancements .................................................................................. 11-12
11.9.2 Minor Enhancements ....................................................................................................... 11-13
11.10 Version 12.xx ............................................................................................................................. 11-14
11.10.1 New Features and Enhancements................................................................................. 11-14

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 11-1
11. Software History ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 11-2 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 11. Software History

11.1 Version 7.00

11.1.1 New Features and Enhancements
Powering down an MV DELTA based AC Drive, disconnecting (or removing) a DELTA module
and re-powering the drive no longer causes the motor related parameters (see below) to return
to factory default, they will remain as programmed.
Under the scenario, where an MV DELTA module is no longer part of the drive, the Full Load
Current of the drive is re-scaled in line with the number of MV DELTA units remaining
connected to the MV DELTA Controller.
Trip 19 - 'New PCB' and Trip 68 - 'Unknown Drive Size' will no longer occur with this version of
firmware on MVDELTA based systems

CAUTION
This means that an MV DELTA Controller can be taken from one drive and put into another
drive and no warning or trip will be given to indicate that an incorrect parameter set is present. It
is now up to the user to ensure that the correct parameter set for the drive into which the MV
DELTA Controller has been put, is downloaded in the controller.
It is recommended that the MV DELTA Controller is deliberately reset to factory default (by
setting parameter P99.17 - 'Restore Defaults' = 1) and then downloading the appropriate
parameter set from either the drive's ALSPA Drive Data Manager or from ALSPA Drive Coach,
where ever the back-up has been stored.
The result of this is a simplification of the use of parameter P10.35 and the generation of new
spares items for DELTA Interface Boards (DIBs).
The following table lists the Motor related parameters that no longer return to factory default
when a MV DELTA module is disconnected from an ALSPA MV3000e DELTA based AC Drive.

Par No. Function

P2.01 Motor Base Voltage
P2.02 Motor Full Load Current
P2.03 Motor Nominal Power
P2.04 Motor Nominal Speed
P3.13 VVVF Stator Resistance
P3.14 VVVF Stator Inductance
P3.15 VVVF Magnetising Resistance
P6.17 Trip Avoidance Threshold
P11.70 Br. Lin. Time @ 1.25kHz
P11.71 Br. Lin. Const. @ 1.25kHz
P11.72 Br. Lin. Time @ 2.5kHz
P11.73 Br. Lin. Const. @ 2.5kHz
P11.74 Br. Lin. Time @ 5.0kHz
P11.75 Br. Lin. Const. @ 5.0kHz
P11.76 Br. Lin. Time @ 7.5kHz
P11.77 Br. Lin. Const. @ 7.5kHz
P12.00 No Load I at 100%V (Magnetising Current)
P12.11 Stator Resistance
P12.12 Stator Inductance
P12.13 Magnetising Resistance
P12.14 Magnetising Inductance
P12.15 Rotor Resistance
P12.16 Rotor Inductance (Leakage Inductance)
P23.00 DB Resistor Value
P23.01 DB Resistor Average Power
P23.02 DB Resistor Maximum Power
P23.04 DB Voltage Threshold
P50.00 DC Link Voltage Reference

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 11-3
11. Software History ALSPA MV3000e
Par No. Function
P50.01 Line Choke Inductance
P52.17 DC Link Pre-charge Threshold

11.2 Version 8.00

11.2.1 New Features and Enhancements
This version of firmware has been produced; mainly to introduce new Vector Control algorithms
that enhance drive performance. An improvement has also been made to the VVVF mode of
control and a new mode Optimum Volts mode introduced.

11.2.1.1 Auxiliary 28V dc

The ALSPA MV3000e AC Drives are capable of having their controllers powered from an
Auxiliary 28V DC source. The purpose of this is to enable access to the control features and
set-up parameters, even when the DC Link is not energised. Improvements have been made to
the firmware in Version 8.00 to make the use of the auxiliary 28V input easier.

11.2.1.2 Vector Control

Vector Control can now be run in one of two modes

High Dynamic Mode and
Optimum Volt Mode

New Parameters

Par No Function
P3.32 VVVF Modulation Limit
P12.35 Vector Fluxing Mode
P12.36 Optimum Volt Modulation Limit
P12.37 Optimum Volt Current Bandwidth
P35.17 Advanced Temperature Monitoring
P45.24 Temperature @ Warning/Trip
P45.27 Maximum Silicon Temperature
11.2.2 Minor Enhancements

Range of Current and Power Parameters

The range of the current and power parameters within the drive has been extended so that the
drive can handle motors greater than 3200kW. Note for DB Control (Menu 23) the limit remains
at 3000kW.
Parameters affected are:

Par No. Function

P2.03 Nominal Power
P4.12 Regen Power Limit
P12.00 No-load I at 100% Volts (Magnetising Current)
P12.17 No-Load I at 50% Volts
P12.18 No load I at 60% Volts
P12.19 No Load I at 70% Volts
P12.20 No-load I at 80% Volts
P12.21 No-load I at 90% Volts
P23.05 Motor Regenerative Power Limit
P33.16 Drive Continuous Current Rating
P99.05 Drive Nominal Current

Page 11-4 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 11. Software History
Alternative Voltage Grade -DELTA Modules

Alternative voltage grade settings in DELTA based drives are not crosschecked on DELTA to
DELTA. This allows DELTAs of an Alternative Voltage grade to be mixed with DELTAs of a
lower voltage grade, provided the primary voltage grade and current match. The change is for
future systems only as, at present, there is no Alternative Voltage grade for DELTA based
drives.

Motor Library Data

The motor library data within the controllers has been enhanced to include more information on
large motors.

Backup Parameter Set

To help identify parameter corruption situations, a new warning 'Backup Parameter Set in Use'
has been added. The warning occurs when the backup parameter set is used because the
primary parameter set is unavailable. It is in addition to Status Flag 110 - ' Backup Parameter
Set in Use'.

Trip History

The Trip History has been improved to record fewer trips stored as a result of a power down of
the drive. This will help to give a more meaningful Trip History and lead to less confusion when
an ALSPA MV3000e AC Drive is diagnosed for faults.

Analogue Inputs

To increase the scale/offset capability of the analogue inputs an intermediate clamp has been
removed so that (Input Value * Gain) is not clamped at 100%.
Note:
((Input Value * Gain) + Offset) is still clamped at ±100%.

Parameter P12.27

The description of parameter P12.27 has changed from 'Current Control Bandwidth' to 'High
Dynamic Current Control Bandwidth'.

11.3 Version 9.00

11.3.1 New Features and Enhancements

11.3.1.1 2nd CAN Port

New menus have been added to utilise the ALSPA MV3000e 2nd CAN Port Module MVS3011-
4001.
Note:
This module can only be used on the Common Drive Controller and DELTA Controllers incorporating a
40MHz CPU. The ALSPA MV3000e MicroCubicle CDC must be 20X4311 Issue E or later. The ALSPA
MV3000 DELTA Controller must be MVC3001-4002 incorporating 20X4341 Issue C or later.

New Menus Added

Menu 58 - 'Extended I/O 2'

Menu 65 -'CAN Port 2
Menu 66 - 'CAN2 CANopen
Menu 67 -'CAN2 DeviceNet

11.3.1.2 PROFIBUS Replacement Module MVS3007-4002

Following the replacement, due to obsolescence of the ALSPA MV3000e PROFIBUS Fieldbus
Coupler MVC3007-4001, a new menu - Menu 74 has been added to allow the use of the full
features of the new PROFIBUS Fieldbus Coupler MVC3007-4002.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 11-5
11. Software History ALSPA MV3000e
11.3.1.3 Ridethrough in VVVF Control

A new menu - Menu46 - 'Ridethrough in VVVF Control' has been added - to assist users in
obtaining successful ridethrough operation in VVVF Control.

11.3.1.4 PI Flux Controller

To further enhance the performance of Vector Control an outer Flux Control Loop has been
added to the Vector Control algorithms for Encoderless mode. The result of this control loop is
to give improved motor volts when running at full load.
In order to benefit from this enhancement the new Common Drive Controllers fitted with the
40MHz processor must be used i.e. 20X4311 Issue D or later and 20X4341 Issue C or later.
20X4311 Issue E processors have been fitted in ALSPA MV3000 MicroCubicle Drives since
March 2002.
20X4341 Issue C controllers are available in the new DELTA Controller MVC3001-4002.
For earlier versions of controllers, i.e. those fitted with 25MHz processors the new control loop
is disabled.

Note:
V9.00 Firmware will load into the earlier types but the firmware will detect the controller type and disable
the Flux PI automatically.
Version 9.00 code will also remove instability at 1.25kHz PWM that may be experienced in Version 8.00
code in some applications.
11.3.2 Minor Enhancements

Parameter P12.02 - 'Nominal mains Supply

The maximum value of this parameter is now 900V, in previous firmware versions the maximum
was 800V.

Parameter P52.04 - 'Current Bandwidth'

The default value of this parameter has been changed from 750rads/sec to be 600rads/sec

New Parameters Added

Par No. Function

P14.21 Speed Loop Integral Seed Method
P23.23 Internal DB Unit Fitted
P28.20 Interlock Terminal Auto-Reset Enable

Copyright

Copyright notice embedded in firmware

11.4 Version 10.00

11.4.1 New Features and Enhancements

11.4.1.1 Active Sharing Error Detection

All versions of ALSPA MV3000e AC Drives that are MVDELTA based have had the ability to
make the MVDELTA modules share their currents in proportion to the total drive current. A new
parameter P35.18 - 'Active Sharing Error Detection' has been added to improve active sharing.
If the ALSPA MV3000e is unable to force multiple MVDELTAs to share in proportion, and the
current levels are high enough for this to present a potential problem for the remaining
MVDELTA modules then the drive will issue a Warning or a Trip, indicating the phase sharing
failure.

Page 11-6 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 11. Software History
11.4.1.2 Encoderless Vector Control

The following parameters have been added to Menu 12 to assist in stabilising Encoderless
Vector Control.

Par No Function
P12.38 Vdc Feedforward Filter
Time Constant
P12.39 Current Control Kp Factor
P12.40 Current Control Ki Factor
P12.41 Orientation Controller Kp
P12.42 Orientation Controller Ki
11.4.2 Minor Enhancements

Parameter Index

All parameters have been given a unique index number so that when used with a version of
ALSPA Drive Coach from V4.00 or later the detection of duplicates is more robust.

Interlock Terminal

The Interlock terminal can now be read in P11.21, Bit 15.

Additionally the Interlock terminal can now be used as a source for the:
Control Flags (P33.00 - P34.27)
Digital outputs (P7.27, P7.28, and P7.29)
Extended Digital outputs (P59.50 - P59.81, and P58.50 - P58.81)
Programmable Status Words (P41.00 - P41.31)

Trip History

Many trips occur associated with power down of the drive, as various aspects of the Power
Bridge are shutting down. To assist diagnostics from the trip history, from V8.00 firmware, trips
occurring after an under voltage trip occurs are not stored in the trip history log, as these are
expected, associated with power down.
The trip history is now frozen after an under voltage has been logged. The trip history is re-
started, and subsequent trips recorded, when the under voltage trip is reset.

SFE Mode Control Flags

Previous versions of firmware retained the same default values for the sources of Control Flags
3, 4, 5 and 6 for the motor control modes and SFE mode. This can lead to 'unexplained'
Reference Loss trips originating from the speed reference source being derived from analogue
reference 2 and this being <4mA. To remove this problem the default values for the sources of
control flags 3 to 6 have been changed.
This does not change the stated defaults functions for the Digital Inputs. It removes unwanted
functions when in SFE mode.

SKiiP Trip Current

The SKiiP trip current has been removed from the DIB cross checklist for drive size.

Motor Calibration Run

The motor calibration run program has been improved such that fewer drive trips should occur
during a calibration run with encoder. During the calibration run the drive automatically sets
P12.40 - 'Orientation Controller Kp' to 100 and returns it afterwards to the default setting.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 11-7
11. Software History ALSPA MV3000e
Auto Temperature Compensation

Parameter P12.06 - Auto Temperature Compensation' has been changed to be a Control Flag
rather than a parameter. This means that when updating to this version of code P12.06 will
return to default (0.000) even if previously set =1.

11.5 Version 11.01

11.5.1 New Features and Enhancements

11.5.1.1 VVVF Synchrostart

Improvements have been made to the synchrostart function (starting onto a spinning motor
without speed measurement) for VVVF mode operation. The modifications do not apply to
Vector Control without Encoder.
The volts recovery rate for 1.25kHz operation has been corrected, as it was too low, by a factor
of 2compared with 2.5kHz operation.
The improvements are to make the synchrostart function's power factor PI controller gains
available for user setting. New parameters added are:

Par No Function
P4.22 VVVF Sync PF Demand
P4.23 VVVF - Sync. PF Kp
P4.24 VVVF - Sync. PF Ki

11.5.1.2 Vector Control Without Encoder

Further improvements have been made Vector Control without Encoder

Base flux is now calculated as Vphase/(Xm+Xs). it was Vphase/Xm. This aligns the motor
voltage in 'vector control with encoder' with 'vector control without encoder'.
P12.45 Rs Gain Factor added as a scalar to edit the value of Rs where it is used throughout the
firmware.
Default of P12.40 changed back to be 100% from 10%
The following parameters have been added.

Par No Function
P11.52 Modulation Depth
P12.32 Flux Controller Output
P12.43 Xcouple TC Factor
P12.44 Xcouple Gain Factor
P12.45 Rs Gain Factor
11.5.2 Minor Enhancements
CANopen
The default values of parameters P61.13 and P65.13 - 'Freeze/Fallback' changed to = 1
'Fallback' from 0 'Freeze'
DELTA Sharing
DELTA sharing improved to remove to reduce the chances of trips on multiple DELTA drives.
Calibration Run
The Leakage Inductance Phase of the calibration run has been improved.
The Current Control bandwidth is increased during this phase and the current sampled only in
the second 50ms of each 100ms toggle period.

Page 11-8 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 11. Software History
VVVF Stability
VVVF stability has been improved as some induction motors may be subject to instability under
light load conditions.
The defaults of parameters P3.16 and P3.17 have been changed from 1.000Hz/(%/scan) and
40scans to 4.000Hz/(%scan) and 15scans; and stability is tapered away to 0 at 0Hz.
Frame Size 8 AC Drives
Support has been added for the following Frame Size 8 AC Drives:
MV3662A6A4: MV3221R6A4: MV3750J6A4: MV31000J6A4: MV3250M6A4
Encoder Feedback
Parameter P11.51 - 'Encoder Speed (VVVF)' now reads encoder speed feedback in VVVF
mode (all controllers, i.e. 25MHz and 40MHz) and encoder speed feedback in all vector control
modes on 40MHz controllers only.
Action on Sharing Error
The default value of parameter P35.18 changed from 2 (Trip) to 1 (Warning).

11.6 Version 11.60

11.6.1 New Features and Enhancements

11.6.1.1 Common Drive Controller

This version of firmware is only compatible with Common Drive Controllers (CDC) fitted with a
40MHz processor. In the event that it is installed on an older CDC the drive will trip with Trip
Code 211 - 'Not 40MHz PCB'

11.6.1.2 PROFIBUS

This issue of firmware is released to resolve a problem with PROFIBUS.

11.6.1.3 VVVF Stability

The defaults of parameters P3.16 and P3.17 have been changed from 4.000Hz/(%/scan) to
1.000/(%scan) and 15 scans to 40scans respectively.

11.7 Version 11.73

11.7.1 New Features and Enhancements

11.7.1.1 Additional Mode for High Speed Digital Output

A new mode, P20.00 = -2 ‘Fast Trip Out’, has been added to the High Speed I/O
This mode has been added to the High Speed I/O to facilitate the triggering of oscilloscopes on
a trip event.
Trips are routed to the High Speed Digital Output.

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 11-9
11. Software History ALSPA MV3000e
11.7.1.2 Menu 12 - Motor Advanced Settings (Vector Only) Menu

The following parameters have been added to Menu 12 - 'Motor Advanced Settings (Vector
Only) Menu'

Par No Function
P12.32 Leakage Test Current
P12.50 Enable Power Limit
P12.51 Power Limit
P12.52 P-Limit taper Band
P12.53 Minimum Power Limit

11.7.1.3 Menu 52 - Advanced SFE Set-up Menu

The following parameters have been added to Menu 52 - 'Advanced SFE Set-up Menu'

Par No Function
P52.51 Frequency Timer
P52.22 Minimum Amplitude
P52.23 Maximum Amplitude
P52.24 Amplitude Timer
P52.30 Enable Ride-through
P52.31 Mains Amplitude %
P52.32 Dip Threshold
P52.33 Dip Hysteresis
P52.34 Voltage Gain Support
P52.35 Measured Dip
P52.36 Alternative Reference Source
P52.38 Alternative Reference
P52.40 Id Reference
P52.41 User Id Limit
P52.42 Id Limit
P52.43 Limited Id Reference
P52.44 Id Ramp Up Rate
P52.45 Id Ramp Down Rate
P52.46 Ramped Id Reference
P52.47 P-Limit Recover Rate
P52.48 Power Limit Feedforward

11.7.1.4 Menu 54 - Mains Monitor Menu

A new menu, Menu 54 - 'Mains Monitor Menu' has been added. This menu is only active when
in SFE Mode.

11.7.1.5 Menu 91 - Fast Analogue Output Menu

Menu 91 is added as an advanced commissioning/fault finding menu, and is, generally, not
available.
If required, a fast analogue output pcb must be installed after which menu 91 is visible.
Additionally for its use, it requires knowledge of the MV3000e internal variable numbers and
their internal scales, to be able to set up the parameters required to be viewed. It can then be
used as an advanced fault finding aid on difficult applications.

11.7.1.6 Minimum Output PWM Pulses

This version of firmware has restrictions imposed on the minimum PWM pulse width produced
by the drive. These restrictions have consequences for the drive's maximum output modulation
depth, and, consequently, output voltage.

Page 11-10 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 11. Software History
See parameters P3.32 and P12.36
11.7.2 Minor Enhancements
Parameter P99.15
Any user edits to this parameter are now retained and its value is no longer reset when the drive
re-boots.
Parameter P32.0
This parameter can now be downloaded to the drive from Drive Coach.
Multiple Trip Codes
It is possible, under certain circumstances, for the DIB to report all possible faults. This means
that the true fault is masked by other unwanted ones. As such this condition is now reported as
'Undiagnosed from Dx' rather than all possible trips.

11.8 Version 11.86

11.8.1 New Features and Enhancements

11.8.1.1 ALSPA MV3000e Ethernet Interface

This release of the drive firmware introduces the ALSPA MV3000e Ethernet Interface.
The interface is available in 2 versions, a single channel version and a dual channel version
MVS3012-4001 - Ethernet Interface Single Channel
MVS3012-4002 - Ethernet Interface Dual Channel
1. 10/100MBaud Ethernet
2. MODBUS/TCP protocol
3. Ability to be able to add other protocols
A new Menu - Menu 86 -'Ethernet Interface Menu' has been introduced to enable the Ethernet
module to be configured.

11.8.1.2 AC Loss Ridethrough

The AC Loss Ridethrough feature in the ALSPA MV3000e has been improved for Vector
Control.
THIS FEATURE HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM THE DRIVE'S VVVF MODE OF CONTROL.
This means that if the drive's firmware is upgraded and the drive was in VVVF and used this
feature it will be necessary to re-commission the drive in Vector Control.
11.8.2 Minor Enhancements
Text Change
The word 'MV3000C' has been removed from parameter P99.03 and from ALSPA Drive Coach.
Cross Coupling Gain Factors
Parameters P12.43 - 'Cross Coupling Time Constant' and P12.44 - 'Cross Coupling Gain
Factor' are now executed in the controller's PWM task.
Fast Trip HSIO
P20=-2, this mode has been corrected so that it is not high when healthy and powered from an
Auxiliary 28V dc supply.
CANopen at PWM Task
An additional CAN Protocol has been added - Drive to Drive. This is selected by setting P61.00
(P65.00) to 4. This then gives the ability to attach CANopen messages to the PWM task of the
CDC using Menu 62 (Menu 65). This functionality is primarily introduced for fast power
feedforward signals for AEM drives to be sent over CANopen rather than use analogue I/O.
See the CANopen Software Technical Manuals.
Menu 52 – Advanced SFE Set-up Menu

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 11-11
11. Software History ALSPA MV3000e
The following parameters have been added to Menu 52 - 'Advanced SFE Set-up Menu'

Par No Function
P52.25 Vdc Kp Scale at 0 Power
P52.26 Vdc Kp Taper Power
P52.27 Maximum Vdc Kp
P52.28 Vdc Kp Power Filter
P52.29 Calculated Vdc Kp

11.9 Version 11.94

11.9.1 New Features and Enhancements

11.9.1.1 Additional Logic Blocks and Brake Logic

This release of firmware includes a number of new user Logic Blocks and pre-configured logic
for the operation of brakes on a crane or hoist.
Menu 40 - Summing Nodes
Added to this menu are:
1. 4 Summing Nodes - E, F, G and H
2. 2 Square Root functions - A and B
3. 4 Comparators - U, V, W and X
4. 4 Analogue Switches - A, B, C and D
Additional parameters are from P40.24 through P40.99 and these are fully detailed in section
6.40.
Menu 47 - Second Logic Menu
A new menu, Menu 47 (see section 6.47), gives access to the parameters required to configure
12 general purpose logic blocks I through T and special purpose brake logic block.
Four identical logic blocks I through L each contain the following functions:
1. Comparator - allowing any variable to be compared to a fixed threshold
2. Delay - allowing the output of the comparator to have its rising edge delayed
3. Selectable Boolean Function - allowing the delay output to be combined with 2 other
digital signals
Each logic block function outputs to a Status Flag and the inputs come from previous function
and Control Flags.
A second group of 8 identical logic blocks, M through T, each comprise a selectable 4 input
Boolean function. The selectable boolean functions are AND, NAND, OR, NOR XOR and
XNOR.
Parameters P47.80 through P47.91 are for the special Brake Logic Function.
This brake control is for operational purposes only and must not form part of the
functional safety of the system. If application of brakes is required for the functional
safety of the overall system, then there must be a means of applying the brakes (and
keeping them applied) independently of the MV3000e.

11.9.1.2 Second User Ramp Function

An independent User Ramp Function has been added to Menu 6. Additional parameters to
Menu 6 for this function are P6.20 through P6.36 and a full description is available at section
6.6.3.

11.9.1.3 Menu 10 Trips and Warnings

Extra User Trips and Warnings have been added and nominated as Alerts as these trips and
warnings cannot be auto reset via Menu 28. Additional parameters to Menu 10 for this function
are P10.40 through P10.59 and a full description is available at section 6.10.9.

Page 11-12 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 11. Software History
11.9.1.4 Control and Status Flags

Menu 11 - Advanced Drive Monitoring

Menu 11 contains control and status flags in various locations. The following parameters
contain the additional control and status flags for the new logic functions.

Par No Function
P11.53 Control Flags 144-159
P11.54 Control Flags 150-175
P11.55 Control Flags 176-191
P11.56 Control Flags 192-207
P11.57 Status Flags 112-127
P11.58 Status Flags 128-143

Menu 34 - Control Flags 144 to 199

As well as being shown in Menu 11, the control flags 144 to 199 are duplicated in this menu to
provide an easy way of locating a particular control flag.
11.9.2 Minor Enhancements
Menu 61 - CANopen Additions
It has been found that some newer CANopen interface modules, compliant with V4.01 I/O
Profile now need to have analogue 'read' enabled. This is performed using Service Data
Objects (SDOs). In order to enable this facility without having to have a complete CANopen
master functionality for performing this requirement has been introduced onto CAN Port 1 only.
The following parameters have been added and full details are given in technical manual
T2013EN Rev 0004.

Par No Function
P61.51 Node to Access
P61.52 Object to Access
P61.53 Sub-index to Access
P61.54 Access Command
P61.55 Access Result
P61.56 Access Data Length
P61.57 Access Bytes 1 & 2
P61.58 Access Bytes 3 &4
P61.59 Access Bytes 5 & 6
P61.60 Access Bytes 7 & 8
P61.61 Access Bytes 9 & 10
P61.62 Access Bytes 11 & 12
P61.63 Access Bytes 13 & 14
P61.64 Access Bytes 15 & 16
P61.65 Access Bytes 17 & 18
P61.66 Access Bytes 19 & 20

AC Loss Ridethrough
Parameter P46.02 - 'Mains Volts Scaling' now effects P46.03 - 'Vrms Mains'.
Parameter P46.08 - 'Mains Loss Action' added.
Active Sharing

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 11-13
11. Software History ALSPA MV3000e
The following parameters have been added to the Active Sharing function

Par No Function
P35.19 Disable Sharing
P35.20 PWM Sharing Threshold
P35.21 100ms Sharing Threshold
P35.22 No. of 100ms Sharings
P35.23 Sharing Event Time

Menu 52 - Advanced SFE Set-up Menu

The following parameters have been added to Menu 52 - Advanced SFE Set-up Menu

Par No Function
P52.49 Dip power Limit Max Iq
P52.50 Dip maximum Iq from Grid
P52.51 Dip maximum Iq to Grid
P52.52 Load Power Feedforward
Limit
P52.53 Vq mains Filter

Revised Hardware Support

Support for DELTA PIB combination 20 and the Enhanced DELTA DIB 20X4381 added.
Proportional DB
A maximum modulation depth (P23.15) of 100% is allowed in Proportional DB Mode of control.
Values between the minimum pulse limit and 100% are disallowed internally.
PWM Synchronisation
PWM synchronisation added in modes 2 and 4 via HSIO
The following new parameters added.

Par No Function
P35.30 PWM Sync. Offset
P35.31 PWM Sync. Compensation
Delay

Rate of Rise of Temperature

Rate of Rise of Temperature measurement filtering has been improved to make this less
sensitive to giving spurious trips.

11.10 Version 12.xx

11.10.1 New Features and Enhancements
This manual reflects changes after version 11.94 such as the addition of Menus, 54, 55 and 56
and Multiple Parameter sets, the release details are not fully known at the time of going to
press.

Page 11-14 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 12. Abbreviations & Acronyms

12 Abbreviations & Acronyms

The following abbreviations and acronyms are used within this manual

Abbreviation/Acronym Definition
.; x; * Multiply
@ At
+ve Positive
ABS; Abs Absolute
AC; ac Alternating Current
Accel Acceleration
ADDR Address
Adv Advanced
AEM Active Energy Management
Alt Alternative
Amps Amperes
AN I/P Analogue Input
Analog Analogue
ANIN Analogue Input
ANOP Analogue Output
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Auto Automatic
AUX Auxiliary
BDM Basic Drive Module
CAL Run Calibration Run
CAN Controller Area Network
CDC Common Drive Controller
CE Compliance European
CF Control Flag
Ch Channel
Cntrl Controller
Comm. Communications
Comp. Compensation
Const. Constant
CONT. Control
CPU Central Processing Unit
CR Carriage Return
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CTS Clear to send
DB Dynamic Brake
DC; dc Direct Current
DCD Carrier detect
D-D Drive to Drive
DDM™ Drive Data Manager
Decel Deceleration
DIB DELTA Interface Board
Dig Digital
DIGIN Digital Input
DIGOUT Digital Output
Div Divide
DSR Data Set Ready
DTR Data Terminal Ready
DVM Digital Voltage Meter
EDS Electronic Data Sheet
EEC European Economic Community
EEPROM; E²PROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only memory
EMC Electro-Magnetic Compliance
ENC; Enc Encoder
ENQ Enquire
Esc Escape

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 12-1
12. Abbreviations & Acronyms ALSPA MV3000e
Abbreviation/Acronym Definition
E-Stop Emergency Stop
Etc. Etcetera
F Frequency
FB Feedback
FBC Field Bus Controller
FIP Factory Information Protocol
FLC Full Load Current
Freq Frequency
FREQ. Frequency
FWD; Fwd Forward
GEN Generator
GND Ground
HI; Hi High
HIS High Speed Digital Input
HS High Speed
HSIO High Speed Digital Input Output
HSO High Speed Digital Output
I Current
I mode Current Mode
I/O Input/Output
I/P Input
ID Identity
Id Reactive current
IGBT Insulated Gate Bi-Polar Transistor
Inj Injection
INV Inverse
Iq Active Current
Kd Derivative Gain
Ki Integral Gain
Kp Proportional Gain
LCN Line Contactor
LED; led Light Emitting Diode
LF Line Feed
l-l Line to line
LO; Lo Low
LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check
MAGNET.; Magnet. Magnetising
Max Maximum
Min Minimum
MTRIP Motor Thermostat Trip
Mult Multiply
MVM Mains Voltage Monitor
NAK Not Acknowledged
O/L Overload
O/P Output
PARAMS Parameters
PC; pc Personal; Computer
PCB; pcb Printed Circuit Board
PF Power Factor
PI Proportional, Integral, (controller)
PIB Power Interface Board
PID Proportional, Integral, Derivative (controller)
pk-pk Peak to Peak
PL Plug
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
P-Limit Power Limit
PLL Phase Locked Loop
PNOM Nominal Power
Pot Potentiometer
P-Set Parameter Set
PSU Power Supply Unit

Page 12-2 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e 12. Abbreviations & Acronyms
Abbreviation/Acronym Definition
PTC; ptc Positive Thermocouple
Pu Per unit
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
r/min; r/minute Revolutions per minute
Rad/s Radians/second
Rads Radians
Rads/s Radians/second
REF; Ref Reference
Regen Regenerative
RES; Res Resistor
REV; Rev Reverse
Rms Root Mean Square
RPM Revolutions per minute
Rr Rotor Resistance
Rs Stator Resistance
RTS Request to send
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
RX; Rx Receive
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SF Status Flag
SFE Sinusoidal Front End
SK Socket
SMPS Switched Mode Power Supply
Speed Amp Speed Amplifier
SqRoot Square Root
Sqrt Square Root
SRC Source
Sub Subtract
Sum Summing
Sync; Synch; Synchro Synchronising
T. Const Time constant
Tacho Tachogenerator
TB Terminal Block
TC Time Constant
Tc Time constant
Temp Temperature
Thresh Threshold
TP Test Point
TQ; Tq Torque
Tr Rotor Time Constant
Trib Tributary
TX; Tx Transmit
UL Underwriters Laboratory
V Voltage
V mode Voltage Mode
Vac Voltage ac
Var Variable
VCOM FIP variable of Communications
Vd Quadrature component of mains voltage
Vdc Voltage dc
Vdc DC Link Voltage
-ve Negative
Volts Voltage
Vq In phase component of mains voltage
VVVF Variable Voltage Variable Frequency
Xcouple Cross Coupler
ZCD Zero Crossing Detection

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Page 12-3
12. Abbreviations & Acronyms ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Page 12-4 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e General Subject Index

INDEXES

Introduction
This index applies to the English Edition of the T1679 Software Manual for the ALSPA MV3000 range of
drive products.
The index is prepared with word-by-word alphabetisation and is presented with page numbers for subject
location.
Three indexes are included in the manual. The first index is a General Subject Index. The second index
lists all the Menu and Parameter titles with cross reference to the main subject areas for each item. The
third index lists all the parameters numerically with a cross-reference to Sections 5 and 6 where they are
listed and described.

General Subject Index

internal logic .................................................... 6-169

parameters ............................................... 6-4, 6-172
A preset parameters ........................................... 6-173
sequence of operation.............................. 6-4, 6-171
about this manual..............................................1-1, 1-3
brake function: .............................................. 6-4, 6-167
ac voltage control
avoiding over modulation ..........................6-4, 6-188
network voltage control .............................6-4, 6-188 C
access authority to serial links ..........................8-1, 8-3
CAL run
active sharing outline of vector control ..................................... 6-63
action on sharing error ...................5-41, 6-126, 11-9
disable ......................................................6-3, 6-126 Caution – reset to factory default .................. 3-4, 6-199
application note.......................................10-1, 10-15 commissioning ......................................................... 1-3
sharing threshold .........................5-41, 6-126, 11-14 comparator function blocks
analogue input(s) configuration............................................. 6-4, 6-145
functions .............................................................. 4-3 output ........................................ 6-112, 6-146, 6-161
modes ..................................................................4-3 configuring the drive
monitoring ...................................................6-2, 6-57 for printing ....................................................... 6-123
offset and gain ............................................6-1, 6-41
connecting flag(s)
worked example .....................................6-41 examples of ..................................................... 6-121
options ............................................................... 6-41 how control and status flags are connected .... 6-121
analogue output(s) ..........................................6-1, 6-42 control
fast analogue .................. 5-2, 5-69, 5-73, 6-4, 6-190 scalar mode.............................. 1-3, 5-3, 6-22, 6-193
functions and modes.....................................4-3, 4-4 SFE mode ....................................................... 6-193
monitoring ...................................................6-2, 6-57 structure .......................................................... 6-193
options ............................................................... 6-42 variable voltage variable frequency (VVVF) 5-3, 6-13
scaling ........................................................6-1, 6-43 vector mode.................................................. 1-3, 5-3
analogue reference values..............................6-1, 6-42 Control Block Diagram(s)......................................... 7-3
analogue switches Control System Overview............................. 7-1, 7-3
configuration ................... 6-4, 6-146, 7-1, 7-3, 11-12 introduction.......................................................... 7-3
output......................................................5-51, 6-147 Machine Bridge Control System Overview ... 7-1, 7-3
application example Motor Frequency Control.............................. 7-1, 7-3
for drive file security using ALSPA Drive Coach ....6- Motor Position Controller .............................. 7-1, 7-3
195 Motor Vector Control, Part 1......................... 7-1, 7-3
Motor Vector Control, Part 2......................... 7-1, 7-3
application note(s)
Plant I/O and Serial Links ............................. 7-1, 7-3
active sharing error diagnosis .................10-1, 10-15
Reference Arbitration and Starting/Stopping 7-1, 7-3
commissioning ..........................................10-1, 10-7
SFE Control System Overview ..................... 7-1, 7-3
current control failure ................................10-1, 10-8
SFE Vector Control, Part 1 ........................... 7-1, 7-3
current imbalance .....................................10-1, 10-8
SFE Vector Control, Part 2 ........................... 7-1, 7-3
MODBUS RTU..........................................10-1, 10-8
Trips/Warnings and Diagnostic Monitoring ... 7-1, 7-3
proportional dynamic braking....................10-1, 10-3
temperature trips – operation of................10-1, 10-9 control flag(s)
description .......................... 6-3, 6-112, 6-119, 6-161
listing ................................................. 5-2, 5-75, 5-83
B monitoring.......................................... 6-2, 6-55, 6-56
names ............................................................... 5-83
brake function selecting RUN/STOP control ...................... 6-1, 6-25

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Index Page 1
General Subject Index ALSPA MV3000e

source selection .............................................. 6-120 drive security ........................................................ 6-195

control interface ................................................ 1-1, 1-5 example using ALSPA Drive Coach ................ 6-195
passwords and IDs ...................................6-4, 6-194
control word(s)......................................... 8-5, 8-8, 8-10
dynamic brake
current control bandwidth ............. 5-19, 6-2, 6-66, 11-5 proportional control ...................................10-1, 10-7
current limit ..................................................... 6-1, 6-17 resistor choice.............................................6-3, 6-96
customer support.............................................. 1-1, 1-5 thermostat protection ......................................... 6-98

D E
d.c. injection braking.............................. 6-1, 6-27, 6-28 Economy Flux Mode ........................ 4-5, 5-5, 6-1, 6-13
sequence........................................................... 6-28 EEPROM ...............................................................9-27
datumizing .................................. 5-85, 6-3, 6-132, 9-11 encoder
notes ............................................................... 6-136 loss ....................................................6-2, 6-72, 6-74
default(s) loss ride through – setting up............................. 6-73
parameters for machine bridge, AC fed drive4-1, 4-4 monitor...............................................6-2, 6-72, 6-74
restore .................................... 5-74, 6-5, 6-199, 11-3 speed ....................................... 5-16, 6-2, 6-58, 11-9
settings........................................... 3-1, 3-4, 4-1, 4-3 encoderless..............................................5-3, 6-2, 6-71
setup for drive .............................................. 4-1, 4-3 error handling ..................................................8-1, 8-18
defaults(s) ESP User-defined Page 1 ......................8-1, 8-13, 8-16
parameters for a mains bridge, SFE ............ 4-1, 4-6
ESP User-defined Page 2 ......................8-1, 8-13, 8-16
DELTA .............................................................. 1-1, 1-3
air-cooled drives........................................... 1-1, 1-3 estimation of torque.........................................6-1, 6-20
CDC .................................................................. 9-24
drives........................................................ 6-4, 6-193 F
liquid-cooled drives ...................................... 1-1, 1-3
DELTA identification source ....................... 5-14, 10-10 factory default – return to ..................................3-1, 3-4
diagnostic(s) ..................................................... 9-1, 9-3 fault code(s)
failure of firmware....................................... 9-1, 9-22 trip........................................................................9-6
hints ........................................................... 9-1, 9-20 warning ................................................................9-4
digital input(s) 6-1, 6-2, 6-31, 6-43, 6-44, 6-54, 9-4, 11- feedback compensation ...........................5-6, 6-1, 6-22
7 finding data in the manual .................................1-1, 1-3
functions.............................................................. 4-3
high speed (HSI) ............................................... 6-91 firmware
downloader ......................................5-74, 6-5, 6-196
digital output(s) failure in drive .............................................9-1, 9-22
high speed (HSO) ............................................. 6-90 type..................................................5-74, 6-4, 6-194
direction control ....................................... 5-9, 6-1, 6-32 uploading failed to pc..................................9-1, 9-23
displays fixed reference
in binary...................................................... 6-2, 6-54 configuration ...............................................6-3, 6-94
in hex.......................................................... 6-2, 6-54 control flags .....................................5-26, 5-83, 6-94
on Keypad .................................................. 6-2, 6-54 output........................................................5-27, 6-94
Drive Coach......................................................... 6-123 settings ...................................... 5-1, 5-26, 6-3, 6-94
Drive Data ManagerTM ...................................... 2-1, 2-3 flux limit .........................................................6-65, 6-66
configuring user-defined pages from .......... 8-1, 8-17 fluxing control ................................... 4-5, 5-5, 6-1, 6-13
editing parameters ................................ 2-1, 2-4, 2-6 frequency multiplier ..................................5-6, 6-1, 6-22
entering parameter numbers – shortcut method 2-1,
2-6
functions....................................................... 2-1, 2-3 G
indicators and controls ........................................ 2-3
listing parameters................................................ 2-6 GEM 80
Navigation Key ............................................. 2-1, 2-4 configuring a user-defined page from .........8-1, 8-17
recalling a parameter set.............................. 2-1, 2-7 ESP Error Messages ..................................8-1, 8-18
removal ........................................................ 2-1, 2-6 ESP Protocol ..............................................8-1, 8-12
selecting RUN/STOP Control ..................... 6-1, 6-25 GEM 80-16 and GEM 80-10 N-bus Protocol ...8-1, 8-21
to navigate menus........................................ 2-1, 2-4
to navigate parameters................................. 2-1, 2-4
drive identity ............................... 6-198, 9-1, 9-26, 9-27
H
safety of...................................................... 9-1, 9-27
high speed digital I/O
use of ......................................................... 9-1, 9-27
input frequency .........................................5-26, 6-91
where stored .............................................. 9-1, 9-26
input reference value ................................5-26, 6-92
why copy to CDC ....................................... 9-1, 9-27
mode and function .............................................6-89
drive nominal current .................................. 6-194, 9-24 outputs ............................................................... 6-90
effect of current limit and response speed......... 6-18

Index Page 2 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e General Subject Index

history ASCII. 5-37, 5-40, 6-124, 8-1, 8-3, 8-4, 8-5, 8-6, 8-8,
software ..................................................... 3, 5, 11-1 8-20
history log(s) ................................ 5-1, 5-30, 6-3, 6-103 RTU... 5-37, 5-40, 6-124, 8-1, 8-3, 8-4, 8-5, 8-6, 8-8,
configuring ................................................6-3, 6-103 8-18, 8-20
operation...................................................6-3, 6-103 RTU Error Messages.................................. 8-1, 8-20
playing back................................................9-1, 9-19 mode
starting ......................................................6-3, 6-104 DC Link Current Sensor .................................. 6-182
stop control – trigger settings and limits....6-3, 6-105 fast load power ................................................ 6-183
triggerring..................................................6-3, 6-105 non-SFE .....................................5-1, 5-3, 5-45, 5-46
history record time stamping .........................6-3, 6-105 SFE ............................................ 5-1, 5-3, 5-45, 5-46
mode number.................................. 5-1, 5-3, 5-45, 5-46
I monitor
run/energised ............................................. 6-2, 6-54
inertia compensation monitoring
output............................ 5-16, 5-30, 6-2, 6-57, 6-102 a drive using serial links ............................... 8-1, 8-9
settings .................................... 5-1, 5-29, 6-3, 6-102 analogue inputs .......................................... 6-2, 6-57
input(s) analogue outputs........................................ 6-2, 6-57
analogue ............................................................ 6-41 basic drive .................................. 5-1, 5-13, 6-1, 6-47
digital ....... 6-1, 6-2, 6-31, 6-43, 6-44, 6-54, 9-4, 11-7 basic SFE .................................5-1, 5-61, 6-4, 6-176
control flags ....................................... 6-2, 6-55, 6-56
interlock(s) ............................................................... 4-3 digital input states..................................... 5-15, 6-54
introduction digital output states .................................. 5-15, 6-55
to parameter descriptions .................................... 6-7 encoder speed.......................... 5-16, 6-2, 6-58, 11-9
to parameter listings ............................................ 5-3 general advanced....................................... 6-2, 6-52
speed loop.................................................. 6-2, 6-57
status flags ............................. 6-2, 6-56, 6-57, 6-141
J temperature feedbacks...................... 6-2, 6-52, 9-17
jog speeds.......................................................6-1, 6-32 motor
advanced data............................................ 6-2, 6-60
base frequency....................2-5, 4-5, 5-4, 6-9, 6-198
L base voltage ......................4-5, 5-4, 6-9, 6-198, 11-3
basic data ..................................................... 6-1, 6-9
led(s) derate curve ...................................................... 6-10
fault indicators...............................................9-1, 9-3 equivalent circuit................................ 6-2, 6-61, 6-62
linear V to F (Option 1)..................... 4-5, 5-5, 6-1, 6-13 full load current.................................................. 6-63
load fault detection window settings... 5-1, 5-52, 6-4, 6- full load power ............................ 4-5, 5-4, 6-9, 6-198
152 full load power factor .................. 4-5, 5-4, 6-9, 6-198
magnetisation curve ................................... 6-2, 6-65
Logic Block(s) magnetising current........................................... 6-65
A to D............................................................... 6-112 ptc protection.............................................. 6-1, 6-11
E to H.............................................6-3, 6-114, 6-115 rotor
I to L................................................................. 6-161
automatic temperature compensation . 6-2, 6-
65
M stability ....................................................... 6-1, 6-21
temperature compensation......................... 6-2, 6-64
machine bridge......................................................... 4-3 thermostat protection.................................. 6-1, 6-10
magnetic flux – variation with load .......6-13, 6-14, 6-65 motorised potentiometer
mains bridge ............................................................ 4-3 configuration............................................... 6-2, 6-87
mains voltage monitor MV3000e
disabled ........................................................... 6-185 reading data from ....................................... 8-1, 8-16
ridethrough....................................................... 6-158 writing data to ............................................. 8-1, 8-15
SFE mode.. 3-4, 5-52, 5-66, 5-67, 5-73, 5-86, 6-149, MV3000e Drive Unit
6-175, 6-185, 6-186, 6-187, 6-193, 9-5, 11-7, 11- about it ......................................................... 1-1, 1-4
10
trip avoidance mode ........................................ 6-185
Master Password ................................................. 6-195 N
menu(s) nominal mains voltage .............. 5-41, 5-55, 5-61, 6-125
default parameters........................................4-1, 4-4
listing ............................................. 3-1, 3-4, 3-5, 6-7
overview .......................................................3-1, 3-3 O
MicroCubicle(s)TM
open loop test mode ....................................... 6-2, 6-75
identified by ‘J’ Product Code .......................1-1, 1-4
output enable ......................................................... 6-28
MODBUS™
output(s)

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Index Page 3
General Subject Index ALSPA MV3000e

analogue .................................................... 6-1, 6-42 record .................................... 6-198, 9-1, 9-26, 9-27
digital........................................ 5-75, 6-1, 6-43, 6-55 publication(s) associated
over temperature ................................................... 6-53 Active Energy Management T2002......................1-5
overload duty ..............4-6, 4-7, 5-74, 6-4, 6-193, 6-199 CANopen T2013 ..................................................1-5
Drive Coach T1692..............................................1-5
Dynamic Brake MV3DB T1684 ............................1-5
P MV DELTA Liquid Cooled Drive System T1693...1-5
MV DELTA T1689................................................1-5
parameter(s) proportional dynamic braking AN440,033 ............1-5
additional for operation above base speed. 6-2, 6-65 Publication(s) associated .........................................1-5
attributes ............................................... 4-4, 5-1, 5-3 AC-fed drives T1676............................................1-5
auto-lock action ........................................ 6-3, 6-122
backup....................... 5-74, 6-5, 6-196, 6-197, 6-199 PWM Switching Frequency . 5-39, 6-3, 6-122, 6-125, 6-
description........................................................... 6-7 199
factory default setting ................................... 3-1, 3-4 PWM synchronisation
introduction................................................... 3-1, 3-3 parameters..................................................6-3, 6-92
listing ................................................................... 5-3 slave mode .................................................6-3, 6-92
multiple parameter sets ............................ 6-5, 6-199 PWM synchronisation: 5-42, 6-2, 6-3, 6-89, 6-92, 6-93,
numbers for serial links ....................... 8-1, 8-3, 8-13 6-127, 11-14
overview ....................................................... 3-1, 3-3
range of values.................................................... 5-3
review mode.................................................... 6-122 R
security attributes ......................................... 4-1, 4-4
starting and stopping .................................. 6-1, 6-26 ramp(s)
password(s) alternative set of rates .......................6-1, 6-38, 6-40
default setting............................................... 3-1, 3-3 rates.................................................6-1, 6-37, 6-128
for drive security....................................... 6-4, 6-194 second user ramp ............................6-1, 6-39, 11-12
second user ramp output .................5-11, 6-38, 6-40
PC
uploading failed firmware to ....................... 9-1, 9-23 ramps(s)
with Windows 3.1 or 3.11 Emulation ................. 9-23 second user ramp input ...................5-10, 5-11, 6-39
pcb(s) – changing .................................................... 9-8 reference
shaper
PID controller
input .....................................................6-155
differential action time .............................. 5-24, 6-83
error deadband......................................... 5-24, 6-84 reference sequencer
feedback selection ................................... 5-23, 6-83 mode.........................................................5-24, 6-85
integral action time ................................... 5-23, 6-83 output...............................................5-25, 5-77, 6-86
output ....................................................... 5-24, 6-84 point 1 .......................................................5-24, 6-85
proportional band ..................................... 5-23, 6-83 settings ...................................... 5-1, 5-24, 6-2, 6-85
set point selection ............................................. 6-83 reference shaper
settings....................................... 5-1, 5-23, 6-2, 6-82 output............................................................... 6-155
pointer(s) settings .................................... 5-1, 5-53, 6-4, 6-154
scale......................................................... 6-4, 6-149 ridethrough
source ...................................................... 6-4, 6-149 enable in Vector control ...................5-1, 5-55, 6-158
position enable in VVVF control ....................5-1, 5-55, 6-158
control flags................... 5-46, 6-3, 6-4, 6-137, 6-141 mains voltage monitor...............................6-4, 6-158
control output .................................. 5-46, 6-4, 6-141 operation in general ..................................6-4, 6-158
error ....................................................... 5-46, 6-140 set up ........................................................6-4, 6-159
feedback................................................. 5-46, 6-140 Rr tracker
incher .............................................. 5-85, 6-3, 6-136 using ................................................................ 10-13
monitor ................................................... 5-45, 6-137 RS232
monitoring parameters ............................. 6-3, 6-140 connection details .........................................8-1, 8-4
reference ................................................ 5-46, 6-140 loss of serial link ...........................................8-1, 8-5
shaper ...................................................... 6-3, 6-130 outline protocol specification.........................8-1, 8-4
status flags ............................................... 6-3, 6-140 port and the Keypad .....................................8-1, 8-3
position control Serial Link .......... 5-40, 6-122, 6-123, 6-124, 8-1, 8-3
configuring a drive for............................... 6-3, 6-128 serial port configuration ................................8-1, 8-4
printer specification.............................................. 6-123 RS485
printing broadcast messages - accept .......................8-1, 8-9
configuring the drive for................................... 6-123 connnection details .......................................8-1, 8-7
using a PC to configure drive for ..................... 6-123 drive to drive protocol .................................8-1, 8-11
using Drive Data Manager™ to configure drive for 6- link parity..............................................5-38, 8-1, 8-9
123 loss of serial link ...........................................8-1, 8-8
outline protocol specification.........................8-1, 8-6
Printing ......................................................... 6-3, 6-123
RSVP Protocol............................................8-1, 8-18
product identity ........................... 6-198, 9-1, 9-26, 9-27 Serial Link .....................................................8-1, 8-6
ensure against loss .................................... 9-1, 9-26

Index Page 4 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e General Subject Index

serial port configuration ................................8-1, 8-7 outputs ..................................................... 6-4, 6-148

stop mode(s).......................................... 6-1, 6-26, 6-27
S summing node(s)
A to H ..............................5-1, 5-48, 5-71, 6-4, 6-143
security code(s).................................................... 6-195
Engineer ...................................................6-4, 6-194
Operator ...................................................6-4, 6-194 T
serial communication(s) ........................................... 8-3 temperature feedback............................ 6-2, 6-52, 9-17
serial number temperature(s)
of DELTA Interface Board.................................. 6-58 for bridge ........................................................... 6-53
of drive ............................................................... 6-58 for CDC electronics ........................................... 6-53
of Power Interface Board ................................... 6-58 for DB ................................................................ 6-53
of SMPS ............................................................ 6-58 for drive ............................................................. 6-53
setup review mode ................................................. 5-40 trips ................................................................... 6-53
SFE mode warn/trip cause ....................................... 5-54, 6-157
menus ............................................ 3-1, 3-4, 3-5, 6-7 warn/trip type.......................................... 5-54, 6-156
skip speed template upload ........................ 5-74, 6-5, 6-196, 6-199
set-up......................................... 5-1, 5-27, 6-3, 6-95 torque
slip compensation gain.............................5-5, 6-1, 6-17 effect of torque limiting and response speed ..... 6-20
estimation of ............................................... 6-1, 6-20
speed limit settings................................ 5-1, 5-12, 6-1, 6-45
and torque references...................................8-1, 8-9 maximum available............................ 5-16, 6-2, 6-57
controller .....................................................6-2, 6-76 monitor ..........................5-1, 5-33, 6-3, 6-110, 6-111
droop .................................................5-22, 6-2, 6-78 reference .................................................. 6-58, 6-80
feedback selection ......................................6-2, 6-71 Slave Helper Drives – Application Example 8-1, 8-12
jog...............................................................6-1, 6-32
limit criteria for maximum ................................... 6-33 transferring parameters ............ 5-74, 6-5, 6-196, 6-199
limitations of tacho feedback.......................6-2, 6-71 trim reference
limits ...........................................................6-1, 6-33 control ........................................................ 6-2, 6-88
loop – error deadband .......................5-22, 6-2, 6-77 output ................................................................ 6-88
maximum ................................................6-33, 6-128 trip(s) .............................................................. 6-49, 9-3
maximum/minimum examples ........................... 6-33 action in the event of .................................... 9-1, 9-4
monitor.............................................5-33, 6-3, 6-110 action when tripped ...................................... 9-1, 9-4
profiler.......................................................6-3, 6-130 auto-reset – configuring............................ 6-3, 6-107
reference – time constant ....................5-9, 6-1, 6-36 avoidance ..... 5-10, 5-66, 6-3, 6-39, 6-124, 6-185, 6-
references....................... 6-1, 6-31, 6-32, 6-34, 6-35 199, 11-3
top......................................................................6-36 causes ................................................................. 9-7
speed trim settings ....................... 5-1, 5-29, 6-3, 6-101 codes specific to internal dynamic brakes .. 9-1, 9-24
speed/torque graph .......................................5-71, 6-45 configuring for auto-reset ......................... 6-3, 6-107
current control failure – application note... 10-1, 10-8
Square Law V to F (Option 2) .......... 4-5, 5-5, 6-1, 6-13 current imbalance................................................ 9-9
square roots ...........................................6-4, 6-144, 7-3 current imbalance – application note........ 10-1, 10-8
start/stop fault codes ........................................................... 9-6
backup ............................................................... 6-29 help screen........................................................ 9-19
control flags ....................................................... 6-26 history..............................5-13, 6-2, 6-49, 11-5, 11-7
DC Injection Braking ..........................6-1, 6-27, 6-28 on datumize fail ................................................. 9-11
keypad/remote ................................................... 6-25 operation of temperature trips .................. 10-1, 10-9
normal stop ........................................................ 6-27 over temperature ............................................... 6-53
output enable ..................................................... 6-28 resetting ....................................................... 9-1, 9-4
rapid stop ........................................................... 6-27 temperature threshold ....................... 6-2, 6-52, 9-17
start mode(s)................................ 4-5, 5-7, 6-1, 6-24 text message ................................................ 9-1, 9-3
synchrostart ................................................5-7, 6-24 time since ................................................... 6-2, 6-49
synchrostart power factor control................6-1, 6-29 timed over-current ........................... 5-32, 6-107, 9-7
under temperature............................................. 6-53
starting and stopping status ................................... 6-26
user ...............................5-87, 6-2, 6-49, 6-50, 11-12
stator user trip 1 ........................................ 6-49, 9-10, 9-11
enable Rs tracker...............................6-2, 6-67, 6-69 user trip 2 ........................................ 5-13, 6-49, 9-11
equivalent circuit ................................................ 6-20 using the HELP Key ................................... 9-1, 9-19
status flag(s) viewing ......................................................... 9-1, 9-3
description ..........................6-3, 6-112, 6-119, 6-161
generator outputs............................................. 6-118
generator settings .................... 5-1, 5-36, 6-3, 6-117 U
listing ..........................................................5-2, 5-75
under temperature ................................................. 6-53
monitoring .............................. 6-2, 6-56, 6-57, 6-141
uni-directional approach bias ........................ 6-3, 6-136
status word
inputs ........................................................6-4, 6-148 user menu configuration ............................... 6-4, 6-142

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Index Page 5
General Subject Index ALSPA MV3000e

user page 1 viewing

parameters 1 to 20 ..................................... 8-1, 8-16 using help key......................................................9-3
size.................................................... 5-37, 8-1, 8-16 using navigation keys ..........................................9-3
user page 2 voltage grades
parameters 1 to 20 ..................................... 8-1, 8-16 alternatives ...............................................6-4, 6-193
size.................................................... 5-38, 8-1, 8-16 volts boost ........................................ 4-5, 5-5, 6-1, 6-16
user text language ........................ 4-5, 5-74, 6-5, 6-196 VVVF
user-defined ESP pages................................. 8-1, 8-16 absolute minimum frequency ...............5-5, 6-1, 6-17
user-defined page 1........................................ 8-1, 8-16 current limit .................................................6-1, 6-17
economy flux mode............................................ 6-13
user-defined page 2........................................ 8-1, 8-16 estimation of torque ....................................6-1, 6-20
feedback compensation .......................5-6, 6-1, 6-22
V fixed volts boost ........................... 4-5, 5-5, 6-1, 6-16
fluxing control............................................6-13, 6-14
variable volts boost.............. 5-6, 6-1, 6-16, 6-17, 6-150 frequency multiplier..............................5-6, 6-1, 6-22
linear V to F .......................................................6-13
vector control
modulation limit.......................... 5-6, 6-1, 6-22, 11-4
calibration run.................................................... 6-63
motor stability..............................................6-1, 6-21
cross coupler gains .................................... 6-2, 6-69
slip compensation gain ........................5-5, 6-1, 6-17
current control bandwidth ......... 5-19, 6-2, 6-66, 11-5
square law V to F............................................... 6-13
current controller gains............................... 6-2, 6-68
torque limit ..................................................6-1, 6-19
flux controller output .......................................... 6-67
trip avoidance threshold....... 5-10, 6-39, 6-199, 11-3
flux limit ................5-19, 5-84, 6-2, 6-65, 6-66, 6-150
variable volts boost ......... 5-6, 6-1, 6-16, 6-17, 6-150
fluxing mode............................................... 6-2, 6-67
high dynamic mode ................ 5-19, 6-60, 6-66, 11-4
limitations of encoderless ........................... 6-2, 6-71 W
motor magnetising current................................. 6-60
motor peak current ............................................ 6-60 warning(s)
motor temperature compensation ..... 5-18, 6-2, 6-64 action in the event of.....................................9-1, 9-4
orientation controller gains ......................... 6-2, 6-69 display ..........................................................9-1, 9-3
power limit . 5-7, 5-20, 5-27, 5-28, 5-66, 5-79, 6-2, 6- display of most recent ...................................9-1, 9-3
27, 6-70, 6-97, 6-99, 6-184, 6-198, 11-4, 11-10, fault codes ...........................................................9-4
12-2 viewing..........................................................9-1, 9-3
Rs gain factor ........................... 5-20, 6-2, 6-69, 11-8
Rs tracker.......................................... 6-2, 6-67, 6-69

Index Page 6 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e Parameter Number Index

Menu and Parameter Title Index

Analogue Output 2 Scaling ........................... 5-12, 6-43

1 Analogue Output 2 Signal............................. 5-11, 6-42
Analogue Output 2 Value............ 5-12, 5-16, 6-43, 6-57
100ms Sharing Threshold ................5-41, 6-126, 11-14
Analogue Reference 1 Gain Adjust............... 5-11, 6-41
Analogue Reference 1 Input Mode ............... 5-11, 6-41
A Analogue Reference 1 Offset Adjust............. 5-11, 6-41
Absolute Minimum Frequency..................5-5, 6-1, 6-17 Analogue Reference 1 Value ...... 5-11, 5-16, 6-42, 6-57
AC Loss Ride-through.................................5-40, 6-125 Analogue Reference 2 Gain Adjust............... 5-11, 6-41
AC Loss Ridethrough Enable ......................5-55, 6-158 Analogue Reference 2 Input Mode ............... 5-11, 6-41
Acceleration Rate Forward........... 5-9, 5-10, 6-37, 6-38 Analogue Reference 2 Offset Adjust............. 5-11, 6-41
Acceleration Rate Forward 2.........................5-10, 6-38 Analogue Reference 2 Value ...... 5-11, 5-16, 6-42, 6-57
Acceleration Rate Reverse .......... 5-9, 5-10, 6-37, 6-38 Analogue Reference Filter Time Constant.... 5-11, 6-42
Acceleration Rate Reverse 2 ........................5-10, 6-38 Application Code Developer ........................... 5-2, 5-68
Action on ................................................................ 5-14 Approach Bias High .................................... 5-44, 6-136
Action on Choke PTC Loss .........................5-63, 6-179 Approach Bias Low..................................... 5-44, 6-136
Action on DB Overload..................................5-28, 6-97 Auto Restart Factor..................................... 5-66, 6-185
Action on Encoder Loss ......................................... 6-73 Auto Volts Boost ............................................. 5-5, 6-16
Action on MTRIP (Over-temperature) .............5-4, 6-11 Auto/Manual KpKi Select ............................ 5-62, 6-178
Action on RS232 Timeout ...............................5-37, 8-5 Auto-lock Action................................... 5-40, 6-3, 6-122
Action on SFE Reference Loss ...................5-66, 6-181 Automatic Temperature Compensation Enable ..... 5-85
Action on Sharing Error......................5-41, 6-126, 11-9 Auto-reset Delay .............................. 5-32, 6-107, 6-108
Active Current (%).................................................. 6-52 Auto-reset Healthy Time .................. 5-32, 6-107, 6-108
Active Current (%) - SFE.............................5-61, 6-176 Auto-reset Settings ....................... 5-1, 5-32, 6-3, 6-107
Active Current (A) - SFE .............................5-61, 6-176 Auto-resets Remaining ...................... 5-32, 5-76, 6-108
Active Current Demand...............................5-64, 6-180
Active Current Demand (%) ....5-61, 5-64, 6-176, 6-180 B
Active Current Demand (A) .....5-61, 5-64, 6-176, 6-180
Backup Parameters .................. 5-74, 6-5, 6-196, 6-199
Active Current Demand Negative Limit Source .5-64, 6-
180 Backup Speed Feedback Source ................. 5-20, 6-72
Active Current Demand Positive Limit Source...5-64, 6- Backup Speed Reference............................... 5-8, 6-31
180 Backup Torque Reference............................ 5-23, 6-81
Active Current Negative Limit - SFE. 4-7, 5-61, 5-79, 6- Basic Drive Monitoring.................... 5-1, 5-13, 6-1, 6-47
150, 6-175, 6-199 Basic SFE Monitoring Menu .........5-1, 5-61, 6-4, 6-176
Active Current Offset...................................5-62, 6-179 Basic SFE Setup Menu................................... 5-1, 5-60
Active Current Positive Limit - SFE ...........6-175, 6-180 Brake Function
Active Current Reference Scale ..................5-64, 6-180 Brake Hold Off Time.......................................... 5-60
Active Parameter Set ..................................5-74, 6-199 Brake Release Input...................... 5-60, 5-87, 6-172
Brake Release Time.................... 5-60, 6-171, 6-173
Active Sharing Disable .....................5-41, 6-126, 11-14 Enable .................................................... 5-60, 6-172
Advanced Drive Monitoring . 5-1, 5-15, 6-2, 6-52, 11-13 Preset Parameters ...................... 5-60, 6-173, 6-174
Advanced SFE Setup Menu............................5-1, 5-62 Release Fail Time .................................. 5-60, 6-173
Release Reference Time............. 5-60, 6-171, 6-173
Advanced Temperature Monitoring ....5-41, 6-126, 11-4 Run Request ................................. 5-60, 5-87, 6-172
Allow Keypad Removal ........................2-7, 5-40, 6-122 Start Reset Time ......................... 5-60, 6-172, 6-173
Alternative Drive Voltage Grades ................5-74, 6-193 Torque Prove Threshold... 5-60, 6-171, 6-172, 6-173
Torque Prove Time...................... 5-60, 6-171, 6-173
Amplitude Timer ...............................5-63, 6-179, 11-10
Zero Speed Threshold............................ 5-60, 6-172
Analogue Output 1 Mode ..............................5-11, 6-42
Bridge Linearisation Constant
Analogue Output 1 Polarity ...........................5-11, 6-43 at 1.25kHz ................................................ 5-17, 6-59
Analogue Output 1 Scaling ...........................5-11, 6-43 at 2.5kHz .................................................. 5-17, 6-59
Analogue Output 1 Signal .............................5-11, 6-42 at 5kHz .............................................................. 6-59
at 7.5kHz ........................................................... 6-59
Analogue Output 1 Value ........... 5-11, 5-16, 6-43, 6-57
Bridge Linearisation Time
Analogue Output 2 Mode ..............................5-11, 6-42 at 1.25kHz ................................................ 5-17, 6-59
Analogue Output 2 Polarity ...........................5-11, 6-43 at 2.5kHz .................................................. 5-17, 6-59

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Index Page 7
Menu and Parameter Title Index ALSPA MV3000e

at 5kHz .............................................................. 6-59 Input 1.....................................................5-50, 6-145

at 7.5kHz ........................................................... 6-59 Input 2.....................................................5-50, 6-145
Mode.......................................................5-50, 6-145
Output ............................................5-50, 5-81, 6-146
C Comparator W
CDC CAN Port................................................ 5-2, 5-68 Fixed Reference .....................................5-50, 6-145
Hysteresis ...............................................5-50, 6-145
CDC CANopen ............................................... 5-2, 5-68 Input 1.....................................................5-50, 6-145
CDC DeviceNet .............................................. 5-2, 5-68 Input 2.....................................................5-50, 6-145
CDC Electronics Temperature...5-1, 5-15, 6-2, 6-52, 6- Mode.......................................................5-50, 6-145
53, 11-13 Output ............................................5-50, 5-81, 6-146
Channel Data – 1 to 10...................... 5-30, 6-103, 9-20 Comparator X
Fixed Reference .....................................5-50, 6-145
Channel Mode – 1 to 10 ............................. 5-30, 6-104
Hysteresis ...............................................5-50, 6-145
Choke PTC Trip Resistance ....................... 5-63, 6-179 Input 1.....................................................5-50, 6-145
Comparator A Hysteresis............................ 5-33, 6-112 Input 2.....................................................5-50, 6-145
Comparator A Input .................................... 5-33, 6-112 Mode.......................................................5-50, 6-145
Output ............................................5-50, 5-81, 6-146
Comparator A Mode ................................... 5-33, 6-113
Configuration Settings.................. 5-2, 5-73, 6-4, 6-193
Comparator A Threshold ............................ 5-33, 6-112
Control Flag
Comparator B Hysteresis..................................... 6-114 Alternative Parameter Set Select (CF190)....5-75, 6-
Comparator B Input ............................................. 6-114 200
Comparator B Mode ............................................ 6-114 Backup Run/Stop Select (CF123).............5-83, 6-29
Backup Start (CF125) ...............................5-83, 6-29
Comparator B Threshold ..................................... 6-114
Backup Stop (CF124) ...............................5-83, 6-29
Comparator C Hysteresis .................................... 6-114 Brake Function Brake Release Input (CF189) . 6-172
Comparator C Input ............................................. 6-114 Brake Function Run Request (CF188)............. 6-172
Comparator C Mode ............................................ 6-114 Clamp Zero Reference (CF13) ..........5-9, 5-83, 6-35
Clamp Zero Speed (CF19)...............5-22, 5-83, 6-76
Comparator C Threshold ..................................... 6-114 Current Limit Defeat (CF114)... 5-5, 5-83, 5-85, 6-19
Comparator D Hysteresis .................................... 6-114 Datum Approach (CF84)...... 5-44, 5-83, 5-85, 6-137
Comparator D Input ............................................. 6-114 Datum Input (CF85) .......................5-44, 5-83, 6-137
Datum Move Permit (CF82) . 5-44, 5-83, 5-85, 6-137
Comparator D Mode ............................................ 6-114
DB Enable (CF110) ............... 5-28, 5-83, 5-85, 6-97
Comparator D Threshold ..................................... 6-114 DB Resistor Thermostat (CF111) ...5-28, 5-83, 5-85,
Comparator I 6-98
Hysteresis .............................................. 5-55, 6-161 Delay A Input (CF36) .....................5-34, 5-83, 6-113
Input ....................................................... 5-55, 6-161 Delay B Input (CF41) ..............................5-83, 6-114
Mode ...................................................... 5-55, 6-161 Delay C Input (CF46) .....................5-83, 5-84, 6-114
Threshold ............................................... 5-55, 6-161 Delay D Input (CF51) .....................5-83, 5-84, 6-114
Comparator J Delay I Input (CF144) ....................5-56, 5-86, 6-162
Hysteresis ......................................................... 5-56 Delay J Input (CF147)....................5-56, 5-86, 6-162
Input .................................................................. 5-56 Delay K Input (CF150) ...................5-57, 5-86, 6-163
Mode ................................................................. 5-56 Delay L Input (CF153) ...................5-58, 5-86, 6-163
Threshold .......................................................... 5-56 Direction (CF3) .........................................5-83, 6-32
Disable Speed Loop (CF20) ............5-22, 5-83, 6-76
Comparator K Disable Torque (CF24) .......... 5-12, 5-83, 6-45, 6-80
Hysteresis ......................................................... 5-56 Enable Inching (CF89) ......... 5-44, 5-83, 5-85, 6-137
Input .................................................................. 5-56 Enable Inertia Compensation (CF74) ..5-29, 5-83, 5-
Mode ................................................................. 5-57 84, 6-102
Threshold .......................................................... 5-56 Enable Manual Temperature Compensation (CF77)
Comparator L .......................................... 5-18, 5-83, 5-84, 6-64
Hysteresis ......................................................... 5-57 Enable Speed Demand Clamp (CF117) ...5-83, 6-35
Input .................................................................. 5-57 Enable Speed Loop Deadband (CF73)5-22, 5-83, 5-
Mode ................................................................. 5-57 84, 6-78
Threshold .......................................................... 5-57 Enable Speed Trim (CF70) .. 5-29, 5-83, 5-84, 6-101
Comparator U Enable Torque Reference (CF72)...5-22, 5-83, 5-84,
Fixed Reference..................................... 5-49, 6-145 6-80
Hysteresis .............................................. 5-50, 6-145 Enable Uni-directional Approach (CF90) .5-44, 5-83,
Input 1 ........................................... 5-49, 5-50, 6-145 5-85, 6-137
Input 2 .................................................... 5-49, 6-145 Enable Variable Volts Boost (CF126) 5-6, 5-83, 6-16
Mode ...................................................... 5-50, 6-145 Fixed Reference Select 0 (CF30) ....5-26, 5-83, 6-94
Output ........................................... 5-50, 5-81, 6-146 Fixed Reference Select 1 (CF31) ....5-26, 5-83, 6-94
Fixed Reference Select 2 (CF32) ....5-26, 5-83, 6-94
Comparator V
Fixed Reference Select 3 (CF33) ....5-27, 5-83, 6-94
Fixed Reference..................................... 5-50, 6-145
Flux Limit Enable (CF68) ....... 5-19, 5-83, 5-84, 6-66
Hysteresis .............................................. 5-50, 6-145
Force Encoder Loss (CF119). 5-21, 5-83, 5-86, 6-74

Index Page 8 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e Menu and Parameter Title Index

Force Position Invalid (CF81) .... 5-44, 5-83, 5-85, 6- Logic Block Q Input 4 (CF175) ............... 5-59, 6-166
137 Logic Block R Input 1 (CF176) ............... 5-59, 6-166
Force Position Valid (CF80)..5-44, 5-83, 5-85, 6-137 Logic Block R Input 2 (CF177) ............... 5-59, 6-166
Forward Inhibit (CF12) .......................5-9, 5-83, 6-35 Logic Block R Input 3 (CF178) ............... 5-59, 6-166
Inching Down (CF96) .....................5-45, 5-83, 6-137 Logic Block R Input 4 (CF179) ............... 5-59, 6-166
Inching Up (CF95) .........................5-44, 5-83, 6-137 Logic Block S Input 1 (CF180)................ 5-59, 6-167
Inhibit Negative Torque (CF23).. 5-12, 5-83, 6-45, 6- Logic Block S Input 2 (CF181)................ 5-59, 6-167
80 Logic Block S Input 3 (CF182)................ 5-59, 6-167
Inhibit Positive Torque (CF22) 5-12, 5-83, 6-45, 6-80 Logic Block S Input 4 (CF183)................ 5-59, 6-167
Jog Enable (CF8)......................................5-83, 6-32 Logic Block T Input 1 (CF184)................ 5-60, 6-167
Jog Speed 1/2 Select (CF121)...........5-9, 5-83, 6-32 Logic Block T Input 2 (CF185)................ 5-60, 6-167
Keypad/Remote (CF116) .................5-61, 5-83, 6-25 Logic Block T Input 3 (CF186)................ 5-60, 6-167
Latch A Reset (CF40) ...........5-34, 5-83, 5-84, 6-114 Logic Block T Input 4 (CF187)................ 5-60, 6-167
Latch A Set (CF39) ...............5-34, 5-83, 5-84, 6-113 Motor Thermostat Input (CF113) ..5-4, 5-83, 5-85, 6-
Latch B Reset (CF45) ....................5-83, 5-84, 6-114 10
Latch B Set (CF44) ........................5-83, 5-84, 6-114 Motorised Potentiometer Lower (CF35) .. 5-25, 5-83,
Latch C Reset (CF50)....................5-83, 5-84, 6-114 6-87
Latch C Set (CF49)........................5-83, 5-84, 6-114 Motorised Potentiometer Preset (CF71) .. 5-25, 5-83,
Latch D Reset (CF55) .............................5-83, 6-114 6-87
Latch D Set (CF54)........................5-83, 5-84, 6-114 Motorised Potentiometer Raise (CF34)5-25, 5-83, 6-
Limit Ramp Deviation (CF122).........5-10, 5-83, 6-38 87
Logic Block A Input 1 (CF37) 5-34, 5-83, 5-84, 6-113 Output Enable (CF25) .............. 5-7, 5-61, 5-83, 6-28
Logic Block A Input 2 (CF38) 5-34, 5-83, 5-84, 6-113 Parameter Set Select (CF190) ............... 5-75, 6-200
Logic Block B Input 1 (CF42) .........5-83, 5-84, 6-114 Perform Datum Movement (CF83) . 5-44, 5-83, 5-85,
Logic Block B Input 2 (CF43) .........5-83, 5-84, 6-114 6-137
Logic Block C Input 1 (CF47).........5-83, 5-84, 6-114 PID Integral Freeze (CF26) ............. 5-24, 5-83, 6-84
Logic Block C Input 2 (CF48).........5-83, 5-84, 6-114 Position Learn Now (CF101) 5-45, 5-83, 5-85, 6-139
Logic Block D Input 1 (CF52).........5-83, 5-84, 6-114 Position Reference 1/2 Selection (CF88) 5-45, 5-83,
Logic Block D Input 2 (CF53).........5-83, 5-84, 6-114 6-139
Logic Block E Input 1 (CF56) 5-34, 5-83, 5-84, 6-115 Position Reference Select (CF92) . 5-46, 5-83, 6-139
Logic Block E Input 2 (CF57) .........5-34, 5-83, 6-115 Position Reference Select 0 (CF91)5-46, 5-83, 5-85,
Logic Block E Input 3 (CF58) .........5-34, 5-83, 6-115 6-139
Logic Block F Input 1 (CF59) .........5-83, 5-84, 6-115 Position Reference Select 2 (CF93) .... 5-46, 5-83, 6-
Logic Block F Input 2 (CF60) .........5-83, 5-84, 6-115 139
Logic Block F Input 3 (CF61) .........5-83, 5-84, 6-115 Position Reference Select 3 (CF94) .... 5-46, 5-83, 6-
Logic Block G Input 1 (CF62)5-35, 5-83, 5-84, 6-116 139
Logic Block G Input 2 (CF63)5-35, 5-83, 5-84, 6-116 Ramp Bypass ................5-10, 5-83, 5-86, 6-37, 6-40
Logic Block G Input 3 (CF64)5-35, 5-83, 5-84, 6-116 Ramp Bypass (CF18) ...................... 5-10, 5-83, 6-37
Logic Block H Input 1 (CF65)5-35, 5-83, 5-84, 6-116 Ramp Freeze Down Forward (CF16) .. 5-10, 5-83, 6-
Logic Block H Input 2 (CF66).........5-35, 5-83, 6-116 37
Logic Block H Input 3 (CF67).........5-35, 5-83, 6-116 Ramp Freeze Down Negative (CF137) ............. 6-40
Logic Block I Input 1 (CF145) .................5-56, 6-162 Ramp Freeze Down Positive (CF136). 5-10, 5-86, 6-
Logic Block I Input 2 (CF146) .................5-56, 6-162 40
Logic Block J Input 1 (CF148).......................... 6-162 Ramp Freeze Down Reverse (CF17) .. 5-10, 5-83, 6-
Logic Block J Input 2 (CF149).................5-56, 6-162 37
Logic Block K Input 1 (CF151) ................5-57, 6-163 Ramp Freeze Up Forward (CF14)... 5-10, 5-83, 6-37
Logic Block K Input 2 (CF152) ................5-57, 6-163 Ramp Freeze Up Negative (CF135).................. 6-40
Logic Block L Input 1 (CF154) ................5-58, 6-163 Ramp Freeze Up Positive (CF134) . 5-10, 5-86, 6-40
Logic Block L Input 2 (CF155) ................5-58, 6-163 Ramp Freeze Up Reverse (CF15)............ 5-10, 6-37
Logic Block M Input 1 (CF156) ...............5-58, 6-164 Rapid Stop (CF2) ..................................... 5-83, 6-26
Logic Block M Input 2 (CF157) ...............5-58, 6-164 Reference 1 Select (CF4)......................... 5-83, 6-32
Logic Block M Input 3 (CF158) ...............5-58, 6-164 Reference 2 Select (CF5)......................... 5-83, 6-32
Logic Block M Input 4 (CF159) ...............5-58, 6-164 Reference 3 Select (CF6)......................... 5-83, 6-32
Logic Block N Input 1 (CF160)................5-58, 6-165 Reference 4 Select (CF7).................................. 5-83
Logic Block N Input 2 (CF161)................5-58, 6-165 Reference Sequencer Freeze (CF27) . 5-25, 5-83, 6-
Logic Block N Input 3 (CF162)................5-58, 6-165 86
Logic Block N Input 4 (CF163)................5-58, 6-165 Reference Sequencer Reset (CF29)5-25, 5-83, 6-86
Logic Block O Input 1 (CF164)................5-58, 6-165 Reference Sequencer Trigger (CF28) . 5-25, 5-83, 6-
Logic Block O Input 2 (CF165)................5-58, 6-165 86
Logic Block O Input 3 (CF166)................5-58, 6-165 Reset Encoder Loss (CF120) . 5-21, 5-83, 5-86, 6-74
Logic Block O Input 4 (CF167)................5-58, 6-165 Reverse Inhibit (CF11) ...................... 5-9, 5-83, 6-35
Logic Block P Input 1 (CF168) ................5-59, 6-165 Run History (CF78) .............. 5-30, 5-83, 5-85, 6-104
Logic Block P Input 2 (CF169) ................5-59, 6-165 Select Backup Feedback (CF118).. 5-20, 5-83, 6-72,
Logic Block P Input 3 (CF170) ................5-59, 6-165 6-73
Logic Block P Input 4 (CF171) ................5-59, 6-165 Select Ramp 2 (CF127).5-10, 5-39, 5-83, 5-86, 6-38
Logic Block Q Input 1 (CF172)................5-59, 6-166 Set High Limit (CF86) ........... 5-42, 5-83, 5-85, 6-137
Logic Block Q Input 2 (CF173)................5-59, 6-166 Set Low Limit (CF87)............ 5-42, 5-83, 5-85, 6-137
Logic Block Q Input 3 (CF174)................5-59, 6-166

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Index Page 9
Menu and Parameter Title Index ALSPA MV3000e

Speed Loop Gain Select (CF76) 5-22, 5-83, 5-84, 6- Current Limit Source .......................................5-5, 6-18
76 Current Sensor Burden .......................................... 5-62
Speed Loop Integral Freeze (CF107)....... 5-22, 5-85
Speed Trim Scale Select (CF75) 5-29, 5-83, 5-84, 6- Current Sensor Turns............................................. 5-62
101
Start (CF1) ...................................................... 6-175 D
Status Flag Generator Down (CF99)... 5-36, 5-39, 5-
83, 6-118 Datum Position Offset High .........................5-43, 6-132
Status Flag Generator Freeze (CF97). 5-36, 5-83, 6-
Datum Position Offset Low..........................5-43, 6-132
118
Status Flag Generator Reset (CF100). 5-36, 5-39, 5- Datum Sequence .............................5-44, 6-133, 6-135
83, 5-85, 6-118 Datum Speed 1 ................................5-44, 6-133, 6-135
Status Flag Generator Up (CF98) . 5-36, 5-83, 6-118 Datum Speed 2 ................................5-44, 6-133, 6-135
Stop History (CF79) ............. 5-31, 5-83, 5-85, 6-104
Suicide PID Controller (CF69) 5-24, 5-83, 5-84, 6-84 Datum Speed 3 .....................5-44, 6-133, 6-135, 6-136
Torque Limit Enable (CF115) ............ 5-5, 5-83, 6-20 Days Energised.............................................5-15, 6-54
Torque Limit Selection (CF21) ... 5-12, 5-83, 6-45, 6- Days Run ......................................................5-15, 6-54
174
DB 1 Temperature.......................................5-53, 6-156
Trip Reset (CF9) ...................................... 5-83, 6-49
User Alert 1 (CF198) .............. 5-14, 5-87, 6-50, 9-15 DB 2 Temperature.......................................5-53, 6-156
User Alert 10 (CF207) ............ 5-15, 5-88, 6-50, 9-15 DB Control Mode..................................5-28, 6-98, 10-7
User Alert 2 (CF199) ....................... 5-14, 6-50, 9-15 DB Current ..................................................5-28, 6-100
User Alert 3 (CF200) .............. 5-14, 5-87, 6-50, 9-15
User Alert 4 (CF201) .............. 5-14, 5-87, 6-50, 9-15 DB Power ....................................................5-28, 6-100
User Alert 5 (CF202) .............. 5-14, 5-87, 6-50, 9-15 DB Proportional Control ......................................... 5-29
User Alert 6 (CF203) .............. 5-14, 5-88, 6-50, 9-15 DB Resistor Average Power..... 5-27, 6-96, 6-198, 11-3
User Alert 7 (CF204) .............. 5-14, 5-88, 6-50, 9-15
DB Resistor Fault Auto-reset Enable ..........5-32, 6-108
User Alert 8 (CF205) .............. 5-14, 5-88, 6-50, 9-15
User Alert 9 (CF206) .............. 5-15, 5-88, 6-50, 9-15 DB Resistor Maximum Power .. 5-27, 6-97, 6-198, 11-3
User Trip 1 (CF10) .......................... 5-13, 5-83, 6-49 DB Resistor Value.................... 5-27, 6-96, 6-198, 11-3
User Trip 2 (CF112) ........................ 5-14, 5-83, 6-49 DB Temperature...................................5-15, 6-53, 6-54
Control Flags DB Vdc Reference ........................................5-28, 6-98
0 to 99 Connection Settings ..... 5-1, 5-39, 6-3, 6-121
0-15 .......................................................... 5-16, 6-55 DB Vdc Reference Scale ..............................5-28, 6-98
100 to 127 Connection Settings5-1, 5-39, 6-3, 6-121 DB Vdc Reference Source Selector ..............5-28, 6-98
112-127 .................................................... 5-16, 6-55 DB Voltage Threshold .............. 5-27, 6-97, 6-198, 11-3
16-31 ........................................................ 5-16, 6-55
DC Fed Drives Rating .................................5-61, 6-175
32-47 ........................................................ 5-16, 6-55
41 to 45 ........................................................... 6-114 DC Injection Current........................................5-7, 6-28
46 to 50 ........................................................... 6-114 DC Injection Delay ..........................................5-7, 6-28
48-63 ........................................................ 5-16, 6-55 DC Injection Duration ......................................5-7, 6-28
51 to 55 ........................................................... 6-114
64-79 ........................................................ 5-16, 6-55 DC Injection Speed .........................................5-7, 6-28
96-111 ...................................................... 5-16, 6-55 DC Link Control Ki - SFE ............................5-62, 6-178
Control Flags 128-143 .................................. 5-16, 6-55 DC Link Control Kp - SFE ...........................5-62, 6-178
Control Flags 144-159 ....................... 5-17, 6-55, 11-13 DC Link Controller Bandwidth - SFE ...........5-62, 6-178
Control Flags 160-175 .................................. 5-17, 6-55 DC Link Controller Current Demand .................... 6-176
Control Flags 176-191 ....................... 5-17, 6-55, 11-13 DC Link Controller Ki...................................5-55, 6-160
Control Flags 192-207 ....................... 5-17, 6-55, 11-13 DC Link Controller Kp .................................5-55, 6-160
Control Structure ................................................. 6-193 DC Link Current - SFE .....................5-61, 6-176, 6-182
Cooling Fan Type ........................................... 5-4, 6-10 DC Link Feedback Source ..........................5-63, 6-181
Copy Parameter Set ................................... 5-75, 6-200 DC Link Pre-charge Threshold...........5-62, 6-178, 11-4
CPU Usage................................................... 5-17, 6-58 DC Link Voltage5-15, 5-60, 5-61, 5-66, 6-2, 6-39, 6-52,
Cross Coupler Gain Factor .................. 5-20, 6-69, 11-8 6-68, 6-175, 6-176, 6-178, 6-180, 6-181, 6-186, 6-
199, 9-7, 11-3, 12-3
Cross Coupler Time Constant ...................... 6-69, 11-8
DC Link Voltage - SFE ..............................6-180, 6-181
Current Bandwidth.................... 5-62, 6-178, 11-4, 11-6
DC Link Voltage Controller Gains ........................ 6-178
Current Control Bandwidth .. 5-19, 5-20, 6-2, 6-66, 11-5
DC Link Voltage Feedforward Filter Time Constant ...5-
Current Controller Ki Factor................. 5-20, 6-68, 11-7 20, 11-7
Current Controller Kp Factor................ 5-20, 6-68, 11-7 DC Link Voltage Reference..5-60, 6-175, 6-180, 6-199,
Current Feedback (%) ........................................... 5-61 11-3
Current Feedback (A) ............................................ 5-61 DC Link Voltage Reference Source Selection...5-28, 5-
Current Limit Response Speed....................... 5-5, 6-19 63, 6-98, 6-180

Index Page 10 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e Menu and Parameter Title Index

Deadband Bias..............................................5-22, 6-77 Drive Security ID 2...................................... 5-74, 6-195

Deceleration Rate Forward .......... 5-9, 5-10, 6-37, 6-38 Drive Status Flags 0-15 ................................ 5-16, 6-56
Deceleration Rate Forward 2 ........................5-10, 6-38 Drive Status Flags 16-31 .............................. 5-16, 6-56
Deceleration Rate Reverse .......... 5-9, 5-10, 6-37, 6-38 Drive Status Flags 32-47 .............................. 5-16, 6-56
Deceleration Rate Reverse 2 ........................5-10, 6-38 Drive Status Flags 48-63 .............................. 5-16, 6-56
Decrease Rate Negative ...............................5-10, 6-40 Drive Status Flags 64-79 .............................. 5-16, 6-56
Decrease Rate Negative 2 ..................................... 6-40 Drive Status Flags 96-111 ................... 5-16, 6-39, 6-56
Decrease Rate Positive.................................5-10, 6-40 Drive Temperature Trips Auto-reset Enable 5-32, 6-108
Decrease Rate Positive 2..............................5-10, 6-40 Drive to Drive RX Reference 1 Scale............ 5-38, 8-12
Delay A Input Source ..................................5-33, 6-113 Drive to Drive RX Reference 2 Scale............ 5-38, 8-12
Delay A Time...............................................5-33, 6-113 Drive to Drive TX Control Word 0 ................. 5-38, 8-11
Delay B Input Control Flag Drive to Drive TX Control Word 1 ................. 5-38, 8-11
Delay B Input (CF41) ......................................... 5-84 Drive to Drive TX Reference 1 ............. 5-38, 8-11, 8-12
Delay B Input Source ........................................... 6-114 Drive to Drive TX Reference 1 Scale ... 5-38, 8-11, 8-12
Delay B Time........................................................ 6-114 Drive to Drive TX Reference 2 ............. 5-38, 8-11, 8-12
Delay C Input Source ........................................... 6-114 Drive to Drive TX Reference 2 Scale ............ 5-38, 8-11
Delay C Time ....................................................... 6-114 Dynamic Brake Control...................5-1, 5-27, 6-3, 6-96
Delay D Input Source ........................................... 6-114
Delay D Time ....................................................... 6-114 E
Delay I
Input...............................................5-56, 5-86, 6-162 Economy Factor (Frequency Control Mode) ... 5-6, 6-14
Input Source ...........................................5-56, 6-162 Enable Rs Tracker ........................ 5-19, 6-2, 6-67, 6-69
Time........................................................5-56, 6-162
Encoder 10000 Lines.................................... 5-21, 6-73
Delay J
Input...............................................5-56, 5-86, 6-162 Encoder Line Count ........................... 5-20, 6-73, 6-128
Input Source ...................................................... 5-56 Encoder Line Count Divider ........................ 5-42, 6-128
Time................................................................... 5-56 Encoder Loss Action..................................... 5-20, 6-73
Delay K Encoder Power Supply Volts ........................ 5-21, 6-74
Input...............................................5-57, 5-86, 6-163
Encoder Speed ............................. 5-17, 6-2, 6-58, 11-9
Input Source ...................................................... 5-57
Time................................................................... 5-57 Engineer Security Code................... 5-74, 6-194, 6-195
Delay L Expansion Bus Device................................ 5-40, 6-125
Input...............................................5-58, 5-86, 6-163 Extended I/O................................................... 5-2, 5-68
Input Source ...................................................... 5-57
Time................................................................... 5-57
DELTA identification source ........................5-14, 10-10
F
Digital Input States ........................................5-16, 6-54 Fan Type .................................... 5-4, 5-41, 6-10, 6-125
Digital Output 1 Signal ..................................5-12, 6-43 Fast Analogue
Digital Output 2 Signal ..................................5-12, 6-43 Output 1 Global ............................................... 6-190
Output 1 Scale................................................. 6-190
Digital Output 3 Signal ..................................5-12, 6-43
Output 2 Global ............................................... 6-190
Digital Output States .....................................5-16, 6-55 Output 2 Scale................................................. 6-190
Direction Control ......................................5-9, 6-1, 6-32 Output 3 Global ............................................... 6-190
Disable Torque Control Flag Output 3 Scale................................................. 6-190
Disable Torque (CF24) .............................5-12, 5-83 Output 4 Global ............................................... 6-190
Output 4 Scale................................................. 6-190
Drive Continuous Current Rating .......5-41, 6-125, 11-4
Feedback Compensation......................... 5-6, 6-1, 6-22
Drive Control Flags 112-127 .................................. 5-16
Feedforward Current Demand ............. 4-7, 5-61, 6-176
Drive Control Flags 16-31 ...................................... 5-16
Feedforward Power Demand ...................... 5-61, 6-176
Drive Control Flags 32-47 ...................................... 5-16
Firmware Downloader.......................... 5-74, 6-5, 6-196
Drive Control Flags 48-63 ...................................... 5-16
Firmware Revision Number ........................ 5-74, 6-194
Drive Control Flags 64-79 ...................................... 5-16
Firmware Type..................................... 5-74, 6-4, 6-194
Drive Control Flags 96-111 .................................... 5-16
Fixed Current Limit ......................... 4-6, 5-5, 6-17, 6-18
Drive Current.......................................................... 6-47
Fixed Flux Limit............................................. 5-19, 6-66
Drive Nominal Current.......................................... 6-194
Fixed Position Reference #0 High .............. 5-45, 6-138
Drive Overload Avoidance Enable ....................... 6-125
Fixed Position Reference #0 Low ............... 5-45, 6-138
Drive Overload Remaining ............................5-13, 6-48
Fixed Position References #1 to #15 Low and High .. 6-
Drive Security ID 1 ......................................5-74, 6-195 138

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Index Page 11
Menu and Parameter Title Index ALSPA MV3000e

Fixed Reference Output ............................... 5-27, 6-94

I
Fixed Reference Settings ............... 5-1, 5-26, 6-3, 6-94
Fixed References #0 to #15.......................... 5-26, 6-94 IGBT Silicon Temperature...........................5-54, 6-157
Fixed Volts Boost..................................... 4-5, 5-5, 6-16 IGBT U1 to U6 Temperature ..............5-53, 5-54, 6-156
Flux Controller Output .................. 5-19, 6-2, 6-67, 11-8 IGBT V1 to V6 Temperature ..............5-53, 5-54, 6-156
Flux Demand .............................. 5-19, 5-23, 6-66, 6-83 IGBT W1 to W6 Temperature.............5-53, 5-54, 6-156
Flux Limit Source.......................................... 5-19, 6-66 Increase Rate Negative.......................................... 6-40
Fluxing Control ........................ 4-5, 5-5, 6-1, 6-13, 6-14 Increase Rate Negative 2....................................... 6-40
Force Synchro Start.................................... 5-32, 6-109 Increase Rate Positive .........................5-10, 6-39, 6-40
Forward Maximum Load 1 to 3 ................... 5-52, 6-153 Increase Rate Positive 2 ...............................5-10, 6-40
Forward Minimum Load 1 to 3 .................... 5-52, 6-153 Inertia Compensation Settings ..... 5-1, 5-29, 6-3, 6-102
Forward Speed 1 to 3 ................................. 5-52, 6-153 Inertia Compensation Speed Source ..........5-29, 6-102
Free Wheel Diode Silicon Temperature...... 5-54, 6-157 Inertia Compensation Time Constant..........5-29, 6-102
Frequency Control Settings .............. 5-1, 5-5, 6-1, 6-13 Input Bridge Temperature .............................5-15, 6-53
Frequency Feedback............................. 4-5, 5-13, 6-48 Inputs to Status Word 0........................................ 6-148
Frequency Method........................... 5-66, 6-183, 6-186 Inputs to Status Word 1........................................ 6-148
Frequency Multiplier ................................ 5-6, 6-1, 6-22 Instantaneous Overcurrent Auto-reset Enable ..5-32, 6-
107
Frequency Timer ............................. 5-63, 6-179, 11-10
Interlock Auto-reset Enable .........................5-32, 6-107
Internal DB Unit Fitted........................5-29, 6-100, 11-6
G
General Purpose Logic Block B Control Flags CF41 to J
CF45.................................................................. 5-34
General Purpose Logic Block B Parameters ......... 5-34 Jog Speed 1 ....................................................5-9, 6-32
General Purpose Logic Block C Control Flags CF46 to Jog Speed 2 ....................................................5-9, 6-32
CF50.................................................................. 5-34
General Purpose Logic Block C Parameters ......... 5-34 K
General Purpose Logic Block D Control Flags CF51 to
CF55.................................................................. 5-34 Keypad Removal OK.............................................. 5-40
General Purpose Logic Block D Parameters ......... 5-34 kW–Hours .....................................................5-15, 6-54
General Purpose Logic Block F Control Flags CF59 to
CF61.................................................................. 5-35 L
Global Response ..................................... 5-36, 8-4, 8-7
Global Time Var 1.................................................. 5-31 Latch A Input Selection ...............................5-33, 6-113
Global Time Var 2.................................................. 5-31 Latch B Input Selection ........................................ 6-114
Latch C Input Selection ........................................ 6-114
Latch D Input Selection ........................................ 6-114
H
Latch D Reset Control Flag
High Speed Digital I/O Settings ...... 5-1, 5-26, 6-2, 6-89 Latch D Reset (CF55) ........................................ 5-84
History Command................. 5-31, 6-103, 6-104, 6-105 Leakage Volts ...............................................5-19, 6-66
History Display Sample Number............................ 9-20 Line Choke Inductance .......... 5-61, 6-175, 6-199, 11-4
History Log Playback Settings ...... 5-1, 5-31, 6-3, 6-107 Load Fault Action ........................................5-52, 6-152
History Log Sample Period ......................... 5-30, 6-103 Load Fault Auto-reset Enable .....................5-32, 6-108
History Log Settings ..................... 5-1, 5-30, 6-3, 6-103 Load Fault Detection Window Settings ...5-1, 5-52, 6-4,
6-152
History Playback Channel(s) 1 to 10 ..................... 5-31
Load Fault Forward Maximum Load 1 to 3........... 6-153
History Sample Display Number............................ 5-31
Load Fault Forward Minimum Load 1 to 3............ 6-153
Hours Energised........................................... 5-15, 6-54
Load Fault Forward Speed 1 to 3......................... 6-153
Hours Run .................................................... 5-15, 6-54
Load Fault Input ..........................................5-52, 6-152
Hours Since Trip........................................... 5-13, 6-49
Load Fault Reverse Maximum Load 1 to 3 .......... 6-153
HSIO Input Frequency for 0% Speed ........... 5-26, 6-91
Load Fault Reverse Minimum Load 1 to 3 ........... 6-153
HSIO Input Reference Value ........................ 5-26, 6-92
Load Fault Reverse Speed 1 to 3......................... 6-153
HSIO Mode.......................................... 5-26, 6-89, 6-91
Load Fault Time ..........................................5-52, 6-152
Load Power Feedforward Source.........4-7, 5-63, 6-181
Logic Block A Functions ..............................5-33, 6-113

Index Page 12 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e Menu and Parameter Title Index

Logic Block B Functions ....................................... 6-114 Logic Block T

Logic Block C Functions....................................... 6-114 Function ................................................. 5-60, 6-167
Input 1 .................................................... 5-60, 6-167
Logic Block D Functions....................................... 6-114 Input 2 .................................................... 5-60, 6-167
Logic Block E Functions..............................5-34, 6-115 Input 3 .................................................... 5-60, 6-167
Logic Block F Functions ..............................5-35, 6-115 Input 4 ............................................................. 6-167
Logic Block G Functions .............................5-35, 6-116 Lower Trigger Level .................................... 5-30, 6-105
Logic Block H Functions..............................5-35, 6-116
Logic Block I M
Input 1.....................................................5-56, 6-162
Input 2.....................................................5-56, 6-162 Magnetising Current ..5-6, 5-15, 5-18, 6-52, 6-60, 6-65,
11-3, 11-4
Logic Block J
Input 1.............................................................. 6-162 Magnetising Current Reference Source................... 5-6
Input 2.....................................................5-56, 6-162 Magnetising Inductance...5-19, 6-62, 6-63, 6-199, 11-3
Logic Block K Magnetising Resistance..5-1, 5-18, 6-2, 6-60, 6-63, 11-
Input 1.....................................................5-57, 6-163 10
Input 2.....................................................5-57, 6-163 Mains Filter Bandwidth 5-55, 5-66, 6-159, 6-183, 6-185
Logic Block L Mains Frequency ..4-6, 5-61, 5-66, 6-176, 6-178, 6-186
Input 1.....................................................5-58, 6-163
Input 2.....................................................5-58, 6-163 Mains Loss Action.....5-55, 5-66, 5-67, 6-159, 6-184, 6-
185, 6-186, 11-13
Logic Block M
Function ..................................................5-58, 6-164 Mains Over-frequency Trip ......................... 5-62, 6-178
Input 1.....................................................5-58, 6-164 Mains Over-frequency Warning .................. 5-62, 6-178
Input 2.....................................................5-58, 6-164 Mains Synch Offset..................................... 5-62, 6-178
Input 3.....................................................5-58, 6-164
Input 4.....................................................5-58, 6-164 Mains Under-frequency Trip ....................... 5-62, 6-178
Logic Block N Mains Under-frequency Warning ................ 5-62, 6-178
Function ..................................................5-58, 6-164 Mains Voltage .................................. 5-61, 6-159, 6-176
Input 1.....................................................5-58, 6-165 Mains Voltage Monitor Mode ...................... 5-66, 6-185
Input 2.....................................................5-58, 6-165
Mains Volts Scaling ......................... 5-62, 6-178, 11-13
Input 3.....................................................5-58, 6-165
Input 4.....................................................5-58, 6-165 Manufacturer Security Code ....................... 5-74, 6-195
Logic Block O Maximum Ambient Temperature................. 5-41, 6-125
Function ..................................................5-58, 6-165 Maximum Amplitude ........................ 5-63, 6-179, 11-10
Input 1.....................................................5-58, 6-165 Maximum CDC Electronics Temperature ..... 5-15, 6-54
Input 2.....................................................5-58, 6-165
Input 3.....................................................5-58, 6-165 Maximum Encoder Reversals ....................... 5-21, 6-74
Input 4.....................................................5-58, 6-165 Maximum Position High ........ 5-42, 6-129, 6-139, 10-12
Logic Block P Maximum Position Low......... 5-42, 6-129, 6-139, 10-12
Function ..................................................5-58, 6-165 Maximum Ramp Deviation............................ 5-10, 6-38
Input 1.............................................................. 6-165
Maximum Silicon Temperature .......... 5-54, 6-157, 11-4
Input 2.....................................................5-59, 6-165
Input 3.....................................................5-59, 6-165 Maximum Speed Change ............................. 5-21, 6-74
Input 4.....................................................5-59, 6-165 Maximum Speed Forward............... 4-5, 5-9, 6-33, 6-41
Logic Block Q Maximum Speed Reverse ....................... 4-5, 5-9, 6-33
Function ..................................................5-59, 6-165 Maximum Torque Available ................... 5-16, 6-2, 6-57
Input 1.....................................................5-59, 6-166
Input 2.....................................................5-59, 6-166 Measured Cold Value of Rotor Resistance... 5-18, 6-65
Input 3.....................................................5-59, 6-166 Measured Mains Amplitude .5-55, 5-62, 5-67, 6-159, 6-
Input 4.....................................................5-59, 6-166 177, 6-186, 9-5, 9-14, 11-10
Logic Block R Measured Mains Voltage ...5-55, 5-61, 6-159, 6-176, 6-
Function ..................................................5-59, 6-166 177
Input 1.....................................................5-59, 6-166 Measured PTC Resistance......... 5-4, 5-62, 6-11, 6-177
Input 2.....................................................5-59, 6-166
Menu 1 - Default Parameters for a Basic Sinusoidal
Input 3.....................................................5-59, 6-166
Front End (SFE) Application ......................... 4-1, 4-6
Input 4.....................................................5-59, 6-166
Menu 1 - Default Parameters for a Drive .......... 4-1, 4-4
Logic Block S
Function ..................................................5-59, 6-166 Menu 10 - Trips and Warnings........ 5-1, 5-13, 6-1, 6-49
Input 1.....................................................5-59, 6-167 Menu 11 - Advanced Drive Monitoring 5-1, 5-15, 6-2, 6-
Input 2.....................................................5-59, 6-167 52, 11-13
Input 3.....................................................5-59, 6-167 Menu 11 Enable..................................................... 5-70
Input 4.............................................................. 6-167
Menu 12 - Motor Advanced Settings (Vector Only). 5-1,
Logic Block Settings..................... 5-1, 5-33, 6-3, 6-112 5-18, 6-2, 6-60, 11-10

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Index Page 13
Menu and Parameter Title Index ALSPA MV3000e

Menu 12 Enable .................................................... 5-70 Menu 33 - Control Flags 0 to 99 Connection Settings 5-

Menu 13 - Speed Feedback Settings (Vector Only) 5-1, 1, 5-39, 6-3, 6-121
5-20, 6-2, 6-71 Menu 33 Enable ..................................................... 5-71
Menu 13 Enable .................................................... 5-70 Menu 34 - Control Flags 100 to 127 Connection
Menu 14 - Speed Loop Settings (Vector Only) ... 5-1, 5- Settings .................................... 5-1, 5-39, 6-3, 6-121
21, 6-2, 6-76 Menu 34 Enable ..................................................... 5-71
Menu 14 Enable .................................................... 5-70 Menu 35 - Miscellaneous Features Settings ..5-1, 5-39,
Menu 15 - Torque Reference Settings (Vector Only). 5- 6-3, 6-122
1, 5-22, 6-2, 6-80 Menu 35 Enable ..................................................... 5-71
Menu 15 Enable .................................................... 5-70 Menu 36 - Position Control Settings (Vector with
Menu 16 - PID Controller Settings .. 5-1, 5-23, 6-2, 6-82 Encoder Only) .......................... 5-1, 5-42, 6-3, 6-128
Menu 16 Enable .................................................... 5-70 Menu 37 - Position Reference Settings...5-1, 5-45, 6-3,
6-138
Menu 17 - Reference Sequencer Settings. 5-1, 5-24, 6-
2, 6-85 Menu 37 Enable ..................................................... 5-71
Menu 17 Enable .................................................... 5-70 Menu 38 - Position Control Monitor.... 5-1, 5-46, 6-3, 6-
140
Menu 18 - Motorised Potentiometer Settings. 5-1, 5-25,
6-2, 6-87 Menu 38 Enable ..................................................... 5-71
Menu 18 Enable .................................................... 5-70 Menu 39 - User Configurable Menu (Menu 1) Settings
................................................. 5-1, 5-47, 6-4, 6-142
Menu 19 - Trim Reference Settings 5-1, 5-26, 6-2, 6-88
Menu 39 Enable ..................................................... 5-71
Menu 19 Enable .................................................... 5-70
Menu 4 - Start and Stop Control....... 5-1, 5-7, 6-1, 6-24
Menu 2 - Basic Motor Settings............ 5-1, 5-4, 6-1, 6-9
Menu 4 Enable ....................................................... 5-70
Menu 2 Enable ...................................................... 5-70
Menu 40 - Summing Nodes Settings.. 5-1, 5-48, 6-4, 6-
Menu 20 - High Speed Digital I/O Settings 5-1, 5-26, 6- 143
2, 6-89
Menu 40 Enable ..................................................... 5-71
Menu 20 Enable .................................................... 5-70
Menu 41 - Programmable Status Word Settings .5-1, 5-
Menu 21 - Fixed Reference Settings .. 5-1, 5-26, 6-3, 6- 51, 6-4, 6-148
94
Menu 41 Enable ..................................................... 5-71
Menu 21 Enable .................................................... 5-70
Menu 42 - Reference Pointers – Source Settings ...5-1,
Menu 22 - Skip Speed Settings ...... 5-1, 5-27, 6-3, 6-95 5-52
Menu 22 Enable .................................................... 5-70 Menu 42 Enable ..................................................... 5-71
Menu 23 - Dynamic Brake Control.. 5-1, 5-27, 6-3, 6-96 Menu 43 - Load Fault Detection Window Settings ..5-1,
Menu 23 Enable .................................................... 5-70 5-52, 6-4, 6-152
Menu 24 - Speed Trim Settings .... 5-1, 5-29, 6-3, 6-101 Menu 43 Enable ..................................................... 5-71
Menu 24 Enable .................................................... 5-70 Menu 44 - Reference Shaper Settings 5-1, 5-53, 6-4, 6-
Menu 25 - Inertia Compensation Settings . 5-1, 5-29, 6- 154
3, 6-102 Menu 44 Enable ..................................................... 5-71
Menu 25 Enable .................................................... 5-71 Menu 45 - Temperature ............... 5-1, 5-53, 6-4, 6-156
Menu 26 - History Log Settings .... 5-1, 5-30, 6-3, 6-103 Menu 45 Enable ..................................................... 5-71
Menu 27 - History Log Playback Settings5-1, 5-31, 6-3, Menu 5 - Speed Reference Settings 5-1, 5-8, 6-1, 6-31
6-107 Menu 5 Enable ....................................................... 5-70
Menu 27 Enable .................................................... 5-71 Menu 50 - Basic SFE Setup Menu ..................5-1, 5-60
Menu 28 - Auto-reset Settings ...... 5-1, 5-32, 6-3, 6-107 Menu 51 - Basic SFE Monitoring Menu...5-1, 5-61, 6-4,
Menu 28 Enable .................................................... 5-71 6-176
Menu 29 - Speed and Torque Monitor Settings .. 5-1, 5- Menu 51 Enable ................................................... 6-191
33, 6-3, 6-110 Menu 52 - Advanced SFE Setup Menu...........5-1, 5-62
Menu 29 Enable .................................................... 5-71 Menu 52 Enable ..................................................... 5-72
Menu 3 - Frequency Control Settings5-1, 5-5, 6-1, 6-13 Menu 53 - SFE Reference Setup Menu ..5-2, 5-63, 6-4,
Menu 3 Enable ...................................................... 5-70 6-180
Menu 30 - Logic Block Settings .... 5-1, 5-33, 6-3, 6-112 Menu 53 Enable ..................................................... 5-72
Menu 30 Enable .................................................... 5-71 Menu 58 - Extended I/O .... 5-2, 5-67, 5-72, 6-191, 11-5
Menu 31 - Status Flag Generator Settings 5-1, 5-36, 6- Menu 58 Enable ..................................................... 5-72
3, 6-117 Menu 59 Enable ..................................................... 5-72
Menu 31 Enable .................................................... 5-71 Menu 59 Extended I/O ....................................5-2, 5-68
Menu 32 - Serial Link Settings...... 5-1, 5-36, 6-3, 6-119 Menu 6 - Ramp Settings .................. 5-1, 5-9, 6-1, 6-37
Menu 32 Enable .................................................... 5-71 Menu 6 Enable ....................................................... 5-70

Index Page 14 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e Menu and Parameter Title Index

Menu 60 - Scale ..............................................5-2, 5-68 Motor Advanced Settings (Vector Only).. 5-1, 5-18, 6-2,
Menu 60 Enable ..................................................... 5-72 6-60, 11-10
Menu 61 - CDC CAN Port ...............................5-2, 5-68 Motor Angle Feedback.................................. 5-21, 6-74
Menu 61 Enable ..................................................... 5-72 Motor Base Frequency ............2-5, 4-5, 5-4, 6-9, 6-198
Menu 62 - CDC CANopen...............................5-2, 5-68 Motor Base Voltage ...............4-5, 5-4, 6-9, 6-198, 11-3
Menu 62 Enable ..................................................... 5-72 Motor Continuous Duty ................................... 5-4, 6-11
Menu 63 - CDC DeviceNet..............................5-2, 5-68 Motor Cooling Fan Type ................................. 5-4, 6-10
Menu 63 Enable ..................................................... 5-72 Motor Current......................................... 4-5, 5-13, 6-47
Menu 65 - CAN Port 2.....................................5-2, 5-68 Motor Full Load Current.........4-5, 5-4, 6-9, 6-198, 11-3
Menu 65 Enable ..................................................... 5-72 Motor Full Load Power Factor ........ 4-5, 5-4, 6-9, 6-198
Menu 66 - CAN 2 CANopen ............................5-2, 5-68 Motor Magnetising Current .................................... 6-60
Menu 66 Enable ..................................................... 5-72 Motor Magnetising Current at 50% Base Volts . 5-19, 6-
65
Menu 67 - CAN 2 ............................................5-2, 5-68
Motor Magnetising Current at 60% Base Volts . 5-19, 6-
Menu 67 - CAN 2 DeviceNet ...........................5-2, 5-68 65
Menu 7 - Plant I/O Settings ............ 5-1, 5-11, 6-1, 6-41 Motor Magnetising Current at 70% Base Volts . 5-19, 6-
Menu 70 Enable ..................................................... 5-73 65
Menu 71 Enable ..................................................... 5-73 Motor Magnetising Current at 80% Base Volts . 5-19, 6-
Menu 72 Enable ..................................................... 5-73 65, 11-4
Menu 74 - Fieldbus Coupler ............................5-2, 5-68 Motor Magnetising Current at 90% Base Volts . 5-19, 6-
65, 11-4
Menu 74 Enable ..................................................... 5-73
Motor Nominal Full Load Power.... 5-4, 6-9, 6-198, 11-3
Menu 75 - PROFIBUS.....................................5-2, 5-68
Motor Nominal Full Load Speed .... 4-5, 5-4, 6-9, 6-198,
Menu 75 Enable ..................................................... 5-73
11-3
Menu 78 - MicroPEC™ Module - Configuration and
Motor Overload Remaining ........................... 5-13, 6-48
Diagnostics..................................................5-2, 5-69
Motor Parameterisation Method.... 5-5, 5-18, 6-21, 6-62
Menu 78 Enable ..........................................5-73, 6-192
Motor Peak Current at 0% Speed ................. 5-19, 6-61
Menu 8 - Torque Limit Settings ...... 5-1, 5-12, 6-1, 6-45
Motor Peak Current at Nominal Speed ......... 5-18, 6-60
Menu 8 Enable ....................................................... 5-70
Motor Peak Current at Top Speed ................ 5-19, 6-61
Menu 9 - Basic Drive Monitoring .... 5-1, 5-13, 6-1, 6-47
Motor Peak Overload............................................. 6-60
Menu 9 Enable ....................................................... 5-70
Motor Power .......................................... 4-5, 5-13, 6-47
Menu 98 - Menu Enable Selection Settings ...5-2, 5-70,
6-4, 6-191 Motor PTC Action ........................................... 5-4, 6-11
Menu 99 - Configuration Settings. 5-2, 5-73, 6-4, 6-193 Motor PTC Trip Resistance ............................ 5-4, 6-11
Menu Control Menu................................................ 5-73 Motor Regeneration Power Limit ......... 5-7, 6-27, 6-198
Menu Enable Selection Settings .. 5-2, 5-70, 6-4, 6-191 Motor Regenerative Power Limit.....5-27, 6-97, 6-99, 6-
198, 11-4
Menus 70 to 72 - Application Code Developer 5-2, 5-68
Motor Temperature Compensation ........ 5-18, 6-2, 6-64
Menus 80 to 89 Enable ........................................ 6-192
Motor Thermal Trips Auto-reset Enable...... 5-32, 6-107
Menus 98 and 99 Enable ..................................... 6-192
Motor Volts ..........................4-5, 5-13, 6-15, 6-16, 6-47
MicroPEC™ Module Configuration and Diagnostics ..5-
2, 5-69 Motorised Potentiometer Lower Rate ........... 5-25, 6-87
Minimum Amplitude..........................5-63, 6-179, 11-10 Motorised Potentiometer Mode..................... 5-25, 6-87
Minimum CDC Electronics Temperature.......5-15, 6-54 Motorised Potentiometer Output ................... 5-25, 6-87
Minimum Position High .........5-42, 6-129, 6-139, 10-12 Motorised Potentiometer Preset ................... 5-25, 6-87
Minimum Position Low ..........5-42, 6-129, 6-139, 10-12 Motorised Potentiometer Raise Rate ............ 5-25, 6-87
Minimum Power Limit.........................5-20, 6-70, 11-10 Motorised Potentiometer Settings... 5-1, 5-25, 6-2, 6-87
Minimum Speed Forward ............... 4-5, 5-9, 6-33, 6-41 MW–Hours............................................................. 5-16
Minimum Speed Reverse.........................4-5, 5-9, 6-33
Miscellaneous Features Settings . 5-1, 5-39, 6-3, 6-122 N
Mneu 36 Enable ..................................................... 5-71
Negative Torque Limit 1................................ 5-12, 6-45
Modulation Depth 5-17, 5-67, 6-22, 6-23, 6-58, 6-67, 6-
Negative Torque Limit 2................................ 5-12, 6-45
68, 6-189, 10-14, 11-8
Controller Clamped Id Demand ..............5-67, 6-189 Negative Torque Limit Scale Source 1 ......... 5-12, 6-46
Controller Integral Gain Ki ......................5-67, 6-189 Negative Torque Limit Scale Source 2 .................. 6-46
Controller Proportional Gain Kp ..............5-67, 6-189 Network Voltage
Limit ....................... 5-6, 5-67, 6-1, 6-22, 6-189, 11-4 Controller Droop Resistance .................. 5-67, 6-188
Motor 150% Overload Duration.......................5-4, 6-10 Controller Drooped Reference................ 5-67, 6-188

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Index Page 15
Menu and Parameter Title Index ALSPA MV3000e

Controller Integral Gain Ki ...................... 5-67, 6-188 PID Setpoint Selection ........................................... 5-23
Controller Proportional Gain Kp ............. 5-67, 6-188 Plant I/O Settings ........................... 5-1, 5-11, 6-1, 6-41
Controller Unclamped Id Demand5-67, 6-188, 6-189
Feedback - Filtered ................................ 5-67, 6-188 Pointer 28 Scale..........................................5-52, 6-149
Reference............................................... 5-67, 6-188 Pointer 28 Source .......................................5-52, 6-149
No-load I at 50% V ....................................... 5-19, 6-65 Pointers 1 to 20 Scale .................................5-52, 6-149
No-load I at 60% V ....................................... 5-19, 6-65 Pointers 1 to 20 Source...............................5-52, 6-149
No-load I at 70% V ....................................... 5-19, 6-65 Pointers 21 to 27 Scale ...............................5-52, 6-149
No-load I at 80% V .............................. 5-19, 6-65, 11-4 Pointers 21 to 27 Source.............................5-52, 6-149
No-load I at 90% V .............................. 5-19, 6-65, 11-4 Pointers 29 to 38 Scale ...............................5-52, 6-149
Nominal Mains Supply Volts .............. 5-18, 6-61, 6-199 Pointers 29 to 38 Source.............................5-52, 6-149
Nominal Mains Voltage.. 5-41, 5-55, 5-61, 6-125, 6-159 Position Control Flags 0 ..............................5-46, 6-141
Non-MV DB Unit Fitted ................................. 5-28, 6-99 Position Control Flags 1 ..............................5-46, 6-141
Normal Stop Mode................................... 4-6, 5-7, 6-27 Position Control Mode......................5-42, 6-128, 6-129
Number of 100ms Sharings ................................. 6-127 Position Control Monitor ............... 5-1, 5-46, 6-3, 6-140
Number of Auto-reset Attempts .................. 5-32, 6-108 Position Control Output ........................5-46, 6-4, 6-141
Number of DELTAs ...................... 4-6, 4-7, 5-73, 6-193 Position Control Settings (Vector with Encoder Only) 5-
Number of Encoder Reversals...................... 5-21, 6-74 1, 5-42, 6-3, 6-128
Number of Motor Poles........................ 5-4, 6-10, 6-198 Position Error ..............................................5-46, 6-140
Number of Reference Sequence Points ....... 5-24, 6-85 Position Error High ......................................5-46, 6-140
Position Error Low.......................................5-46, 6-140
Position Feedback.......................................5-46, 6-140
O
Position Feedback High ..............................5-46, 6-140
Open Loop Frequency.................................. 5-21, 6-75 Position Feedback Low ...............................5-46, 6-140
Open Loop Ramp Rate................................. 5-21, 6-75 Position Monitor Tolerance High .................5-45, 6-137
Open Loop Test................... 5-18, 5-21, 5-77, 6-2, 6-75 Position Monitor Tolerance Low ..................5-45, 6-137
Operator Security Code ....................................... 6-194 Position Reference....................... 5-1, 5-45, 6-3, 6-138
Optimum Voltage Mode Current Control Bandwidth.. 5- Position Reference Backup .........................5-45, 6-139
20, 6-68
Position Reference High .............................5-46, 6-140
Optimum Voltage Mode Modulation Limit .............. 5-20
Position Reference Low ..............................5-46, 6-140
Orientation Controller Ki ...................... 5-20, 6-69, 11-7
Position Reference Settings ......... 5-1, 5-45, 6-3, 6-138
Orientation Controller Kp ..................... 5-20, 6-69, 11-7
Position Reference Source 1................................ 6-139
Output Bridge 1 Temperature ....................... 5-15, 6-53
Position Reference Source 2.......................5-45, 6-139
Output Bridge 2 Temperature ....................... 5-15, 6-53
Position Shaper Range High ................................ 6-131
Output Bridge 3 Temperature ....................... 5-15, 6-53
Position Shaper Range Low................................. 6-131
Output Bridge 4 Temperature ....................... 5-15, 6-53
Position Shaper X1 .....................................5-43, 6-131
Output Bridge 5 Temperature ....................... 5-15, 6-53
Position Shaper -X1 ....................................5-43, 6-131
Output Bridge 6 Temperature ....................... 5-15, 6-53
Position Shaper X2 .....................................5-43, 6-131
Over Temperature Avoidance Enable ........ 5-40, 6-125
Position Shaper -X2 ....................................5-43, 6-131
Overload Duty.............4-6, 4-7, 5-74, 6-4, 6-193, 6-199
Position Shaper X3 .....................................5-43, 6-131
Position Shaper -X3 ....................................5-43, 6-131
P Position Shaper X4 .....................................5-43, 6-131
Parameter Set Select ...................... 5-74, 6-199, 6-200 Position Shaper -X4 ....................................5-43, 6-131
PID Controller Output ................................... 5-15, 6-52 Position Shaper X5 .....................................5-43, 6-131
PID Controller Settings ................... 5-1, 5-23, 6-2, 6-82 Position Shaper -X5 ....................................5-43, 6-131
PID Differential Time .................................... 5-24, 6-83 Position Shaper Y1 .....................................5-43, 6-131
PID Error Deadband ..................................... 5-24, 6-84 Position Shaper -Y1 ....................................5-43, 6-131
PID Error Invert............................................. 5-24, 6-84 Position Shaper Y2 .....................................5-43, 6-131
PID Error Time Constant .............................. 5-24, 6-83 Position Shaper -Y2 ....................................5-43, 6-131
PID Feedback Scale Factor.......................... 5-23, 6-83 Position Shaper Y3 .....................................5-43, 6-131
PID Feedback Selection ............................... 5-23, 6-83 Position Shaper -Y3 ....................................5-43, 6-131
PID Integral Time.......................................... 5-23, 6-83 Position Shaper Y4 .....................................5-43, 6-131
PID Output Monitor....................................... 5-24, 6-84 Position Shaper -Y4 ....................................5-43, 6-131
PID Proportional Band.................................. 5-23, 6-83 Position Shaper Y5 .....................................5-43, 6-131

Index Page 16 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e Menu and Parameter Title Index

Position Shaper -Y5 ....................................5-43, 6-131 Reference Sequencer Time 2 (minutes) ....... 5-25, 6-86
Position Status Flags ..................................5-46, 6-140 Reference Sequencer Time 2 (seconds) ...... 5-25, 6-86
Position to Learn .........................................5-45, 6-138 Reference Sequencer Time 3 (minutes) ....... 5-25, 6-86
Positive Torque Limit 2............5-12, 6-45, 6-171, 6-174 Reference Sequencer Time 3 (seconds) ...... 5-25, 6-86
Positive Torque Limit Scale Source 1 5-12, 6-46, 6-174 Reference Sequencer Time 4 (minutes) ....... 5-25, 6-86
Positive Torque Limit Scale Source 2 5-12, 6-46, 6-174 Reference Sequencer Time 4 (seconds) ...... 5-25, 6-86
Post Flycatch dFlux/dt Mask Time ................5-19, 6-67 Reference Sequencer Time 5 (minutes) ....... 5-25, 6-86
Power from Mains .......................................5-61, 6-176 Reference Sequencer Time 5 (seconds) ...... 5-25, 6-86
Power Limit5-7, 5-20, 5-27, 5-28, 5-79, 6-2, 6-27, 6-70, Reference Shaper Output........................... 5-53, 6-155
6-97, 6-99, 6-184, 6-198, 11-4, 11-10, 12-2 Reference Shaper Settings........... 5-1, 5-53, 6-4, 6-154
Power Limit Enable .....................................5-20, 11-10 Reference Shaper X1 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
Power Limit Taper Band......................................... 5-20 Reference Shaper X10 ............................... 5-53, 6-154
Present Sequence Point ...............................5-24, 6-85 Reference Shaper X2 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
Printer Lines/second ...................................5-40, 6-124 Reference Shaper X3 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
Printer Options ............................................5-40, 6-124 Reference Shaper X4 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
Process Speed..............................................5-13, 6-47 Reference Shaper X5 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
Process Top Speed................................................ 6-35 Reference Shaper X6 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
PROFIBUS......................................................5-2, 5-68 Reference Shaper X7 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
Programmable Status Word 0 ................................ 5-51 Reference Shaper X8 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
Programmable Status Word 1 ................................ 5-51 Reference Shaper X9 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
Programmable Status Word Settings . 5-1, 5-51, 6-4, 6- Reference Shaper Y1 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
148
Reference Shaper Y10 ............................... 5-53, 6-154
PWM Sharing Threshold ..................5-41, 6-126, 11-14
Reference Shaper Y2 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
PWM Switching Frequency .......................6-122, 6-125
Reference Shaper Y3 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
PWM Synchronisation Delay Compensation.5-42, 6-93
Reference Shaper Y4 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
PWM Synchronisation Offset ....5-42, 6-92, 6-93, 6-127
Reference Shaper Y5 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
PWM Volts ........................................................... 6-176
Reference Shaper Y6 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
Reference Shaper Y7 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
R Reference Shaper Y8 ................................. 5-53, 6-154
Ramp Input ..........................................5-10, 5-11, 6-39 Reference Shaper Y9 ............................................ 5-53
Ramp Output........................................5-11, 6-38, 6-40 Regen Power Limit Scale ........................... 5-66, 6-184
Ramp Settings.................................. 5-1, 5-9, 6-1, 6-37 Regen Power Limit Source ......................... 5-66, 6-184
Rapid Stop Mode ...................................5-7, 6-26, 6-27 Regeneration Power Limit .............................. 5-7, 6-27
Reactive Current (%)...................................5-61, 6-177 Restart Time ................................................... 5-8, 6-25
Reactive Current (A) ...................................5-62, 6-177 Restore Defaults ......................... 5-74, 6-5, 6-199, 11-3
Reactive Current Demand (%) ....................5-61, 6-176 Reversals Threshold.............................................. 6-74
Reactive Current Demand (A) .....................5-61, 6-176 Reverse Maximum Load 1 to 3 .......... 5-52, 5-53, 6-153
Reactive Current Negative Limit........................... 6-178 Reverse Minimum Load 1 to 3 ........... 5-52, 5-53, 6-153
Reactive Current Negative Limit Source .....5-65, 6-180 Reverse Speed 1 to 3 ........................ 5-52, 5-53, 6-153
Reactive Current Positive Limit ...................5-65, 6-178 Ridethrough Active ............................ 5-55, 5-78, 6-159
Reactive Current Positive Limit Source.......5-65, 6-180 Ridethrough Threshold .5-55, 5-66, 5-67, 6-159, 6-184,
Reactive Current Reference................................. 6-178 6-186
Reactive Current Reference Source .................... 6-180 Rotor Leakage Inductance............................ 5-19, 6-64
Rectification Mode...........................................5-6, 6-16 Rotor Resistance ...5-18, 5-19, 6-62, 6-63, 6-65, 6-199,
10-12, 10-13, 11-3, 12-3
Rectifier 1 Temperature ..............................5-53, 6-156
Rs Gain Factor.............................. 5-20, 6-2, 6-69, 11-8
Rectifier 2 Temperature ..............................5-53, 6-156
Rs Tracker .................................... 5-19, 6-2, 6-67, 6-69
Re-enable Delay .............................................5-8, 6-25
RS232 Address............................................... 5-36, 8-5
Reference Pointers – Source Settings ............5-1, 5-52
RS232 Baud Rate........................................... 5-36, 8-5
Reference Sequencer Mode .........................5-24, 6-85
RS232 Control Word 0....................... 5-37, 6-120, 8-10
Reference Sequencer Output ................................ 6-86
RS232 Control Word 1....................... 5-37, 6-120, 8-10
Reference Sequencer Settings ...... 5-1, 5-24, 6-2, 6-85
RS232 Control Words at Loss ........................ 5-37, 8-5
Reference Sequencer Time 1 (minutes) .......5-25, 6-85
RS232 CRC Failures Count............................ 5-37, 8-6
Reference Sequencer Time 1 (seconds).......5-24, 6-85

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Index Page 17
Menu and Parameter Title Index ALSPA MV3000e

RS232 Default for Control Word 0 .................. 5-37, 8-6 Serial Number of DELTA Interface Board (High Part) 6-
RS232 Default for Control Word 1 .................. 5-37, 8-6 59
RS232 Link Parity........................................... 5-37, 8-5 Serial Number of DELTA Interface Board (Low Part).6-
58
RS232 Protocol ................................... 5-36, 6-123, 8-5
Serial Number of Drive (High Part)................5-17, 6-58
RS232 Reference 1 ...................................... 5-37, 8-10
Serial Number of Drive (Low Part) ................5-17, 6-58
RS232 Reference 2 ...................................... 5-37, 8-10
Serial Number of Power Interface Board (High Part) .6-
RS232 Serial Link Baud Rate ..................... 5-40, 6-123 58
RS232 Serial Link Message Protocol ......... 5-40, 6-124 Serial Number of Power Interface Board (Low Part) ..6-
RS232 Timeout........................................ 5-37, 8-5, 8-6 58
RS232 Timeouts Count .................................. 5-37, 8-6 Serial Number of SMPS (High Part)..............5-17, 6-58
RS485 Address .............................................. 5-37, 8-8 Serial Number of SMPS (Low Part)...............5-17, 6-58
RS485 Baud Rate........................................... 5-37, 8-8 Setup Review Mode ............................................... 5-40
RS485 Control Word 0 ...................... 5-38, 6-120, 8-10 SFE Adv Setup Menu......................................5-1, 5-62
RS485 Control Word 1 .......................................... 8-10 SFE Basic Setup Menu ...................................5-1, 5-60
RS485 Control Words at Loss ........................ 5-38, 8-8 SFE Mains Auto-reset Enable .....................5-32, 6-108
RS485 CRC Failures Count............................ 5-38, 8-9 SFE Overload Remaining ...........................5-62, 6-177
RS485 Default for Control Word 0 .................. 5-38, 8-9 SFE Reference Setup Menu ........ 5-2, 5-63, 6-4, 6-180
RS485 Default for Control Word 1 .................. 5-38, 8-9 Sharing Event Time.....................................5-41, 11-14
RS485 Link Parity.................................... 5-38, 8-1, 8-9 Single Element Ch1 Data ............................5-31, 6-106
RS485 Loss Action ......................................... 5-38, 8-8 Single Element Ch2 Data ............................5-31, 6-106
RS485 Protocol ..................................... 5-37, 8-8, 8-12 Single Element Playback Channel 1 .............5-31, 9-20
RS485 Reference 1 ...................................... 5-38, 8-10 Single Element Playback Channel 2 .............5-31, 9-20
RS485 Reference 2 ...................................... 5-38, 8-10 Skip Band 1 Centre .......................................5-27, 6-95
RS485 Timeout........................................ 5-38, 8-8, 8-9 Skip Band 1 Width.........................................5-27, 6-95
RS485 Timeouts Count .................................. 5-38, 8-9 Skip Band 2 Centre .......................................5-27, 6-95
Skip Band 2 Width.........................................5-27, 6-95
S Skip Band 3 Centre .......................................5-27, 6-95
Skip Band 3 Width.........................................5-27, 6-95
Samples after Trigger ................................. 5-30, 6-105
Skip Band 4 Centre .......................................5-27, 6-95
Scalar Magnetising Current Reference.................... 5-6
Skip Band 4 Width.........................................5-27, 6-95
Scalar Torque Current Reference............................ 5-6
Skip Speed Settings....................... 5-1, 5-27, 6-3, 6-95
Scale .............................................................. 5-2, 5-68
Slip Compensation Gain ..........................5-5, 6-1, 6-17
Scale Active Current Demand Negative Limit... 5-64, 6-
181 Speed and Torque Monitor Settings... 5-1, 5-33, 6-3, 6-
110
Scale Active Current Demand Positive Limit .... 5-64, 6-
181 Speed Clamp Limit 1.......................................5-9, 6-35
Scale Reactive Current Demand Negative Limi... 6-181 Speed Clamp Limit 2.......................................5-9, 6-35
Scale Reactive Current Demand Negative Limit.... 5-65 Speed Demand 5-9, 5-16, 5-22, 5-23, 5-29, 5-85, 6-35,
6-57, 6-77, 6-83
Scale Reactive Current Demand Positive Limit 5-65, 6-
181 Speed Demand Time Constant .....................5-22, 6-77
Scale Reactive Current Reference ............. 5-65, 6-181 Speed Droop ..........................................5-22, 6-2, 6-78
Seconds Since Trip ...................................... 5-13, 6-49 Speed Droop Time Constant.........................5-22, 6-78
Security Code ...................................................... 6-194 Speed Error 5-16, 5-22, 5-23, 5-77, 6-38, 6-57, 6-77, 6-
83
Sequence Length ....................................... 5-36, 6-117
Speed Error Time Constant...........................5-22, 6-77
Sequence Start Point.................................. 5-36, 6-117
Speed Feedback 4-5, 5-1, 5-13, 5-20, 5-22, 5-29, 5-70,
Sequence Times......................................... 5-36, 6-118 5-86, 6-2, 6-38, 6-47, 6-71, 6-72, 6-77, 8-12, 9-11
Sequencer Reference Point 1....................... 5-24, 6-85 Speed Feedback Settings (Vector Only) .5-1, 5-20, 6-2,
Sequencer Reference Point 2....................... 5-24, 6-86 6-71
Sequencer Reference Point 3....................... 5-24, 6-86 Speed Feedback Source...............................5-20, 6-72
Sequencer Reference Point 4....................... 5-24, 6-86 Speed Feedback Time Constant...................5-22, 6-77
Sequencer Reference Point 5....................... 5-24, 6-86 Speed Loop Deadband Offset.......................5-22, 6-77
Serial Link Loss Auto-reset Enable............. 5-32, 6-108 Speed Loop Derivative Gain 1 ......................5-21, 6-76
Serial Link Settings....................... 5-1, 5-36, 6-3, 6-119 Speed Loop Derivative Gain 2 ......................5-22, 6-76
Serial Links Write Enable ........................ 5-36, 8-4, 8-7 Speed Loop Error Deadband .................5-22, 6-2, 6-77

Index Page 18 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e Menu and Parameter Title Index

Speed Loop Integral Gain 1 ..........................5-21, 6-76 Summing Node A Mode.............................. 5-48, 6-144
Speed Loop Integral Gain 2 ..........................5-21, 6-76 Summing Node A Output............................ 5-48, 6-143
Speed Loop Integral Seed Method.......5-22, 6-78, 11-6 Summing Node A Scale 1........................... 5-48, 6-143
Speed Loop Output .......................................5-16, 6-57 Summing Node A Scale 2........................... 5-48, 6-143
Speed Loop Proportional Gain 1 ...................5-21, 6-76 Summing Node B Input 1............................ 5-48, 6-143
Speed Loop Proportional Gain 2 ...................5-21, 6-76 Summing Node B Input 2............................ 5-48, 6-143
Speed Loop Settings (Vector Only) 5-1, 5-21, 6-2, 6-76 Summing Node B mode....................................... 6-144
Speed Monitor Hysteresis ...........................5-33, 6-110 Summing Node B Mode.............................. 5-48, 6-144
Speed Monitor Level 1 ................................5-33, 6-110 Summing Node B Output............................ 5-48, 6-143
Speed Monitor Level 2 ................................5-33, 6-110 Summing Node B Scale 1........................... 5-48, 6-143
Speed Reference .................................6-31, 6-47, 6-94 Summing Node B Scale 2........................... 5-48, 6-143
Speed Reference 1 Source .................................... 6-31 Summing Node C Input 1 ........................... 5-48, 6-143
Speed Reference 2 Source .................................... 6-31 Summing Node C Input 2 ........................... 5-48, 6-143
Speed Reference 3 Source .................................... 6-31 Summing Node C mode ...................................... 6-144
Speed Reference 4 Source .................................... 6-31 Summing Node C Mode ............................. 5-48, 6-144
Speed Reference Settings ............... 5-1, 5-8, 6-1, 6-31 Summing Node C Output............................ 5-48, 6-143
Speed Reference Time Constant .............5-9, 6-1, 6-36 Summing Node C Scale 1 .......................... 5-48, 6-143
Speed to reach Full Accel/Decel Rate.................... 5-10 Summing Node C Scale 2 .......................... 5-48, 6-143
Speed Trim Scale 1.............................................. 6-101 Summing Node D Input 1 ........................... 5-48, 6-143
Speed Trim Scale 2.............................................. 6-101 Summing Node D Input 2 ........................... 5-48, 6-143
Speed Trim Settings..................... 5-1, 5-29, 6-3, 6-101 Summing Node D mode ...................................... 6-144
Speed Trim Slew Rate ................................5-29, 6-101 Summing Node D Mode ............................. 5-49, 6-144
Speed Trim Source .....................................5-29, 6-101 Summing Node D Output............................ 5-48, 6-143
Square Root A Input....................................5-49, 6-144 Summing Node D Scale 1 .......................... 5-48, 6-143
Square Root B Input....................................5-49, 6-144 Summing Node D Scale 2 .......................... 5-48, 6-143
Square Root of Input A................................5-49, 6-144 Summing Node E Input 1............................ 5-49, 6-143
Square Root of Input B................................5-49, 6-145 Summing Node E Input 2............................ 5-49, 6-143
S-Shape Range......................................................5-10 Summing Node E Mode.............................. 5-49, 6-144
Stability Gain ..........................................5-5, 6-21, 6-22 Summing Node E Output............................ 5-49, 6-143
Stability Time Constant ...................................5-5, 6-22 Summing Node E Scale 1........................... 5-49, 6-143
Start and Stop Control...................... 5-1, 5-7, 6-1, 6-24 Summing Node E Scale 2........................... 5-49, 6-143
Start Mode ....................................... 4-5, 5-7, 6-1, 6-24 Summing Node F Input 1............................ 5-49, 6-143
Stator Leakage Inductance ... 5-5, 5-18, 6-63, 6-198, 6- Summing Node F Input 2............................ 5-49, 6-143
199, 11-3 Summing Node F Mode.............................. 5-49, 6-144
Stator Resistance.. 5-5, 5-18, 6-20, 6-21, 6-62, 6-63, 6- Summing Node F Output ............................ 5-49, 6-143
69, 6-198, 6-199, 11-3, 12-3
Summing Node F Scale 1........................... 5-49, 6-143
Status Flag Generator Mode .......................5-36, 6-117
Summing Node F Scale 2........................... 5-49, 6-143
Status Flag Generator Settings .... 5-1, 5-36, 6-3, 6-117
Summing Node G Input 1 ........................... 5-49, 6-143
Status Flag Generator Start Point .......................... 5-36
Summing Node G Input 2 ........................... 5-49, 6-143
Status Flags 0-15 .................................5-16, 6-56, 8-10
Summing Node G Mode ............................. 5-49, 6-144
Status Flags 112-127 .........................5-17, 6-56, 11-13
Summing Node G Output ........................... 5-49, 6-143
Status Flags 128-143 .........................5-17, 6-56, 11-13
Summing Node G Scale 1 .......................... 5-49, 6-143
Status Flags 16-31 ...............................5-16, 6-56, 8-10
Summing Node G Scale 2 .......................... 5-49, 6-143
Status Flags 32-47 ...............................5-16, 6-56, 8-10
Summing Node H Input 1 ........................... 5-49, 6-143
Status Flags 48-63 ...............................5-16, 6-56, 8-10
Summing Node H Input 2 ........................... 5-49, 6-143
Status Flags 64-79 ........................................5-16, 6-56
Summing Node H Mode ............................. 5-49, 6-144
Status Flags 96-111 .............................5-16, 6-39, 6-56
Summing Node H Output............................ 5-49, 6-143
Status Word 0 Output........................................... 6-148
Summing Node H Scale 1 .......................... 5-49, 6-143
Status Word 1 Output........................................... 6-148
Summing Node H Scale 2 .......................... 5-49, 6-143
Stop Time Limit ...............................................5-7, 6-27
Summing Nodes Settings ............. 5-1, 5-48, 6-4, 6-143
Summing Node A Input 1 ............................5-48, 6-143
Supply Inductance Compensation .............. 5-62, 6-178
Summing Node A Input 2 ............................5-48, 6-143
Supply Loss Timeout .................................. 5-32, 6-108
Summing Node A mode ....................................... 6-144
Switch A

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Index Page 19
Menu and Parameter Title Index ALSPA MV3000e

Fixed Reference A1 ............................... 5-51, 6-146 Torque Reference . 5-1, 5-17, 5-22, 5-23, 5-70, 5-84, 6-
Fixed Reference A2 ............................... 5-51, 6-147 2, 6-58, 6-80, 6-81, 6-129, 6-150, 8-1, 8-9, 8-12
Input 1 ........................................... 5-50, 5-86, 6-146 Torque Reference Scale Factor ...........5-22, 6-80, 8-12
Input 2 ........................................... 5-51, 5-86, 6-146
Output .................................................... 5-51, 6-147 Torque Reference Settings (Vector Only) ..5-1, 5-22, 6-
State.............................................. 5-51, 5-86, 6-147 2, 6-80
Switch B Torque Reference Source ....................5-23, 6-80, 8-12
Fixed Reference A1 ............................... 5-51, 6-146 Total Energy Consumed kWh .......................5-15, 6-54
Fixed Reference A2 ............................... 5-51, 6-147 Total Energy Consumed MWh ......................5-16, 6-54
Input 1 ........................................... 5-51, 5-86, 6-146
Tr Period .........................................................5-7, 6-25
Input 2 ........................................... 5-51, 5-86, 6-146
Output .................................................... 5-51, 6-147 Trigger Parameter .......................................5-30, 6-105
State.............................................. 5-51, 5-86, 6-147 Trim Reference Input A .................................5-26, 6-88
Switch C Trim Reference Input B .................................5-26, 6-88
Fixed Reference A1 ............................... 5-51, 6-146 Trim Reference Output..................................5-26, 6-88
Fixed Reference A2 ............................... 5-51, 6-147
Input 1 ........................................... 5-51, 5-86, 6-146 Trim Reference Scale A ................................5-26, 6-88
Input 2 ........................................... 5-51, 5-86, 6-146 Trim Reference Scale B ................................5-26, 6-88
Output .................................................... 5-51, 6-147 Trim Reference Settings ................ 5-1, 5-26, 6-2, 6-88
State.............................................. 5-51, 5-86, 6-147
Trip Avoidance Threshold ........ 5-10, 6-39, 6-199, 11-3
Switch D
Trip History 1 to 10........................................5-13, 6-49
Fixed Reference A1 ............................... 5-51, 6-146
Fixed Reference A2 ............................... 5-51, 6-147 Trip Numbers 1 to 10 ............................................. 6-49
Input 1 ........................................... 5-51, 5-86, 6-146 Trips and Warnings . 5-1, 5-13, 6-1, 6-2, 6-49, 6-50, 11-
Input 2 ........................................... 5-51, 5-86, 6-146 12
Output .................................................... 5-51, 6-147
State.............................................. 5-51, 5-86, 6-147
Synchrostart Current ...................................... 5-7, 6-24
U
Synchrostart Maximum Speed........................ 5-7, 6-25 Unclamped Id Demand Source ...................5-67, 6-189
Synchrostart Minimum Speed......................... 5-7, 6-25 Upload Template...................... 5-74, 6-5, 6-196, 6-199
Synchrostart Mode ......................................... 5-7, 6-24 Upper Trigger Level ....................................5-30, 6-105
Synchrostart Scan Rate.................................. 5-7, 6-25 User Action 1........................................5-14, 5-15, 6-51
User Action 10...............................................5-15, 6-51
T User Action 2.................................................5-14, 6-51
User Action 3.................................................5-14, 6-51
Tacho Feedback Scale ................................. 5-21, 6-72
User Action 4.................................................5-14, 6-51
Tacho Feedback Source .............................. 5-21, 6-72
User Action 5.................................................5-14, 6-51
Tacho Feedback Time Constant................... 5-21, 6-72
User Action 6.................................................5-14, 6-51
Taper Limit............................................................. 5-20
User Action 7.................................................5-14, 6-51
Temperature ................................. 5-1, 5-53, 6-4, 6-156
User Action 8.................................................5-15, 6-51
Temperature at Warn/Trip .......................... 5-54, 6-157
User Action 9.................................................5-15, 6-51
Temperature Compensation Estimate .......... 5-18, 6-65
User Configurable Menu (Menu 1) Settings ...5-1, 5-47,
Temperature Compensation Gain ......................... 6-65 6-4, 6-142
Temperature Compensation Scale Source... 5-18, 6-64 User Menu Configuration ..............................6-4, 6-142
Temperature Warn/Trip Cause ................... 5-54, 6-157 User Page 1 Parameters 1 to 20...................5-37, 8-16
Temperature Warn/Trip Type ..................... 5-54, 6-156 User Page 1 Size ...................................5-37, 8-1, 8-16
Time at State 0 ........................................... 5-36, 6-118 User Page 1, Parameters 1 to 20....................8-1, 8-16
Timed Overcurrent Auto-reset Enable ........ 5-32, 6-107 User Page 2 Parameters 1 to 20...................5-38, 8-16
Torque Current Reference Source .......................... 5-6 User Page 2 Size ...................................5-38, 8-1, 8-16
Torque Demand...5-13, 5-22, 5-23, 5-52, 6-47, 6-80, 6- User Text Language..................... 4-5, 5-74, 6-5, 6-196
83, 6-152, 8-12
User Trip Auto-reset Enable........................5-32, 6-108
Torque Demand Slew Rate .......................... 5-22, 6-80
Torque Limit.................................................. 5-13, 6-45
Torque Limit Cut-in Frequency ....................... 5-5, 6-20
V
Torque Limit Response Speed ....................... 5-5, 6-20 Variable Boost Output .....................................5-6, 6-17
Torque Limit Settings...................... 5-1, 5-12, 6-1, 6-45 Variable Volts Boost............ 5-6, 6-1, 6-16, 6-17, 6-150
Torque Monitor Hysteresis.......................... 5-33, 6-111 Variable Volts Boost Source............................5-6, 6-16
Torque Monitor Level 1............................... 5-33, 6-111 Vd Mains ..........................................5-66, 6-177, 6-186
Torque Monitor Level 2............................... 5-33, 6-111 Vdc Controller Bandwidth....... 5-55, 5-62, 6-159, 6-178

Index Page 20 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e Menu and Parameter Title Index

Vdc controller Current Demand...................5-61, 6-176 VVVF Stator Resistance ........................ 5-5, 6-21, 11-3
Vdc Controller Gain Adjust ..........................5-62, 6-178
Vdc Controller Gains ...................................5-55, 6-160 W
Vdc Feedback Source.................................5-63, 6-181
Warning Numbers 1 to 10...................................... 6-49
Vdc Reference Scale ........................................... 6-181
Warning on Backup ........................................ 5-8, 6-31
Vdc Reference Source ......................................... 6-180
Vector Fluxing Mode 5-19, 6-58, 6-67, 6-158, 9-11, 10-
1, 10-8, 11-4 Z
Vq Mains .................................5-62, 5-66, 6-177, 6-186 Zero Position Tolerance High .............................. 6-130
VVVF – Sync PF Demand........................................ 5-7 Zero Position Tolerance Low ............................... 6-130
VVVF – Sync PF Ki .................................................. 5-7 Zero Speed Hold Time.................................... 5-7, 6-27
VVVF – Sync PF Kp................................................. 5-7 Zero Speed Tolerance ................................ 5-33, 6-111
VVVF Magnetising Resistance...............5-5, 6-21, 11-3
VVVF Modulation Limit................... 5-6, 6-1, 6-22, 11-4
VVVF Stator Leakage Inductance ..........5-5, 6-21, 11-3

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Index Page 21
Menu and Parameter Title Index ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Index Page 22 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e Parameter Number Index

Parameter Number Index

P42.00 to P42.75 ............................................ 5-1, 5-52

P P43.00 to P43.20 .......................... 5-1, 5-52, 6-4, 6-152
P44.00 to P44.20 .......................... 5-1, 5-53, 6-4, 6-154
P1.31 to P1.32 ..................................................4-1, 4-4
P45.00 to P45.27 .......................... 5-1, 5-53, 6-4, 6-156
P10.00 to P10.59 ........................... 5-1, 5-13, 6-1, 6-49
P46.00 to P46.23 ................................. 5-1, 5-55, 6-158
P11.00 to P11.77 ................ 5-1, 5-15, 6-2, 6-52, 11-13
P47.00 to P47.91 ...................... 5-1, 5-55, 6-161, 11-12
P12.00 to P12.53 ................ 5-1, 5-18, 6-2, 6-60, 11-10
P5.00 to P5.28 ..................................5-1, 5-8, 6-1, 6-31
P13.00 to P13.20 ........................... 5-1, 5-20, 6-2, 6-71
P50.00 to P50.09 ............................................ 5-1, 5-60
P14.00 to P14.21 ........................... 5-1, 5-21, 6-2, 6-76
P51.00 to P51.23 .......................... 5-1, 5-61, 6-4, 6-176
P15.00 to P15.05 ........................... 5-1, 5-22, 6-2, 6-80
P52.00 to P52.63 ............................................ 5-1, 5-62
P16.00 to P16.11 ........................... 5-1, 5-23, 6-2, 6-82
P53.00 to P53.22 .......................... 5-2, 5-63, 6-4, 6-180
P17.00 to P17.21 ........................... 5-1, 5-24, 6-2, 6-85
P54.00 to P54.57 ................................. 5-2, 5-66, 11-10
P18.00 to P18.07 ........................... 5-1, 5-25, 6-2, 6-87
P55.00 to P55.21 .......................... 5-2, 5-67, 6-4, 6-188
P19.00 to P19.04 ........................... 5-1, 5-26, 6-2, 6-88
P56.00 to P56.12 ............................................ 5-2, 5-67
P2.00 to P2.15 ................................... 5-1, 5-4, 6-1, 6-9
P58.00 to P58.84 ............................................ 5-2, 5-67
P20.00 to P20.03 ........................... 5-1, 5-26, 6-2, 6-89
P59.00 to P59.84 ............................................ 5-2, 5-68
P21.00 to P21.20 ........................... 5-1, 5-26, 6-3, 6-94
P6.00 to P6.36 ..................................5-1, 5-9, 6-1, 6-37
P22.00 to P22.07 ........................... 5-1, 5-27, 6-3, 6-95
P60.00 to P60.29 ............................................ 5-2, 5-68
P23.00 to P23.23 ........................... 5-1, 5-27, 6-3, 6-96
P61.00 to P61.66 ............................................ 5-2, 5-68
P24.00 to P24.05 ......................... 5-1, 5-29, 6-3, 6-101
P62.00 to P62.99 ............................................ 5-2, 5-68
P25.00 to P25.04 ......................... 5-1, 5-29, 6-3, 6-102
P63.00 to P63.99 ............................................ 5-2, 5-68
P26.00 to P26.31 ......................... 5-1, 5-30, 6-3, 6-103
P65.00 to P65.50 ............................................ 5-2, 5-68
P27.00 to P27.12 ......................... 5-1, 5-31, 6-3, 6-107
P66.00 to P66.99 ............................................ 5-2, 5-68
P28.00 to P28.20 ......................... 5-1, 5-32, 6-3, 6-107
P67.00 to P67.99 ............................................ 5-2, 5-68
P29.00 to P29.09 ......................... 5-1, 5-33, 6-3, 6-110
P7.00 to P7.29 ................................ 5-1, 5-11, 6-1, 6-41
P3.00 to P3.32 ................................. 5-1, 5-5, 6-1, 6-13
P70.99 to P72.10 ............................................ 5-2, 5-68
P30.00 to P30.67 ......................... 5-1, 5-33, 6-3, 6-112
P74.00 to P74.89 ............................................ 5-2, 5-68
P31.00 to P31.22 ......................... 5-1, 5-36, 6-3, 6-117
P75.00 to P75.46 ............................................ 5-2, 5-68
P32.00 to P32.94 ......................... 5-1, 5-36, 6-3, 6-119
P78.00 to P78.34 ............................................ 5-2, 5-69
P33.00 to P33.99 ......................... 5-1, 5-39, 6-3, 6-121
P8.00 to P8.11 ................................ 5-1, 5-12, 6-1, 6-45
P34.00 to P34.27 ......................... 5-1, 5-39, 6-3, 6-121
P80.00 to P85.87 ............................................ 5-2, 5-69
P35.00 to P35.31 ......................... 5-1, 5-39, 6-3, 6-122
P86.00 to P86.83 ............................................ 5-2, 5-69
P36.00 to P36.55 ......................... 5-1, 5-42, 6-3, 6-128
P89.00 to P89.32 ............................................ 5-2, 5-69
P37.00 to P37.41 ......................... 5-1, 5-45, 6-3, 6-138
P9.00 to P9.11 ................................ 5-1, 5-13, 6-1, 6-47
P38.00 to P38.12 ......................... 5-1, 5-46, 6-3, 6-140
P90.00 to P90.99 ............................................ 5-2, 5-69
P39.00 to P39.30 ......................... 5-1, 5-47, 6-4, 6-142
P91.00 to P91.16 ............................................ 5-2, 5-69
P4.00 to P4.28 ................................. 5-1, 5-7, 6-1, 6-24
P98.00 to P98.99 .......................... 5-2, 5-70, 6-4, 6-191
P40.00 to P40.99 ......................... 5-1, 5-48, 6-4, 6-143
P99.00 to P99.17 .......................... 5-2, 5-73, 6-4, 6-193
P41.00 to P41.33 ......................... 5-1, 5-51, 6-4, 6-148

Issue (06/06) ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Index Page 23
Parameter Number Index ALSPA MV3000e

This page intentionally left blank

Index Page 24 ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual (T1679EN) Issue 06/06
ALSPA MV3000e Software Technical Manual.

The logo CONVERTEAM and their frameworks are trademarks and service trademark applications of CONVERTEAM.
Converteam

France
9, rue Ampère
91345 Massy Cedex
Sales Tel: +33 (0) 8 25 02 11 02
International):

Other names mentioned, registered or not, are the property of their respective companies.
+33 (0) 3 84 55 33 33
Support Tel. (National):
08 25 02 11 02

Germany
Culemeyerstraße 1
D-12277 Berlin
Sales Tel: +49 (0) 30 74 96 27 27
Support Tel (International):
+49 (0) 69 66 99 831
© Converteam UK Ltd - 2006 - Publication No. T1679EN.

Support Tel (National):

01 80 3 23 45 72

UK
West Avenue, Kidsgrove, Stoke-on
Trent, Staffordshire, ST7 1TW
Sales Tel: +44 (0) 1782 781010
Support Tel: +44 (0) 1782 781010

USA
610 Epsilon Drive
Pittsburgh, PA 15238
Sales Tel: +1 412 967 0765
Support Tel: +1 800 800 5290
 Converteam Ltd
West Avenue, Kidsgrove
Stoke-on-Trent, ST7 1TW (UK)
Tel: +44(0)1782 781000
Fax: +44(0)1782 781001
a Converteam Group company www.converteam.com

MV3000e A.C. DRIVES

Price List 2006